Panasonic KX TDA50/100/200/600 PC Programming Manual KXTDA 50 100 200 600

User Manual: Panasonic KX-TDA50/100/200/600 PC Programming Manual Panasonic KX-TDA50G/100-200/30-600 Telephones System - Telecomuserguides.com

Open the PDF directly: View PDF PDF.
Page Count: 834 [warning: Documents this large are best viewed by clicking the View PDF Link!]

Thank you for purchasing a Panasonic Hybrid IP-PBX.
Please read this manual carefully before using this product and save this manual for future use.
KX-TDA50: PSMPR Software File Version 6.0000 or later
KX-TDA100/KX-TDA200: PMPR Software File Version 5.0000 or later
KX-TDA600: PLMPR Software File Version 5.0000 or later Document Version: 2010-11
Hybrid IP-PBX
PC Programming Manual
Model No.
KX-TDA50/KX-TDA100
KX-TDA200/KX-TDA600
Introduction
About this Programming Manual
The PC Programming Manual is designed to serve as a system programming reference for the Panasonic
Hybrid IP-PBX. It explains how to program this PBX using the Maintenance Console software.
The PC Programming Manual is divided into the following sections:
Section 1, Overview
Provides an overview of programming the PBX.
Section 2, Introduction of Maintenance Console
Explains the layout and menus of the Maintenance Console.
Sections 3 – 13, Maintenance Console Operating Instructions
Serves as reference operating instructions when using the Maintenance Console software to program the PBX.
Section 14, Appendix
Provides a list of all related PC programming items for each feature as Feature Programming References.
References Found in the PC Programming Manual
Programming Manual References
Related sections of the PC Programming Manual are listed for your reference.
Feature Manual References
The Feature Manual explains what the PBX can do, as well as how to obtain the most of its many features and
facilities. Sections from the Feature Manual are listed throughout this manual for your reference.
Installation Manual References
The Installation Manual provides instructions detailing the installation and maintenance of the PBX.
Sections from the Installation Manual are listed throughout this manual for your reference.
Links to Other Pages and Manuals
If you are viewing this manual with a PC, certain items are linked to different sections of this and other PBX
manuals. Click on a link to jump to that section.
Linked items include:
•Installation Manual References
•PC Programming Manual References
•Feature Manual References
Safety Notices
Please observe the safety notices in this manual in order to avoid danger to users or other people, and prevent
damage to property.
The notices are classified as follows, according to the severity of injury or damage:
WARNING This notice means that misuse could result in death or serious injury.
2 PC Programming Manual Document Version 2010-11
Introduction
CAUTION This notice means that misuse could result in injury or damage to property.
WARNING
Unplug the PBX from the AC outlet if it emits smoke, an abnormal smell or makes unusual noise.
These conditions can cause fire or electric shock. Confirm that smoke has stopped and contact an
authorized Panasonic Factory Service Center.
CAUTION
Do not remove the SD Memory Card while power is supplied to the PBX. Doing so may cause the PBX to
fail to start when you try to restart the system.
Note
1. During a long programming session, it is highly recommended that you periodically save the system
data to the SD Memory Card. If the PBX undergoes a sudden power failure or if the system is reset for
some reason, all the system data in RAM will be lost. However, if system data has been saved to the
SD Memory Card, it can be easily restored.
To save the system data to the SD Memory Card, (1) click the "SD Memory Backup" icon before
resetting the PBX or turning off the power, or (2) exit the Maintenance Console so that the PBX
automatically saves the system data.
2. The PC will not perform any shutdown operation, or enter the power-saving system standby mode
while the Maintenance Console is connected to the PBX.
To perform either of the operations above, first close the connection to the PBX.
Trademarks
•Microsoft, Windows, and Windows Vista are either registered trademarks or trademarks of Microsoft
Corporation in the United States and/or other countries.
•All other trademarks identified herein are the property of their respective owners.
•Microsoft product screen shot(s) reprinted with permission from Microsoft Corporation.
NOTES
•The contents of this manual apply to PBXs with a certain software version, as indicated on the cover of
this manual. To confirm the software version of your PBX, see How do I confirm the software version
of the PBX or installed cards? in Maintenance Console Software in 2.7.1 Frequently Asked
Questions (FAQ).
•Some optional hardware, software, and features are not available in some areas, or for some PBX models.
Please consult your certified Panasonic dealer for more information.
•Product specifications are subject to change without notice.
In some cases, additional information, including updates to this and other manuals, is included in the
Maintenance Console’s Information before programming. Install the latest version of Maintenance
Console to view this information.
•In this manual, model number suffixes (e.g., KX-TDA50G) are omitted unless necessary.
Document Version 2010-11 PC Programming Manual 3
Introduction
Table of Contents
1Overview ...................................................................................................9
1.1 Introduction .....................................................................................................................10
1.1.1 Introduction .....................................................................................................................10
1.1.2 Entering Characters .......................................................................................................11
1.2 PC Programming .............................................................................................................12
1.2.1 Installing and Starting the Maintenance Console ...........................................................12
1.2.2 Password Security ..........................................................................................................14
2 Introduction of Maintenance Console ..................................................15
2.1 Introduction .....................................................................................................................16
2.1.1 Starting Maintenance Console and Software Modes .....................................................16
2.1.2 Access Levels ................................................................................................................18
2.1.3 Software Interface ..........................................................................................................22
2.1.4 Card Status ....................................................................................................................24
2.1.5 Display Options ..............................................................................................................24
2.1.6 Extension Number Setting ..............................................................................................25
2.2 Program launcher ...........................................................................................................27
2.2.1 Program launcher—New ................................................................................................27
2.2.2 Program launcher—Open ..............................................................................................27
2.2.3 Program launcher—Connect—RS-232C .......................................................................27
2.2.4 Program launcher—Connect—USB ...............................................................................28
2.2.5 Program launcher—Connect—LAN ...............................................................................29
2.2.6 Program launcher—Connect—Modem ..........................................................................29
2.2.7 Program launcher—Connect—Profile Setup ..................................................................30
2.3 File ....................................................................................................................................32
2.3.1 File—Close .....................................................................................................................32
2.3.2 File—Save ......................................................................................................................32
2.3.3 File—Save As .................................................................................................................32
2.3.4 File—Exit ........................................................................................................................32
2.4 Disconnect .......................................................................................................................33
2.4.1 Disconnect—Disconnect ................................................................................................33
2.5 Tool ...................................................................................................................................34
2.5.1 Tool—SD memory backup .............................................................................................34
2.5.2 Tool—NDSS Link Data Clear .........................................................................................34
2.5.3 Tool—DXDP All OUS .....................................................................................................34
2.5.4 Tool—Simplified Voice Message—Delete All Recording ...............................................34
2.5.5 Tool—Simplified Voice Message—Check Current Usage .............................................34
2.5.6 Tool—Call Pickup for My Group .....................................................................................35
2.5.7 Tool—Extension List View ..............................................................................................35
2.5.8 Tool—Import ...................................................................................................................36
2.5.9 Tool—Export ..................................................................................................................38
2.5.10 Tool—Screen Customize—User Level/Administrator Level ...........................................39
2.6 Utility ................................................................................................................................40
2.6.1 Utility—Diagnosis ...........................................................................................................40
2.6.2 Utility—File Transfer PC to PBX (SD Card) ...................................................................43
2.6.3 Utility—File Transfer PBX (SD Card) to PC ...................................................................47
2.6.4 Utility—SD Card File View and Load ..............................................................................48
2.6.5 Utility—SD Card File Delete ...........................................................................................48
2.6.6 Utility—Message File Transfer PC to PBX .....................................................................49
2.6.7 Utility—Message File Transfer PBX to PC .....................................................................49
2.6.8 Utility—Error Log ............................................................................................................49
2.6.9 Utility—T1 Signaling Bit Monitor (KX-TDA100/KX-TDA200/KX-TDA600 only) ..............51
4 PC Programming Manual Document Version 2010-11
Table of Contents
2.6.10 Utility—T1 Line Trace (KX-TDA100/KX-TDA200/KX-TDA600 only) ..............................52
2.6.11 Utility—ISDN/QSIG Protocol Trace ................................................................................52
2.6.12 Utility—Digital Trunk Error Report (KX-TDA100/KX-TDA200/KX-TDA600 only) ...........52
2.6.13 Utility—IP Extension Statistical Information ...................................................................53
2.6.14 Utility—CS Information ...................................................................................................54
2.6.15 Utility—PS Information ...................................................................................................55
2.6.16 Utility—Timed Update (KX-TDA100/KX-TDA200/KX-TDA600 only) ..............................56
2.6.17 Utility—System Reset—Reset by the Command ...........................................................57
2.6.18 Utility—Flash ROM ID Information .................................................................................58
2.7 Help ..................................................................................................................................59
2.7.1 Frequently Asked Questions (FAQ) ...............................................................................59
3 [1] Configuration ....................................................................................69
3.1 [1-1] Slot ...........................................................................................................................70
3.2 [1-1] Slot—Summary .......................................................................................................75
3.3 [1-1] Slot—Card Property - MPR ....................................................................................79
3.4 [1-1] Slot—Card Property - Extension Type .................................................................81
3.5 [1-1] Slot—Port Property - Extension Port ....................................................................87
3.6 [1-1] Slot—Port Property - Extension Port—Connection Command ..........................96
3.7 [1-1] Slot—Port Property - Extension Port—Port Type View ......................................97
3.8 [1-1] Slot—Port Property - CSI/F Port (KX-TDA100/KX-TDA200/KX-TDA600
only) ..................................................................................................................................99
3.9 [1-1] Slot—Port Property - CSI/F Port—Connection Command (KX-TDA100/
KX-TDA200/KX-TDA600 only) ......................................................................................102
3.10 [1-1] Slot—Card Property - LCO type ..........................................................................103
3.11 [1-1] Slot—Port Property - LCO Port ...........................................................................113
3.12 [1-1] Slot—Port Property - LCO Port—Connection Command .................................120
3.13 [1-1] Slot—Card Property - PRI type (KX-TDA100/KX-TDA200/KX-TDA600
only) ................................................................................................................................121
3.14 [1-1] Slot—Port Property - PRI Port (KX-TDA100/KX-TDA200/KX-TDA600
only) ................................................................................................................................137
3.15 [1-1] Slot—Port Property - PRI Port—Connection Command (KX-TDA100/
KX-TDA200/KX-TDA600 only) ......................................................................................160
3.16 [1-1] Slot—Card Property - T1 type (KX-TDA100/KX-TDA200/KX-TDA600
only) ................................................................................................................................161
3.17 [1-1] Slot—Port Property - T1 Port (KX-TDA100/KX-TDA200/KX-TDA600
only) ................................................................................................................................173
3.18 [1-1] Slot—Port Property - T1 Port—Connection Command (KX-TDA100/KX-TDA200/
KX-TDA600 only) ...........................................................................................................183
3.19 [1-1] Slot—Card Property - IP Gateway .......................................................................184
3.20 [1-1] Slot—Port Property - IP-GW Port ........................................................................187
3.21 [1-1] Slot—Port Property - IP-GW Port—Connection Command ..............................189
3.22 [1-1] Slot—Card Property - IP Extension ....................................................................190
3.23 [1-1] Slot—Card Property - IP Extension—Common Settings ..................................195
3.24 [1-1] Slot—Port Property - IP-Extension Port .............................................................197
3.25 [1-1] Slot—Card Property - SIP Gateway (KX-TDA50 only) .......................................204
3.26 [1-1] Slot—SIP-GW Port Property (KX-TDA50 only) ...................................................205
3.27 [1-1] Slot—OPB3 Card Property (KX-TDA100/KX-TDA200/KX-TDA600 only) ..........208
3.28 [1-1] Slot—OPB3 Card Property—Card Command (KX-TDA100/KX-TDA200/
KX-TDA600 only) ...........................................................................................................214
3.29 [1-1] Slot—OPB3 Option Card Setup (KX-TDA100/KX-TDA200/KX-TDA600
only) ................................................................................................................................217
3.30 [1-1] Slot—Card Property - CTILINK (KX-TDA100/KX-TDA200/KX-TDA600
only) ................................................................................................................................219
3.31 [1-1] Slot—Card Property - DPH type (KX-TDA50 only) .............................................222
Document Version 2010-11 PC Programming Manual 5
Table of Contents
3.32 [1-1] Slot—Card Property - DPH type—Connection Command (KX-TDA50
only) ................................................................................................................................225
3.33 [1-1] Slot—Card Property - ESVM Type (KX-TDA50 only) .........................................226
3.34 [1-2] Portable Station ....................................................................................................228
3.35 [1-3] Option ....................................................................................................................232
3.36 [1-4] Clock Priority (KX-TDA100/KX-TDA200/KX-TDA600) ........................................235
4 [2] System .............................................................................................237
4.1 [2-1] Date & Time/Daylight Saving ...............................................................................238
4.2 [2-1] Date & Time/Daylight Saving—Date & Time Setting .........................................241
4.3 [2-2] Operator & BGM ...................................................................................................242
4.4 [2-3] Timers & Counters ...............................................................................................245
4.5 [2-4] Week Table ............................................................................................................269
4.6 [2-4] Week Table—Time Setting ...................................................................................270
4.7 [2-5] Holiday Table ........................................................................................................273
4.8 [2-6-1] Numbering Plan—Main .....................................................................................276
4.9 [2-6-2] Numbering Plan—Quick Dial ............................................................................308
4.10 [2-6-3] Numbering Plan—B/NA DND Call Feature ......................................................310
4.11 [2-7-1] Class of Service—COS Settings ......................................................................314
4.12 [2-7-2] Class of Service—External Call Block ............................................................331
4.13 [2-7-3] Class of Service—Internal Call Block ..............................................................332
4.14 [2-8-1] Ring Tone Patterns—Call from CO ..................................................................333
4.15 [2-8-2] Ring Tone Patterns—Call from Doorphone ....................................................334
4.16 [2-8-3] Ring Tone Patterns—Call from Others ............................................................335
4.17 [2-9] System Options ....................................................................................................338
4.18 [2-10] Extension CID Settings ......................................................................................370
4.19 [2-11-1] Audio Gain—Paging/MOH ..............................................................................375
4.20 [2-11-2] Audio Gain—Card ...........................................................................................379
5 [3] Group ...............................................................................................381
5.1 [3-1-1] Trunk Group—TRG Settings ............................................................................382
5.2 [3-1-2] Trunk Group—Local Access Priority ..............................................................390
5.3 [3-1-3] Caller ID Modification ........................................................................................391
5.4 [3-1-4] Dialing Plan ........................................................................................................397
5.5 [3-1-4] Dialing Plan—Auto Assign ...............................................................................399
5.6 [3-2] Extension Group ...................................................................................................400
5.7 [3-3] Call Pickup Group ................................................................................................402
5.8 [3-3] Call Pickup Group—All Setting ...........................................................................404
5.9 [3-4] Paging Group ........................................................................................................406
5.10 [3-4] Paging Group—All Setting ..................................................................................408
5.11 [3-4] Paging Group—External Pager ...........................................................................410
5.12 [3-5-1] Incoming Call Distribution Group—Group Settings ......................................412
5.13 [3-5-1] Incoming Call Distribution Group—Group Settings—Member List .............430
5.14 [3-5-2] Incoming Call Distribution Group—Queuing Time Table ..............................433
5.15 [3-5-3] Incoming Call Distribution Group—Miscellaneous ........................................434
5.16 [3-6] Extension Hunting Group ....................................................................................437
5.17 [3-6] Extension Hunting Group—Member List ...........................................................439
5.18 [3-7-1] VM(DPT) Group—System Settings ..................................................................440
5.19 [3-7-2] VM(DPT) Group—Unit Settings ........................................................................442
5.20 [3-7-2] VM(DPT) Group—Unit Settings—Member List ...............................................444
5.21 [3-8-1] VM(DTMF) Group—System Settings ...............................................................448
5.22 [3-8-2] VM(DTMF) Group—Group Settings .................................................................459
5.23 [3-8-2] VM(DTMF) Group—Group Settings—Member List ........................................461
5.24 [3-9] PS Ring Group ......................................................................................................462
5.25 [3-9] PS Ring Group—Member List .............................................................................464
6 PC Programming Manual Document Version 2010-11
Table of Contents
5.26 [3-10] Conference Group (KX-TDA50 only) .................................................................466
5.27 [3-10] Conference Group—Member List (KX-TDA50 only) ........................................467
6 [4] Extension .........................................................................................469
6.1 [4-1-1] Wired Extension—Extension Settings ............................................................470
6.2 [4-1-1] Wired Extension—Extension Settings—CLIP Generate ................................532
6.3 [4-1-2] Wired Extension—FWD/DND ............................................................................535
6.4 [4-1-3] Wired Extension—Speed Dial ..........................................................................540
6.5 [4-1-4] Wired Extension—Flexible Button ...................................................................542
6.6 [4-1-4] Wired Extension—Flexible Button—Flexible button data copy ....................561
6.7 [4-1-5] Wired Extension—PF Button ...........................................................................562
6.8 [4-1-6] Wired Extension—NDSS Link Data - Send .....................................................563
6.9 [4-1-7] Wired Extension—Simplified Voice Message .................................................564
6.10 [4-2-1] Portable Station—Extension Settings .............................................................567
6.11 [4-2-1] Portable Station—Extension Settings—CLIP Generate ................................602
6.12 [4-2-2] Portable Station—FWD/DND ............................................................................605
6.13 [4-2-3] Portable Station—Flexible Button ...................................................................610
6.14 [4-2-3] Portable Station—Flexible Button—Flexible button data copy ....................625
6.15 [4-2-4] Portable Station—NDSS Link Data - Send ......................................................626
6.16 [4-2-5] Portable Station—Simplified Voice Message .................................................627
6.17 [4-2-6] Portable Station—Single CO Appearance (KX-TDA50 only) .........................630
6.18 [4-3] DSS Console .........................................................................................................631
6.19 [4-3] DSS Console—DSS key data copy .....................................................................650
7 [5] Optional Device ...............................................................................651
7.1 [5-1] Doorphone ............................................................................................................652
7.2 [5-2] External Pager ......................................................................................................656
7.3 [5-3-1] Voice Message—DISA System .........................................................................658
7.4 [5-3-2] Voice Message—DISA Message ......................................................................667
7.5 [5-3-3] Voice Message—SVM .......................................................................................670
7.6 [5-4] External Relay .......................................................................................................675
7.7 [5-5] External Sensor ....................................................................................................679
8 [6] Feature .............................................................................................683
8.1 [6-1] System Speed Dial ...............................................................................................684
8.2 [6-2] Hotel .......................................................................................................................687
8.3 [6-3] Verification Code ..................................................................................................689
8.4 [6-4] Second Dial Tone .................................................................................................692
8.5 [6-5] Absent Message ...................................................................................................693
8.6 [6-6] Tenant ....................................................................................................................694
9 [7] TRS ...................................................................................................697
9.1 [7-1] Denied Code ..........................................................................................................698
9.2 [7-2] Exception Code ....................................................................................................699
9.3 [7-3] Special Carrier ......................................................................................................700
9.4 [7-4] Emergency Dial .....................................................................................................701
9.5 [7-5] Miscellaneous .......................................................................................................702
10 [8] ARS ..................................................................................................705
10.1 [8-1] System Setting ......................................................................................................706
10.2 [8-2] Leading Number ...................................................................................................708
10.3 [8-3] Routing Plan Time ................................................................................................710
10.4 [8-3] Routing Plan Time—Time Setting .......................................................................711
10.5 [8-4] Routing Plan Priority ............................................................................................712
10.6 [8-5] Carrier ....................................................................................................................713
Document Version 2010-11 PC Programming Manual 7
Table of Contents
10.7 [8-6] Leading Number Exception .................................................................................717
10.8 [8-7] Authorization Code for TRG ................................................................................718
11 [9] Private Network ...............................................................................719
11.1 [9-1] TIE Table ................................................................................................................720
11.2 [9-2] Network Data Transmission ................................................................................724
11.3 [9-3] Network Operator (VoIP) ......................................................................................728
11.4 [9-4] NDSS Key Table ....................................................................................................730
12 [10] CO & Incoming Call ......................................................................733
12.1 [10-1] CO Line Settings .................................................................................................734
12.2 [10-2] DIL Table & Port Settings ..................................................................................737
12.3 [10-3] DID Table .............................................................................................................749
12.4 [10-3] DID Table—Automatic Registration ..................................................................753
12.5 [10-3] DID Table—Name Generate ...............................................................................755
12.6 [10-4] Miscellaneous .....................................................................................................758
13 [11] Maintenance ..................................................................................761
13.1 [11-1] Main .....................................................................................................................762
13.2 [11-2] PT Programming Access ...................................................................................782
13.3 [11-3] Power Failure Transfer (KX-TDA100/KX-TDA200/KX-TDA600 only) ..............783
14 Appendix ...............................................................................................785
14.1 Revision History ............................................................................................................786
14.1.1 KX-TDA600 PLMPR Software File Version 5.0xxx ......................................................786
14.1.2 KX-TDA100/KX-TDA200 PMPR Software File Version 3.2xxx ....................................786
14.1.3 KX-TDA100/KX-TDA200 PMPR Software File Version 5.0xxx ....................................787
14.1.4 KX-TDA50 PSMPR Software File Version 4.0xxx ........................................................788
14.1.5 KX-TDA50 PSMPR Software File Version 5.0xxx ........................................................789
14.1.6 KX-TDA50 PSMPR Software File Version 6.0xxx ........................................................790
14.2 Feature Programming References ..............................................................................791
8 PC Programming Manual Document Version 2010-11
Table of Contents
Section 1
Overview
This section provides an overview of programming the
PBX.
Document Version 2010-11 PC Programming Manual 9
1.1 Introduction
1.1.1 Introduction
These programming instructions are designed to serve as an overall system programming reference for the
PBX. Each feature in the PBX has default settings that can be changed to customize the PBX to your
requirements. These settings control the functions of the PBX, and changing them is referred to as "system
programming".
Only one person can perform system programming at a time. Any other users trying to enter programming
mode will be denied access.
Ways to Program
There are two programming methods:
•PC (Personal Computer) Programming
All features and settings of the PBX can be programmed through PC programming with Maintenance
Console. Installing and starting the Maintenance Console is described in Section 1.2 PC Programming.
Individual PC programming items are described in Section 2 Introduction of Maintenance Console .
•PT (Proprietary Telephone) Programming
A subset of the features and settings of the PBX can be programmed using a PT. PT programming is
described in the PT Programming Manual.
10 PC Programming Manual Document Version 2010-11
1.1.1 Introduction
1.1.2 Entering Characters
The characters on a white background below can be used when storing a name, message, password or other
text entry data using a PC. The available characters vary according to the model of PBX.
Document Version 2010-11 PC Programming Manual 11
1.1.2 Entering Characters
1.2 PC Programming
1.2.1 Installing and Starting the Maintenance Console
System programming, diagnosis and administration can be performed with a PC using the Maintenance
Console.
This section briefly describes how to install and start the Maintenance Console when the PC and the PBX are
connected by USB cable.
System Requirements
Required Operating System
•Microsoft® Windows® XP, Windows Vista® Business, or Windows 7 operating system
Minimum Hardware Requirements
•HDD: 100 MB of available hard disk space
Recommended Display Settings
•Screen resolution: XGA (1024 ´ 768)
•DPI setting: Normal size (96 DPI)
Installing the Maintenance Console
Note
•Make sure to install and use the latest version of the Maintenance Console.
•To install or uninstall the software on a PC running Windows XP Professional, you must be logged in
as a user in either the "Administrators" or "Power Users" group.
•To install or uninstall the software on a PC running Windows Vista Business or Windows 7 Professional,
you must be logged in as a user in the "Administrators" group.
•To connect the PC to the PBX via USB, the KX-TDA USB driver must be installed. Follow the
instructions of the wizard to install the KX-TDA USB driver. When the PBX is first connected to the PC
via USB, you may be asked to select the appropriate USB driver. Browse for and select the KX-TDA
USB driver that was installed previously.
1. Copy the setup file of the Maintenance Console to your PC.
2. Double-click the setup file to run the installer.
3. Follow the on-screen instructions provided by the installation wizard.
Starting the Maintenance Console and Assigning the Basic Items (Quick
Setup)
When you start the Maintenance Console with the Installer Level Programmer Code and connect to the PBX
for the first time after initialization (with the factory default setting), Quick Setup will launch automatically. During
Quick Setup, you will set up the following basic items. For details about the basic items, refer to "14.1.2 Quick
Setup" in the Feature Manual.
1. Connect the PC to the PBX with a USB cable.
2. Start Maintenance Console from the Start menu.
3. "Information before programming" appears.
12 PC Programming Manual Document Version 2010-11
1.2.1 Installing and Starting the Maintenance Console
a. Carefully read this important additional information, which includes updates to this and other
manuals.
b. Click OK to close this window.
4. a. Enter the Installer Level Programmer Code (default: INSTALLER).
Note
There are 2 other Programmer Codes with limited authorization: Administrator Level (default:
ADMIN), and User Level (default: USER). (® 1.2.2 Password Security)
b. Click OK.
5. Click Connect.
6. a. Select your PBX model from PBX Model.
b. Select the USB tab.
Note
To connect to the PBX via USB, the KX-TDA USB driver must be installed on the PC, as
explained above in "Installing the Maintenance Console".
c. Enter the system password for installer (default: 1234).
d. Click Connect.
7. Follow the instructions of the Quick Setup wizard for the basic items in Quick Setup.
You may now begin programming the PBX.
Document Version 2010-11 PC Programming Manual 13
1.2.1 Installing and Starting the Maintenance Console
1.2.2 Password Security
To maintain system security, system passwords are required to access certain programming functions of the
PBX. By giving different users access to different passwords, it is possible to control the amount of
programming that each user is able to perform.
The following types of system passwords are available:
Password Description Format
System Password for User Used with the user-level programmer code to access
user-level PC programming. The installer can specify
which system programming settings are available.
4 – 10
characters
System Password for
Administrator
Used with the administrator-level programmer code to
access administrator-level PC programming. The
installer can specify which system programming settings
are available.
System Password for
Installer
Used with the installer-level programmer code to access
installer-level PC programming. All system programming
settings are available.
The three programmer codes used for PC programming can be set through Maintenance Console.
For more information about programmer codes, see 2.1.2 Access Levels.
CAUTION
To the Administrator or Installer regarding the system password
1. Please provide all system passwords to the customer.
2. To avoid unauthorized access and possible abuse of the PBX, keep the passwords secret, and inform
the customer of the importance of the passwords, and the possible dangers if they become known to
others.
3. The PBX has default passwords preset. For security, change these passwords the first time that you
program the PBX.
4. Change the passwords periodically.
5. It is strongly recommended that passwords of 10 numbers or characters be used for maximum
protection against unauthorized access. For a list of numbers and characters that can be used in system
passwords, see 1.1.2 Entering Characters.
6. If a system password is forgotten, it can be found by loading a backup of the system data into a PC,
and checking the password using the Maintenance Console software. If you do not have a backup of
the system data, you must reset the PBX to its factory defaults and reprogram it. Therefore, we strongly
recommend maintaining a backup of the system data. For more information on how to back up the
system data, refer to the on-line help of the Maintenance Console.
However, as system passwords can be extracted from backup copies of the system data file, do not
allow unauthorized access to these files.
14 PC Programming Manual Document Version 2010-11
1.2.2 Password Security
Section 2
Introduction of Maintenance Console
This section serves as reference operating instructions
when using the Maintenance Console software to
program the PBX.
Document Version 2010-11 PC Programming Manual 15
2.1 Introduction
2.1.1 Starting Maintenance Console and Software Modes
Every time Maintenance Console is started, a dialog box will appear. From here, you can enter any of the 2
available software modes.
•Batch mode
Batch mode allows you to create new system data files, and make modifications to system data files stored
on your PC, without being connected to the PBX. When you connect to the PBX, the modified data will be
uploaded at one time.
•Interactive mode
Interactive mode allows you to directly modify the system data and settings stored in the PBX’s memory
from a PC that is connected to the PBX. This mode displays the system data that is currently being used
by the PBX, rather than the system data stored on the SD memory card. Data can be modified and results
displayed in real time.
To start Maintenance Console in Batch mode
1. Enter the relevant programmer code.
2. Click OK.
The program launcher will appear.
3. Select an option.
•Select New to create a new system data file.
•Select Open to open an existing system data file.
To start Maintenance Console in Interactive mode
1. Enter the relevant programmer code.
2. Click OK.
The program launcher will appear.
3. Click Connect.
Connection options will be displayed.
•Select a Profile Name if you want to use a pre-saved profile. This option is only available when one
or more profiles have been previously stored.
a. Select the profile to use from the drop-down list.
b. If the system password for the PBX has not been stored with the profile, enter it.
If the system password has been stored with the selected profile, it does not need to be entered.
•To enter the parameters manually, select the PBX Model and select the method of connecting to the
PBX.
a. Specify the settings as required. For more details, see the tables below.
b. Enter the system password for the PBX.
4. Click Connect.
Maintenance Console will start, and automatically connect to the PBX. If this is the first time that
Maintenance Console has connected to the PBX, and the date and time of the PBX have not yet been set,
the Quick Setup wizard will run. For more details, see Starting the Maintenance Console and Assigning
the Basic Items (Quick Setup).
16 PC Programming Manual Document Version 2010-11
2.1.1 Starting Maintenance Console and Software Modes
Connection Settings for RS-232C
Setting Values Explanation
Port COMx Specify the number of the COM port
assigned to the PC’s RS-232C
interface. Only available COM ports are
displayed.
Baud Rate (bps) 2400, 4800, 9600, 19200,
38400, 57600, 115200
Specify the speed of data transmission.
Connection Settings for Modem
Setting Values Explanation
Dial Number 1-9, 0, *, #, -, "," [comma], T, P,
W
Enter the telephone number to be dialed
to access the PBX.
T: Converts the Dial Type from Pulse to
Tone.
"," [comma], P, W: Inserts a pause.
Dial Type Auto(Tone), Auto(Pulse),
Manual
Specify the outgoing dialing method.
If Manual is chosen, dialing must be
done with a connected telephone.
Comment Max. 40 characters Enter a comment to identify the set of
values.
Port COMx Specify the number of the COM port
assigned to the PC’s modem interface.
Only available COM ports will be
displayed.
Baud Rate (bps) 1200, 2400, 4800, 9600,
19200, 38400
Specify the speed of data transmission.
Modem Initialize – Enter the modem initialize command,
and click Initialize to send the
command to the modem.
For more details, refer to your modem’s
instruction manual.
Connection Settings for LAN
Setting Values Explanation
IP Address 1.0.0.0–223.255.255.255 Specify the IP address of the PBX on
the LAN. Enter the same IP address
that was input in IP Address of
3.30 [1-1] Slot—Card Property -
CTILINK (KX-TDA100/KX-TDA200/
KX-TDA600 only).
Document Version 2010-11 PC Programming Manual 17
2.1.1 Starting Maintenance Console and Software Modes
Setting Values Explanation
Port Number 10000–65535 Specify the port number used to access
the PBX via LAN. Enter the same port
number that was input in Maintenance
Port Number of 3.30 [1-1] Slot—Card
Property - CTILINK (KX-TDA100/
KX-TDA200/KX-TDA600 only) or
3.19 [1-1] Slot—Card Property - IP
Gateway (KX-TDA50 only).
2.1.2 Access Levels
There are three main levels of access to the Maintenance Console: User, Administrator and Installer. Each
level has its own Programmer Code, which must be entered to run the Maintenance Console. The allowed
format for each programmer code is as follows:
Item Length
User Level Programmer Code 0 – 16 characters
Administrator Level Programmer Code 4 – 16 characters
Installer Level Programmer Code 4 – 16 characters
Access to menu options within the Maintenance Console is restricted depending on the Programmer Code,
and the current software mode (see 2.1.1 Starting Maintenance Console and Software Modes). When a
menu option is limited to certain access levels, this is noted in this manual in the initial description of that menu
option, for example:
"This option is only available at Installer level."
If a sentence like this does not appear under the heading, the menu option is available at all levels.
The target users for each access level are as follows:
Access Level User
User For end users
Administrator For system administrators
Installer For dealers and system installers
The options available in each mode and access level are shown below.
The access levels are abbreviated as follows:
U: User; A: Administrator; I: Installer
A check mark indicates that the menu option is available for that access level.
Program launcher
Menu Option Batch Interactive
U A I U A I
New ü ü
18 PC Programming Manual Document Version 2010-11
2.1.2 Access Levels
Menu Option Batch Interactive
U A I U A I
Open üüüüüü
Connect—RS-232C üüüüüü
Connect—USB üüüüüü
Connect—LAN üüüüüü
Connect—Modem üüüüüü
Connect—Profile Setup üüüüüü
File
Menu Option Batch Interactive
U A I U A I
Close üüü
Save üüü
Save As üüü
Exit üüüüüü
Disconnect
Menu Option Batch Interactive
U A I U A I
Disconnect üüü
Tool
Menu Option Batch Interactive
U A I U A I
SD memory backup üüü
NDSS Link Data Clear ü
DXDP All OUS ü
Simplified Voice Message®Delete All Recording ü
Simplified Voice Message®Check Current Usage ü
Call Pickup for My Group ü ü
Extension List View üüüüüü
Import®Feature - Speed Dial and Caller ID üüüüüü
Import®Incoming Call - DID Table ü
ü
Document Version 2010-11 PC Programming Manual 19
2.1.2 Access Levels
Menu Option Batch Interactive
U A I U A I
Import®ARS - Leading Digit ü ü
Import®ARS - Except Code ü ü
Import®ARS - Routing Plan ü ü
Import®Wired Extension ü ü
Import®PS Extension ü ü
Import®Quick Dial (Basic) ü ü
Import®Quick Dial (MEC) ü ü
Export®Feature - Speed Dial and Caller ID üüüüüü
Export®Incoming Call - DID Table ü ü
Export®ARS - Leading Digit ü ü
Export®ARS - Except Code ü ü
Export®ARS - Routing Plan ü ü
Export®Wired Extension ü ü
Export®PS Extension ü ü
Export®Quick Dial (Basic) ü ü
Export®Quick Dial (MEC) ü ü
Screen Customize®User Level ü ü
Screen Customize®Administrator Level ü ü
Utility
Menu Option Batch Interactive
U A I U A I
Diagnosis üüü
File Transfer PC to PBX (SD Card) ü
File Transfer PBX (SD Card) to PC ü
SD Card File View and Load ü
SD Card File Delete ü
Message File Transfer PC to PBX ü
Message File Transfer PBX to PC ü
Error Log üüü
T1 Signaling Bit Monitor (KX-TDA100/KX-TDA200/
KX-TDA600 only)
ü
20 PC Programming Manual Document Version 2010-11
2.1.2 Access Levels
Menu Option Batch Interactive
U A I U A I
T1 Line Trace (KX-TDA100/KX-TDA200/KX-TDA600
only)
ü
ISDN/QSIG Protocol Trace ü
Digital Trunk Error Report (KX-TDA100/KX-TDA200/
KX-TDA600 only)
ü
IP Extension Statistical Information ü
CS Information ü
PS Information ü
Timed Update (KX-TDA100KX-TDA200KX-TDA600
only)
ü
System Reset®Reset by the Command ü
Flash ROM ID Information ü
View
Menu Option Batch Interactive
U A I U A I
Toolbar üüüüüü
Status Bar üüüüüü
System Menu üüüüüü
Window
Menu Option Batch Interactive
U A I U A I
Cascade üüüüüü
Tile(Horz) üüüüüü
Tile(Vert) üüüüüü
Help
Menu Option Batch Interactive
U A I U A I
Help üüüüüü
Additional Information üüüüüü
About üüüüüü
Document Version 2010-11 PC Programming Manual 21
2.1.2 Access Levels
2.1.3 Software Interface
This section explains the functions of the various elements of the software interface.
Main Window
The window of the Maintenance Console software is divided into several areas, as shown below:
123
45 6
1. Menu Bar
Provides access to file management and connection options, as well as tools and utilities used in
programming the PBX.
For details, see Sections 2.2 Program launcher to 2.7 Help.
2. Tool Bar
Provides easy access to commonly used software functions.
Two tool bars are provided, as follows:
•File
Contains the icon for saving files. For details, see Section 2.3.2 File—Save.
22 PC Programming Manual Document Version 2010-11
2.1.3 Software Interface
•Tools
Contains icons for backing up PBX data to the SD Memory Card, viewing extension information, and
accessing Online Help. For details, see Sections 2.5.1 Tool—SD memory backup and 2.5.7 Tool
—Extension List View.
These menus can be positioned freely. Click and drag the title bar of a menu to move it to another position.
It will automatically snap in to position above, below, to the left, or to the right of the main window if released
there. Otherwise, it will float separately from the main window.
Whether the tool bar is displayed or not can be chosen by selecting Toolbar from the View menu.
3. Tab Bar
The name of each screen currently open is displayed in a tab in this tab bar. When multiple screens are
open at the same time, click on the tab of a screen to display the options associated with that screen.
4. System Menu
Provides access to the settings used for programming the PBX, grouped into 11 topics.
For details, see Section 3 [1] Configuration to Section 13 [11] Maintenance.
To display the individual screens within a topic, click the topic heading. It will expand to show the sub-topics.
•If a sub-topic contains more than one screen, clicking the name of the sub-topic will display the names
of individual screens. Clicking an expanded sub-topic will hide the names of individual screens.
Double-click on a screen name to open that screen in 6. Main Screen below.
This menu can be positioned freely. Click and drag the title bar of the menu to move it to another position.
It will automatically snap in to either the left side or right side of the main window if released there.
Otherwise, it will float separately from the main window.
Whether the system menu is displayed or not can be chosen by selecting System Menu from the View
menu.
5. Status Bar
The status bar displays information on the current state of the Maintenance Console.
Whether the status bar is displayed or not can be chosen by selecting Statusbar from the View menu.
The information displayed is as follows, in order from left to right:
Area Values Description
Program Mode Batch Mode xxx
Interactive Mode
See 2.1.1 Starting Maintenance Console and
Software Modes above.
"xxx" is replaced by the name of the current
system data file.
PBX Type Type: TDA50/TDA100/
TDA200/TDA600
Displays the type of PBX being programmed.
Access Level Level :
User
Administrator
Installer
Displays the current access level, determined by
the Programmer Code entered when starting
Maintenance Console. See 2.1.2 Access
Levels for more information.
PBX System Data
Version
Versionxxx-xxx Displays the version number of the system
software installed to the PBX.
The first 3 digits are the version number, and the
last 3 digits are the revision number.
PBX Region Code Regionxxx-xxx Displays the region code assigned to the PBX and
Maintenance Console.
The first 3 digits represent the region code
assigned to the PBX, and the last 3 digits
represent the region code assigned to the
Maintenance Console.
Document Version 2010-11 PC Programming Manual 23
2.1.3 Software Interface
6. Main Screen
Displays the screens selected from 4. System Menu above.
For details, see Section 3 [1] Configuration to Section 13 [11] Maintenance.
Standard Buttons and Elements
There are several standard buttons that are displayed on many screens within the Maintenance Console.
The standard buttons are as follows:
Button Function
OK Implements changes and closes the current screen.
Cancel Abandons changes and returns to the previous screen.
Close Keeps any changes implemented, and closes the current screen.
Apply Implements changes and remains on the same screen.
Refresh Implements changes, updates displayed data, and remains on the
current screen.
Help Displays the relevant help topic for the current screen.
In addition, many screens within the software display a small open folder icon ( ) beside lists of setting
items. Clicking this icon will collapse part of the list, allowing other items to be displayed. The icon will change
to a closed folder ( ).
Clicking the closed folder icon will expand the list again.
2.1.4 Card Status
Certain tools, utilities and settings require that the target card be set to out-of-service (OUS) or in-service (INS)
status before the operation is carried out. Where required, this is noted in the description of each item. Card
status changes can only be performed when the software is in Interactive mode (see 2.1.1 Starting
Maintenance Console and Software Modes).
•"In service" means that the card is installed correctly in the PBX, and is capable of being used normally.
•"Out of service" means that the card is installed correctly in the PBX, but has been temporarily removed
from use. This allows settings to be modified or software to be upgraded.
•"Fault" means that the card is not installed in the PBX correctly, or is not functioning correctly. For more
information, see the Installation Manual.
For details about how to change the status of a card, see To change the status (INS/OUS) of a card
(Interactive mode only) on screen 3.1 [1-1] Slot.
2.1.5 Display Options
The View and Window menus provide options to control the display of items within the Maintenance Console.
•View
–Toolbar: Displays or hides the tool bar of commonly used buttons.
–Statusbar: Displays or hides the bar at the bottom of the Maintenance Console window.
–System Menu: Displays or hides the menu of PBX setting screens.
•Window
24 PC Programming Manual Document Version 2010-11
2.1.5 Display Options
–Cascade: When multiple data screens are open, displays all open screens overlapped, with the title
bars visible.
–Tile(Horz): When multiple data screens are open, displays all open screens side by side.
–Tile(Vert): When multiple data screens are open, displays all open screens vertically.
2.1.6 Extension Number Setting
Many screens within the Maintenance Console software allow you to select extensions as part of programming
various features (for example, as members of a group). These screens use a standard window to make
selecting multiple extensions easy, accessed by clicking a button. This section explains how to use this
Extension Number Setting window.
To select multiple extension numbers, select the type of extension to display, highlight the extensions you wish
to add, then click the Add button. When finished, click OK. Data for the selected extensions will be added to
the first free spaces on the original screen.
Extension Type
Selects the types of extension numbers to display in Extension Numbers & Names List. Multiple items
can be selected. Items that are not available are shown with a grey checkbox.
Default
None selected.
Value Range
Wired Extension, Portable Station, VM Group(DPT), VM Group(DTMF), ICD Group, PS Ring Group,
OGM(DISA), External Pager, Analog MODEM
Extension Numbers & Names List
Displays all available extensions of the types selected in Extension Type, and names. Click entries to select
them, and click the Add button when finished, to add the selected extensions. To deselect an entry, click it
again.
Default
Available extensions.
Value Range
Matching extensions
Available Column
Specifies which fields in the original form to add extension data to. For example, if both extension numbers
and names can be entered in the original form, it is possible to specify that extension name data not be
transferred, by deselecting that field here.
To select or deselect a field, click its name.
Default
First available field
Value Range
Available fields
Document Version 2010-11 PC Programming Manual 25
2.1.6 Extension Number Setting
Selected Extension List
Displays the extensions that have been selected to be added to member data. To remove an extension from
this list, click it to select it and click Delete.
Default
Not stored.
Value Range
Selected extensions
26 PC Programming Manual Document Version 2010-11
2.1.6 Extension Number Setting
2.2 Program launcher
2.2.1 Program launcher—New
Creates a new system data file, used to program the PBX in Batch mode. All settings are in their initial or default
state.
This option is only available at Installer level.
To upload the file created here to the SD memory card installed in the PBX, see 2.6.2 Utility—File Transfer
PC to PBX (SD Card).
Note
Since selecting this option creates a blank system data file, uploading this file to the PBX will overwrite all
previous settings. Use only when necessary.
To create a new system data file
1. From the program launcher, select New.
2. Click the appropriate model number.
3. Select whether an EMEC (KX-TDA600) or MEC (KX-TDA50/KX-TDA100/KX-TDA200) card is installed or
not.
4. Click OK.
2.2.2 Program launcher—Open
Opens a system data file previously saved on the PC, and enters Batch mode.
When opening a file created with an older version of the Maintenance Console, you will be asked whether you
want to convert the data for use with the current version or not. Using the data without converting may result
in some data being loaded to an incorrect destination, and is not recommended.
If the file is not supported by the PBX (e.g. a system data file from an incompatible PBX), it will not be opened.
The only files that can be opened are files that were created by the Maintenance Console for a supported PBX.
To upload a file opened here to the SD memory card installed in the PBX, see 2.6.2 Utility—File Transfer
PC to PBX (SD Card).
To open a system data file
1. From the program launcher, select Open.
The Open dialog box will be displayed.
2. Navigate to the folder containing the system data file you want to open.
3. Select the file.
4. Click Open.
If the file was created with an older version of the Maintenance Console, you will be asked if you want to
convert the data.
•Click Yes to convert the data for use with the current version of the Maintenance Console. Enter a
name for the new converted system file.
•Click No to open the file as it is.
2.2.3 Program launcher—Connect—RS-232C
Connects to the PBX in Interactive mode through the serial RS-232C interface of the PBX.
Document Version 2010-11 PC Programming Manual 27
2.2.3 Program launcher—Connect—RS-232C
This option allows direct entry of connection parameters, for cases where the PC is used to connect to one or
just a few PBXs, and an individual profile for each PBX is not necessary. If you connect to multiple PBXs and
would prefer to choose from among pre-saved profiles instead, see 2.2.7 Program launcher—Connect—
Profile Setup for more details about creating profiles.
To connect to the PBX by RS-232C
1. From the program launcher, select Connect.
The Login window will be displayed.
2. Select a connection option.
•Select a Profile Name if you want to use a pre-saved profile. This option is only available when one
or more profiles have been previously stored.
a. Select the profile to use from the drop-down list.
b. If the system password for the PBX has not been stored with the profile, enter it.
If the system password has been stored with the selected profile, it does not need to be entered.
•To enter the parameters manually, select the PBX Model and confirm that the RS-232C radio button
is selected.
a. Specify the settings as required. For more details, see the table below.
b. Enter the system password for the PBX.
3. Click Connect.
Connection Settings for RS-232C
Setting Values Explanation
Port COMx Specify the number of the COM port
assigned to the PC’s RS-232C
interface. Only available COM ports are
displayed.
Baud Rate (bps) 2400, 4800, 9600, 19200,
38400, 57600, 115200
Specify the speed of data transmission.
2.2.4 Program launcher—Connect—USB
Connects to the PBX in Interactive mode through the USB port on the PBX, or a USB port (USB Module)
attached to a DPT.
To connect to the PBX by USB
1. From the program launcher, select Connect.
The Login window will be displayed.
2. Select a connection option.
•Select a Profile Name if you want to use a pre-saved profile.
a. Select the profile to use from the drop-down list.
b. If the system password for the PBX has not been stored with the profile, enter it.
If the system password has been stored with the selected profile, it does not need to be entered.
•To enter the parameters manually, select the PBX Model and confirm that the USB radio button is
selected.
a. Enter the system password for the PBX.
3. Click Connect.
28 PC Programming Manual Document Version 2010-11
2.2.4 Program launcher—Connect—USB
2.2.5 Program launcher—Connect—LAN
Connects to the PBX in Interactive mode through the Local Area Network interface of the PBX.
A CTI-LINK card (KX-TDA100/KX-TDA200/KX-TDA600) or IP-GW4 card (KX-TDA50) must be installed and
the IP address of the PBX set to use this feature. For more details, see 3.30 [1-1] Slot—Card Property -
CTILINK (KX-TDA100/KX-TDA200/KX-TDA600 only) and 3.19 [1-1] Slot—Card Property - IP Gateway
(KX-TDA50 only).
This option allows direct entry of connection parameters, for cases where the PC is used to connect to one or
just a few PBXs, and an individual profile for each PBX is not necessary. If you connect to multiple PBXs and
would prefer to choose from among pre-saved profiles instead, see 2.2.7 Program launcher—Connect—
Profile Setup for more details about creating profiles.
To connect to the PBX by LAN
1. From the program launcher, select Connect.
The Login window will be displayed.
2. Select a connection option.
•Select a Profile Name if you want to use a pre-saved profile.
a. Select the profile to use from the drop-down list.
b. If the system password for the PBX has not been stored with the profile, enter it.
If the system password has been stored with the selected profile, it does not need to be entered.
•To enter the parameters manually, select the PBX Model and confirm that the LAN radio button is
selected.
a. Specify the connection parameters as required. For more details, see the table below.
b. Enter the system password for the PBX.
3. Click Connect.
Connection Settings for LAN
Setting Values Explanation
IP Address 1.0.0.0–223.255.255.255 Specify the IP address of the PBX on
the LAN. Enter the same IP address
that was input in IP Address of
3.30 [1-1] Slot—Card Property -
CTILINK (KX-TDA100/KX-TDA200/
KX-TDA600 only).
Port Number 10000–65535 Specify the port number used to access
the PBX via LAN. Enter the same port
number that was input in Maintenance
Port Number of 3.30 [1-1] Slot—Card
Property - CTILINK (KX-TDA100/
KX-TDA200/KX-TDA600 only) or
3.19 [1-1] Slot—Card Property - IP
Gateway (KX-TDA50 only).
2.2.6 Program launcher—Connect—Modem
Connects to the PBX in Interactive mode through the modem.
To access the PBX remotely using this feature, an RMT card must be installed and the Remote—Analog
Remote (Modem) Floating Extension Number assigned in 13.1 [11-1] Main.
This option allows direct entry of connection parameters, for cases where the PC is used to connect to one or
just a few PBXs, and an individual profile for each PBX is not necessary. If you connect to multiple PBXs and
Document Version 2010-11 PC Programming Manual 29
2.2.6 Program launcher—Connect—Modem
would prefer to choose from among pre-saved profiles instead, see 2.2.7 Program launcher—Connect—
Profile Setup for more details about creating profiles.
To connect to the PBX by Modem
1. From the program launcher, select Connect.
The Login window will be displayed.
2. Select a connection option.
•Select a Profile Name if you want to use a pre-saved profile.
a. Select the profile to use from the drop-down list.
b. If the system password for the PBX has not been stored with the profile, enter it.
If the system password has been stored with the selected profile, it does not need to be entered.
•To enter the parameters manually, select the PBX Model and confirm that the Modem radio button is
selected.
a. Specify the settings as required. For more details, see the table below.
b. Enter the system password for the PBX.
3. Click Connect.
Connection Settings for Modem
Setting Values Description
Dial Number 1-9, 0, *, #, -, "," [comma], T, P,
W
Enter the telephone number to be dialed
to access the PBX.
T: Converts the Dial Type from Pulse to
Tone.
"," [comma], P, W: Inserts a pause.
Dial Type Auto(Tone), Auto(Pulse),
Manual
Specify the outgoing dialing method.
If Manual is chosen, dialing must be
done with a connected telephone.
Comment Max. 40 characters Enter a comment to identify the set of
values.
Port COMx Specify the number of the COM port
assigned to the PC’s modem interface.
Only available COM ports will be
displayed.
Baud Rate (bps) 1200, 2400, 4800, 9600,
19200, 38400
Specify the speed of data transmission.
Modem Initialize – Enter the modem initialize command,
and click Initialize to send the
command to the modem.
For more details, refer to your modem’s
instruction manual.
2.2.7 Program launcher—Connect—Profile Setup
Profiles are useful when one PC is used to connect to multiple PBXs. Rather than manually adjusting the
connection settings each time a different PBX is accessed, it is possible to store the connection settings for
several PBXs. Then, when you wish to connect to a specific PBX, you can simply choose that PBX’s profile
from the list.
30 PC Programming Manual Document Version 2010-11
2.2.7 Program launcher—Connect—Profile Setup
Note
When reinstalling or upgrading the Maintenance Console, it is possible to create a backup of all profiles.
This allows you to use the original connection settings with the new Maintenance Console.
The functions of the buttons on this screen are as follows:
Button Function
Profile File Opens or saves profiles as separate files.
Save current profile Overwrites the previous settings with the current settings when a profile
already exists. A confirmation message will be displayed.
Save as new profile Saves the current settings as a new profile. A Profile Name is required.
Delete profile When an existing profile is selected, deletes that profile. A confirmation
message will be displayed.
Document Version 2010-11 PC Programming Manual 31
2.2.7 Program launcher—Connect—Profile Setup
2.3 File
2.3.1 File—Close
Closes the system data file that is currently being modified, and returns to the program launcher.
To close a system data file
•From the File menu, select Close.
If the system data file has not been saved, a warning message will be displayed, giving you the option to
save the file.
•Click Yes to save the file.
•Click No to abandon the changes.
2.3.2 File—Save
Overwrites the previously saved system data file with the system data currently being modified in Batch mode.
To upload a file saved here to the SD memory card installed in the PBX, see 2.6.2 Utility—File Transfer PC
to PBX (SD Card).
To save a system data file
•From the File menu, select Save.
If the data has never been saved, the Save dialog box will be displayed. For more details, see 2.3.3 File
—Save As.
2.3.3 File—Save As
Saves the system data file being modified in Batch mode with the name chosen by the user.
To upload a file saved here to the SD memory card installed in the PBX, see 2.6.2 Utility—File Transfer PC
to PBX (SD Card).
To save a system data file with a new name
1. From the File menu, select Save As.
2. Navigate to the folder in which you want to save the file.
3. Enter a file name, or select a file to overwrite.
4. Click Save.
If choosing to overwrite another file, a warning message will be displayed.
•Click Yes to overwrite.
•Click No to return to the previous screen.
2.3.4 File—Exit
Closes the Maintenance Console.
To exit the Maintenance Console
•From the File menu, select Exit.
If the system data file being modified has not been saved, a warning message will be displayed, giving you
the option to save the file.
•Click Yes to save the file.
•Click No to abandon the changes.
32 PC Programming Manual Document Version 2010-11
2.3.4 File—Exit
2.4 Disconnect
2.4.1 Disconnect—Disconnect
Closes the connection between the Maintenance Console and the PBX. When this option is chosen, system
data is automatically backed up from the PBX to the SD memory card (see 2.5.1 Tool—SD memory
backup).
To disconnect
1. From the Disconnect menu, select Disconnect.
A confirmation message will be displayed.
2. Click Yes.
Document Version 2010-11 PC Programming Manual 33
2.4.1 Disconnect—Disconnect
2.5 Tool
2.5.1 Tool—SD memory backup
Saves system data from the PBX to the SD memory card. Backup begins as soon as this option is chosen.
To back up system data
•From the Tool menu, select SD memory backup.
2.5.2 Tool—NDSS Link Data Clear
Clears NDSS Link Data stored in the connected PBX. While this tool clears both monitor extension and
monitored extension data, it only clears it at the connected PBX. To clear this data at other PBXs in the network,
it is necessary to run this tool at those PBXs.
To clear the NDSS Link Data
•From the Tool menu, select NDSS Link Data Clear.
A confirmation screen will be displayed.
•Click OK to clear the data.
•Click Cancel to keep the data, and close the screen.
2.5.3 Tool—DXDP All OUS
Sets the status of all DXDP/XDP extension ports to "OUS" simultaneously.
To set all DXDP/XDP ports to OUS.
1. From the Tool menu, select DXDP All OUS.
2. Click OK.
2.5.4 Tool—Simplified Voice Message—Delete All Recording
Deletes all voice messages recorded to SVM/ESVM cards installed in the PBX.
To delete voice messages
1. From the Tool menu, point to Simplified Voice Message and select Delete All Recordings.
2. Select the card from which to delete messages.
3. Click OK.
2.5.5 Tool—Simplified Voice Message—Check Current Usage
Displays information on the voice messages stored in SVM/ESVM cards installed in the PBX. For each
message, the type of message and the associated extension are displayed.
To view SVM message status
•From the Tool menu, point to Simplified Voice Message and select Check Current Usage.
34 PC Programming Manual Document Version 2010-11
2.5.5 Tool—Simplified Voice Message—Check Current Usage
2.5.6 Tool—Call Pickup for My Group
Allows you to automatically configure settings in 4.9 [2-6-2] Numbering Plan—Quick Dial and 6.4 [4-1-3]
Wired Extension—Speed Dial so that users can answer calls to their Call Pickup Group by pressing "0".
To activate this tool
•From the Tool menu, select Call Pickup for My Group.
The Group Call Pickup feature number (default: 40) + the extension user group number of the extension
is assigned to first personal speed dial.
Note
This tool can only be activated if all of the following conditions are met:
–The first Quick Dial setting is empty or is already set to " 0".
–" 0" is not used for another feature number.
–The Group Call Pickup feature number has been assigned.
–The Personal Speed Dialing feature number has been assigned.
2.5.7 Tool—Extension List View
Displays a list of all programmed extension numbers and types. It is possible to sort the information according
to Extension Number, Type, Extension Name, Shelf, Slot, or Port. There is also a key-word searching feature.
The types that can be displayed are as follows:
Type Detail
Intercom Wired Extension
VM Voice Mail
Portable Station Wireless Extension (Portable Station)
ICDG Incoming Call Distribution Group
WG PS Ring Group
VM (DPT) VM (DPT) Group
VM (DTMF) VM (DTMF) Group
Pager External Pager
MODEM Analog Modem
OGM (DISA) DISA
DSS DSS Console
DPT-I/F CS PT-interface CS
SVM SVM Card
To view extension information
•From the Tool menu, select Extension List View.
Document Version 2010-11 PC Programming Manual 35
2.5.7 Tool—Extension List View
2.5.8 Tool—Import
Allows several types of system data files or tables to be imported.
Except for Speed Dial and Caller ID, this option is only available at Installer level.
The files from which data can be imported are files that were previously saved at this or another PBX using
the Export tool (see 2.5.9 Tool—Export), or comma-separated value (CSV) files. Unsupported file types
cannot be opened.
For all tables except ARS - Routing Plan, it is possible to edit the CSV file directly using an appropriate editor,
before importing.
The types of data that can be imported using this tool, and the matching destination fields, are as follows:
Feature - Speed Dial and Caller ID
Data Type Import Destination
System Speed Dialing
Number
Location
Name Name
CO Line Access Number +
Telephone Number
Dial
CLI Destination CLI Destination
Related programming: 8.1 [6-1] System Speed Dial
Incoming Call - DID Table
Data Type Import Destination
Location Location
DID Number Dial In Number
DID Name Dial In Name
DID Destination-Day Destination-Day
DID Destination-Lunch Destination-Lunch
DID Destination-Break Destination-Break
DID Destination-Night Destination-Night
Tenant Number Tenant Number
VM Trunk Group No. Group Number for VPS
answer
CLI Ring for DID-Day CLI Ring - Day
CLI Ring for DID-Lunch CLI Ring - Lunch
CLI Ring for DID-Break CLI Ring - Break
CLI Ring for DID-Night CLI Ring - Night
Related programming: 12.3 [10-3] DID Table
36 PC Programming Manual Document Version 2010-11
2.5.8 Tool—Import
ARS - Leading Digit
Data Type Import Destination
No. Location
Leading Number Leading Digit
Additional Number of Digits Additional Dial Digits
Routing Plan Number Route Plan Number
Related programming: 10.2 [8-2] Leading Number
ARS - Except Code
Data Type Import Destination
No. Location
Leading Number Exception Exception Code
Related programming: 10.7 [8-6] Leading Number Exception
ARS - Routing Plan
Data Type Import Destination
(no fields to select) (no fields to select)
Related programming: 10.3 [8-3] Routing Plan Time
Wired Extension
Data Type Import Destination
No. Location (selected
automatically)
Extension Number Extension Number (selected
automatically)
Extension Name Extension Name (selected
automatically)
Related programming: 6.1 [4-1-1] Wired Extension—Extension Settings
PS Extension
Data Type Import Destination
No. Location (selected
automatically)
Extension Number*1 Extension Number (selected
automatically)
Extension Name Extension Name (selected
automatically)
*1 This data can only be exported, and cannot be imported.
Document Version 2010-11 PC Programming Manual 37
2.5.8 Tool—Import
Related programming: 6.10 [4-2-1] Portable Station—Extension Settings
Quick Dial (Basic)
Data Type Import Destination
No. Location
Dial Dial
Phone Number Phone Number
Related programming: 4.9 [2-6-2] Numbering Plan—Quick Dial
Quick Dial (MEC)
Data Type Import Destination
No. Location
Dial Dial
Phone Number Phone Number
Related programming: 4.9 [2-6-2] Numbering Plan—Quick Dial
To import system data
1. From the Tool menu, point to Import, and then click the type of data to import.
2. Navigate to the folder containing the system data file you want to open.
3. Select the file.
4. Click Open to open the file.
If applicable, a list of field names found in the imported file will be displayed.
5. For the Feature - Speed Dial and Caller ID table, when an EMEC (KX-TDA600) or MEC (KX-TDA50/
KX-TDA100/KX-TDA200) card is installed, select the Speed Dial table to which to import the data
(KX-TDA50: Basic Memory or Expanded Memory; KX-TDA100/KX-TDA200/KX-TDA600: system or
tenant) from the drop-down list.
6. If required, select import fields.
When import fields can be selected, the selection screen is displayed automatically. Matching origin and
destination fields are entered by default.
•To change the destination for an import field, select the preferred field from the drop-down list.
•To not import a field, select the blank option from the drop-down list.
7. Click OK to perform the import operation.
Depending on the type of data imported, the relevant programming screen may be displayed.
•Click OK or Apply to complete the import operation.
If data in a field being imported does not match the required format for the import destination, an error
message will be displayed when the import operation is attempted, and the operation will be canceled.
This can occur when, for example, the destination field can only accept numeric data, but the data being
imported contains alphabet characters, as the correct fields were not linked together.
2.5.9 Tool—Export
Allows several types of system data to be exported to files. These files can be used with the Import tool (see
2.5.8 Tool—Import) to update another PBX.
Except for ARS - Routing Plan, tables are exported as comma-separated value (CSV) files.
Except for Speed Dial and Caller ID, this option is only available at Installer level.
38 PC Programming Manual Document Version 2010-11
2.5.9 Tool—Export
Note
The separator used in CSV files created using the Export tool is decided by the unit specified in List
Separator, in the Windows Regional Options Control Panel.
To export system data
1. From the Tool menu, point to Export, and then click the type of data to export.
2. Navigate to the folder in which you want to save the file.
3. Enter a file name.
4. Click Save.
•When export fields are automatically selected, the file will be saved.
•When export fields can be selected, the selection screen will be displayed automatically.
5. For the Feature - Speed Dial and Caller ID table, when an EMEC (KX-TDA600) or MEC (KX-TDA50/
KX-TDA100/KX-TDA200) card is installed, select the Speed Dial table from which to export the data
(KX-TDA50: Basic Memory or Expanded Memory; KX-TDA100/KX-TDA200/KX-TDA600: system or
tenant) from the drop-down list.
A list of field names that can be exported will be displayed.
6. Click the check box beside the name of each field that you want to export.
7. Click OK.
2.5.10 Tool—Screen Customize—User Level/Administrator Level
Allows you to specify which menu screens, tools and utilities can be accessed in User and Administrator levels.
This option is only available at Installer level.
Selected check boxes will be displayed on the main screen of the Maintenance Console and in the menu bar
to users with the level of access being edited.
To modify displayed screens
1. From the Tool menu, point to Screen Customize, and then click the access level to modify.
2. Select the items that you want to have displayed.
•Clear the check box beside the names of items you do not want to have displayed.
•Select the check box beside the names of items you want to have displayed.
3. Click OK.
Document Version 2010-11 PC Programming Manual 39
2.5.10 Tool—Screen Customize—User Level/Administrator Level
2.6 Utility
2.6.1 Utility—Diagnosis
Performs diagnostic tests on cards installed in the PBX, to identify the source of problems.
If any of the tests listed here returns the result "NG" ("No Good"), contact your dealer. Test results can be
saved as a TXT-format (text) file.
When testing is complete, any cards that were set to OUS status must be returned to INS status if they are to
be used again.
Card Test
Tests the relevant functions of a card to ensure that it is operating correctly. The tests carried out vary according
to the type of card being tested.
The tests that are performed on each card are as follows:
KX-TDA50
Test Type Available Cards
Local loop back diagnosis DHLC4, DLC8, SLC4, SLC8, IP-EXT4, HLC4, PLC4, PLC8, LCOT,
IP-GW4, SIP-GW4
Card CT Bus diagnosis DLC8, SLC8, IP-EXT4, PLC8, IP-GW4
DTMF Receive test port DHLC4, SLC4, SLC8
MSG/SVM Card DTMF receive test MSG2, SVM2, ESVM2
EXT-CID path test EXT-CID
KX-TDA100/KX-TDA200/KX-TDA600
Test Type Available Cards
Local loop back diagnosis DHLC, DLC, SLC8, SLC16, MSLC16, ESLC16, EMSLC16,
CSLC16, ECSLC24, CSIF, LCOT, ELCOT, T1, PRI, OPB, IP-EXT16
Card CT Bus diagnosis
(KX-TDA100/KX-TDA200 only)
DHLC, DLC, SLC8, SLC16, MSLC16, ESLC16, EMSLC16,
CSLC16, ECSLC24, CSIF, LCOT, ELCOT, T1, PRI, OPB, IP-EXT16
DTMF Receive test port DHLC, SLC8, SLC16, MSLC16, ESLC16, EMSLC16, CSLC16,
ECSLC24
PT loop back diagnosis DHLC, DLC
Caller ID Card DTMF Sending Out
Diagnosis
SLC8
DSP DTMF generator/receiver
diagnosis
T1
DSP DTMF receiver diagnosis T1
Framer IC alarm signal detection
diagnosis
T1, PRI
Framer IC error detection diagnosis T1, PRI
40 PC Programming Manual Document Version 2010-11
2.6.1 Utility—Diagnosis
Test Type Available Cards
CS-INF loop back diagnosis CSIF
Super frame synchronization
diagnosis
CSIF
Caller ID card loop back diagnosis LCOT, ELCOT
Extension mode setting test
CTI-LINK loop back diagnosis CTI-LINK
IP-GW H.323 call simulate diagnosis IP-GW4 (KX-TDA0484), IP-GW16
LAN loop back diagnosis IP-GW4 (KX-TDA0484)
To perform a card test
1. From the Utility menu, select Diagnosis.
2. Click on the Status cell of the card to be tested, and set it to "OUS".
With the KX-TDA50, to perform the EXT-CID path test, set the status of both the EXT-CID card and the
card in slot 1 to "OUS".
3. Click on the cell showing the card type.
A new window will be displayed.
4. Select the Card Test option.
A new window will be displayed.
5. Click Test to perform the test(s).
The error report will be displayed. When all tests are completed, the words "Test End!" will be shown on
the last line of the output.
6. Select an option:
•Click Capture if you want to save the displayed information.
1. Enter a file name, or select a file to overwrite.
2. Click Save.
•Click Cancel to return to the Diagnosis screen.
Pair Port Test (KX-TDA100/KX-TDA200/KX-TDA600 only)
Tests the combination of an extension port and CO line port to ensure that communication with the CO line
port can be carried out successfully.
The pair port test can be carried out using one LCOT or ELCOT card and one DHLC, SLC8, SLC16,
MSLC16, ESLC16, EMSLC16, CSLC16, or ECSLC24 card.
Note
With the KX-TDA600, the pair of cards to be used for the pair port tests must be installed within the same
shelf.
The tests that are performed are as follows:
Line current OFF (Ext->CO) Line current from extension to CO line turns off.
Line current ON (Ext->CO) Line current from extension to CO line turns on.
Off hook detection (CO->Ext) Off-hook generation/detection from CO line to
extension
Document Version 2010-11 PC Programming Manual 41
2.6.1 Utility—Diagnosis
DTMF detection (CO->Ext) DTMF generation/detection from CO line to extension
DP detection (CO->Ext) DP generation/detection from CO line to extension
BELL detection (Ext->CO) BELL generation/detection from extension to CO line
Speech path (Ext->CO) Speech path from extension to CO line
Speech path (CO->Ext) Speech path from CO line to extension
To perform a pair port test
1. From the Utility menu, select Diagnosis.
2. Click on the Status cell of the extension card to be tested, and set it to "OUS".
3. Click on the cell showing the card type.
A new window will be displayed.
4. Select the Pair Port Test option.
A new window will be displayed. The card you selected in Step 3 will be shown in the Extension Line Slot
No. drop-down list.
5. From the CO Line Slot No. drop-down list, select the slot number of the CO line card you want to test.
6. From the CO Line Port No. drop-down list, select the port number of the CO line you want to test.
7. Click Test.
The error report will be displayed.
8. Select an option:
•Click Capture if you want to save the displayed information.
1. Enter a file name, or select a file to overwrite.
2. Click Save.
•Click Cancel to return to the Diagnosis screen.
Network Loopback Test (KX-TDA100/KX-TDA200/KX-TDA600 only)
Performs a remote loopback test on the PRI23 card.
Note
•To perform this test, it is necessary to set Loopback Test started by Network in 3.14 [1-1] Slot
—Port Property - PRI Port (KX-TDA100/KX-TDA200/KX-TDA600 only) to "Enable".
•The version of the PRI23 card must be 2.000 or later.
To perform a network loopback test
1. From the Utility menu, select Diagnosis.
2. Click on the Status cell of the PRI23 card, and set it to "OUS".
3. Click on the cell showing the card type.
A new window will be displayed.
4. Select the Loopback Type option.
A new window will be displayed.
5. Select Point1 or Point2 depending on the type of loopback test you want to perform
The available selections may vary depending on the hardware version of the card.
6. Click Apply.
Preparation for the test is complete. The test will start automatically.
7. After the test is complete, select Release and click Apply.
8. Click Close to return to the Diagnosis screen.
42 PC Programming Manual Document Version 2010-11
2.6.1 Utility—Diagnosis
2.6.2 Utility—File Transfer PC to PBX (SD Card)
Copies PBX system files (program files and data files) from the connected PC to the SD memory card installed
in the PBX. Pre-existing files on the SD memory card are overwritten.
This option is only available at Installer level.
Two types of files can be copied using this tool:
•Program files: These contain the programs used to operate cards within the PBX and CSs, acting as
on-board drivers.
•Data files: These contain the initial configuration data for individual cards and settings.
Not all files that are copied using this tool are automatically made active. To install new program files or main
system data to the PBX, use the System Reset—Reset by the Command utility (see 2.6.17 Utility—System
Reset—Reset by the Command) for PMPR/PSMPR/PLMPR and DSYS/DSSYS/DLSYS files, and the SD
Card File View and Load utility (see 2.6.4 Utility—SD Card File View and Load) for all other files.
The PBX examines the header information of a file to determine 2 things: whether the file contains supported
data, and which system component the file applies to.
Only files whose header information matches that of a system file supported by the PBX can be transferred.
Attempting to transfer any other type of file results in an error message.
The names of all files that can be stored on the SD memory card are as follows:
Main Program
KX-TDA50
Name on SD Memory Card Corresponding Card
PSMPR MPR
PSMPR_S MPR*1
*1 PSMPR-file-format data that is transferred to the PBX from the PC is saved as "PSMPR_S"
KX-TDA100/KX-TDA200
Name on SD Memory Card Corresponding Card
PMPR MPR
PMPR_SUB MPR*1
*1 PMPR-file-format data that is transferred to the PBX from the PC is saved as "PMPR_SUB".
KX-TDA600
Name on SD Memory Card Corresponding Card
PLMPR EMPR
PLMPR_S EMPR*1
*1 PLMPR-file-format data that is transferred to the PBX from the PC is saved as "PLMPR_S".
Document Version 2010-11 PC Programming Manual 43
2.6.2 Utility—File Transfer PC to PBX (SD Card)
LPR Program
KX-TDA50
Name on SD Memory Card Corresponding Card
PSVOIPEX IP-EXT4
KX-TDA100/KX-TDA200/KX-TDA600
Name on SD Memory Card Corresponding Card
PCSINF CSIF
PDHLC DHLC8/DLC8/DLC16
PSLC SLC8
PCSLC CSLC16
PT1 T1
PIPGW IP-GW4 (KX-TDA0480)
PIPGWH IP-GW4 (KX-TDA0484)
PIPGW16 IP-GW16
PPRI23 PRI23
POPB3 OPB
PCTILINK CTI-LINK
PIPEXT IP-EXT16
PVOIPEX IP-EXT16
PESLC ESLC16/EMSLC16 (KX-TDA600 only)
PEESLC ECSLC24 (KX-TDA600 only)
PELCOT ELCOT (KX-TDA600 only)
PEECHO EECHO (KX-TDA600 only)
PBUSS BUS-S (KX-TDA600 only)
CS Program
Name on SD Memory Card Corresponding Unit
PDCSDECT CS using a DHLC/DLC card for DECT Portable Station
PHCSDECT High-density CS for DECT Portable Station
PCS24G CS using a CSIF card for 2.4 GHz Portable Station
(KX-TDA100/KX-TDA200/KX-TDA600 only)
PDCS24G CS using a DHLC/DLC card for 2.4 GHz Portable Station
44 PC Programming Manual Document Version 2010-11
2.6.2 Utility—File Transfer PC to PBX (SD Card)
System Data
KX-TDA50
Name on SD Memory Card Corresponding Card
DSSYS MPR
DSSYS_S MPR*1
*1 DSSYS-file-format data that is transferred to the PBX is saved as "DSSYS_S".
KX-TDA100/KX-TDA200
Name on SD Memory Card Corresponding Card
DSYS MPR
DSYS_SUB MPR*1
*1 DSYS-file-format data that is transferred to the PBX is saved as "DSYS_SUB".
KX-TDA600
Name on SD Memory Card Corresponding Card
DLSYS EMPR
DLSYS_S EMPR*1
*1 DLSYS-file-format data that is transferred to the PBX is saved as "DLSYS_S".
Language Data
Name on SD Memory Card Corresponding Unit
DLNG0–DLNG1 PT
DVMLNG1–DVMLNG5 VPS (Display Guidance data)
Default Value Data
KX-TDA50
Name on SD Memory Card Corresponding Card
DSINI MPR
DSIDHLC DHLC4
DSISLCLC SLC4/SLC8
DSIDLC DLC4/DLC8
DSILCOT LCOT4
DSIEIO DPH4
DSIIPGW IP-GW4
Document Version 2010-11 PC Programming Manual 45
2.6.2 Utility—File Transfer PC to PBX (SD Card)
Name on SD Memory Card Corresponding Card
DSIIPEXT IP-EXT4
KX-TDA100/KX-TDA200
Name on SD Memory Card Corresponding Card
DINI MPR
DIDHLC DHLC8
DISLC SLC8/CSLC16
DIDLC DLC8/DLC16
DICSINF CSIF
DILCOT LCOT8/LCOT16
DIT1 T1
DIOPB3 OPB3
DICTILIN CTI-LINK
DIEIO EIO
DIIPGW1 IP-GW4 (KX-TDA0480)
DIIPGW2 IP-GW4 (KX-TDA0484)
DIIPGW3 IP-GW16
DIPRI23 PRI23
DISLCLC SLC16
DIIPEXT IP-EXT16
KX-TDA600
Name on SD Memory Card Corresponding Card
DLINI EMPR
DLIDHLC DHLC8
DLISLC SLC8, EMSLC16, ESLC16, ECSLC24
DLIDLC DLC8/DLC16
DLICSINF CSIF
DLILCOT ELCOT16
DLIT1 T1
DLIOPB3 OPB3
DLICTILI CTI-LINK
DLIEIO EIO
DLIIPGW1 IP-GW4 (KX-TDA0480)
46 PC Programming Manual Document Version 2010-11
2.6.2 Utility—File Transfer PC to PBX (SD Card)
Name on SD Memory Card Corresponding Card
DLIIPGW2 IP-GW4 (KX-TDA0484)
DLIIPGW3 IP-GW16
DLIPRI23 PRI23
DLIIPEXT IP-EXT16
To transfer files to the SD memory card
1. From the Utility menu, select File Transfer PC to PBX (SD Card).
The dialog box will be displayed.
2. Select the file to upload.
A window showing the upload progress will be displayed.
While transferring files to the SD memory card, the PBX automatically renames them according to the
header information.
A message will be displayed when the transfer is complete.
3. Click OK.
2.6.3 Utility—File Transfer PBX (SD Card) to PC
Copies system data files from the SD memory card installed in the PBX to the connected PC.
This option is only available at Installer level.
The files that can be downloaded from the SD memory card are as follows:
File Name File Type
DSSYS (KX-TDA50)
DSYS (KX-TDA100/KX-TDA200)
DLSYS (KX-TDA600)
System Data
$SYSERR Error Data
$SYSERR1–$SYSERR9
DSKEYSD (KX-TDA50)
DKEYSD (KX-TDA100/KX-TDA200)
DLKEYSD (KX-TDA600)
Feature Access
Downloading the DSYS/DSSYS/DLSYS system data file allows you to make a backup of the configuration of
the PBX.
The error data files are snapshots of the configuration of the PBX taken automatically when a major error
causes a system reset. They can be analyzed by your dealer to identify the source of a problem. If there is
only one error data file, its name will be $SYSERR. If there is more than one file, the files will be numbered in
chronological order, up to a maximum of 9 files.
To transfer files to the PC
1. From the Utility menu, select File Transfer PBX (SD Card) to PC.
2. Select the file to download from the list of files on the SD memory card.
Only the files listed in the table above can be downloaded. Selecting any other file will cause an error
message to be displayed.
3. Click Transfer.
The Save dialog box will be displayed
Document Version 2010-11 PC Programming Manual 47
2.6.3 Utility—File Transfer PBX (SD Card) to PC
4. Navigate to the folder in which you want to save the file.
5. Enter a file name.
6. Click Save.
A window showing the download progress will be displayed.
A message will be displayed when the transfer is complete.
7. Click OK.
2.6.4 Utility—SD Card File View and Load
Displays a list of files on the SD memory card, and allows you to update the programs stored in LPR cards
(cards with local processors) (KX-TDA100/KX-TDA200/KX-TDA600 only) and Cell Stations (CSs).
This option is only available at Installer level.
To update the program stored in an LPR card (KX-TDA100/KX-TDA200/KX-TDA600 only), the card must first
be set to out of service (OUS). To update the program stored in a CS (KX-T0141/KX-TDA0142), the port of
the card (CSIF/DHLC/DLC) that the CS is attached to must be set to OUS, but the card itself must be set to in
service (INS). Only cards that are in the correct status will be displayed.
The name, date and time of creation, and size of files are displayed.
To view and load files on the SD memory card
1. From the Utility menu, select SD Card File View and Load.
2. Click on the name of the desired file.
Only files containing program data (whose filenames start with "P") can be selected.
3. Click Detail.
The Detail screen will be displayed. Header information from the chosen SD memory card file is displayed
on the left.
4. From the Card drop-down list on the right, select the card(s) whose software you want to update.
•To update a specific card or port:
•LPR cards (KX-TDA100/KX-TDA200/KX-TDA600 only): select the slot number and card name.
•CSs (KX-T0141/KX-TDA0142): select the slot number and card name, and then select the related
CS port from the drop-down list directly below.
•To update all matching cards simultaneously:
•Select "ALL".
5. Click View to update the displayed header information of the selected files.
The file with the higher File Version and File Revision numbers is newer.
6. Click Load to update the file stored on the PBX.
When the update is finished, a message will be displayed.
7. Click OK.
The display will return to the Detail screen.
2.6.5 Utility—SD Card File Delete
Allows you to delete files from the SD memory card.
This option is only available at Installer level.
The following essential system files cannot be deleted by this utility:
KX-TDA50: PSMPR, DSSYS, DSKEYSD
KX-TDA100/KX-TDA200: PMPR, DSYS, DKEYSD
KX-TDA600: PLMPR, DLSYS, DLKEYSD
To delete files from the SD memory card
1. From the Utility menu, select SD Card File Delete.
2. Click on the file to be deleted.
48 PC Programming Manual Document Version 2010-11
2.6.5 Utility—SD Card File Delete
3. Click Delete.
A confirmation screen will be displayed.
4. Click OK.
The display will return to the SD Card File Delete screen.
2.6.6 Utility—Message File Transfer PC to PBX
Transfers Outgoing Message (OGM) files from the PC to the selected MSG/ESVM card.
This option is only available at Installer level, and requires that at least 1 MSG/ESVM card is installed. For the
KX-TDA100/KX-TDA200/KX-TDA600, the OPB card that it is mounted on must be set to OUS status. For the
KX-TDA50, the MSG/ESVM card must be set to OUS status.
Files are stored on the MSG/ESVM card in the location specified by the file’s header information. Uploaded
files are automatically renamed as necessary. If this location already contains an OGM, it will be overwritten
by the newly uploaded message.
To transfer OGMs to an MSG/ESVM card
1. From the Utility menu, select Message File Transfer PC to PBX.
2. Select the target MSG/ESVM card, or "ALL", from the drop-down list, and click OK.
The Open dialog box will be displayed.
3. Select the message files to upload.
It is possible to select multiple files.
4. Click OK.
The files will be uploaded. Files that do not contain message data will be ignored.
When complete, the display will return to the main screen.
2.6.7 Utility—Message File Transfer PBX to PC
Transfers Outgoing Message (OGM) files from the MSG/ESVM card to the PC.
This option is only available at Installer level, and requires that at least 1 MSG/ESVM card is installed. For the
KX-TDA100/KX-TDA200/KX-TDA600, the OPB card that it is mounted on must be set to OUS status. For the
KX-TDA50, the MSG/ESVM card must be set to OUS status.
To transfer OGMs to the PC
1. From the Utility menu, select Message File Transfer PBX to PC.
2. From the upper drop-down list, select the target MSG/ESVM card.
3. From the lower drop-down list, select the messages to transfer.
•To transfer a certain message, select the number of that message.
•To transfer all messages at once, select "ALL".
The Save dialog box will be displayed.
4. Enter a file name.
5. Click Save.
6. Click OK.
When you choose to transfer all messages, each message is saved as an individual file, with a number
appended to the file name corresponding to that message’s location on the MSG/ESVM card.
When complete, the display will return to the main screen.
2.6.8 Utility—Error Log
Collects and displays system error information.
Document Version 2010-11 PC Programming Manual 49
2.6.8 Utility—Error Log
Whenever there is a system failure, the PBX stores the error code generated. The connected PC collects all
of these codes, along with other information, and displays an explanatory error message.
The functions of the buttons on this screen are as follows:
Button Function
Cancel Closes the Error Log screen without saving.
Capture Saves the currently displayed Error Log information as a text file.
Minor Displays minor errors, which affect only a certain part of system
operation.
Major Displays major errors, which affect operation of the whole system, or
result in system failure.
Clear Erases the stored error log information from both the screen and the
PBX.
Log Information Displays probable causes of the errors and their solutions.
The items displayed on screen are as follows:
Item Description
Index The ordinal number assigned to an error record in the current log.
Date The date of the error detection.
Time The time of the error detection.
Error Code The 3-digit error code assigned by the PBX.
50 PC Programming Manual Document Version 2010-11
2.6.8 Utility—Error Log
Item Description
Sub Code The 5-digit sub code of the relevant hardware. (XYYZZ)
•X: Shelf number
KX-TDA50/KX-TDA100/KX-TDA200: 1
KX-TDA600:
•1: Basic Shelf
•2: Expansion Shelf 1
•3: Expansion Shelf 2
•4: Expansion Shelf 3
•YY: Slot number
KX-TDA50: 00 to 11 (00: MPR slot; 01: Fixed slot, 02 to 04: Free
slot type A, 05 to 07: Free slot type B, 08 to 11: Option slot)
KX-TDA100: 00 to 06 (00: MPR slot; 01 to 06: Free slot)
KX-TDA200: 00 to 11 (00: MPR slot; 01 to 11: Free slot)
KX-TDA600:
•Basic Shelf: 00 to 10
(00: EMPR Card Slot; 01 to 10: Free Slots)
•Expansion Shelf: 01 to 12
(01 to 11: Free Slots; 12: BUS-S Card Slot)
•ZZ: Physical port number (01 to 16)
For OPB3 card, sub slot number (1 to 3) + port number (1 to 4)
will be displayed as follows:
•Sub slot 1 of OPB3: 11 to 14
•Sub slot 2 of OPB3: 21 to 24
•Sub slot 3 of OPB3: 31 to 34
Error Message A description of the error.
To view the error log
•From the Utility menu, select Error Log.
2.6.9 Utility—T1 Signaling Bit Monitor (KX-TDA100/KX-TDA200/
KX-TDA600 only)
Displays reference signaling bit information for all channels of the T1 card, by monitoring sent and received A,
B, C and D bits. This utility is intended for use by dealers.
This option is only available at Installer level, and requires that the target T1 card be set to INS status.
While monitoring is being performed, any displayed bits whose value changes from 0 to 1 or vice versa will be
highlighted in red until the next screen refresh is performed.
To view signaling bit information
1. From the Utility menu, select T1 Signaling Bit Monitor.
2. From the Slot No drop-down list, select the target slot.
3. From the Interval Timer drop-down list, select the number of seconds between each automatic screen
refresh.
4. Click Start.
Monitoring will be performed and the screen will refresh according to the interval specified.
5. Click Stop to end monitoring.
To refresh the screen at any time while monitoring is stopped, click Refresh.
Document Version 2010-11 PC Programming Manual 51
2.6.9 Utility—T1 Signaling Bit Monitor (KX-TDA100/KX-TDA200/KX-TDA600 only)
2.6.10 Utility—T1 Line Trace (KX-TDA100/KX-TDA200/
KX-TDA600 only)
Traces the sent and received signaling bits and dial numbers on the specified channel of the T1 line. This utility
is intended for use by dealers.
This option is only available at Installer level, and requires that the target T1 card be set to INS status.
To view T1 trace data
1. From the Utility menu, select T1 Line Trace.
2. From the Slot No drop-down list, select the target slot.
3. From the CH No drop-down list, select the target channel.
4. Click Start.
Trace information will be displayed. The information is automatically updated whenever the data being
monitored changes.
5. Click Stop to end the trace.
6. Select an option:
•Click Capture to save the displayed trace information.
Information is saved as a text-format file.
•Click Clear to erase the information.
2.6.11 Utility—ISDN/QSIG Protocol Trace
This utility collects protocol trace data from PRI or IP-GW cards, and displays it on the PC.
This option is only available at Installer level, and requires that the target PRI or IP-GW card be set to INS
status.
Protocol trace data is continually accumulated on ISDN and IP-GW cards, and 3 types of data can be
downloaded:
•Real Time Trace (not available when connecting via LAN): Pseudo-real-time data is collected through data
polling at one-second intervals. The displayed information is updated beginning when the Start button is
clicked.
•Accumulation Trace: Previously accumulated data is retrieved and displayed.
•Error Accumulation Trace: Previously accumulated error data is retrieved and displayed. This trace shows
the data snapshot that is taken just before a card resets.
To view trace data
1. From the Utility menu, select ISDN/QSIG Protocol Trace.
2. From the Slot No drop-down list, select the target slot.
3. From the Trace Data Type drop-down list, select the type of data to view.
4. Click Start.
Trace information will be displayed.
5. Select an option:
•Click Capture to save the displayed trace information.
•Click Clear to clear the screen display.
6. Click Cancel to return to the main screen.
2.6.12 Utility—Digital Trunk Error Report (KX-TDA100/
KX-TDA200/KX-TDA600 only)
Displays accumulated information on various types of errors occurring on digital CO lines.
52 PC Programming Manual Document Version 2010-11
2.6.12 Utility—Digital Trunk Error Report (KX-TDA100/KX-TDA200/KX-TDA600 only)
This option is only available at Installer level.
The value displayed for each error item is the number of times that each error occurred during the time period
selected. Average values for these items vary depending upon many factors, such as the equipment being
used, and the distance from the telephone company.
The displayed items are as follows:
Item Description
Time Time of error
Slot Relevant slot and card type
Counter of Digital Trunk
Error Logs logged in
"Minor Error" Log
Out of SYNC (#300) Digital CO line out of sync (Loss of Signal)
RAI (#301) Digital CO line RAI signal reception
AIS (#302) Digital CO line Alarm Indication Signal
reception
Frame Failure (#300) Digital CO line frame failure (Loss of Frame)
Counter of minor
communication error
CRC Cyclic Redundancy Check error
SF Severely errored frame (or Severe Framing
Error)
FE Frame synchronization bit-error
LV Line Code Violation
SL Controlled slip
To view digital CO line information
1. From the Utility menu, select Digital Trunk Error Report.
2. From the Slot No drop-down list, select the target slot.
•To generate a report on a specific card, select the slot number and card name.
•To generate a report on all matching cards simultaneously, select "ALL".
3. From the Display form drop-down list, select the time period to view.
4. Click Execute.
The error report will be displayed.
2.6.13 Utility—IP Extension Statistical Information
Displays accumulated statistical information on both IP extensions and IP-EXT cards.
The displayed items are as follows:
Item Description
Collection Started Time Date and time the port was last reset.
Port No. Number of the port.
RTP Receive Packet Counter Total number of packets received.
RTP Receive Lost Packet Counter Total number of packets lost.
Document Version 2010-11 PC Programming Manual 53
2.6.13 Utility—IP Extension Statistical Information
Item Description
RTP Receive Abandoned Packet Counter Total number of packets abandoned.
RTP Arrive Packet Interval (MAX.) [ms] Maximum time taken for a packet to
arrive.
RTP Arrive Packet Interval (MIN.) [ms] Minimum time taken for a packet to
arrive.
To view IP extension information
1. From the Utility menu, select IP Extension Statistical Information.
2. From the Card Selection drop-down list, select the slot number.
3. Click Execute.
The statistical information will be displayed.
4. Select an option:
•Click Capture if you want to save the displayed information.
1. Enter a file name, or select a file to overwrite.
2. Click Save.
•Click Clear to erase the information and reset the Collection Started Time.
5. Click Cancel to return to the main screen.
2.6.14 Utility—CS Information
Displays information stored by the PBX regarding each Cell Station (CS).
This option is only available at Installer level, and requires that the target CSIF, DHLC or DLC card be set to
INS status.
For DHLC/DLC cards, only the information for ports that have CSs connected to them is displayed.
The displayed items are as follows:
Item Description
Shelf-Slot Number of the slot (for KX-TDA600, shelf and slot)
Port Number of the port
CS Name Name of the attached CS
Status Service status of the attached CS: INS, OUS, or FAULT.
If the status is FAULT, subsequent data items for that port will be left
blank.
Version Version number of the program file stored in the CS
Revision Revision number of the program file stored in the CS
CSID 12-digit ID number of the CS
Path Number of the wireless extension currently using each path. In the case
of a group, several extensions may be using the same floating extension
number.
When an extension number is not registered, the display shows
"OFF". The number of paths that can be used varies for each CS model.
For more details, see the documentation for your CS.
54 PC Programming Manual Document Version 2010-11
2.6.14 Utility—CS Information
Item Description
Group Call Number of PSs registered to the attached CS that are members of a PS
Ring Group.
To view CS information
1. From the Utility menu, select CS Information.
2. From the Target CSI/F Slot No. drop-down list, select the target slot.
•To display information on a single card, select the slot number and name of that card.
•To display information on all matching cards, select "ALL".
3. From the Interval Timer drop-down list, select the number of seconds between each automatic screen
refresh.
4. If you want to save the CS information, click Capture.
a. Create a file for saving the data.
b. Click Start.
c. Click Close.
5. Click Start to begin monitoring.
Monitoring will be performed and the screen will refresh according to the interval specified.
To refresh the screen manually at any time, click Refresh.
6. Click Stop to end monitoring.
7. If you started to save the CS information in step 4, click Capture, then click Stop to record the information
to the specified file.
8. Click Close to return to the main screen.
2.6.15 Utility—PS Information
Displays Portable Station (PS) registration information, including the associated Cell Station (CS).
This option is only available at Installer level.
The displayed items are as follows:
Item Description
PS No. PS location number.
Only registered PSs will be displayed.
Extension Number Extension number of the PS.
Location—Slot Slot number of the CS that the PS is registered with.
Location—Port Port number of the CS that the PS is registered with.
To view PS information
1. From the Utility menu, select PS Information.
2. Click Refresh.
Document Version 2010-11 PC Programming Manual 55
2.6.15 Utility—PS Information
2.6.16 Utility—Timed Update (KX-TDA100/KX-TDA200/
KX-TDA600 only)
Updates programs in the LPR cards (optional service cards with local processors) by comparing them with
files found on the SD memory card on a preset schedule, and downloading newer files to the cards.
This option is only available at Installer level.
It is recommended to set the timed update to take place during the least active time period, for example late
at night.
Cards are automatically set to OUS status during an update, and returned to INS status when the update is
complete.
This utility does not apply to CS programs. These must be updated manually using the SD Card File View
and Load utility (see 2.6.4 Utility—SD Card File View and Load).
When this utility has been set, all commands that would affect the status of cards are prevented from operating.
The list of these commands is as follows:
•Card status change (INS/OUS)
•Diagnosis commands
•Card installation
•Card deletion
•Remote reset
•LPR program download requests
•Signaling Bit Monitor requests (T1)
•Line trace start requests (T1)
•ISDN/QSIG Protocol Data Trace start requests
•Time setting
•CS program download requests
•File deletion
When a function other than those listed above, that cannot be performed while Timed Update has been set,
is selected, an error message will be displayed.
To turn this utility on:
1. From the Utility menu, select Timed Update.
2. Select the Set option.
The time setting box will become available.
3. Enter the desired time using the number keys.
Click in the hour or minute field and use the up and down arrows to adjust the displayed time in increments
of one unit.
4. Click Apply.
A message box will be displayed.
5. Click Yes.
To turn this utility off:
1. From the Utility menu, select Timed Update.
2. Select the Off (Cancel) option.
3. Click Apply.
A message box will be displayed.
4. Click Yes.
56 PC Programming Manual Document Version 2010-11
2.6.16 Utility—Timed Update (KX-TDA100/KX-TDA200/KX-TDA600 only)
2.6.17 Utility—System Reset—Reset by the Command
Updates the main system program and data files stored within the PBX using files taken from the SD memory
card, and resets the connected PBX.
This option is only available at Installer level.
2 copies of each of the main system files can be stored on the SD memory card. The names of these files are
as follows:
KX-TDA50
File Name Description
DSSYS Main system data file. Contains all of the current configuration data for
the PBX.
DSSYS_S Backup main system data file
PSMPR PBX program file. Contains the software to run the MPR board of the
PBX.
PSMPR_S Backup PBX program file
KX-TDA100/KX-TDA200
File Name Description
DSYS Main system data file. Contains all of the current configuration data for
the PBX.
DSYS_SUB Backup main system data file
PMPR PBX program file. Contains the software to run the MPR board of the
PBX.
PMPR_SUB Backup PBX program file
KX-TDA600
File Name Description
DLSYS Main system data file. Contains all of the current configuration data for
the PBX.
DLSYS_S Backup main system data file
PLMPR PBX program file. Contains the software to run the EMPR board of the
PBX.
PLMPR_S Backup PBX program file
When new DSYS/DSSYS/DLSYS and PMPR/PSMPR/PLMPR files are transferred from a connected PC to
the SD memory card using the File Transfer PC to PBX (SD Card) utility (see 2.6.2 Utility—File Transfer
PC to PBX (SD Card)), they are stored as the backup files. To use these files on the PBX, it is necessary to
first swap them with the currently active files on the SD memory card.
Requirements
•This utility only functions on PBXs version 1.005 and later.
•On earlier versions, the reset request confirmation screen will be displayed, and files will not be updated.
Document Version 2010-11 PC Programming Manual 57
2.6.17 Utility—System Reset—Reset by the Command
To update system files and reset the PBX
1. From the Utility menu, point to System Reset and then click Reset by the Command.
2. Choose whether to back up current system data or not.
•Click SD Backup to back up the current system data to the SD memory card before proceeding.
Select this if you intend to use the current system data unchanged after reset.
•Click Skip to continue without backing up.
Select this if you intend to replace the current system data with data that was uploaded from the PC.
The second screen will be displayed. A list of matching files found on the SD memory card, with dates and
times, is shown at the top.
3. Select whether to replace the DSYS/DSSYS/DLSYS and PMPR/PSMPR/PLMPR files or not.
When no backup file is found, the corresponding options are not available.
4. Click OK.
A confirmation screen will be displayed.
5. Select an option:
•Click OK to reset the PBX.
If OK is clicked, a final confirmation screen will be displayed.
•Click Cancel to return to the main screen without copying files.
6. Click OK to reset the PBX, or Cancel to return to the main screen without copying files.
If the reset command was not carried out correctly, an error message will be displayed, and you will be
returned to the main screen.
After resetting the PBX with this command, it is necessary to reconnect to the PBX to continue programming.
2.6.18 Utility—Flash ROM ID Information
Displays the Flash ROM ID number pre-assigned to the PBX, used for PBX installation management.
To view the Flash ROM ID
•From the Utility menu, click Flash ROM ID Information.
58 PC Programming Manual Document Version 2010-11
2.6.18 Utility—Flash ROM ID Information
2.7 Help
2.7.1 Frequently Asked Questions (FAQ)
This section provides answers to some common questions about using the Maintenance Console software to
program the PBX. The information is divided into the following topics:
Title Description
Connection Connecting to the PBX using Maintenance Console.
Maintenance Console Software Using the Maintenance Console software.
Card Status Changing the status (INS/OUS) of cards.
Portable Stations Setting up portable stations, including registration and deregistration.
Numbering Changing the numbering plan for the PBX, or numbers of individual
extensions or features.
Saving Modified Data Safely saving PBX data edited with Maintenance Console.
Setting Features Setting up individual features.
Connection
Q The Maintenance Console cannot connect to the PBX via RS-232C cable.
A•Is the cable firmly connected to both the PC and the PBX?
•Is the serial port that the PC uses correctly specified?
•Is the baud rate correct?
The default setting, and a safe rate, is 19 200 bps.
•Is the password correct?
•Is the Maintenance Console not connected to the PBX by another connection method?
Q The Maintenance Console cannot connect to the PBX via USB.
A•Is the USB cable firmly connected to both the PC and the PBX?
•Is the USB driver on the PC running?
To confirm, open the Windows Device Manager, and look for "Panasonic KX-TDA USB
Main Unit driver" in the USB Controllers section. If it is not present, re-install the USB
driver.
•Is the password correct?
•Is the Maintenance Console not connected to the PBX by another connection method?
Q The Maintenance Console cannot connect to the PBX via LAN.
A•Is the PC connected to the LAN?
•Have the IP address and port number of the PBX been set correctly? For more details,
see 3.30 [1-1] Slot—Card Property - CTILINK (KX-TDA100/KX-TDA200/
KX-TDA600 only).
•Is the password correct?
•Is the Maintenance Console not connected to the PBX by another connection method?
Document Version 2010-11 PC Programming Manual 59
2.7.1 Frequently Asked Questions (FAQ)
Q The Maintenance Console cannot connect to the PBX via modem.
A•Is the dial number of the modem correct? For more details, see 13.1 [11-1] Main.
•Has a modem been installed to the PBX?
•Are the modem settings of the PBX and Maintenance Console correct? For more
details, see 13.1 [11-1] Main.
•Is the password correct?
•Is the Maintenance Console not connected to the PBX by another connection method?
Q Can I perform initial setup of the PBX without being connected to the PBX?
A•Yes. This is possible in Batch mode.
Create a new system data file using 2.2.1 Program launcher—New, edit settings as
required, and then upload this file to the PBX later (see 2.6.2 Utility—File Transfer
PC to PBX (SD Card)).
Maintenance Console Software
Q How do I confirm the software version of the PBX or installed cards?
A•From 3.1 [1-1] Slot, click Summary. Summary information, including software
versions, is displayed for all cards installed in the PBX.
Q Not all of the characters of a setting can be displayed because the column is too
narrow.
A•Move the mouse to the line between the names of 2 setting items, at the top of the
table.
The pointer will change to a double arrow. Click and drag the line to the right until all
characters are displayed.
Card Status
Q The status of a new card will not change to "INS".
A•With the new card installed, does the total number of extensions or CO lines exceed
the maximum supported by the PBX?
•Is the type of card installed in the slot different from the card type set as "Pre-Install"
for that slot? Confirm that the correct card is installed in the slot.
•Is the card firmly and fully installed in the slot? Confirm that the card is installed
correctly in the slot.
•Confirm that the card is not damaged.
Q I want to set the status of only 1 port of the IP-GW4 card to "OUS".
A•This cannot be done, since the IP-GW4 card requires both channels of a port to be
set to "OUS"/"INS" together.
Q I cannot change an LCO port to INS status.
60 PC Programming Manual Document Version 2010-11
2.7.1 Frequently Asked Questions (FAQ)
A•Is the card installed in the appropriate slot?
•Is the card installed in the correct slot, but not functioning correctly?
Check the condition of the card.
•Is the card itself in INS status?
Set it to INS status.
•Is a CO line connected to the appropriate port?
•Is the port in FAULT status, even though a CO line is connected?
Run diagnosis on the relevant slot.
Q How do I prevent newly installed cards automatically being changed to "INS"?
A•Change New Card Installation—Card Status for any Card in 3.35 [1-3]
Option from "In Service (INS)" to "Out of Service (OUS)".
Portable Stations
Q I cannot register Portable Stations using the method described in Portable Station
[1-2].
A•Is the status of the CSIF, DHLC or DLC card set to "INS"?
•Is a CS connected to the CSIF, DHLC or DLC card? If not, connect one.
•Do the PINs (Personal Identification Numbers) of the PBX and the Portable Station
match? Confirm that they are the same.
•Is the Portable Station within transmission range of the CS?
•Has the Portable Station previously been registered at another location?
It is not possible to register a Portable Station at 2 locations, so use the Forced
De-registration option to delete the previous registration.
Q I cannot delete the extension number of a Portable Station.
A•First, de-register the Portable Station itself, and then delete the extension number.
Q I cannot de-register a Portable Station.
A•Is the Portable Station turned on? If not, turn it on.
•Is the Portable Station within transmission range of the CS? If not, move it closer to
the CS and try the de-registration operation again.
Q The Portable Station I want to de-register is broken, and will not turn on, or is not
available, or the registration information was deleted first from the Portable Station,
so it cannot be de-registered.
A•The Portable Station can be forcibly de-registered by following the procedure shown
in Forced De-registration of 3.34 [1-2] Portable Station.
Q I changed the extension number of a Portable Station, but the display of the Portable
Station still shows the old extension number.
A•Turn the Portable Station off and back on again, to force it to re-register its location.
Q I changed the FCO of a Portable Station, but the display of the Portable Station still
shows the old FCO.
A•Turn the Portable Station off and back on again, to force it to re-register its location.
Document Version 2010-11 PC Programming Manual 61
2.7.1 Frequently Asked Questions (FAQ)
Q If I delete the extension number of a Portable Station, and then turn the Portable
Station off and back on again, it does not function correctly.
A•Do not delete the extension number of the Portable Station, as this information is
necessary for it to operate.
Numbering
Q How do I change the extension number of a wired extension?
A•Change the extension number of the target port to the new number, and click Apply.
Next, set the port to OUS status, and then back to INS status.
Q I changed the extension number of a wired extension while the extension was
engaged in a call, but the display still shows the previous extension number.
A•The extension number will not change while the extension is in use. When the
conversation is finished, set the port to OUS status, and then back to INS status.
Q How do I change the extension numbering plan from 3-digit numbers to 4-digit
numbers?
A•Perform the following steps:
1. Open the 4.8 [2-6-1] Numbering Plan—Main screen.
2. Enter a 2-digit number in Leading Number, or change No. of Additional
Digits from "x" to "xx".
For more details, see What is the procedure to modify the Numbering Plan?
in Numbering.
Q How do I set a 3-digit numbering plan?
A•There are 2 methods of creating a 3-digit numbering plan, using 4.8 [2-6-1]
Numbering Plan—Main:
1. Set the leading number to be 2 digits, with one additional digit. This method allows
a maximum of 10 extensions.
Example: Leading Number = 10; No. of Additional Digits = x
In this example, extension numbers 100 to 109 can be used.
2. Set the leading number to be one digit, with 2 additional digits. This method allows
a maximum of 100 extensions.
Example: Leading Number = 1; No. of Additional Digits = xx
In this example, extension numbers 100 to 199 can be used.
For more details, see What is the procedure to modify the Numbering Plan? in
Numbering.
Q What is the procedure to modify the Numbering Plan?
62 PC Programming Manual Document Version 2010-11
2.7.1 Frequently Asked Questions (FAQ)
A•Perform the following steps:
1. Confirm that the Numbering Plan you will change is not currently being used by
any extensions (see 2.5.7 Tool—Extension List View).
If it is being used by extensions, temporarily change the extension numbers of
those extensions to that of another numbering plan, or delete the extension
number (see 6.1 [4-1-1] Wired Extension—Extension Settings and
6.10 [4-2-1] Portable Station—Extension Settings).
2. Clear the Leading Number cell.
3. Click Apply.
4. Modify the No. of Additional Digits cell as required.
5. Click Apply.
6. Enter the desired value in the Leading Number cell.
7. Click Apply.
8. Set all extension ports to OUS status.
9. On the relevant screens, set the extension numbers of extensions to the desired
values.
10. Set all extension ports back to INS status.
Q When modifying the Numbering Plan, I cannot change the Leading Number.
A•It is not possible to use the same Leading Number for 2 extension blocks, or to use a
number that could possibly overlap with another Leading Number.
So, for example, if "2" is already set as a Leading Number it is not possible to set
"21" as another Leading Number because of the possible overlap of extension
numbers.
The number you are trying to store cannot be used if it is already being used by:
•A feature number
•Another extension block
•A Dial setting (see 11.1 [9-1] TIE Table)
•Quick Dialing (see 4.9 [2-6-2] Numbering Plan—Quick Dial)
In any of these cases, choose another number.
Q When modifying the Numbering Plan, how do I set a 1-digit extension number?
A•Perform the following steps:
1. Clear the Leading Number cell.
2. Click Apply.
3. Set No. of Additional Digits to "None".
4. Click Apply.
5. Enter the desired value in the Leading Number cell.
6. Click Apply.
7. Set all extension ports to OUS status.
8. On the relevant screens, set the extension numbers of extensions to the desired
values.
9. Set all extension ports back to INS status.
Q How do I change a feature number?
A•Perform the following steps:
1. Open the 4.8 [2-6-1] Numbering Plan—Main screen.
2. Change the value in the Dial cell of the desired feature.
3. Click Apply.
Document Version 2010-11 PC Programming Manual 63
2.7.1 Frequently Asked Questions (FAQ)
Q I cannot change a feature number.
A•It is not possible to use the same number for 2 items.
The number you are trying to store cannot be used if it is already being used by:
•A feature number
•An extension
•A Dial setting (see 11.1 [9-1] TIE Table)
•Quick Dialing (see 4.9 [2-6-2] Numbering Plan—Quick Dial)
In any of these cases, choose another number.
Q How do I change the code used to access another PBX?
A•Perform the following steps:
1. Open the 4.8 [2-6-1] Numbering Plan—Main screen.
2. Select the Other PBX Extension tab.
3. Change the value in the Dial cell of the desired feature.
4. Click Apply.
Q I cannot change an Other PBX Extension code.
A•It is not possible to use the same number for 2 items.
The number you are trying to store cannot be used if it is already being used by:
•A feature number
•An extension
•A Dial setting (see 11.1 [9-1] TIE Table)
•Quick Dialing (see 4.9 [2-6-2] Numbering Plan—Quick Dial)
In any of these cases, choose another number.
Q I cannot change a feature number on the B/NA DND Call Feature screen.
A•The number you are trying to store is already being used by another call feature.
Please choose a different number.
Q How do I prevent extension numbers being automatically assigned to a newly
installed card?
A•Change New Card Installation—Automatic Extension Number Set for
Extension Card in the 3.35 [1-3] Option screen from "Automatic" to "Manual".
Saving Modified Data
Q Modified settings have not been updated in the PBX.
A•Click Apply or OK in the sub-menu screen.
Q Modified settings are not saved even when I press the Apply button.
A•To save the system data files, choose Save from the File menu.
Q If I reset the PBX directly after modifying settings, the modified settings are not
updated in the PBX.
64 PC Programming Manual Document Version 2010-11
2.7.1 Frequently Asked Questions (FAQ)
A•When you click Apply, the settings are updated in the PBX, but are not yet saved to
the SD memory card. If system data is not saved to the SD memory card, the PBX will
restore the data that was last saved to the card in the event that the PBX is reset, or
power is turned off and back on again.
Therefore, before resetting the PBX, click the SD memory backup icon to save the
system data to the SD memory card. Alternatively, exit the Maintenance Console. This
automatically saves system data to the SD memory card.
Note
Do not remove the SD memory card while power is supplied to the PBX. Doing so
may cause the PBX to fail to start when you try to restart the system.
Q After reinitializing the PBX, I restored system data from a previous backup.
However, some of the settings have not been restored to their previous values.
A•The following setting data is not saved to the SD memory card, so will be deleted when
the PBX is initialized. This data is stored in the PBX’s battery backup memory.
•Incoming Call Log
•Outgoing Call Log (including Last Number Redial)
•Message Waiting
•SMDR
•ICD Group monitor log for supervisor
•PBX date and time
•Timed Reminder
•LPR Timed Update time
•PT handset/headset volume
•PT SP-PHONE volume
•PT ring volume
•PT display contrast
•ICD Group login status
(All extensions are set to Login by default.)
•ICD Group Ready/Not Ready status
(All extensions are set to Ready by default.)
•Live Call Screening (LCS) On/Off
•Hands-free Answerback status
•Absent Message status of extensions
(Absent Message data itself is not cleared.)
•FWD/DND status
(FWD destinations are not cleared.)
•Extension Dial Lock/Remote Extension Dial Lock
•Extension PIN Lock/Extension PIN Lock counter
•Verification Code PIN Lock/Verification Code PIN Lock counter
•Password Lock counter for Remote System Programming
•PBX Error Log
•Digital Trunk Error Report data
In addition, the following data cannot be restored:
•SVM Log and messages (both greeting messages and voice messages left by
callers) recorded in an SVM/ESVM card
Document Version 2010-11 PC Programming Manual 65
2.7.1 Frequently Asked Questions (FAQ)
Setting Features
Q How do I change the dialing mode of an analog CO line?
A•From the 3.11 [1-1] Slot—Port Property - LCO Port screen, change the Dialing
Mode setting of the target port to "DTMF" or "Pulse", as required.
Q How do I set disconnect detection (CPC Detection) for an analog CO line?
A•From the 3.11 [1-1] Slot—Port Property - LCO Port screen, modify the CPC
Signal Detection Time—Outgoing, Incoming setting of the target port.
The required value varies by carrier. Transmission and reception can be set
separately.
Q How do I connect to another PBX using QSIG?
A•From the 3.14 [1-1] Slot—Port Property - PRI Port (KX-TDA100/KX-TDA200/
KX-TDA600 only) screen, set the Port Type of the port you want to use to either
"QSIG-Slave" or "QSIG-Master".
Q How do I change the type of an extension port?
A•Set the port to OUS status. Then, change DPT Type—Type in the 3.5 [1-1] Slot
—Port Property - Extension Port window.
Q I have set the type of an extension port to "DSS Console", but I cannot apply this
setting. (Error E000402)
A•The number entered in DPT Type—Location No. on the 3.5 [1-1] Slot—Port
Property - Extension Port screen is the same as that entered for another DSS
Console. Change this so that the numbers do not overlap.
Q I have set the type of an extension port to "VM (DPT)", but I cannot apply this setting.
(Error E000403)
A•The DPT Type—VM Unit No. and DPT Type—VM Port No. settings entered on
the 3.5 [1-1] Slot—Port Property - Extension Port screen are the same as those
entered for another VM (DPT). Change this so that the numbers do not overlap.
Q I have set the type of an extension port to "PC Console", but I cannot apply this
setting. (Error E000402)
A•The number entered in DPT Type—Location No. on the 3.5 [1-1] Slot—Port
Property - Extension Port screen is the same as that entered for another PC Console.
Change this so that the numbers do not overlap.
Q What programming do I have to perform to use a headset with an extension?
A•Set Headset OFF/ON on the 3.5 [1-1] Slot—Port Property - Extension Port
screen to "Headset ON".
Q What programming do I have to perform to use XDP with an extension port?
A•Set XDP Mode on the 3.5 [1-1] Slot—Port Property - Extension Port screen to
"On".
66 PC Programming Manual Document Version 2010-11
2.7.1 Frequently Asked Questions (FAQ)
Q How do I edit a Class of Service, or create a new Class of Service?
A•Class of Service feature restrictions can be set from the 4.11 [2-7-1] Class of Service
—COS Settings screen.
Q How do I restrict calls between 2 extensions?
A•Calls between extensions can be restricted from the 4.13 [2-7-3] Class of Service—
Internal Call Block screen. Click in the relevant cells to select the COS levels whose
extensions are blocked from calling each other.
Q How do I restrict CO line calls made by extensions?
A•CO line calls made by extensions can be restricted from the 4.12 [2-7-2] Class of
Service—External Call Block screen. Click in the relevant cells to select the CO line
groups that cannot be used by extensions associated with a particular COS in each
time mode.
To prevent extensions associated with a COS from making CO line calls, set all trunk
groups for that COS to "Block" (blue).
Q How do I modify the hold operation for SLTs?
A•It is possible to choose how to hold a line and transfer a call with an SLT using the
SLT—SLT Hold Mode option on the 4.17 [2-9] System Options screen.
For more details, see "3.1.2 Call Hold" of the Feature Manual.
Q How do I set up an Incoming Call Distribution (ICD) group to receive CO line calls
directly?
A•Perform the following steps:
1. On the 5.12 [3-5-1] Incoming Call Distribution Group—Group Settings screen,
enter the floating extension number you chose for the ICD group in the Floating
Extension Number cell.
2. Click Apply.
3. On the 5.13 [3-5-1] Incoming Call Distribution Group—Group Settings—
Member List screen, select the ICD group you created from the Incoming Call
Distribution drop-down list.
4. Enter the extension numbers of member extensions in the Extension
Number column.
5. Click Apply.
6. On the DIL tab of the 12.2 [10-2] DIL Table & Port Settings screen, enter the
floating extension number of the ICD group as the DIL Destination—Day,
Lunch, Break, Night of each time mode.
7. Modify other settings as required from the Group—Incoming Call Distribution
Group submenu.
Q How do I set the queuing operation for an Incoming Call Distribution group?
A•Perform the following steps:
1. On the 5.14 [3-5-2] Incoming Call Distribution Group—Queuing Time Table
screen, set the actions as required for each queuing table.
2. On the 5.12 [3-5-1] Incoming Call Distribution Group—Group Settings screen,
from the Queuing Time Table tab, select the number of the Queuing Time Table
to use in each time mode.
Document Version 2010-11 PC Programming Manual 67
2.7.1 Frequently Asked Questions (FAQ)
Q How do I add an extension as a member of an Incoming Call Distribution (ICD)
group?
A•Perform the following steps:
1. On the 5.13 [3-5-1] Incoming Call Distribution Group—Group Settings—
Member List screen, from the Incoming Call Distribution drop-down list, select
the group you want to modify.
The ICD group must have an extension number set.
2. Enter the extension number of the extension you want to add in a blank cell of the
Extension Number column.
3. Set Delayed Ring as necessary.
4. Click Apply.
Note that it is necessary to set the extension number of the ICD group in advance.
Q I cannot set system speed dialing numbers from PC Console.
A•Set the COS of the extension to which PC Console is connected to Manager class, by
setting Manager on the Extension Feature tab of the 4.11 [2-7-1] Class of
Service—COS Settings screen to "Enable".
•System speed dialing numbers can only be edited by one PC Console at a time.
Q I have set FWD through system programming, but calls are still not being forwarded.
A•Perform the following steps:
1. Check that the Call from CO—Present Button Status or Call from
Extension—Present Button Status of the target extension on the 6.3 [4-1-2]
Wired Extension—FWD/DND or 6.12 [4-2-2] Portable Station—FWD/DND
screen is set to "FWD".
2. Create a FWD button on the target extension if one does not already exist.
3. Press the FWD button so that it changes to FWD status.
68 PC Programming Manual Document Version 2010-11
2.7.1 Frequently Asked Questions (FAQ)
Section 3
[1] Configuration
Document Version 2010-11 PC Programming Manual 69
3.1 [1-1] Slot
The operating characteristics associated with each service card can be programmed.
Move the mouse pointer over an installed card to display the menu of options for that card. To view a summary
of status and MPR versions for all cards installed in the PBX, click the Summary button (see 3.2 [1-1] Slot
—Summary).
To install a new card to the PBX
1. Click on the name of the card to install in the list on the right.
An image of the card will be displayed to the left of the list, and information about the card will be shown
below.
2. Click and drag the image of the card to the free slot it is to be installed in, and release it.
The card will move into the slot space.
3. Click Yes to confirm.
To install a new shelf to the PBX (KX-TDA600 only)
1. Move the mouse pointer over the first greyed PBX image at the bottom of the screen.
Pre-Install will be shown under the mouse pointer.
2. Click Pre-Install.
3. Click Yes to confirm.
To select a different shelf of the PBX (KX-TDA600 only)
1. Move the mouse pointer over the white PBX image at the bottom of the screen you wish to select.
Select Shelf will be shown under the mouse pointer.
2. Click Select Shelf.
To access card properties
1. Move the mouse pointer over a card.
A menu will be shown under the mouse pointer.
2. Select Card Property.
The property screen for that card will be displayed.
To access port properties
1. Move the mouse pointer over a card.
A menu will be shown under the mouse pointer.
2. Select Port Property.
The property screen for that card’s port or ports will be displayed.
To remove a card from the PBX
1. Move the mouse pointer over the card to remove.
A menu will be shown under the mouse pointer.
2. Select Delete.
3. Click Yes to confirm.
The card will be removed.
70 PC Programming Manual Document Version 2010-11
3.1 [1-1] Slot
To change the status (INS/OUS) of a card (Interactive mode only)
1. Move the mouse pointer over the card.
A menu will be shown under the mouse pointer.
2. Select the desired status:
•Click INS to set the card to in-service status.
•Click OUS to set the card to out-of-service status.
To install an option card on an OPB3 card
1. Move the mouse pointer over the card.
A menu will be shown under the mouse pointer.
2. Select Option Card.
The OPB3 Option Card Setup screen will be displayed. See 3.29 [1-1] Slot—OPB3 Option Card Setup
(KX-TDA100/KX-TDA200/KX-TDA600 only).
Supported Card Types
KX-TDA50
Card Maximum
Quantity
Supported
Slot Numbers Card Programming
MPR: Main Processing Card 1 00 3.3 [1-1] Slot—Card Property - MPR
DHLC4: Pre-installed Super
Hybrid Ports
1 01
3.4 [1-1] Slot—Card Property -
Extension Type
DLC4: 4-Port Digital Extension
Card
102–04 (Type A
Slots)
HLC4: 4-Port Hybrid Extension
Card
PLC4: 4-Port Proprietary
Extension Card
SLC4: 4-Port Single Line
Telephone Extension Card
LCOT4: 4-Port Analog Trunk Card 3 3.10 [1-1] Slot—Card Property -
LCO type
DLC8: 8-Port Digital Extension
Card
2
05–07 (Type B
Slots)
3.4 [1-1] Slot—Card Property -
Extension Type
PLC8: 8-Port Proprietary
Extension Card
SLC8: 8-Port Single Line
Telephone Extension Card
IP-GW4: 4-Channel VoIP
Gateway Card
1 3.19 [1-1] Slot—Card Property - IP
Gateway
IP-EXT4: 4-Channel VoIP
Extension Card
1 3.22 [1-1] Slot—Card Property - IP
Extension
SIP-GW4: 4-Channel SIP CO line
Card
1 3.25 [1-1] Slot—Card Property - SIP
Gateway (KX-TDA50 only)
Document Version 2010-11 PC Programming Manual 71
3.1 [1-1] Slot
Card Maximum
Quantity
Supported
Slot Numbers Card Programming
DPH4: 4-Port Doorphone Card 108–09 (Option
Slots)
3.31 [1-1] Slot—Card Property -
DPH type (KX-TDA50 only)
ESVM2: 2-Channel Simplified
Voice Message Card
4
08–11 (Option
Slots)
3.33 [1-1] Slot—Card Property -
ESVM Type (KX-TDA50 only)
MSG2: 2-Channel Message Card 2
None
ECHO8: 8-Channel Echo
Canceller Card
1
EXT-CID: Extension Caller ID
Card
1
SVM2: 2-Channel Simplified
Voice Message Card
2
For more information on cards and card installation, see "1.2.1 Optional Equipment" in the KX-TDA50
Installation Manual.
KX-TDA100/KX-TDA200
Card Maximum Quantity Card Programming
MPR: Main Processing Card 1 (fixed in Slot 00) 3.3 [1-1] Slot—Card Property - MPR
DHLC8: 8-Port Digital Hybrid
Extension Card
KX-TDA100: 6
KX-TDA200: 8
3.4 [1-1] Slot—Card Property -
Extension Type
DLC8: 8-Port Digital Extension Card
DLC16: 16-Port Digital Extension Card
MSLC16: 16-Port Single Line
Telephone Extension with Message
Lamp Card
SLC8: 8-Port Single Line Telephone
Extension Card
SLC16: 16-Port Single Line Telephone
Extension Card
CSLC16: 16-Port Single Line
Telephone Extension Card with Caller
ID
IP-EXT16: 16-Channel VoIP Extension
Card
3.22 [1-1] Slot—Card Property - IP
Extension
CSIF4: 4 Cell Station Interface Card KX-TDA100: 4
KX-TDA200: 4 None
CSIF8: 8 Cell Station Interface Card
LCOT8: 8-Port Analog CO Line Card KX-TDA100: 6
KX-TDA200: 8
3.10 [1-1] Slot—Card Property -
LCO type
LCOT16: 16-Port Analog CO Line Card
72 PC Programming Manual Document Version 2010-11
3.1 [1-1] Slot
Card Maximum Quantity Card Programming
PRI23: PRI Card (23B channels)
KX-TDA100: 4
KX-TDA200: 4
3.13 [1-1] Slot—Card Property - PRI
type (KX-TDA100/KX-TDA200/
KX-TDA600 only)
T1: T-1 CO Line Card 3.16 [1-1] Slot—Card Property - T1
type (KX-TDA100/KX-TDA200/
KX-TDA600 only)
IP-GW4 (KX-TDA0480/KX-TDA0484):
4-Channel VoIP Gateway Card KX-TDA100: 4
KX-TDA200: 4
3.19 [1-1] Slot—Card Property - IP
Gateway
IP-GW16: 16-Channel VoIP Gateway
Card
OPB3: Optional 3-Slot Base Card KX-TDA100: 4
KX-TDA200: 4
3.27 [1-1] Slot—OPB3 Card
Property (KX-TDA100/KX-TDA200/
KX-TDA600 only)
CTI-LINK: CTI Link Card KX-TDA100: 1
KX-TDA200: 1
3.30 [1-1] Slot—Card Property -
CTILINK (KX-TDA100/KX-TDA200/
KX-TDA600 only)
For more information on cards and card installation, see "1.3.1 Optional Equipment" in the KX-TDA100/
KX-TDA200 Installation Manual.
KX-TDA600
Card Maximum Quantity Card Programming
EMPR: Main Processing Card 1 (fixed in Slot 11) 3.3 [1-1] Slot—Card Property - MPR
DHLC8: 8-Port Digital Hybrid
Extension Card
40
3.4 [1-1] Slot—Card Property -
Extension Type
DLC8: 8-Port Digital Extension Card
DLC16: 16-Port Digital Extension Card
EMSLC16: 16-Port Single Line
Telephone Extension with Message
Lamp Card
SLC8: 8-Port Single Line Telephone
Extension Card
ESLC16: 16-Port Single Line
Telephone Extension Card
CSLC16: 16-Port Single Line
Telephone Extension Card with Caller
ID
ECSLC24: 24-Port Single Line
Telephone Extension Card with Caller
ID
IP-EXT16: 16-Channel VoIP Extension
Card
3.22 [1-1] Slot—Card Property - IP
Extension
Document Version 2010-11 PC Programming Manual 73
3.1 [1-1] Slot
Card Maximum Quantity Card Programming
CSIF4: 4 Cell Station Interface Card
16 None
CSIF8: 8 Cell Station Interface Card
ELCOT16: 16-Port Analog CO Line
Card
40 3.10 [1-1] Slot—Card Property -
LCO type
PRI23: PRI Card (23B channels)
20
3.13 [1-1] Slot—Card Property - PRI
type (KX-TDA100/KX-TDA200/
KX-TDA600 only)
T1: T-1 CO Line Card 3.16 [1-1] Slot—Card Property - T1
type (KX-TDA100/KX-TDA200/
KX-TDA600 only)
IP-GW4 (KX-TDA0480): 4-Channel
VoIP Gateway Card
20
3.19 [1-1] Slot—Card Property - IP
Gateway
IP-GW4 (KX-TDA0484): 4-Channel
VoIP Gateway Card 40
IP-GW16: 16-Channel VoIP Gateway
Card
OPB3: Optional 3-Slot Base Card 16 3.27 [1-1] Slot—OPB3 Card
Property (KX-TDA100/KX-TDA200/
KX-TDA600 only)
CTI-LINK: CTI Link Card 1 (can only be installed in
the Basic Shelf)
3.30 [1-1] Slot—Card Property -
CTILINK (KX-TDA100/KX-TDA200/
KX-TDA600 only)
EECHO16: 16-Channel Echo
Canceller Card
8None
For more information on cards and card installation, see "1.3.1 Optional Equipment" in the KX-TDA600
Installation Manual.
74 PC Programming Manual Document Version 2010-11
3.1 [1-1] Slot
3.2 [1-1] Slot—Summary
Summary information is displayed for all cards installed in the PBX.
For the KX-TDA600, when the PBX has more than two shelves, click a tab to select the shelves to view.
No.
Indicates the slot number (reference only).
Default
Current slot number
Value Range
Available slot numbers.
Maintenance Console Location
3.2 [1-1] Slot—Summary
Programming Manual References
None
Feature Manual References
None
Card Type
Indicates the type of service card installed in each slot of the PBX (reference only). Note that for MPR cards,
the PBX model code is displayed in parentheses after the name.
Default
Slot 00: MPR (Main Processing Card: fixed)
Other slots: Not stored.
Value Range
Card Type for KX-TDA50:
DLC4: 4-Port Digital Extension Card
DLC8: 8-Port Digital Extension Card
HLC4: 4-Port Hybrid Extension Card
PLC4: 4-Port Proprietary Extension Card
PLC8: 8-Port Proprietary Extension Card
SLC4: 4-Port Single Line Telephone Extension Card
SLC8: 8-Port Single Line Telephone Extension Card
LCOT4: 4-Port Analog CO Line Card
IP-GW4: 4-Channel VoIP Gateway Card
IP-EXT4: 4-Channel VoIP Extension Card
SIP-GW4: 4-Channel SIP CO line Card
MSG2: 2-Channel Message Card
DPH4: 4-Port Doorphone Card
ECHO8: 8-Channel Echo Canceller Card
Document Version 2010-11 PC Programming Manual 75
3.2 [1-1] Slot—Summary
EXT-CID: Extension Caller ID Card
SVM2: 2-Channel Simplified Voice Message Card
ESVM2: 2-Channel Simplified Voice Message Card
MPR: MPR Card
Card Type for KX-TDA100/KX-TDA200:
DHLC8: 8-Port Digital Hybrid Extension Card
DLC16: 16-Port Digital Extension Card
DLC8: 8-Port Digital Extension Card
MSLC16: 16-Port Single Line Telephone Extension with Message Lamp Card
SLC8: 8-Port Single Line Telephone Extension Card
SLC16: 16-Port Single Line Telephone Extension Card
CSLC16: 16-Port Single Line Telephone Extension Card with Caller ID
CSI/F: 4 or 8 Cell Station Interface Card
LCOT16: 16-Port Analog CO Line Card
LCOT8: 8-Port Analog CO Line Card
PRI23: PRI Card (23B channels)
T1: T-1 CO Line Card
IP-GW4 (KX-TDA0480/KX-TDA0484): 4-Channel VoIP Gateway Card
OPB3: Optional 3-Slot Base Card
CTI-LINK: CTI Link Card
IP-GW16: 16-Channel VoIP Gateway Card
IP-EXT16: 16-Channel VoIP Extension Card
MPR: MPR Card
Card Type for KX-TDA600:
DHLC8: 8-Port Digital Hybrid Extension Card
DLC16: 16-Port Digital Extension Card
DLC8: 8-Port Digital Extension Card
EMSLC16: 16-Port Single Line Telephone Extension with Message Lamp Card
SLC8: 8-Port Single Line Telephone Extension Card
ESLC16: 16-Port Single Line Telephone Extension Card
CSLC16: 16-Port Single Line Telephone Extension Card with Caller ID
ECSLC24: 24-Port Single Line Telephone Extension Card with Caller ID
CSI/F: 4 or 8 Cell Station Interface Card
ELCOT16: 16-Port Analog CO Line Card
PRI23: PRI Card (23B channels)
T1: T-1 CO Line Card
IP-GW4 (KX-TDA0480/KX-TDA0484): 4-Channel VoIP Gateway Card
OPB3: Optional 3-Slot Base Card
CTI-LINK: CTI Link Card
IP-GW16: 16-Channel VoIP Gateway Card
IP-EXT16: 16-Channel VoIP Extension Card
EECHO16: 16-Channel Echo Canceller Card
EMPR: MPR Card
Maintenance Console Location
3.2 [1-1] Slot—Summary
Programming Manual References
3.1 [1-1] Slot
3.4 [1-1] Slot—Card Property - Extension Type
76 PC Programming Manual Document Version 2010-11
3.2 [1-1] Slot—Summary
3.10 [1-1] Slot—Card Property - LCO type
3.13 [1-1] Slot—Card Property - PRI type (KX-TDA100/KX-TDA200/KX-TDA600 only)
3.16 [1-1] Slot—Card Property - T1 type (KX-TDA100/KX-TDA200/KX-TDA600 only)
3.19 [1-1] Slot—Card Property - IP Gateway
3.22 [1-1] Slot—Card Property - IP Extension
3.25 [1-1] Slot—Card Property - SIP Gateway (KX-TDA50 only)
3.27 [1-1] Slot—OPB3 Card Property (KX-TDA100/KX-TDA200/KX-TDA600 only)
3.30 [1-1] Slot—Card Property - CTILINK (KX-TDA100/KX-TDA200/KX-TDA600 only)
3.31 [1-1] Slot—Card Property - DPH type (KX-TDA50 only)
3.33 [1-1] Slot—Card Property - ESVM Type (KX-TDA50 only)
Feature Manual References
None
Status
Indicates the card status (reference only).
Note that MPR card status is always displayed as "-".
Default
Slot 00: - (fixed)
Other slots: Current status
Value Range
INS: The port is in service.
OUS: The port is out of service.
Fault: The port is not communicating with the network.
Pre-Install: A card has been added to the slot.
Idle: No card is installed in the slot.
Maintenance Console Location
3.2 [1-1] Slot—Summary
Programming Manual References
3.1 [1-1] Slot
Feature Manual References
None
Version
Indicates the LPR version of the installed card (reference only).
For IP-EXT16 cards, both the LPR version and the VoIP version are displayed. The LPR version is shown on
the left, and the VoIP version on the right, as follows:
(Example) 1.002 / 1.001
For IP-EXT4 cards, only the VoIP version is displayed.
Default
Current version number
Document Version 2010-11 PC Programming Manual 77
3.2 [1-1] Slot—Summary
Value Range
Version number
Maintenance Console Location
3.2 [1-1] Slot—Summary
Programming Manual References
3.1 [1-1] Slot
Feature Manual References
None
78 PC Programming Manual Document Version 2010-11
3.2 [1-1] Slot—Summary
3.3 [1-1] Slot—Card Property - MPR
MEC/EMEC card properties can be viewed and set.
Memory Expansion Card:
Indicates whether an MEC (KX-TDA50/KX-TDA100/KX-TDA200) or EMEC (KX-TDA600) card is mounted on
the MPR (KX-TDA50/KX-TDA100/KX-TDA200) or EMPR (KX-TDA600) card.
To change the EMEC or MEC card installation status, click on this cell, then click OK in the dialog box that
appears. Clicking on the Command button performs the same function. (This operation is only available in
batch mode.)
Removing the EMEC or MEC card here also deletes related EMEC or MEC card data.
Note that when an EMEC or MEC card is installed in the PBX, any SMDR data stored in the PBX is cleared.
Default
Current status
Value Range
None, Installed
Maintenance Console Location
3.3 [1-1] Slot—Card Property - MPR
Installation Manual References
For KX-TDA50:
2.5.7 MEC Card (KX-TDA5105)
For KX-TDA100/KX-TDA200:
2.3.2 MEC Card (KX-TDA0105)
For KX-TDA600:
2.3.2 EMEC Card (KX-TDA6105)
Programming Manual References
None
Feature Manual References
None
Memory Version:
Indicates the hardware version of the EMEC or MEC card when it is mounted on the EMPR or MPR card
(reference only).
Default
Current version
Value Range
- (not mounted), 1–15
Document Version 2010-11 PC Programming Manual 79
3.3 [1-1] Slot—Card Property - MPR
Maintenance Console Location
3.3 [1-1] Slot—Card Property - MPR
Programming Manual References
None
Feature Manual References
18.1.1 Upgrading the Software
80 PC Programming Manual Document Version 2010-11
3.3 [1-1] Slot—Card Property - MPR
3.4 [1-1] Slot—Card Property - Extension Type
The property for the extension cards can be specified.
SLT Pulse Dial Mode
Selects the type of pulse dial transmission appropriate to your area.
Default
Normal
Value Range
Normal, Sweden, New Zealand
Maintenance Console Location
3.4 [1-1] Slot—Card Property - Extension Type
Programming Manual References
None
Feature Manual References
None
SLT Off Hook Time
Specifies the minimum length that a pulse dial sent from an SLT must be for the PBX to recognize it as an
off-hook signal.
Default
160 ms
Value Range
8 ´ n (n=3–255) ms
Maintenance Console Location
3.4 [1-1] Slot—Card Property - Extension Type
Programming Manual References
None
Feature Manual References
None
Document Version 2010-11 PC Programming Manual 81
3.4 [1-1] Slot—Card Property - Extension Type
SLT Off Hook Guard Time
Specifies the length of guard time used for off-hook signals from SLTs, to prevent the PBX mistaking them for
pulse dials.
Default
504 ms
Value Range
8 ´ n (n=12–63) ms
Maintenance Console Location
3.4 [1-1] Slot—Card Property - Extension Type
Programming Manual References
None
Feature Manual References
None
SLT Pulse Maximum Break Width
Specifies the maximum length of the break signal in a pulse dial.
Default
96 ms
Value Range
8 ´ n (n=9–20) ms
Maintenance Console Location
3.4 [1-1] Slot—Card Property - Extension Type
Programming Manual References
None
Feature Manual References
None
SLT Pulse Minimum Make Width
Specifies the minimum length of the make signal in a pulse dial.
Default
8 ms
82 PC Programming Manual Document Version 2010-11
3.4 [1-1] Slot—Card Property - Extension Type
Value Range
8 ´ n (n=1–5) ms
Maintenance Console Location
3.4 [1-1] Slot—Card Property - Extension Type
Programming Manual References
None
Feature Manual References
None
SLT Flash Detection
Enables the PBX to detect the flash signal sent when an SLT user presses the hookswitch or the Flash/Recall
button.
Default
Enable
Value Range
Disable: The PBX disconnects the line to prevent placing the call on hold.
Enable: The PBX places the call on consultation hold.
Maintenance Console Location
3.4 [1-1] Slot—Card Property - Extension Type
Programming Manual References
None
Feature Manual References
3.1.7 Call Splitting
Flash Timing - Min.
Specifies the minimum length that a signal sent from an SLT must be for the PBX to recognize it as a hookswitch
flash signal.
Default
112 ms
Value Range
8 ´ n (n=3–63) ms
Document Version 2010-11 PC Programming Manual 83
3.4 [1-1] Slot—Card Property - Extension Type
Maintenance Console Location
3.4 [1-1] Slot—Card Property - Extension Type
Programming Manual References
None
Feature Manual References
None
Flash Timing - Range
Specifies the maximum length that a signal sent from an SLT can be for the PBX to recognize it as a hookswitch
flash signal.
Default
904 ms
Value Range
8 ´ n (n=3–191) ms
Maintenance Console Location
3.4 [1-1] Slot—Card Property - Extension Type
Programming Manual References
None
Feature Manual References
None
DTMF-R STD Detection Time
Specifies the minimum length that a DTMF tone must be for the PBX to recognize it as a DTMF tone.
Default
30 ms
Value Range
2 ´ n (n=1–31) ms
Maintenance Console Location
3.4 [1-1] Slot—Card Property - Extension Type
Programming Manual References
None
84 PC Programming Manual Document Version 2010-11
3.4 [1-1] Slot—Card Property - Extension Type
Feature Manual References
None
SLT Power Supply (KX-TDA100/KX-TDA200/KX-TDA600 only)
Selects the voltage that enables an SLT to activate the Message Waiting lamp. This setting is only available
with MSLC/EMSLC cards.
Default
85 V
Value Range
85 V, 145 V
Maintenance Console Location
3.4 [1-1] Slot—Card Property - Extension Type
Programming Manual References
None
Feature Manual References
11.1.3 Message Waiting
Optional Equipment (KX-TDA100/KX-TDA200/KX-TDA600 only)
Indicates whether an Extension Caller ID card is mounted on the SLC8 card (reference only). This is only
available with SLC8 cards.
Default
Current status
Value Range
None, Caller ID
Maintenance Console Location
3.4 [1-1] Slot—Card Property - Extension Type
Installation Manual References
For KX-TDA100/KX-TDA200:
2.5.6 EXT-CID Card (KX-TDA0168)
For KX-TDA600:
2.7.6 EXT-CID Card (KX-TDA0168)
Programming Manual References
None
Document Version 2010-11 PC Programming Manual 85
3.4 [1-1] Slot—Card Property - Extension Type
Feature Manual References
None
APT/SLT Parallel Ring
Enables an SLT connected in parallel to an APT to ring with the APT for calls.
Default
Enable
Value Range
Disable, Enable
Maintenance Console Location
3.4 [1-1] Slot—Card Property - Extension Type
Programming Manual References
None
Feature Manual References
13.1.2 Paralleled Telephone
86 PC Programming Manual Document Version 2010-11
3.4 [1-1] Slot—Card Property - Extension Type
3.5 [1-1] Slot—Port Property - Extension Port
Various settings can be programmed for each extension port.
To change the status of extension ports, click Command. To view total numbers of each type of extension
connected, click Port Type View.
Shelf (KX-TDA600 only)
Indicates the shelf position (reference only).
Default
Current shelf number
Value Range
Shelf number
Maintenance Console Location
3.5 [1-1] Slot—Port Property - Extension Port
Programming Manual References
None
Feature Manual References
None
Slot
Indicates the slot position (reference only).
Default
Current slot number
Value Range
Slot number
Maintenance Console Location
3.5 [1-1] Slot—Port Property - Extension Port
Programming Manual References
None
Feature Manual References
None
Document Version 2010-11 PC Programming Manual 87
3.5 [1-1] Slot—Port Property - Extension Port
Port
Indicates the port or channel number (reference only).
Default
Current port or channel number
Value Range
Port or channel number
Maintenance Console Location
3.5 [1-1] Slot—Port Property - Extension Port
Programming Manual References
None
Feature Manual References
5.1.7 Extension Port Configuration
Port Type
Indicates the port type (reference only).
Default
Current port type
Value Range
DPT: DPT port (DLC)
APT: APT port (PLC) (KX-TDA50 only)
SLT: SLT port (SLC/ESLC/EMSLC/CSLC/ECSLC)
S-Hybrid: Super Hybrid port (DHLC)
Hybrid: Hybrid port (HLC) (KX-TDA50 only)
S-Hybrid(SLT): XDP port of Super Hybrid port (DHLC)
S-Hybrid(S-DPT): Digital XDP port of Super Hybrid port (DHLC)
DPT(S-DPT): Digital XDP port of DPT port (DLC)
Maintenance Console Location
3.5 [1-1] Slot—Port Property - Extension Port
Programming Manual References
None
Feature Manual References
5.1.7 Extension Port Configuration
88 PC Programming Manual Document Version 2010-11
3.5 [1-1] Slot—Port Property - Extension Port
Telephone Type
Indicates the connected telephone type (reference only).
The number of all connected telephones and Cell Stations can be viewed by clicking Port Type View.
Default
Current connected telephone type
Value Range
DPT (15V)/DPT (40V): DPT is connected.
APT (15V): APT is connected.
DSS: DSS Console is connected.
VM: VPS is connected.
SLT: SLT is connected (or no telephone is connected to the Super Hybrid or SLT port).
CS: CS is connected.
CS-M: High-density CS is connected with its master port.
CS-S1–3: High-density CS is connected with its slave port.
Maintenance Console Location
3.5 [1-1] Slot—Port Property - Extension Port
Programming Manual References
3.7 [1-1] Slot—Port Property - Extension Port—Port Type View
Feature Manual References
5.1.7 Extension Port Configuration
Connection
Indicates the port status (reference only).
This column offers two ways to open the screen to select the port command as follows:
•Click the desired cell in the column.
•Select the desired cell in the column, and then click Command.
Default
Current status
Value Range
INS: The port is in service.
OUS: The port is out of service.
Fault: The port is not communicating with the PBX.
Maintenance Console Location
3.5 [1-1] Slot—Port Property - Extension Port
Programming Manual References
3.6 [1-1] Slot—Port Property - Extension Port—Connection Command
Document Version 2010-11 PC Programming Manual 89
3.5 [1-1] Slot—Port Property - Extension Port
Feature Manual References
None
Extension Number
Specifies the extension number of the port.
To change the extension number of a wired extension, follow the steps below:
1. Type the new extension number, then click Apply.
2. Set the status of the extension port to "OUS", then "INS".
When changing the extension number, make sure that the extension port is not in use. If the extension number
is changed while the port is in use, the new extension number will not come into effect.
Extension numbers of PSs can be a maximum of 4 digits.
Default
For KX-TDA50/KX-TDA100/KX-TDA200:
Starting at 101
For KX-TDA600:
Starting at 1001
(For port 01 of the first extension card that is installed. Extension numbers are preset for subsequent extensions
by adding one to the previous extension number.)
Value Range
Max. 5 digits (consisting of 0–9)
Maintenance Console Location
3.5 [1-1] Slot—Port Property - Extension Port
Programming Manual References
3.6 [1-1] Slot—Port Property - Extension Port—Connection Command
Feature Manual References
None
Extension Name
Specifies the extension name of the port.
Default
Not stored.
Value Range
Max. 20 characters
Maintenance Console Location
3.5 [1-1] Slot—Port Property - Extension Port
90 PC Programming Manual Document Version 2010-11
3.5 [1-1] Slot—Port Property - Extension Port
Programming Manual References
None
Feature Manual References
None
XDP Mode
Turns XDP mode on or off for the port. This setting is only available when Port Type on this screen is set to
S-Hybrid.
Default
Off
Value Range
On: XDP enabled (The main telephone and sub telephone have different extension numbers. This is called
XDP Mode.)
Off: XDP disabled (The main telephone and sub telephone both have the main telephone’s extension number.
This is called Parallel Mode.)
Maintenance Console Location
3.5 [1-1] Slot—Port Property - Extension Port
Programming Manual References
None
Feature Manual References
13.1.2 Paralleled Telephone
5.1.7 Extension Port Configuration
Parallel Telephone Ringing
Specifies whether the sub telephone (SLT) rings at the same time as the main telephone (DPT) for an incoming
call. This setting is only available when Port Type on this screen is set to S-Hybrid.
Default
Yes
Value Range
Yes, No
Maintenance Console Location
3.5 [1-1] Slot—Port Property - Extension Port
Programming Manual References
None
Document Version 2010-11 PC Programming Manual 91
3.5 [1-1] Slot—Port Property - Extension Port
Feature Manual References
13.1.2 Paralleled Telephone
DPT Type—Type
Selects the port type.
To change the port type of an extension port, follow the steps below:
1. Set the status of the extension port to "OUS".
2. Change the port type of the extension port, then click Apply.
3. Set the status of the extension port to "INS".
When changing the port type of an extension port for which Wireless XDP has been set on the
6.1 [4-1-1] Wired Extension—Extension Settings screen, the Wireless XDP setting must be deleted
first.
When changing the type of a port for which one or more SDN buttons are set (except when changing
between PC Console and Telephone), all SDN buttons customized for that device will be deleted. When
you attempt to apply the new settings, a warning message is displayed showing the slot and port number
for which SDN buttons will be deleted. If you do not wish to delete SDN buttons for this port, click
Cancel.
Default
Normal
Value Range
Normal: For connecting a DPT
DSS: For connecting a DSS Console (A maximum of 4 [with the KX-TDA50], 8 [with the KX-TDA100/
KX-TDA200] or 64 [with the KX-TDA600] DSS Consoles can be connected to the PBX.)
VM (DPT): For connecting a Panasonic VPS through DPT Integration
PC Console: For connecting a PC Console (A maximum of 2 [with the KX-TDA50] or 8 [with the KX-TDA100/
KX-TDA200/KX-TDA600] PC Consoles can be connected to the PBX.)
Maintenance Console Location
3.5 [1-1] Slot—Port Property - Extension Port
Programming Manual References
3.6 [1-1] Slot—Port Property - Extension Port—Connection Command
Feature Manual References
19.1.3 Voice Mail (VM) Group
3.1.22 CTI (Computer Telephony Integration)
DPT Type—Location No.
Specifies the location number of the connected DSS Console or PC Console. This setting is only available
when DPT Type—Type on this screen is set to DSS or PC Console.
Note that, depending on system traffic, there may be a limit to the number of PC Consoles that can be supported
by a single DLC/DHLC card.
When changing the location number of a DSS Console for which one or more SDN buttons are set, all SDN
buttons customized for that device will be deleted. When you attempt to apply the new settings, a warning
92 PC Programming Manual Document Version 2010-11
3.5 [1-1] Slot—Port Property - Extension Port
message is displayed showing the slot and port number for which SDN buttons will be deleted. If you do not
wish to delete SDN buttons for this port, click Cancel.
Default
1
Value Range
For KX-TDA50:
Location number for DSS Console: 1–4
Location number for PC Console: 1, 2
For KX-TDA100/KX-TDA200:
1–8
For KX-TDA600:
Location number for DSS Console: 1–64
Location number for PC Console: 1–8
Maintenance Console Location
3.5 [1-1] Slot—Port Property - Extension Port
Programming Manual References
None
Feature Manual References
3.1.22 CTI (Computer Telephony Integration)
DPT Type—VM Unit No.
Selects the unit number of the connected VPS. This setting is only available when DPT Type—Type on this
screen is set to VM (DPT).
Default
1
Value Range
For KX-TDA50:
1
For KX-TDA100/KX-TDA200:
1, 2
For KX-TDA600:
1–8
Maintenance Console Location
3.5 [1-1] Slot—Port Property - Extension Port
Document Version 2010-11 PC Programming Manual 93
3.5 [1-1] Slot—Port Property - Extension Port
Programming Manual References
None
Feature Manual References
19.1.3 Voice Mail (VM) Group
DPT Type—VM Port No.
Specifies the VM port number for the port. This setting is only available when DPT Type—Type on this
screen is set to VM (DPT).
Default
1
Value Range
For KX-TDA50:
1–4
For KX-TDA100/KX-TDA200/KX-TDA600:
1–12
Maintenance Console Location
3.5 [1-1] Slot—Port Property - Extension Port
Programming Manual References
None
Feature Manual References
19.1.3 Voice Mail (VM) Group
Headset OFF/ON
Turns on or off the use of a headset with a DPT. This setting is only available when Port Type on this screen
is set to DPT, DPT(S-DPT), S-Hybrid, or S-Hybrid(S-DPT).
Default
Headset OFF
Value Range
Headset OFF, Headset ON
Maintenance Console Location
3.5 [1-1] Slot—Port Property - Extension Port
Programming Manual References
None
94 PC Programming Manual Document Version 2010-11
3.5 [1-1] Slot—Port Property - Extension Port
Feature Manual References
8.1.3 Headset Operation
Ringing Tone
Selects the dual-tone switching pattern of the ring tone for incoming calls. This setting is only available when
Port Type on this screen is set to DPT, DPT(S-DPT), S-Hybrid, S-Hybrid (XDP), S-Hybrid(SLT) or
S-Hybrid(S-DPT). This setting is not available for the KX-T7200, the KX-T7451, APTs, or SLTs.
Default
A
Value Range
A: 64 ms (697 Hz), 64 ms (852 Hz)
B: 32 ms (697 Hz), 32 ms (852 Hz)
C: 128 ms (697 Hz), 128 ms (852 Hz)
D: 32 ms (697 Hz), 96 ms (852 Hz)
Maintenance Console Location
3.5 [1-1] Slot—Port Property - Extension Port
Programming Manual References
None
Feature Manual References
None
Document Version 2010-11 PC Programming Manual 95
3.5 [1-1] Slot—Port Property - Extension Port
3.6 [1-1] Slot—Port Property - Extension Port—
Connection Command
Commands for the extension ports can be programmed.
INS
Puts the port in service.
Default
Not applicable.
Value Range
Not applicable.
Maintenance Console Location
3.6 [1-1] Slot—Port Property - Extension Port—Connection Command
Programming Manual References
3.5 [1-1] Slot—Port Property - Extension Port
Feature Manual References
None
OUS
Takes the port out of service. This enables a temporary non-use of the port, for example, for the purpose of
repair.
Default
Not applicable.
Value Range
Not applicable.
Maintenance Console Location
3.6 [1-1] Slot—Port Property - Extension Port—Connection Command
Programming Manual References
3.5 [1-1] Slot—Port Property - Extension Port
Feature Manual References
None
96 PC Programming Manual Document Version 2010-11
3.6 [1-1] Slot—Port Property - Extension Port—Connection Command
3.7 [1-1] Slot—Port Property - Extension Port—Port
Type View
Displays the number of connected telephones and Cell Stations (CSs).
This screen can only be accessed in Interactive mode.
Type
Indicates the types of telephone (reference only).
Default
Not applicable.
Value Range
New-DPT (KX-DT300 series/KX-T7600 series DPTs), Old-DPT (DPTs other than KX-DT300 series/
KX-T7600 series), APT, SLT, DSS Console, VM, Other, CS, High-density CS, IP-EXT
Maintenance Console Location
3.7 [1-1] Slot—Port Property - Extension Port—Port Type View
Programming Manual References
3.5 [1-1] Slot—Port Property - Extension Port
Feature Manual References
None
Total Count
Indicates the total number of each type of telephone and CS connected to the PBX (reference only). With the
KX-TDA50, CSs are counted on the basis of the number of extension ports to which they are connected; with
the KX-TDA100/KX-TDA200/KX-TDA600, CSs are counted on the basis of the number of CSIF ports in service
plus the number of extension ports to which CSs are connected.
Default
Not applicable.
Value Range
Not applicable.
Maintenance Console Location
3.7 [1-1] Slot—Port Property - Extension Port—Port Type View
Programming Manual References
3.5 [1-1] Slot—Port Property - Extension Port
3.8 [1-1] Slot—Port Property - CSI/F Port (KX-TDA100/KX-TDA200/KX-TDA600 only)
Document Version 2010-11 PC Programming Manual 97
3.7 [1-1] Slot—Port Property - Extension Port—Port Type View
Feature Manual References
None
98 PC Programming Manual Document Version 2010-11
3.7 [1-1] Slot—Port Property - Extension Port—Port Type View
3.8 [1-1] Slot—Port Property - CSI/F Port
(KX-TDA100/KX-TDA200/KX-TDA600 only)
The status of the CSIF ports can be referred to, or set to INS (in-service) or OUS (out-of-service). To change
the status of ports, click Command.
Shelf (KX-TDA600 only)
Indicates the shelf position (reference only).
Default
Current shelf number
Value Range
Shelf number
Maintenance Console Location
3.8 [1-1] Slot—Port Property - CSI/F Port (KX-TDA100/KX-TDA200/KX-TDA600 only)
Programming Manual References
None
Feature Manual References
None
Slot
Indicates the slot position (reference only).
Default
Current slot number
Value Range
Slot number
Maintenance Console Location
3.8 [1-1] Slot—Port Property - CSI/F Port (KX-TDA100/KX-TDA200/KX-TDA600 only)
Programming Manual References
None
Feature Manual References
None
Document Version 2010-11 PC Programming Manual 99
3.8 [1-1] Slot—Port Property - CSI/F Port (KX-TDA100/KX-TDA200/KX-TDA600 only)
Port
Indicates the port number (reference only).
Default
Current port number
Value Range
Port number
Maintenance Console Location
3.8 [1-1] Slot—Port Property - CSI/F Port (KX-TDA100/KX-TDA200/KX-TDA600 only)
Programming Manual References
None
Feature Manual References
None
Status
Indicates the port status (reference only).
This column offers two ways to open the screen to select the port command:
•Click the desired cell in the column.
•Select the desired cell in the column, and then click Command.
Default
Current status
Value Range
INS: The Cell Station (CS) is in service.
OUS: The CS is out of service.
Fault: The port is not communicating with the CS.
Maintenance Console Location
3.8 [1-1] Slot—Port Property - CSI/F Port (KX-TDA100/KX-TDA200/KX-TDA600 only)
Programming Manual References
3.9 [1-1] Slot—Port Property - CSI/F Port—Connection Command (KX-TDA100/KX-TDA200/KX-TDA600 only)
Feature Manual References
None
CS Name
Specifies the name of the CSIF port.
100 PC Programming Manual Document Version 2010-11
3.8 [1-1] Slot—Port Property - CSI/F Port (KX-TDA100/KX-TDA200/KX-TDA600 only)
Default
Not stored.
Value Range
Max. 20 characters
Maintenance Console Location
3.8 [1-1] Slot—Port Property - CSI/F Port (KX-TDA100/KX-TDA200/KX-TDA600 only)
Programming Manual References
None
Feature Manual References
None
Document Version 2010-11 PC Programming Manual 101
3.8 [1-1] Slot—Port Property - CSI/F Port (KX-TDA100/KX-TDA200/KX-TDA600 only)
3.9 [1-1] Slot—Port Property - CSI/F Port—
Connection Command (KX-TDA100/KX-TDA200/
KX-TDA600 only)
Commands for the CSIF ports can be programmed.
INS
Puts the Cell Station (CS) in service.
Default
Not applicable.
Value Range
Not applicable.
Maintenance Console Location
3.9 [1-1] Slot—Port Property - CSI/F Port—Connection Command (KX-TDA100/KX-TDA200/KX-TDA600 only)
Programming Manual References
3.8 [1-1] Slot—Port Property - CSI/F Port (KX-TDA100/KX-TDA200/KX-TDA600 only)
Feature Manual References
None
OUS
Takes the CS out of service. This enables a temporary non-use of the CS, for example, for the purpose of
repair.
Default
Not applicable.
Value Range
Not applicable.
Maintenance Console Location
3.9 [1-1] Slot—Port Property - CSI/F Port—Connection Command (KX-TDA100/KX-TDA200/KX-TDA600 only)
Programming Manual References
3.8 [1-1] Slot—Port Property - CSI/F Port (KX-TDA100/KX-TDA200/KX-TDA600 only)
Feature Manual References
None
102 PC Programming Manual Document Version 2010-11
3.9 [1-1] Slot—Port Property - CSI/F Port—Connection Command (KX-TDA100/KX-TDA200/KX-TDA600 only)
3.10 [1-1] Slot—Card Property - LCO type
The properties of the analog CO line cards can be specified.
Outgoing Guard Time
Specifies the length of time after a CO line is disconnected, during which the PBX cannot seize the line.
Default
3 s
Value Range
3–6 s
Maintenance Console Location
3.10 [1-1] Slot—Card Property - LCO type
Programming Manual References
None
Feature Manual References
None
First Dial Timer (CO)
Specifies the minimum time that the PBX waits after seizing a CO line, before sending the dialed digits to the
telephone company. This allows the telephone company to have enough time to accept the dialed digits
correctly.
Default
1.0 s
Value Range
0.5 ´ n (n=1–16) s
Maintenance Console Location
3.10 [1-1] Slot—Card Property - LCO type
Programming Manual References
None
Feature Manual References
None
Document Version 2010-11 PC Programming Manual 103
3.10 [1-1] Slot—Card Property - LCO type
CO Feed Back Tone
Specifies whether the pulse feedback tone is turned on or not. For outgoing CO line calls, audible tones can
be heard as the dialed number is sent out, which informs the extension user that the number has been dialed.
Default
Yes
Value Range
No, Yes
Maintenance Console Location
3.10 [1-1] Slot—Card Property - LCO type
Programming Manual References
None
Feature Manual References
None
Bell Detection—Bell Start Detection Timer
Specifies the minimum length of a bell signal that can be recognized by the PBX as the bell signal sent from
the telephone company, before the PBX detects an arriving call.
Default
144 ms
Value Range
24 ´ n (n=1–50) ms
Maintenance Console Location
3.10 [1-1] Slot—Card Property - LCO type
Programming Manual References
None
Feature Manual References
None
Bell Detection—Bell Off Detection Timer
Specifies the duration of the bell off detection timer. If the PBX receives no bell signal from the telephone
company for the length of time specified here, the PBX treats the call as lost.
Default
6.0 s
104 PC Programming Manual Document Version 2010-11
3.10 [1-1] Slot—Card Property - LCO type
Value Range
1.0 s–15.0 s
Maintenance Console Location
3.10 [1-1] Slot—Card Property - LCO type
Programming Manual References
None
Feature Manual References
None
Pulse / DTMF Dial—DTMF Inter-digit Pause
Specifies the length of the DTMF inter-digit pause. This allows the telephone company to have enough time
to accept the dialed digits correctly.
Default
112 ms
Value Range
64 + 16 ´ n (n=0–11) ms
Maintenance Console Location
3.10 [1-1] Slot—Card Property - LCO type
Programming Manual References
None
Feature Manual References
None
Pulse / DTMF Dial—Pulse Inter-digit Pause
Specifies the length of the pulse inter-digit pause. This allows the telephone company to have enough time to
accept the dialed digits correctly.
Default
830 ms
Value Range
630 ms, 830 ms, 1030 ms
Document Version 2010-11 PC Programming Manual 105
3.10 [1-1] Slot—Card Property - LCO type
Maintenance Console Location
3.10 [1-1] Slot—Card Property - LCO type
Programming Manual References
None
Feature Manual References
None
Low Speed Pulse Dial—Pulse % Break
Specifies the % break for a low speed pulse dial. This is the ratio between the break (on-hook) signal and make
(off-hook) signal in a pulse dial.
Default
60 %
Value Range
Other, 60 %, 67 %
Maintenance Console Location
3.10 [1-1] Slot—Card Property - LCO type
Programming Manual References
3.11 [1-1] Slot—Port Property - LCO Port
Feature Manual References
None
Low Speed Pulse Dial—Break Width
Specifies the maximum length of the break signal in a low speed pulse dial. Low Speed Pulse Dial—Pulse
% Break on this screen determines the value that can be specified here.
Default
60 ms
Value Range
4 ´ n (n=6–20) ms
Maintenance Console Location
3.10 [1-1] Slot—Card Property - LCO type
Programming Manual References
3.11 [1-1] Slot—Port Property - LCO Port
106 PC Programming Manual Document Version 2010-11
3.10 [1-1] Slot—Card Property - LCO type
Feature Manual References
None
Low Speed Pulse Dial—Make Width
Specifies the minimum length of the make signal in a low speed pulse dial. Low Speed Pulse Dial—Pulse
% Break on this screen determines the value that can be specified here.
Default
40 ms
Value Range
4 ´ n (n=3–15) ms
Maintenance Console Location
3.10 [1-1] Slot—Card Property - LCO type
Programming Manual References
3.11 [1-1] Slot—Port Property - LCO Port
Feature Manual References
None
High Speed Pulse Dial—Pulse % Break
Specifies the % break for a high speed pulse dial. This is the ratio between the break (on-hook) signal and
make (off-hook) signal in a pulse dial.
Default
60 %
Value Range
Other, 60 %, 67 %
Maintenance Console Location
3.10 [1-1] Slot—Card Property - LCO type
Programming Manual References
3.11 [1-1] Slot—Port Property - LCO Port
Feature Manual References
None
Document Version 2010-11 PC Programming Manual 107
3.10 [1-1] Slot—Card Property - LCO type
High Speed Pulse Dial—Break Width
Specifies the maximum length of the break signal in a high speed pulse dial. High Speed Pulse Dial—
Pulse % Break on this screen determines the value that can be specified here.
Default
32 ms
Value Range
4 ´ n (n=4–18) ms
Maintenance Console Location
3.10 [1-1] Slot—Card Property - LCO type
Programming Manual References
3.11 [1-1] Slot—Port Property - LCO Port
Feature Manual References
None
High Speed Pulse Dial—Make Width
Specifies the minimum length of the make signal in a high speed pulse dial. High Speed Pulse Dial—Pulse
% Break on this screen determines the value that can be specified here.
Default
20 ms
Value Range
4 ´ n (n=3–15) ms
Maintenance Console Location
3.10 [1-1] Slot—Card Property - LCO type
Programming Manual References
3.11 [1-1] Slot—Port Property - LCO Port
Feature Manual References
None
Pulse Type
Selects the type of pulse dial transmission appropriate to your area.
Default
Normal
108 PC Programming Manual Document Version 2010-11
3.10 [1-1] Slot—Card Property - LCO type
Value Range
Normal, Sweden, New Zealand
Maintenance Console Location
3.10 [1-1] Slot—Card Property - LCO type
Programming Manual References
None
Feature Manual References
None
Option Card Equipment—Option 1 and Option 2
Indicates the type of the card that is installed on the LCOT/ELCOT card (reference only).
Default
Current option card type
Value Range
None, Caller ID Card
Maintenance Console Location
3.10 [1-1] Slot—Card Property - LCO type
Programming Manual References
3.11 [1-1] Slot—Port Property - LCO Port— Caller ID Detection
Feature Manual References
3.1.1 Caller ID
Caller ID—Caller ID Signaling
Selects the type of Caller ID signaling provided by the telephone company.
Default
FSK
Value Range
FSK, FSK (with Visual Caller ID), DTMF
Maintenance Console Location
3.10 [1-1] Slot—Card Property - LCO type
Document Version 2010-11 PC Programming Manual 109
3.10 [1-1] Slot—Card Property - LCO type
Programming Manual References
None
Feature Manual References
3.1.1 Caller ID
Caller ID—Max Receive Time
Specifies the maximum number of Caller ID series that are sent from the network.
Default
1
Value Range
0 (no limit), 1, 2, 3
Maintenance Console Location
3.10 [1-1] Slot—Card Property - LCO type
Programming Manual References
None
Feature Manual References
3.1.1 Caller ID
Caller ID—Caller ID (FSK) Carrier Detection
Enables the PBX to detect the carrier when receiving Caller ID. To enable this setting, Caller ID—Caller ID
Signaling on this screen should be set to FSK.
Default
Enable
Value Range
Disable, Enable
Maintenance Console Location
3.10 [1-1] Slot—Card Property - LCO type
Programming Manual References
None
Feature Manual References
3.1.1 Caller ID
110 PC Programming Manual Document Version 2010-11
3.10 [1-1] Slot—Card Property - LCO type
Caller ID—Caller ID (FSK) END Detection
Selects the method used to detect the end of Caller ID information.
Default
Length + Timer
Value Range
Length + Timer, Timer
Maintenance Console Location
3.10 [1-1] Slot—Card Property - LCO type
Programming Manual References
None
Feature Manual References
3.1.1 Caller ID
Caller ID—Caller ID (FSK) Header Examination
Enables the PBX to check the header of received Caller ID information. To enable this setting, Caller ID—
Caller ID Signaling on this screen should be set to FSK.
Default
Enable
Value Range
Disable, Enable
Maintenance Console Location
3.10 [1-1] Slot—Card Property - LCO type
Programming Manual References
None
Feature Manual References
3.1.1 Caller ID
Caller ID—Caller ID (FSK) Detection Start Timer
Specifies the length of time that the PBX waits before attempting to detect Caller ID information, after receiving
a call. To enable this setting, Caller ID—Caller ID Signaling on this screen should be set to FSK.
Default
80 ms
Document Version 2010-11 PC Programming Manual 111
3.10 [1-1] Slot—Card Property - LCO type
Value Range
None, 80 ´ n (n=1–15) ms
Maintenance Console Location
3.10 [1-1] Slot—Card Property - LCO type
Programming Manual References
None
Feature Manual References
3.1.1 Caller ID
Caller ID—Caller ID (FSK) Detection Timer
Specifies the total time required by the PBX to detect Caller ID information. To enable this setting, Caller
ID—Caller ID Signaling on this screen should be set to FSK.
Default
2000 ms
Value Range
80 ´ n (n=13–50) ms
Maintenance Console Location
3.10 [1-1] Slot—Card Property - LCO type
Programming Manual References
None
Feature Manual References
3.1.1 Caller ID
112 PC Programming Manual Document Version 2010-11
3.10 [1-1] Slot—Card Property - LCO type
3.11 [1-1] Slot—Port Property - LCO Port
Various settings can be programmed for each analog CO line port.
To change the status of ports, click Command.
Shelf (KX-TDA600 only)
Indicates the shelf position (reference only).
Default
Current shelf number
Value Range
Shelf number
Maintenance Console Location
3.11 [1-1] Slot—Port Property - LCO Port
Programming Manual References
None
Feature Manual References
None
Slot
Indicates the slot position (reference only).
Default
Current slot number
Value Range
Slot number
Maintenance Console Location
3.11 [1-1] Slot—Port Property - LCO Port
Programming Manual References
None
Feature Manual References
None
Port
Indicates the port number (reference only).
Document Version 2010-11 PC Programming Manual 113
3.11 [1-1] Slot—Port Property - LCO Port
Default
Current port number
Value Range
Port number
Maintenance Console Location
3.11 [1-1] Slot—Port Property - LCO Port
Programming Manual References
None
Feature Manual References
None
Connection
Indicates the port status (reference only).
This column offers two ways to open the screen to select the port command:
•Click the desired cell in the column.
•Select the desired cell in the column, and then click Command.
Default
Current status
Value Range
INS: The port is in service.
OUS: The port is out of service.
Maintenance Console Location
3.11 [1-1] Slot—Port Property - LCO Port
Programming Manual References
3.12 [1-1] Slot—Port Property - LCO Port—Connection Command
Feature Manual References
None
Dialing Mode
Selects the type of signal used to dial out to the analog CO line.
Default
DTMF
114 PC Programming Manual Document Version 2010-11
3.11 [1-1] Slot—Port Property - LCO Port
Value Range
DTMF, Pulse
Maintenance Console Location
3.11 [1-1] Slot—Port Property - LCO Port
Programming Manual References
None
Feature Manual References
4.1.2 Dial Mode Selection
CPC Signal Detection Time—Outgoing, Incoming
Specifies the length of time required by the PBX to detect a CPC signal on outgoing or incoming CO line calls
before disconnecting the line. When None is selected here, the line will not be disconnected when a CPC
signal is not detected.
Default
400 ms
Value Range
None, 6.5 ms, 8 ´ n (n=1–112) ms
Maintenance Console Location
3.11 [1-1] Slot—Port Property - LCO Port
Programming Manual References
None
Feature Manual References
3.1.21 CPC (Calling Party Control) Signal Detection
DTMF Width
Selects the length of the DTMF tone sent to the analog CO line.
Default
80 ms
Value Range
80 ms, 160 ms
Document Version 2010-11 PC Programming Manual 115
3.11 [1-1] Slot—Port Property - LCO Port
Maintenance Console Location
3.11 [1-1] Slot—Port Property - LCO Port
Programming Manual References
None
Feature Manual References
None
Pulse Speed
Selects the speed at which pulse dials are sent to the analog CO line.
Default
Low
Value Range
Low, High
Maintenance Console Location
3.11 [1-1] Slot—Port Property - LCO Port
Programming Manual References
None
Feature Manual References
None
Reverse Detection (KX-TDA100/KX-TDA200/KX-TDA600 only)
Selects the type of CO line call for which the reverse signal from the telephone company is detected.
Default
Disable
Value Range
Disable: For no CO line call
Outgoing: For outgoing CO line calls only
Both Call: For both outgoing and incoming CO line calls
Maintenance Console Location
3.11 [1-1] Slot—Port Property - LCO Port
Programming Manual References
None
116 PC Programming Manual Document Version 2010-11
3.11 [1-1] Slot—Port Property - LCO Port
Feature Manual References
None
Caller ID Detection
Enables the PBX to detect a Caller ID signal from the analog CO line.
Default
Enable
Value Range
Disable, Enable
Maintenance Console Location
3.11 [1-1] Slot—Port Property - LCO Port
Programming Manual References
3.10 [1-1] Slot—Card Property - LCO type
Feature Manual References
3.1.1 Caller ID
Paytone Detection (KX-TDA100/KX-TDA200/KX-TDA600 only)
Enables the PBX to receive a pay tone signal from the telephone company.
Default
Disable
Value Range
Disable, Enable
Maintenance Console Location
3.11 [1-1] Slot—Port Property - LCO Port
Programming Manual References
None
Feature Manual References
None
Pause Time
Specifies the length of a pause.
Document Version 2010-11 PC Programming Manual 117
3.11 [1-1] Slot—Port Property - LCO Port
Default
1.5 s
Value Range
1.5 s, 2.5 s, 3.5 s, 4.5 s
Maintenance Console Location
3.11 [1-1] Slot—Port Property - LCO Port
Programming Manual References
None
Feature Manual References
13.1.4 Pause Insertion
8.1.5 Host PBX Access Code (Access Code to the Telephone Company from a Host PBX)
16.1.2 Special Carrier Access Code
Flash Time
Specifies the length of a flash signal.
Default
608 ms
Value Range
None, 16 ´ n (n=1–255) ms
Maintenance Console Location
3.11 [1-1] Slot—Port Property - LCO Port
Programming Manual References
None
Feature Manual References
5.1.1 EFA (External Feature Access)
Disconnect Time
Specifies the length of time after a CO line is disconnected, during which the PBX cannot seize the line.
Default
1.5 s
Value Range
0.5 s, 1.5 s, 2.0 s, 4.0 s, 12.0 s
118 PC Programming Manual Document Version 2010-11
3.11 [1-1] Slot—Port Property - LCO Port
Maintenance Console Location
3.11 [1-1] Slot—Port Property - LCO Port
Programming Manual References
None
Feature Manual References
6.1.2 Flash/Recall/Terminate
Document Version 2010-11 PC Programming Manual 119
3.11 [1-1] Slot—Port Property - LCO Port
3.12 [1-1] Slot—Port Property - LCO Port—
Connection Command
Commands for the LCO ports can be programmed.
INS
Puts the port in service.
Default
Not applicable.
Value Range
Not applicable.
Maintenance Console Location
3.12 [1-1] Slot—Port Property - LCO Port—Connection Command
Programming Manual References
3.11 [1-1] Slot—Port Property - LCO Port
Feature Manual References
None
OUS
Takes the port out of service. This enables a temporary non-use of the port, for example, for the purpose of
repair.
Default
Not applicable.
Value Range
Not applicable.
Maintenance Console Location
3.12 [1-1] Slot—Port Property - LCO Port—Connection Command
Programming Manual References
3.11 [1-1] Slot—Port Property - LCO Port
Feature Manual References
None
120 PC Programming Manual Document Version 2010-11
3.12 [1-1] Slot—Port Property - LCO Port—Connection Command
3.13 [1-1] Slot—Card Property - PRI type
(KX-TDA100/KX-TDA200/KX-TDA600 only)
The properties of the PRI card can be specified.
ISDN CO / QSIG Master / QSIG Slave—T200
Specifies the maximum time that the PBX waits for a reply after sending the L2 command to ISDN.
Default
10 ´ 100 ms
Value Range
0–600 ´ 100 ms
Maintenance Console Location
3.13 [1-1] Slot—Card Property - PRI type (KX-TDA100/KX-TDA200/KX-TDA600 only)
Programming Manual References
None
Feature Manual References
None
ISDN CO / QSIG Master / QSIG Slave—T202
Specifies the maximum time that the PBX waits for a reply after resending the request to use an ISDN line as
a TIE line.
Default
20 ´ 100 ms
Value Range
0–600 ´ 100 ms
Maintenance Console Location
3.13 [1-1] Slot—Card Property - PRI type (KX-TDA100/KX-TDA200/KX-TDA600 only)
Programming Manual References
None
Feature Manual References
13.1.13 PRIVATE NETWORK FEATURES
Document Version 2010-11 PC Programming Manual 121
3.13 [1-1] Slot—Card Property - PRI type (KX-TDA100/KX-TDA200/KX-TDA600 only)
ISDN CO / QSIG Master / QSIG Slave—T203
Specifies the length of time to detect no communication status of L2.
Default
100 ´ 100 ms
Value Range
0–600 ´ 100 ms
Maintenance Console Location
3.13 [1-1] Slot—Card Property - PRI type (KX-TDA100/KX-TDA200/KX-TDA600 only)
Programming Manual References
None
Feature Manual References
None
ISDN CO / QSIG Master / QSIG Slave—T301
Specifies the maximum time that the PBX waits for a reply after making a call to ISDN.
Default
0 ´ 100 ms
Value Range
0–18000 ´ 100 ms
Maintenance Console Location
3.13 [1-1] Slot—Card Property - PRI type (KX-TDA100/KX-TDA200/KX-TDA600 only)
Programming Manual References
None
Feature Manual References
None
ISDN CO / QSIG Master / QSIG Slave—T302
Specifies the maximum time allowed between each digit on an incoming call. Applies to overlap receiving.
Default
150 ´ 100 ms
122 PC Programming Manual Document Version 2010-11
3.13 [1-1] Slot—Card Property - PRI type (KX-TDA100/KX-TDA200/KX-TDA600 only)
Value Range
0–600 ´ 100 ms
Maintenance Console Location
3.13 [1-1] Slot—Card Property - PRI type (KX-TDA100/KX-TDA200/KX-TDA600 only)
Programming Manual References
None
Feature Manual References
None
ISDN CO / QSIG Master / QSIG Slave—T303
Specifies the maximum time that the PBX waits for a reply after sending the SETUP (call setting) message to
ISDN.
Default
40 ´ 100 ms
Value Range
0–600 ´ 100 ms
Maintenance Console Location
3.13 [1-1] Slot—Card Property - PRI type (KX-TDA100/KX-TDA200/KX-TDA600 only)
Programming Manual References
None
Feature Manual References
None
ISDN CO / QSIG Master / QSIG Slave—T304
Specifies the maximum time allowed between each digit on an outgoing call. Applies to overlap sending.
Default
300 ´ 100 ms
Value Range
0–3000 ´ 100 ms
Maintenance Console Location
3.13 [1-1] Slot—Card Property - PRI type (KX-TDA100/KX-TDA200/KX-TDA600 only)
Document Version 2010-11 PC Programming Manual 123
3.13 [1-1] Slot—Card Property - PRI type (KX-TDA100/KX-TDA200/KX-TDA600 only)
Programming Manual References
None
Feature Manual References
None
ISDN CO / QSIG Master / QSIG Slave—T305
Specifies the maximum time that the PBX waits for a reply after sending the DISC (disconnection) message
to ISDN.
Default
300 ´ 100 ms
Value Range
0–3000 ´ 100 ms
Maintenance Console Location
3.13 [1-1] Slot—Card Property - PRI type (KX-TDA100/KX-TDA200/KX-TDA600 only)
Programming Manual References
None
Feature Manual References
None
ISDN CO / QSIG Master / QSIG Slave—T308
Specifies the maximum time that the PBX waits for a reply after receiving the Release message from ISDN.
Default
40 ´ 100 ms
Value Range
0–600 ´ 100 ms
Maintenance Console Location
3.13 [1-1] Slot—Card Property - PRI type (KX-TDA100/KX-TDA200/KX-TDA600 only)
Programming Manual References
None
Feature Manual References
None
124 PC Programming Manual Document Version 2010-11
3.13 [1-1] Slot—Card Property - PRI type (KX-TDA100/KX-TDA200/KX-TDA600 only)
ISDN CO / QSIG Master / QSIG Slave—T309
Specifies the length of time that the PBX tries to disconnect the data link, before disconnecting the call.
Default
120 ´ 100 ms
Value Range
0–3000 ´ 100 ms
Maintenance Console Location
3.13 [1-1] Slot—Card Property - PRI type (KX-TDA100/KX-TDA200/KX-TDA600 only)
Programming Manual References
None
Feature Manual References
None
ISDN CO / QSIG Master / QSIG Slave—T310
Specifies the maximum time that the PBX waits for a continuance message after receiving the Incoming Call
Proceeding message.
Default
1100 ´ 100 ms
Value Range
0–3000 ´ 100 ms
Maintenance Console Location
3.13 [1-1] Slot—Card Property - PRI type (KX-TDA100/KX-TDA200/KX-TDA600 only)
Programming Manual References
None
Feature Manual References
None
ISDN CO / QSIG Master / QSIG Slave—T313
Specifies the maximum time that the PBX waits for a reply after sending the Connect message.
Default
40 ´ 100 ms
Document Version 2010-11 PC Programming Manual 125
3.13 [1-1] Slot—Card Property - PRI type (KX-TDA100/KX-TDA200/KX-TDA600 only)
Value Range
0–600 ´ 100 ms
Maintenance Console Location
3.13 [1-1] Slot—Card Property - PRI type (KX-TDA100/KX-TDA200/KX-TDA600 only)
Programming Manual References
None
Feature Manual References
None
ISDN CO / QSIG Master / QSIG Slave—T316
Specifies the maximum time that the PBX waits for a reply after sending the Restart message.
Default
0 ´ 100 ms
Value Range
0–3000 ´ 100 ms
Maintenance Console Location
3.13 [1-1] Slot—Card Property - PRI type (KX-TDA100/KX-TDA200/KX-TDA600 only)
Programming Manual References
None
Feature Manual References
None
ISDN CO / QSIG Master / QSIG Slave—T318
Specifies the maximum time that the PBX waits for a reply after sending the Resume message.
Default
0 ´ 100 ms
Value Range
0–600 ´ 100 ms
Maintenance Console Location
3.13 [1-1] Slot—Card Property - PRI type (KX-TDA100/KX-TDA200/KX-TDA600 only)
126 PC Programming Manual Document Version 2010-11
3.13 [1-1] Slot—Card Property - PRI type (KX-TDA100/KX-TDA200/KX-TDA600 only)
Programming Manual References
None
Feature Manual References
None
ISDN CO / QSIG Master / QSIG Slave—T319
Specifies the maximum time that the PBX waits for a reply after sending the Suspend message.
Default
0 ´ 100 ms
Value Range
0–600 ´ 100 ms
Maintenance Console Location
3.13 [1-1] Slot—Card Property - PRI type (KX-TDA100/KX-TDA200/KX-TDA600 only)
Programming Manual References
None
Feature Manual References
None
ISDN CO / QSIG Master / QSIG Slave—T322
Specifies the maximum time that the PBX waits for a reply after sending the Status enquiry message.
Default
40 ´ 100 ms
Value Range
0–600 ´ 100 ms
Maintenance Console Location
3.13 [1-1] Slot—Card Property - PRI type (KX-TDA100/KX-TDA200/KX-TDA600 only)
Programming Manual References
None
Feature Manual References
None
Document Version 2010-11 PC Programming Manual 127
3.13 [1-1] Slot—Card Property - PRI type (KX-TDA100/KX-TDA200/KX-TDA600 only)
ISDN CO / QSIG Master / QSIG Slave—T3D3
Specifies the length of time that the PBX tries to establish L2 in "Permanent" mode.
Default
100 ´ 100 ms
Value Range
0–3000 ´ 100 ms
Maintenance Console Location
3.13 [1-1] Slot—Card Property - PRI type (KX-TDA100/KX-TDA200/KX-TDA600 only)
Programming Manual References
None
Feature Manual References
None
ISDN CO / QSIG Master / QSIG Slave—T3D9
Specifies the length of time that the PBX tries to disconnect L2 in "Call by Call" mode.
Default
200 ´ 100 ms
Value Range
0–3000 ´ 100 ms
Maintenance Console Location
3.13 [1-1] Slot—Card Property - PRI type (KX-TDA100/KX-TDA200/KX-TDA600 only)
Programming Manual References
None
Feature Manual References
None
ISDN Extension—T200
Specifies the maximum time that the PBX waits for a reply after sending the L2 command to ISDN.
Default
10 ´ 100 ms
128 PC Programming Manual Document Version 2010-11
3.13 [1-1] Slot—Card Property - PRI type (KX-TDA100/KX-TDA200/KX-TDA600 only)
Value Range
0–600 ´ 100 ms
Maintenance Console Location
3.13 [1-1] Slot—Card Property - PRI type (KX-TDA100/KX-TDA200/KX-TDA600 only)
Programming Manual References
None
Feature Manual References
None
ISDN Extension—T201
Specifies the maximum time that the PBX waits for a reply after resending the TEI check request to ISDN.
Default
10 ´ 100 ms
Value Range
0–600 ´ 100 ms
Maintenance Console Location
3.13 [1-1] Slot—Card Property - PRI type (KX-TDA100/KX-TDA200/KX-TDA600 only)
Programming Manual References
None
Feature Manual References
None
ISDN Extension—T203
Specifies the length of time to detect no communication status of L2.
Default
100 ´ 100 ms
Value Range
0–600 ´ 100 ms
Maintenance Console Location
3.13 [1-1] Slot—Card Property - PRI type (KX-TDA100/KX-TDA200/KX-TDA600 only)
Document Version 2010-11 PC Programming Manual 129
3.13 [1-1] Slot—Card Property - PRI type (KX-TDA100/KX-TDA200/KX-TDA600 only)
Programming Manual References
None
Feature Manual References
None
ISDN Extension—T301
Specifies the maximum time that the PBX waits for a reply after making a call to ISDN.
Default
0 ´ 100 ms
Value Range
0–18000 ´ 100 ms
Maintenance Console Location
3.13 [1-1] Slot—Card Property - PRI type (KX-TDA100/KX-TDA200/KX-TDA600 only)
Programming Manual References
None
Feature Manual References
None
ISDN Extension—T302
Specifies the maximum time allowed between each digit on an incoming call. Applies to overlap receiving.
Default
150 ´ 100 ms
Value Range
0–600 ´ 100 ms
Maintenance Console Location
3.13 [1-1] Slot—Card Property - PRI type (KX-TDA100/KX-TDA200/KX-TDA600 only)
Programming Manual References
None
Feature Manual References
None
130 PC Programming Manual Document Version 2010-11
3.13 [1-1] Slot—Card Property - PRI type (KX-TDA100/KX-TDA200/KX-TDA600 only)
ISDN Extension—T303
Specifies the maximum time that the PBX waits for a reply after sending the SETUP (call setting) message to
ISDN.
Default
40 ´ 100 ms
Value Range
0–600 ´ 100 ms
Maintenance Console Location
3.13 [1-1] Slot—Card Property - PRI type (KX-TDA100/KX-TDA200/KX-TDA600 only)
Programming Manual References
None
Feature Manual References
None
ISDN Extension—T304
Specifies the maximum time allowed between each digit on an outgoing call. Applies to overlap sending.
Default
200 ´ 100 ms
Value Range
0–3000 ´ 100 ms
Maintenance Console Location
3.13 [1-1] Slot—Card Property - PRI type (KX-TDA100/KX-TDA200/KX-TDA600 only)
Programming Manual References
None
Feature Manual References
None
ISDN Extension—T305
Specifies the maximum time that the PBX waits for a reply after sending the DISC (disconnection) message
to ISDN.
Default
300 ´ 100 ms
Document Version 2010-11 PC Programming Manual 131
3.13 [1-1] Slot—Card Property - PRI type (KX-TDA100/KX-TDA200/KX-TDA600 only)
Value Range
0–3000 ´ 100 ms
Maintenance Console Location
3.13 [1-1] Slot—Card Property - PRI type (KX-TDA100/KX-TDA200/KX-TDA600 only)
Programming Manual References
None
Feature Manual References
None
ISDN Extension—T306
Specifies the maximum time that the PBX waits for a reply after sending the DISC (disconnection) message
to ISDN. This setting is used when inband tones are supplied.
Default
300 ´ 100 ms
Value Range
0–3000 ´ 100 ms
Maintenance Console Location
3.13 [1-1] Slot—Card Property - PRI type (KX-TDA100/KX-TDA200/KX-TDA600 only)
Programming Manual References
None
Feature Manual References
None
ISDN Extension—T307
Specifies the maximum time that the PBX maintains a suspended call, before restarting.
Default
1800 ´ 100 ms
Value Range
0–6000 ´ 100 ms
Maintenance Console Location
3.13 [1-1] Slot—Card Property - PRI type (KX-TDA100/KX-TDA200/KX-TDA600 only)
132 PC Programming Manual Document Version 2010-11
3.13 [1-1] Slot—Card Property - PRI type (KX-TDA100/KX-TDA200/KX-TDA600 only)
Programming Manual References
None
Feature Manual References
None
ISDN Extension—T308
Specifies the maximum time that the PBX waits for a reply after receiving the Release message from ISDN.
Default
40 ´ 100 ms
Value Range
0–600 ´ 100 ms
Maintenance Console Location
3.13 [1-1] Slot—Card Property - PRI type (KX-TDA100/KX-TDA200/KX-TDA600 only)
Programming Manual References
None
Feature Manual References
None
ISDN Extension—T309
Specifies the length of time that the PBX tries to disconnect the data link, before disconnecting the call.
Default
120 ´ 100 ms
Value Range
0–3000 ´ 100 ms
Maintenance Console Location
3.13 [1-1] Slot—Card Property - PRI type (KX-TDA100/KX-TDA200/KX-TDA600 only)
Programming Manual References
None
Feature Manual References
None
Document Version 2010-11 PC Programming Manual 133
3.13 [1-1] Slot—Card Property - PRI type (KX-TDA100/KX-TDA200/KX-TDA600 only)
ISDN Extension—T310
Specifies the maximum time that the PBX waits for a reply after receiving the Incoming Call Proceeding
message.
Default
400 ´ 100 ms
Value Range
0–3000 ´ 100 ms
Maintenance Console Location
3.13 [1-1] Slot—Card Property - PRI type (KX-TDA100/KX-TDA200/KX-TDA600 only)
Programming Manual References
None
Feature Manual References
None
ISDN Extension—T312
Specifies the maximum time that the PBX waits for a reply after sending the SETUP (call setting) message to
ISDN.
Default
60 ´ 100 ms
Value Range
0–600 ´ 100 ms
Maintenance Console Location
3.13 [1-1] Slot—Card Property - PRI type (KX-TDA100/KX-TDA200/KX-TDA600 only)
Programming Manual References
None
Feature Manual References
None
ISDN Extension—T316
Specifies the maximum time that the PBX waits for a reply after sending the Restart message.
Default
0 ´ 100 ms
134 PC Programming Manual Document Version 2010-11
3.13 [1-1] Slot—Card Property - PRI type (KX-TDA100/KX-TDA200/KX-TDA600 only)
Value Range
0–3000 ´ 100 ms
Maintenance Console Location
3.13 [1-1] Slot—Card Property - PRI type (KX-TDA100/KX-TDA200/KX-TDA600 only)
Programming Manual References
None
Feature Manual References
None
ISDN Extension—T320
Specifies the maximum time that the PBX waits for packet protocol.
Default
0 ´ 100 ms
Value Range
0–3000 ´ 100 ms
Maintenance Console Location
3.13 [1-1] Slot—Card Property - PRI type (KX-TDA100/KX-TDA200/KX-TDA600 only)
Programming Manual References
None
Feature Manual References
None
ISDN Extension—T322
Specifies the maximum time that the PBX waits for a reply after sending the Status enquiry message.
Default
40 ´ 100 ms
Value Range
0–600 ´ 100 ms
Maintenance Console Location
3.13 [1-1] Slot—Card Property - PRI type (KX-TDA100/KX-TDA200/KX-TDA600 only)
Document Version 2010-11 PC Programming Manual 135
3.13 [1-1] Slot—Card Property - PRI type (KX-TDA100/KX-TDA200/KX-TDA600 only)
Programming Manual References
None
Feature Manual References
None
ISDN Extension—T3D3
Specifies the length of time that the PBX tries to establish L2 in "Permanent" mode.
Default
300 ´ 100 ms
Value Range
0–3000 ´ 100 ms
Maintenance Console Location
3.13 [1-1] Slot—Card Property - PRI type (KX-TDA100/KX-TDA200/KX-TDA600 only)
Programming Manual References
None
Feature Manual References
None
ISDN Extension—T3D9
Specifies the length of time that the PBX tries to disconnect L2 in "Call by Call" mode.
Default
200 ´ 100 ms
Value Range
0–3000 ´ 100 ms
Maintenance Console Location
3.13 [1-1] Slot—Card Property - PRI type (KX-TDA100/KX-TDA200/KX-TDA600 only)
Programming Manual References
None
Feature Manual References
None
136 PC Programming Manual Document Version 2010-11
3.13 [1-1] Slot—Card Property - PRI type (KX-TDA100/KX-TDA200/KX-TDA600 only)
3.14 [1-1] Slot—Port Property - PRI Port
(KX-TDA100/KX-TDA200/KX-TDA600 only)
Various settings can be programmed for each PRI port.
Main
Shelf (KX-TDA600 only)
Indicates the shelf position (reference only).
Default
Current shelf number
Value Range
Shelf number
Maintenance Console Location
3.14 [1-1] Slot—Port Property - PRI Port (KX-TDA100/KX-TDA200/KX-TDA600 only)
Programming Manual References
None
Feature Manual References
None
Slot
Indicates the slot position (reference only).
Default
Current slot number
Value Range
Slot number
Maintenance Console Location
3.14 [1-1] Slot—Port Property - PRI Port (KX-TDA100/KX-TDA200/KX-TDA600 only)
Programming Manual References
None
Feature Manual References
None
Document Version 2010-11 PC Programming Manual 137
3.14 [1-1] Slot—Port Property - PRI Port (KX-TDA100/KX-TDA200/KX-TDA600 only)
Port
Indicates the port number (reference only).
Default
Current port number
Value Range
Port number
Maintenance Console Location
3.14 [1-1] Slot—Port Property - PRI Port (KX-TDA100/KX-TDA200/KX-TDA600 only)
Programming Manual References
None
Feature Manual References
None
Port Type
Selects the port type.
Note
•Each ISDN connection in a QSIG network must have a master port on one PBX and a slave port on
another PBX.
•ISDN extensions can belong to an incoming call distribution group or idle extension hunting group. In
this case, an MSN can be assigned.
Default
CO
Value Range
CO: For connecting to public network
Extension: For connecting to extension
QSIG-Slave: For connecting to private network (slave port)
QSIG-Master: For connecting to private network (master port)
Maintenance Console Location
3.14 [1-1] Slot—Port Property - PRI Port (KX-TDA100/KX-TDA200/KX-TDA600 only)
Programming Manual References
None
Feature Manual References
9.1.16 ISDN (INTEGRATED SERVICES DIGITAL NETWORK) FEATURES
13.1.18 PRIVATE NETWORK FEATURES—QSIG
138 PC Programming Manual Document Version 2010-11
3.14 [1-1] Slot—Port Property - PRI Port (KX-TDA100/KX-TDA200/KX-TDA600 only)
Connection
Indicates the port status (reference only).
This column offers two ways to open the screen to select the port command:
•Click the desired cell in the column.
•Select the desired cell in the column, and then click Command.
Default
Current status
Value Range
INS: The port is in service.
OUS: The port is out of service.
Fault: The port is not communicating with the network.
Maintenance Console Location
3.14 [1-1] Slot—Port Property - PRI Port (KX-TDA100/KX-TDA200/KX-TDA600 only)
Programming Manual References
3.15 [1-1] Slot—Port Property - PRI Port—Connection Command (KX-TDA100/KX-TDA200/KX-TDA600 only)
Feature Manual References
None
Status Message
Specifies whether the Status Message is sent to the network.
Default
No Transmission
Value Range
No Transmission: Status Message is not sent.
When error detection (Mandatory): Send the Status Message when an error (Mandatory) is detected.
When error detection (Option / Mandatory): Send the Status Message when an error (Option or Mandatory) is
detected.
Maintenance Console Location
3.14 [1-1] Slot—Port Property - PRI Port (KX-TDA100/KX-TDA200/KX-TDA600 only)
Programming Manual References
None
Feature Manual References
None
Document Version 2010-11 PC Programming Manual 139
3.14 [1-1] Slot—Port Property - PRI Port (KX-TDA100/KX-TDA200/KX-TDA600 only)
Status Receive
Selects what happens to a call when the Status Message from the network does not match the actual status
of the call.
Default
Ignore
Value Range
Ignore: Ignore the Status Message from the network.
Disconnect: Disconnect the call.
Maintenance Console Location
3.14 [1-1] Slot—Port Property - PRI Port (KX-TDA100/KX-TDA200/KX-TDA600 only)
Programming Manual References
None
Feature Manual References
None
Line Coding
Selects the line coding type of the PRI PCM (Pulse Code Modulation) for the port.
Default
B8ZS
Value Range
B8ZS, AMI
Maintenance Console Location
3.14 [1-1] Slot—Port Property - PRI Port (KX-TDA100/KX-TDA200/KX-TDA600 only)
Programming Manual References
None
Feature Manual References
None
Frame Sequence
Selects the type of frame sequence for the port.
Default
Extend Multi frame (ESF)
140 PC Programming Manual Document Version 2010-11
3.14 [1-1] Slot—Port Property - PRI Port (KX-TDA100/KX-TDA200/KX-TDA600 only)
Value Range
Extend Multi frame (ESF), 4-Frame Multi frame (F4), 12-Frame Multi frame (F12)
Maintenance Console Location
3.14 [1-1] Slot—Port Property - PRI Port (KX-TDA100/KX-TDA200/KX-TDA600 only)
Programming Manual References
None
Feature Manual References
None
CO Setting
CO Setting parameters are not applicable to ports assigned as Extension in Port Type.
Shelf (KX-TDA600 only)
Indicates the shelf position (reference only).
Default
Current shelf number
Value Range
Shelf number
Maintenance Console Location
3.14 [1-1] Slot—Port Property - PRI Port (KX-TDA100/KX-TDA200/KX-TDA600 only)
Programming Manual References
None
Feature Manual References
None
Slot
Indicates the slot position (reference only).
Default
Current slot number
Value Range
Slot number
Document Version 2010-11 PC Programming Manual 141
3.14 [1-1] Slot—Port Property - PRI Port (KX-TDA100/KX-TDA200/KX-TDA600 only)
Maintenance Console Location
3.14 [1-1] Slot—Port Property - PRI Port (KX-TDA100/KX-TDA200/KX-TDA600 only)
Programming Manual References
None
Feature Manual References
None
Port
Indicates the port number (reference only).
Default
Current port number
Value Range
Port number
Maintenance Console Location
3.14 [1-1] Slot—Port Property - PRI Port (KX-TDA100/KX-TDA200/KX-TDA600 only)
Programming Manual References
None
Feature Manual References
None
Port Type
Selects the port type.
Note
•Each ISDN connection in a QSIG network must have a master port on one PBX and a slave port on
another PBX.
•ISDN extensions can belong to an incoming call distribution group or idle extension hunting group. In
this case, an MSN can be assigned.
Default
CO
Value Range
CO: For connecting to public network
Extension: For connecting to extension
QSIG-Slave: For connecting to private network (slave port)
QSIG-Master: For connecting to private network (master port)
142 PC Programming Manual Document Version 2010-11
3.14 [1-1] Slot—Port Property - PRI Port (KX-TDA100/KX-TDA200/KX-TDA600 only)
Maintenance Console Location
3.14 [1-1] Slot—Port Property - PRI Port (KX-TDA100/KX-TDA200/KX-TDA600 only)
Programming Manual References
None
Feature Manual References
None
Connection
Indicates the port status (reference only).
This column offers two ways to open the screen to select the port command:
•Click the desired cell in the column.
•Select the desired cell in the column, and then click Command.
Default
Current status
Value Range
INS: The port is in service.
OUS: The port is out of service.
Fault: The port is not communicating with the network.
Maintenance Console Location
3.14 [1-1] Slot—Port Property - PRI Port (KX-TDA100/KX-TDA200/KX-TDA600 only)
Programming Manual References
3.15 [1-1] Slot—Port Property - PRI Port—Connection Command (KX-TDA100/KX-TDA200/KX-TDA600 only)
Feature Manual References
None
Subscriber Number
Specifies the number used as the CLIP number.
Default
Not stored.
Value Range
Max. 16 digits (consisting of 0–9, *, and #)
Maintenance Console Location
3.14 [1-1] Slot—Port Property - PRI Port (KX-TDA100/KX-TDA200/KX-TDA600 only)
Document Version 2010-11 PC Programming Manual 143
3.14 [1-1] Slot—Port Property - PRI Port (KX-TDA100/KX-TDA200/KX-TDA600 only)
Programming Manual References
None
Feature Manual References
3.1.13 CLIP (Calling Line Identification Presentation)
Ringback Tone to Outside Caller
Enables the PBX to send a ringback tone to an outside caller when the network cannot send the tone.
Default
Enable
Value Range
Disable, Enable
Maintenance Console Location
3.14 [1-1] Slot—Port Property - PRI Port (KX-TDA100/KX-TDA200/KX-TDA600 only)
Programming Manual References
None
Feature Manual References
None
ISDN In/Out Call Type
Selects the method used to send dialed digits to the network.
Default
CO port: En-bloc
QSIG (slave/master) port: Overlap
Value Range
En-bloc: The PBX sends all of the dialed digits at once after the extension user completes dialing. The PBX
recognizes the end of dialing when (1) # is dialed, if programmed, (2) a preprogrammed telephone number is
dialed, or (3) the inter-digit timer expires.
Overlap: The PBX sends dialed digits one at a time.
Maintenance Console Location
3.14 [1-1] Slot—Port Property - PRI Port (KX-TDA100/KX-TDA200/KX-TDA600 only)
Programming Manual References
3.1 [1-1] Slot
4.4 [2-3] Timers & Counters—Dial / IRNA / Recall / Tone— Dial—Extension Inter-digit
144 PC Programming Manual Document Version 2010-11
3.14 [1-1] Slot—Port Property - PRI Port (KX-TDA100/KX-TDA200/KX-TDA600 only)
4.17 [2-9] System Options—Option 2— End of Dial Plan—[#] as End of Dial for en Bloc mode (KX-TDA100/
KX-TDA200/KX-TDA600 only)
5.4 [3-1-4] Dialing Plan
Feature Manual References
9.1.16 ISDN (INTEGRATED SERVICES DIGITAL NETWORK) FEATURES
Networking Data Transfer
Enables transmission of extension status data to connected PBXs in a network. This setting is only available
when Port Type on this screen has been set to QSIG-Slave or QSIG-Master.
Default
No
Value Range
No, Yes
Maintenance Console Location
3.14 [1-1] Slot—Port Property - PRI Port (KX-TDA100/KX-TDA200/KX-TDA600 only)
Programming Manual References
Section 11 [9] Private Network
Feature Manual References
13.1.15 Private Network Features—NDSS (Network Direct Station Selection)
Loopback Test started by Network
Enables a loopback test started from the network side, to be performed on the PRI23 card.
Note
The version of the PRI23 card must be 2.000 or later.
Default
Disable
Value Range
Disable, Enable
Maintenance Console Location
3.14 [1-1] Slot—Port Property - PRI Port (KX-TDA100/KX-TDA200/KX-TDA600 only)
Programming Manual References
Network Loopback Test (KX-TDA100/KX-TDA200/KX-TDA600 only)
Document Version 2010-11 PC Programming Manual 145
3.14 [1-1] Slot—Port Property - PRI Port (KX-TDA100/KX-TDA200/KX-TDA600 only)
Feature Manual References
None
Extension Setting
Extension Setting parameters are applicable only for the PRI extension port.
Shelf (KX-TDA600 only)
Indicates the shelf position (reference only).
Default
Current shelf number
Value Range
Shelf number
Maintenance Console Location
3.14 [1-1] Slot—Port Property - PRI Port (KX-TDA100/KX-TDA200/KX-TDA600 only)
Programming Manual References
None
Feature Manual References
None
Slot
Indicates the slot position (reference only).
Default
Current slot number
Value Range
Slot number
Maintenance Console Location
3.14 [1-1] Slot—Port Property - PRI Port (KX-TDA100/KX-TDA200/KX-TDA600 only)
Programming Manual References
None
Feature Manual References
None
146 PC Programming Manual Document Version 2010-11
3.14 [1-1] Slot—Port Property - PRI Port (KX-TDA100/KX-TDA200/KX-TDA600 only)
Port
Indicates the port number (reference only).
Default
Current port number
Value Range
Port number
Maintenance Console Location
3.14 [1-1] Slot—Port Property - PRI Port (KX-TDA100/KX-TDA200/KX-TDA600 only)
Programming Manual References
None
Feature Manual References
None
Port Type
Selects the type of the port.
Note
•Each ISDN connection in a QSIG network must have a master port on one PBX and a slave port on
another PBX.
•ISDN extensions can belong to an incoming call distribution group or idle extension hunting group. In
this case, an MSN can be assigned.
Default
CO
Value Range
CO: For connecting to public network
Extension: For connecting to extension
QSIG-Slave: For connecting to private network (slave port)
QSIG-Master: For connecting to private network (master port)
Maintenance Console Location
3.14 [1-1] Slot—Port Property - PRI Port (KX-TDA100/KX-TDA200/KX-TDA600 only)
Programming Manual References
None
Feature Manual References
None
Document Version 2010-11 PC Programming Manual 147
3.14 [1-1] Slot—Port Property - PRI Port (KX-TDA100/KX-TDA200/KX-TDA600 only)
Connection
Indicates the port status (reference only).
This column offers two ways to open the screen to select the port command:
•Click the desired cell in the column.
•Select the desired cell in the column, and then click Command.
Default
Current status
Value Range
INS: The port is in service.
OUS: The port is out of service.
Fault: The port is not communicating with the network.
Maintenance Console Location
3.14 [1-1] Slot—Port Property - PRI Port (KX-TDA100/KX-TDA200/KX-TDA600 only)
Programming Manual References
3.15 [1-1] Slot—Port Property - PRI Port—Connection Command (KX-TDA100/KX-TDA200/KX-TDA600 only)
Feature Manual References
None
Ring Mode (ISDN MSN Last No. 0 or 00)
Selects the ring mode when receiving an incoming call with an MSN ending with "0" or "00".
Default
Ring All Extension for MSN
Value Range
Ring All Extension for MSN: Ring all ISDN extensions that are addressed with MSN.
Ring an Extension for MSN: Ring only one of the ISDN extensions that are addressed with MSN.
Maintenance Console Location
3.14 [1-1] Slot—Port Property - PRI Port (KX-TDA100/KX-TDA200/KX-TDA600 only)
Programming Manual References
None
Feature Manual References
None
148 PC Programming Manual Document Version 2010-11
3.14 [1-1] Slot—Port Property - PRI Port (KX-TDA100/KX-TDA200/KX-TDA600 only)
Network Configuration
Shelf (KX-TDA600 only)
Indicates the shelf position (reference only).
Default
Current shelf number
Value Range
Shelf number
Maintenance Console Location
3.14 [1-1] Slot—Port Property - PRI Port (KX-TDA100/KX-TDA200/KX-TDA600 only)
Programming Manual References
None
Feature Manual References
None
Slot
Indicates the slot position (reference only).
Default
Current slot number
Value Range
Slot number
Maintenance Console Location
3.14 [1-1] Slot—Port Property - PRI Port (KX-TDA100/KX-TDA200/KX-TDA600 only)
Programming Manual References
None
Feature Manual References
None
Port
Indicates the port number (reference only).
Default
Current port number
Document Version 2010-11 PC Programming Manual 149
3.14 [1-1] Slot—Port Property - PRI Port (KX-TDA100/KX-TDA200/KX-TDA600 only)
Value Range
Port number
Maintenance Console Location
3.14 [1-1] Slot—Port Property - PRI Port (KX-TDA100/KX-TDA200/KX-TDA600 only)
Programming Manual References
None
Feature Manual References
None
Port Type
Selects the port type.
Note
•Each ISDN connection in a QSIG network must have a master port on one PBX and a slave port on
another PBX.
•ISDN extensions can belong to an incoming call distribution group or idle extension hunting group. In
this case, an MSN can be assigned.
Default
CO
Value Range
CO: For connecting to public network
Extension: For connecting to extension
QSIG-Slave: For connecting to private network (slave port)
QSIG-Master: For connecting to private network (master port)
Maintenance Console Location
3.14 [1-1] Slot—Port Property - PRI Port (KX-TDA100/KX-TDA200/KX-TDA600 only)
Programming Manual References
None
Feature Manual References
None
Connection
Indicates the port status (reference only).
This column offers two ways to open the screen to select the port command:
•Click the desired cell in the column.
150 PC Programming Manual Document Version 2010-11
3.14 [1-1] Slot—Port Property - PRI Port (KX-TDA100/KX-TDA200/KX-TDA600 only)
•Select the desired cell in the column, and then click Command.
Default
Current status
Value Range
INS: The port is in service.
OUS: The port is out of service.
Fault: The port is not communicating with the network.
Maintenance Console Location
3.14 [1-1] Slot—Port Property - PRI Port (KX-TDA100/KX-TDA200/KX-TDA600 only)
Programming Manual References
3.15 [1-1] Slot—Port Property - PRI Port—Connection Command (KX-TDA100/KX-TDA200/KX-TDA600 only)
Feature Manual References
None
Network Type
Selects the network type of the port.
Default
51 US National ISDN 2
Value Range
0–56
(2 UK (Domestic), 5 Netherlands, 6 SwissNET2, 7 SwissNET3, 8 Euro ISDN (Standard), 14 France
(Domestic), 19 Finland, 20 Norway, 27 Australia, 51 US National ISDN 2)
Maintenance Console Location
3.14 [1-1] Slot—Port Property - PRI Port (KX-TDA100/KX-TDA200/KX-TDA600 only)
Programming Manual References
None
Feature Manual References
9.1.16 ISDN (INTEGRATED SERVICES DIGITAL NETWORK) FEATURES
Network Numbering Plan
Shelf (KX-TDA600 only)
Indicates the shelf position (reference only).
Document Version 2010-11 PC Programming Manual 151
3.14 [1-1] Slot—Port Property - PRI Port (KX-TDA100/KX-TDA200/KX-TDA600 only)
Default
Current shelf number
Value Range
Shelf number
Maintenance Console Location
3.14 [1-1] Slot—Port Property - PRI Port (KX-TDA100/KX-TDA200/KX-TDA600 only)
Programming Manual References
None
Feature Manual References
None
Slot
Indicates the slot position (reference only).
Default
Current slot number
Value Range
Slot number
Maintenance Console Location
3.14 [1-1] Slot—Port Property - PRI Port (KX-TDA100/KX-TDA200/KX-TDA600 only)
Programming Manual References
None
Feature Manual References
None
Port
Indicates the port number (reference only).
Default
Current port number
Value Range
Port number
152 PC Programming Manual Document Version 2010-11
3.14 [1-1] Slot—Port Property - PRI Port (KX-TDA100/KX-TDA200/KX-TDA600 only)
Maintenance Console Location
3.14 [1-1] Slot—Port Property - PRI Port (KX-TDA100/KX-TDA200/KX-TDA600 only)
Programming Manual References
None
Feature Manual References
None
Port Type
Selects the port type.
Note
•Each ISDN connection in a QSIG network must have a master port on one PBX and a slave port on
another PBX.
•ISDN extensions can belong to an incoming call distribution group or idle extension hunting group. In
this case, an MSN can be assigned.
Default
CO
Value Range
CO: For connecting to public network
Extension: For connecting to extension
QSIG-Slave: For connecting to private network (slave port)
QSIG-Master: For connecting to private network (master port)
Maintenance Console Location
3.14 [1-1] Slot—Port Property - PRI Port (KX-TDA100/KX-TDA200/KX-TDA600 only)
Programming Manual References
None
Feature Manual References
None
Connection
Indicates the port status (reference only).
This column offers two ways to open the screen to select the port command:
•Click the desired cell in the column.
•Select the desired cell in the column, and then click Command.
Default
Current status
Document Version 2010-11 PC Programming Manual 153
3.14 [1-1] Slot—Port Property - PRI Port (KX-TDA100/KX-TDA200/KX-TDA600 only)
Value Range
INS: The port is in service.
OUS: The port is out of service.
Fault: The port is not communicating with the network.
Maintenance Console Location
3.14 [1-1] Slot—Port Property - PRI Port (KX-TDA100/KX-TDA200/KX-TDA600 only)
Programming Manual References
None
Feature Manual References
None
Trunk Property
Selects the CO line property of the port.
Default
Public
Value Range
Public: Public network
VPN: Virtual Private Network
Maintenance Console Location
3.14 [1-1] Slot—Port Property - PRI Port (KX-TDA100/KX-TDA200/KX-TDA600 only)
Programming Manual References
None
Feature Manual References
13.1.13 PRIVATE NETWORK FEATURES
Calling Party number—Numbering Plan ID—Public, Private
Selects the numbering plan ID that applies to outgoing CO line calls routed through public and private networks.
Default
Public: Unknown
Private: Private
Value Range
Unknown, ISDN-Telephony, National Standard, Private
154 PC Programming Manual Document Version 2010-11
3.14 [1-1] Slot—Port Property - PRI Port (KX-TDA100/KX-TDA200/KX-TDA600 only)
Maintenance Console Location
3.14 [1-1] Slot—Port Property - PRI Port (KX-TDA100/KX-TDA200/KX-TDA600 only)
Programming Manual References
None
Feature Manual References
None
Calling Party number—Type of Number—Public, Private
Selects the type of number that applies to outgoing CO line calls routed through public or private networks.
Default
Unknown
Value Range
Unknown, International, National, Network, Subscriber
Maintenance Console Location
3.14 [1-1] Slot—Port Property - PRI Port (KX-TDA100/KX-TDA200/KX-TDA600 only)
Programming Manual References
None
Feature Manual References
None
Called Party number—Numbering Plan ID—Public, Private
Selects the numbering plan ID that applies to incoming CO line calls routed through public and private networks.
Default
Public: Unknown
Private: Private
Value Range
Unknown, ISDN-Telephony, National Standard, Private
Maintenance Console Location
3.14 [1-1] Slot—Port Property - PRI Port (KX-TDA100/KX-TDA200/KX-TDA600 only)
Programming Manual References
None
Document Version 2010-11 PC Programming Manual 155
3.14 [1-1] Slot—Port Property - PRI Port (KX-TDA100/KX-TDA200/KX-TDA600 only)
Feature Manual References
None
Called Party number—Type of Number—Public, Private
Selects the type of number that applies to incoming CO line calls routed through public and private networks.
Default
Unknown
Value Range
Unknown, International, National, Network, Subscriber
Maintenance Console Location
3.14 [1-1] Slot—Port Property - PRI Port (KX-TDA100/KX-TDA200/KX-TDA600 only)
Programming Manual References
None
Feature Manual References
None
Supplementary Service
Shelf (KX-TDA600 only)
Indicates the shelf position (reference only).
Default
Current shelf number
Value Range
Shelf number
Maintenance Console Location
3.14 [1-1] Slot—Port Property - PRI Port (KX-TDA100/KX-TDA200/KX-TDA600 only)
Programming Manual References
None
Feature Manual References
None
Slot
Indicates the slot position (reference only).
156 PC Programming Manual Document Version 2010-11
3.14 [1-1] Slot—Port Property - PRI Port (KX-TDA100/KX-TDA200/KX-TDA600 only)
Default
Current slot number
Value Range
Slot number
Maintenance Console Location
3.14 [1-1] Slot—Port Property - PRI Port (KX-TDA100/KX-TDA200/KX-TDA600 only)
Programming Manual References
None
Feature Manual References
None
Port
Indicates the port number (reference only).
Default
Current port number
Value Range
Port number
Maintenance Console Location
3.14 [1-1] Slot—Port Property - PRI Port (KX-TDA100/KX-TDA200/KX-TDA600 only)
Programming Manual References
None
Feature Manual References
None
Port Type
Selects the port type.
Note
•Each ISDN connection in a QSIG network must have a master port on one PBX and a slave port on
another PBX.
•ISDN extensions can belong to an incoming call distribution group or idle extension hunting group. In
this case, an MSN can be assigned.
Default
CO
Document Version 2010-11 PC Programming Manual 157
3.14 [1-1] Slot—Port Property - PRI Port (KX-TDA100/KX-TDA200/KX-TDA600 only)
Value Range
CO: For connecting to public network
Extension: For connecting to extension
QSIG-Slave: For connecting to private network (slave port)
QSIG-Master: For connecting to private network (master port)
Maintenance Console Location
3.14 [1-1] Slot—Port Property - PRI Port (KX-TDA100/KX-TDA200/KX-TDA600 only)
Programming Manual References
None
Feature Manual References
None
Connection
Indicates the port status (reference only).
This column offers two ways to open the screen to select the port command:
•Click the desired cell in the column.
•Select the desired cell in the column, and then click Command.
Default
Current status
Value Range
INS: The port is in service.
OUS: The port is out of service.
Fault: The port is not communicating with the network.
Maintenance Console Location
3.14 [1-1] Slot—Port Property - PRI Port (KX-TDA100/KX-TDA200/KX-TDA600 only)
Programming Manual References
None
Feature Manual References
None
COLP, CLIR, COLR, CNIP, CONP, CNIR, CONR, CF (Rerouting), CT, CCBS, E911
Specifies whether each ISDN or QSIG supplementary service is used.
The available services depend on the setting of Port Type on this screen.
When using the Centralized VM feature, set CF (Rerouting) to "No".
158 PC Programming Manual Document Version 2010-11
3.14 [1-1] Slot—Port Property - PRI Port (KX-TDA100/KX-TDA200/KX-TDA600 only)
Default
CLIR, E911: Yes
Other services: No
Value Range
No, Yes
Maintenance Console Location
3.14 [1-1] Slot—Port Property - PRI Port (KX-TDA100/KX-TDA200/KX-TDA600 only)
Programming Manual References
None
Feature Manual References
3.1.13 CLIP (Calling Line Identification Presentation)
13.1.20 Private Network Features—QSIG—CF (Call Forwarding)
13.1.21 Private Network Features—QSIG—CLIP/COLP (Calling/Connected Line Identification Presentation)
and CNIP/CONP (Calling/Connected Name Identification Presentation)
13.1.22 Private Network Features—QSIG—CT (Call Transfer)
13.1.19 Private Network Features—QSIG—CCBS (Completion of Calls to Busy Subscriber)
Document Version 2010-11 PC Programming Manual 159
3.14 [1-1] Slot—Port Property - PRI Port (KX-TDA100/KX-TDA200/KX-TDA600 only)
3.15 [1-1] Slot—Port Property - PRI Port—Connection
Command (KX-TDA100/KX-TDA200/KX-TDA600
only)
Commands for the PRI ports can be programmed.
INS
Puts the port in service.
Default
Not applicable.
Value Range
Not applicable.
Maintenance Console Location
3.15 [1-1] Slot—Port Property - PRI Port—Connection Command (KX-TDA100/KX-TDA200/KX-TDA600 only)
Programming Manual References
3.14 [1-1] Slot—Port Property - PRI Port (KX-TDA100/KX-TDA200/KX-TDA600 only)
Feature Manual References
None
OUS
Takes the port out of service. This enables a temporary non-use of the port, for example, for the purpose of
repair.
Default
Not applicable.
Value Range
Not applicable.
Maintenance Console Location
3.15 [1-1] Slot—Port Property - PRI Port—Connection Command (KX-TDA100/KX-TDA200/KX-TDA600 only)
Programming Manual References
3.14 [1-1] Slot—Port Property - PRI Port (KX-TDA100/KX-TDA200/KX-TDA600 only)
Feature Manual References
None
160 PC Programming Manual Document Version 2010-11
3.15 [1-1] Slot—Port Property - PRI Port—Connection Command (KX-TDA100/KX-TDA200/KX-TDA600 only)
3.16 [1-1] Slot—Card Property - T1 type
(KX-TDA100/KX-TDA200/KX-TDA600 only)
The properties of the T1 card can be specified.
Line Coding
Selects the line coding type of T1 PCM (Pulse Code Modulation) used.
Default
B8ZS
Value Range
B8ZS, AMI
Maintenance Console Location
3.16 [1-1] Slot—Card Property - T1 type (KX-TDA100/KX-TDA200/KX-TDA600 only)
Programming Manual References
None
Feature Manual References
None
Frame Sequence
Selects the type of frame sequence used for communications.
Default
ESF
Value Range
D4, ESF
Maintenance Console Location
3.16 [1-1] Slot—Card Property - T1 type (KX-TDA100/KX-TDA200/KX-TDA600 only)
Programming Manual References
None
Feature Manual References
None
Document Version 2010-11 PC Programming Manual 161
3.16 [1-1] Slot—Card Property - T1 type (KX-TDA100/KX-TDA200/KX-TDA600 only)
ESF Frame Sequence
Selects the values for C-bit and D-bit. To enable this setting, Frame Sequence on this screen should be
set to ESF.
Default
C=A, D=B
Value Range
C=A, D=B; C=0, D=0; C=0, D=1; C=1, D=0; C=1, D=1
Maintenance Console Location
3.16 [1-1] Slot—Card Property - T1 type (KX-TDA100/KX-TDA200/KX-TDA600 only)
Programming Manual References
None
Feature Manual References
None
LIU Send Option
Selects the transmitting level (Transmit Pulse Amplitude) of LIU.
Default
Mode-1
Value Range
Mode-1–Mode-8
Maintenance Console Location
3.16 [1-1] Slot—Card Property - T1 type (KX-TDA100/KX-TDA200/KX-TDA600 only)
Programming Manual References
None
Feature Manual References
None
LIU Receive Option
Selects the receiving level (Receive Equalization) of LIU.
Default
Automatic
162 PC Programming Manual Document Version 2010-11
3.16 [1-1] Slot—Card Property - T1 type (KX-TDA100/KX-TDA200/KX-TDA600 only)
Value Range
Automatic, 6 dB, 12 dB, 18 dB, 24 dB
Maintenance Console Location
3.16 [1-1] Slot—Card Property - T1 type (KX-TDA100/KX-TDA200/KX-TDA600 only)
Programming Manual References
None
Feature Manual References
None
First Dial Timer (CO)
Specifies the minimum time that the PBX waits after seizing a CO line, before sending the dialed digits to the
telephone company. This allows the telephone company to have enough time to accept the dialed digits
correctly.
Default
1.0 s
Value Range
0.5 ´ n (n=1–16) s
Maintenance Console Location
3.16 [1-1] Slot—Card Property - T1 type (KX-TDA100/KX-TDA200/KX-TDA600 only)
Programming Manual References
None
Feature Manual References
None
First Dial Timer (DID/TIE)
Specifies the minimum time that the PBX waits after seizing a DID or TIE line, before sending the dialed digits
to the telephone company or to another PBX. This allows the telephone company or the other PBX to have
enough time to accept the dialed digits correctly.
Default
64 ms
Value Range
32 ´ n (n=1–255) ms
Document Version 2010-11 PC Programming Manual 163
3.16 [1-1] Slot—Card Property - T1 type (KX-TDA100/KX-TDA200/KX-TDA600 only)
Maintenance Console Location
3.16 [1-1] Slot—Card Property - T1 type (KX-TDA100/KX-TDA200/KX-TDA600 only)
Programming Manual References
None
Feature Manual References
None
Answer Detection Timer
Specifies the length of time required by the PBX to recognize the answer signal. This allows the telephone
company to have enough time to accept the dialed digits correctly.
Default
32 ms
Value Range
32 ´ n (n=1–255) ms
Maintenance Console Location
3.16 [1-1] Slot—Card Property - T1 type (KX-TDA100/KX-TDA200/KX-TDA600 only)
Programming Manual References
None
Feature Manual References
None
Wink Signal Width
Specifies the length of a wink signal.
Default
224 ms
Value Range
32 ´ n (n=4–9) ms
Maintenance Console Location
3.16 [1-1] Slot—Card Property - T1 type (KX-TDA100/KX-TDA200/KX-TDA600 only)
Programming Manual References
None
164 PC Programming Manual Document Version 2010-11
3.16 [1-1] Slot—Card Property - T1 type (KX-TDA100/KX-TDA200/KX-TDA600 only)
Feature Manual References
None
DTMF Tone—DTMF Inter-digit Pause
Specifies the length of the DTMF inter-digit pause. This allows the telephone company to have enough time
to accept the dialed digits correctly.
Default
112 ms
Value Range
64 + 16 ´ n (n=0–11) ms
Maintenance Console Location
3.16 [1-1] Slot—Card Property - T1 type (KX-TDA100/KX-TDA200/KX-TDA600 only)
Programming Manual References
None
Feature Manual References
None
DTMF Tone—DTMF Transmit
Specifies the volume of the DTMF tone to be transmitted.
Default
-3 dB
Value Range
3-n (n=0–15) dB
Maintenance Console Location
3.16 [1-1] Slot—Card Property - T1 type (KX-TDA100/KX-TDA200/KX-TDA600 only)
Programming Manual References
None
Feature Manual References
None
DTMF Tone—DTMF Receive
Specifies the volume of the DTMF tone to be received.
Document Version 2010-11 PC Programming Manual 165
3.16 [1-1] Slot—Card Property - T1 type (KX-TDA100/KX-TDA200/KX-TDA600 only)
Default
-26–0 dB
Value Range
n-42–0 (n=0–31) dB
Maintenance Console Location
3.16 [1-1] Slot—Card Property - T1 type (KX-TDA100/KX-TDA200/KX-TDA600 only)
Programming Manual References
None
Feature Manual References
None
Pulse Dial—Pulse % Break
Specifies the % break for pulse digits. This is the ratio between the break (on-hook) signal and make (off-hook)
signal in a pulse dial.
Default
60 %
Value Range
60 %, 67 %
Maintenance Console Location
3.16 [1-1] Slot—Card Property - T1 type (KX-TDA100/KX-TDA200/KX-TDA600 only)
Programming Manual References
None
Feature Manual References
None
Pulse Dial—Pulse Type
Selects the type of pulse dial transmission appropriate to your area.
Default
Normal
Value Range
Normal, Sweden, New Zealand
166 PC Programming Manual Document Version 2010-11
3.16 [1-1] Slot—Card Property - T1 type (KX-TDA100/KX-TDA200/KX-TDA600 only)
Maintenance Console Location
3.16 [1-1] Slot—Card Property - T1 type (KX-TDA100/KX-TDA200/KX-TDA600 only)
Programming Manual References
None
Feature Manual References
None
Pulse Dial—Pulse Inter-digit Pause
Specifies the length of the pulse inter-digit pause. This allows the telephone company to have enough time to
accept the dialed digits correctly.
Default
830 ms
Value Range
630 ms, 830 ms, 1030 ms
Maintenance Console Location
3.16 [1-1] Slot—Card Property - T1 type (KX-TDA100/KX-TDA200/KX-TDA600 only)
Programming Manual References
None
Feature Manual References
None
Pulse Dial—CO Feed Back Tone
Specifies whether the pulse feedback tone is turned on or not. For outgoing CO line calls, audible tones can
be heard as the dialed number is sent out, which informs the extension user that the number has been dialed.
Default
Yes
Value Range
No, Yes
Maintenance Console Location
3.16 [1-1] Slot—Card Property - T1 type (KX-TDA100/KX-TDA200/KX-TDA600 only)
Programming Manual References
None
Document Version 2010-11 PC Programming Manual 167
3.16 [1-1] Slot—Card Property - T1 type (KX-TDA100/KX-TDA200/KX-TDA600 only)
Feature Manual References
None
Pulse Dial—Maximum BREAK Width
Specifies the maximum length of the break signal in a pulse dial.
Default
112 ms
Value Range
8 ´ n (n=9–20) ms
Maintenance Console Location
3.16 [1-1] Slot—Card Property - T1 type (KX-TDA100/KX-TDA200/KX-TDA600 only)
Programming Manual References
None
Feature Manual References
None
Pulse Dial—Minimum MAKE Width
Specifies the minimum length of the make signal in a pulse dial.
Default
8 ms
Value Range
8 ´ n (n=1–5) ms
Maintenance Console Location
3.16 [1-1] Slot—Card Property - T1 type (KX-TDA100/KX-TDA200/KX-TDA600 only)
Programming Manual References
None
Feature Manual References
None
Flash—Flash Signal Detection (OPX)
Enables the PBX to detect hookswitch flash signals from an SLT connected to an OPX.
168 PC Programming Manual Document Version 2010-11
3.16 [1-1] Slot—Card Property - T1 type (KX-TDA100/KX-TDA200/KX-TDA600 only)
Default
Enable
Value Range
Disable, Enable
Maintenance Console Location
3.16 [1-1] Slot—Card Property - T1 type (KX-TDA100/KX-TDA200/KX-TDA600 only)
Programming Manual References
None
Feature Manual References
None
Flash—Minimum BREAK Width (OPX)
Specifies the minimum length of the break signal in a flash signal from an SLT connected to an OPX.
Default
200 ms
Value Range
8 ´ n (n=3–63) ms
Maintenance Console Location
3.16 [1-1] Slot—Card Property - T1 type (KX-TDA100/KX-TDA200/KX-TDA600 only)
Programming Manual References
None
Feature Manual References
None
Flash—Flash Width (OPX)
Specifies the maximum length of a flash signal sent from an SLT connected to an OPX that the PBX can
recognize as a hookswitch flash signal.
Default
800 ms
Value Range
8 ´ n (n=3–191) ms
Document Version 2010-11 PC Programming Manual 169
3.16 [1-1] Slot—Card Property - T1 type (KX-TDA100/KX-TDA200/KX-TDA600 only)
Maintenance Console Location
3.16 [1-1] Slot—Card Property - T1 type (KX-TDA100/KX-TDA200/KX-TDA600 only)
Programming Manual References
None
Feature Manual References
None
Flash—Flash Signal Detection (TIE)
Enables the PBX to detect a hookswitch flash signal sent from a TIE line.
Default
Enable
Value Range
Disable, Enable
Maintenance Console Location
3.16 [1-1] Slot—Card Property - T1 type (KX-TDA100/KX-TDA200/KX-TDA600 only)
Programming Manual References
None
Feature Manual References
None
Flash—Minimum BREAK Width (TIE)
Specifies the minimum length of the break signal in a flash signal sent from a TIE line.
Default
200 ms
Value Range
8 ´ n (n=3–63) ms
Maintenance Console Location
3.16 [1-1] Slot—Card Property - T1 type (KX-TDA100/KX-TDA200/KX-TDA600 only)
Programming Manual References
None
170 PC Programming Manual Document Version 2010-11
3.16 [1-1] Slot—Card Property - T1 type (KX-TDA100/KX-TDA200/KX-TDA600 only)
Feature Manual References
None
Flash—Flash Width (TIE)
Specifies the maximum length of a flash signal received from a TIE line that the PBX can recognize as a
hookswitch flash signal.
Default
800 ms
Value Range
8 ´ n (n=3–191) ms
Maintenance Console Location
3.16 [1-1] Slot—Card Property - T1 type (KX-TDA100/KX-TDA200/KX-TDA600 only)
Programming Manual References
None
Feature Manual References
None
Caller ID—Caller ID Start Code
Selects the DTMF code used to detect the beginning of a Caller ID series.
Default
*
Value Range
*, #, A–D
Maintenance Console Location
3.16 [1-1] Slot—Card Property - T1 type (KX-TDA100/KX-TDA200/KX-TDA600 only)
Programming Manual References
None
Feature Manual References
3.1.1 Caller ID
Caller ID—Caller ID Information End Code
Selects the delimiter used to separate multiple parameters in a Caller ID series.
Document Version 2010-11 PC Programming Manual 171
3.16 [1-1] Slot—Card Property - T1 type (KX-TDA100/KX-TDA200/KX-TDA600 only)
Default
*
Value Range
*, #, A–D
Maintenance Console Location
3.16 [1-1] Slot—Card Property - T1 type (KX-TDA100/KX-TDA200/KX-TDA600 only)
Programming Manual References
None
Feature Manual References
3.1.1 Caller ID
Caller ID—Caller ID End Code
Selects the DTMF code used to detect the end of a Caller ID series.
Default
*
Value Range
*, #, A–D
Maintenance Console Location
3.16 [1-1] Slot—Card Property - T1 type (KX-TDA100/KX-TDA200/KX-TDA600 only)
Programming Manual References
None
Feature Manual References
3.1.1 Caller ID
172 PC Programming Manual Document Version 2010-11
3.16 [1-1] Slot—Card Property - T1 type (KX-TDA100/KX-TDA200/KX-TDA600 only)
3.17 [1-1] Slot—Port Property - T1 Port (KX-TDA100/
KX-TDA200/KX-TDA600 only)
Various settings can be programmed for each T1 channel.
To change the status of ports, click Command.
Shelf (KX-TDA600 only)
Indicates the shelf position (reference only).
Default
Current shelf number
Value Range
Shelf number
Maintenance Console Location
3.17 [1-1] Slot—Port Property - T1 Port (KX-TDA100/KX-TDA200/KX-TDA600 only)
Programming Manual References
None
Feature Manual References
None
Slot
Indicates the slot position (reference only).
Default
Current slot number
Value Range
Slot number
Maintenance Console Location
3.17 [1-1] Slot—Port Property - T1 Port (KX-TDA100/KX-TDA200/KX-TDA600 only)
Programming Manual References
None
Feature Manual References
None
Document Version 2010-11 PC Programming Manual 173
3.17 [1-1] Slot—Port Property - T1 Port (KX-TDA100/KX-TDA200/KX-TDA600 only)
CH
Indicates the channel number (reference only).
Default
Current channel number
Value Range
Channel number
Maintenance Console Location
3.17 [1-1] Slot—Port Property - T1 Port (KX-TDA100/KX-TDA200/KX-TDA600 only)
Programming Manual References
None
Feature Manual References
None
Connection
Indicates the channel status (reference only).
This column offers two ways to open the screen to select the channel command:
•Click the desired cell in the column.
•Select the desired cell in the column, and then click Command.
Default
Current status
Value Range
INS: The channel is in service.
OUS: The channel is out of service.
Fault: The channel is not communicating with the network.
Maintenance Console Location
3.17 [1-1] Slot—Port Property - T1 Port (KX-TDA100/KX-TDA200/KX-TDA600 only)
Programming Manual References
None
Feature Manual References
None
Subscriber Number
Specifies the number used as the CLIP number.
174 PC Programming Manual Document Version 2010-11
3.17 [1-1] Slot—Port Property - T1 Port (KX-TDA100/KX-TDA200/KX-TDA600 only)
Default
Not stored.
Value Range
Max. 16 digits (consisting of 0–9, *, and #)
Maintenance Console Location
3.17 [1-1] Slot—Port Property - T1 Port (KX-TDA100/KX-TDA200/KX-TDA600 only)
Programming Manual References
None
Feature Manual References
3.1.13 CLIP (Calling Line Identification Presentation)
CO Dial Mode
Selects the type of signal used to dial out to a CO line.
Default
DTMF
Value Range
DTMF, Pulse
Maintenance Console Location
3.17 [1-1] Slot—Port Property - T1 Port (KX-TDA100/KX-TDA200/KX-TDA600 only)
Programming Manual References
None
Feature Manual References
4.1.2 Dial Mode Selection
Channel Type
Selects the channel type.
Default
Undefined
Value Range
Undefined: Not assigned
GCOT: Ground Start Central Office
LCOT: Loop Start Central Office
DID: Direct Inward Dialing
Document Version 2010-11 PC Programming Manual 175
3.17 [1-1] Slot—Port Property - T1 Port (KX-TDA100/KX-TDA200/KX-TDA600 only)
TIE (E & M): TIE Line
OPX: Off Premise Extension
Maintenance Console Location
3.17 [1-1] Slot—Port Property - T1 Port (KX-TDA100/KX-TDA200/KX-TDA600 only)
Programming Manual References
None
Feature Manual References
17.1.1 T1 Line Service
Trunk Property
Selects the CO line property of the TIE channel.
Default
Private
Value Range
Public: Use the DIL/DID method to distribute incoming CO line calls.
Private: Use the TIE line service between two or more PBXs.
Maintenance Console Location
3.17 [1-1] Slot—Port Property - T1 Port (KX-TDA100/KX-TDA200/KX-TDA600 only)
Programming Manual References
None
Feature Manual References
9.1.10 INCOMING CALL FEATURES
9.1.16 ISDN (INTEGRATED SERVICES DIGITAL NETWORK) FEATURES
13.1.13 PRIVATE NETWORK FEATURES
CPC Signal Detection (DID)—Outgoing, Incoming
Specifies the length of time required by the PBX to detect a CPC signal on outgoing or incoming CO line calls
before disconnecting the line. When None is selected here, the line will not be disconnected when a CPC
signal is not detected.
This setting is only available when Channel Type on this screen is set to DID.
Default
160 ms
Value Range
None, 80 ´ n (n=2–75) ms
176 PC Programming Manual Document Version 2010-11
3.17 [1-1] Slot—Port Property - T1 Port (KX-TDA100/KX-TDA200/KX-TDA600 only)
Maintenance Console Location
3.17 [1-1] Slot—Port Property - T1 Port (KX-TDA100/KX-TDA200/KX-TDA600 only)
Programming Manual References
None
Feature Manual References
3.1.21 CPC (Calling Party Control) Signal Detection
CPC Signal Detection (LCO/GCO)—Outgoing, Incoming
Specifies the length of time required by the PBX to detect a CPC signal on outgoing or incoming CO line calls
before disconnecting the line. When None is selected here, the line will not be disconnected when a CPC
signal is not detected.
This setting is only available when Channel Type on this screen is set to GCOT or LCOT.
Default
160 ms
Value Range
None, 8 ´ n (n=2–112) ms
Maintenance Console Location
3.17 [1-1] Slot—Port Property - T1 Port (KX-TDA100/KX-TDA200/KX-TDA600 only)
Programming Manual References
None
Feature Manual References
3.1.21 CPC (Calling Party Control) Signal Detection
DTMF Width
Selects the length of the DTMF tone sent to the T1 channel.
Default
80 ms
Value Range
80 ms, 160 ms
Maintenance Console Location
3.17 [1-1] Slot—Port Property - T1 Port (KX-TDA100/KX-TDA200/KX-TDA600 only)
Document Version 2010-11 PC Programming Manual 177
3.17 [1-1] Slot—Port Property - T1 Port (KX-TDA100/KX-TDA200/KX-TDA600 only)
Programming Manual References
None
Feature Manual References
None
CO Pulse Speed
Selects the speed at which pulse dials are sent to the T1 channel.
Default
10 pulse/s
Value Range
10 pulse/s, 20 pulse/s
Maintenance Console Location
3.17 [1-1] Slot—Port Property - T1 Port (KX-TDA100/KX-TDA200/KX-TDA600 only)
Programming Manual References
None
Feature Manual References
4.1.2 Dial Mode Selection
Wink Signal Time Out
Specifies the length of time that the PBX waits to receive a wink signal after seizing a CO line. If a wink signal
is not received before this timer expires, the CO line is released.
Default
1024 ms
Value Range
64 ´ n (n=1–128) ms
Maintenance Console Location
3.17 [1-1] Slot—Port Property - T1 Port (KX-TDA100/KX-TDA200/KX-TDA600 only)
Programming Manual References
None
Feature Manual References
None
178 PC Programming Manual Document Version 2010-11
3.17 [1-1] Slot—Port Property - T1 Port (KX-TDA100/KX-TDA200/KX-TDA600 only)
Start Signal Type
Selects the type of the start signal.
Default
Wink
Value Range
Immediate: Sends the dialed digits to the CO line when the First Dial Timer expires.
Wink: Sends the dialed digits to the CO line when the wink signal is received.
Maintenance Console Location
3.17 [1-1] Slot—Port Property - T1 Port (KX-TDA100/KX-TDA200/KX-TDA600 only)
Programming Manual References
None
Feature Manual References
None
Sending Caller ID to TIE
Specifies whether Caller ID information is sent when the channel type is TIE.
Default
No
Value Range
Yes, No
Maintenance Console Location
3.17 [1-1] Slot—Port Property - T1 Port (KX-TDA100/KX-TDA200/KX-TDA600 only)
Programming Manual References
None
Feature Manual References
None
Receiving Caller ID from TIE
Specifies whether Caller ID information is received when the channel type is TIE.
Default
Yes
Document Version 2010-11 PC Programming Manual 179
3.17 [1-1] Slot—Port Property - T1 Port (KX-TDA100/KX-TDA200/KX-TDA600 only)
Value Range
Yes, No
Maintenance Console Location
3.17 [1-1] Slot—Port Property - T1 Port (KX-TDA100/KX-TDA200/KX-TDA600 only)
Programming Manual References
None
Feature Manual References
None
Ringback Tone to Outside Caller
Enables the PBX to send a ringback tone to an outside caller when the network cannot send the tone.
This setting is only available when Channel Type on this screen is set to DID.
Default
Enable
Value Range
Disable, Enable
Maintenance Console Location
3.17 [1-1] Slot—Port Property - T1 Port (KX-TDA100/KX-TDA200/KX-TDA600 only)
Programming Manual References
None
Feature Manual References
None
Dial Tone to Extension
Enables the PBX to send a dial tone to an extension making a call when the network cannot send the tone.
Default
Disable
Value Range
Disable, Enable
Maintenance Console Location
3.17 [1-1] Slot—Port Property - T1 Port (KX-TDA100/KX-TDA200/KX-TDA600 only)
180 PC Programming Manual Document Version 2010-11
3.17 [1-1] Slot—Port Property - T1 Port (KX-TDA100/KX-TDA200/KX-TDA600 only)
Programming Manual References
None
Feature Manual References
None
Pause Time
Specifies the length of a pause.
Default
1.5 s
Value Range
1.5 s, 2.5 s, 3.5 s, 4.5 s
Maintenance Console Location
3.17 [1-1] Slot—Port Property - T1 Port (KX-TDA100/KX-TDA200/KX-TDA600 only)
Programming Manual References
None
Feature Manual References
13.1.4 Pause Insertion
8.1.5 Host PBX Access Code (Access Code to the Telephone Company from a Host PBX)
16.1.2 Special Carrier Access Code
Flash Time
Specifies the length of a flash signal.
Default
608 ms
Value Range
None, 16 ´ n (n=1–255) ms
Maintenance Console Location
3.17 [1-1] Slot—Port Property - T1 Port (KX-TDA100/KX-TDA200/KX-TDA600 only)
Programming Manual References
None
Feature Manual References
5.1.1 EFA (External Feature Access)
Document Version 2010-11 PC Programming Manual 181
3.17 [1-1] Slot—Port Property - T1 Port (KX-TDA100/KX-TDA200/KX-TDA600 only)
Disconnect Time
Specifies the length of time after a CO line is disconnected, during which the PBX cannot seize the line.
Default
1.5 s
Value Range
0.5 s, 1.5 s, 2.0 s, 4.0 s, 12.0 s
Maintenance Console Location
3.17 [1-1] Slot—Port Property - T1 Port (KX-TDA100/KX-TDA200/KX-TDA600 only)
Programming Manual References
None
Feature Manual References
6.1.2 Flash/Recall/Terminate
182 PC Programming Manual Document Version 2010-11
3.17 [1-1] Slot—Port Property - T1 Port (KX-TDA100/KX-TDA200/KX-TDA600 only)
3.18 [1-1] Slot—Port Property - T1 Port—Connection
Command (KX-TDA100/KX-TDA200/KX-TDA600
only)
Commands for the T1 channels can be programmed.
INS
Puts the channel in service.
Default
Not applicable.
Value Range
Not applicable.
Maintenance Console Location
3.18 [1-1] Slot—Port Property - T1 Port—Connection Command (KX-TDA100/KX-TDA200/KX-TDA600 only)
Programming Manual References
3.17 [1-1] Slot—Port Property - T1 Port (KX-TDA100/KX-TDA200/KX-TDA600 only)
Feature Manual References
None
OUS
Takes the channel out of service. This enables a temporary non-use of the port, for example, for the purpose
of repair.
Default
Not applicable.
Value Range
Not applicable.
Maintenance Console Location
3.18 [1-1] Slot—Port Property - T1 Port—Connection Command (KX-TDA100/KX-TDA200/KX-TDA600 only)
Programming Manual References
3.17 [1-1] Slot—Port Property - T1 Port (KX-TDA100/KX-TDA200/KX-TDA600 only)
Feature Manual References
None
Document Version 2010-11 PC Programming Manual 183
3.18 [1-1] Slot—Port Property - T1 Port—Connection Command (KX-TDA100/KX-TDA200/KX-TDA600 only)
3.19 [1-1] Slot—Card Property - IP Gateway
The properties of the VoIP Gateway card can be specified.
En-bloc Dialing Setting
Selects the call dialing mode.
Default
Overlap
Value Range
En-bloc: The PBX sends all of the dialed digits at once after the extension user completes dialing. The PBX
recognizes the end of dialing when (1) # is dialed, if programmed, (2) a preprogrammed telephone number is
dialed, or (3) the inter-digit timer expires.
Overlap: The PBX sends dialed digits one at a time.
Maintenance Console Location
3.19 [1-1] Slot—Card Property - IP Gateway
Programming Manual References
4.4 [2-3] Timers & Counters—Dial / IRNA / Recall / Tone— Dial—Extension Inter-digit
4.17 [2-9] System Options—Option 2— End of Dial Plan—[#] as End of Dial for en Bloc mode (KX-TDA100/
KX-TDA200/KX-TDA600 only)
5.4 [3-1-4] Dialing Plan
Feature Manual References
13.1.23 Private Network Features—VoIP (Voice over Internet Protocol)
QSIG-CT
Enables a call to be transferred to a destination extension at another PBX in a QSIG network.
Default
Yes
Value Range
Yes, No
Maintenance Console Location
3.19 [1-1] Slot—Card Property - IP Gateway
Programming Manual References
None
184 PC Programming Manual Document Version 2010-11
3.19 [1-1] Slot—Card Property - IP Gateway
Feature Manual References
13.1.22 Private Network Features—QSIG—CT (Call Transfer)
QSIG-CF
Enables a call to be forwarded to a destination extension at another PBX in a QSIG network.
When using the Centralized VM feature, set this to "No".
Default
Yes
Value Range
Yes, No
Maintenance Console Location
3.19 [1-1] Slot—Card Property - IP Gateway
Programming Manual References
None
Feature Manual References
13.1.22 Private Network Features—QSIG—CT (Call Transfer)
Maintenance Port Number (KX-TDA50 only)
Specifies the default maintenance port number of the IP network.
Default
35300
Value Range
10000–65535
Maintenance Console Location
3.19 [1-1] Slot—Card Property - IP Gateway
Programming Manual References
None
Feature Manual References
3.1.22 CTI (Computer Telephony Integration)
CTI Port Number (KX-TDA50 only)
Specifies the default CTI port number of the IP network.
Document Version 2010-11 PC Programming Manual 185
3.19 [1-1] Slot—Card Property - IP Gateway
Default
33333
Value Range
10000–65535
Maintenance Console Location
3.19 [1-1] Slot—Card Property - IP Gateway
Programming Manual References
None
Feature Manual References
3.1.22 CTI (Computer Telephony Integration)
186 PC Programming Manual Document Version 2010-11
3.19 [1-1] Slot—Card Property - IP Gateway
3.20 [1-1] Slot—Port Property - IP-GW Port
Status of the IP-GW ports can be referred to, or set to INS (in service) or OUS (out of service).
To change the status of ports, click Command.
Shelf (KX-TDA600 only)
Indicates the shelf position (reference only).
Default
Current shelf number
Value Range
Shelf number
Maintenance Console Location
3.20 [1-1] Slot—Port Property - IP-GW Port
Programming Manual References
None
Feature Manual References
None
Slot
Indicates the slot position (reference only).
Default
Current slot number
Value Range
Slot number
Maintenance Console Location
3.20 [1-1] Slot—Port Property - IP-GW Port
Programming Manual References
None
Feature Manual References
None
Port
Indicates the port number (reference only).
Document Version 2010-11 PC Programming Manual 187
3.20 [1-1] Slot—Port Property - IP-GW Port
Default
Current port number
Value Range
Port number
Maintenance Console Location
3.20 [1-1] Slot—Port Property - IP-GW Port
Programming Manual References
None
Feature Manual References
None
Connection
Indicates the port status (reference only).
This column offers two ways to open the screen to select the port command:
•Click the desired cell in the column.
•Select the desired cell in the column, and then click Command.
Default
Current status
Value Range
INS: The port is in service.
OUS: The port is out of service.
Fault: The port is not communicating with the network.
Maintenance Console Location
3.20 [1-1] Slot—Port Property - IP-GW Port
Programming Manual References
3.21 [1-1] Slot—Port Property - IP-GW Port—Connection Command
Feature Manual References
None
188 PC Programming Manual Document Version 2010-11
3.20 [1-1] Slot—Port Property - IP-GW Port
3.21 [1-1] Slot—Port Property - IP-GW Port—
Connection Command
Commands for the IP-GW ports can be programmed.
INS
Puts the port in service.
Default
Not applicable.
Value Range
Not applicable.
Maintenance Console Location
3.21 [1-1] Slot—Port Property - IP-GW Port—Connection Command
Programming Manual References
3.20 [1-1] Slot—Port Property - IP-GW Port
Feature Manual References
None
OUS
Takes the port out of service. This enables a temporary non-use of the port, for example, for the purpose of
repair.
Default
Not applicable.
Value Range
Not applicable.
Maintenance Console Location
3.21 [1-1] Slot—Port Property - IP-GW Port—Connection Command
Programming Manual References
3.20 [1-1] Slot—Port Property - IP-GW Port
Feature Manual References
None
Document Version 2010-11 PC Programming Manual 189
3.21 [1-1] Slot—Port Property - IP-GW Port—Connection Command
3.22 [1-1] Slot—Card Property - IP Extension
The properties of the VoIP Extension card can be specified.
To adjust settings related to IP-PT network data transmission, click Common Settings.
IP Address
Specifies the IP address of the card.
Default
0.0.0.0
Value Range
1.0.0.0–223.255.255.255
Maintenance Console Location
3.22 [1-1] Slot—Card Property - IP Extension
Programming Manual References
None
Feature Manual References
9.1.15 IP-PT (IP Proprietary Telephone)
Subnet Mask
Specifies the subnet mask of the card.
Default
0.0.0.0
Value Range
0–255.0–255.0–255.0–255 (except 0.0.0.0 and 255.255.255.255)
Maintenance Console Location
3.22 [1-1] Slot—Card Property - IP Extension
Programming Manual References
None
Feature Manual References
9.1.15 IP-PT (IP Proprietary Telephone)
Gateway Address [Common Settings]
Displays the default gateway address of the network for IP-PTs (reference only).
190 PC Programming Manual Document Version 2010-11
3.22 [1-1] Slot—Card Property - IP Extension
To change the value displayed here, click Common Settings, and set the desired value for Gateway
Address.
Default
0.0.0.0
Value Range
0.0.0.0–223.255.255.255
Maintenance Console Location
3.22 [1-1] Slot—Card Property - IP Extension
Programming Manual References
3.23 [1-1] Slot—Card Property - IP Extension—Common Settings
Feature Manual References
9.1.15 IP-PT (IP Proprietary Telephone)
Keep Alive Time Out
Specifies the length of time that the PBX will continue to consider an IP-PT to be active even if it receives no
transmissions from that IP-PT. The PBX constantly confirms the status of IP-PTs. If no communications are
received from an IP-PT for the duration specified here, the PBX considers the IP-PT to be unreachable, and
sets the port status to Fault.
During operation, set between 10 s and 60 s. Settings over 60 s, and Disable, are used for debugging purposes,
and IP-PTs cannot be guaranteed to function normally in these circumstances. Do not use debugging settings
unless instructed to do so.
Default
10 s
Value Range
Disable, 10–120 s
Maintenance Console Location
3.22 [1-1] Slot—Card Property - IP Extension
Programming Manual References
None
Feature Manual References
9.1.15 IP-PT (IP Proprietary Telephone)
Echo Canceller Ability
Specifies the echo canceler ability time.
Document Version 2010-11 PC Programming Manual 191
3.22 [1-1] Slot—Card Property - IP Extension
Default
48 ms
Value Range
OFF, 48 ms, 128 ms
Maintenance Console Location
3.22 [1-1] Slot—Card Property - IP Extension
Programming Manual References
None
Feature Manual References
9.1.15 IP-PT (IP Proprietary Telephone)
DSP Digital Gain (Down)
Specifies the DSP Digital Gain for the down voice path.
Default
-6 dB
Value Range
-14–6 dB
Maintenance Console Location
3.22 [1-1] Slot—Card Property - IP Extension
Programming Manual References
None
Feature Manual References
9.1.15 IP-PT (IP Proprietary Telephone)
DSP Digital Gain (Up)
Specifies the DSP Digital Gain for the up voice path.
Default
-6 dB
Value Range
-14–6 dB
192 PC Programming Manual Document Version 2010-11
3.22 [1-1] Slot—Card Property - IP Extension
Maintenance Console Location
3.22 [1-1] Slot—Card Property - IP Extension
Programming Manual References
None
Feature Manual References
9.1.15 IP-PT (IP Proprietary Telephone)
EC Gain
Specifies the Echo Canceller Gain.
Default
2 dB
Value Range
-14–6 dB
Maintenance Console Location
3.22 [1-1] Slot—Card Property - IP Extension
Programming Manual References
None
Feature Manual References
9.1.15 IP-PT (IP Proprietary Telephone)
NLP Setting
Specifies the NLP (Non-Linear Processor) setting to control echo sound quality.
Default
Normal
Value Range
Disable, Weak, Normal, Strong
Maintenance Console Location
3.22 [1-1] Slot—Card Property - IP Extension
Programming Manual References
None
Document Version 2010-11 PC Programming Manual 193
3.22 [1-1] Slot—Card Property - IP Extension
Feature Manual References
9.1.15 IP-PT (IP Proprietary Telephone)
194 PC Programming Manual Document Version 2010-11
3.22 [1-1] Slot—Card Property - IP Extension
3.23 [1-1] Slot—Card Property - IP Extension—
Common Settings
IP network data transmission settings can be programmed. To activate any changes made to settings on this
screen, it is necessary to set all installed IP-EXT cards to OUS, then back to INS.
Gateway Address
Specifies the default gateway address of the IP network.
Default
0.0.0.0
Value Range
0.0.0.0–223.255.255.255
Maintenance Console Location
3.23 [1-1] Slot—Card Property - IP Extension—Common Settings
Programming Manual References
3.22 [1-1] Slot—Card Property - IP Extension— Gateway Address [Common Settings]
Feature Manual References
9.1.15 IP-PT (IP Proprietary Telephone)
Voice (RTP) UDP Port No. (Server)
Specifies the UDP port used by the IP-EXT card to transmit and receive RTP (Realtime Transfer Protocol)
data. This must be changed if another network application is using the same port.
For voice communications, an IP-EXT16 card uses 64 and an IP-EXT4 card uses 16 contiguous UDP ports,
starting from the port number specified here.
Default
8000
Value Range
1024–65472
Maintenance Console Location
3.23 [1-1] Slot—Card Property - IP Extension—Common Settings
Programming Manual References
None
Document Version 2010-11 PC Programming Manual 195
3.23 [1-1] Slot—Card Property - IP Extension—Common Settings
Feature Manual References
9.1.15 IP-PT (IP Proprietary Telephone)
Voice (RTP) UDP Port No. (IP-PT)
Specifies the UDP port used to transmit and receive RTP (Realtime Transfer Protocol) data on the IP-PT side.
This must be changed if another network application is using the same port.
For voice communications, an IP-PT uses 64 (with the IP-EXT16 card) or 16 (with the IP-EXT4 card) contiguous
UDP ports, starting from the port number specified here.
Default
8000
Value Range
1024–65472
Maintenance Console Location
3.23 [1-1] Slot—Card Property - IP Extension—Common Settings
Programming Manual References
None
Feature Manual References
9.1.15 IP-PT (IP Proprietary Telephone)
196 PC Programming Manual Document Version 2010-11
3.23 [1-1] Slot—Card Property - IP Extension—Common Settings
3.24 [1-1] Slot—Port Property - IP-Extension Port
Various settings can be programmed for each IP extension port.
To change the status of extension ports, click Command.
IP-PT Registration and De-registration
An IP-PT must be registered to the PBX by programming both the PBX and IP-PT before it can be used.
Programming instructions of the PBX are given below.
It is possible to de-register the IP-PT later.
Preparation
Follow the steps below to prepare before registering an IP-PT.
1. Open 3.22 [1-1] Slot—Card Property - IP Extension, and confirm that the IP address and subnet mask
settings of the IP-EXT card are correct.
2. Open 3.23 [1-1] Slot—Card Property - IP Extension—Common Settings and set the gateway address.
Registration
Follow the steps below to register the IP-PT.
1. Connect the IP-PT to be registered to the network and, if necessary, the power supply.
2. Click Registration.
A dialog box will appear. Non-registered (available) extension numbers are displayed on the left.
3. Highlight numbers and click the right arrow to select them for registration. Click Next.
A screen will appear with information on the current IP-PT extension number and index number for
programming.
4. Program the relevant IP-PT.
5. Click Next.
•If the registration is still in process, the dialog box will show "Waiting for IP-PT to register…". Click
OK.
•If the registration is successful, the dialog box will show "Registration Succeed".
If there are more IP-PTs to be registered, click Continue to resume or Cancel to terminate the
registration. If not, click Close.
Once the IP-PT is successfully registered, the status of the IP-PT will update to show "Registered".
De-registration
Follow the steps below to de-register the IP-PT.
1. Click De-registration.
A dialog box will appear. Registered extension numbers are displayed on the left.
2. Highlight numbers and click the right arrow to select them for de-registration. Click Next.
A dialog box will appear.
3. Click Confirm.
•If the de-registration is successful, the dialog box will show "De-registration Succeed".
•If the de-registration is unsuccessful, the dialog box will show "De-registration Error". De-registration
will be terminated.
4. Click Close.
If the IP-PT is successfully de-registered, the status of the IP-PT will update to show "None".
Document Version 2010-11 PC Programming Manual 197
3.24 [1-1] Slot—Port Property - IP-Extension Port
Forced De-registration
Follow the steps below to forcibly de-register the IP-PT when normal de-registration has been unsuccessful
or IP address settings have been changed or deleted only on the IP-PT.
1. Click Forced De-registration.
A dialog box will appear. Registered extension numbers are displayed on the left.
2. Highlight numbers and click the right arrow to select them for forced de-registration. Click Next.
A dialog box will appear.
3. Click OK.
A dialog box will appear.
4. Click Confirm.
If the de-registration is successful, the dialog box will show "Forced De-registration Succeed".
5. Click Close.
Once the IP-PT is successfully de-registered, the status of the IP-PT will update to show "None".
Shelf (KX-TDA600 only)
Indicates the shelf position (reference only).
Default
Current shelf number
Value Range
Shelf number
Maintenance Console Location
3.24 [1-1] Slot—Port Property - IP-Extension Port
Programming Manual References
None
Feature Manual References
None
Slot
Indicates the slot position (reference only).
Default
Current slot number
Value Range
Slot number
Maintenance Console Location
3.24 [1-1] Slot—Port Property - IP-Extension Port
198 PC Programming Manual Document Version 2010-11
3.24 [1-1] Slot—Port Property - IP-Extension Port
Programming Manual References
None
Feature Manual References
9.1.15 IP-PT (IP Proprietary Telephone)
Port
Indicates the port number (reference only).
Default
Current port number
Value Range
Port number
Maintenance Console Location
3.24 [1-1] Slot—Port Property - IP-Extension Port
Programming Manual References
None
Feature Manual References
9.1.15 IP-PT (IP Proprietary Telephone)
Extension Number
Specifies the extension number of the port.
To change the extension number of an extension, follow the steps below:
1. Type the new extension number, then click Apply.
2. Set the status of the extension port to "OUS", then "INS".
When changing the extension number, make sure that the extension port is not in use. If the extension number
is changed while the port is in use, the new extension number will not come into effect.
Default
For KX-TDA100/KX-TDA200:
Starting at 101
For KX-TDA600:
Starting at 1001
(For port 01 of the first extension card that is installed. Extension numbers are preset for subsequent extensions
by adding one to the previous extension number.)
Value Range
Max. 5 digits (consisting of 0–9)
Document Version 2010-11 PC Programming Manual 199
3.24 [1-1] Slot—Port Property - IP-Extension Port
Maintenance Console Location
3.24 [1-1] Slot—Port Property - IP-Extension Port
Programming Manual References
None
Feature Manual References
9.1.15 IP-PT (IP Proprietary Telephone)
Connection
Indicates the port status (reference only).
This column offers two ways to open the screen to select the port command:
•Click the desired cell in the column.
•Select the desired cell in the column, and then click Command.
Default
Current status
Value Range
INS: The port is in service.
OUS: The port is out of service.
Fault: The port is not communicating with the network.
Maintenance Console Location
3.24 [1-1] Slot—Port Property - IP-Extension Port
Programming Manual References
None
Feature Manual References
9.1.15 IP-PT (IP Proprietary Telephone)
Status
Indicates whether a certain IP-PT is registered (reference only).
Default
None
Value Range
None, Registered
Maintenance Console Location
3.24 [1-1] Slot—Port Property - IP-Extension Port
200 PC Programming Manual Document Version 2010-11
3.24 [1-1] Slot—Port Property - IP-Extension Port
Programming Manual References
None
Feature Manual References
9.1.15 IP-PT (IP Proprietary Telephone)
IP Address
Indicates the IP address of the IP-PT (reference only).
Default
Current IP address
Value Range
1.0.0.0–223.255.255.255
Maintenance Console Location
3.24 [1-1] Slot—Port Property - IP-Extension Port
Programming Manual References
None
Feature Manual References
9.1.15 IP-PT (IP Proprietary Telephone)
Headset OFF/ON
Turns on or off the use of a headset with the IP-PT.
Default
Headset OFF
Value Range
Headset OFF, Headset ON
Maintenance Console Location
3.24 [1-1] Slot—Port Property - IP-Extension Port
Programming Manual References
None
Feature Manual References
8.1.3 Headset Operation
9.1.15 IP-PT (IP Proprietary Telephone)
Document Version 2010-11 PC Programming Manual 201
3.24 [1-1] Slot—Port Property - IP-Extension Port
Ringing Tone
Selects the dual-tone switching pattern of the ring tone for incoming calls.
Default
A
Value Range
A: 64 ms (697 Hz), 64 ms (852 Hz)
B: 32 ms (697 Hz), 32 ms (852 Hz)
C: 128 ms (697 Hz), 128 ms (852 Hz)
D: 32 ms (697 Hz), 96 ms (852 Hz)
Maintenance Console Location
3.24 [1-1] Slot—Port Property - IP-Extension Port
Programming Manual References
None
Feature Manual References
9.1.15 IP-PT (IP Proprietary Telephone)
IP Codec
Specifies the codec used for compression and decompression of transmitted data.
Default
G.711
Value Range
G.711, G.729
Maintenance Console Location
3.24 [1-1] Slot—Port Property - IP-Extension Port
Programming Manual References
None
Feature Manual References
9.1.15 IP-PT (IP Proprietary Telephone)
Packet Sampling Time
Specifies the time interval between measurements (samples) of sound data during a conversation. The smaller
this number, the higher the quality of the transmitted sound.
When IP Codec on this screen is set to G.711, only 20 ms and 30 ms are available.
202 PC Programming Manual Document Version 2010-11
3.24 [1-1] Slot—Port Property - IP-Extension Port
Default
20 ms
Value Range
20 ms, 30 ms, 40 ms, 60 ms
Maintenance Console Location
3.24 [1-1] Slot—Port Property - IP-Extension Port
Programming Manual References
None
Feature Manual References
9.1.15 IP-PT (IP Proprietary Telephone)
Document Version 2010-11 PC Programming Manual 203
3.24 [1-1] Slot—Port Property - IP-Extension Port
3.25 [1-1] Slot—Card Property - SIP Gateway
(KX-TDA50 only)
The properties of the SIP-GW card can be specified.
DSP Expansion Card
Indicates whether the SIP-DSP card is installed (reference only).
Default
None
Value Range
None, Installed
Maintenance Console Location
3.25 [1-1] Slot—Card Property - SIP Gateway (KX-TDA50 only)
Programming Manual References
None
Feature Manual References
None
Ringback Tone to Outside Caller
Enables the PBX to send a ringback tone to an outside caller when the network cannot send the tone.
Default
Disable
Value Range
Disable, Enable
Maintenance Console Location
3.25 [1-1] Slot—Card Property - SIP Gateway (KX-TDA50 only)
Programming Manual References
None
Feature Manual References
None
204 PC Programming Manual Document Version 2010-11
3.25 [1-1] Slot—Card Property - SIP Gateway (KX-TDA50 only)
3.26 [1-1] Slot—SIP-GW Port Property (KX-TDA50
only)
Status of the SIP-GW ports can be referred to, or set to INS (in service) or OUS (out of service).
To change the status of ports, click Command.
Slot
Indicates the slot position (reference only).
Default
Current slot number
Value Range
Slot number
Maintenance Console Location
3.26 [1-1] Slot—SIP-GW Port Property (KX-TDA50 only)
Programming Manual References
None
Feature Manual References
None
Port
Indicates the port number (reference only).
Default
Current port number
Value Range
Port number
Maintenance Console Location
3.26 [1-1] Slot—SIP-GW Port Property (KX-TDA50 only)
Programming Manual References
None
Feature Manual References
None
Document Version 2010-11 PC Programming Manual 205
3.26 [1-1] Slot—SIP-GW Port Property (KX-TDA50 only)
Connection
Indicates the channel status (reference only).
This column offers two ways to open the screen to select the channel command:
•Click the desired cell in the column.
•Select the desired cell in the column, and then click Command.
Default
Current status
Value Range
INS: The channel is in service.
OUS: The channel is out of service.
Fault: The channel is not communicating with the network.
Maintenance Console Location
3.26 [1-1] Slot—SIP-GW Port Property (KX-TDA50 only)
Programming Manual References
None
Feature Manual References
None
Subscriber Number
Specifies the number used as the CLIP number.
Default
Not stored.
Value Range
Max. 16 digits (consisting of 0–9, *, and #)
Maintenance Console Location
3.26 [1-1] Slot—SIP-GW Port Property (KX-TDA50 only)
Programming Manual References
None
Feature Manual References
None
CLIR
Specifies whether to restrict the display of the CLIP number on the called party’s telephone when making a
public network CO line call.
206 PC Programming Manual Document Version 2010-11
3.26 [1-1] Slot—SIP-GW Port Property (KX-TDA50 only)
Default
Yes
Value Range
Yes, No
Maintenance Console Location
3.26 [1-1] Slot—SIP-GW Port Property (KX-TDA50 only)
Programming Manual References
None
Feature Manual References
None
E911
Specifies whether to display the caller’s number when dialing a number registered as an Emergency Number.
To use this feature, it is necessary that:
–at least one Emergency Number is registered.
–PBX Caller ID for the SIP-GW card is enabled. For details, refer to the documentation for the card.
Default
No
Value Range
Yes, No
Maintenance Console Location
3.26 [1-1] Slot—SIP-GW Port Property (KX-TDA50 only)
Programming Manual References
9.4 [7-4] Emergency Dial— Emergency Number
Feature Manual References
None
Document Version 2010-11 PC Programming Manual 207
3.26 [1-1] Slot—SIP-GW Port Property (KX-TDA50 only)
3.27 [1-1] Slot—OPB3 Card Property (KX-TDA100/
KX-TDA200/KX-TDA600 only)
The properties of the Optional Base card can be specified.
To change the status of slots on the OPB card, click Command.
Shelf (KX-TDA600 only)
Indicates the shelf position (reference only).
Default
Shelf number
Value Range
Shelf number
Maintenance Console Location
3.27 [1-1] Slot—OPB3 Card Property (KX-TDA100/KX-TDA200/KX-TDA600 only)
Programming Manual References
None
Feature Manual References
None
Slot
Indicates the slot position (reference only).
Default
Current slot number
Value Range
Slot number
Maintenance Console Location
3.27 [1-1] Slot—OPB3 Card Property (KX-TDA100/KX-TDA200/KX-TDA600 only)
Programming Manual References
None
Feature Manual References
None
208 PC Programming Manual Document Version 2010-11
3.27 [1-1] Slot—OPB3 Card Property (KX-TDA100/KX-TDA200/KX-TDA600 only)
Sub-slot
Indicates the sub-slot number (reference only).
Default
Current sub-slot number
Value Range
Sub-slot number
Maintenance Console Location
3.27 [1-1] Slot—OPB3 Card Property (KX-TDA100/KX-TDA200/KX-TDA600 only)
Programming Manual References
None
Feature Manual References
None
Feature Card Type
Indicates the type of option card that is installed or pre-installed in each sub-slot (reference only).
Note that for KX-TDA100/KX-TDA200, only one ECHO16 card can be installed per OPB3 card.
Default
Current card type
Value Range
MSG4: 4-Channel Message Card
DPH4: 4-Port Doorphone Card
ECHO16: 16-Channel Echo Canceller Card (KX-TDA100/KX-TDA200 only)
EIO4: 4-Port External Input/Output Card
ESVM4: 4-Channel Simplified Voice Message Card
Maintenance Console Location
3.27 [1-1] Slot—OPB3 Card Property (KX-TDA100/KX-TDA200/KX-TDA600 only)
Installation Manual References
For KX-TDA100/KX-TDA200:
1.3.1 Optional Equipment
For KX-TDA600:
1.3.1 Optional Equipment
Programming Manual References
None
Document Version 2010-11 PC Programming Manual 209
3.27 [1-1] Slot—OPB3 Card Property (KX-TDA100/KX-TDA200/KX-TDA600 only)
Feature Manual References
None
Status
Indicates the status of the option card in each slot (reference only).
This column offers two ways to open the screen to select the card command:
•Click the desired cell in the column.
•Select the desired cell in the column, and then click Command.
Default
Current status
Value Range
INS: The card is in service.
OUS: The card is out of service.
Fault: The card has been removed from the sub-slot, or is not communicating with the PBX.
Pre-Install: There is no card in the sub-slot, but the card type is programmed for the sub-slot.
Idle: There is no card in the sub-slot, no programming of the card type for the sub-slot.
Maintenance Console Location
3.27 [1-1] Slot—OPB3 Card Property (KX-TDA100/KX-TDA200/KX-TDA600 only)
Programming Manual References
3.28 [1-1] Slot—OPB3 Card Property—Card Command (KX-TDA100/KX-TDA200/KX-TDA600 only)
Feature Manual References
None
Port Number
Indicates the port number of the mounted option card (reference only).
Default
Current port number
Value Range
Port number
Maintenance Console Location
3.27 [1-1] Slot—OPB3 Card Property (KX-TDA100/KX-TDA200/KX-TDA600 only)
Programming Manual References
None
210 PC Programming Manual Document Version 2010-11
3.27 [1-1] Slot—OPB3 Card Property (KX-TDA100/KX-TDA200/KX-TDA600 only)
Feature Manual References
None
Port Status
Indicates the port status of the mounted option card (reference only).
Default
Current port status
Value Range
INS: The card is in service.
OUS: The card is out of service.
Fault: The card is pulled out from the sub-slot, or is not communicating with the PBX.
Maintenance Console Location
3.27 [1-1] Slot—OPB3 Card Property (KX-TDA100/KX-TDA200/KX-TDA600 only)
Programming Manual References
None
Feature Manual References
None
Input Signal Decision Time
Specifies the minimum duration of continuous input from the triggered sensor before the PBX recognizes the
input and makes a sensor call.
Default
1024 ms
Value Range
32 ´ n (n=2–255) ms
Maintenance Console Location
3.27 [1-1] Slot—OPB3 Card Property (KX-TDA100/KX-TDA200/KX-TDA600 only)
Programming Manual References
None
Feature Manual References
5.1.9 External Sensor
Document Version 2010-11 PC Programming Manual 211
3.27 [1-1] Slot—OPB3 Card Property (KX-TDA100/KX-TDA200/KX-TDA600 only)
Input Signal Detection Reopening Time
Specifies the length of time after the sensor has been triggered during which any further input from the sensor
will be ignored.
Default
10 s
Value Range
10 ´ n (n=1–255) s
Maintenance Console Location
3.27 [1-1] Slot—OPB3 Card Property (KX-TDA100/KX-TDA200/KX-TDA600 only)
Programming Manual References
None
Feature Manual References
5.1.9 External Sensor
SVM Feature
Specifies whether or not to use the ESVM card as an SVM card. It is possible to use the ESVM card as an
SVM card, MSG card (OGM feature), or both.
Default
Disable
Value Range
Disable, Enable
Maintenance Console Location
3.27 [1-1] Slot—OPB3 Card Property (KX-TDA100/KX-TDA200/KX-TDA600 only)
Programming Manual References
None
Feature Manual References
12.1.2 OGM (Outgoing Message)
16.1.5 SVM (Simplified Voice Message)
MSG Feature
Specifies whether or not to use the ESVM card as a MSG card. It is possible to use the ESVM card as an
SVM card, MSG card (OGM feature), or both.
212 PC Programming Manual Document Version 2010-11
3.27 [1-1] Slot—OPB3 Card Property (KX-TDA100/KX-TDA200/KX-TDA600 only)
Default
Enable
Value Range
Disable, Enable
Maintenance Console Location
3.27 [1-1] Slot—OPB3 Card Property (KX-TDA100/KX-TDA200/KX-TDA600 only)
Programming Manual References
None
Feature Manual References
12.1.2 OGM (Outgoing Message)
16.1.5 SVM (Simplified Voice Message)
Document Version 2010-11 PC Programming Manual 213
3.27 [1-1] Slot—OPB3 Card Property (KX-TDA100/KX-TDA200/KX-TDA600 only)
3.28 [1-1] Slot—OPB3 Card Property—Card
Command (KX-TDA100/KX-TDA200/KX-TDA600
only)
Commands for the service cards installed on the OPB card can be programmed.
INS
Puts the card in service.
Default
Not applicable.
Value Range
Not applicable.
Maintenance Console Location
3.28 [1-1] Slot—OPB3 Card Property—Card Command (KX-TDA100/KX-TDA200/KX-TDA600 only)
Programming Manual References
None
Feature Manual References
None
OUS
Takes the card out of service.
Default
Not applicable.
Value Range
Not applicable.
Maintenance Console Location
3.28 [1-1] Slot—OPB3 Card Property—Card Command (KX-TDA100/KX-TDA200/KX-TDA600 only)
Programming Manual References
None
Feature Manual References
None
214 PC Programming Manual Document Version 2010-11
3.28 [1-1] Slot—OPB3 Card Property—Card Command (KX-TDA100/KX-TDA200/KX-TDA600 only)
Pre-INS
Assigns the card type to a certain sub-slot (Pre-installation).
Default
Not applicable.
Value Range
MSG4: 4-Channel Message Card
DPH4: 4-Port Doorphone Card
ECHO16: 16-Channel Echo Canceller Card (KX-TDA100/KX-TDA200 only)
EIO4: 4-Port External Input/Output Card
ESVM4: 4-Channel Simplified Voice Message Card
Maintenance Console Location
3.28 [1-1] Slot—OPB3 Card Property—Card Command (KX-TDA100/KX-TDA200/KX-TDA600 only)
Installation Manual References
For KX-TDA100/KX-TDA200:
1.3.1 Optional Equipment
For KX-TDA600:
1.3.1 Optional Equipment
Programming Manual References
None
Feature Manual References
None
Delete
Assigns the card type to be deleted from the sub-slot.
Default
Not applicable.
Value Range
Not applicable.
Maintenance Console Location
3.28 [1-1] Slot—OPB3 Card Property—Card Command (KX-TDA100/KX-TDA200/KX-TDA600 only)
Programming Manual References
None
Document Version 2010-11 PC Programming Manual 215
3.28 [1-1] Slot—OPB3 Card Property—Card Command (KX-TDA100/KX-TDA200/KX-TDA600 only)
Feature Manual References
None
216 PC Programming Manual Document Version 2010-11
3.28 [1-1] Slot—OPB3 Card Property—Card Command (KX-TDA100/KX-TDA200/KX-TDA600 only)
3.29 [1-1] Slot—OPB3 Option Card Setup
(KX-TDA100/KX-TDA200/KX-TDA600 only)
Option cards can be installed to and removed from the OPB3 cards installed in the PBX.
Click the right and left arrow buttons (">", "<") to add or remove option cards.
Option Card Type
Selects the type of option card to install to the OPB3 card.
Default
MSG4
Value Range
MSG4: 4-Channel Message Card
DPH4: 4-Port Doorphone Card
ECHO16: 16-Channel Echo Canceller Card (KX-TDA100/KX-TDA200 only)
EIO4: 4-Port External Input/Output Card
ESVM4: 4-Channel Simplified Voice Message Card
Maintenance Console Location
3.29 [1-1] Slot—OPB3 Option Card Setup (KX-TDA100/KX-TDA200/KX-TDA600 only)
Installation Manual References
For KX-TDA100/KX-TDA200:
1.3.1 Optional Equipment
For KX-TDA600:
1.3.1 Optional Equipment
Programming Manual References
3.1 [1-1] Slot
3.27 [1-1] Slot—OPB3 Card Property (KX-TDA100/KX-TDA200/KX-TDA600 only)
Feature Manual References
None
Slot 1–Slot 3
Selects the slot on the OPB3 card to install or remove the option card for.
Default
Slot 1
Value Range
Not applicable.
Document Version 2010-11 PC Programming Manual 217
3.29 [1-1] Slot—OPB3 Option Card Setup (KX-TDA100/KX-TDA200/KX-TDA600 only)
Maintenance Console Location
3.29 [1-1] Slot—OPB3 Option Card Setup (KX-TDA100/KX-TDA200/KX-TDA600 only)
Programming Manual References
3.1 [1-1] Slot
3.27 [1-1] Slot—OPB3 Card Property (KX-TDA100/KX-TDA200/KX-TDA600 only)
Feature Manual References
None
Card Inserted
Displays the type of option card currently installed to each slot of the OPB3 card.
Default
Not stored.
Value Range
MSG4: 4-Channel Message Card
DPH4: 4-Port Doorphone Card
ECHO16: 16-Channel Echo Canceller Card (KX-TDA100/KX-TDA200 only)
EIO4: 4-Port External Input/Output Card
ESVM4: 4-Channel Simplified Voice Message Card
Maintenance Console Location
3.29 [1-1] Slot—OPB3 Option Card Setup (KX-TDA100/KX-TDA200/KX-TDA600 only)
Programming Manual References
3.1 [1-1] Slot
3.27 [1-1] Slot—OPB3 Card Property (KX-TDA100/KX-TDA200/KX-TDA600 only)
Feature Manual References
None
218 PC Programming Manual Document Version 2010-11
3.29 [1-1] Slot—OPB3 Option Card Setup (KX-TDA100/KX-TDA200/KX-TDA600 only)
3.30 [1-1] Slot—Card Property - CTILINK
(KX-TDA100/KX-TDA200/KX-TDA600 only)
The properties of the CTI-LINK card can be specified.
Note that the IP address information must be specified in accordance with the settings of the network that it
will be used on.
IP Address
Specifies the IP address of the PBX.
Default
192.168.0.1
Value Range
1.0.0.0–223.255.255.255
Maintenance Console Location
3.30 [1-1] Slot—Card Property - CTILINK (KX-TDA100/KX-TDA200/KX-TDA600 only)
Programming Manual References
None
Feature Manual References
3.1.22 CTI (Computer Telephony Integration)
Subnet Mask
Specifies the subnet mask of the PBX.
Default
255.255.255.0
Value Range
0–255.0–255.0–255.0–255 (except 0.0.0.0 and 255.255.255.255)
Maintenance Console Location
3.30 [1-1] Slot—Card Property - CTILINK (KX-TDA100/KX-TDA200/KX-TDA600 only)
Programming Manual References
None
Feature Manual References
3.1.22 CTI (Computer Telephony Integration)
Document Version 2010-11 PC Programming Manual 219
3.30 [1-1] Slot—Card Property - CTILINK (KX-TDA100/KX-TDA200/KX-TDA600 only)
Gateway
Specifies the gateway address.
Default
192.168.0.1
Value Range
0.0.0.0–223.255.255.255
Maintenance Console Location
3.30 [1-1] Slot—Card Property - CTILINK (KX-TDA100/KX-TDA200/KX-TDA600 only)
Programming Manual References
None
Feature Manual References
3.1.22 CTI (Computer Telephony Integration)
Maintenance Port Number
Specifies a port number used to operate Maintenance Console via LAN.
Default
35300
Value Range
10000–65535
Maintenance Console Location
3.30 [1-1] Slot—Card Property - CTILINK (KX-TDA100/KX-TDA200/KX-TDA600 only)
Programming Manual References
None
Feature Manual References
3.1.22 CTI (Computer Telephony Integration)
CTI Port Number
Specifies a port number used to operate CTI via LAN.
Default
33333
Value Range
10000–65535
220 PC Programming Manual Document Version 2010-11
3.30 [1-1] Slot—Card Property - CTILINK (KX-TDA100/KX-TDA200/KX-TDA600 only)
Maintenance Console Location
3.30 [1-1] Slot—Card Property - CTILINK (KX-TDA100/KX-TDA200/KX-TDA600 only)
Programming Manual References
4.17 [2-9] System Options
Feature Manual References
3.1.22 CTI (Computer Telephony Integration)
Document Version 2010-11 PC Programming Manual 221
3.30 [1-1] Slot—Card Property - CTILINK (KX-TDA100/KX-TDA200/KX-TDA600 only)
3.31 [1-1] Slot—Card Property - DPH type
(KX-TDA50 only)
The status of the DPH ports can be viewed, and set to INS (in service) or OUS (out of service).
Slot
Indicates the slot position (reference only).
Default
Current slot number
Value Range
Slot number
Maintenance Console Location
3.31 [1-1] Slot—Card Property - DPH type (KX-TDA50 only)
Programming Manual References
None
Feature Manual References
None
Port Number
Indicates the port number (reference only).
Default
Current port number
Value Range
Port number
Maintenance Console Location
3.31 [1-1] Slot—Card Property - DPH type (KX-TDA50 only)
Programming Manual References
None
Feature Manual References
None
222 PC Programming Manual Document Version 2010-11
3.31 [1-1] Slot—Card Property - DPH type (KX-TDA50 only)
Port Status
Indicates the port status (reference only).
This column offers two ways to open the screen to select the port command:
•Click the desired cell in the column.
•Select the desired cell in the column, and then click Command.
Default
Current status
Value Range
INS: The port is in service.
OUS: The port is out of service.
Fault: The port is not communicating with the network.
Maintenance Console Location
3.31 [1-1] Slot—Card Property - DPH type (KX-TDA50 only)
Programming Manual References
3.32 [1-1] Slot—Card Property - DPH type—Connection Command (KX-TDA50 only)
Feature Manual References
None
For Output (EIO)—Device Type
Selects the type of connected output device (for output ports only).
Default
Door Opener
Value Range
Relay, Ringer, Door Opener
Maintenance Console Location
3.31 [1-1] Slot—Card Property - DPH type (KX-TDA50 only)
Programming Manual References
None
Feature Manual References
4.1.10 Door Open
5.1.8 External Relay
Document Version 2010-11 PC Programming Manual 223
3.31 [1-1] Slot—Card Property - DPH type (KX-TDA50 only)
For Sensor (EIO)—Input Signal Decision Time
Specifies the minimum duration of continuous input from the triggered sensor before the PBX recognizes the
input and makes a sensor call.
Default
1024 ms
Value Range
32 ´ n (n=2–255) ms
Maintenance Console Location
3.31 [1-1] Slot—Card Property - DPH type (KX-TDA50 only)
Programming Manual References
None
Feature Manual References
5.1.9 External Sensor
For Sensor (EIO)—Input Signal Detection Reopening Time
Specifies the length of time after the sensor has been triggered during which any further input from the sensor
will be ignored.
Default
10 s
Value Range
10 ´ n (n=1–255) s
Maintenance Console Location
3.31 [1-1] Slot—Card Property - DPH type (KX-TDA50 only)
Programming Manual References
None
Feature Manual References
5.1.9 External Sensor
224 PC Programming Manual Document Version 2010-11
3.31 [1-1] Slot—Card Property - DPH type (KX-TDA50 only)
3.32 [1-1] Slot—Card Property - DPH type—
Connection Command (KX-TDA50 only)
Commands for the DPH ports can be programmed.
INS
Puts the port in service.
Default
Not applicable.
Value Range
Not applicable.
Maintenance Console Location
3.32 [1-1] Slot—Card Property - DPH type—Connection Command (KX-TDA50 only)
Programming Manual References
3.31 [1-1] Slot—Card Property - DPH type (KX-TDA50 only)
Feature Manual References
None
OUS
Takes the port out of service. This enables a temporary non-use of the port, for example, for the purpose of
repair.
Default
Not applicable.
Value Range
Not applicable.
Maintenance Console Location
3.32 [1-1] Slot—Card Property - DPH type—Connection Command (KX-TDA50 only)
Programming Manual References
3.31 [1-1] Slot—Card Property - DPH type (KX-TDA50 only)
Feature Manual References
None
Document Version 2010-11 PC Programming Manual 225
3.32 [1-1] Slot—Card Property - DPH type—Connection Command (KX-TDA50 only)
3.33 [1-1] Slot—Card Property - ESVM Type
(KX-TDA50 only)
The properties of the ESVM card can be specified.
Slot
Indicates the slot position (reference only).
Default
Current slot number
Value Range
Slot number
Maintenance Console Location
3.33 [1-1] Slot—Card Property - ESVM Type (KX-TDA50 only)
Programming Manual References
None
Feature Manual References
None
SVM Feature
Specifies whether or not to use the ESVM card as an SVM card. It is possible to use the ESVM card as an
SVM card, MSG card (OGM feature), or both.
Default
Disable
Value Range
Disable, Enable
Maintenance Console Location
3.33 [1-1] Slot—Card Property - ESVM Type (KX-TDA50 only)
Programming Manual References
None
Feature Manual References
12.1.2 OGM (Outgoing Message)
16.1.5 SVM (Simplified Voice Message)
226 PC Programming Manual Document Version 2010-11
3.33 [1-1] Slot—Card Property - ESVM Type (KX-TDA50 only)
MSG Feature
Specifies whether or not to use the ESVM card as a MSG card. It is possible to use the ESVM card as an
SVM card, MSG card (OGM feature), or both.
Default
Enable
Value Range
Disable, Enable
Maintenance Console Location
3.33 [1-1] Slot—Card Property - ESVM Type (KX-TDA50 only)
Programming Manual References
None
Feature Manual References
12.1.2 OGM (Outgoing Message)
16.1.5 SVM (Simplified Voice Message)
Document Version 2010-11 PC Programming Manual 227
3.33 [1-1] Slot—Card Property - ESVM Type (KX-TDA50 only)
3.34 [1-2] Portable Station
Various portable station (PS) settings can be programmed. A maximum of 28 (with the KX-TDA50), 128 (with
the KX-TDA100/KX-TDA200), 256 (with the KX-TDA600) or 512 (with the KX-TDA600 with EMEC card
installed) PSs can be registered.
Information on 32 PSs is displayed at a time. To display other PSs, click the applicable tab.
PS Registration and De-registration
A PS must be registered to the PBX by programming both the PBX and PS before it can be used. Programming
instructions of the PBX are given below; programming instructions of the PS are found in the Installation
Manual.
It is possible to de-register the PS later.
Registration
Follow the steps below to register the PS.
1. Click Registration.
A dialog box will appear. Non-registered (available) extension numbers are displayed on the left.
2. Highlight numbers and click the right arrow to select them for registration. Click Next.
A screen will appear with information on the current PS extension number and index number for
programming.
3. Click Next.
•If the PS registration is still in progress, the dialog box will show "Waiting for portable station to
register…". Click OK.
•If the registration is successful, the dialog box will show "Registration Succeed".
If there are more PSs to be registered, click Continue to resume or Cancel to terminate the registration.
If not, click Close.
Once a PS is successfully registered, the status of the PS will update to show "Registered".
De-registration
Follow the steps below to de-register the PS.
1. Click De-registration.
A dialog box will appear. Registered extension numbers are displayed on the left.
2. Highlight numbers and click the right arrow to select them for de-registration. Click Next.
A dialog box will appear.
3. Click Confirm.
•If the de-registration is successful, the dialog box will show "De-registration Succeed".
•If the de-registration is unsuccessful, the dialog box will show "De-registration Error". De-registration
will be terminated.
4. Click Close.
If the PS is successfully de-registered, the status of the PS will update to show "None".
Forced De-registration
Follow the steps below to forcibly de-register the PS when normal de-registration has been unsuccessful or
de-registration has been performed only on the PS.
1. Click Forced De-registration.
A dialog box will appear. Registered extension numbers are displayed on the left.
2. Highlight numbers and click the right arrow to select them for forced de-registration. Click Next.
A dialog box will appear.
228 PC Programming Manual Document Version 2010-11
3.34 [1-2] Portable Station
3. Click OK.
A dialog box will appear.
4. Click Confirm.
If the de-registration is successful, the dialog box will show "Forced De-registration Succeed".
5. Click Close.
Once the PS is successfully de-registered, the status of the PS will update to show "None".
Personal Identification Number
Specifies the Personal Identification Number (PIN) of the PBX, used to avoid registering a PS to the wrong
PBX.
Note that the same PIN should be entered at the PS, before the PS is registered to the PBX.
Default
1234
Value Range
4 digits (consisting of 0–9)
Maintenance Console Location
3.34 [1-2] Portable Station
Programming Manual References
None
Feature Manual References
13.1.24 PS (Portable Station)
Index
Indicates the PS number (reference only).
Default
Not applicable.
Value Range
For KX-TDA50:
1–28
For KX-TDA100/KX-TDA200:
1–128
For KX-TDA600:
1–512
Maintenance Console Location
3.34 [1-2] Portable Station
Document Version 2010-11 PC Programming Manual 229
3.34 [1-2] Portable Station
Programming Manual References
None
Feature Manual References
13.1.24 PS (Portable Station)
Extension No.
Specifies the extension number of the PS.
In Wireless XDP Parallel Mode, the PS can be used as a sub telephone with a wired main telephone (PT/SLT),
and two of them will share one extension number of the main telephone. However, note that the PS extension
number specified here will not be altered by the extension number of the main telephone even if the PS is in
Wireless XDP Parallel Mode.
Default
Not stored.
Value Range
Max. 4 digits (consisting of 0–9)
Maintenance Console Location
3.34 [1-2] Portable Station
Programming Manual References
None
Feature Manual References
13.1.24 PS (Portable Station)
20.1.4 Wireless XDP Parallel Mode
Extension Name
Specifies the name of the PS.
Default
Not stored.
Value Range
Max. 20 characters
Maintenance Console Location
3.34 [1-2] Portable Station
Programming Manual References
6.10 [4-2-1] Portable Station—Extension Settings—Main— Extension Name
230 PC Programming Manual Document Version 2010-11
3.34 [1-2] Portable Station
Feature Manual References
13.1.24 PS (Portable Station)
Status
Indicates whether a certain PS is registered (reference only).
Default
None
Value Range
None, Registered
Maintenance Console Location
3.34 [1-2] Portable Station
Programming Manual References
None
Feature Manual References
13.1.24 PS (Portable Station)
Document Version 2010-11 PC Programming Manual 231
3.34 [1-2] Portable Station
3.35 [1-3] Option
System options can be programmed.
It is possible to clear the master CS information (Master CS Port and Radio System ID) by following the
procedure below in batch mode:
1. Click Clear Master CS.
2. Click Yes. To abort the procedure, click No.
If the system data is downloaded to the PBX after the master CS information has been cleared, it is necessary
to register all PSs again in the interactive mode. Master CS information will be assigned automatically when
a CS is connected to the PBX. Without the Radio System ID, PSs cannot be registered.
System Wireless—System ID
Indicates the radio system ID used to register a PS (reference only).
Default
Not stored.
Value Range
Not applicable.
Maintenance Console Location
3.35 [1-3] Option
Programming Manual References
None
Feature Manual References
None
System Wireless—CO Status Display in Standby (KX-WT125/126 only) (Need
System Restart) (KX-TDA50 only)
Enables the display of a KX-WT125/KX-WT126 PS to be updated when the status of a CO line changes, even
when the PS is idle.
Default
Enable
Value Range
Enable, Disable
Maintenance Console Location
3.35 [1-3] Option
Programming Manual References
6.17 [4-2-6] Portable Station—Single CO Appearance (KX-TDA50 only)
232 PC Programming Manual Document Version 2010-11
3.35 [1-3] Option
Feature Manual References
13.1.25 PS—CO Status Display (KX-WT125/KX-WT126 only) (KX-TDA50 only)
New Card Installation—Card Status for any Card
Selects the initial status of cards after installation.
Default
In Service
Value Range
In Service, Out of Service
Maintenance Console Location
3.35 [1-3] Option
Programming Manual References
None
Feature Manual References
None
New Card Installation—Automatic Extension Number Set for Extension Card
Selects whether extension numbers are assigned to extension ports automatically or manually.
Default
Enable
Value Range
Disable, Enable
Maintenance Console Location
3.35 [1-3] Option
Programming Manual References
None
Feature Manual References
None
Document Version 2010-11 PC Programming Manual 233
3.35 [1-3] Option
New Card Installation—ISDN Standard Mode for PRI23 Card (KX-TDA100/
KX-TDA200/KX-TDA600 only)
Specifies whether a PRI23 card is automatically set to ISDN Standard mode or T1-LCOT mode when it is
installed for the first time.
Default
ISDN Standard mode
Value Range
ISDN Standard mode: The CCBS, CF, CT, and Centralized VM features are supported. DIL and DID call
distribution are available for the D channel.
T1-LCOT mode: DIL and DID call distribution are available for all 23B channels. The CCBS, CF, CT, and
Centralized VM features are not available in this mode.
Maintenance Console Location
3.35 [1-3] Option
Programming Manual References
None
Feature Manual References
13.1.14 Private Network Features—Centralized Voice Mail
4.1.6 DIL (Direct In Line)
4.1.5 DID (Direct Inward Dialing)
13.1.20 Private Network Features—QSIG—CF (Call Forwarding)
13.1.22 Private Network Features—QSIG—CT (Call Transfer)
13.1.19 Private Network Features—QSIG—CCBS (Completion of Calls to Busy Subscriber)
234 PC Programming Manual Document Version 2010-11
3.35 [1-3] Option
3.36 [1-4] Clock Priority (KX-TDA100/KX-TDA200/
KX-TDA600)
Slot Number (KX-TDA100/KX-TDA200), Shelf-Slot Number (KX-TDA600)
Selects and prioritizes slot numbers for the PRI and T1 cards that are used to forward a clock pulse from an
external source to the PBX.
Obtain the master clock time from the outside line that the telephone company provides.
To change Clock Priority, follow the steps below:
1. Assign a Clock Priority to each PRI and/or T1 card.
2. Set the status of the present clock source card to "OUS", then "INS".
Note
If multiple PBXs are used to establish a private network (TIE line service, QSIG network, etc.) without being
connected through the telephone company, assign only one PBX as the clock source on the network. That
PBX should have a card connected to a telephone company line selected as its clock source. All other
PBXs should have cards connected to the network selected as the clock source. This enables all PBXs on
the network to synchronize their timing.
Default
None
Value Range
None, PRI23, T1
Maintenance Console Location
3.36 [1-4] Clock Priority (KX-TDA100/KX-TDA200/KX-TDA600)
Programming Manual References
Section 11 [9] Private Network
Feature Manual References
None
Document Version 2010-11 PC Programming Manual 235
3.36 [1-4] Clock Priority (KX-TDA100/KX-TDA200/KX-TDA600)
236 PC Programming Manual Document Version 2010-11
3.36 [1-4] Clock Priority (KX-TDA100/KX-TDA200/KX-TDA600)
Section 4
[2] System
Document Version 2010-11 PC Programming Manual 237
4.1 [2-1] Date & Time/Daylight Saving
The date and time of the PBX, and Summer time (daylight saving time) can be programmed. Summer time
sets the clock one hour forward at 2:00 AM on the start date, and one hour back at 2:00 AM on the end date.
The start and end dates of a maximum of 20 different summer times can be programmed.
To set the system date and time of the PBX, click 4.2 [2-1] Date & Time/Daylight Saving—Date & Time
Setting.
Setting
Enables Summer time.
Default
Enable
Value Range
Disable, Enable
Maintenance Console Location
4.1 [2-1] Date & Time/Daylight Saving
Programming Manual References
None
Feature Manual References
1.1.7 Automatic Time Adjustment
Start Date—Year, Month, Day
Specifies the start date of daylight savings time.
Default
For KX-TDA50:
Year: 2010 (For Daylight Saving Time number 1. The year advances by one for the subsequent Daylight Saving
Times.)
Month: 3
Day: Day of the second Sunday of the month
For KX-TDA100/KX-TDA200:
Year: 2008 (For Daylight Saving Time number 1. The year advances by one for the subsequent Daylight Saving
Times.)
Month: 3
Day: Day of the second Sunday of the month
For KX-TDA600:
Year: 2007 (For Daylight Saving Time number 1. The year advances by one for the subsequent Daylight Saving
Times.)
Month: 3
Day: Day of the second Sunday of the month
238 PC Programming Manual Document Version 2010-11
4.1 [2-1] Date & Time/Daylight Saving
Value Range
Year: 2000–2099
Month: 1–12
Day: 1–31
Maintenance Console Location
4.1 [2-1] Date & Time/Daylight Saving
Programming Manual References
None
Feature Manual References
1.1.7 Automatic Time Adjustment
End Date—Year, Month, Day
Specifies the end date of daylight savings time.
Default
For KX-TDA50:
Year: 2010 (For Daylight Saving Time number 1. The year advances by one for the subsequent Daylight Saving
Times.)
Month: 11
Day: Day of the first Sunday of the month
For KX-TDA100/KX-TDA200:
Year: 2008 (For Daylight Saving Time number 1. The year advances by one for the subsequent Daylight Saving
Times.)
Month: 11
Day: Day of the first Sunday of the month
For KX-TDA600:
Year: 2007 (For Daylight Saving Time number 1. The year advances by one for the subsequent Daylight Saving
Times.)
Month: 11
Day: Day of the first Sunday of the month
Value Range
Year: 2000–2099
Month: 1–12
Day: 1–31
Maintenance Console Location
4.1 [2-1] Date & Time/Daylight Saving
Programming Manual References
None
Document Version 2010-11 PC Programming Manual 239
4.1 [2-1] Date & Time/Daylight Saving
Feature Manual References
1.1.7 Automatic Time Adjustment
240 PC Programming Manual Document Version 2010-11
4.1 [2-1] Date & Time/Daylight Saving
4.2 [2-1] Date & Time/Daylight Saving—Date & Time
Setting
The date and time of the PBX can be programmed. The date and time will be shown on the display of extensions
(e.g., PT, PS).
Date & Time
Indicates the current date and time. Values can be entered by clicking the parameter you want to change and
typing the new value, or by clicking the up/down arrows beside the date and time.
Default
Current date and time
Value Range
Year: 2000–2099
Month: 01–12
Day: 01–31
Hour: 00–23
Minute: 00–59
Second: 00–59
Maintenance Console Location
4.2 [2-1] Date & Time/Daylight Saving—Date & Time Setting
Programming Manual References
4.1 [2-1] Date & Time/Daylight Saving
Feature Manual References
None
Document Version 2010-11 PC Programming Manual 241
4.2 [2-1] Date & Time/Daylight Saving—Date & Time Setting
4.3 [2-2] Operator & BGM
Settings related to the PBX operator and audio sources can be specified.
PBX Operator—Day, Lunch, Break, Night
Specifies the extension number or floating extension number of incoming call distribution group to be
designated as the PBX operator in each time mode (day/lunch/break/night). To select an extension number,
click Destination Setting (see 2.1.6 Extension Number Setting).
Default
For KX-TDA50/KX-TDA100/KX-TDA200:
101
For KX-TDA600:
1001
Value Range
Max. 5 digits (consisting of 0–9)
Maintenance Console Location
4.3 [2-2] Operator & BGM
Programming Manual References
4.5 [2-4] Week Table
4.8 [2-6-1] Numbering Plan—Main
5.12 [3-5-1] Incoming Call Distribution Group—Group Settings
Feature Manual References
12.1.5 Operator Features
BGM and Music on Hold—Music Source of BGM2 (KX-TDA100/KX-TDA200/
KX-TDA600 only)
Selects the audio source of BGM2.
Default
Internal BGM 1
Value Range
External BGM Port 2, Internal BGM 1, Internal BGM 2
Maintenance Console Location
4.3 [2-2] Operator & BGM
Programming Manual References
None
242 PC Programming Manual Document Version 2010-11
4.3 [2-2] Operator & BGM
Feature Manual References
11.1.4 Music on Hold
2.1.1 BGM (Background Music)
BGM and Music on Hold—Music Source of BGM (KX-TDA50 only)
Selects the audio source of BGM.
Default
Internal BGM 1
Value Range
External BGM, Internal BGM 1, Internal BGM 2
Maintenance Console Location
4.3 [2-2] Operator & BGM
Programming Manual References
None
Feature Manual References
11.1.4 Music on Hold
2.1.1 BGM (Background Music)
BGM and Music on Hold—Music on Hold
Selects the audio source for Music on Hold.
Default
For KX-TDA50:
BGM
For KX-TDA100/KX-TDA200/KX-TDA600:
BGM 2 (Internal 1/2 or External 2)
Value Range
For KX-TDA50:
Tone, BGM
For KX-TDA100/KX-TDA200/KX-TDA600:
Tone, BGM 1 (External BGM Port 1), BGM 2 (Internal 1/2 or External 2)
Maintenance Console Location
4.3 [2-2] Operator & BGM
Programming Manual References
None
Document Version 2010-11 PC Programming Manual 243
4.3 [2-2] Operator & BGM
Feature Manual References
11.1.4 Music on Hold
BGM and Music on Hold—Sound on Transfer
Selects the audio source for Music for Transfer (either the same music source chosen for the Music on Hold,
or ringback tone).
Default
Same as Music on Hold
Value Range
Same as Music on Hold, Ringback Tone
Maintenance Console Location
4.3 [2-2] Operator & BGM
Programming Manual References
None
Feature Manual References
3.1.8 Call Transfer
244 PC Programming Manual Document Version 2010-11
4.3 [2-2] Operator & BGM
4.4 [2-3] Timers & Counters
Various system timers and counters can be programmed.
Dial / IRNA / Recall / Tone
Automatic Redial—Repeat Counter (KX-TDA100/KX-TDA200/KX-TDA600 only)
Specifies the number of times Automatic Redial is attempted before being canceled.
Default
0
Value Range
0–15
Maintenance Console Location
4.4 [2-3] Timers & Counters
Programming Manual References
None
Feature Manual References
15.1.1 Redial, Last Number
Automatic Redial—Redial Call Ring Duration (KX-TDA100/KX-TDA200/
KX-TDA600 only)
Specifies the length of time that the PBX waits for the called party to answer an Automatic Redial attempt. This
is the length of time that the called party’s extension will ring for each attempt.
Default
30 s
Value Range
10 ´ n (n=1–30) s
Maintenance Console Location
4.4 [2-3] Timers & Counters
Programming Manual References
None
Feature Manual References
15.1.1 Redial, Last Number
Document Version 2010-11 PC Programming Manual 245
4.4 [2-3] Timers & Counters
Automatic Redial—Analog CO Mute / Busy Detection Timer (KX-TDA100/
KX-TDA200/KX-TDA600 only)
Specifies the length of time before the PBX stops muting the caller’s voice and cancels busy tone detection
when Automatic Redial to analog CO line is performed.
Default
8 s
Value Range
0–15 s
Maintenance Console Location
4.4 [2-3] Timers & Counters
Programming Manual References
None
Feature Manual References
15.1.1 Redial, Last Number
Dial—Hot Line (Pickup Dial) Start
Specifies the length of time between going off-hook and the start of automatic dialing when the Hot Line feature
is set.
Default
1 s
Value Range
0–15 s
Maintenance Console Location
4.4 [2-3] Timers & Counters
Programming Manual References
None
Feature Manual References
8.1.6 Hot Line
Dial—Extension First Digit
Specifies the length of time after going off-hook within which the first digit of a feature number or destination
must be dialed before a reorder tone is heard.
246 PC Programming Manual Document Version 2010-11
4.4 [2-3] Timers & Counters
Default
For KX-TDA50:
250 s
For KX-TDA100/KX-TDA200/KX-TDA600:
10 s
Value Range
For KX-TDA50:
1–250 s
For KX-TDA100/KX-TDA200/KX-TDA600:
1–15 s
Maintenance Console Location
4.4 [2-3] Timers & Counters
Programming Manual References
None
Feature Manual References
1.1.5 Automatic Extension Release
Dial—Extension Inter-digit
Specifies the length of time within which subsequent digits must be dialed before the PBX sends a reorder
tone.
Default
10 s
Value Range
1–15 s
Maintenance Console Location
4.4 [2-3] Timers & Counters
Programming Manual References
None
Feature Manual References
1.1.5 Automatic Extension Release
Document Version 2010-11 PC Programming Manual 247
4.4 [2-3] Timers & Counters
Dial—Analog CO First Digit
Specifies the length of time within which the first digit of a telephone number must be sent to an analog CO
line. If no digit is sent before this time expires, the PBX recognizes end of dialing and stops muting the
caller’s voice over the analog CO line.
Default
10 s
Value Range
1–15 s
Maintenance Console Location
4.4 [2-3] Timers & Counters
Programming Manual References
None
Feature Manual References
None
Dial—Analog CO Inter-digit
Specifies the length of time within which subsequent digits of a telephone number must be sent to an analog
CO line. If no digit is sent before this time expires, the PBX recognizes end of dialing and stops muting the
caller’s voice over the analog CO line.
Default
5 s
Value Range
1–15 s
Maintenance Console Location
4.4 [2-3] Timers & Counters
Programming Manual References
None
Feature Manual References
None
Dial—Analog CO Call Duration Start
Specifies the length of time between the end of dialing and the start of the SMDR timer for outgoing analog
CO line calls.
248 PC Programming Manual Document Version 2010-11
4.4 [2-3] Timers & Counters
Default
0 s
Value Range
0–60 s
Maintenance Console Location
4.4 [2-3] Timers & Counters
Programming Manual References
None
Feature Manual References
16.1.1 SMDR (Station Message Detail Recording)
Intercept Routing No Answer (IRNA)—Day, Lunch, Break, Night
Specifies the length of time until an unanswered call is redirected to the intercept routing destination in each
time mode.
Note that this setting is only valid for extensions whose Intercept No Answer Time—Day, Lunch, Break,
Night is set to "0".
Default
40 s
Value Range
1–240 s
Maintenance Console Location
4.4 [2-3] Timers & Counters
Programming Manual References
6.1 [4-1-1] Wired Extension—Extension Settings—Intercept No Answer Time— Intercept No Answer Time
—Day, Lunch, Break, Night
Feature Manual References
9.1.11 Intercept Routing
Recall—Hold Recall
Specifies the length of time until the holding extension receives a Hold Recall ring or alarm tone when a held
call remains unretrieved.
Default
60 s
Document Version 2010-11 PC Programming Manual 249
4.4 [2-3] Timers & Counters
Value Range
0 (disable the Hold Recall)–240 s
Maintenance Console Location
4.4 [2-3] Timers & Counters
Programming Manual References
None
Feature Manual References
3.1.2 Call Hold
Recall—Transfer Recall
Specifies the length of time that a transferred call waits to be answered, before being redirected to the Transfer
Recall destination assigned to the original transferring extension.
Default
60 s
Value Range
1–240 s
Maintenance Console Location
4.4 [2-3] Timers & Counters
Programming Manual References
6.1 [4-1-1] Wired Extension—Extension Settings
6.10 [4-2-1] Portable Station—Extension Settings
Feature Manual References
3.1.8 Call Transfer
Recall—Call Park Recall
Specifies the length of time that a parked call waits to be retrieved, before the Transfer Recall destination
assigned to the extension that parked the call hears a Call Park Recall ring.
Default
60 s
Value Range
1–240 s
250 PC Programming Manual Document Version 2010-11
4.4 [2-3] Timers & Counters
Maintenance Console Location
4.4 [2-3] Timers & Counters
Programming Manual References
6.1 [4-1-1] Wired Extension—Extension Settings
6.10 [4-2-1] Portable Station—Extension Settings
Feature Manual References
3.1.5 Call Park
Recall—Disconnect after Recall
Specifies the length of time after an extension with a CO line call on hold receives a Hold Recall tone that the
held call is disconnected.
Default
30 min
Value Range
1–30 min
Maintenance Console Location
4.4 [2-3] Timers & Counters
Programming Manual References
None
Feature Manual References
3.1.2 Call Hold
Tone Length—Busy Tone / DND Tone
Specifies the length of time that a busy/DND tone is heard when a call is made to an extension in busy status
or DND mode. A reorder tone will be sent when this timer expires. (For a call through DISA, the call will be
disconnected when this timer expires.)
Default
10 s
Value Range
0 (continuous)–15 s
Maintenance Console Location
4.4 [2-3] Timers & Counters
Document Version 2010-11 PC Programming Manual 251
4.4 [2-3] Timers & Counters
Programming Manual References
None
Feature Manual References
4.1.9 DND (Do Not Disturb)
Tone Length—Reorder Tone for PT Handset
Specifies the length of time that a reorder tone is heard when using a PT handset. The PT will return to idle
status when this timer expires.
Default
10 s
Value Range
1–15 s
Maintenance Console Location
4.4 [2-3] Timers & Counters
Programming Manual References
None
Feature Manual References
1.1.5 Automatic Extension Release
Tone Length—Reorder Tone for PT Hands-free
Specifies the length of time that a reorder tone is heard from the built-in speaker of a PT in hands-free mode.
The PT will return to idle status when this timer expires. This setting is applied to PSs as well as PTs.
Default
3 s
Value Range
1–15 s
Maintenance Console Location
4.4 [2-3] Timers & Counters
Programming Manual References
None
Feature Manual References
1.1.5 Automatic Extension Release
252 PC Programming Manual Document Version 2010-11
4.4 [2-3] Timers & Counters
8.1.2 Hands-free Operation
DISA / Door / Reminder / U. Conf
DISA—Delayed Answer Timer
Specifies the length of time that the caller hears a ringback tone before hearing an OGM.
Default
5 s
Value Range
0–30 s
Maintenance Console Location
4.4 [2-3] Timers & Counters
Programming Manual References
7.4 [5-3-2] Voice Message—DISA Message
Feature Manual References
4.1.7 DISA (Direct Inward System Access)
DISA—Mute & OGM Start Timer after answering
Specifies the length of time until the caller hears an OGM after reaching the DISA line.
Default
1.8 s
Value Range
0.0–12.0 s
Maintenance Console Location
4.4 [2-3] Timers & Counters
Programming Manual References
7.4 [5-3-2] Voice Message—DISA Message
Feature Manual References
4.1.7 DISA (Direct Inward System Access)
DISA—No Dial Intercept Timer
Specifies the length of time after the OGM finishes playing in which the caller must begin dialing before the
call is redirected to the operator.
Document Version 2010-11 PC Programming Manual 253
4.4 [2-3] Timers & Counters
Default
10 s
Value Range
0–120 s
Maintenance Console Location
4.4 [2-3] Timers & Counters
Programming Manual References
4.3 [2-2] Operator & BGM
7.4 [5-3-2] Voice Message—DISA Message
8.6 [6-6] Tenant— Operator (Extension Number)
Feature Manual References
4.1.7 DISA (Direct Inward System Access)
DISA—2nd Dial Timer for AA
Specifies the length of time in which the caller must dial the second digit before the DISA AA Service activates.
Default
2 s
Value Range
0–5 s
Maintenance Console Location
4.4 [2-3] Timers & Counters
Programming Manual References
7.4 [5-3-2] Voice Message—DISA Message
Feature Manual References
4.1.7 DISA (Direct Inward System Access)
DISA—Intercept Timer—Day, Lunch, Break, Night
Specifies the length of time until an unanswered DISA call is intercepted and redirected to the intercept routing
destination after the original destination receives the call in each time mode.
Default
40 s
Value Range
0–60 s
254 PC Programming Manual Document Version 2010-11
4.4 [2-3] Timers & Counters
Maintenance Console Location
4.4 [2-3] Timers & Counters
Programming Manual References
6.1 [4-1-1] Wired Extension—Extension Settings—Intercept Destination— Intercept Destination—When
called party does not answer—Day, Lunch, Break, Night
6.10 [4-2-1] Portable Station—Extension Settings—Intercept Destination— Intercept Destination—When
called party does not answer—Day, Lunch, Break, Night
7.4 [5-3-2] Voice Message—DISA Message
Feature Manual References
9.1.11 Intercept Routing
4.1.7 DISA (Direct Inward System Access)
DISA—Disconnect Timer after Intercept
Specifies the length of time that an intercepted DISA call rings at the intercept routing destination before being
disconnected.
Default
60 s
Value Range
0–60 s
Maintenance Console Location
4.4 [2-3] Timers & Counters
Programming Manual References
7.4 [5-3-2] Voice Message—DISA Message
Feature Manual References
4.1.7 DISA (Direct Inward System Access)
DISA—CO-to-CO Call Prolong Counter
Specifies the number of times that the caller can prolong a CO-to-CO line call on a DISA line. (Selecting "0"
enables the caller to prolong the CO-to-CO line call without restriction.)
Default
10
Value Range
0–15
Document Version 2010-11 PC Programming Manual 255
4.4 [2-3] Timers & Counters
Maintenance Console Location
4.4 [2-3] Timers & Counters
Programming Manual References
7.4 [5-3-2] Voice Message—DISA Message
Feature Manual References
4.1.7 DISA (Direct Inward System Access)
DISA—CO-to-CO Call Prolong Time
Specifies the length of time that a CO-to-CO line call on a DISA line is prolonged each time that the caller
prolongs the call. (Selecting "0" prevents the caller from prolonging the CO-to-CO line call.)
Default
3 min
Value Range
0–7 min
Maintenance Console Location
4.4 [2-3] Timers & Counters
Programming Manual References
7.4 [5-3-2] Voice Message—DISA Message
Feature Manual References
4.1.7 DISA (Direct Inward System Access)
DISA—Progress Tone Continuation Time before Recording Message
Specifies the length of time that a progress tone is sent to the manager extension before recording an OGM.
Default
5 s
Value Range
0–7 s
Maintenance Console Location
4.4 [2-3] Timers & Counters
Programming Manual References
7.4 [5-3-2] Voice Message—DISA Message
256 PC Programming Manual Document Version 2010-11
4.4 [2-3] Timers & Counters
Feature Manual References
12.1.2 OGM (Outgoing Message)
DISA—Reorder Tone Duration
Specifies the length of time that a reorder tone is sent to the caller before the call is disconnected.
Default
10 s
Value Range
1–15 s
Maintenance Console Location
4.4 [2-3] Timers & Counters
Programming Manual References
7.4 [5-3-2] Voice Message—DISA Message
Feature Manual References
4.1.7 DISA (Direct Inward System Access)
Doorphone—Call Ring Duration
Specifies the length of time that a call from a doorphone rings until the call is canceled when there is no answer.
Default
30 s
Value Range
10 ´ n (n=1–15) s
Maintenance Console Location
4.4 [2-3] Timers & Counters
Programming Manual References
7.1 [5-1] Doorphone
Feature Manual References
4.1.11 Doorphone Call
Doorphone—Call Duration
Specifies the length of time until an answered doorphone call is disconnected.
Document Version 2010-11 PC Programming Manual 257
4.4 [2-3] Timers & Counters
Default
60 s
Value Range
10 ´ n (n=0–30) s
Maintenance Console Location
4.4 [2-3] Timers & Counters
Programming Manual References
7.1 [5-1] Doorphone
Feature Manual References
4.1.11 Doorphone Call
Doorphone—Open Duration
Specifies the length of time that a door stays unlocked after being opened from an extension.
Default
5 s
Value Range
2–7 s
Maintenance Console Location
4.4 [2-3] Timers & Counters
Programming Manual References
7.1 [5-1] Doorphone
Feature Manual References
4.1.10 Door Open
Timed Reminder—Repeat Counter
Specifies the number of times that an alarm is repeated.
Default
3
Value Range
1–15
258 PC Programming Manual Document Version 2010-11
4.4 [2-3] Timers & Counters
Maintenance Console Location
4.4 [2-3] Timers & Counters
Programming Manual References
None
Feature Manual References
17.1.4 Timed Reminder
Timed Reminder—Interval Time
Specifies the length of time between the repeated alarms.
Default
30 s
Value Range
10 ´ n (n=1–120) s
Maintenance Console Location
4.4 [2-3] Timers & Counters
Programming Manual References
None
Feature Manual References
17.1.4 Timed Reminder
Timed Reminder—Alarm Ringing Duration
Specifies the length of time that an alarm rings.
Default
30 s
Value Range
10 ´ n (n=1–30) s
Maintenance Console Location
4.4 [2-3] Timers & Counters
Programming Manual References
None
Document Version 2010-11 PC Programming Manual 259
4.4 [2-3] Timers & Counters
Feature Manual References
17.1.4 Timed Reminder
Unattended Conference—Recall Start Timer
Specifies the length of time until the conference originator receives an Unattended Conference Recall tone.
Default
10 min
Value Range
0–60 min
Maintenance Console Location
4.4 [2-3] Timers & Counters
Programming Manual References
None
Feature Manual References
3.1.16 Conference
Unattended Conference—Warning Tone Start Timer
Specifies the length of time until the parties involved in an Unattended Conference receive a warning tone after
the conference originator receives the Unattended Conference Recall tone but does not return to the
conference.
Default
30 s
Value Range
0–240 s
Maintenance Console Location
4.4 [2-3] Timers & Counters
Programming Manual References
None
Feature Manual References
3.1.16 Conference
260 PC Programming Manual Document Version 2010-11
4.4 [2-3] Timers & Counters
Unattended Conference—Disconnect Timer
Specifies the length of time until an Unattended Conference is disconnected after the parties involved in the
conference receive a warning tone but the conference originator does not return to the conference.
Default
15 s
Value Range
0–240 s
Maintenance Console Location
4.4 [2-3] Timers & Counters
Programming Manual References
None
Feature Manual References
3.1.16 Conference
Miscellaneous
Caller ID—Waiting to receive
Specifies the length of time that the PBX waits to receive Caller ID from an analog CO line. If the Caller ID is
received through an analog CO line card on which no Caller ID card is mounted or through a port to which
Caller ID Detection is disabled, this timer is not applicable.
Default
5 s
Value Range
0–15 s
Maintenance Console Location
4.4 [2-3] Timers & Counters
Programming Manual References
8.1 [6-1] System Speed Dial
5.3 [3-1-3] Caller ID Modification
Feature Manual References
3.1.1 Caller ID
Document Version 2010-11 PC Programming Manual 261
4.4 [2-3] Timers & Counters
Caller ID—Visual Caller ID Display
Specifies the length of time that a Caller ID number, with the Call Waiting tone offered by an analog line from
the telephone company, is shown on the display. The Caller ID number flashes on the display for five seconds,
followed by a 10-second pause, then flashes again for five seconds.
Default
30 s
Value Range
0–250 s
Maintenance Console Location
4.4 [2-3] Timers & Counters
Programming Manual References
None
Feature Manual References
3.1.1 Caller ID
3.1.9 CALL WAITING FEATURES
3.1.10 Call Waiting Tone
Extension PIN—Lock Counter
Specifies the number of successive incorrect PIN entries allowed before the extension PIN is locked. A locked
extension PIN can not be used until reset from the extension assigned as manager. (Specifying "None" disables
this counter.)
Default
None
Value Range
None, 1–15
Maintenance Console Location
4.4 [2-3] Timers & Counters
Programming Manual References
None
Feature Manual References
20.1.1 Walking COS
19.1.1 Verification Code Entry
5.1.6 Extension PIN (Personal Identification Number)
262 PC Programming Manual Document Version 2010-11
4.4 [2-3] Timers & Counters
External Sensor—Ring Duration
Specifies the length of time that the PBX waits for the called party to answer before canceling a sensor call.
Default
30 s
Value Range
10 ´ n (n=1–15) s
Maintenance Console Location
4.4 [2-3] Timers & Counters
Programming Manual References
None
Feature Manual References
5.1.9 External Sensor
Incoming Call Inter-digit Timer—DID
Specifies the length of time between digits when receiving a DID number from a public network. The call will
be redirected to a PBX operator when this timer expires.
Default
10 s
Value Range
0–30 s
Maintenance Console Location
4.4 [2-3] Timers & Counters
Programming Manual References
12.3 [10-3] DID Table
Feature Manual References
4.1.5 DID (Direct Inward Dialing)
Incoming Call Inter-digit Timer—TIE
Specifies the length of time between digits when receiving a dialed number from a TIE line. The call will be
redirected to a PBX operator when this timer expires.
Default
10 s
Document Version 2010-11 PC Programming Manual 263
4.4 [2-3] Timers & Counters
Value Range
3–30 s
Maintenance Console Location
4.4 [2-3] Timers & Counters
Programming Manual References
11.1 [9-1] TIE Table
Feature Manual References
13.1.13 PRIVATE NETWORK FEATURES
PT Display—PT Last Display Duration in Idle Mode
Specifies the length of time that the current information remains on the display after the extension returns to
idle status.
Default
5 s
Value Range
1–15 s
Maintenance Console Location
4.4 [2-3] Timers & Counters
Programming Manual References
None
Feature Manual References
None
Voice Mail (Caller from VM to CO)—On-hook Wait Time
Specifies the length of time from when the VPS seizes a CO line (for example, to transfer a call) until the VPS
goes on hook. If the time specified here is too short, the VPS will be unable to dial the number and make a
connection.
Default
10 s
Value Range
1–30 s
264 PC Programming Manual Document Version 2010-11
4.4 [2-3] Timers & Counters
Maintenance Console Location
4.4 [2-3] Timers & Counters
Programming Manual References
None
Feature Manual References
19.1.3 Voice Mail (VM) Group
During Conversation—DTMF Signal Length
Specifies the length of time that a DTMF signal is sent when a number is dialed from a PT or PS during a
conversation.
Default
160 ms
Value Range
80 ms, 160 ms, 240 ms, 320 ms
Maintenance Console Location
4.4 [2-3] Timers & Counters
Programming Manual References
None
Feature Manual References
None
During Conversation—DTMF Inter-digit Pause
Specifies the length of time between DTMF signals when numbers are dialed in succession from a PT or PS
during a conversation.
Default
112 ms
Value Range
64 + 16 ´ n (n=0–15) ms
Maintenance Console Location
4.4 [2-3] Timers & Counters
Programming Manual References
None
Document Version 2010-11 PC Programming Manual 265
4.4 [2-3] Timers & Counters
Feature Manual References
None
During Conversation—Pause Signal Time
Specifies the length of the pause inserted when the PAUSE button is pressed during a conversation.
Default
1.5 s
Value Range
1.5 s, 2.5 s, 3.5 s, 4.5 s
Maintenance Console Location
4.4 [2-3] Timers & Counters
Programming Manual References
None
Feature Manual References
13.1.4 Pause Insertion
System Wireless—PS Out of Range Timer
When the destination of an incoming call is a PS, specifies the length of time the PBX searches for the PS
before setting its status to Out of Range.
If "0" is assigned, the timer is controlled by the cell station.
Default
0 s
Value Range
0 s, 4 s, 8 s
Maintenance Console Location
4.4 [2-3] Timers & Counters
Programming Manual References
4.17 [2-9] System Options— System Wireless—Out of Range Registration
Feature Manual References
13.1.17 Private Network Features—PS Roaming by Network ICD Group
266 PC Programming Manual Document Version 2010-11
4.4 [2-3] Timers & Counters
SVM—Recording Time
Specifies the maximum length of a message recorded by the SVM feature.
Default
120 s
Value Range
1–600 s
Maintenance Console Location
4.4 [2-3] Timers & Counters
Programming Manual References
6.9 [4-1-7] Wired Extension—Simplified Voice Message
6.16 [4-2-5] Portable Station—Simplified Voice Message
Feature Manual References
16.1.5 SVM (Simplified Voice Message)
SVM—Dial Tone Continuous Time
Specifies the length of time that dial tone 3 is heard after all messages stored by the SVM feature for an
extension are finished playing.
Default
5 s
Value Range
1–60 s
Maintenance Console Location
4.4 [2-3] Timers & Counters
Programming Manual References
6.9 [4-1-7] Wired Extension—Simplified Voice Message
6.16 [4-2-5] Portable Station—Simplified Voice Message
Feature Manual References
16.1.5 SVM (Simplified Voice Message)
Conference Group Call—Ring Duration (KX-TDA50 only)
Specifies the length of time that a conference group call will ring. The conference group call will be established
with members who answer within this time. If no members answer the call before this timer expires, the call is
canceled.
Document Version 2010-11 PC Programming Manual 267
4.4 [2-3] Timers & Counters
Default
60 s
Value Range
0–120 s
Maintenance Console Location
4.4 [2-3] Timers & Counters
Programming Manual References
4.8 [2-6-1] Numbering Plan—Main—Features— Conference Group Call Operation (KX-TDA50 only)
4.11 [2-7-1] Class of Service—COS Settings—Miscellaneous (KX-TDA50 only)—Conference Group Call
Operation
5.26 [3-10] Conference Group (KX-TDA50 only)
Feature Manual References
3.1.17 Conference Group Call (KX-TDA50 only)
268 PC Programming Manual Document Version 2010-11
4.4 [2-3] Timers & Counters
4.5 [2-4] Week Table
A specific time mode (day, night, lunch, or break) can be selected for operation depending on the time of day.
The time mode can be switched either automatically or manually. Select the desired switching mode from the
Time Service Switching Mode option.
Time Table numbers correspond to tenant numbers (for example, Tenant 1 uses Time Table 1). Select the
desired Time Table from the Time Table No. list.
When in Automatic Switching mode, the time modes of the tenant are switched as programmed in the
corresponding Time Table. Manual switching is possible only from an authorized extension (determined by
COS).
•To adjust the currently displayed Time Table, click and drag the divisions between two time periods.
•To program the time blocks of the currently displayed Time Table, including adding or deleting time blocks,
click Time Setting.
Document Version 2010-11 PC Programming Manual 269
4.5 [2-4] Week Table
4.6 [2-4] Week Table—Time Setting
The start times of 4 different time blocks can be programmed for each day of the week, for the selected Time
Table, as well as the start and end times of up to 3 break periods.
1. Day/Lunch/Night—Day1 Start, Lunch Start, Day2 Start, Night Start—Setting
Enables the setting of the start time for each time block.
Default
Day 1 Start, Night Start: Enable
Lunch Start, Day 2 Start: Disable
Value Range
Disable, Enable
Maintenance Console Location
4.6 [2-4] Week Table—Time Setting
Programming Manual References
None
Feature Manual References
17.1.3 Tenant Service
17.1.5 Time Service
1. Day/Lunch/Night—Day1 Start, Lunch Start, Day2 Start, Night Start—Hour,
Minute
Specifies the start time for each time block. Times can only be set when 1. Day/Lunch/Night—Day1 Start,
Lunch Start, Day2 Start, Night Start—Setting is set to Enable.
Default
Day1: 9:00
Lunch: 12:00
Day2: 13:00
Night: 17:00
Value Range
00:00–23:59
Maintenance Console Location
4.6 [2-4] Week Table—Time Setting
Programming Manual References
None
270 PC Programming Manual Document Version 2010-11
4.6 [2-4] Week Table—Time Setting
Feature Manual References
17.1.3 Tenant Service
17.1.5 Time Service
2. Break—Break 1–3 Start—Setting
Enables the setting of the start time for each break period.
Default
Disable
Value Range
Disable, Enable
Maintenance Console Location
4.6 [2-4] Week Table—Time Setting
Programming Manual References
None
Feature Manual References
17.1.3 Tenant Service
17.1.5 Time Service
2. Break—Break 1–3 Start—Hour, Minute
Specifies the start time for each break period. Times can only be set when 2. Break—Break 1–3 Start—
Setting is set to Enable.
Default
00:00
Value Range
00:00–23:59
Maintenance Console Location
4.6 [2-4] Week Table—Time Setting
Programming Manual References
None
Feature Manual References
17.1.3 Tenant Service
17.1.5 Time Service
Document Version 2010-11 PC Programming Manual 271
4.6 [2-4] Week Table—Time Setting
2. Break—Break 1–3 End—Hour, Minute
Specifies the start time for each break period. Times can only be set when 2. Break—Break 1–3 Start—
Setting is set to Enable.
Default
00:00
Value Range
00:00–23:59
Maintenance Console Location
4.6 [2-4] Week Table—Time Setting
Programming Manual References
None
Feature Manual References
17.1.3 Tenant Service
17.1.5 Time Service
272 PC Programming Manual Document Version 2010-11
4.6 [2-4] Week Table—Time Setting
4.7 [2-5] Holiday Table
A specific time mode (day, night, lunch, or break) can be selected for operation during holidays. Select the
desired time mode from the Holiday Mode list.
The start and end dates of a maximum of 24 different holidays can be programmed.
Holiday Table—Setting
Enables the setting of the holiday.
Default
Disable
Value Range
Disable, Enable
Maintenance Console Location
4.7 [2-5] Holiday Table
Programming Manual References
None
Feature Manual References
17.1.5 Time Service
Holiday Table—Start Date—Month
Specifies the month of the holiday start date.
Default
1
Value Range
1–12
Maintenance Console Location
4.7 [2-5] Holiday Table
Programming Manual References
None
Feature Manual References
17.1.5 Time Service
Document Version 2010-11 PC Programming Manual 273
4.7 [2-5] Holiday Table
Holiday Table—Start Date—Day
Specifies the day of the holiday start date.
Default
1
Value Range
1–31
Maintenance Console Location
4.7 [2-5] Holiday Table
Programming Manual References
None
Feature Manual References
17.1.5 Time Service
Holiday Table—End Date—Month
Specifies the month of the holiday end date.
Default
1
Value Range
1–12
Maintenance Console Location
4.7 [2-5] Holiday Table
Programming Manual References
None
Feature Manual References
17.1.5 Time Service
Holiday Table—End Date—Day
Specifies the day of the holiday end date.
Default
1
Value Range
1–31
274 PC Programming Manual Document Version 2010-11
4.7 [2-5] Holiday Table
Maintenance Console Location
4.7 [2-5] Holiday Table
Programming Manual References
None
Feature Manual References
17.1.5 Time Service
Document Version 2010-11 PC Programming Manual 275
4.7 [2-5] Holiday Table
4.8 [2-6-1] Numbering Plan—Main
Details of the extension numbering schemes, feature access numbers, and numbers to access other PBXs in
a network can be programmed here.
For more information on flexible numbering, see "6.1.4 Flexible Numbering/Fixed Numbering" in the Feature
Manual.
Extension
The leading numbers and the number of additional digits of the extension numbers for a maximum of 64
different extension numbering schemes can be programmed.
Leading Number
Specifies the leading number of extension numbers and floating extension numbers.
Default
For KX-TDA50/KX-TDA100/KX-TDA200:
Extension Numbering Scheme 01: 1
Extension Numbering Scheme 02: 2
Extension Numbering Scheme 03: 3
Extension Numbering Scheme 04: 4
Extension Numbering Scheme 21: 5
Extension Numbering Scheme 22: 6
Extension Numbering Scheme 05–20, 23–64: Not stored.
For KX-TDA600:
Extension Numbering Scheme 01: 10
Extension Numbering Scheme 02: 11
Extension Numbering Scheme 03: 12
Extension Numbering Scheme 04: 13
Extension Numbering Scheme 05: 14
Extension Numbering Scheme 06: 15
Extension Numbering Scheme 07: 16
Extension Numbering Scheme 08: 17
Extension Numbering Scheme 09: 18
Extension Numbering Scheme 10: 19
Extension Numbering Scheme 11: 20
Extension Numbering Scheme 12: 21
Extension Numbering Scheme 13: 22
Extension Numbering Scheme 14: 23
Extension Numbering Scheme 15: 24
Extension Numbering Scheme 16: 25
Extension Numbering Scheme 17: 26
Extension Numbering Scheme 18: 27
Extension Numbering Scheme 19: 28
Extension Numbering Scheme 20: 29
Extension Numbering Scheme 21: 5
Extension Numbering Scheme 22: 6
Extension Numbering Scheme 23–64: Not stored.
276 PC Programming Manual Document Version 2010-11
4.8 [2-6-1] Numbering Plan—Main
Value Range
Max. 3 digits (consisting of 0–9)
Maintenance Console Location
4.8 [2-6-1] Numbering Plan—Main
Programming Manual References
5.12 [3-5-1] Incoming Call Distribution Group—Group Settings
5.19 [3-7-2] VM(DPT) Group—Unit Settings
5.22 [3-8-2] VM(DTMF) Group—Group Settings
6.1 [4-1-1] Wired Extension—Extension Settings
6.10 [4-2-1] Portable Station—Extension Settings
7.4 [5-3-2] Voice Message—DISA Message
13.1 [11-1] Main
Feature Manual References
None
No. of Additional Digits
Specifies the number of additional digits following the leading number.
Default
XX
Value Range
None: 0 digit
X: 1 digit
XX: 2 digits
Maintenance Console Location
4.8 [2-6-1] Numbering Plan—Main
Programming Manual References
None
Feature Manual References
None
Features
Feature numbers to access various PBX features can be programmed. The following features are available
while hearing a dial tone.
Document Version 2010-11 PC Programming Manual 277
4.8 [2-6-1] Numbering Plan—Main
Operator Call
Specifies the feature number used to call the operator.
Default
0
Value Range
Max. 4 digits (consisting of 0–9, *, and #)
Maintenance Console Location
4.8 [2-6-1] Numbering Plan—Main
Programming Manual References
4.3 [2-2] Operator & BGM
8.6 [6-6] Tenant
Feature Manual References
12.1.5 Operator Features
Idle Line Access (Local Access)
Specifies the feature number used to make a CO line call by Idle Line Access (selects an idle CO line
automatically).
Default
9
Value Range
Max. 4 digits (consisting of 0–9, *, and #)
Maintenance Console Location
4.8 [2-6-1] Numbering Plan—Main
Programming Manual References
5.2 [3-1-2] Trunk Group—Local Access Priority
Feature Manual References
3.1.14 CO Line Access
Trunk Group Access
Specifies the feature number used to make a CO line call using an idle CO line from a certain trunk group.
Default
8
278 PC Programming Manual Document Version 2010-11
4.8 [2-6-1] Numbering Plan—Main
Value Range
Max. 4 digits (consisting of 0–9, *, and #)
Maintenance Console Location
4.8 [2-6-1] Numbering Plan—Main
Programming Manual References
12.1 [10-1] CO Line Settings
Feature Manual References
None
TIE Line Access
Specifies the feature number used to make a TIE line call.
Default
7
Value Range
Max. 4 digits (consisting of 0–9, *, and #)
Maintenance Console Location
4.8 [2-6-1] Numbering Plan—Main
Programming Manual References
11.1 [9-1] TIE Table
Feature Manual References
13.1.13 PRIVATE NETWORK FEATURES
Redial
Specifies the feature number used to redial the last number dialed.
Default
#
Value Range
Max. 4 digits (consisting of 0–9, *, and #)
Maintenance Console Location
4.8 [2-6-1] Numbering Plan—Main
Document Version 2010-11 PC Programming Manual 279
4.8 [2-6-1] Numbering Plan—Main
Programming Manual References
None
Feature Manual References
15.1.1 Redial, Last Number
System Speed Dialing / Personal Speed Dialing
Specifies the feature number used to make a call using a System/Personal Speed Dialing number.
Default
**
Value Range
Max. 4 digits (consisting of 0–9, *, and #)
Maintenance Console Location
4.8 [2-6-1] Numbering Plan—Main
Programming Manual References
6.4 [4-1-3] Wired Extension—Speed Dial
8.1 [6-1] System Speed Dial
Feature Manual References
16.1.3 Speed Dialing, Personal
16.1.4 Speed Dialing, System
Personal Speed Dialing - Programming
Specifies the feature number used to program Personal Speed Dialing numbers at an extension.
Default
*30
Value Range
Max. 4 digits (consisting of 0–9, *, and #)
Maintenance Console Location
4.8 [2-6-1] Numbering Plan—Main
Programming Manual References
None
Feature Manual References
16.1.3 Speed Dialing, Personal
280 PC Programming Manual Document Version 2010-11
4.8 [2-6-1] Numbering Plan—Main
16.1.4 Speed Dialing, System
Doorphone Call
Specifies the feature number used to make a call to a doorphone.
Default
*31
Value Range
Max. 4 digits (consisting of 0–9, *, and #)
Maintenance Console Location
4.8 [2-6-1] Numbering Plan—Main
Programming Manual References
7.1 [5-1] Doorphone
Feature Manual References
4.1.11 Doorphone Call
Group Paging
Specifies the feature number used to page a certain paging group.
Default
*33
Value Range
Max. 4 digits (consisting of 0–9, *, and #)
Maintenance Console Location
4.8 [2-6-1] Numbering Plan—Main
Programming Manual References
5.9 [3-4] Paging Group
Feature Manual References
13.1.1 Paging
External BGM On / Off
Specifies the feature number, available for manager extensions, used to turn on or off the external BGM.
Default
*35
Document Version 2010-11 PC Programming Manual 281
4.8 [2-6-1] Numbering Plan—Main
Value Range
Max. 4 digits (consisting of 0–9, *, and #)
Maintenance Console Location
4.8 [2-6-1] Numbering Plan—Main
Programming Manual References
4.3 [2-2] Operator & BGM
4.11 [2-7-1] Class of Service—COS Settings—Programming & Manager— Manager
Feature Manual References
2.1.1 BGM (Background Music)
OGM Record / Clear / Playback
Specifies the feature number, available for manager extensions, used to record, clear, or play back a certain
OGM.
Default
*36
Value Range
Max. 4 digits (consisting of 0–9, *, and #)
Maintenance Console Location
4.8 [2-6-1] Numbering Plan—Main
Programming Manual References
7.4 [5-3-2] Voice Message—DISA Message
4.11 [2-7-1] Class of Service—COS Settings—Programming & Manager— Manager
Feature Manual References
12.1.2 OGM (Outgoing Message)
Single CO Line Access
Specifies the feature number used to make a CO line call using a certain CO line.
Default
*37
Value Range
Max. 4 digits (consisting of 0–9, *, and #)
282 PC Programming Manual Document Version 2010-11
4.8 [2-6-1] Numbering Plan—Main
Maintenance Console Location
4.8 [2-6-1] Numbering Plan—Main
Programming Manual References
12.1 [10-1] CO Line Settings
Feature Manual References
3.1.14 CO Line Access
Parallel Telephone (Ring) Mode Set / Cancel
Specifies the feature number used to set or cancel an SLT connected in parallel with a DPT to ring when
receiving an incoming call.
Default
*39
Value Range
Max. 4 digits (consisting of 0–9, *, and #)
Maintenance Console Location
4.8 [2-6-1] Numbering Plan—Main
Programming Manual References
None
Feature Manual References
13.1.2 Paralleled Telephone
Group Call Pickup
Specifies the feature number used to answer a call ringing at a certain call pickup group.
Default
*40
Value Range
Max. 4 digits (consisting of 0–9, *, and #)
Maintenance Console Location
4.8 [2-6-1] Numbering Plan—Main
Programming Manual References
5.7 [3-3] Call Pickup Group
Document Version 2010-11 PC Programming Manual 283
4.8 [2-6-1] Numbering Plan—Main
Feature Manual References
3.1.6 Call Pickup
Directed Call Pickup
Specifies the feature number used to answer a call ringing at a certain extension.
Default
*41
Value Range
Max. 4 digits (consisting of 0–9, *, and #)
Maintenance Console Location
4.8 [2-6-1] Numbering Plan—Main
Programming Manual References
6.1 [4-1-1] Wired Extension—Extension Settings—Option 3— Call Pickup Deny
6.10 [4-2-1] Portable Station—Extension Settings—Option 3— Call Pickup Deny
Feature Manual References
3.1.6 Call Pickup
TAFAS Answer
Specifies the feature number used to answer a CO line call notified through an external pager.
Default
*42
Value Range
Max. 4 digits (consisting of 0–9, *, and #)
Maintenance Console Location
4.8 [2-6-1] Numbering Plan—Main
Programming Manual References
7.2 [5-2] External Pager
Feature Manual References
17.1.2 TAFAS (Trunk Answer From Any Station)
Group Paging Answer
Specifies the feature number used to answer a page to a paging group.
284 PC Programming Manual Document Version 2010-11
4.8 [2-6-1] Numbering Plan—Main
Default
*43
Value Range
Max. 4 digits (consisting of 0–9, *, and #)
Maintenance Console Location
4.8 [2-6-1] Numbering Plan—Main
Programming Manual References
5.9 [3-4] Paging Group
Feature Manual References
13.1.1 Paging
Automatic Callback Busy Cancel
Specifies the feature number used to cancel Automatic Callback Busy.
Default
*46
Value Range
Max. 4 digits (consisting of 0–9, *, and #)
Maintenance Console Location
4.8 [2-6-1] Numbering Plan—Main
Programming Manual References
None
Feature Manual References
1.1.4 Automatic Callback Busy (Camp-on)
User Remote Operation / Walking COS / Verification Code
Specifies the feature number used to change the COS of an extension temporarily, and also change the feature
settings (for example, FWD, DND) of an extension from another extension or through DISA.
Default
*47
Value Range
Max. 4 digits (consisting of 0–9, *, and #)
Document Version 2010-11 PC Programming Manual 285
4.8 [2-6-1] Numbering Plan—Main
Maintenance Console Location
4.8 [2-6-1] Numbering Plan—Main
Programming Manual References
4.11 [2-7-1] Class of Service—COS Settings—Optional Device & Other Extensions— Remote Operation
by Other Extension
Feature Manual References
20.1.1 Walking COS
19.1.1 Verification Code Entry
Wireless XDP Parallel Mode Set / Cancel
Specifies the feature number used to set or cancel Wireless XDP Parallel mode.
Default
*48
Value Range
Max. 4 digits (consisting of 0–9, *, and #)
Maintenance Console Location
4.8 [2-6-1] Numbering Plan—Main
Programming Manual References
4.11 [2-7-1] Class of Service—COS Settings—Optional Device & Other Extensions— Accept Wireless XDP
Parallel Mode Set by PS
Feature Manual References
20.1.4 Wireless XDP Parallel Mode
Account Code Entry
Specifies the feature number used to enter an Account Code.
Default
*49
Value Range
Max. 4 digits (consisting of 0–9, *, and #)
Maintenance Console Location
4.8 [2-6-1] Numbering Plan—Main
286 PC Programming Manual Document Version 2010-11
4.8 [2-6-1] Numbering Plan—Main
Programming Manual References
None
Feature Manual References
1.1.2 Account Code Entry
Call Hold / Call Hold Retrieve
Specifies the feature number used to hold a call or retrieve a call on hold from the holding extension.
Default
*50
Value Range
Max. 4 digits (consisting of 0–9, *, and #)
Maintenance Console Location
4.8 [2-6-1] Numbering Plan—Main
Programming Manual References
None
Feature Manual References
3.1.2 Call Hold
Call Hold Retrieve : Specified with a Holding Extension Number
Specifies the feature number used to retrieve a held call from a different extension by specifying a holding
extension number.
Default
*51
Value Range
Max. 4 digits (consisting of 0–9, *, and #)
Maintenance Console Location
4.8 [2-6-1] Numbering Plan—Main
Programming Manual References
None
Feature Manual References
3.1.2 Call Hold
Document Version 2010-11 PC Programming Manual 287
4.8 [2-6-1] Numbering Plan—Main
Call Park / Call Park Retrieve
Specifies the feature number used to hold a call in a parking zone or retrieve a call held in a parking zone.
Default
*52
Value Range
Max. 4 digits (consisting of 0–9, *, and #)
Maintenance Console Location
4.8 [2-6-1] Numbering Plan—Main
Programming Manual References
None
Feature Manual References
3.1.5 Call Park
Hold Retrieve : Specified with a Held CO Line Number
Specifies the feature number used to retrieve a held CO line call from a different extension by specifying the
held CO line number.
Default
*53
Value Range
Max. 4 digits (consisting of 0–9, *, and #)
Maintenance Console Location
4.8 [2-6-1] Numbering Plan—Main
Programming Manual References
None
Feature Manual References
3.1.2 Call Hold
Door Open
Specifies the feature number used to open a door.
Default
*55
288 PC Programming Manual Document Version 2010-11
4.8 [2-6-1] Numbering Plan—Main
Value Range
Max. 4 digits (consisting of 0–9, *, and #)
Maintenance Console Location
4.8 [2-6-1] Numbering Plan—Main
Programming Manual References
7.1 [5-1] Doorphone
Feature Manual References
4.1.10 Door Open
External Relay Access
Specifies the feature number used to activate a relay.
Default
*56
Value Range
Max. 4 digits (consisting of 0–9, *, and #)
Maintenance Console Location
4.8 [2-6-1] Numbering Plan—Main
Programming Manual References
7.6 [5-4] External Relay
Feature Manual References
5.1.8 External Relay
External Feature Access
Specifies the feature number used to access the features of a host PBX or the telephone company.
Default
*60
Value Range
Max. 4 digits (consisting of 0–9, *, and #)
Maintenance Console Location
4.8 [2-6-1] Numbering Plan—Main
Document Version 2010-11 PC Programming Manual 289
4.8 [2-6-1] Numbering Plan—Main
Programming Manual References
None
Feature Manual References
5.1.1 EFA (External Feature Access)
COLR Set / Cancel
Specifies the feature number used to set or cancel COLR, which suppresses the presentation of the called
party’s number to the caller.
Default
*7*0
Value Range
Max. 4 digits (consisting of 0–9, *, and #)
Maintenance Console Location
4.8 [2-6-1] Numbering Plan—Main
Programming Manual References
3.14 [1-1] Slot—Port Property - PRI Port (KX-TDA100/KX-TDA200/KX-TDA600 only)—Supplementary
Service— COLP, CLIR, COLR, CNIP, CONP, CNIR, CONR, CF (Rerouting), CT, CCBS, E911
Feature Manual References
3.1.13 CLIP (Calling Line Identification Presentation)
13.1.21 Private Network Features—QSIG—CLIP/COLP (Calling/Connected Line Identification Presentation)
and CNIP/CONP (Calling/Connected Name Identification Presentation)
CLIR Set / Cancel
Specifies the feature number used to set or cancel CLIR, which suppresses the presentation of the caller’s
number to the called party.
Default
*7*1
Value Range
Max. 4 digits (consisting of 0–9, *, and #)
Maintenance Console Location
4.8 [2-6-1] Numbering Plan—Main
Programming Manual References
3.14 [1-1] Slot—Port Property - PRI Port (KX-TDA100/KX-TDA200/KX-TDA600 only)—Supplementary
Service— COLP, CLIR, COLR, CNIP, CONP, CNIR, CONR, CF (Rerouting), CT, CCBS, E911
290 PC Programming Manual Document Version 2010-11
4.8 [2-6-1] Numbering Plan—Main
Feature Manual References
3.1.13 CLIP (Calling Line Identification Presentation)
13.1.21 Private Network Features—QSIG—CLIP/COLP (Calling/Connected Line Identification Presentation)
and CNIP/CONP (Calling/Connected Name Identification Presentation)
Switch CLIP of CO Line / Extension (KX-TDA100/KX-TDA200/KX-TDA600 only)
Specifies the feature number used to send either the CLIP number of the CO line in use (subscriber’s number)
or the extension to the network.
Default
*7*2
Value Range
Max. 4 digits (consisting of 0–9, *, and #)
Maintenance Console Location
4.8 [2-6-1] Numbering Plan—Main
Programming Manual References
3.14 [1-1] Slot—Port Property - PRI Port (KX-TDA100/KX-TDA200/KX-TDA600 only)—CO Setting—
Subscriber Number
6.1 [4-1-1] Wired Extension—Extension Settings—ISDN CLIP— CLIP ID
6.10 [4-2-1] Portable Station—Extension Settings—ISDN CLIP— CLIP ID
Feature Manual References
3.1.13 CLIP (Calling Line Identification Presentation)
MCID
Specifies the feature number used to ask the telephone company to trace a malicious call. This feature can
be used during a call or while hearing a reorder tone after the caller hangs up.
Default
Not stored.
Value Range
Max. 4 digits (consisting of 0–9, *, and #)
Maintenance Console Location
4.8 [2-6-1] Numbering Plan—Main
Programming Manual References
None
Document Version 2010-11 PC Programming Manual 291
4.8 [2-6-1] Numbering Plan—Main
Feature Manual References
None
Message Waiting Set / Cancel / Call Back
Specifies the feature number used to set or cancel Message Waiting, or call back the caller.
Default
*70
Value Range
Max. 4 digits (consisting of 0–9, *, and #)
Maintenance Console Location
4.8 [2-6-1] Numbering Plan—Main
Programming Manual References
None
Feature Manual References
11.1.3 Message Waiting
FWD/DND Set / Cancel: Call from CO & Extension
Specifies the feature number used to set or cancel FWD/DND for incoming CO line and intercom calls.
Default
*710
Value Range
Max. 4 digits (consisting of 0–9, *, and #)
Maintenance Console Location
4.8 [2-6-1] Numbering Plan—Main
Programming Manual References
6.3 [4-1-2] Wired Extension—FWD/DND
6.12 [4-2-2] Portable Station—FWD/DND
Feature Manual References
6.1.6 FWD (Call Forwarding)
FWD/DND Set / Cancel: Call from CO
Specifies the feature number used to set or cancel FWD/DND for incoming CO line calls.
292 PC Programming Manual Document Version 2010-11
4.8 [2-6-1] Numbering Plan—Main
Default
*711
Value Range
Max. 4 digits (consisting of 0–9, *, and #)
Maintenance Console Location
4.8 [2-6-1] Numbering Plan—Main
Programming Manual References
6.3 [4-1-2] Wired Extension—FWD/DND
6.12 [4-2-2] Portable Station—FWD/DND
Feature Manual References
6.1.6 FWD (Call Forwarding)
FWD/DND Set / Cancel: Call from Extension
Specifies the feature number used to set or cancel FWD/DND for incoming intercom calls.
Default
*712
Value Range
Max. 4 digits (consisting of 0–9, *, and #)
Maintenance Console Location
4.8 [2-6-1] Numbering Plan—Main
Programming Manual References
6.3 [4-1-2] Wired Extension—FWD/DND
6.12 [4-2-2] Portable Station—FWD/DND
Feature Manual References
6.1.6 FWD (Call Forwarding)
FWD No Answer Timer Set
Specifies the feature number used to set the length of time before a call is forwarded.
Default
*713
Value Range
Max. 4 digits (consisting of 0–9, *, and #)
Document Version 2010-11 PC Programming Manual 293
4.8 [2-6-1] Numbering Plan—Main
Maintenance Console Location
4.8 [2-6-1] Numbering Plan—Main
Programming Manual References
6.3 [4-1-2] Wired Extension—FWD/DND
6.12 [4-2-2] Portable Station—FWD/DND
Feature Manual References
6.1.6 FWD (Call Forwarding)
Group FWD Set / Cancel: Call from CO & Extension
Specifies the feature number used to set or cancel FWD for incoming CO line and intercom calls to an incoming
call distribution group.
Default
*714
Value Range
Max. 4 digits (consisting of 0–9, *, and #)
Maintenance Console Location
4.8 [2-6-1] Numbering Plan—Main
Programming Manual References
5.12 [3-5-1] Incoming Call Distribution Group—Group Settings
Feature Manual References
6.1.6 FWD (Call Forwarding)
Group FWD Set / Cancel: Call from CO
Specifies the feature number used to set or cancel FWD for incoming CO line calls to an incoming call
distribution group.
Default
*715
Value Range
Max. 4 digits (consisting of 0–9, *, and #)
Maintenance Console Location
4.8 [2-6-1] Numbering Plan—Main
294 PC Programming Manual Document Version 2010-11
4.8 [2-6-1] Numbering Plan—Main
Programming Manual References
5.12 [3-5-1] Incoming Call Distribution Group—Group Settings
Feature Manual References
6.1.6 FWD (Call Forwarding)
Group FWD Set / Cancel: Call from Extension
Specifies the feature number used to set or cancel FWD for incoming intercom calls to an incoming call
distribution group.
Default
*716
Value Range
Max. 4 digits (consisting of 0–9, *, and #)
Maintenance Console Location
4.8 [2-6-1] Numbering Plan—Main
Programming Manual References
5.12 [3-5-1] Incoming Call Distribution Group—Group Settings
Feature Manual References
6.1.6 FWD (Call Forwarding)
Call Pickup Deny Set / Cancel
Specifies the feature number used to set or cancel Call Pickup Deny (i.e., preventing other extensions from
picking up calls to your extension).
Default
*720
Value Range
Max. 4 digits (consisting of 0–9, *, and #)
Maintenance Console Location
4.8 [2-6-1] Numbering Plan—Main
Programming Manual References
None
Feature Manual References
3.1.6 Call Pickup
Document Version 2010-11 PC Programming Manual 295
4.8 [2-6-1] Numbering Plan—Main
Paging Deny Set / Cancel
Specifies the feature number used to set or cancel Paging Deny (i.e., preventing other extensions from paging
your extension).
Default
*721
Value Range
Max. 4 digits (consisting of 0–9, *, and #)
Maintenance Console Location
4.8 [2-6-1] Numbering Plan—Main
Programming Manual References
5.9 [3-4] Paging Group
Feature Manual References
13.1.1 Paging
Walking Extension
Specifies the feature number used to use the same extension settings at a new extension.
Default
*727
Value Range
Max. 4 digits (consisting of 0–9, *, and #)
Maintenance Console Location
4.8 [2-6-1] Numbering Plan—Main
Programming Manual References
None
Feature Manual References
20.1.2 Walking Extension
Data Line Security Set / Cancel
Specifies the feature number used to set or cancel Data Line Security (i.e., preventing signals from other
extensions during data transmission).
Default
*730
296 PC Programming Manual Document Version 2010-11
4.8 [2-6-1] Numbering Plan—Main
Value Range
Max. 4 digits (consisting of 0–9, *, and #)
Maintenance Console Location
4.8 [2-6-1] Numbering Plan—Main
Programming Manual References
None
Feature Manual References
4.1.1 Data Line Security
Manual Call Waiting for Extension Call
Specifies the feature number used to set or change the method of receiving a Call Waiting notification from an
extension.
Default
*731
Value Range
Max. 4 digits (consisting of 0–9, *, and #)
Maintenance Console Location
4.8 [2-6-1] Numbering Plan—Main
Programming Manual References
None
Feature Manual References
3.1.9 CALL WAITING FEATURES
Automatic Call Waiting
Specifies the feature number used to set or cancel a Call Waiting notification from a CO line, doorphone, or a
call via an incoming call distribution group.
Default
*732
Value Range
Max. 4 digits (consisting of 0–9, *, and #)
Document Version 2010-11 PC Programming Manual 297
4.8 [2-6-1] Numbering Plan—Main
Maintenance Console Location
4.8 [2-6-1] Numbering Plan—Main
Programming Manual References
None
Feature Manual References
3.1.9 CALL WAITING FEATURES
Executive Override Deny Set / Cancel
Specifies the feature number used to set or cancel Executive Busy Override (i.e., preventing other extensions
from joining your conversation).
Default
*733
Value Range
Max. 4 digits (consisting of 0–9, *, and #)
Maintenance Console Location
4.8 [2-6-1] Numbering Plan—Main
Programming Manual References
4.11 [2-7-1] Class of Service—COS Settings—Extension Feature— Executive Busy Override
4.11 [2-7-1] Class of Service—COS Settings—Programming & Manager— Executive Busy Override Deny
Feature Manual References
5.1.3 Executive Busy Override
Not Ready (Manual Wrap-up) Mode On / Off
Specifies the feature number used to enter or leave Not Ready mode.
Default
*735
Value Range
Max. 4 digits (consisting of 0–9, *, and #)
Maintenance Console Location
4.8 [2-6-1] Numbering Plan—Main
Programming Manual References
5.12 [3-5-1] Incoming Call Distribution Group—Group Settings
298 PC Programming Manual Document Version 2010-11
4.8 [2-6-1] Numbering Plan—Main
Feature Manual References
9.1.3 ICD Group Features—Log-in/Log-out
Log-in / Log-out
Specifies the feature number used to join or leave an incoming call distribution group.
Default
*736
Value Range
Max. 4 digits (consisting of 0–9, *, and #)
Maintenance Console Location
4.8 [2-6-1] Numbering Plan—Main
Programming Manual References
5.12 [3-5-1] Incoming Call Distribution Group—Group Settings
Feature Manual References
9.1.3 ICD Group Features—Log-in/Log-out
Incoming Call Queue Monitor
Specifies the feature number, available only for extensions assigned as a supervisor, used to monitor the status
of an incoming call distribution group with the extension display.
Default
*739
Value Range
Max. 4 digits (consisting of 0–9, *, and #)
Maintenance Console Location
4.8 [2-6-1] Numbering Plan—Main
Programming Manual References
5.12 [3-5-1] Incoming Call Distribution Group—Group Settings—Miscellaneous— Supervisor Extension
Number
Feature Manual References
9.1.7 ICD Group Features—Supervisory
Document Version 2010-11 PC Programming Manual 299
4.8 [2-6-1] Numbering Plan—Main
Hot Line (Pickup Dial) Program Set / Cancel
Specifies the feature number used to set/cancel the Hot Line feature, or program the number to be automatically
dialed.
Default
*740
Value Range
Max. 4 digits (consisting of 0–9, *, and #)
Maintenance Console Location
4.8 [2-6-1] Numbering Plan—Main
Programming Manual References
4.4 [2-3] Timers & Counters—Dial / IRNA / Recall / Tone— Dial—Hot Line (Pickup Dial) Start
Feature Manual References
8.1.6 Hot Line
Absent Message Set / Cancel
Specifies the feature number used to set or cancel the display of an Absent Message.
Default
*750
Value Range
Max. 4 digits (consisting of 0–9, *, and #)
Maintenance Console Location
4.8 [2-6-1] Numbering Plan—Main
Programming Manual References
None
Feature Manual References
1.1.1 Absent Message
BGM Set / Cancel
Specifies the feature number used to set or cancel the BGM heard through the telephone speaker while
on-hook.
Default
*751
300 PC Programming Manual Document Version 2010-11
4.8 [2-6-1] Numbering Plan—Main
Value Range
Max. 4 digits (consisting of 0–9, *, and #)
Maintenance Console Location
4.8 [2-6-1] Numbering Plan—Main
Programming Manual References
4.3 [2-2] Operator & BGM
Feature Manual References
2.1.1 BGM (Background Music)
Remote Timed Reminder (Remote Wakeup Call)
Specifies the feature number used to set or cancel a Timed Reminder remotely (Wake-up Call).
Default
*76*
Value Range
Max. 4 digits (consisting of 0–9, *, and #)
Maintenance Console Location
4.8 [2-6-1] Numbering Plan—Main
Programming Manual References
None
Feature Manual References
17.1.4 Timed Reminder
Timed Reminder Set / Cancel
Specifies the feature number used to set or cancel a Timed Reminder.
Default
*760
Value Range
Max. 4 digits (consisting of 0–9, *, and #)
Maintenance Console Location
4.8 [2-6-1] Numbering Plan—Main
Document Version 2010-11 PC Programming Manual 301
4.8 [2-6-1] Numbering Plan—Main
Programming Manual References
None
Feature Manual References
17.1.4 Timed Reminder
Printing Message
Specifies the feature number used to select a Printing Message to be output on SMDR.
Default
*761
Value Range
Max. 4 digits (consisting of 0–9, *, and #)
Maintenance Console Location
4.8 [2-6-1] Numbering Plan—Main
Programming Manual References
8.2 [6-2] Hotel—Main— SMDR for External Hotel Application 2—Printing Message 1–8
Feature Manual References
13.1.11 Printing Message
Extension Dial Lock Set / Cancel
Specifies the feature number used to lock or unlock an extension to make certain CO line calls and change
the forwarding destination, using the Extension Dial Lock feature.
Default
*77
Value Range
Max. 4 digits (consisting of 0–9, *, and #)
Maintenance Console Location
4.8 [2-6-1] Numbering Plan—Main
Programming Manual References
None
Feature Manual References
5.1.4 Extension Dial Lock
302 PC Programming Manual Document Version 2010-11
4.8 [2-6-1] Numbering Plan—Main
Time Service (Day / Lunch / Break / Night) Switch
Specifies the feature number, available for manager extensions, used to change the time mode manually.
Default
*780
Value Range
Max. 4 digits (consisting of 0–9, *, and #)
Maintenance Console Location
4.8 [2-6-1] Numbering Plan—Main
Programming Manual References
4.11 [2-7-1] Class of Service—COS Settings—Programming & Manager— Time Service Switch
4.11 [2-7-1] Class of Service—COS Settings—Programming & Manager— Manager
Feature Manual References
17.1.5 Time Service
Remote Extension Dial Lock Off
Specifies the feature number, available for manager extensions, used to unlock other extensions using the
Extension Dial Lock feature.
Default
*782
Value Range
Max. 4 digits (consisting of 0–9, *, and #)
Maintenance Console Location
4.8 [2-6-1] Numbering Plan—Main
Programming Manual References
4.11 [2-7-1] Class of Service—COS Settings—Programming & Manager— Manager
Feature Manual References
5.1.4 Extension Dial Lock
Remote Extension Dial Lock On
Specifies the feature number, available for manager extensions, used to lock other extensions using the
Extension Dial Lock feature.
Default
*783
Document Version 2010-11 PC Programming Manual 303
4.8 [2-6-1] Numbering Plan—Main
Value Range
Max. 4 digits (consisting of 0–9, *, and #)
Maintenance Console Location
4.8 [2-6-1] Numbering Plan—Main
Programming Manual References
4.11 [2-7-1] Class of Service—COS Settings—Programming & Manager— Manager
Feature Manual References
5.1.4 Extension Dial Lock
Extension Feature Clear
Specifies the feature number used to reset certain features of an extension to the default values.
Default
*790
Value Range
Max. 4 digits (consisting of 0–9, *, and #)
Maintenance Console Location
4.8 [2-6-1] Numbering Plan—Main
Programming Manual References
None
Feature Manual References
5.1.5 Extension Feature Clear
Extension PIN Set / Cancel
Specifies the feature number used to set a PIN for an extension.
Default
*799
Value Range
Max. 4 digits (consisting of 0–9, *, and #)
Maintenance Console Location
4.8 [2-6-1] Numbering Plan—Main
304 PC Programming Manual Document Version 2010-11
4.8 [2-6-1] Numbering Plan—Main
Programming Manual References
None
Feature Manual References
5.1.6 Extension PIN (Personal Identification Number)
Dial Information (CTI)
Specifies the feature number used to send dial information to the CTI feature instead of the PBX.
Default
Not stored.
Value Range
Max. 4 digits (consisting of 0–9, *, and #)
Maintenance Console Location
4.8 [2-6-1] Numbering Plan—Main
Programming Manual References
None
Feature Manual References
3.1.22 CTI (Computer Telephony Integration)
Conference Group Call Operation (KX-TDA50 only)
Specifies the feature number used to make a conference group call.
Default
*32
Value Range
Max. 4 digits (consisting of 0–9, *, and #)
Maintenance Console Location
4.8 [2-6-1] Numbering Plan—Main
Programming Manual References
4.4 [2-3] Timers & Counters—Miscellaneous— Conference Group Call—Ring Duration (KX-TDA50 only)
4.11 [2-7-1] Class of Service—COS Settings—Miscellaneous (KX-TDA50 only)—Conference Group Call
Operation
5.26 [3-10] Conference Group (KX-TDA50 only)
Document Version 2010-11 PC Programming Manual 305
4.8 [2-6-1] Numbering Plan—Main
Feature Manual References
3.1.17 Conference Group Call (KX-TDA50 only)
Centralized BLF Monitor Cancel
Specifies the feature number used to cancel monitoring of an extension using an NDSS button.
Default
*784
Value Range
Max. 4 digits (consisting of 0–9, *, and #)
Maintenance Console Location
4.8 [2-6-1] Numbering Plan—Main
Programming Manual References
11.1 [9-1] TIE Table
Feature Manual References
13.1.15 Private Network Features—NDSS (Network Direct Station Selection)
6.1.4 Flexible Numbering/Fixed Numbering
Simplified Voice Message Access
Specifies the feature number used to access the SVM feature to record, listen to and delete messages.
Default
*38
Value Range
Max. 4 digits (consisting of 0–9, *, and #)
Maintenance Console Location
4.8 [2-6-1] Numbering Plan—Main
Programming Manual References
6.9 [4-1-7] Wired Extension—Simplified Voice Message
6.16 [4-2-5] Portable Station—Simplified Voice Message
Feature Manual References
16.1.5 SVM (Simplified Voice Message)
306 PC Programming Manual Document Version 2010-11
4.8 [2-6-1] Numbering Plan—Main
Other PBX Extension
Other PBX extension numbers can be used to easily call extensions connected to PBXs at different locations
in a TIE line network. The leading numbers of all PBXs in the network that will be called should be entered in
this table. A maximum of 16 leading numbers can be programmed.
Dial
Specifies the leading extension number of the other PBX.
Default
Not stored.
Value Range
Max. 3 digits (consisting of 0–9, *, and #)
Maintenance Console Location
4.8 [2-6-1] Numbering Plan—Main
Programming Manual References
11.1 [9-1] TIE Table— Leading Number
Feature Manual References
13.1.13 PRIVATE NETWORK FEATURES
Document Version 2010-11 PC Programming Manual 307
4.8 [2-6-1] Numbering Plan—Main
4.9 [2-6-2] Numbering Plan—Quick Dial
Quick Dialing numbers are used to call extensions or outside parties, or access certain features without having
to dial their full numbers. It is possible to register Quick Dialing numbers that overlap with other registered
numbers (refer to "Automatic Rerouting of VoIP Calls to Public CO Lines" in the Feature Manual).
A maximum of 80 Quick Dialing numbers can be programmed. When an EMEC/MEC card is installed in the
PBX, a maximum of 4000 (with the KX-TDA100/KX-TDA200/KX-TDA600) or 1000 (with the KX-TDA50) Quick
Dialing numbers can be programmed. To display other sets of numbers, click the applicable tab.
For more information on flexible numbering, see "6.1.4 Flexible Numbering/Fixed Numbering" in the Feature
Manual.
Use quick dial for rerouting to public CO when TIE line does not work
Specifies whether to check if the quick dial numbering plan is compatible (does not overlap) with the main
numbering plan.
Default
Disable
Value Range
Disable: Checks whether the quick dial numbering plan is compatible with the main numbering plan.
Enable: Does not check whether the quick dial numbering plan is compatible with the main numbering plan.
Maintenance Console Location
4.9 [2-6-2] Numbering Plan—Quick Dial
Programming Manual References
None
Feature Manual References
13.1.23 Private Network Features—VoIP (Voice over Internet Protocol)
6.1.4 Flexible Numbering/Fixed Numbering
14.1.1 Quick Dialing
Dial
Specifies the Quick Dialing number.
Default
Not stored.
Value Range
Basic Memory: Max. 4 digits (consisting of 0–9, *, and #)
MEC expansion memory: Max. 8 digits (consisting of 0–9, *, and #)
Maintenance Console Location
4.9 [2-6-2] Numbering Plan—Quick Dial
308 PC Programming Manual Document Version 2010-11
4.9 [2-6-2] Numbering Plan—Quick Dial
Programming Manual References
None
Feature Manual References
13.1.23 Private Network Features—VoIP (Voice over Internet Protocol)
6.1.4 Flexible Numbering/Fixed Numbering
14.1.1 Quick Dialing
Phone Number
Specifies the number to be dialed when the corresponding Quick Dialing number is used.
Default
Not stored.
Value Range
Max. 32 digits (consisting of 0–9, *, #, T [Transfer], [ ] [Secret], P [Pause], and F [Flash])
Maintenance Console Location
4.9 [2-6-2] Numbering Plan—Quick Dial
Programming Manual References
None
Feature Manual References
13.1.23 Private Network Features—VoIP (Voice over Internet Protocol)
6.1.4 Flexible Numbering/Fixed Numbering
14.1.1 Quick Dialing
Document Version 2010-11 PC Programming Manual 309
4.9 [2-6-2] Numbering Plan—Quick Dial
4.10 [2-6-3] Numbering Plan—B/NA DND Call Feature
Feature numbers used to access various PBX features can be programmed. The following features are
available while hearing a busy, DND, or ringback tone. Each feature must have a unique feature number.
For more information on flexible numbering, see "6.1.4 Flexible Numbering/Fixed Numbering" in the Feature
Manual.
BSS / OHCA / Whisper OHCA / DND Override
Specifies the feature number used to notify a busy extension of a second call by Call Waiting, or call an
extension in DND mode.
Default
1
Value Range
1 digit (0–9, *, or #)
Maintenance Console Location
4.10 [2-6-3] Numbering Plan—B/NA DND Call Feature
Programming Manual References
6.1 [4-1-1] Wired Extension—Extension Settings—Option 2— Manual C. Waiting for Extension Call
6.10 [4-2-1] Portable Station—Extension Settings—Option 2— Manual C. Waiting for Extension Call
Feature Manual References
3.1.9 CALL WAITING FEATURES
3.1.10 Call Waiting Tone
4.1.9 DND (Do Not Disturb)
12.1.3 OHCA (Off-hook Call Announcement)
20.1.3 Whisper OHCA
Executive Busy Override
Specifies the feature number used to interrupt an existing call to establish a three-party conference call.
Default
3
Value Range
1 digit (0–9, *, or #)
Maintenance Console Location
4.10 [2-6-3] Numbering Plan—B/NA DND Call Feature
Programming Manual References
4.11 [2-7-1] Class of Service—COS Settings—Extension Feature— Executive Busy Override
310 PC Programming Manual Document Version 2010-11
4.10 [2-6-3] Numbering Plan—B/NA DND Call Feature
6.1 [4-1-1] Wired Extension—Extension Settings—Option 3— Executive Override Deny
6.10 [4-2-1] Portable Station—Extension Settings—Option 3— Executive Override Deny
Feature Manual References
5.1.3 Executive Busy Override
Alternate Calling - Ring / Voice
Specifies the feature number used to allow a caller to change the called extension’s preset call receiving
method to ring tone or voice.
Default
*
Value Range
1 digit (0–9, *, or #)
Maintenance Console Location
4.10 [2-6-3] Numbering Plan—B/NA DND Call Feature
Programming Manual References
None
Feature Manual References
9.1.13 Intercom Call
Message Waiting Set
Specifies the feature number used to leave a Message Waiting notification.
Default
4
Value Range
1 digit (0–9, *, or #)
Maintenance Console Location
4.10 [2-6-3] Numbering Plan—B/NA DND Call Feature
Programming Manual References
None
Feature Manual References
11.1.3 Message Waiting
Document Version 2010-11 PC Programming Manual 311
4.10 [2-6-3] Numbering Plan—B/NA DND Call Feature
Call Monitor
Specifies the feature number used to listen to a busy extension’s conversation.
Default
5
Value Range
1 digit (0–9, *, or #)
Maintenance Console Location
4.10 [2-6-3] Numbering Plan—B/NA DND Call Feature
Programming Manual References
4.11 [2-7-1] Class of Service—COS Settings—Extension Feature— Call Monitor
6.1 [4-1-1] Wired Extension—Extension Settings—Option 3— Executive Override Deny
6.10 [4-2-1] Portable Station—Extension Settings—Option 3— Executive Override Deny
Feature Manual References
3.1.4 Call Monitor
Automatic Callback Busy
Specifies the feature number used to reserve a busy line and receive callback ringing when the line becomes
idle.
Default
6
Value Range
1 digit (0–9, *, or #)
Maintenance Console Location
4.10 [2-6-3] Numbering Plan—B/NA DND Call Feature
Programming Manual References
None
Feature Manual References
1.1.4 Automatic Callback Busy (Camp-on)
BSS / OHCA / Whisper OHCA / DND Override-2
Specifies the feature number used to notify a busy extension of a second call by Call Waiting, or call an
extension in DND mode. This is the same setting as BSS / OHCA / Whisper OHCA / DND Override on
this screen, and can be used to provide two methods of activating the specified features. This can be useful,
for example, if users prefer to use a separate feature number to activate DND Override.
312 PC Programming Manual Document Version 2010-11
4.10 [2-6-3] Numbering Plan—B/NA DND Call Feature
Default
2
Value Range
1 digit (0–9, *, or #)
Maintenance Console Location
4.10 [2-6-3] Numbering Plan—B/NA DND Call Feature
Programming Manual References
6.1 [4-1-1] Wired Extension—Extension Settings—Option 2— Manual C. Waiting for Extension Call
6.10 [4-2-1] Portable Station—Extension Settings—Option 2— Manual C. Waiting for Extension Call
Feature Manual References
3.1.9 CALL WAITING FEATURES
3.1.10 Call Waiting Tone
4.1.9 DND (Do Not Disturb)
12.1.3 OHCA (Off-hook Call Announcement)
20.1.3 Whisper OHCA
Document Version 2010-11 PC Programming Manual 313
4.10 [2-6-3] Numbering Plan—B/NA DND Call Feature
4.11 [2-7-1] Class of Service—COS Settings
Each extension, doorphone port, incoming call distribution group, and trunk group is assigned a Class of
Service (COS). Certain features can be programmed to behave differently depending on the COS. A maximum
of 64 COS levels can be programmed.
TRS
Restrictions to features related to making CO line calls can be programmed for each COS.
COS Name
Specifies the name of the COS.
Default
Not stored.
Value Range
Max. 20 characters
Maintenance Console Location
4.11 [2-7-1] Class of Service—COS Settings
Programming Manual References
None
Feature Manual References
3.1.20 COS (Class of Service)
TRS Level—Day, Lunch, Break, Night
Specifies the Toll Restriction (TRS) level for making CO line calls in each time mode.
Default
COS No.1: 1
COS No.2: 2
COS No.3: 3
COS No.4: 4
COS No.5: 5
COS No.6: 6
COS No.7: 7
COS No.8–64: 1
Value Range
1: Allows all CO line calls
2–6: Restricts CO line calls according to the combination of the Denied and Exception Code Tables
7: Restricts all CO line calls
314 PC Programming Manual Document Version 2010-11
4.11 [2-7-1] Class of Service—COS Settings
Maintenance Console Location
4.11 [2-7-1] Class of Service—COS Settings
Programming Manual References
4.5 [2-4] Week Table
5.1 [3-1-1] Trunk Group—TRG Settings—Main— COS
5.12 [3-5-1] Incoming Call Distribution Group—Group Settings—Main— COS
6.1 [4-1-1] Wired Extension—Extension Settings—Main— COS
6.10 [4-2-1] Portable Station—Extension Settings—Main— COS
7.1 [5-1] Doorphone— COS
9.1 [7-1] Denied Code
9.2 [7-2] Exception Code
Feature Manual References
17.1.6 TRS (Toll Restriction)
TRS Level on Extension Lock
Specifies the TRS level for making CO line calls when an extension is locked using the Extension Dial Lock
feature.
Default
7
Value Range
1: Allows all CO line calls
2–6: Restricts CO line calls according to the combination of the Denied and Exception Code Tables
7: Restricts all CO line calls
Maintenance Console Location
4.11 [2-7-1] Class of Service—COS Settings
Programming Manual References
6.1 [4-1-1] Wired Extension—Extension Settings—Main— COS
6.10 [4-2-1] Portable Station—Extension Settings—Main— COS
9.1 [7-1] Denied Code
9.2 [7-2] Exception Code
Feature Manual References
5.1.4 Extension Dial Lock
TRS Level for System Speed Dialing
Specifies the TRS level for making a CO line call using System Speed Dialing numbers, which overrides the
TRS set for the current time mode.
Document Version 2010-11 PC Programming Manual 315
4.11 [2-7-1] Class of Service—COS Settings
Default
1
Value Range
1: Allows all CO line calls
2–6: Restricts CO line calls according to the combination of the Denied and Exception Code Tables
7: Restricts all CO line calls
Maintenance Console Location
4.11 [2-7-1] Class of Service—COS Settings
Programming Manual References
6.1 [4-1-1] Wired Extension—Extension Settings—Main— COS
6.10 [4-2-1] Portable Station—Extension Settings—Main— COS
8.1 [6-1] System Speed Dial
9.5 [7-5] Miscellaneous—TRS Override by System Speed Dialing
Feature Manual References
16.1.4 Speed Dialing, System
17.1.6 TRS (Toll Restriction)
CO & SMDR
COS Name
Specifies the name of the COS.
Default
Not stored.
Value Range
Max. 20 characters
Maintenance Console Location
4.11 [2-7-1] Class of Service—COS Settings
Programming Manual References
None
Feature Manual References
3.1.20 COS (Class of Service)
Extension-CO Line Call Duration Limit
Enables the extension-to-CO line call duration feature. The maximum call duration can be set using
Extension-CO Duration Time (*60s) on 5.1 [3-1-1] Trunk Group—TRG Settings.
316 PC Programming Manual Document Version 2010-11
4.11 [2-7-1] Class of Service—COS Settings
Default
Disable
Value Range
Disable, Enable
Maintenance Console Location
4.11 [2-7-1] Class of Service—COS Settings
Programming Manual References
4.17 [2-9] System Options—Option 2— Extension - CO Call Limitation—For Incoming Call
5.1 [3-1-1] Trunk Group—TRG Settings—Main— COS
6.1 [4-1-1] Wired Extension—Extension Settings—Main— COS
6.10 [4-2-1] Portable Station—Extension Settings—Main— COS
Feature Manual References
3.1.15 CO Line Call Limitation
Transfer to CO
Enables the transferring of calls to CO lines.
Default
Enable
Value Range
Disable, Enable
Maintenance Console Location
4.11 [2-7-1] Class of Service—COS Settings
Programming Manual References
6.1 [4-1-1] Wired Extension—Extension Settings—Main— COS
6.10 [4-2-1] Portable Station—Extension Settings—Main— COS
Feature Manual References
3.1.8 Call Transfer
Call Forward to CO
Enables the forwarding of calls to CO lines.
Default
Disable
Document Version 2010-11 PC Programming Manual 317
4.11 [2-7-1] Class of Service—COS Settings
Value Range
Disable, Enable
Maintenance Console Location
4.11 [2-7-1] Class of Service—COS Settings
Programming Manual References
6.1 [4-1-1] Wired Extension—Extension Settings—Main— COS
6.3 [4-1-2] Wired Extension—FWD/DND
6.10 [4-2-1] Portable Station—Extension Settings—Main— COS
6.12 [4-2-2] Portable Station—FWD/DND
Feature Manual References
6.1.6 FWD (Call Forwarding)
Account Code Mode
Specifies whether the entry of an account code is optional or mandatory when making a CO line call.
Default
Option
Value Range
Option, Forced
Maintenance Console Location
4.11 [2-7-1] Class of Service—COS Settings
Programming Manual References
6.1 [4-1-1] Wired Extension—Extension Settings—Main— COS
6.10 [4-2-1] Portable Station—Extension Settings—Main— COS
Feature Manual References
1.1.2 Account Code Entry
Outgoing CO Call Printout (SMDR)
Enables the automatic recording of information about outgoing CO line calls on SMDR.
Default
Enable
Value Range
Disable, Enable
318 PC Programming Manual Document Version 2010-11
4.11 [2-7-1] Class of Service—COS Settings
Maintenance Console Location
4.11 [2-7-1] Class of Service—COS Settings
Programming Manual References
6.1 [4-1-1] Wired Extension—Extension Settings—Main— COS
6.10 [4-2-1] Portable Station—Extension Settings—Main— COS
13.1 [11-1] Main
Feature Manual References
16.1.1 SMDR (Station Message Detail Recording)
Extension Feature
The use of features related to extension operations can be programmed for each COS.
COS Name
Specifies the name of the COS.
Default
Not stored.
Value Range
Max. 20 characters
Maintenance Console Location
4.11 [2-7-1] Class of Service—COS Settings
Programming Manual References
None
Feature Manual References
3.1.20 COS (Class of Service)
Executive Busy Override
Enables interrupting an existing call to establish a three-party conference call.
Default
Disable
Value Range
Disable, Enable
Document Version 2010-11 PC Programming Manual 319
4.11 [2-7-1] Class of Service—COS Settings
Maintenance Console Location
4.11 [2-7-1] Class of Service—COS Settings
Programming Manual References
6.1 [4-1-1] Wired Extension—Extension Settings—Main— COS
6.10 [4-2-1] Portable Station—Extension Settings—Main— COS
Feature Manual References
5.1.3 Executive Busy Override
DND Override
Enables making a call to an extension in DND mode by entering the feature number.
Default
Disable
Value Range
Disable, Enable
Maintenance Console Location
4.11 [2-7-1] Class of Service—COS Settings
Programming Manual References
6.1 [4-1-1] Wired Extension—Extension Settings—Main— COS
6.3 [4-1-2] Wired Extension—FWD/DND
6.10 [4-2-1] Portable Station—Extension Settings—Main— COS
6.12 [4-2-2] Portable Station—FWD/DND
Feature Manual References
4.1.9 DND (Do Not Disturb)
OHCA / Whisper OHCA
Enables using OHCA/Whisper OHCA as a method of second call notification by entering the feature number.
Default
Enable
Value Range
Disable, Enable
Maintenance Console Location
4.11 [2-7-1] Class of Service—COS Settings
320 PC Programming Manual Document Version 2010-11
4.11 [2-7-1] Class of Service—COS Settings
Programming Manual References
6.1 [4-1-1] Wired Extension—Extension Settings—Main— COS
6.10 [4-2-1] Portable Station—Extension Settings—Main— COS
Feature Manual References
12.1.3 OHCA (Off-hook Call Announcement)
20.1.3 Whisper OHCA
Call Monitor
Enables listening to a busy extension’s conversation.
Default
Disable
Value Range
Disable, Enable
Maintenance Console Location
4.11 [2-7-1] Class of Service—COS Settings
Programming Manual References
6.1 [4-1-1] Wired Extension—Extension Settings—Main— COS
6.10 [4-2-1] Portable Station—Extension Settings—Main— COS
Feature Manual References
3.1.4 Call Monitor
Call Pickup by DSS
Enables using a DSS button to pick up a call to a specified extension.
Default
Enable
Value Range
Disable, Enable
Maintenance Console Location
4.11 [2-7-1] Class of Service—COS Settings
Programming Manual References
6.1 [4-1-1] Wired Extension—Extension Settings—Main— COS
6.5 [4-1-4] Wired Extension—Flexible Button
6.10 [4-2-1] Portable Station—Extension Settings—Main— COS
6.13 [4-2-3] Portable Station—Flexible Button
Document Version 2010-11 PC Programming Manual 321
4.11 [2-7-1] Class of Service—COS Settings
6.18 [4-3] DSS Console
Feature Manual References
3.1.6 Call Pickup
Programming & Manager
COS Name
Specifies the name of the COS.
Default
Not stored.
Value Range
Max. 20 characters
Maintenance Console Location
4.11 [2-7-1] Class of Service—COS Settings
Programming Manual References
None
Feature Manual References
3.1.20 COS (Class of Service)
Executive Busy Override Deny
Enables preventing other extensions from interrupting calls.
Default
Disable
Value Range
Disable, Enable
Maintenance Console Location
4.11 [2-7-1] Class of Service—COS Settings
Programming Manual References
6.1 [4-1-1] Wired Extension—Extension Settings—Main— COS
6.10 [4-2-1] Portable Station—Extension Settings—Main— COS
Feature Manual References
3.1.20 COS (Class of Service)
322 PC Programming Manual Document Version 2010-11
4.11 [2-7-1] Class of Service—COS Settings
Group Forward Set
Enables setting call forwarding for calls to an incoming call distribution group.
Default
Enable-Group
Value Range
Disable: An extension cannot set call forwarding for any group.
Enable-All: An extension can set call forwarding for all groups.
Enable-Group: An extension can only set call forwarding for the group to which the extension belongs.
Maintenance Console Location
4.11 [2-7-1] Class of Service—COS Settings
Programming Manual References
5.13 [3-5-1] Incoming Call Distribution Group—Group Settings—Member List
6.1 [4-1-1] Wired Extension—Extension Settings—Main— COS
6.10 [4-2-1] Portable Station—Extension Settings—Main— COS
Feature Manual References
6.1.6 FWD (Call Forwarding)
Programming Mode Level
Specifies the level of authorization for performing PT programming.
Default
PROG Only
Value Range
Disable: A PT user cannot perform any programming.
PROG Only: A PT user can perform only personal programming.
PROG and PROG **/*#: A PT user can perform both personal and system programming.
Maintenance Console Location
4.11 [2-7-1] Class of Service—COS Settings
Programming Manual References
6.1 [4-1-1] Wired Extension—Extension Settings—Main— COS
6.10 [4-2-1] Portable Station—Extension Settings—Main— COS
Feature Manual References
13.1.29 PT Programming
Document Version 2010-11 PC Programming Manual 323
4.11 [2-7-1] Class of Service—COS Settings
Manager
Specifies the authorization to use manager features.
Default
Disable
Value Range
Disable, Enable
Maintenance Console Location
4.11 [2-7-1] Class of Service—COS Settings
Programming Manual References
6.1 [4-1-1] Wired Extension—Extension Settings—Main— COS
6.10 [4-2-1] Portable Station—Extension Settings—Main— COS
Feature Manual References
11.1.1 Manager Features
Time Service Switch
Enables manual switching of time modes.
Default
Disable
Value Range
Disable, Enable
Maintenance Console Location
4.11 [2-7-1] Class of Service—COS Settings
Programming Manual References
4.5 [2-4] Week Table
6.1 [4-1-1] Wired Extension—Extension Settings—Main— COS
6.10 [4-2-1] Portable Station—Extension Settings—Main— COS
Feature Manual References
17.1.5 Time Service
PDN/SDN (KX-TDA100/KX-TDA200/KX-TDA600 only)
An SDN button allows a PT user to see the current status of the corresponding PDN extension, and to pick up
or transfer calls to that extension easily. The settings here control how SDN buttons operate for extensions at
each COS level.
324 PC Programming Manual Document Version 2010-11
4.11 [2-7-1] Class of Service—COS Settings
COS Name
Specifies the name of the COS.
Default
Not stored.
Value Range
Max. 20 characters
Maintenance Console Location
4.11 [2-7-1] Class of Service—COS Settings
Programming Manual References
None
Feature Manual References
3.1.20 COS (Class of Service)
SDN Key Mode
Selects what happens when an extension user presses an SDN button while on hook.
Default
Enhanced DSS
Value Range
Enhanced DSS: The registered (owner) extension is called.
Standard SDN: A dial tone is heard.
Maintenance Console Location
4.11 [2-7-1] Class of Service—COS Settings
Programming Manual References
None
Feature Manual References
13.1.7 PDN (Primary Directory Number)/SDN (Secondary Directory Number) Extension
Making call by COS of SDN key’s owner
Selects whether an extension that uses an SDN button to make calls is given the COS of the SDN button’s
registered (owner) extension.
This setting is only available when SDN Key Mode above is set to "Standard SDN".
Default
Disable
Document Version 2010-11 PC Programming Manual 325
4.11 [2-7-1] Class of Service—COS Settings
Value Range
Disable, Enable
Maintenance Console Location
4.11 [2-7-1] Class of Service—COS Settings
Programming Manual References
4.11 [2-7-1] Class of Service—COS Settings—PDN/SDN (KX-TDA100/KX-TDA200/KX-TDA600 only)—
COS Name
Feature Manual References
13.1.7 PDN (Primary Directory Number)/SDN (Secondary Directory Number) Extension
SDN Key Assignment by PT Program
Selects whether PT users can create SDN buttons on their own extensions using PT programming.
Default
Enable
Value Range
Disable, Enable
Maintenance Console Location
4.11 [2-7-1] Class of Service—COS Settings
Programming Manual References
None
Feature Manual References
13.1.7 PDN (Primary Directory Number)/SDN (Secondary Directory Number) Extension
Optional Device & Other Extensions
COS Name
Specifies the name of the COS.
Default
Not stored.
Value Range
Max. 20 characters
326 PC Programming Manual Document Version 2010-11
4.11 [2-7-1] Class of Service—COS Settings
Maintenance Console Location
4.11 [2-7-1] Class of Service—COS Settings
Programming Manual References
None
Feature Manual References
3.1.20 COS (Class of Service)
Door Unlock
Enables using the door opener feature.
Default
Enable
Value Range
Disable, Enable
Maintenance Console Location
4.11 [2-7-1] Class of Service—COS Settings
Programming Manual References
6.1 [4-1-1] Wired Extension—Extension Settings—Main— COS
6.10 [4-2-1] Portable Station—Extension Settings—Main— COS
Feature Manual References
4.1.10 Door Open
External Relay Access
Enables access to external relays.
Default
Enable
Value Range
Disable, Enable
Maintenance Console Location
4.11 [2-7-1] Class of Service—COS Settings
Programming Manual References
7.6 [5-4] External Relay
Document Version 2010-11 PC Programming Manual 327
4.11 [2-7-1] Class of Service—COS Settings
Feature Manual References
5.1.8 External Relay
Accept the Call from DISA
Enables reception of calls from DISA.
Default
Enable
Value Range
Disable, Enable
Maintenance Console Location
4.11 [2-7-1] Class of Service—COS Settings
Programming Manual References
6.1 [4-1-1] Wired Extension—Extension Settings—Main— COS
6.10 [4-2-1] Portable Station—Extension Settings—Main— COS
7.4 [5-3-2] Voice Message—DISA Message
Feature Manual References
4.1.7 DISA (Direct Inward System Access)
Remote Operation by Other Extension
Allows the Walking COS feature to be used from a remote location (inside the PBX, or outside the PBX using
DISA).
Default
Allow
Value Range
Allow, Deny
Maintenance Console Location
4.11 [2-7-1] Class of Service—COS Settings
Programming Manual References
6.1 [4-1-1] Wired Extension—Extension Settings—Main— COS
6.10 [4-2-1] Portable Station—Extension Settings—Main— COS
Feature Manual References
20.1.1 Walking COS
328 PC Programming Manual Document Version 2010-11
4.11 [2-7-1] Class of Service—COS Settings
Accept Wireless XDP Parallel Mode Set by PS
Allows Wireless XDP Parallel Mode to be set by a PS.
Default
Allow
Value Range
Allow, Deny
Maintenance Console Location
4.11 [2-7-1] Class of Service—COS Settings
Programming Manual References
6.1 [4-1-1] Wired Extension—Extension Settings—Main— COS
Feature Manual References
20.1.4 Wireless XDP Parallel Mode
Miscellaneous (KX-TDA50 only)
COS Name
Specifies the name of the COS.
Default
Not stored.
Value Range
Max. 20 characters
Maintenance Console Location
4.11 [2-7-1] Class of Service—COS Settings
Programming Manual References
None
Feature Manual References
3.1.20 COS (Class of Service)
Conference Group Call Operation
Enables making conference group calls.
Default
Disable
Document Version 2010-11 PC Programming Manual 329
4.11 [2-7-1] Class of Service—COS Settings
Value Range
Disable, Enable
Maintenance Console Location
4.11 [2-7-1] Class of Service—COS Settings
Programming Manual References
4.4 [2-3] Timers & Counters—Miscellaneous—Conference Group Call—Ring Duration (KX-TDA50 only)
4.8 [2-6-1] Numbering Plan—Main—Features— Conference Group Call Operation (KX-TDA50 only)
5.26 [3-10] Conference Group (KX-TDA50 only)
Feature Manual References
3.1.17 Conference Group Call (KX-TDA50 only)
330 PC Programming Manual Document Version 2010-11
4.11 [2-7-1] Class of Service—COS Settings
4.12 [2-7-2] Class of Service—External Call Block
Each COS can have different trunk groups available for making CO line calls, depending on the time mode
(day/lunch/break/night). Select the desired time mode from the list.
Outgoing Trunk Group 1–64 (KX-TDA50/KX-TDA100/KX-TDA200) or 1–96
(KX-TDA600)
Specifies the available trunk groups.
Default
All Trunk groups: Non Block
Value Range
Block (blue), Non Block
Maintenance Console Location
4.12 [2-7-2] Class of Service—External Call Block
Programming Manual References
4.5 [2-4] Week Table
6.1 [4-1-1] Wired Extension—Extension Settings
6.10 [4-2-1] Portable Station—Extension Settings
12.1 [10-1] CO Line Settings
Feature Manual References
3.1.14 CO Line Access
Document Version 2010-11 PC Programming Manual 331
4.12 [2-7-2] Class of Service—External Call Block
4.13 [2-7-3] Class of Service—Internal Call Block
Internal Call Block determines the restrictions placed on making intercom calls. The extensions, incoming call
distribution groups, and doorphones belonging to a certain COS can be programmed to not receive intercom
calls from those belonging to a certain COS.
COS Number of the Extension Which Receive the Call from Other Extension 1–
64
Specifies the combinations of COS levels for which intercom calls are blocked.
Default
All extensions: Non Block
Value Range
Block (blue), Non Block
Maintenance Console Location
4.13 [2-7-3] Class of Service—Internal Call Block
Programming Manual References
5.12 [3-5-1] Incoming Call Distribution Group—Group Settings—Main— COS
6.1 [4-1-1] Wired Extension—Extension Settings—Main— COS
6.10 [4-2-1] Portable Station—Extension Settings—Main— COS
7.1 [5-1] Doorphone— COS
Feature Manual References
9.1.14 Internal Call Block
332 PC Programming Manual Document Version 2010-11
4.13 [2-7-3] Class of Service—Internal Call Block
4.14 [2-8-1] Ring Tone Patterns—Call from CO
Different ring tone patterns can be selected for incoming CO line calls depending on the trunk group that the
calls are received on. A maximum of 8 Ring Tone Pattern Tables can be programmed, and any pattern table
can be selected for use by an extension.
Ring Tone Pattern Plan 1–8
Specifies the ring tone pattern for incoming CO line calls.
Default
Single
Value Range
Single, Double, Triple
Maintenance Console Location
4.14 [2-8-1] Ring Tone Patterns—Call from CO
Programming Manual References
12.1 [10-1] CO Line Settings— Trunk Group Number
6.1 [4-1-1] Wired Extension—Extension Settings—Option 1— Ring Pattern Table
6.10 [4-2-1] Portable Station—Extension Settings—Option 1— Ring Pattern Table
Feature Manual References
15.1.2 Ring Tone Pattern Selection
Document Version 2010-11 PC Programming Manual 333
4.14 [2-8-1] Ring Tone Patterns—Call from CO
4.15 [2-8-2] Ring Tone Patterns—Call from
Doorphone
Different ring tone patterns can be selected for incoming doorphone calls depending on the doorphone port
that the calls originate from. A maximum of 8 Ring Tone Pattern Tables can be programmed, and any pattern
table can be selected for use by an extension.
Ring Tone Pattern Plan 1–8
Specifies the ring tone pattern for incoming doorphone calls.
Default
Triple
Value Range
Single, Double, Triple, S-Double
Maintenance Console Location
4.15 [2-8-2] Ring Tone Patterns—Call from Doorphone
Programming Manual References
6.1 [4-1-1] Wired Extension—Extension Settings—Option 1— Ring Pattern Table
6.10 [4-2-1] Portable Station—Extension Settings—Option 1— Ring Pattern Table
7.1 [5-1] Doorphone
Feature Manual References
15.1.2 Ring Tone Pattern Selection
4.1.11 Doorphone Call
334 PC Programming Manual Document Version 2010-11
4.15 [2-8-2] Ring Tone Patterns—Call from Doorphone
4.16 [2-8-3] Ring Tone Patterns—Call from Others
Different ring tone patterns can be selected for incoming intercom calls and ringing triggered by certain PBX
features (Timed Reminder, Call Back, and Live Call Screening). A maximum of 8 Ring Tone Pattern Tables
can be programmed, and any pattern table can be selected for use by an extension.
For more information on ring tone patterns, see "15.1.2 Ring Tone Pattern Selection" in the Feature Manual.
Extension—Ring Tone Pattern Plan 1–8
Specifies the ring tone pattern for incoming intercom calls.
Default
Double
Value Range
Single, Double, Triple
Maintenance Console Location
4.16 [2-8-3] Ring Tone Patterns—Call from Others
Programming Manual References
6.1 [4-1-1] Wired Extension—Extension Settings—Option 1— Ring Pattern Table
6.10 [4-2-1] Portable Station—Extension Settings—Option 1— Ring Pattern Table
Feature Manual References
None
Timed Reminder—Ring Tone Pattern Plan 1–8
Specifies the ring tone pattern for Timed Reminder alarms.
Default
Triple
Value Range
Single, Double, Triple
Maintenance Console Location
4.16 [2-8-3] Ring Tone Patterns—Call from Others
Programming Manual References
6.1 [4-1-1] Wired Extension—Extension Settings—Option 1— Ring Pattern Table
6.10 [4-2-1] Portable Station—Extension Settings—Option 1— Ring Pattern Table
Feature Manual References
None
Document Version 2010-11 PC Programming Manual 335
4.16 [2-8-3] Ring Tone Patterns—Call from Others
Call Back—Ring Tone Pattern Plan 1–8
Specifies the ring tone pattern for callback ringing by Automatic Callback Busy.
Default
S-Double
Value Range
Single, Double, Triple, S-Double
Maintenance Console Location
4.16 [2-8-3] Ring Tone Patterns—Call from Others
Programming Manual References
6.1 [4-1-1] Wired Extension—Extension Settings—Option 1— Ring Pattern Table
6.10 [4-2-1] Portable Station—Extension Settings—Option 1— Ring Pattern Table
Feature Manual References
None
Live Call Screening—Ring Tone Pattern Plan 1–8
Specifies the ring tone pattern for LCS warning tones.
Default
Triple
Value Range
Single, Double, Triple
Maintenance Console Location
4.16 [2-8-3] Ring Tone Patterns—Call from Others
Programming Manual References
6.1 [4-1-1] Wired Extension—Extension Settings—Option 1— Ring Pattern Table
6.10 [4-2-1] Portable Station—Extension Settings—Option 1— Ring Pattern Table
Feature Manual References
None
External Sensor—Ring Tone Pattern Plan 1–8
Specifies the ring tone pattern for calls from an external sensor.
Default
Triple
336 PC Programming Manual Document Version 2010-11
4.16 [2-8-3] Ring Tone Patterns—Call from Others
Value Range
Single, Double, Triple
Maintenance Console Location
4.16 [2-8-3] Ring Tone Patterns—Call from Others
Programming Manual References
6.1 [4-1-1] Wired Extension—Extension Settings—Option 1— Ring Pattern Table
6.10 [4-2-1] Portable Station—Extension Settings—Option 1— Ring Pattern Table
Feature Manual References
None
Document Version 2010-11 PC Programming Manual 337
4.16 [2-8-3] Ring Tone Patterns—Call from Others
4.17 [2-9] System Options
Various system settings can be programmed.
Option 1
PT LCD—Date Display
Selects the order that the month and date are shown on the displays of extensions.
Default
Month-Date
Value Range
Date-Month, Month-Date
Maintenance Console Location
4.17 [2-9] System Options
Programming Manual References
None
Feature Manual References
None
PT LCD—Time Display
Selects the time format shown on the displays of extensions. The time display format assigned here applies
when setting the Timed Reminder feature.
Default
12H
Value Range
12H, 24H
Maintenance Console Location
4.17 [2-9] System Options
Programming Manual References
None
Feature Manual References
17.1.4 Timed Reminder
338 PC Programming Manual Document Version 2010-11
4.17 [2-9] System Options
PT LCD—Password / PIN Display
Selects whether passwords and PINs (Personal Identification Number) are hidden or shown on the displays
of extensions while being entered.
Default
Hide
Value Range
Hide, Display
Maintenance Console Location
4.17 [2-9] System Options
Programming Manual References
None
Feature Manual References
5.1.6 Extension PIN (Personal Identification Number)
PT Fwd / DND—Fwd LED
Selects the light pattern of the FWD/DND button while the FWD feature is activated.
Default
Flash
Value Range
On (Solid): Red on
Flash: Slow red flashing
Maintenance Console Location
4.17 [2-9] System Options
Programming Manual References
6.3 [4-1-2] Wired Extension—FWD/DND
6.12 [4-2-2] Portable Station—FWD/DND
Feature Manual References
6.1.7 FWD/DND Button, Group FWD Button
10.1.1 LED Indication
PT Fwd / DND—DND LED
Selects the light pattern of the FWD/DND button while the DND feature is activated.
Document Version 2010-11 PC Programming Manual 339
4.17 [2-9] System Options
Default
On (Solid)
Value Range
On (Solid): Red on
Flash: Slow red flashing
Maintenance Console Location
4.17 [2-9] System Options
Programming Manual References
6.3 [4-1-2] Wired Extension—FWD/DND
6.12 [4-2-2] Portable Station—FWD/DND
Feature Manual References
6.1.7 FWD/DND Button, Group FWD Button
10.1.1 LED Indication
PT Fwd / DND—Fwd/DND key mode when Idle
Selects the function of the FWD/DND button (fixed button) when it is pressed in idle status. (A FWD/DND button
customized on a flexible button is always in FWD/DND Cycle Switch mode, and the mode cannot be changed.)
Default
FWD/DND Setting Mode
Value Range
FWD/DND Setting Mode: Enter programming mode for the FWD/DND setting.
FWD/DND Cycle Switch Mode: Switch the FWD on/DND on/Off mode instead of entering the programming
mode for the FWD/DND setting. (When there are separate FWD/DND settings for calls from CO lines and calls
from extensions, mode switching cannot be performed.)
Maintenance Console Location
4.17 [2-9] System Options
Programming Manual References
6.3 [4-1-2] Wired Extension—FWD/DND
6.12 [4-2-2] Portable Station—FWD/DND
Feature Manual References
6.1.7 FWD/DND Button, Group FWD Button
PT Fwd / DND—Paging to DND Extension
Specifies whether extensions can receive paging when in DND mode.
340 PC Programming Manual Document Version 2010-11
4.17 [2-9] System Options
Default
Do Not Page
Value Range
Do Not Page, Page
Maintenance Console Location
4.17 [2-9] System Options
Programming Manual References
6.3 [4-1-2] Wired Extension—FWD/DND
6.12 [4-2-2] Portable Station—FWD/DND
5.9 [3-4] Paging Group
Feature Manual References
13.1.1 Paging
PT Operation—Off Hook Monitor for KX-T74xx/T76xx
Enables the use of Off-Hook Monitor with KX-T7400, KX-T7600, or KX-DT300 series telephones and IP-PTs.
Default
Enable
Value Range
Disable: The PT user’s voice is sent through the handsfree microphone. The other party’s voice is heard
through the hands-free speaker.
Enable: The PT user’s voice is sent through the handset microphone. The other party’s voice is heard through
both the hands-free speaker and the handset.
Maintenance Console Location
4.17 [2-9] System Options
Programming Manual References
None
Feature Manual References
12.1.1 Off-hook Monitor
PT Operation—Privacy Release by SCO key
Selects the function of the S-CO button during a CO line call.
Default
Enable
Document Version 2010-11 PC Programming Manual 341
4.17 [2-9] System Options
Value Range
Enable: Pressing the S-CO button activates the Privacy Release feature
Disable: Pressing the S-CO button switches the information shown on the PT display.
Maintenance Console Location
4.17 [2-9] System Options
Programming Manual References
None
Feature Manual References
13.1.12 Privacy Release
PT Operation—One-touch Busy Override by SCO key (KX-TDA50 only)
Specifies whether calls in progress can be joined (Executive Busy Override) simply by pressing the S-CO
button.
Default
Enable
Value Range
Enable, Disable
Maintenance Console Location
4.17 [2-9] System Options
Programming Manual References
None
Feature Manual References
5.1.3 Executive Busy Override
PT Operation—JOG Dial Speed
Selects the speed at which items scroll on the display when the Jog Dial is used.
Default
Normal
Value Range
Normal, High Speed
342 PC Programming Manual Document Version 2010-11
4.17 [2-9] System Options
Maintenance Console Location
4.17 [2-9] System Options
Programming Manual References
None
Feature Manual References
None
PT Operation—PT Ring Off Setting
Specifies whether incoming call ringing can be turned off at individual extensions. If disabled, users cannot
prevent incoming calls from ringing.
Default
Enable
Value Range
Disable, Enable
Maintenance Console Location
4.17 [2-9] System Options
Programming Manual References
None
Feature Manual References
15.1.2 Ring Tone Pattern Selection
PT Operation—Automatic Answer for Call from CO after
Specifies the number of times a PT in Hands-free Answerback mode will ring before a conversation is
established automatically when it receives a call from a CO line.
Default
1 Ring
Value Range
No Ring, 1 Ring, 2 Rings, 3 Rings
Maintenance Console Location
4.17 [2-9] System Options
Programming Manual References
None
Document Version 2010-11 PC Programming Manual 343
4.17 [2-9] System Options
Feature Manual References
8.1.1 Hands-free Answerback
PT Operation—Automatic Hold by ICM / CO / ICD Group key
Selects whether calls are disconnected or held when an INTERCOM, PDN, CO, or ICD Group button is pressed
while having a conversation.
Default
Disconnect
Value Range
Disable (Disconnect), Enable
Maintenance Console Location
4.17 [2-9] System Options
Programming Manual References
6.5 [4-1-4] Wired Extension—Flexible Button
6.13 [4-2-3] Portable Station—Flexible Button
Feature Manual References
3.1.2 Call Hold
PT Operation—Hold Key Mode
Selects which extensions can retrieve a held call or a call that is transferred by Call Transfer without
Announcement feature.
Default
Hold
Value Range
Hold: Any extension can retrieve a held call.
Exclusive Hold: Only the holding extension can retrieve a held call.
Maintenance Console Location
4.17 [2-9] System Options
Programming Manual References
None
Feature Manual References
3.1.2 Call Hold
344 PC Programming Manual Document Version 2010-11
4.17 [2-9] System Options
Option 2
Extension Clear—Call Waiting
Specifies whether the Call Waiting setting is cleared when Extension Feature Clear is performed.
Default
Clear
Value Range
Clear, Do not clear
Maintenance Console Location
4.17 [2-9] System Options
Programming Manual References
None
Feature Manual References
5.1.5 Extension Feature Clear
Extension Clear—Fwd/DND
Specifies whether the FWD/DND setting is cleared when Extension Feature Clear is performed.
Default
Clear
Value Range
Clear, Do not clear
Maintenance Console Location
4.17 [2-9] System Options
Programming Manual References
None
Feature Manual References
5.1.5 Extension Feature Clear
Extension Clear—Hot Line (Pickup Dial)
Specifies whether the Hot Line setting is cleared when Extension Feature Clear is performed.
Default
Clear
Document Version 2010-11 PC Programming Manual 345
4.17 [2-9] System Options
Value Range
Clear, Do not clear
Maintenance Console Location
4.17 [2-9] System Options
Programming Manual References
None
Feature Manual References
5.1.5 Extension Feature Clear
CODEC—System CODEC
Selects the codec type for DPTs and PSs.
Default
µ-Law
Value Range
A-Law, µ-Law
Maintenance Console Location
4.17 [2-9] System Options
Programming Manual References
None
Feature Manual References
None
CODEC—Network CODEC (KX-TDA100/KX-TDA200/KX-TDA600 only)
Selects the codec type for ISDN or T1 lines.
Default
µ-Law
Value Range
A-Law, µ-Law
Maintenance Console Location
4.17 [2-9] System Options
346 PC Programming Manual Document Version 2010-11
4.17 [2-9] System Options
Programming Manual References
None
Feature Manual References
None
End of Dial Plan—[#] as End of Dial for en Bloc mode (KX-TDA100/KX-TDA200/
KX-TDA600 only)
Specifies whether to automatically send "#" as an end code when dialing to an ISDN line; if used as the end
code, "#" will not be dialed out as part of a number even when the "#" key is pressed.
Default
Enable
Value Range
Disable, Enable
Maintenance Console Location
4.17 [2-9] System Options
Programming Manual References
3.14 [1-1] Slot—Port Property - PRI Port (KX-TDA100/KX-TDA200/KX-TDA600 only)—CO Setting— ISDN
In/Out Call Type
Feature Manual References
9.1.16 ISDN (INTEGRATED SERVICES DIGITAL NETWORK) FEATURES
Redial—Automatic Redial when No Answer (ISDN) (KX-TDA100/KX-TDA200/
KX-TDA600 only)
Selects whether Automatic Redial to an ISDN line is performed when the called party does not answer within
a preprogrammed time period.
Default
Enable
Value Range
Disable, Enable
Maintenance Console Location
4.17 [2-9] System Options
Document Version 2010-11 PC Programming Manual 347
4.17 [2-9] System Options
Programming Manual References
4.4 [2-3] Timers & Counters— Automatic Redial—Redial Call Ring Duration (KX-TDA100/KX-TDA200/
KX-TDA600 only)
Feature Manual References
15.1.1 Redial, Last Number
Redial—Save Dial After Connection to Redial Memory
Specifies whether any digits dialed after the called party answers (for example, to access a specific extension
within another company) are also saved as part of the redial number.
Default
Enable
Value Range
Disable, Enable
Maintenance Console Location
4.17 [2-9] System Options
Programming Manual References
None
Feature Manual References
15.1.1 Redial, Last Number
Redial—Call Log by Redial key
Enables display of the Outgoing Call Log on a DPT by pressing the REDIAL button while on hook.
Default
Disable
Value Range
Disable, Enable
Maintenance Console Location
4.17 [2-9] System Options
Programming Manual References
None
Feature Manual References
15.1.1 Redial, Last Number
348 PC Programming Manual Document Version 2010-11
4.17 [2-9] System Options
Extension - CO Call Limitation—For Incoming Call
Selects whether the time limit for extension-to-CO line calls applies to outgoing calls only or for both outgoing
and incoming calls. COS determines the use of this feature, and the length of the time limit can be assigned
on a trunk group basis.
Default
Disable
Value Range
Disable, Enable
Maintenance Console Location
4.17 [2-9] System Options
Programming Manual References
4.11 [2-7-1] Class of Service—COS Settings—CO & SMDR— Extension-CO Line Call Duration Limit
5.1 [3-1-1] Trunk Group—TRG Settings—Main— Extension-CO Duration Time (*60s)
Feature Manual References
3.1.15 CO Line Call Limitation
Automatic Time Adjustment—by ISDN & Caller ID (FSK)
Enables the PBX to adjust its clock every day according to the time information that the network provides with
the first call after 3:05 AM.
With the KX-TDA50, this parameter is shown as Automatic Time Adjustment—by Caller ID (FSK).
Default
Enable
Value Range
Disable, Enable
Maintenance Console Location
4.17 [2-9] System Options
Programming Manual References
None
Feature Manual References
1.1.7 Automatic Time Adjustment
Document Version 2010-11 PC Programming Manual 349
4.17 [2-9] System Options
Option 3
Confirmation Tone—Tone 1 : Called by Voice
Enables the PBX to send Confirmation Tone 1. Confirmation Tone 1 is heard from a PT when it receives a call
in voice-calling mode.
Default
Enable
Value Range
Disable, Enable
Maintenance Console Location
4.17 [2-9] System Options
Programming Manual References
None
Feature Manual References
4.1.11 Doorphone Call
3.1.18 Confirmation Tone
Confirmation Tone—Tone 2 : Paged / Automatic Answer
Enables the PBX to send Confirmation Tone 2. Confirmation Tone 2 is heard from a PT when it receives a call
in Hands-free Answerback mode, or paging.
Default
Enable
Value Range
Disable, Enable
Maintenance Console Location
4.17 [2-9] System Options
Programming Manual References
None
Feature Manual References
3.1.18 Confirmation Tone
8.1.1 Hands-free Answerback
13.1.1 Paging
350 PC Programming Manual Document Version 2010-11
4.17 [2-9] System Options
Confirmation Tone—Tone 3-1 : Start Talking after Making Call / Call from
Doorphone
Enables the PBX to send Confirmation Tone 3-1. Confirmation Tone 3-1 is heard from an extension when, for
example, it pages another extension, or from a doorphone when the doorphone button is pressed.
Default
Enable
Value Range
Disable, Enable
Maintenance Console Location
4.17 [2-9] System Options
Programming Manual References
None
Feature Manual References
3.1.18 Confirmation Tone
Confirmation Tone—Tone 3-2 : Start Talking after Answering Call
Enables the PBX to send Confirmation Tone 3-2. Confirmation Tone 3-2 is heard from an extension when
answering a call by, for example, the Call Pickup feature.
Default
Enable
Value Range
Disable, Enable
Maintenance Console Location
4.17 [2-9] System Options
Programming Manual References
None
Feature Manual References
3.1.18 Confirmation Tone
Confirmation Tone—Tone 4-1 : Start Conference
Enables the PBX to send Confirmation Tone 4-1. Confirmation Tone 4-1 is heard from an extension when a
new party joins a conference call.
Document Version 2010-11 PC Programming Manual 351
4.17 [2-9] System Options
Default
Enable
Value Range
Disable, Enable
Maintenance Console Location
4.17 [2-9] System Options
Programming Manual References
None
Feature Manual References
3.1.16 Conference
3.1.18 Confirmation Tone
Confirmation Tone—Tone 4-2 : Finish Conference
Enables the PBX to send Confirmation Tone 4-2. Confirmation Tone 4-2 is heard from an extension when a
party leaves a conference call.
Default
Enable
Value Range
Disable, Enable
Maintenance Console Location
4.17 [2-9] System Options
Programming Manual References
None
Feature Manual References
3.1.16 Conference
3.1.18 Confirmation Tone
Confirmation Tone—Tone 5 : Hold
Enables the PBX to send Confirmation Tone 5. Confirmation Tone 5 is heard from an extension when it holds
a call.
Default
Enable
352 PC Programming Manual Document Version 2010-11
4.17 [2-9] System Options
Value Range
Disable, Enable
Maintenance Console Location
4.17 [2-9] System Options
Programming Manual References
None
Feature Manual References
3.1.18 Confirmation Tone
Dial Tone—Distinctive Dial Tone
Enables the PBX to send dial tones at different frequencies depending on the setting of the extension.
Default
Enable
Value Range
Disable, Enable
Maintenance Console Location
4.17 [2-9] System Options
Programming Manual References
None
Feature Manual References
4.1.3 Dial Tone
Dial Tone—Dial Tone for Extension
Selects the dial tone the PBX sends to extensions to inform about the features activated on them.
Default
Type A
Value Range
Type A, Type B
Maintenance Console Location
4.17 [2-9] System Options
Document Version 2010-11 PC Programming Manual 353
4.17 [2-9] System Options
Programming Manual References
None
Feature Manual References
4.1.3 Dial Tone
Dial Tone—Dial Tone for ARS
Selects the dial tone the PBX (instead of the network) sends to the caller when a call is made using the ARS
feature, or ISDN En Bloc dialing.
Default
Type A
Value Range
Type A, Type B
Maintenance Console Location
4.17 [2-9] System Options
Programming Manual References
3.14 [1-1] Slot—Port Property - PRI Port (KX-TDA100/KX-TDA200/KX-TDA600 only)
10.1 [8-1] System Setting
Feature Manual References
1.1.3 ARS (Automatic Route Selection)
4.1.3 Dial Tone
Echo Cancel—Conference
Enables the use of the ECHO/EECHO card for conference calls.
Default
Enable
Value Range
Disable, Enable
Maintenance Console Location
4.17 [2-9] System Options
Programming Manual References
None
354 PC Programming Manual Document Version 2010-11
4.17 [2-9] System Options
Feature Manual References
3.1.16 Conference
Echo Cancel—CO-to-CO
Enables the use of the ECHO/EECHO card for CO-to-CO line calls.
Default
Enable
Value Range
Disable, Enable
Maintenance Console Location
4.17 [2-9] System Options
Programming Manual References
None
Feature Manual References
None
Echo Cancel—Extension to Analog Line
Enables the use of the ECHO/EECHO card for extension-to-analog CO line calls.
Default
Disable
Value Range
Disable, Enable
Maintenance Console Location
4.17 [2-9] System Options
Programming Manual References
None
Feature Manual References
None
Echo Cancel—Extension to Digital Line
Enables the use of the ECHO/EECHO card for extension-to-ISDN/T1 line calls.
If set to "Enable", the echo canceler card is used for extension-to-ISDN/T1 line calls.
Document Version 2010-11 PC Programming Manual 355
4.17 [2-9] System Options
If set to "Disable", the echo canceler card is not used for extension-to-ISDN/T1 line calls.
Default
Disable
Value Range
Disable, Enable
Maintenance Console Location
4.17 [2-9] System Options
Programming Manual References
None
Feature Manual References
None
Option 4
DSS Key—DSS key mode for Incoming Call
Enables the use of a DSS button to pick up an incoming call to another extension or an ICD group.
Default
OFF
Value Range
ON or Flash, OFF
Maintenance Console Location
4.17 [2-9] System Options
Programming Manual References
None
Feature Manual References
3.1.6 Call Pickup
10.1.1 LED Indication
DSS Key—Call Pick-up by DSS key for Direct Incoming Call
Specifies whether a DSS button will light up or flash when a call rings at the specified extension. To enable
this setting, DSS Key—DSS key mode for Incoming Call on this screen must be set to ON or Flash.
Default
Enable
356 PC Programming Manual Document Version 2010-11
4.17 [2-9] System Options
Value Range
Disable: The DSS button will light up when a call arrives, but pressing it will not pick up the call.
Enable: The DSS button will flash when a call arrives, and pressing it will pick up the call.
Maintenance Console Location
4.17 [2-9] System Options
Programming Manual References
None
Feature Manual References
3.1.6 Call Pickup
DSS Key—Call Pick-up by DSS key for ICD Group Call
Specifies whether a DSS button will light up or flash when a call rings at the specified incoming call distribution
group.
To enable this setting, DSS Key—DSS key mode for Incoming Call on this screen must be set to ON or
Flash.
Default
Disable
Value Range
Disable: The DSS button will light up when a call arrives, but pressing it will not pick up the call.
Enable: The DSS button will flash when a call arrives, and pressing it will pick up the call.
Maintenance Console Location
4.17 [2-9] System Options
Programming Manual References
None
Feature Manual References
3.1.6 Call Pickup
DSS Key—Automatic Transfer for Extension Call
Specifies whether pressing a DSS or SDN button during an extension-to-extension call disconnects the current
call or places the call on consultation hold.
Default
Disable
Document Version 2010-11 PC Programming Manual 357
4.17 [2-9] System Options
Value Range
Disable: The PBX disconnects the current call, and calls the extension assigned to the DSS or SDN button.
Enable: The PBX places the current call on consultation hold.
Maintenance Console Location
4.17 [2-9] System Options
Programming Manual References
None
Feature Manual References
3.1.8 Call Transfer
Transfer—Transfer to Busy Extension without BSS Operation
Enables a transferred call to be queued when the transfer destination is busy.
Default
Disable
Value Range
Disable: The call is not transferred. (If the transfer destination has enabled the call waiting notification feature,
it is possible to inform the destination about the call transfer.)
Enable: The transferred call is queued for the time period specified in Recall—Transfer Recall in 4.4 [2-3]
Timers & Counters.
Maintenance Console Location
4.17 [2-9] System Options
Programming Manual References
4.4 [2-3] Timers & Counters— Recall—Transfer Recall
Feature Manual References
3.1.8 Call Transfer
9.1.6 ICD Group Features—Queuing
Transfer—Automatic Answer for Transferred Call
Enables transferred calls (including direct extension calls) to be automatically answered, when using the
Hands-free Answerback feature.
Default
Disable
358 PC Programming Manual Document Version 2010-11
4.17 [2-9] System Options
Value Range
Disable, Enable
Maintenance Console Location
4.17 [2-9] System Options
Programming Manual References
None
Feature Manual References
8.1.1 Hands-free Answerback
Send CLIP of CO Caller to ISDN—when Transfer (CLIP of Held Party)
Enables the transfer of related CLIP information when a party on hold is transferred. When set to "Enable", the
transfer destination will receive the original caller’s CLIP information, not the information of the extension that
performed the transfer.
Default
Disable
Value Range
Disable, Enable
Maintenance Console Location
4.17 [2-9] System Options
Programming Manual References
None
Feature Manual References
3.1.13 CLIP (Calling Line Identification Presentation)
Send CLIP of CO Caller to ISDN—when ICD Group with Cellular Phone
(KX-TDA100/KX-TDA200/KX-TDA600 only)
Selects whether the CLIP number of the calling party or of the virtual PS is sent to the virtual PS’s forwarding
destination to identify the origin of a CO line call received at an ICD Group containing a virtual PS.
This setting only applies to calls automatically forwarded to public CO lines using the virtual PS feature.
Default
Disable
Value Range
Disable: The CLIP number assigned to the virtual PS is sent.
Document Version 2010-11 PC Programming Manual 359
4.17 [2-9] System Options
Enable: The CLIP number of the calling party is sent.
Maintenance Console Location
4.17 [2-9] System Options
Programming Manual References
None
Feature Manual References
13.1.16 Private Network Features—Network ICD Group
9.1.4 ICD Group Features—Outside Destinations
Private Network—Public Call through Private Network—Minimum Public Caller
ID Digits
Specifies the minimum length of Caller ID required for a call from a private network to be considered as a call
from a public network.
Default
9
Value Range
0–15
Maintenance Console Location
4.17 [2-9] System Options
Programming Manual References
None
Feature Manual References
3.1.1 Caller ID
Private Network—TIE Call by Extension Numbering (Optional SD Card
Required)
Enables extensions at PBXs connected in a network to have the same extension numbering scheme and make
TIE line calls to each other. For example, extension 101 is registered at PBX 1, and extension 102 is registered
at PBX 2. The user of extension 1 dials 102 and the dialed number is not found at the local PBX, so the call is
redirected to the specified TIE Line and connected to extension 102.
If disabled, different leading numbers need to be assigned for extensions at each PBX.
Default
Disable
360 PC Programming Manual Document Version 2010-11
4.17 [2-9] System Options
Value Range
Disable, Enable
Maintenance Console Location
4.17 [2-9] System Options
Programming Manual References
11.1 [9-1] TIE Table— Leading Number
Feature Manual References
13.1.13 PRIVATE NETWORK FEATURES
System Wireless—Out of Range Registration
Selects whether the PBX can set the status of a PS to Out of Range if no signal is received from the PS for a
preset length of time. This feature must be enabled to allow PS roaming.
Default
Disable
Value Range
Disable, Enable
Maintenance Console Location
4.17 [2-9] System Options
Programming Manual References
4.4 [2-3] Timers & Counters— System Wireless—PS Out of Range Timer
Feature Manual References
13.1.17 Private Network Features—PS Roaming by Network ICD Group
System Wireless—SDN Delayed Ringing with LCD (KX-TDA100/KX-TDA200/
KX-TDA600 only)
Selects whether call information (such as Caller ID) is shown on the display of a PDN extension PS (i.e., a PS
with one or more PDN buttons) when a call is received while delayed ringing is set.
Default
Disable
Value Range
Disable, Enable
Document Version 2010-11 PC Programming Manual 361
4.17 [2-9] System Options
Maintenance Console Location
4.17 [2-9] System Options
Programming Manual References
6.13 [4-2-3] Portable Station—Flexible Button— Parameter Selection (for SDN) (KX-TDA100/KX-TDA200/
KX-TDA600 only)
Feature Manual References
13.1.7 PDN (Primary Directory Number)/SDN (Secondary Directory Number) Extension
Option 5
SLT—SLT Hold Mode
Selects how to hold a line and transfer a call with an SLT. For details of each mode, see "3.1.2 Call Hold" in
the Feature Manual.
Default
Mode 2
Value Range
Mode 1, Mode 2, Mode 3, Mode 4
Maintenance Console Location
4.17 [2-9] System Options
Programming Manual References
None
Feature Manual References
3.1.2 Call Hold
SLT—Message Waiting Lamp Pattern (KX-TDA100/KX-TDA200/KX-TDA600
only)
Specifies the Message Waiting Lamp light pattern of SLTs.
Default
11
Value Range
1–12
Maintenance Console Location
4.17 [2-9] System Options
362 PC Programming Manual Document Version 2010-11
4.17 [2-9] System Options
Programming Manual References
None
Feature Manual References
11.1.3 Message Waiting
Whisper OHCA—for SLT / APT / KX-T72xx
Enables the use of Whisper OHCA to SLTs and IP-PTs, and DPTs other than KX-T7400 series, KX-T7600
series, or KX-DT300 series.
Default
Disable
Value Range
Disable, Enable
Maintenance Console Location
4.17 [2-9] System Options
Programming Manual References
None
Feature Manual References
20.1.3 Whisper OHCA
Call Waiting—Automatic Call Waiting for Extension Call
Selects whether Busy Station Signaling (BSS) is automatically performed when an extension user calls a busy
extension.
Default
Disable
Value Range
Disable, Enable
Maintenance Console Location
4.17 [2-9] System Options
Programming Manual References
None
Feature Manual References
3.1.9 CALL WAITING FEATURES
Document Version 2010-11 PC Programming Manual 363
4.17 [2-9] System Options
PT Feature Access—No. 1–8
Specifies the System Feature Access Menu (1–8) shown on the display of an extension.
Default
System Feature Access Menu 1: Call Back Cancel
System Feature Access Menu 2: Call Pickup Direct
System Feature Access Menu 3: Call Pickup Group
System Feature Access Menu 4: Doorphone Call
System Feature Access Menu 5: Door Open
System Feature Access Menu 6: External BGM
System Feature Access Menu 7: Paging
System Feature Access Menu 8: Relay On
Value Range
None, Call Back Cancel, Call Pickup Direct, Call Pickup Group, Doorphone Call, Door Open, Relay On,
External BGM, Paging
Maintenance Console Location
4.17 [2-9] System Options
Programming Manual References
None
Feature Manual References
None
ISDN Option—Fwd from ISDN to ISDN
Specifies whether alert messages are sent to the ISDN network. This setting should be enabled for networks
that disconnect a call if an alert message is not received.
Default
Mode1
Value Range
Mode1: Disable
Mode2: Enable
Maintenance Console Location
4.17 [2-9] System Options
Programming Manual References
None
Feature Manual References
None
364 PC Programming Manual Document Version 2010-11
4.17 [2-9] System Options
Option 6 (CTI)
1st Party CTI—System status retry interval timer
Specifies the length of time until the alive check is retried when no response is received, for First Party Call
Control CTI.
Default
60 s
Value Range
0–60 s
Maintenance Console Location
4.17 [2-9] System Options
Programming Manual References
None
Feature Manual References
3.1.22 CTI (Computer Telephony Integration)
1st Party CTI—System status retry counter
Specifies the number of times that the alive check is repeated for First Party Call Control CTI. When the alive
check has been attempted the programmed number times without success, the PBX assumes that the logical
connection with the CTI application software has been lost.
Default
5
Value Range
0–10
Maintenance Console Location
4.17 [2-9] System Options
Programming Manual References
None
Feature Manual References
3.1.22 CTI (Computer Telephony Integration)
1st Party CTI—CDR retry interval timer
Specifies the length of time until the alive check of CDR (Call Detail Recording) is retried when no response
is received, for First Party Call Control CTI.
Document Version 2010-11 PC Programming Manual 365
4.17 [2-9] System Options
Default
20 s
Value Range
0–60 s
Maintenance Console Location
4.17 [2-9] System Options
Programming Manual References
None
Feature Manual References
3.1.22 CTI (Computer Telephony Integration)
3rd Party CTI—System status retry interval timer
Specifies the length of time until the alive check is retried when no response is received, for Third Party Call
Control CTI.
Default
60 s
Value Range
0–60 s
Maintenance Console Location
4.17 [2-9] System Options
Programming Manual References
None
Feature Manual References
3.1.22 CTI (Computer Telephony Integration)
3rd Party CTI—System status retry counter
Specifies the number of times that the alive check is repeated for Third Party Call Control CTI. When the alive
check has been attempted the programmed number of times without success, the PBX assumes that the logical
connection with the CTI application software has been lost.
Default
5
Value Range
0–10
366 PC Programming Manual Document Version 2010-11
4.17 [2-9] System Options
Maintenance Console Location
4.17 [2-9] System Options
Programming Manual References
None
Feature Manual References
3.1.22 CTI (Computer Telephony Integration)
3rd Party CTI—CDR retry interval timer
Specifies the length of time until the alive check of CDR is retried when no response is received, for Third Party
Call Control CTI.
Default
20 s
Value Range
0–60 s
Maintenance Console Location
4.17 [2-9] System Options
Programming Manual References
None
Feature Manual References
3.1.22 CTI (Computer Telephony Integration)
3rd Party CTI—CDR retry counter
Specifies the number of times that the alive check of CDR is repeated for Third Party Call Control CTI. When
the alive check has been attempted the programmed number times, the association is released automatically.
Default
1
Value Range
0–10
Maintenance Console Location
4.17 [2-9] System Options
Programming Manual References
None
Document Version 2010-11 PC Programming Manual 367
4.17 [2-9] System Options
Feature Manual References
3.1.22 CTI (Computer Telephony Integration)
CTI Multi PBX Control—PBX Name
Specifies the name of the PBX, for network programming reference.
Default
Not stored.
Value Range
Max. 20 characters
Maintenance Console Location
4.17 [2-9] System Options
Programming Manual References
None
Feature Manual References
None
CTI Multi PBX Control—USB Serial Number
Specifies the serial number assigned to this PBX’s USB data transfers, used when multiple PBXs are
connected via USB to one PC (for example, for CTI).
Default
1
Value Range
1–8
Maintenance Console Location
4.17 [2-9] System Options
Programming Manual References
None
Feature Manual References
None
CTI Make Call—SLT Ring
Specifies whether to ring an SLT when a call is made from CTI, instead of the SLT.
368 PC Programming Manual Document Version 2010-11
4.17 [2-9] System Options
Default
Disable
Value Range
Disable, Enable
Maintenance Console Location
4.17 [2-9] System Options
Programming Manual References
None
Feature Manual References
None
Document Version 2010-11 PC Programming Manual 369
4.17 [2-9] System Options
4.18 [2-10] Extension CID Settings
Various settings for extension Caller ID can be programmed.
Extension Caller ID Resource-1, 2 (KX-TDA50 only)
Specifies a group of 4 SLT ports that can transfer Caller ID information to connected SLTs.
When the port to which an extension is connected has this feature activated, there will be a short delay before
the extension rings for incoming calls.
Default
Disable
Value Range
Disable: No port
Slot 01:DHLC4: Initially installed 4 Super Hybrid ports
Slot nn:SLC4: Ports 1 to 4 of the SLC4 card (nn=slot number)
Slot nn:SLC8 1-4: Ports 1 to 4 of the SLC8 card (nn=slot number)
Slot nn:SLC8 5-8: Ports 5 to 8 of the SLC8 card (nn=slot number)
Maintenance Console Location
4.18 [2-10] Extension CID Settings
Programming Manual References
6.1 [4-1-1] Wired Extension—Extension Settings—Option 8— Extension Caller ID
Feature Manual References
3.1.1 Caller ID
Extension Caller ID Modulation Type
Specifies the modulation frequency to be used when sending Caller ID information to an SLT.
Default
Bell202(Bellcore)
Value Range
V.23(ETSI), Bell202(Bellcore)
Maintenance Console Location
4.18 [2-10] Extension CID Settings
Programming Manual References
None
370 PC Programming Manual Document Version 2010-11
4.18 [2-10] Extension CID Settings
Feature Manual References
3.1.1 Caller ID
Channel Seizure Signal Bits
Specifies the number of seizure bits to send when sending Caller ID information to an SLT.
Default
300 bits
Value Range
10 ´ n (n=3–40) bits
Maintenance Console Location
4.18 [2-10] Extension CID Settings
Programming Manual References
None
Feature Manual References
3.1.1 Caller ID
Mark Signal Bits
Specifies the number of mark bits to send when sending Caller ID information to an SLT.
Default
180 bits
Value Range
10 ´ n (n=3–40) bits
Maintenance Console Location
4.18 [2-10] Extension CID Settings
Programming Manual References
None
Feature Manual References
3.1.1 Caller ID
Channel Seizure Wait Time
Specifies the length of time that the PBX waits before starting to send the seizure signal following the first ring
when sending Caller ID information to an SLT.
Document Version 2010-11 PC Programming Manual 371
4.18 [2-10] Extension CID Settings
Default
512 ms
Value Range
64 ´ n (n=5–35) ms
Maintenance Console Location
4.18 [2-10] Extension CID Settings
Programming Manual References
None
Feature Manual References
3.1.1 Caller ID
Caller ID Signal Type (KX-TDA100/KX-TDA200/KX-TDA600 only)
Specifies the type of signal modulation to be used when sending Caller ID information to an SLT (reference
only).
Default
FSK
Value Range
FSK
Maintenance Console Location
4.18 [2-10] Extension CID Settings
Programming Manual References
None
Feature Manual References
3.1.1 Caller ID
Additional Local Trunk Access Code to Extension Caller ID
Enables the PBX to automatically add a CO Line Access number to the received telephone number when
sending the Caller ID number of an incoming CO line call to an SLT.
Default
Enable
Value Range
Disable, Enable
372 PC Programming Manual Document Version 2010-11
4.18 [2-10] Extension CID Settings
Maintenance Console Location
4.18 [2-10] Extension CID Settings
Programming Manual References
None
Feature Manual References
3.1.1 Caller ID
Send Caller ID Date & Time to Extension
Enables the PBX to send the date and time of an incoming call when sending Caller ID information to an SLT.
Default
Enable
Value Range
Disable, Enable
Maintenance Console Location
4.18 [2-10] Extension CID Settings
Programming Manual References
None
Feature Manual References
3.1.1 Caller ID
Send Caller ID Name to Extension
Enables the PBX to send the caller’s name when sending Caller ID information to an SLT.
Default
Enable
Value Range
Disable, Enable
Maintenance Console Location
4.18 [2-10] Extension CID Settings
Programming Manual References
None
Document Version 2010-11 PC Programming Manual 373
4.18 [2-10] Extension CID Settings
Feature Manual References
3.1.1 Caller ID
Send Caller ID Long Distance to Extension
Enables the PBX to send a call qualifier (Long Distance) (if received from the CO line) when sending Caller ID
information to an SLT.
Default
Enable
Value Range
Disable, Enable
Maintenance Console Location
4.18 [2-10] Extension CID Settings
Programming Manual References
None
Feature Manual References
3.1.1 Caller ID
FSK Transmission Level
Specifies the transmission level for FSK signal modulation.
Default
0 dB
Value Range
-14 dB, -12 dB, -10 dB, -8 dB, -6 dB, -4 dB, -2 dB, 0 dB
Maintenance Console Location
4.18 [2-10] Extension CID Settings
Programming Manual References
None
Feature Manual References
3.1.1 Caller ID
374 PC Programming Manual Document Version 2010-11
4.18 [2-10] Extension CID Settings
4.19 [2-11-1] Audio Gain—Paging/MOH
Gain levels for the External Pager/External BGM ports can be programmed.
Paging—EPG 1 (External Pager 1) (KX-TDA100/KX-TDA200/KX-TDA600 only)
Specifies the paging volume for External Pager port 1.
Default
3 dB
Value Range
-15–15 dB
Maintenance Console Location
4.19 [2-11-1] Audio Gain—Paging/MOH
Programming Manual References
5.9 [3-4] Paging Group
Feature Manual References
13.1.1 Paging
Paging—EPG 2 (External Pager 2) (KX-TDA100/KX-TDA200/KX-TDA600 only)
Specifies the paging volume for External Pager port 2.
Default
3 dB
Value Range
-15–15 dB
Maintenance Console Location
4.19 [2-11-1] Audio Gain—Paging/MOH
Programming Manual References
5.9 [3-4] Paging Group
Feature Manual References
13.1.1 Paging
Paging—EPG (External Pager) (KX-TDA50 only)
Specifies the paging volume for the External Pager.
Document Version 2010-11 PC Programming Manual 375
4.19 [2-11-1] Audio Gain—Paging/MOH
Default
-2 dB
Value Range
-15–15 dB
Maintenance Console Location
4.19 [2-11-1] Audio Gain—Paging/MOH
Programming Manual References
5.9 [3-4] Paging Group
Feature Manual References
13.1.1 Paging
Paging—Paging Level from PT Speaker
Specifies the volume when paging is broadcast through the speaker of a PT.
Default
0 dB
Value Range
-15dB, -12dB, -9dB, -6dB, -3dB, 0dB, 3dB, 6dB
Maintenance Console Location
4.19 [2-11-1] Audio Gain—Paging/MOH
Programming Manual References
5.9 [3-4] Paging Group
Feature Manual References
13.1.1 Paging
MOH—MOH 1 (Music On Hold 1) (KX-TDA100/KX-TDA200/KX-TDA600 only)
Specifies the music volume for External BGM port 1.
Default
0 dB
Value Range
-11–11 dB
376 PC Programming Manual Document Version 2010-11
4.19 [2-11-1] Audio Gain—Paging/MOH
Maintenance Console Location
4.19 [2-11-1] Audio Gain—Paging/MOH
Programming Manual References
4.3 [2-2] Operator & BGM
Feature Manual References
11.1.4 Music on Hold
2.1.1 BGM (Background Music)
MOH—MOH 2 (Music On Hold 2) (KX-TDA100/KX-TDA200/KX-TDA600 only)
Specifies the music volume for External BGM port 2.
Default
0 dB
Value Range
-11–11 dB
Maintenance Console Location
4.19 [2-11-1] Audio Gain—Paging/MOH
Programming Manual References
4.3 [2-2] Operator & BGM
Feature Manual References
11.1.4 Music on Hold
2.1.1 BGM (Background Music)
MOH—MOH (Music On Hold) (KX-TDA50 only)
Specifies the music volume for the External BGM.
Default
9 dB
Value Range
-11–11 dB
Maintenance Console Location
4.19 [2-11-1] Audio Gain—Paging/MOH
Programming Manual References
4.3 [2-2] Operator & BGM
Document Version 2010-11 PC Programming Manual 377
4.19 [2-11-1] Audio Gain—Paging/MOH
Feature Manual References
11.1.4 Music on Hold
2.1.1 BGM (Background Music)
378 PC Programming Manual Document Version 2010-11
4.19 [2-11-1] Audio Gain—Paging/MOH
4.20 [2-11-2] Audio Gain—Card
Gain levels can be programmed for each type of card.
Up Gain (To PBX)
Specifies the volume for audio signals from the selected type of card to the PBX.
Default
Depends on card type.
Value Range
-15–15 dB
Maintenance Console Location
4.20 [2-11-2] Audio Gain—Card
Programming Manual References
None
Feature Manual References
None
Down Gain (From PBX)
Specifies the volume for audio signals from the PBX to the selected type of card.
Default
Depends on card type.
Value Range
-15–15 dB
Maintenance Console Location
4.20 [2-11-2] Audio Gain—Card
Programming Manual References
None
Feature Manual References
None
Document Version 2010-11 PC Programming Manual 379
4.20 [2-11-2] Audio Gain—Card
380 PC Programming Manual Document Version 2010-11
4.20 [2-11-2] Audio Gain—Card
Section 5
[3] Group
Document Version 2010-11 PC Programming Manual 381
5.1 [3-1-1] Trunk Group—TRG Settings
CO lines can be organized into trunk groups. The settings of each trunk group determine the settings of the
CO lines within that group. A maximum of 64 (with the KX-TDA50/KX-TDA100/KX-TDA200) or 96 (with the
KX-TDA600) trunk groups can be programmed.
For more information on trunk groups, see "7.1.1 GROUP FEATURES" in the Feature Manual.
Main
Group Name
Specifies the name of the trunk group for programming reference.
Default
Not stored.
Value Range
Max. 20 characters
Maintenance Console Location
5.1 [3-1-1] Trunk Group—TRG Settings
Programming Manual References
12.1 [10-1] CO Line Settings
Feature Manual References
None
COS
Specifies the COS of the trunk group, applied when making a call from a CO line to another CO line with TIE
Line Service.
If you wish to prevent such calls from being made, ensure that the COS specified here has a TRS level of
"7" assigned for all relevant time modes in 4.11 [2-7-1] Class of Service—COS Settings.
Default
7
Value Range
1–64
Maintenance Console Location
5.1 [3-1-1] Trunk Group—TRG Settings
Programming Manual References
4.11 [2-7-1] Class of Service—COS Settings
12.1 [10-1] CO Line Settings
382 PC Programming Manual Document Version 2010-11
5.1 [3-1-1] Trunk Group—TRG Settings
Feature Manual References
13.1.13 PRIVATE NETWORK FEATURES
Line Hunting Order
Specifies the CO line hunting sequence for the trunk group. The hunting sequence can be programmed to start
from the lowest or highest numbered CO lines, or to rotate uniformly among all CO lines.
Default
High -> Low
Value Range
High -> Low, Low -> High, Rotation
Maintenance Console Location
5.1 [3-1-1] Trunk Group—TRG Settings
Programming Manual References
12.1 [10-1] CO Line Settings
Feature Manual References
3.1.14 CO Line Access
CO-CO Duration Time (*60s)
Specifies the length of time that a CO-to-CO line call can be maintained before being disconnected.
Default
10 min
Value Range
None, 1–60 min
Maintenance Console Location
5.1 [3-1-1] Trunk Group—TRG Settings
Programming Manual References
12.1 [10-1] CO Line Settings
Feature Manual References
3.1.15 CO Line Call Limitation
Extension-CO Duration Time (*60s)
Specifies the length of time that an extension-to-CO line call can be maintained before being disconnected.
Document Version 2010-11 PC Programming Manual 383
5.1 [3-1-1] Trunk Group—TRG Settings
Default
10 min
Value Range
None, 1–60 min
Maintenance Console Location
5.1 [3-1-1] Trunk Group—TRG Settings
Programming Manual References
4.11 [2-7-1] Class of Service—COS Settings
4.17 [2-9] System Options
12.1 [10-1] CO Line Settings
Feature Manual References
3.1.15 CO Line Call Limitation
Caller ID Modification Table
Specifies the table to be used for modifying caller information (telephone number).
Default
1
Value Range
1–4
Maintenance Console Location
5.1 [3-1-1] Trunk Group—TRG Settings
Programming Manual References
5.3 [3-1-3] Caller ID Modification
12.1 [10-1] CO Line Settings
Feature Manual References
3.1.1 Caller ID
Dialing Plan Table (MPR Software File Version 4.0000 or later)
Specifies the table to be used for en-bloc dialing.
Default
1
Value Range
1–4
384 PC Programming Manual Document Version 2010-11
5.1 [3-1-1] Trunk Group—TRG Settings
Maintenance Console Location
5.1 [3-1-1] Trunk Group—TRG Settings
Programming Manual References
5.4 [3-1-4] Dialing Plan
Feature Manual References
None
Tone Detection
Group Name
Specifies the name of the trunk group for programming reference.
Default
Not stored.
Value Range
Max. 20 characters
Maintenance Console Location
5.1 [3-1-1] Trunk Group—TRG Settings
Programming Manual References
12.1 [10-1] CO Line Settings
Feature Manual References
None
DISA Tone Detection—Silence
Enables the disconnection of a DISA-originated CO-to-CO line call by silence detection.
Default
Disable
Value Range
Disable, Enable
Maintenance Console Location
5.1 [3-1-1] Trunk Group—TRG Settings
Programming Manual References
7.3 [5-3-1] Voice Message—DISA System
Document Version 2010-11 PC Programming Manual 385
5.1 [3-1-1] Trunk Group—TRG Settings
12.1 [10-1] CO Line Settings
Feature Manual References
4.1.7 DISA (Direct Inward System Access)
DISA Tone Detection—Continuous
Enables the disconnection of a DISA-originated CO-to-CO line call by continuous signal detection.
Default
Enable
Value Range
Disable, Enable
Maintenance Console Location
5.1 [3-1-1] Trunk Group—TRG Settings
Programming Manual References
7.3 [5-3-1] Voice Message—DISA System
12.1 [10-1] CO Line Settings
Feature Manual References
4.1.7 DISA (Direct Inward System Access)
DISA Tone Detection—Cyclic
Enables the disconnection of a DISA-originated CO-to-CO line call by cyclic signal detection.
Default
Enable
Value Range
Disable, Enable
Maintenance Console Location
5.1 [3-1-1] Trunk Group—TRG Settings
Programming Manual References
7.3 [5-3-1] Voice Message—DISA System
12.1 [10-1] CO Line Settings
Feature Manual References
4.1.7 DISA (Direct Inward System Access)
386 PC Programming Manual Document Version 2010-11
5.1 [3-1-1] Trunk Group—TRG Settings
Simplified Voice Message Tone Detection—Silence
Enables the disconnection of an SVM-originated CO-to-CO line call by silence detection.
Default
Enable
Value Range
Disable, Enable
Maintenance Console Location
5.1 [3-1-1] Trunk Group—TRG Settings
Programming Manual References
None
Feature Manual References
16.1.5 SVM (Simplified Voice Message)
Simplified Voice Message Tone Detection—Continuous
Enables the disconnection of an SVM-originated CO-to-CO line call by continuous signal detection.
Default
Enable
Value Range
Disable, Enable
Maintenance Console Location
5.1 [3-1-1] Trunk Group—TRG Settings
Programming Manual References
None
Feature Manual References
16.1.5 SVM (Simplified Voice Message)
Simplified Voice Message Tone Detection—Cyclic
Enables the disconnection of an SVM-originated CO-to-CO line call by cyclic signal detection.
Default
Enable
Value Range
Disable, Enable
Document Version 2010-11 PC Programming Manual 387
5.1 [3-1-1] Trunk Group—TRG Settings
Maintenance Console Location
5.1 [3-1-1] Trunk Group—TRG Settings
Programming Manual References
None
Feature Manual References
16.1.5 SVM (Simplified Voice Message)
Host PBX Access Code
Group Name
Specifies the name of the trunk group for programming reference.
Default
Not stored.
Value Range
Max. 20 characters
Maintenance Console Location
5.1 [3-1-1] Trunk Group—TRG Settings
Programming Manual References
12.1 [10-1] CO Line Settings
Feature Manual References
None
Host PBX Access Code 1–10
Specifies the feature number used to access a CO line from the host PBX.
Default
Not stored.
Value Range
Max. 10 digits (consisting of 0–9, *, and #)
Maintenance Console Location
5.1 [3-1-1] Trunk Group—TRG Settings
Programming Manual References
12.1 [10-1] CO Line Settings
388 PC Programming Manual Document Version 2010-11
5.1 [3-1-1] Trunk Group—TRG Settings
Feature Manual References
8.1.5 Host PBX Access Code (Access Code to the Telephone Company from a Host PBX)
Document Version 2010-11 PC Programming Manual 389
5.1 [3-1-1] Trunk Group—TRG Settings
5.2 [3-1-2] Trunk Group—Local Access Priority
Trunk groups can be assigned a priority for Idle Line Access. When making a CO line call by Idle Line Access,
the PBX will search trunk groups for an idle CO line according to the priority assigned here.
Trunk Group No. & Name
Specifies the trunk group assigned to the corresponding priority level.
Select the blank option to not assign a trunk group to the priority.
Default
Priority 1–64 = Trunk Group No. 1–64
Value Range
For KX-TDA50/KX-TDA100/KX-TDA200:
Trunk Group No. 1–64
For KX-TDA600:
Trunk Group No. 1–96
Maintenance Console Location
5.2 [3-1-2] Trunk Group—Local Access Priority
Programming Manual References
12.1 [10-1] CO Line Settings
Feature Manual References
3.1.14 CO Line Access
390 PC Programming Manual Document Version 2010-11
5.2 [3-1-2] Trunk Group—Local Access Priority
5.3 [3-1-3] Caller ID Modification
The telephone numbers of incoming callers can be modified automatically according to preprogrammed
modification tables, and then recorded for calling back.
Leading Digits
After the caller’s number is modified by the Length of Digits Modification Tables or CLIP Modification Tables,
the PBX checks the leading digits of the modified number for an area code programmed in the Caller ID
Modification Table assigned to that trunk group. If it finds such a code, it removes digits and adds a number
to the modified number. If this number is stored as a System Speed Dialing number, the caller’s name can be
shown on a PT display and the call can be routed to a certain extension (CLI destination). A maximum of 4
Caller ID Modification Tables, each containing 10 local/international call data and 1 long distance code, can
be programmed. Each trunk group can select a table for use. Select the desired table from the Modification
Table list.
If the telephone number does not contain an area code programmed here, it is modified based on the Long
Distance Code settings.
Area Code (for Local / International Call Data 1–10)
Specifies the leading number (area code) to look for in the incoming caller’s number.
Default
For KX-TDA50:
Local / International Call Data 1–9: Not stored.
Local / International Call Data 10: 011
For KX-TDA100/KX-TDA200/KX-TDA600:
Not stored.
Value Range
Max. 6 digits (consisting of 0–9, *, and #)
Maintenance Console Location
5.3 [3-1-3] Caller ID Modification
Programming Manual References
None
Feature Manual References
3.1.1 Caller ID
Removed Number of Digits
Specifies the number of digits to be removed from the beginning of the incoming caller’s number.
Default
For KX-TDA50:
Local / International Call Data 1–9: 3
Document Version 2010-11 PC Programming Manual 391
5.3 [3-1-3] Caller ID Modification
Local / International Call Data 10: 0
Long Distance Code: 0
For KX-TDA100/KX-TDA200/KX-TDA600:
Local / International Call Data 1–10: 3
Long Distance Code: 0
Value Range
0–9
Maintenance Console Location
5.3 [3-1-3] Caller ID Modification
Programming Manual References
5.1 [3-1-1] Trunk Group—TRG Settings— Caller ID Modification Table
8.1 [6-1] System Speed Dial
Feature Manual References
3.1.1 Caller ID
Added Number
Specifies the number to be added to the incoming caller’s number in the place of the removed digits.
Default
Local / International Call Data 1–10: Not stored.
Long Distance Code: 1 (fixed)
Value Range
Max. 4 digits (consisting of 0–9, *, and #)
Maintenance Console Location
5.3 [3-1-3] Caller ID Modification
Programming Manual References
5.1 [3-1-1] Trunk Group—TRG Settings— Caller ID Modification Table
8.1 [6-1] System Speed Dial
Feature Manual References
3.1.1 Caller ID
Length of Digits
The PBX adds a certain number of digits to the caller’s number depending on the length of digits, as
programmed in the Length of Digits Modification Tables assigned to the trunk group. This modification is applied
392 PC Programming Manual Document Version 2010-11
5.3 [3-1-3] Caller ID Modification
to incoming CO line calls routed through public networks when the type of network numbering plan is Unknown
or not specified.
A maximum of 4 Length of Digits Modification Tables can be programmed. Select the desired table from the
Modification Table list.
If the length of digits of an incoming CO line call is less than the Minimum Caller ID Digits (for National),
the caller’s number is not modified.
Minimum Caller ID Digits (for International)
Specifies the minimum number of digits required in the caller’s number for it to be recognized as an international
call. The value specified here must be larger than Minimum Caller ID Digits (for National).
Default
12
Value Range
1–31
Maintenance Console Location
5.3 [3-1-3] Caller ID Modification
Programming Manual References
3.14 [1-1] Slot—Port Property - PRI Port (KX-TDA100/KX-TDA200/KX-TDA600 only)— Calling Party
number—Type of Number—Public, Private
3.14 [1-1] Slot—Port Property - PRI Port (KX-TDA100/KX-TDA200/KX-TDA600 only)— Called Party number
—Type of Number—Public, Private
Feature Manual References
3.1.1 Caller ID
Minimum Caller ID Digits (for National)
Specifies the minimum number of digits required in the caller’s number for it to be recognized as a national
call. The value specified here must be smaller than Minimum Caller ID Digits (for International).
Default
8
Value Range
0–30
Maintenance Console Location
5.3 [3-1-3] Caller ID Modification
Programming Manual References
3.14 [1-1] Slot—Port Property - PRI Port (KX-TDA100/KX-TDA200/KX-TDA600 only)— Calling Party
number—Type of Number—Public, Private
Document Version 2010-11 PC Programming Manual 393
5.3 [3-1-3] Caller ID Modification
3.14 [1-1] Slot—Port Property - PRI Port (KX-TDA100/KX-TDA200/KX-TDA600 only)— Called Party number
—Type of Number—Public, Private
Feature Manual References
3.1.1 Caller ID
Added Number (for International)
Specifies the number to be added to the incoming telephone number when the total number of digits exceeds
Minimum Caller ID Digits (for International).
Default
011
Value Range
Max. 8 digits (0–9, *, and #)
Maintenance Console Location
5.3 [3-1-3] Caller ID Modification
Programming Manual References
3.14 [1-1] Slot—Port Property - PRI Port (KX-TDA100/KX-TDA200/KX-TDA600 only)— Calling Party
number—Type of Number—Public, Private
3.14 [1-1] Slot—Port Property - PRI Port (KX-TDA100/KX-TDA200/KX-TDA600 only)— Called Party number
—Type of Number—Public, Private
Feature Manual References
3.1.1 Caller ID
Added Number (for National)
Specifies the number to be added to the incoming telephone number when the total number of digits exceeds
Minimum Caller ID Digits (for National) but does not exceed Minimum Caller ID Digits (for
International).
Default
Not stored.
Value Range
Max. 8 digits (0–9, *, and #)
Maintenance Console Location
5.3 [3-1-3] Caller ID Modification
394 PC Programming Manual Document Version 2010-11
5.3 [3-1-3] Caller ID Modification
Programming Manual References
3.14 [1-1] Slot—Port Property - PRI Port (KX-TDA100/KX-TDA200/KX-TDA600 only)— Calling Party
number—Type of Number—Public, Private
3.14 [1-1] Slot—Port Property - PRI Port (KX-TDA100/KX-TDA200/KX-TDA600 only)— Called Party number
—Type of Number—Public, Private
Feature Manual References
3.1.1 Caller ID
CLIP
When incoming caller information is sent through an ISDN line and the type of the network numbering plan is
International, National, or Subscriber, the caller’s number can be modified as programmed in the Modification
Tables assigned to the trunk group. The modified number will then be recorded, and it is used for sending to
the network as a CLIP number.
A maximum of 4 CLIP Modification Tables can be programmed. Select the desired table from the Modification
Table list.
Removed Number of Digits
Specifies the number of leading digits to be removed from the incoming caller’s number for each type of network
numbering plan.
Default
International: 0
National: 0
Subscriber: 0
Value Range
0–9
Maintenance Console Location
5.3 [3-1-3] Caller ID Modification
Programming Manual References
3.14 [1-1] Slot—Port Property - PRI Port (KX-TDA100/KX-TDA200/KX-TDA600 only)— Calling Party
number—Type of Number—Public, Private
3.14 [1-1] Slot—Port Property - PRI Port (KX-TDA100/KX-TDA200/KX-TDA600 only)— Called Party number
—Type of Number—Public, Private
Feature Manual References
3.1.1 Caller ID
Added Number
Specifies the number to be added to the incoming caller’s number in the place of the removed digits for each
type of network numbering plan.
Document Version 2010-11 PC Programming Manual 395
5.3 [3-1-3] Caller ID Modification
Default
For KX-TDA50:
International: 011
National: Not stored.
Subscriber: Not stored.
For KX-TDA100/KX-TDA200/KX-TDA600:
International: 011
National: 1
Subscriber: Not stored.
Value Range
Max. 4 digits (consisting of 0–9, *, and #)
Maintenance Console Location
5.3 [3-1-3] Caller ID Modification
Programming Manual References
3.14 [1-1] Slot—Port Property - PRI Port (KX-TDA100/KX-TDA200/KX-TDA600 only)— Calling Party
number—Type of Number—Public, Private
3.14 [1-1] Slot—Port Property - PRI Port (KX-TDA100/KX-TDA200/KX-TDA600 only)— Called Party number
—Type of Number—Public, Private
Feature Manual References
3.1.1 Caller ID
396 PC Programming Manual Document Version 2010-11
5.3 [3-1-3] Caller ID Modification
5.4 [3-1-4] Dialing Plan
The PBX sends all of the dialed digits at once after an extension user completes dialing. The PBX can recognize
the end of dialing when the dialed telephone number starts with the programmed leading number and contains
the programmed total number of digits.
When the PBX recognizes the end of dialing to an analog CO line, the PBX cancels the muting of the caller’s
voice sent to the analog CO line immediately. If the PBX cannot recognize the end of dialing, the PBX mutes
the caller’s voice sent to an analog CO line from the time at which the last digit is dialed until the analog CO
line inter-digit timer expires.
4 tables can be programmed, each with a maximum of 50 leading numbers. Select the table to program from
the Dialing Plan Table list.
To assign a set of leading numbers automatically, click Auto Assign.
Leading Number
Specifies the leading number to be regarded as the beginning of dialing.
Default
No. 1 in Dialing Plan Table 1: N11
No. 2 in Dialing Plan Table 1: NXX NXX XXXX
No. 3 in Dialing Plan Table 1: 1NXX NXX XXXX
Others: Not stored.
Value Range
Max. 32 digits (consisting of 0–9, *, #, N [2,3,4,5,6,7,8,9], P [0, 1], and X [0-9, *, and #])
Maintenance Console Location
5.4 [3-1-4] Dialing Plan
Programming Manual References
4.4 [2-3] Timers & Counters—Dial / IRNA / Recall / Tone— Dial—Analog CO First Digit
4.4 [2-3] Timers & Counters—Dial / IRNA / Recall / Tone— Dial—Analog CO Inter-digit
5.1 [3-1-1] Trunk Group—TRG Settings—Main— Dialing Plan Table (MPR Software File Version 4.0000 or
later)
Feature Manual References
9.1.16 ISDN (INTEGRATED SERVICES DIGITAL NETWORK) FEATURES
Removed Number of Digits
Specifies the number of leading digits of the dialed number to be removed.
Default
0
Value Range
0–15
Document Version 2010-11 PC Programming Manual 397
5.4 [3-1-4] Dialing Plan
Maintenance Console Location
5.4 [3-1-4] Dialing Plan
Programming Manual References
None
Feature Manual References
9.1.16 ISDN (INTEGRATED SERVICES DIGITAL NETWORK) FEATURES
Added Number
Specifies the number to be added to the dialed number in place of the removed digits.
Default
Not stored.
Value Range
Max. 32 digits (consisting of 0–9, *, #, and P [Pause])
Maintenance Console Location
5.4 [3-1-4] Dialing Plan
Programming Manual References
None
Feature Manual References
9.1.16 ISDN (INTEGRATED SERVICES DIGITAL NETWORK) FEATURES
398 PC Programming Manual Document Version 2010-11
5.4 [3-1-4] Dialing Plan
5.5 [3-1-4] Dialing Plan—Auto Assign
It is possible to assign a set of leading numbers automatically.
Select Auto Assigning Table
Selects the set of preset leading number values to assign to the active dialing plan table. When Type D is
selected, you will be prompted to enter a 3-digit area code, and 7 "X"s, in cells 1 through 47 of the dialing plan
table.
Default
Type A
Value Range
Type A: 1:N11, 2:NXX XXXX, 3:1NXX NXX XXXX, 4-50: Not stored
Type B: 1:N11, 2:NNX XXXX, 3:1NPX NXX XXXX, 4-50: Not stored
Type C: 1:N11, 2:NXX XXXX, 3:1NNX XXXX, 4:1NPX NXX XXXX, 5-50: Not stored
Type D: 1-47: Not stored, 48:N11, 49:NXX XXXX, 50:1NXX NXX XXXX
Type E: 1:N11, 2:NXX NXX XXXX, 3:1NXX NXX XXXX, 4-50: Not stored
Maintenance Console Location
5.5 [3-1-4] Dialing Plan—Auto Assign
Programming Manual References
5.4 [3-1-4] Dialing Plan
Feature Manual References
None
Document Version 2010-11 PC Programming Manual 399
5.5 [3-1-4] Dialing Plan—Auto Assign
5.6 [3-2] Extension Group
Extensions can be assigned to a tenant according to their extension user groups. An extension user group can
belong to only one tenant. However, one extension user group can belong to several call pickup groups and
several paging groups. A maximum of 8 (with KX-TDA50/KX-TDA100/KX-TDA200) or 32 (with KX-TDA600)
tenants can be programmed.
Extension Group Name
Specifies the name of the extension user group.
Default
For KX-TDA50/KX-TDA100/KX-TDA200:
Extension User Group 1–32: Extension Group 01–32
For KX-TDA600:
Extension User Group 1–96: Extension Group 01–96
Value Range
Max. 20 characters
Maintenance Console Location
5.6 [3-2] Extension Group
Programming Manual References
5.7 [3-3] Call Pickup Group
5.9 [3-4] Paging Group
6.1 [4-1-1] Wired Extension—Extension Settings—Main— Extension Group
6.10 [4-2-1] Portable Station—Extension Settings—Main— Extension Group
Feature Manual References
7.1.1 GROUP FEATURES
Tenant Number
Specifies the tenant to which the extension user group belongs.
Default
1
Value Range
For KX-TDA50/KX-TDA100/KX-TDA200:
1-8
For KX-TDA600:
1-32
400 PC Programming Manual Document Version 2010-11
5.6 [3-2] Extension Group
Maintenance Console Location
5.6 [3-2] Extension Group
Programming Manual References
6.1 [4-1-1] Wired Extension—Extension Settings
6.10 [4-2-1] Portable Station—Extension Settings
Feature Manual References
7.1.1 GROUP FEATURES
17.1.3 Tenant Service
Document Version 2010-11 PC Programming Manual 401
5.6 [3-2] Extension Group
5.7 [3-3] Call Pickup Group
Extensions can be assigned to a call pickup group according to their extension user groups. One extension
user group can belong to up to 8 call pickup groups. A maximum of 64 (with the KX-TDA50/KX-TDA100/
KX-TDA200) or 96 (with the KX-TDA600) call pickup groups can be programmed.
To assign extension user groups to call pickup groups easily, click All Setting.
Extension Group Name
Indicates the name of the extension user group (reference only).
Default
For KX-TDA50/KX-TDA100/KX-TDA200:
Extension User Group 1–32: Extension Group 01–32
For KX-TDA600:
Extension User Group 1–96: Extension Group 01–96
Value Range
Max. 20 characters
Maintenance Console Location
5.7 [3-3] Call Pickup Group
Programming Manual References
6.1 [4-1-1] Wired Extension—Extension Settings
6.10 [4-2-1] Portable Station—Extension Settings
Feature Manual References
3.1.6 Call Pickup
7.1.1 GROUP FEATURES
Pickup Group—1st–8th
Selects the call pickup groups that the extension user group belongs to. One extension user group can be
assigned to a maximum of 8 call pickup groups on this screen. To assign an extension user group to more
than 8 call pickup groups, click All Setting.
Default
Same as extension user group number
Value Range
For KX-TDA50/KX-TDA100/KX-TDA200:
None, 01–64
For KX-TDA600:
None, 01–96
402 PC Programming Manual Document Version 2010-11
5.7 [3-3] Call Pickup Group
Maintenance Console Location
5.7 [3-3] Call Pickup Group
Programming Manual References
6.1 [4-1-1] Wired Extension—Extension Settings
6.10 [4-2-1] Portable Station—Extension Settings
Feature Manual References
3.1.6 Call Pickup
7.1.1 GROUP FEATURES
Document Version 2010-11 PC Programming Manual 403
5.7 [3-3] Call Pickup Group
5.8 [3-3] Call Pickup Group—All Setting
Extensions can be assigned to a call pickup group according to their extension user groups. One extension
user group can belong to multiple call pickup groups.
Call Pickup Group Name
Specifies the name of the call pickup group.
Default
Not stored.
Value Range
Max. 20 characters
Maintenance Console Location
5.8 [3-3] Call Pickup Group—All Setting
Programming Manual References
6.1 [4-1-1] Wired Extension—Extension Settings
6.10 [4-2-1] Portable Station—Extension Settings
Feature Manual References
3.1.6 Call Pickup
7.1.1 GROUP FEATURES
Extension Group 1–32 (KX-TDA50/KX-TDA100/KX-TDA200) or 1–96
(KX-TDA600)
Specifies whether the extension user group belongs to the corresponding pickup group.
Default
ON for the same-numbered call pickup group
Value Range
ON (blue), OFF
Maintenance Console Location
5.8 [3-3] Call Pickup Group—All Setting
Programming Manual References
6.1 [4-1-1] Wired Extension—Extension Settings
6.10 [4-2-1] Portable Station—Extension Settings
Feature Manual References
3.1.6 Call Pickup
404 PC Programming Manual Document Version 2010-11
5.8 [3-3] Call Pickup Group—All Setting
7.1.1 GROUP FEATURES
Document Version 2010-11 PC Programming Manual 405
5.8 [3-3] Call Pickup Group—All Setting
5.9 [3-4] Paging Group
Extensions can be assigned to a paging group according to their extension user groups. External pagers can
also be assigned to a paging group. One extension user group or external pager can belong to multiple paging
groups. A maximum of 32 (with the KX-TDA50/KX-TDA100/KX-TDA200) or 96 (with the KX-TDA600) paging
groups can be programmed.
To assign external pagers to paging groups, click External Pager. To assign extension user groups to paging
groups easily, click All Setting.
Extension Group Name
Indicates the name of the extension user group (reference only).
Default
For KX-TDA50/KX-TDA100/KX-TDA200:
Extension User Group 1–32: Extension Group 01–32
For KX-TDA600:
Extension User Group 1–96: Extension Group 01–96
Value Range
Max. 20 characters
Maintenance Console Location
5.9 [3-4] Paging Group
Programming Manual References
6.1 [4-1-1] Wired Extension—Extension Settings
6.10 [4-2-1] Portable Station—Extension Settings
Feature Manual References
13.1.1 Paging
7.1.1 GROUP FEATURES
Paging Group—1st–8th
Selects the paging groups that the extension user group belongs to. One extension user group can be assigned
to a maximum of 8 paging groups on this screen. To assign an extension user group to more than 8 paging
groups, click All Setting.
Default
Same as extension user group number
Value Range
For KX-TDA50/KX-TDA100/KX-TDA200:
None, 01–32
For KX-TDA600:
None, 01–96
406 PC Programming Manual Document Version 2010-11
5.9 [3-4] Paging Group
Maintenance Console Location
5.9 [3-4] Paging Group
Programming Manual References
6.1 [4-1-1] Wired Extension—Extension Settings
6.10 [4-2-1] Portable Station—Extension Settings
Feature Manual References
13.1.1 Paging
7.1.1 GROUP FEATURES
Document Version 2010-11 PC Programming Manual 407
5.9 [3-4] Paging Group
5.10 [3-4] Paging Group—All Setting
Extensions can be assigned to a paging group according to their extension user groups. One extension user
group or external pager can belong to multiple paging groups.
Paging Group Name
Specifies the name of the paging group.
Default
Not stored.
Value Range
Max. 20 characters
Maintenance Console Location
5.10 [3-4] Paging Group—All Setting
Programming Manual References
6.1 [4-1-1] Wired Extension—Extension Settings
6.10 [4-2-1] Portable Station—Extension Settings
Feature Manual References
13.1.1 Paging
7.1.1 GROUP FEATURES
Extension Group 1–32 (KX-TDA50/KX-TDA100/KX-TDA200) or 1–96
(KX-TDA600)
Specifies whether the extension user group belongs to the corresponding paging group.
Default
ON for same numbered paging group
Value Range
ON (blue), OFF
Maintenance Console Location
5.10 [3-4] Paging Group—All Setting
Programming Manual References
6.1 [4-1-1] Wired Extension—Extension Settings
6.10 [4-2-1] Portable Station—Extension Settings
Feature Manual References
13.1.1 Paging
408 PC Programming Manual Document Version 2010-11
5.10 [3-4] Paging Group—All Setting
7.1.1 GROUP FEATURES
Document Version 2010-11 PC Programming Manual 409
5.10 [3-4] Paging Group—All Setting
5.11 [3-4] Paging Group—External Pager
External pagers can be assigned to a paging group. One external pager can belong to multiple paging groups.
Paging Group Name
Indicates the name of the paging group (reference only).
Default
Not stored.
Value Range
Max. 20 characters
Maintenance Console Location
5.11 [3-4] Paging Group—External Pager
Programming Manual References
6.1 [4-1-1] Wired Extension—Extension Settings
6.10 [4-2-1] Portable Station—Extension Settings
Feature Manual References
13.1.1 Paging
7.1.1 GROUP FEATURES
External Pager 1
Specifies whether the external pager belongs to the corresponding paging group.
Default
ON
Value Range
ON (blue), OFF
Maintenance Console Location
5.11 [3-4] Paging Group—External Pager
Programming Manual References
6.1 [4-1-1] Wired Extension—Extension Settings
6.10 [4-2-1] Portable Station—Extension Settings
Feature Manual References
13.1.1 Paging
7.1.1 GROUP FEATURES
410 PC Programming Manual Document Version 2010-11
5.11 [3-4] Paging Group—External Pager
External Pager 2 (KX-TDA100/KX-TDA200/KX-TDA600 only)
Specifies whether the external pager belongs to the corresponding paging group.
Default
ON
Value Range
ON (blue), OFF
Maintenance Console Location
5.11 [3-4] Paging Group—External Pager
Programming Manual References
6.1 [4-1-1] Wired Extension—Extension Settings
6.10 [4-2-1] Portable Station—Extension Settings
Feature Manual References
13.1.1 Paging
7.1.1 GROUP FEATURES
Document Version 2010-11 PC Programming Manual 411
5.11 [3-4] Paging Group—External Pager
5.12 [3-5-1] Incoming Call Distribution Group—
Group Settings
Extensions can be assigned as members of an incoming call distribution group. Calls to an incoming call
distribution group are distributed to its member extensions as programmed. A maximum of 128 incoming call
distribution groups can be programmed.
To view a list of all programmed extension numbers and types, click Extension List View (see 2.5.7 Tool—
Extension List View). To assign extensions to ICD groups and change extension settings, click Member
List.
For more information on ICD Groups, see "9.1.1 ICD GROUP FEATURES" in the Feature Manual.
Main
Floating Extension Number
Specifies the floating extension number of the incoming call distribution group.
Default
Groups 001–064: 601–664
Groups 065–128: Not stored
Value Range
Max. 5 digits (consisting of 0–9)
Maintenance Console Location
5.12 [3-5-1] Incoming Call Distribution Group—Group Settings
Programming Manual References
None
Feature Manual References
None
Group Name
Specifies the name of the incoming call distribution group.
Default
ICD Group 001–ICD Group 128
Value Range
Max. 20 characters
Maintenance Console Location
5.12 [3-5-1] Incoming Call Distribution Group—Group Settings
412 PC Programming Manual Document Version 2010-11
5.12 [3-5-1] Incoming Call Distribution Group—Group Settings
Programming Manual References
None
Feature Manual References
None
Distribution Method
Selects the method for distributing calls to idle extensions of the incoming call distribution group.
Default
Ring
Value Range
Ring, UCD, Priority Hunting
Maintenance Console Location
5.12 [3-5-1] Incoming Call Distribution Group—Group Settings
Programming Manual References
None
Feature Manual References
9.1.2 ICD Group Features—Group Call Distribution
Call Waiting Distribution
Selects the call waiting distribution method for busy extensions of the incoming call distribution group.
Default
Distribution
Value Range
All, Distribution
Maintenance Console Location
5.12 [3-5-1] Incoming Call Distribution Group—Group Settings
Programming Manual References
None
Feature Manual References
9.1.2 ICD Group Features—Group Call Distribution
Document Version 2010-11 PC Programming Manual 413
5.12 [3-5-1] Incoming Call Distribution Group—Group Settings
FWD Mode
Specifies whether extensions in FWD mode ring when a call is received at the incoming call distribution group.
Default
Ring
Value Range
No Ring, Ring
Maintenance Console Location
5.12 [3-5-1] Incoming Call Distribution Group—Group Settings
Programming Manual References
6.3 [4-1-2] Wired Extension—FWD/DND
6.12 [4-2-2] Portable Station—FWD/DND
Feature Manual References
9.1.2 ICD Group Features—Group Call Distribution
DND Mode
Specifies whether extensions in DND mode ring when a call is received at the incoming call distribution group.
Default
No Ring
Value Range
No Ring, Ring
Maintenance Console Location
5.12 [3-5-1] Incoming Call Distribution Group—Group Settings
Programming Manual References
6.3 [4-1-2] Wired Extension—FWD/DND
6.12 [4-2-2] Portable Station—FWD/DND
Feature Manual References
9.1.2 ICD Group Features—Group Call Distribution
Tenant Number
Specifies the tenant to which the incoming call distribution group belongs, to determine the Time Table and
the audio source for the group. (The tenant number corresponds to the Time Table number.)
Default
1
414 PC Programming Manual Document Version 2010-11
5.12 [3-5-1] Incoming Call Distribution Group—Group Settings
Value Range
For KX-TDA50/KX-TDA100/KX-TDA200:
1-8
For KX-TDA600:
1-32
Maintenance Console Location
5.12 [3-5-1] Incoming Call Distribution Group—Group Settings
Programming Manual References
4.3 [2-2] Operator & BGM
4.5 [2-4] Week Table
8.6 [6-6] Tenant— Music On Hold
Feature Manual References
11.1.4 Music on Hold
17.1.3 Tenant Service
COS
Specifies the COS of the incoming call distribution group. Depending on the COS, calls from certain extensions
are restricted as determined by the Internal Call Block feature. Also, when calls are forwarded or overflowed
to a CO line, the TRS assigned for the COS of the incoming call distribution group applies.
Default
1
Value Range
1–64
Maintenance Console Location
5.12 [3-5-1] Incoming Call Distribution Group—Group Settings
Programming Manual References
4.11 [2-7-1] Class of Service—COS Settings
4.12 [2-7-2] Class of Service—External Call Block
4.13 [2-7-3] Class of Service—Internal Call Block
Feature Manual References
9.1.14 Internal Call Block
CLIP on G-DN Button (KX-TDA100/KX-TDA200/KX-TDA600 only)
Specifies the CLIP number sent to the network when making calls using the ICD Group button.
Document Version 2010-11 PC Programming Manual 415
5.12 [3-5-1] Incoming Call Distribution Group—Group Settings
Default
Not stored.
Value Range
Max. 16 digits (consisting of 0–9, *, and #)
Maintenance Console Location
5.12 [3-5-1] Incoming Call Distribution Group—Group Settings
Programming Manual References
None
Feature Manual References
3.1.13 CLIP (Calling Line Identification Presentation)
Overflow Queuing Busy
Floating Extension Number
Specifies the floating extension number of the incoming call distribution group.
Default
Groups 001–064: 601–664
Groups 065–128: Not stored
Value Range
Max. 5 digits (consisting of 0–9)
Maintenance Console Location
5.12 [3-5-1] Incoming Call Distribution Group—Group Settings
Programming Manual References
None
Feature Manual References
None
Group Name
Specifies the name of the incoming call distribution group.
Default
ICD Group 001–ICD Group 128
Value Range
Max. 20 characters
416 PC Programming Manual Document Version 2010-11
5.12 [3-5-1] Incoming Call Distribution Group—Group Settings
Maintenance Console Location
5.12 [3-5-1] Incoming Call Distribution Group—Group Settings
Programming Manual References
None
Feature Manual References
None
Queuing Busy—Destination-Day, Lunch, Break, Night
Specifies the overflow destination of calls that cannot be queued in each time mode.
Default
Not stored.
Value Range
Max. 32 digits (consisting of 0–9, *, #, [ ] [Secret], and P [Pause])
Maintenance Console Location
5.12 [3-5-1] Incoming Call Distribution Group—Group Settings
Programming Manual References
4.5 [2-4] Week Table
Feature Manual References
9.1.5 ICD Group Features—Overflow
Queuing Busy—Queue Call Capacity
Specifies the number of calls that can wait in a queue.
Default
30
Value Range
None, 1–30
Maintenance Console Location
5.12 [3-5-1] Incoming Call Distribution Group—Group Settings
Programming Manual References
None
Document Version 2010-11 PC Programming Manual 417
5.12 [3-5-1] Incoming Call Distribution Group—Group Settings
Feature Manual References
9.1.6 ICD Group Features—Queuing
Overflow No Answer
Floating Extension Number
Specifies the floating extension number of the incoming call distribution group.
Default
Groups 001–064: 601–664
Groups 065–128: Not stored
Value Range
Max. 5 digits (consisting of 0–9)
Maintenance Console Location
5.12 [3-5-1] Incoming Call Distribution Group—Group Settings
Programming Manual References
None
Feature Manual References
None
Group Name
Specifies the name of the incoming call distribution group.
Default
ICD Group 001–ICD Group 128
Value Range
Max. 20 characters
Maintenance Console Location
5.12 [3-5-1] Incoming Call Distribution Group—Group Settings
Programming Manual References
None
Feature Manual References
None
418 PC Programming Manual Document Version 2010-11
5.12 [3-5-1] Incoming Call Distribution Group—Group Settings
Time out & Manual Queue Redirection—Destination-Day, Lunch, Break, Night
Specifies the overflow destination of queued calls when they are not answered or are redirected by Manual
Queue Redirection in each time mode.
Default
Not stored.
Value Range
Max. 32 digits (consisting of 0–9, *, #, [ ] [Secret], and P [Pause])
Maintenance Console Location
5.12 [3-5-1] Incoming Call Distribution Group—Group Settings
Programming Manual References
4.5 [2-4] Week Table
Feature Manual References
9.1.6 ICD Group Features—Queuing
9.1.5 ICD Group Features—Overflow
Time out & Manual Queue Redirection—Overflow Time
Specifies the length of time calls wait in a queue before they are redirected to the overflow destination.
Default
None
Value Range
None, 10 ´ n (n=1–125) s
Maintenance Console Location
5.12 [3-5-1] Incoming Call Distribution Group—Group Settings
Programming Manual References
None
Feature Manual References
9.1.6 ICD Group Features—Queuing
9.1.5 ICD Group Features—Overflow
Hurry-up Level
Specifies the number of calls to hold in the queue before prompting Manual Queue Redirection by flashing the
Hurry-up button.
Document Version 2010-11 PC Programming Manual 419
5.12 [3-5-1] Incoming Call Distribution Group—Group Settings
Default
None
Value Range
None, 1–30
Maintenance Console Location
5.12 [3-5-1] Incoming Call Distribution Group—Group Settings
Programming Manual References
6.5 [4-1-4] Wired Extension—Flexible Button
6.13 [4-2-3] Portable Station—Flexible Button
Feature Manual References
9.1.6 ICD Group Features—Queuing
Queuing Time Table
Floating Extension Number
Specifies the floating extension number of the incoming call distribution group.
Default
Groups 001–064: 601–664
Groups 065–128: Not stored
Value Range
Max. 5 digits (consisting of 0–9)
Maintenance Console Location
5.12 [3-5-1] Incoming Call Distribution Group—Group Settings
Programming Manual References
None
Feature Manual References
None
Group Name
Specifies the name of the incoming call distribution group.
Default
ICD Group 001–ICD Group 128
420 PC Programming Manual Document Version 2010-11
5.12 [3-5-1] Incoming Call Distribution Group—Group Settings
Value Range
Max. 20 characters
Maintenance Console Location
5.12 [3-5-1] Incoming Call Distribution Group—Group Settings
Programming Manual References
None
Feature Manual References
None
Queuing Time Table—Day, Lunch, Break, Night
Specifies the Queuing Time Table to be used in each time mode.
Default
None
Value Range
For KX-TDA50/KX-TDA100/KX-TDA200:
None, Table 1–Table 64
For KX-TDA600:
None, Table 1–Table 128
Maintenance Console Location
5.12 [3-5-1] Incoming Call Distribution Group—Group Settings
Programming Manual References
4.5 [2-4] Week Table
Feature Manual References
9.1.6 ICD Group Features—Queuing
Queuing Time Table When Extension Ringing
Enables the PBX to play messages/BGM to the caller according to the Queuing Time Table, when the call
arrives at an extension without being queued or after being queued.
Default
Enable
Value Range
Disable (Ringback Tone), Enable
Document Version 2010-11 PC Programming Manual 421
5.12 [3-5-1] Incoming Call Distribution Group—Group Settings
Maintenance Console Location
5.12 [3-5-1] Incoming Call Distribution Group—Group Settings
Programming Manual References
None
Feature Manual References
None
Miscellaneous
Floating Extension Number
Specifies the floating extension number of the incoming call distribution group.
Default
Groups 001–064: 601–664
Groups 065–128: Not stored
Value Range
Max. 5 digits (consisting of 0–9)
Maintenance Console Location
5.12 [3-5-1] Incoming Call Distribution Group—Group Settings
Programming Manual References
None
Feature Manual References
None
Group Name
Specifies the name of the incoming call distribution group.
Default
ICD Group 001–ICD Group 128
Value Range
Max. 20 characters
Maintenance Console Location
5.12 [3-5-1] Incoming Call Distribution Group—Group Settings
422 PC Programming Manual Document Version 2010-11
5.12 [3-5-1] Incoming Call Distribution Group—Group Settings
Programming Manual References
None
Feature Manual References
None
Extension No Answer Redirection Time
Specifies the length of time that a call queues at an extension before it is redirected to the next member
extension of the incoming call distribution group, in UCD or Priority Hunting distribution method.
Default
None
Value Range
None, 10 ´ n (n=1–15) s
Maintenance Console Location
5.12 [3-5-1] Incoming Call Distribution Group—Group Settings
Programming Manual References
None
Feature Manual References
9.1.2 ICD Group Features—Group Call Distribution
9.1.6 ICD Group Features—Queuing
No. of Unanswered Calls for Automatic Log-out
Specifies the number of consecutive unanswered calls before a member extension is automatically logged out
from the incoming call distribution group.
Default
None
Value Range
None, 1–15
Maintenance Console Location
5.12 [3-5-1] Incoming Call Distribution Group—Group Settings
Programming Manual References
None
Document Version 2010-11 PC Programming Manual 423
5.12 [3-5-1] Incoming Call Distribution Group—Group Settings
Feature Manual References
9.1.3 ICD Group Features—Log-in/Log-out
Maximum No. of Busy Extension
Specifies the number of extensions that can accept calls simultaneously in the incoming call distribution group.
Default
Max.
Value Range
Max.: Call arrives at an idle extension.
1–32: Call will not arrive at an idle extension when the number of busy extensions exceeds the assigned
number.
Maintenance Console Location
5.12 [3-5-1] Incoming Call Distribution Group—Group Settings
Programming Manual References
None
Feature Manual References
9.1.2 ICD Group Features—Group Call Distribution
Last Extension Log-out
Specifies whether the last extension logged-in to the incoming call distribution group is allowed to log out.
Default
Enable
Value Range
Disable, Enable
Maintenance Console Location
5.12 [3-5-1] Incoming Call Distribution Group—Group Settings
Programming Manual References
None
Feature Manual References
9.1.3 ICD Group Features—Log-in/Log-out
424 PC Programming Manual Document Version 2010-11
5.12 [3-5-1] Incoming Call Distribution Group—Group Settings
VIP Call Mode
Enables VIP Call mode, to prioritize calls received from multiple incoming call distribution groups.
Default
Disable
Value Range
Disable, Enable
Maintenance Console Location
5.12 [3-5-1] Incoming Call Distribution Group—Group Settings
Programming Manual References
None
Feature Manual References
9.1.8 ICD Group Features—VIP Call
Supervisor Extension Number
Specifies the extension number of the incoming call distribution group’s supervisor. The supervisor can monitor
and control the status of each member of the group using a 6-line display PT. The supervisor extension need
not belong to the group.
Default
Not stored.
Value Range
Max. 5 digits (consisting of 0–9)
Maintenance Console Location
5.12 [3-5-1] Incoming Call Distribution Group—Group Settings
Programming Manual References
None
Feature Manual References
9.1.7 ICD Group Features—Supervisory
Programmed Mailbox No.
Specifies the mailbox number of the incoming call distribution group’s mailbox for Voice Processing Systems
(VPS) with DTMF Integration.
Default
Not stored.
Document Version 2010-11 PC Programming Manual 425
5.12 [3-5-1] Incoming Call Distribution Group—Group Settings
Value Range
Max. 16 digits (consisting of 0–9, *, and #)
Maintenance Console Location
5.12 [3-5-1] Incoming Call Distribution Group—Group Settings
Programming Manual References
None
Feature Manual References
19.1.5 Voice Mail DTMF Integration
Group Log / Group FWD
To set extension numbers easily, click Destination Setting (see 2.1.6 Extension Number Setting).
Floating Extension Number
Specifies the floating extension number of the incoming call distribution group.
Default
Groups 001–064: 601–664
Groups 065–128: Not stored
Value Range
Max. 5 digits (consisting of 0–9)
Maintenance Console Location
5.12 [3-5-1] Incoming Call Distribution Group—Group Settings
Programming Manual References
None
Feature Manual References
None
Group Name
Specifies the name of the incoming call distribution group.
Default
ICD Group 001–ICD Group 128
Value Range
Max. 20 characters
426 PC Programming Manual Document Version 2010-11
5.12 [3-5-1] Incoming Call Distribution Group—Group Settings
Maintenance Console Location
5.12 [3-5-1] Incoming Call Distribution Group—Group Settings
Programming Manual References
None
Feature Manual References
None
Incoming Call Log Memory
Specifies the number of unanswered calls to the incoming call distribution group that can be logged in the call
log memory.
Default
10
Value Range
0–100
Maintenance Console Location
5.12 [3-5-1] Incoming Call Distribution Group—Group Settings
Programming Manual References
None
Feature Manual References
3.1.3 Call Log, Incoming
Group FWD Call from CO—Setting
Indicates the current FWD status for incoming CO line calls (reference only).
Default
Off
Value Range
Off, On
Maintenance Console Location
5.12 [3-5-1] Incoming Call Distribution Group—Group Settings
Programming Manual References
None
Document Version 2010-11 PC Programming Manual 427
5.12 [3-5-1] Incoming Call Distribution Group—Group Settings
Feature Manual References
6.1.6 FWD (Call Forwarding)
Group FWD Call from CO—Destination
Specifies the forward destination of incoming CO line calls directed to the incoming call distribution group.
Default
Not stored.
Value Range
Max. 32 digits (consisting of 0–9, *, #, [ ] [Secret], and P [Pause])
Maintenance Console Location
5.12 [3-5-1] Incoming Call Distribution Group—Group Settings
Programming Manual References
None
Feature Manual References
6.1.6 FWD (Call Forwarding)
Group FWD Call from Extension—Setting
Indicates the current FWD status for incoming intercom calls (reference only).
Default
Off
Value Range
Off, On
Maintenance Console Location
5.12 [3-5-1] Incoming Call Distribution Group—Group Settings
Programming Manual References
None
Feature Manual References
6.1.6 FWD (Call Forwarding)
Group FWD Call from Extension—Destination
Specifies the forward destination of incoming intercom calls directed to the incoming call distribution group.
428 PC Programming Manual Document Version 2010-11
5.12 [3-5-1] Incoming Call Distribution Group—Group Settings
Default
Not stored.
Value Range
Max. 32 digits (consisting of 0–9, *, #, [ ] [Secret] and P [Pause])
Maintenance Console Location
5.12 [3-5-1] Incoming Call Distribution Group—Group Settings
Programming Manual References
None
Feature Manual References
6.1.6 FWD (Call Forwarding)
Document Version 2010-11 PC Programming Manual 429
5.12 [3-5-1] Incoming Call Distribution Group—Group Settings
5.13 [3-5-1] Incoming Call Distribution Group—
Group Settings—Member List
Each incoming call distribution group can have a maximum of 32 (with the KX-TDA50/KX-TDA100/
KX-TDA200) or 128 (with the KX-TDA600) members (extensions) assigned to it, and each member can have
its own delayed ringing and Wrap-up time settings. An extension can be a member of multiple incoming call
distribution groups. An ICD Group can also contain cellular phones, and network ICD groups (ICD groups at
other PBXs in a network) using virtual PS (see "19.1.2 Virtual PS" in the Feature Manual). The forward
destination assigned to a virtual PS (e.g., a cellular phone) can act as a member of an ICD group. Select the
desired ICD group (1–128) from the ICD Group No. list.
To assign members to the group, enter directly or click Extension No. Setting (see 2.1.6 Extension Number
Setting). To copy the members to another group, click Member List Copy, select the group, and click OK.
Extension Number
Specifies the extension number of each member. In addition to the extension numbers of PT, SLT, PS, and
T1-OPX extensions, floating extension numbers of PS Ring groups can also be specified.
Default
Not stored.
Value Range
Max. 5 digits (consisting of 0–9)
Maintenance Console Location
5.13 [3-5-1] Incoming Call Distribution Group—Group Settings—Member List
Programming Manual References
5.24 [3-9] PS Ring Group
Feature Manual References
9.1.1 ICD GROUP FEATURES
Extension Name
Indicates the name of the extension (reference only).
Default
Not stored.
Value Range
Max. 20 characters
Maintenance Console Location
5.13 [3-5-1] Incoming Call Distribution Group—Group Settings—Member List
430 PC Programming Manual Document Version 2010-11
5.13 [3-5-1] Incoming Call Distribution Group—Group Settings—Member List
Programming Manual References
5.24 [3-9] PS Ring Group
Feature Manual References
9.1.1 ICD GROUP FEATURES
Delayed Ring
Specifies the delayed ringing setting of each member. (Applicable when the call distribution method of the
incoming call distribution group is set to Ring.)
Default
Immediate
Value Range
Immediate, 1–6 Rings, No Ring
Maintenance Console Location
5.13 [3-5-1] Incoming Call Distribution Group—Group Settings—Member List
Programming Manual References
None
Feature Manual References
9.1.2 ICD Group Features—Group Call Distribution
Wrap-up Timer
Specifies the length of time that must pass after completing a call before the member extension can accept
another call.
This timer is used when " Options—Wrap-up Timer based on" is set to "ICD Group Member" in
5.15 [3-5-3] Incoming Call Distribution Group—Miscellaneous.
Default
0 s
Value Range
10 ´ n (n=0–300) s
Maintenance Console Location
5.13 [3-5-1] Incoming Call Distribution Group—Group Settings—Member List
Programming Manual References
5.15 [3-5-3] Incoming Call Distribution Group—Miscellaneous— Options—Wrap-up Timer based on
6.1 [4-1-1] Wired Extension—Extension Settings—Option 8— Wrap-up Timer
6.10 [4-2-1] Portable Station—Extension Settings—Option 8— Wrap-up Timer
Document Version 2010-11 PC Programming Manual 431
5.13 [3-5-1] Incoming Call Distribution Group—Group Settings—Member List
Feature Manual References
9.1.3 ICD Group Features—Log-in/Log-out
432 PC Programming Manual Document Version 2010-11
5.13 [3-5-1] Incoming Call Distribution Group—Group Settings—Member List
5.14 [3-5-2] Incoming Call Distribution Group—
Queuing Time Table
A Queuing Time Table can contain up to 16 sequences which control how calls waiting in a queue are handled.
A maximum of 64 (with the KX-TDA50/KX-TDA100/KX-TDA200) or 128 (with the KX-TDA600) Queuing Time
Tables can be programmed.
Queuing Sequence—Sequence 01–16
Specifies the command activated by the corresponding sequence.
Default
None
Value Range
None: Redirects the call to the next sequence
Overflow: Redirects the call to the overflow destination when there is no answer
Disconnect: Disconnects the line
Sequence 01–16: Redirects the call to a different sequence
OGM 01–64: Sends a certain OGM
Wait 5 ´ n (n=1–16) s: If preceded by an OGM, plays the Music on Hold for the specified period of time; if not
preceded by an OGM, sends a ringback tone for the specified period of time.
Maintenance Console Location
5.14 [3-5-2] Incoming Call Distribution Group—Queuing Time Table
Programming Manual References
None
Feature Manual References
11.1.4 Music on Hold
12.1.2 OGM (Outgoing Message)
9.1.5 ICD Group Features—Overflow
9.1.6 ICD Group Features—Queuing
Document Version 2010-11 PC Programming Manual 433
5.14 [3-5-2] Incoming Call Distribution Group—Queuing Time Table
5.15 [3-5-3] Incoming Call Distribution Group—
Miscellaneous
Optional settings related to Incoming Call Distribution Groups can be programmed.
Options—Call Log to ICD Group for Answered Call
Selects whether answered calls to an ICD Group are also logged in the Incoming Call Log for the group, in
addition to the log of the extension that answered the call.
Default
Enable
Value Range
Disable, Enable
Maintenance Console Location
5.15 [3-5-3] Incoming Call Distribution Group—Miscellaneous
Programming Manual References
None
Feature Manual References
9.1.1 ICD GROUP FEATURES
Options—ICD Group Key Mode
Selects whether ICD Group buttons at extensions operate as normal or in Enhanced Phantom button mode.
When set to Enhanced Phantom mode, creating an ICD Group button at an extension using PT personal
programming automatically registers the extension as a member of the relevant ICD Group. The extension
user can also specify the delayed ringing settings.
Default
Group DN
Value Range
Group DN, Enhanced Phantom
Maintenance Console Location
5.15 [3-5-3] Incoming Call Distribution Group—Miscellaneous
Programming Manual References
5.13 [3-5-1] Incoming Call Distribution Group—Group Settings—Member List— Delayed Ring
434 PC Programming Manual Document Version 2010-11
5.15 [3-5-3] Incoming Call Distribution Group—Miscellaneous
Feature Manual References
9.1.1 ICD GROUP FEATURES
Options—Longest Idle Distribution (Activation Key Required)
Selects whether incoming calls are distributed to idle extensions evenly in order (UCD), or to the extension
that has been idle the longest (ACD).
Default
Enable (ACD)
Value Range
Disable (UCD), Enable (ACD)
Maintenance Console Location
5.15 [3-5-3] Incoming Call Distribution Group—Miscellaneous
Programming Manual References
None
Feature Manual References
9.1.2 ICD Group Features—Group Call Distribution
Options—Wrap-up Timer based on
Selects whether the ICD Group member wrap-up timer or extension wrap-up timer is used.
If Extension is selected here, Wrap-up Timer on 5.13 [3-5-1] Incoming Call Distribution Group—Group
Settings—Member List becomes unavailable. If ICD Group Member is selected, Wrap-up Timer on
6.1 [4-1-1] Wired Extension—Extension Settings and 6.10 [4-2-1] Portable Station—Extension
Settings become unavailable.
Default
Extension
Value Range
Extension: The timer is activated after all calls to or from the extension, including a retrieved call on hold.
ICD Group Member: The timer is only activated after calls to the extension through an ICD Group.
Maintenance Console Location
5.15 [3-5-3] Incoming Call Distribution Group—Miscellaneous
Programming Manual References
5.13 [3-5-1] Incoming Call Distribution Group—Group Settings—Member List— Wrap-up Timer
6.1 [4-1-1] Wired Extension—Extension Settings—Option 8— Wrap-up Timer
6.10 [4-2-1] Portable Station—Extension Settings—Option 8— Wrap-up Timer
Document Version 2010-11 PC Programming Manual 435
5.15 [3-5-3] Incoming Call Distribution Group—Miscellaneous
Feature Manual References
9.1.3 ICD Group Features—Log-in/Log-out
436 PC Programming Manual Document Version 2010-11
5.15 [3-5-3] Incoming Call Distribution Group—Miscellaneous
5.16 [3-6] Extension Hunting Group
If an extension within an idle extension hunting group is called when it is busy or in DND mode, the call can
be redirected to another extension in the same hunting group, according to a preprogrammed hunting type. If
there is no idle extension in the group, the call can then be redirected to the overflow destination, which can
be different depending on the time mode (day/lunch/break/night). A maximum of 64 (with the KX-TDA50/
KX-TDA100/KX-TDA200) or 128 (with the KX-TDA600) hunting groups can be programmed, each containing
up to 16 extensions.
To assign members to the group, click Member List. To assign extensions as overflow destinations easily,
click Destination Setting (see 2.1.6 Extension Number Setting).
Hunting Group Name
Specifies the name of the hunting group.
Default
Not stored.
Value Range
Max. 20 characters
Maintenance Console Location
5.16 [3-6] Extension Hunting Group
Programming Manual References
None
Feature Manual References
9.1.9 Idle Extension Hunting
Hunting Type
Specifies the hunting type for the hunting group.
Default
Circular
Value Range
Circular: Circulates until the call is answered or overflowed
Terminated: Terminates at the last extension
Maintenance Console Location
5.16 [3-6] Extension Hunting Group
Programming Manual References
None
Document Version 2010-11 PC Programming Manual 437
5.16 [3-6] Extension Hunting Group
Feature Manual References
9.1.9 Idle Extension Hunting
7.1.1 GROUP FEATURES
Overflow—Day, Lunch, Break, Night
Specifies the overflow destination of an unanswered call in each time mode.
Default
Not stored.
Value Range
Max. 32 digits (consisting of 0–9, *, #, T [Transfer], [ ] [Secret], P [Pause], and F [Flash])
Maintenance Console Location
5.16 [3-6] Extension Hunting Group
Programming Manual References
None
Feature Manual References
9.1.9 Idle Extension Hunting
438 PC Programming Manual Document Version 2010-11
5.16 [3-6] Extension Hunting Group
5.17 [3-6] Extension Hunting Group—Member List
Each hunting group can contain up to 16 extensions. Select the hunting group to program from the Hunting
Group No. list.
To assign members to the group, enter the extension numbers in Extension Number or click Extension
No. Setting (see 2.1.6 Extension Number Setting). To copy numbers to another group, click Member List
Copy, select the group, and click OK.
Extension Number
Specifies the extension number of the hunting group member.
Default
Not stored.
Value Range
Max. 5 digits (consisting of 0–9)
Maintenance Console Location
5.17 [3-6] Extension Hunting Group—Member List
Programming Manual References
5.16 [3-6] Extension Hunting Group
Feature Manual References
9.1.9 Idle Extension Hunting
Extension Name
Indicates the name of the extension, when an extension number is specified in Extension Number above
(reference only).
Default
Not stored.
Value Range
Max. 20 characters
Maintenance Console Location
5.17 [3-6] Extension Hunting Group—Member List
Programming Manual References
5.16 [3-6] Extension Hunting Group
Feature Manual References
9.1.9 Idle Extension Hunting
Document Version 2010-11 PC Programming Manual 439
5.17 [3-6] Extension Hunting Group—Member List
5.18 [3-7-1] VM(DPT) Group—System Settings
A Panasonic Voice Processing System (VPS) with DPT Integration can be connected to DPT ports of the PBX.
The DPT ports that are connected to the VPS are called a VM (DPT) Group.
With the KX-TDA50, a maximum of 1 VM (DPT) Group can be programmed; with the KX-TDA100/
KX-TDA200, 2 VM (DPT) Groups can be programmed; and with the KX-TDA600, 8 VM (DPT) groups can be
programmed.
Call Waiting on VM Group
Enables the queuing of calls when all extension ports of the VM (DPT) group are busy. (Call Waiting tone is
not sent to any VM port.)
Default
Enable
Value Range
Disable, Enable
Maintenance Console Location
5.18 [3-7-1] VM(DPT) Group—System Settings
Programming Manual References
3.5 [1-1] Slot—Port Property - Extension Port
Feature Manual References
9.1.6 ICD Group Features—Queuing
19.1.3 Voice Mail (VM) Group
Intercept to Mailbox
Enables the PBX to send the mailbox number of the called extension to the VPS when a call is redirected to
the VM (DPT) group by Intercept Routing. When the VPS receives the mailbox number, the VPS answers the
call with the appropriate mailbox.
Default
Enable
Value Range
Disable, Enable
Maintenance Console Location
5.18 [3-7-1] VM(DPT) Group—System Settings
Programming Manual References
3.5 [1-1] Slot—Port Property - Extension Port
440 PC Programming Manual Document Version 2010-11
5.18 [3-7-1] VM(DPT) Group—System Settings
6.1 [4-1-1] Wired Extension—Extension Settings—Intercept Destination— Intercept Destination—When
called party does not answer—Day, Lunch, Break, Night
6.10 [4-2-1] Portable Station—Extension Settings—Intercept Destination— Intercept Destination—When
called party does not answer—Day, Lunch, Break, Night
Feature Manual References
19.1.3 Voice Mail (VM) Group
19.1.4 Voice Mail DPT (Digital) Integration
Transfer Recall to Mailbox
Enables the PBX to send the mailbox number of the transfer destination extension to the VPS in these
situations: (1) when a call is transferred to an extension by the Call Transfer without Announcement feature
using the Automated Attendant (AA) service of the VPS, and the call is not answered within a programmed
time period; (2) when the VPS is assigned as the Transfer Recall destination of a certain extension. When the
VPS receives the mailbox number, the VPS answers the call with the appropriate mailbox.
Default
Enable
Value Range
Disable, Enable
Maintenance Console Location
5.18 [3-7-1] VM(DPT) Group—System Settings
Programming Manual References
3.5 [1-1] Slot—Port Property - Extension Port
Feature Manual References
19.1.3 Voice Mail (VM) Group
19.1.4 Voice Mail DPT (Digital) Integration
Document Version 2010-11 PC Programming Manual 441
5.18 [3-7-1] VM(DPT) Group—System Settings
5.19 [3-7-2] VM(DPT) Group—Unit Settings
A VM (DPT) group has a floating extension number, which can be assigned as the destination for redirected
calls and incoming calls.
To assign extension numbers to the group, click Member List. To view a list of all programmed extension
numbers and types, click Extension List View.
Floating Extension No.
Specifies the floating extension number of the VM (DPT) group.
Default
VM Unit No. 1: 500
Value Range
Max. 5 digits (consisting of 0–9)
Maintenance Console Location
5.19 [3-7-2] VM(DPT) Group—Unit Settings
Programming Manual References
3.5 [1-1] Slot—Port Property - Extension Port
Feature Manual References
19.1.3 Voice Mail (VM) Group
19.1.4 Voice Mail DPT (Digital) Integration
Group Name
Specifies the name of the VM (DPT) group, which will be shown on the display of extensions that call the VM
(DPT) group.
Default
VM Unit No. x: Voicemail x
Value Range
Max. 20 characters
Maintenance Console Location
5.19 [3-7-2] VM(DPT) Group—Unit Settings
Programming Manual References
3.5 [1-1] Slot—Port Property - Extension Port
Feature Manual References
19.1.3 Voice Mail (VM) Group
442 PC Programming Manual Document Version 2010-11
5.19 [3-7-2] VM(DPT) Group—Unit Settings
19.1.4 Voice Mail DPT (Digital) Integration
Document Version 2010-11 PC Programming Manual 443
5.19 [3-7-2] VM(DPT) Group—Unit Settings
5.20 [3-7-2] VM(DPT) Group—Unit Settings—Member
List
Displays information on the settings of all relevant ports. Only ports set to VM(DPT) in DPT Type—Type of
3.5 [1-1] Slot—Port Property - Extension Port will be displayed. In addition, the other information displayed
here can also be set in 3.5 [1-1] Slot—Port Property - Extension Port.
Slot
Indicates the slot position (reference only).
Default
Current slot number
Value Range
Slot number
Maintenance Console Location
5.20 [3-7-2] VM(DPT) Group—Unit Settings—Member List
Programming Manual References
DPT Type—Type
5.19 [3-7-2] VM(DPT) Group—Unit Settings
Feature Manual References
None
Port
Indicates the port number (reference only).
Default
Current port number
Value Range
Port number
Maintenance Console Location
5.20 [3-7-2] VM(DPT) Group—Unit Settings—Member List
Programming Manual References
DPT Type—Type
5.19 [3-7-2] VM(DPT) Group—Unit Settings
444 PC Programming Manual Document Version 2010-11
5.20 [3-7-2] VM(DPT) Group—Unit Settings—Member List
Feature Manual References
5.1.7 Extension Port Configuration
VM Unit No.
Indicates the unit number of the connected VPS (reference only).
Default
Current unit number
Value Range
For KX-TDA50:
1
For KX-TDA100/KX-TDA200:
1, 2
For KX-TDA600:
1–8
Maintenance Console Location
5.20 [3-7-2] VM(DPT) Group—Unit Settings—Member List
Programming Manual References
DPT Type—Type
5.19 [3-7-2] VM(DPT) Group—Unit Settings
Feature Manual References
19.1.3 Voice Mail (VM) Group
VM Port No.
Indicates the VM port number for the port (reference only).
Default
1
Value Range
For KX-TDA50:
1–4
For KX-TDA100/KX-TDA200/KX-TDA600:
1–12
Maintenance Console Location
5.20 [3-7-2] VM(DPT) Group—Unit Settings—Member List
Document Version 2010-11 PC Programming Manual 445
5.20 [3-7-2] VM(DPT) Group—Unit Settings—Member List
Programming Manual References
DPT Type—Type
5.19 [3-7-2] VM(DPT) Group—Unit Settings
Feature Manual References
19.1.3 Voice Mail (VM) Group
Extension No.
Indicates the extension number assigned to the VM port (reference only).
Default
Not stored.
Value Range
Max. 5 digits (consisting of 0–9)
Maintenance Console Location
5.20 [3-7-2] VM(DPT) Group—Unit Settings—Member List
Programming Manual References
DPT Type—Type
5.19 [3-7-2] VM(DPT) Group—Unit Settings
5.22 [3-8-2] VM(DTMF) Group—Group Settings
Feature Manual References
19.1.3 Voice Mail (VM) Group
19.1.4 Voice Mail DPT (Digital) Integration
Extension Name
Indicates the name of the extension (reference only).
Default
Not stored.
Value Range
Max. 20 characters
Maintenance Console Location
5.20 [3-7-2] VM(DPT) Group—Unit Settings—Member List
Programming Manual References
DPT Type—Type
5.19 [3-7-2] VM(DPT) Group—Unit Settings
446 PC Programming Manual Document Version 2010-11
5.20 [3-7-2] VM(DPT) Group—Unit Settings—Member List
Feature Manual References
19.1.3 Voice Mail (VM) Group
19.1.4 Voice Mail DPT (Digital) Integration
Document Version 2010-11 PC Programming Manual 447
5.20 [3-7-2] VM(DPT) Group—Unit Settings—Member List
5.21 [3-8-1] VM(DTMF) Group—System Settings
A Panasonic Voice Processing System (VPS) with DTMF Integration can be connected to SLT ports of the
PBX. The SLT ports that are connected to the VPS are called a VM (DTMF) Group. A maximum of 2 (with the
KX-TDA50/KX-TDA100/KX-TDA200) or 8 (with the KX-TDA600) VM (DTMF) Groups can be programmed.
For more information on Voice Mail groups and DTMF integration, see "19.1.3 Voice Mail (VM) Group" and
"19.1.5 Voice Mail DTMF Integration" in the Feature Manual.
VM DTMF Status Signal—Ringback Tone
Specifies the DTMF status signal the PBX sends to the VPS when the called extension is ringing.
Default
1
Value Range
Max. 4 digits (consisting of 0–9, *, #, and P [pause])
Maintenance Console Location
5.21 [3-8-1] VM(DTMF) Group—System Settings
Programming Manual References
None
Feature Manual References
None
VM DTMF Status Signal—Busy Tone
Specifies the DTMF status signal the PBX sends to the VPS when the called extension is busy.
Default
2
Value Range
Max. 4 digits (consisting of 0–9, *, #, and P [pause])
Maintenance Console Location
5.21 [3-8-1] VM(DTMF) Group—System Settings
Programming Manual References
None
Feature Manual References
None
448 PC Programming Manual Document Version 2010-11
5.21 [3-8-1] VM(DTMF) Group—System Settings
VM DTMF Status Signal—Reorder Tone
Specifies the DTMF status signal the PBX sends to the VPS when the dialed number is invalid.
Default
3
Value Range
Max. 4 digits (consisting of 0–9, *, #, and P [pause])
Maintenance Console Location
5.21 [3-8-1] VM(DTMF) Group—System Settings
Programming Manual References
None
Feature Manual References
None
VM DTMF Status Signal—DND Tone
Specifies the DTMF status signal the PBX sends to the VPS when the called extension is in DND mode.
Default
4
Value Range
Max. 4 digits (consisting of 0–9, *, #, and P [pause])
Maintenance Console Location
5.21 [3-8-1] VM(DTMF) Group—System Settings
Programming Manual References
None
Feature Manual References
None
VM DTMF Status Signal—Answer
Specifies the DTMF status signal the PBX sends to the VPS when the called extension has answered the call.
Default
5
Value Range
Max. 4 digits (consisting of 0–9, *, #, and P [pause])
Document Version 2010-11 PC Programming Manual 449
5.21 [3-8-1] VM(DTMF) Group—System Settings
Maintenance Console Location
5.21 [3-8-1] VM(DTMF) Group—System Settings
Programming Manual References
None
Feature Manual References
None
VM DTMF Status Signal—Confirm
Specifies the DTMF status signal the PBX sends to the VPS when a certain feature (e.g., Message Waiting)
has been successfully set or canceled on an extension.
Default
9
Value Range
Max. 4 digits (consisting of 0–9, *, #, and P [pause])
Maintenance Console Location
5.21 [3-8-1] VM(DTMF) Group—System Settings
Programming Manual References
None
Feature Manual References
None
VM DTMF Status Signal—Disconnect
Specifies the DTMF status signal the PBX sends to the VPS when the caller hangs up.
Default
#9
Value Range
Max. 4 digits (consisting of 0–9, *, #, and P [pause])
Maintenance Console Location
5.21 [3-8-1] VM(DTMF) Group—System Settings
Programming Manual References
None
450 PC Programming Manual Document Version 2010-11
5.21 [3-8-1] VM(DTMF) Group—System Settings
Feature Manual References
None
VM DTMF Status Signal—FWD to VM Ringback Tone
Specifies the DTMF status signal the PBX sends to the VPS when the call has been forwarded to the VPS and
the PBX is calling another port of the VPS.
Default
6
Value Range
Max. 4 digits (consisting of 0–9, *, #, and P [pause])
Maintenance Console Location
5.21 [3-8-1] VM(DTMF) Group—System Settings
Programming Manual References
None
Feature Manual References
None
VM DTMF Status Signal—FWD to VM Busy Tone
Specifies the DTMF status signal the PBX sends to the VPS when the call has been forwarded to the VPS and
all ports of the VPS are busy.
Default
7
Value Range
Max. 4 digits (consisting of 0–9, *, #, and P [pause])
Maintenance Console Location
5.21 [3-8-1] VM(DTMF) Group—System Settings
Programming Manual References
None
Feature Manual References
None
Document Version 2010-11 PC Programming Manual 451
5.21 [3-8-1] VM(DTMF) Group—System Settings
VM DTMF Status Signal—FWD to Extension Ringback Tone
Specifies the DTMF status signal the PBX sends to the VPS when the call has been forwarded to another
extension and the PBX is calling the destination extension.
Default
8
Value Range
Max. 4 digits (consisting of 0–9, *, #, and P [pause])
Maintenance Console Location
5.21 [3-8-1] VM(DTMF) Group—System Settings
Programming Manual References
None
Feature Manual References
None
VM DTMF Command—Recording Message
Specifies the DTMF command the PBX sends to the VPS when a call is forwarded, intercepted, or transferred
to the VPS, so that the caller can leave a message in a certain mailbox.
Default
H
Value Range
Max. 16 digits (consisting of 0–9, *, #, H [mailbox number], and P [pause])
Maintenance Console Location
5.21 [3-8-1] VM(DTMF) Group—System Settings
Programming Manual References
None
Feature Manual References
None
VM DTMF Command—Listening Message
Specifies the DTMF command the PBX sends to the VPS when an extension user answers a message waiting
notification from the VPS, so that the extension user can retrieve a new message in a certain mailbox without
having to dial the mailbox number manually.
452 PC Programming Manual Document Version 2010-11
5.21 [3-8-1] VM(DTMF) Group—System Settings
Default
*H
Value Range
Max. 16 digits (consisting of 0–9, *, #, H [mailbox number], and P [pause])
Maintenance Console Location
5.21 [3-8-1] VM(DTMF) Group—System Settings
Programming Manual References
None
Feature Manual References
11.1.3 Message Waiting
VM DTMF Command—Switching to AA
Specifies the DTMF command the PBX sends to the VPS to switch from VM Service Mode to AA Service Mode.
Default
#8
Value Range
Max. 16 digits (consisting of 0–9, *, #, H [mailbox number], and P [pause])
Maintenance Console Location
5.21 [3-8-1] VM(DTMF) Group—System Settings
Programming Manual References
None
Feature Manual References
None
VM DTMF Command—Switching to VM
Specifies the DTMF command the PBX sends to the VPS to switch from AA Service Mode to VM Service Mode.
Default
#6
Value Range
Max. 16 digits (consisting of 0–9, *, #, H [mailbox number], and P [pause])
Document Version 2010-11 PC Programming Manual 453
5.21 [3-8-1] VM(DTMF) Group—System Settings
Maintenance Console Location
5.21 [3-8-1] VM(DTMF) Group—System Settings
Programming Manual References
None
Feature Manual References
None
Timing—DTMF Length for VM
Specifies the length of DTMF signals the PBX sends to the VPS.
Default
80 ms
Value Range
80 ms, 160 ms
Maintenance Console Location
5.21 [3-8-1] VM(DTMF) Group—System Settings
Programming Manual References
None
Feature Manual References
None
Timing—Inter-digit Time
Specifies the length of pause time between DTMF signals the PBX sends to the VPS.
Default
80 ms
Value Range
80 ms, 160 ms
Maintenance Console Location
5.21 [3-8-1] VM(DTMF) Group—System Settings
Programming Manual References
None
454 PC Programming Manual Document Version 2010-11
5.21 [3-8-1] VM(DTMF) Group—System Settings
Feature Manual References
None
Timing—Waiting Time before Sending Follow on ID
Specifies the length of time that the PBX waits before sending the Follow on ID to the VPS after the VPS has
answered a call.
Default
1.5 s
Value Range
0.5 s, 1.0 s, 1.5 s, 2.0 s
Maintenance Console Location
5.21 [3-8-1] VM(DTMF) Group—System Settings
Programming Manual References
None
Feature Manual References
None
Timing—Waiting Time before Sending VM DTMF Status Signal
Specifies the length of time that the PBX waits before sending the DTMF status signal to the VPS after the
VPS has finished dialing.
Default
1.5 s
Value Range
0.5 s, 1.0 s, 1.5 s, 2.0 s
Maintenance Console Location
5.21 [3-8-1] VM(DTMF) Group—System Settings
Programming Manual References
None
Feature Manual References
None
Document Version 2010-11 PC Programming Manual 455
5.21 [3-8-1] VM(DTMF) Group—System Settings
Others—Call Waiting on VM Group
Enables the queuing of calls when all extension ports of the VM (DTMF) group are busy. (Call Waiting tone is
not sent to any VM port.)
Default
Enable
Value Range
Disable, Enable
Maintenance Console Location
5.21 [3-8-1] VM(DTMF) Group—System Settings
Programming Manual References
None
Feature Manual References
9.1.6 ICD Group Features—Queuing
Others—FWD to the VPS Sequence
Specifies which DTMF commands the VPS receives from the PBX when a call is forwarded to the VPS, so
that the VPS can answer the call either with a mailbox or in the AA service mode. It is also possible to send
no DTMF signal to the VPS.
Default
Answer by Mailbox
Value Range
None, Answer by Mailbox, AA
Maintenance Console Location
5.21 [3-8-1] VM(DTMF) Group—System Settings
Programming Manual References
None
Feature Manual References
None
Others—Intercept Routing to the VPS Sequence
Specifies which DTMF commands the VPS receives from the PBX when a call is intercepted to the VPS, so
that the VPS can answer the call either with a mailbox or in the AA service mode. It is also possible to send
no DTMF signal to the VPS.
456 PC Programming Manual Document Version 2010-11
5.21 [3-8-1] VM(DTMF) Group—System Settings
Default
None
Value Range
None, Answer by Mailbox, AA
Maintenance Console Location
5.21 [3-8-1] VM(DTMF) Group—System Settings
Programming Manual References
None
Feature Manual References
None
Others—Mailbox for Extension
Specifies whether the mailboxes use the same numbers as the extensions and incoming call distribution
groups, or use different numbers as programmed for each extension or incoming call distribution group.
Default
Extension Number
Value Range
Extension Number, Programmed Mailbox Number
Maintenance Console Location
5.21 [3-8-1] VM(DTMF) Group—System Settings
Programming Manual References
5.12 [3-5-1] Incoming Call Distribution Group—Group Settings—Miscellaneous— Programmed Mailbox No.
6.1 [4-1-1] Wired Extension—Extension Settings—Option 1— Programmed Mailbox No.
6.10 [4-2-1] Portable Station—Extension Settings—Option 1— Programmed Mailbox No.
Feature Manual References
None
Others—Message Waiting Lamp Control
Specifies whether the PBX or VPS cancels the Message Waiting feature (e.g., turning off the MESSAGE button
light) when an extension user answers the message waiting notification from the VPS.
Default
By PBX
Document Version 2010-11 PC Programming Manual 457
5.21 [3-8-1] VM(DTMF) Group—System Settings
Value Range
By PBX, By VM
Maintenance Console Location
5.21 [3-8-1] VM(DTMF) Group—System Settings
Programming Manual References
None
Feature Manual References
None
458 PC Programming Manual Document Version 2010-11
5.21 [3-8-1] VM(DTMF) Group—System Settings
5.22 [3-8-2] VM(DTMF) Group—Group Settings
A VM (DTMF) group has a floating extension number, and can be assigned as the destination for redirected
calls and incoming calls.
To assign members to the group, click Member List. To view a list of all programmed extension numbers and
types, click Extension List View.
Floating Ext. No.
Specifies the floating extension number of the VM (DTMF) group.
Default
Not stored.
Value Range
Max. 5 digits (consisting of 0–9)
Maintenance Console Location
5.22 [3-8-2] VM(DTMF) Group—Group Settings
Programming Manual References
None
Feature Manual References
19.1.3 Voice Mail (VM) Group
Group Name
Specifies the name of the VM (DTMF) group, which will be shown on the display of extensions that call the VM
(DTMF) group.
Default
Not stored.
Value Range
Max. 20 characters
Maintenance Console Location
5.22 [3-8-2] VM(DTMF) Group—Group Settings
Programming Manual References
None
Feature Manual References
19.1.3 Voice Mail (VM) Group
Document Version 2010-11 PC Programming Manual 459
5.22 [3-8-2] VM(DTMF) Group—Group Settings
Type
Specifies the initial service mode in which the VPS answers calls.
Default
AA
Value Range
AA, VM
Maintenance Console Location
5.22 [3-8-2] VM(DTMF) Group—Group Settings
Programming Manual References
None
Feature Manual References
19.1.5 Voice Mail DTMF Integration
460 PC Programming Manual Document Version 2010-11
5.22 [3-8-2] VM(DTMF) Group—Group Settings
5.23 [3-8-2] VM(DTMF) Group—Group Settings—
Member List
Select the group to program from the VM(DTMF) Group Number list.
To assign members to the group, enter directly or click Extension No. Setting (see 2.1.6 Extension Number
Setting). To copy members to another group, click Member List Copy, select the group, and click OK.
Extension Number of the SLT Port Connected to VM
Specifies the extension number assigned to the SLT port that is connected to the VPS.
Default
Not stored.
Value Range
Max. 5 digits (consisting of 0–9)
Maintenance Console Location
5.23 [3-8-2] VM(DTMF) Group—Group Settings—Member List
Programming Manual References
5.22 [3-8-2] VM(DTMF) Group—Group Settings
Feature Manual References
19.1.5 Voice Mail DTMF Integration
Extension Name
Indicates the name of the extension (reference only).
Default
Not stored.
Value Range
Max. 20 characters
Maintenance Console Location
5.23 [3-8-2] VM(DTMF) Group—Group Settings—Member List
Programming Manual References
5.22 [3-8-2] VM(DTMF) Group—Group Settings
Feature Manual References
19.1.5 Voice Mail DTMF Integration
Document Version 2010-11 PC Programming Manual 461
5.23 [3-8-2] VM(DTMF) Group—Group Settings—Member List
5.24 [3-9] PS Ring Group
A PS ring group is a group of PS extensions that receives incoming calls. Each group has a floating extension
number and name. One PS can belong to multiple PS ring groups. A maximum of 32 PS ring groups can be
programmed, each containing up to 28 (with the KX-TDA50), 128 (with the KX-TDA100/KX-TDA200) or 512
(with the KX-TDA600) PS extensions.
To add PSs to the PS Ring Group, click Member List.
Floating Extension Number
Specifies the floating extension number of the PS ring group.
Default
Not stored.
Value Range
Max. 5 digits (consisting of 0–9)
Maintenance Console Location
5.24 [3-9] PS Ring Group
Programming Manual References
None
Feature Manual References
13.1.28 PS—Ring Group
Group Name
Specifies the name of the PS ring group, which will be shown on the display of extensions that call the PS ring
group when Incoming Trunk Call Information Display on this screen is set to Called Number.
Default
Not stored.
Value Range
Max. 20 characters
Maintenance Console Location
5.24 [3-9] PS Ring Group
Programming Manual References
None
Feature Manual References
13.1.28 PS—Ring Group
462 PC Programming Manual Document Version 2010-11
5.24 [3-9] PS Ring Group
Incoming Trunk Call Information Display
Specifies the information of the incoming CO line call to be shown on the displays of the PSs that belong to
the PS ring group. If the caller’s name or called party’s name is not recognized, the telephone number will be
shown.
Default
Caller ID
Value Range
Caller ID, Called Number
Maintenance Console Location
5.24 [3-9] PS Ring Group
Programming Manual References
None
Feature Manual References
13.1.28 PS—Ring Group
Document Version 2010-11 PC Programming Manual 463
5.24 [3-9] PS Ring Group
5.25 [3-9] PS Ring Group—Member List
Each PS Ring Group can have up to 28 (with the KX-TDA50), 128 (with the KX-TDA100/KX-TDA200) or 512
(with the KX-TDA600) PS extensions assigned. Select the group to program from the PS Ring Group
Number list.
To assign members to the PS Ring Group, enter directly or click Extension No. Setting (see 2.1.6 Extension
Number Setting). To copy members to another group, click Member List Copy, select the group, and click
OK.
Extension Number
Specifies the extension number of the PS assigned to the PS Ring Group.
Default
Not stored.
Value Range
Max. 4 digits
Maintenance Console Location
5.25 [3-9] PS Ring Group—Member List
Programming Manual References
5.24 [3-9] PS Ring Group
6.10 [4-2-1] Portable Station—Extension Settings
Feature Manual References
13.1.28 PS—Ring Group
Extension Name
Indicates the name of the PS (reference only).
Default
Not stored.
Value Range
Max. 20 characters
Maintenance Console Location
5.25 [3-9] PS Ring Group—Member List
Programming Manual References
5.24 [3-9] PS Ring Group
6.10 [4-2-1] Portable Station—Extension Settings
464 PC Programming Manual Document Version 2010-11
5.25 [3-9] PS Ring Group—Member List
Feature Manual References
13.1.28 PS—Ring Group
Document Version 2010-11 PC Programming Manual 465
5.25 [3-9] PS Ring Group—Member List
5.26 [3-10] Conference Group (KX-TDA50 only)
A conference group is a group of extensions that receive conference group calls. One destination number can
be assigned to multiple conference groups. Up to 31 members can be assigned to each of 8 conference groups.
To assign members to a group, click Member List.
Conference Group Name
Specifies the name of the conference group.
Default
Not stored.
Value Range
Max. 20 characters
Maintenance Console Location
5.26 [3-10] Conference Group (KX-TDA50 only)
Programming Manual References
None
Feature Manual References
3.1.17 Conference Group Call (KX-TDA50 only)
466 PC Programming Manual Document Version 2010-11
5.26 [3-10] Conference Group (KX-TDA50 only)
5.27 [3-10] Conference Group—Member List
(KX-TDA50 only)
Up to 31 members can be assigned to each conference group. Select the group to program from the
Conference Group No. list.
To copy the numbers to another group, click Member list copy, select the group to copy to, and click OK.
To assign destinations for conference groups easily, click Extension No. Setting (see 2.1.6 Extension
Number Setting).
Dial Number
Specifies the destination number of each member of the conference group.
Default
Not stored.
Value Range
Max. 32 digits (consisting of 0–9, *, #, [ ] [Secret], and P [Pause])
Maintenance Console Location
5.27 [3-10] Conference Group—Member List (KX-TDA50 only)
Programming Manual References
5.26 [3-10] Conference Group (KX-TDA50 only)
Feature Manual References
3.1.17 Conference Group Call (KX-TDA50 only)
Extension Name
Indicates the name of the extension, when an extension number is specified in Dial Number above (reference
only).
Default
Not stored.
Value Range
Max. 20 characters
Maintenance Console Location
5.27 [3-10] Conference Group—Member List (KX-TDA50 only)
Programming Manual References
6.1 [4-1-1] Wired Extension—Extension Settings
Document Version 2010-11 PC Programming Manual 467
5.27 [3-10] Conference Group—Member List (KX-TDA50 only)
Feature Manual References
3.1.17 Conference Group Call (KX-TDA50 only)
468 PC Programming Manual Document Version 2010-11
5.27 [3-10] Conference Group—Member List (KX-TDA50 only)
Section 6
[4] Extension
Document Version 2010-11 PC Programming Manual 469
6.1 [4-1-1] Wired Extension—Extension Settings
For each slot in which an extension card is installed, a certain number of extension ports are displayed. For
each extension port, various extension settings can be assigned.
To assign a set of CLIP numbers automatically, click CLIP Generate. To assign names and tenants to
extension user groups, click Extension User Group Table. See 5.6 [3-2] Extension Group for more details.
Main
Shelf (KX-TDA600 only)
Indicates the shelf position (reference only).
Default
Current shelf number
Value Range
Shelf number
Maintenance Console Location
6.1 [4-1-1] Wired Extension—Extension Settings
Programming Manual References
None
Feature Manual References
None
Slot
Indicates the slot position of each extension card (reference only).
Default
Current slot number
Value Range
Slot number
Maintenance Console Location
6.1 [4-1-1] Wired Extension—Extension Settings
Programming Manual References
3.1 [1-1] Slot
Feature Manual References
None
470 PC Programming Manual Document Version 2010-11
6.1 [4-1-1] Wired Extension—Extension Settings
Port
Indicates the port number (reference only).
Default
Current port number
Value Range
Port number
Maintenance Console Location
6.1 [4-1-1] Wired Extension—Extension Settings
Programming Manual References
3.5 [1-1] Slot—Port Property - Extension Port
Feature Manual References
None
Extension Number
Specifies the extension number of the extension.
To change the extension number of a wired extension, follow the steps below:
1. Type the new extension number, then click Apply.
2. Set the status of the extension port to "OUS", then "INS".
When changing the extension number, make sure that the extension port is not in use. If the extension number
is changed while the port is in use, the new extension number will not come into effect.
Default
For KX-TDA50/KX-TDA100/KX-TDA200:
Starting at 101
For KX-TDA600:
Starting at 1001
(For port 01 of the first extension card that is installed. Extension numbers are preset for subsequent extensions
by adding one to the previous extension number.)
Value Range
Max. 5 digits (consisting of 0–9)
Maintenance Console Location
6.1 [4-1-1] Wired Extension—Extension Settings
Programming Manual References
3.6 [1-1] Slot—Port Property - Extension Port—Connection Command
Document Version 2010-11 PC Programming Manual 471
6.1 [4-1-1] Wired Extension—Extension Settings
Feature Manual References
None
Extension Name
Specifies the name of the extension.
Default
Not stored.
Value Range
Max. 20 characters
Maintenance Console Location
6.1 [4-1-1] Wired Extension—Extension Settings
Programming Manual References
None
Feature Manual References
None
Port Type
Indicates the extension port type (reference only).
Default
Current port type
Value Range
DPT: DPT port (DLC)
SLT: SLT port (SLC/ESLC/EMSLC/CSLC/ECSLC)
S-Hybrid: Super Hybrid port (DHLC)
S-Hybrid(SLT): XDP port of Super Hybrid port (DHLC)
S-Hybrid(S-DPT): Digital XDP port of Super Hybrid port (DHLC)
DPT(S-DPT): Digital XDP port of DPT port (DLC)
IP-EXT: IP-Extension port (IP-EXT)
For KX-TDA100/KX-TDA200/KX-TDA600 only:
ISDN: ISDN port (PRI)
OPX: T1-OPX port (T1)
Maintenance Console Location
6.1 [4-1-1] Wired Extension—Extension Settings
Programming Manual References
None
472 PC Programming Manual Document Version 2010-11
6.1 [4-1-1] Wired Extension—Extension Settings
Feature Manual References
5.1.7 Extension Port Configuration
Telephone Type
Indicates the type of telephone connected to the extension port (reference only).
Default
Current connected telephone type
Value Range
DPT (15V)/DPT (40V): DPT is connected.
APT (15V): APT is connected.
DSS: DSS Console is connected.
VM: VPS is connected.
SLT: SLT is connected (or no telephone is connected to the Super Hybrid or SLT port).
ISDN-Ext: ISDN telephone is connected.
No Connection: No telephone is connected.
CS: CS is connected.
CS-M: High-density CS is connected with its master port.
CS-S1–3: High-density CS is connected with its slave port.
IP-EXT: IP-PT is connected.
Maintenance Console Location
6.1 [4-1-1] Wired Extension—Extension Settings
Programming Manual References
None
Feature Manual References
None
Extension Group
Specifies the extension user group to which the extension belongs. Extension user groups are used to compose
tenants, call pickup groups and paging groups.
Default
1
Value Range
For KX-TDA50/KX-TDA100/KX-TDA200:
1–32
For KX-TDA600:
1–96
Document Version 2010-11 PC Programming Manual 473
6.1 [4-1-1] Wired Extension—Extension Settings
Maintenance Console Location
6.1 [4-1-1] Wired Extension—Extension Settings
Programming Manual References
None
Feature Manual References
7.1.1 GROUP FEATURES
17.1.3 Tenant Service
COS
Specifies the COS of the extension.
Default
1
Value Range
1–64
Maintenance Console Location
6.1 [4-1-1] Wired Extension—Extension Settings
Programming Manual References
4.11 [2-7-1] Class of Service—COS Settings
Feature Manual References
3.1.20 COS (Class of Service)
Extension PIN
Specifies the PIN of the extension.
CAUTION
There is a risk that fraudulent telephone calls will be made if a third party discovers a personal identification
number (PIN) (verification code PIN or extension PIN) of the PBX.
The cost of such calls will be billed to the owner/renter of the PBX.
To protect the PBX from this kind of fraudulent use, we strongly recommend:
a. Keeping PINs secret.
b. Selecting complex, random PINs that cannot be easily guessed.
c. Changing PINs frequently.
Default
Not stored.
Value Range
Max. 10 digits (consisting of 0-9)
474 PC Programming Manual Document Version 2010-11
6.1 [4-1-1] Wired Extension—Extension Settings
Maintenance Console Location
6.1 [4-1-1] Wired Extension—Extension Settings
Programming Manual References
None
Feature Manual References
5.1.6 Extension PIN (Personal Identification Number)
Intercept Destination
Shelf (KX-TDA600 only)
Indicates the shelf position (reference only).
Default
Current shelf number
Value Range
Shelf number
Maintenance Console Location
6.1 [4-1-1] Wired Extension—Extension Settings
Programming Manual References
None
Feature Manual References
None
Slot
Indicates the slot position of each extension card (reference only).
Default
Current slot number
Value Range
Slot number
Maintenance Console Location
6.1 [4-1-1] Wired Extension—Extension Settings
Programming Manual References
None
Document Version 2010-11 PC Programming Manual 475
6.1 [4-1-1] Wired Extension—Extension Settings
Feature Manual References
None
Port
Indicates the port number (reference only).
Default
Current port number
Value Range
Port number
Maintenance Console Location
6.1 [4-1-1] Wired Extension—Extension Settings
Programming Manual References
3.5 [1-1] Slot—Port Property - Extension Port
Feature Manual References
None
Extension Number
Specifies the extension number of the extension.
To change the extension number of a wired extension, follow the steps below:
1. Type the new extension number, then click Apply.
2. Set the status of the extension port to "OUS", then "INS".
When changing the extension number, make sure that the extension port is not in use. If the extension number
is changed while the port is in use, the new extension number will not come into effect.
Default
For KX-TDA50/KX-TDA100/KX-TDA200:
Starting at 101
For KX-TDA600:
Starting at 1001
(For port 01 of the first extension card that is installed. Extension numbers are preset for subsequent extensions
by adding one to the previous extension number.)
Value Range
Max. 5 digits (consisting of 0–9)
Maintenance Console Location
6.1 [4-1-1] Wired Extension—Extension Settings
476 PC Programming Manual Document Version 2010-11
6.1 [4-1-1] Wired Extension—Extension Settings
Programming Manual References
3.6 [1-1] Slot—Port Property - Extension Port—Connection Command
Feature Manual References
None
Extension Name
Specifies the name of the extension.
Default
Not stored.
Value Range
Max. 20 characters
Maintenance Console Location
6.1 [4-1-1] Wired Extension—Extension Settings
Programming Manual References
None
Feature Manual References
None
Intercept Destination—When called party does not answer—Day, Lunch,
Break, Night
Specifies the Intercept Routing destination of calls in each time mode for Intercept Routing–No Answer and
Intercept Routing–DND.
Note that Intercept Routing–Busy calls are routed using Intercept Destination—When Called Party is
Busy below.
Default
Not stored.
Value Range
Max. 32 digits (consisting of 0–9, *, #, [ ] [Secret], and P [Pause])
Maintenance Console Location
6.1 [4-1-1] Wired Extension—Extension Settings
Programming Manual References
6.1 [4-1-1] Wired Extension—Extension Settings—Intercept Destination— Intercept Destination—When
Called Party is Busy
Document Version 2010-11 PC Programming Manual 477
6.1 [4-1-1] Wired Extension—Extension Settings
Feature Manual References
9.1.11 Intercept Routing
Intercept Destination—When Called Party is Busy
Specifies the Intercept Routing destination of calls when the extension is busy.
Default
Not stored.
Value Range
Max. 32 digits (consisting of 0–9, *, #, [ ] [Secret], and P [Pause])
Maintenance Console Location
6.1 [4-1-1] Wired Extension—Extension Settings
Programming Manual References
None
Feature Manual References
9.1.11 Intercept Routing
Intercept No Answer Time
Shelf (KX-TDA600 only)
Indicates the shelf position (reference only).
Default
Current shelf number
Value Range
Shelf number
Maintenance Console Location
6.1 [4-1-1] Wired Extension—Extension Settings
Programming Manual References
None
Feature Manual References
None
Slot
Indicates the slot position of each extension card (reference only).
478 PC Programming Manual Document Version 2010-11
6.1 [4-1-1] Wired Extension—Extension Settings
Default
Current slot number
Value Range
Slot number
Maintenance Console Location
6.1 [4-1-1] Wired Extension—Extension Settings
Programming Manual References
None
Feature Manual References
None
Port
Indicates the port number (reference only).
Default
Current port number
Value Range
Port number
Maintenance Console Location
6.1 [4-1-1] Wired Extension—Extension Settings
Programming Manual References
3.5 [1-1] Slot—Port Property - Extension Port
Feature Manual References
None
Extension Number
Specifies the extension number of the extension.
To change the extension number of a wired extension, follow the steps below:
1. Type the new extension number, then click Apply.
2. Set the status of the extension port to "OUS", then "INS".
When changing the extension number, make sure that the extension port is not in use. If the extension number
is changed while the port is in use, the new extension number will not come into effect.
Default
For KX-TDA50/KX-TDA100/KX-TDA200:
Starting at 101
Document Version 2010-11 PC Programming Manual 479
6.1 [4-1-1] Wired Extension—Extension Settings
For KX-TDA600:
Starting at 1001
(For port 01 of the first extension card that is installed. Extension numbers are preset for subsequent extensions
by adding one to the previous extension number.)
Value Range
Max. 5 digits (consisting of 0–9)
Maintenance Console Location
6.1 [4-1-1] Wired Extension—Extension Settings
Programming Manual References
3.6 [1-1] Slot—Port Property - Extension Port—Connection Command
Feature Manual References
None
Extension Name
Specifies the name of the extension.
Default
Not stored.
Value Range
Max. 20 characters
Maintenance Console Location
6.1 [4-1-1] Wired Extension—Extension Settings
Programming Manual References
None
Feature Manual References
None
Intercept No Answer Time—Day, Lunch, Break, Night
Specifies the length of time until an unanswered call is redirected to the intercept routing destination in each
time mode.
When this setting is set to "0", the system timer is used.
Default
0
480 PC Programming Manual Document Version 2010-11
6.1 [4-1-1] Wired Extension—Extension Settings
Value Range
0–240 s
Maintenance Console Location
6.1 [4-1-1] Wired Extension—Extension Settings
Programming Manual References
4.4 [2-3] Timers & Counters—Dial / IRNA / Recall / Tone— Intercept Routing No Answer (IRNA)—Day,
Lunch, Break, Night
Feature Manual References
9.1.11 Intercept Routing
ISDN CLIP
Shelf (KX-TDA600 only)
Indicates the shelf position (reference only).
Default
Current shelf number
Value Range
Shelf number
Maintenance Console Location
6.1 [4-1-1] Wired Extension—Extension Settings
Programming Manual References
None
Feature Manual References
None
Slot
Indicates the slot position of each extension card (reference only).
Default
Current slot number
Value Range
Slot number
Document Version 2010-11 PC Programming Manual 481
6.1 [4-1-1] Wired Extension—Extension Settings
Maintenance Console Location
6.1 [4-1-1] Wired Extension—Extension Settings
Programming Manual References
None
Feature Manual References
None
Port
Indicates the port number (reference only).
Default
Current port number
Value Range
Port number
Maintenance Console Location
6.1 [4-1-1] Wired Extension—Extension Settings
Programming Manual References
3.5 [1-1] Slot—Port Property - Extension Port
Feature Manual References
None
Extension Number
Specifies the extension number of the extension.
To change the extension number of a wired extension, follow the steps below:
1. Type the new extension number, then click Apply.
2. Set the status of the extension port to "OUS", then "INS".
When changing the extension number, make sure that the extension port is not in use. If the extension number
is changed while the port is in use, the new extension number will not come into effect.
Default
For KX-TDA50/KX-TDA100/KX-TDA200:
Starting at 101
For KX-TDA600:
Starting at 1001
(For port 01 of the first extension card that is installed. Extension numbers are preset for subsequent extensions
by adding one to the previous extension number.)
482 PC Programming Manual Document Version 2010-11
6.1 [4-1-1] Wired Extension—Extension Settings
Value Range
Max. 5 digits (consisting of 0–9)
Maintenance Console Location
6.1 [4-1-1] Wired Extension—Extension Settings
Programming Manual References
3.6 [1-1] Slot—Port Property - Extension Port—Connection Command
Feature Manual References
None
Extension Name
Specifies the name of the extension.
Default
Not stored.
Value Range
Max. 20 characters
Maintenance Console Location
6.1 [4-1-1] Wired Extension—Extension Settings
Programming Manual References
None
Feature Manual References
None
CLIP ID
Specifies the CLIP number sent to the public network to show on the called party’s telephone display when
making a CO line call.
Default
Not stored.
Value Range
Max. 16 digits (consisting of 0–9, *, and #)
Maintenance Console Location
6.1 [4-1-1] Wired Extension—Extension Settings
Document Version 2010-11 PC Programming Manual 483
6.1 [4-1-1] Wired Extension—Extension Settings
Programming Manual References
None
Feature Manual References
3.1.13 CLIP (Calling Line Identification Presentation)
CLIP on Extension/CO (KX-TDA100/KX-TDA200/KX-TDA600 only)
Selects the CLIP number to show on the called party’s telephone.
Default
Extension
Value Range
Extension: Show the CLIP number specified in CLIP ID on the ISDN CLIP tab.
CO: Show the CLIP number specified in Subscriber Number in 3.14 [1-1] Slot—Port Property - PRI Port
(KX-TDA100/KX-TDA200/KX-TDA600 only).
Maintenance Console Location
6.1 [4-1-1] Wired Extension—Extension Settings
Programming Manual References
3.14 [1-1] Slot—Port Property - PRI Port (KX-TDA100/KX-TDA200/KX-TDA600 only)—CO Setting—
Subscriber Number
6.1 [4-1-1] Wired Extension—Extension Settings—ISDN CLIP— CLIP ID
Feature Manual References
3.1.13 CLIP (Calling Line Identification Presentation)
CLIR
Specifies whether to restrict the display of the CLIP number on the called party’s telephone when making a
public network CO line call.
Default
Disable
Value Range
Disable, Enable
Maintenance Console Location
6.1 [4-1-1] Wired Extension—Extension Settings
Programming Manual References
None
484 PC Programming Manual Document Version 2010-11
6.1 [4-1-1] Wired Extension—Extension Settings
Feature Manual References
3.1.13 CLIP (Calling Line Identification Presentation)
COLR
Specifies whether to restrict the display of the CLIP number of the extension on the caller’s telephone display
when answering a call.
Default
Disable
Value Range
Disable, Enable
Maintenance Console Location
6.1 [4-1-1] Wired Extension—Extension Settings
Programming Manual References
None
Feature Manual References
3.1.13 CLIP (Calling Line Identification Presentation)
Option 1
Shelf (KX-TDA600 only)
Indicates the shelf position (reference only).
Default
Current shelf number
Value Range
Shelf number
Maintenance Console Location
6.1 [4-1-1] Wired Extension—Extension Settings
Programming Manual References
None
Feature Manual References
None
Document Version 2010-11 PC Programming Manual 485
6.1 [4-1-1] Wired Extension—Extension Settings
Slot
Indicates the slot position of each extension card (reference only).
Default
Current slot number
Value Range
Slot number
Maintenance Console Location
6.1 [4-1-1] Wired Extension—Extension Settings
Programming Manual References
3.1 [1-1] Slot
Feature Manual References
None
Port
Indicates the port number (reference only).
Default
Current port number
Value Range
Port number
Maintenance Console Location
6.1 [4-1-1] Wired Extension—Extension Settings
Programming Manual References
3.5 [1-1] Slot—Port Property - Extension Port
Feature Manual References
None
Extension Number
Specifies the extension number of the extension.
To change the extension number of a wired extension, follow the steps below:
1. Type the new extension number, then click Apply.
2. Set the status of the extension port to "OUS", then "INS".
When changing the extension number, make sure that the extension port is not in use. If the extension number
is changed while the port is in use, the new extension number will not come into effect.
486 PC Programming Manual Document Version 2010-11
6.1 [4-1-1] Wired Extension—Extension Settings
Default
For KX-TDA50/KX-TDA100/KX-TDA200:
Starting at 101
For KX-TDA600:
Starting at 1001
(For port 01 of the first extension card that is installed. Extension numbers are preset for subsequent extensions
by adding one to the previous extension number.)
Value Range
Max. 5 digits (consisting of 0–9)
Maintenance Console Location
6.1 [4-1-1] Wired Extension—Extension Settings
Programming Manual References
3.6 [1-1] Slot—Port Property - Extension Port—Connection Command
Feature Manual References
None
Extension Name
Specifies the name of the extension.
Default
Not stored.
Value Range
Max. 20 characters
Maintenance Console Location
6.1 [4-1-1] Wired Extension—Extension Settings
Programming Manual References
None
Feature Manual References
None
Wireless XDP
Specifies the extension number of the PS with which Wireless XDP Parallel Mode is established. To enable
Wireless XDP Parallel Mode, the PS must be turned off once and then turned on after assigning this setting.
This setting is not available when the software is in Batch mode. In addition, a PS with PDN or SDN buttons
cannot be used for Wireless XDP Parallel Mode.
Document Version 2010-11 PC Programming Manual 487
6.1 [4-1-1] Wired Extension—Extension Settings
When changing the port type of an extension port in DPT Type—Type on the 3.5 [1-1] Slot—Port Property
- Extension Port screen, the Wireless XDP setting must be deleted first.
Default
Not stored.
Value Range
Max. 4 digits (consisting of 0–9)
Maintenance Console Location
6.1 [4-1-1] Wired Extension—Extension Settings
Programming Manual References
None
Feature Manual References
20.1.4 Wireless XDP Parallel Mode
Ring Pattern Table
Specifies the Ring Tone Pattern Table to be used by the extension.
Default
1
Value Range
1–8
Maintenance Console Location
6.1 [4-1-1] Wired Extension—Extension Settings
Programming Manual References
4.14 [2-8-1] Ring Tone Patterns—Call from CO
4.15 [2-8-2] Ring Tone Patterns—Call from Doorphone
4.16 [2-8-3] Ring Tone Patterns—Call from Others
Feature Manual References
15.1.2 Ring Tone Pattern Selection
Programmed Mailbox No.
Specifies the mailbox number of the extension’s mailbox for Voice Processing Systems (VPS) with DTMF
Integration.
Default
Same number as the corresponding extension number.
488 PC Programming Manual Document Version 2010-11
6.1 [4-1-1] Wired Extension—Extension Settings
Value Range
Max. 16 digits (consisting of 0–9, *, and #)
Maintenance Console Location
6.1 [4-1-1] Wired Extension—Extension Settings
Programming Manual References
None
Feature Manual References
19.1.5 Voice Mail DTMF Integration
Transfer Recall Destination
Specifies the transfer recall destination when an extension user transfers a call with the Call Transfer without
Announcement feature and the transferred call is not answered within a certain time period.
Default
Not stored.
Value Range
Max. 5 digits (consisting of 0–9)
Maintenance Console Location
6.1 [4-1-1] Wired Extension—Extension Settings
Programming Manual References
None
Feature Manual References
3.1.8 Call Transfer
ARS Itemized Code
Specifies the itemized billing code used by the ARS feature for identifying calls made from the extension for
accounting and billing purposes.
Default
Not stored.
Value Range
Max. 10 digits (consisting of 0–9, *, and #)
Document Version 2010-11 PC Programming Manual 489
6.1 [4-1-1] Wired Extension—Extension Settings
Maintenance Console Location
6.1 [4-1-1] Wired Extension—Extension Settings
Programming Manual References
10.6 [8-5] Carrier
Feature Manual References
19.1.1 Verification Code Entry
1.1.3 ARS (Automatic Route Selection)
Option 2
Shelf (KX-TDA600 only)
Indicates the shelf position (reference only).
Default
Current shelf number
Value Range
Shelf number
Maintenance Console Location
6.1 [4-1-1] Wired Extension—Extension Settings
Programming Manual References
None
Feature Manual References
None
Slot
Indicates the slot position of each extension card (reference only).
Default
Current slot number
Value Range
Slot number
Maintenance Console Location
6.1 [4-1-1] Wired Extension—Extension Settings
490 PC Programming Manual Document Version 2010-11
6.1 [4-1-1] Wired Extension—Extension Settings
Programming Manual References
3.1 [1-1] Slot
Feature Manual References
None
Port
Indicates the port number (reference only).
Default
Current port number
Value Range
Port number
Maintenance Console Location
6.1 [4-1-1] Wired Extension—Extension Settings
Programming Manual References
3.5 [1-1] Slot—Port Property - Extension Port
Feature Manual References
None
Extension Number
Specifies the extension number of the extension.
To change the extension number of a wired extension, follow the steps below:
1. Type the new extension number, then click Apply.
2. Set the status of the extension port to "OUS", then "INS".
When changing the extension number, make sure that the extension port is not in use. If the extension number
is changed while the port is in use, the new extension number will not come into effect.
Default
For KX-TDA50/KX-TDA100/KX-TDA200:
Starting at 101
For KX-TDA600:
Starting at 1001
(For port 01 of the first extension card that is installed. Extension numbers are preset for subsequent extensions
by adding one to the previous extension number.)
Value Range
Max. 5 digits (consisting of 0–9)
Document Version 2010-11 PC Programming Manual 491
6.1 [4-1-1] Wired Extension—Extension Settings
Maintenance Console Location
6.1 [4-1-1] Wired Extension—Extension Settings
Programming Manual References
3.6 [1-1] Slot—Port Property - Extension Port—Connection Command
Feature Manual References
None
Extension Name
Specifies the name of the extension.
Default
Not stored.
Value Range
Max. 20 characters
Maintenance Console Location
6.1 [4-1-1] Wired Extension—Extension Settings
Programming Manual References
None
Feature Manual References
None
Manual C. Waiting for Extension Call
Selects the method of receiving call waiting notification from other extensions.
Default
BSS
Value Range
Off: No notification
BSS: Tone from the handset or built-in speaker
OHCA: Voice from the built-in speaker
W-OHCA: Voice from the handset
Maintenance Console Location
6.1 [4-1-1] Wired Extension—Extension Settings
492 PC Programming Manual Document Version 2010-11
6.1 [4-1-1] Wired Extension—Extension Settings
Programming Manual References
None
Feature Manual References
3.1.9 CALL WAITING FEATURES
Automatic C. Waiting
Specifies whether to receive call waiting notifications for calls from a CO line, doorphone calls, and calls via
an incoming call distribution group.
Default
On
Value Range
Off, On
Maintenance Console Location
6.1 [4-1-1] Wired Extension—Extension Settings
Programming Manual References
None
Feature Manual References
3.1.9 CALL WAITING FEATURES
Pickup Dial Set
Sets or cancels the Hot Line feature. The number specified in Pickup Dial Number on this screen is dialed
automatically after going off-hook when the Hot Line feature is active.
Default
Off
Value Range
Off, On
Maintenance Console Location
6.1 [4-1-1] Wired Extension—Extension Settings
Programming Manual References
4.4 [2-3] Timers & Counters—Dial / IRNA / Recall / Tone— Dial—Hot Line (Pickup Dial) Start
Feature Manual References
8.1.6 Hot Line
Document Version 2010-11 PC Programming Manual 493
6.1 [4-1-1] Wired Extension—Extension Settings
Pickup Dial Number
Specifies the number to be dialed automatically after going off-hook when the Hot Line feature is active.
Default
Not stored.
Value Range
Max. 32 digits (consisting of 0–9, *, #, T [Transfer], [ ] [Secret], P [Pause], and F [Flash])
Maintenance Console Location
6.1 [4-1-1] Wired Extension—Extension Settings
Programming Manual References
None
Feature Manual References
8.1.6 Hot Line
Data Mode
Sets or cancels the protection against tones or interruptions from other extensions during communication.
Default
Off
Value Range
Off, On
Maintenance Console Location
6.1 [4-1-1] Wired Extension—Extension Settings
Programming Manual References
None
Feature Manual References
4.1.1 Data Line Security
Option 3
Shelf (KX-TDA600 only)
Indicates the shelf position (reference only).
Default
Current shelf number
494 PC Programming Manual Document Version 2010-11
6.1 [4-1-1] Wired Extension—Extension Settings
Value Range
Shelf number
Maintenance Console Location
6.1 [4-1-1] Wired Extension—Extension Settings
Programming Manual References
None
Feature Manual References
None
Slot
Indicates the slot position of each extension card (reference only).
Default
Current slot number
Value Range
Slot number
Maintenance Console Location
6.1 [4-1-1] Wired Extension—Extension Settings
Programming Manual References
3.1 [1-1] Slot
Feature Manual References
None
Port
Indicates the port number (reference only).
Default
Current port number
Value Range
Port number
Maintenance Console Location
6.1 [4-1-1] Wired Extension—Extension Settings
Document Version 2010-11 PC Programming Manual 495
6.1 [4-1-1] Wired Extension—Extension Settings
Programming Manual References
3.5 [1-1] Slot—Port Property - Extension Port
Feature Manual References
None
Extension Number
Specifies the extension number of the extension.
To change the extension number of a wired extension, follow the steps below:
1. Type the new extension number, then click Apply.
2. Set the status of the extension port to "OUS", then "INS".
When changing the extension number, make sure that the extension port is not in use. If the extension number
is changed while the port is in use, the new extension number will not come into effect.
Default
For KX-TDA50/KX-TDA100/KX-TDA200:
Starting at 101
For KX-TDA600:
Starting at 1001
(For port 01 of the first extension card that is installed. Extension numbers are preset for subsequent extensions
by adding one to the previous extension number.)
Value Range
Max. 5 digits (consisting of 0–9)
Maintenance Console Location
6.1 [4-1-1] Wired Extension—Extension Settings
Programming Manual References
3.6 [1-1] Slot—Port Property - Extension Port—Connection Command
Feature Manual References
None
Extension Name
Specifies the name of the extension.
Default
Not stored.
Value Range
Max. 20 characters
496 PC Programming Manual Document Version 2010-11
6.1 [4-1-1] Wired Extension—Extension Settings
Maintenance Console Location
6.1 [4-1-1] Wired Extension—Extension Settings
Programming Manual References
None
Feature Manual References
None
Call Pickup Deny
Specifies whether calls can be picked up by other extensions.
Default
Disable
Value Range
Disable: Allows other extension users to pick up calls to your extension
Enable: Prevents other extension users from picking up calls to your extension
Maintenance Console Location
6.1 [4-1-1] Wired Extension—Extension Settings
Programming Manual References
None
Feature Manual References
3.1.6 Call Pickup
Executive Override Deny
Specifies whether calls can be interrupted by other extensions.
Default
Disable
Value Range
Disable: Allows other extension users to interrupt an existing call
Enable: Prevents other extension users from interrupting an existing call
Maintenance Console Location
6.1 [4-1-1] Wired Extension—Extension Settings
Programming Manual References
None
Document Version 2010-11 PC Programming Manual 497
6.1 [4-1-1] Wired Extension—Extension Settings
Feature Manual References
5.1.3 Executive Busy Override
Absent Message
Specifies the Personal Absent Message which, unlike the System Absent Message, can be customized for
each extension.
Default
Not stored.
Value Range
Max. 16 characters
Maintenance Console Location
6.1 [4-1-1] Wired Extension—Extension Settings
Programming Manual References
None
Feature Manual References
1.1.1 Absent Message
Intercom Call by Voice
Selects the method of receiving intercom calls. When Deny Voice Call is selected, the extension will always
ring when receiving calls, regardless of how the caller wants to make the call.
Default
Tone Call
Value Range
Tone Call, Voice Call, Deny Voice Call
Maintenance Console Location
6.1 [4-1-1] Wired Extension—Extension Settings
Programming Manual References
None
Feature Manual References
9.1.13 Intercom Call
498 PC Programming Manual Document Version 2010-11
6.1 [4-1-1] Wired Extension—Extension Settings
Option 4
Shelf (KX-TDA600 only)
Indicates the shelf position (reference only).
Default
Current shelf number
Value Range
Shelf number
Maintenance Console Location
6.1 [4-1-1] Wired Extension—Extension Settings
Programming Manual References
None
Feature Manual References
None
Slot
Indicates the slot position of each extension card (reference only).
Default
Current slot number
Value Range
Slot number
Maintenance Console Location
6.1 [4-1-1] Wired Extension—Extension Settings
Programming Manual References
3.1 [1-1] Slot
Feature Manual References
None
Port
Indicates the port number (reference only).
Default
Current port number
Document Version 2010-11 PC Programming Manual 499
6.1 [4-1-1] Wired Extension—Extension Settings
Value Range
Port number
Maintenance Console Location
6.1 [4-1-1] Wired Extension—Extension Settings
Programming Manual References
3.5 [1-1] Slot—Port Property - Extension Port
Feature Manual References
None
Extension Number
Specifies the extension number of the extension.
To change the extension number of a wired extension, follow the steps below:
1. Type the new extension number, then click Apply.
2. Set the status of the extension port to "OUS", then "INS".
When changing the extension number, make sure that the extension port is not in use. If the extension number
is changed while the port is in use, the new extension number will not come into effect.
Default
For KX-TDA50/KX-TDA100/KX-TDA200:
Starting at 101
For KX-TDA600:
Starting at 1001
(For port 01 of the first extension card that is installed. Extension numbers are preset for subsequent extensions
by adding one to the previous extension number.)
Value Range
Max. 5 digits (consisting of 0–9)
Maintenance Console Location
6.1 [4-1-1] Wired Extension—Extension Settings
Programming Manual References
3.6 [1-1] Slot—Port Property - Extension Port—Connection Command
Feature Manual References
None
Extension Name
Specifies the name of the extension.
500 PC Programming Manual Document Version 2010-11
6.1 [4-1-1] Wired Extension—Extension Settings
Default
Not stored.
Value Range
Max. 20 characters
Maintenance Console Location
6.1 [4-1-1] Wired Extension—Extension Settings
Programming Manual References
None
Feature Manual References
None
Outgoing Preferred Line
Selects the line to be seized after going off-hook to make a call.
Default
For KX-TDA50:
ICM
For KX-TDA100/KX-TDA200/KX-TDA600:
ICM/PDN
Value Range
For KX-TDA50:
No Line: No line is seized.
Idle: An idle CO line is seized automatically from the programmed trunk groups.
ICM: An extension line is seized.
F-1–F-36: A CO line programmed for a flexible button (F-1–F-36) is seized. A flexible button customized as a
Single-CO, Group-CO, Loop-CO, or ICD Group button must be selected.
For KX-TDA100/KX-TDA200/KX-TDA600:
No Line: No line is seized.
Idle: An idle CO line is seized automatically from the programmed trunk groups.
ICM/PDN: An extension line is seized, or, for a PDN extension, an idle PDN button is selected.
F-1–F-36: A CO line programmed for a flexible button (F-1–F-36) is seized. A flexible button customized as a
Single-CO, Group-CO, Loop-CO, or ICD Group button must be selected.
Maintenance Console Location
6.1 [4-1-1] Wired Extension—Extension Settings
Programming Manual References
6.5 [4-1-4] Wired Extension—Flexible Button
Document Version 2010-11 PC Programming Manual 501
6.1 [4-1-1] Wired Extension—Extension Settings
Feature Manual References
10.1.3 Line Preference—Outgoing
Incoming Preferred Line
Selects the line on which an incoming call is answered after going off-hook.
Note that even if a specific PDN button is selected here, a call ringing at any PDN button on the extension will
be answered when going off-hook.
Default
Ringing Line
Value Range
No Line: No line is selected. Select a line by pressing the desired Line Access button to answer a call.
Ringing Line: The longest ringing call is selected.
PDN (KX-TDA100/KX-TDA200/KX-TDA600 only): The call arriving at any PDN button is selected.
F-1–F-36: The call arriving at a flexible button (F-1–F-36) is selected. A flexible button customized as a
Single-CO, Group-CO, Loop-CO, or ICD Group button must be selected.
Maintenance Console Location
6.1 [4-1-1] Wired Extension—Extension Settings
Programming Manual References
6.5 [4-1-4] Wired Extension—Flexible Button
Feature Manual References
10.1.2 Line Preference—Incoming
Call Waiting Tone Type
Selects the type of Call Waiting tone sent to the busy extension.
Default
CW Tone 1
Value Range
CW Tone 1, CW Tone 2
Maintenance Console Location
6.1 [4-1-1] Wired Extension—Extension Settings
Programming Manual References
None
Feature Manual References
3.1.10 Call Waiting Tone
502 PC Programming Manual Document Version 2010-11
6.1 [4-1-1] Wired Extension—Extension Settings
LCS Recording Mode
Specifies whether to continue or stop recording the message in the extension’s mailbox when the extension
user answers a call that was being monitored.
Default
Stop Record
Value Range
Stop Record, Keep Record
Maintenance Console Location
6.1 [4-1-1] Wired Extension—Extension Settings
Programming Manual References
None
Feature Manual References
19.1.4 Voice Mail DPT (Digital) Integration
LCS Answer Mode
Specifies whether the extension’s mailbox is monitored in Hands-free or Private mode.
Default
Hands free
Value Range
Hands free: Monitor through the built-in speaker
Private: Monitor through the handset or the built-in speaker after hearing a warning tone
Maintenance Console Location
6.1 [4-1-1] Wired Extension—Extension Settings
Programming Manual References
None
Feature Manual References
8.1.2 Hands-free Operation
19.1.4 Voice Mail DPT (Digital) Integration
Option 5
Shelf (KX-TDA600 only)
Indicates the shelf position (reference only).
Document Version 2010-11 PC Programming Manual 503
6.1 [4-1-1] Wired Extension—Extension Settings
Default
Current shelf number
Value Range
Shelf number
Maintenance Console Location
6.1 [4-1-1] Wired Extension—Extension Settings
Programming Manual References
None
Feature Manual References
None
Slot
Indicates the slot position of each extension card (reference only).
Default
Current slot number
Value Range
Slot number
Maintenance Console Location
6.1 [4-1-1] Wired Extension—Extension Settings
Programming Manual References
3.1 [1-1] Slot
Feature Manual References
None
Port
Indicates the port number (reference only).
Default
Current port number
Value Range
Port number
504 PC Programming Manual Document Version 2010-11
6.1 [4-1-1] Wired Extension—Extension Settings
Maintenance Console Location
6.1 [4-1-1] Wired Extension—Extension Settings
Programming Manual References
3.5 [1-1] Slot—Port Property - Extension Port
Feature Manual References
None
Extension Number
Specifies the extension number of the extension.
To change the extension number of a wired extension, follow the steps below:
1. Type the new extension number, then click Apply.
2. Set the status of the extension port to "OUS", then "INS".
When changing the extension number, make sure that the extension port is not in use. If the extension number
is changed while the port is in use, the new extension number will not come into effect.
Default
For KX-TDA50/KX-TDA100/KX-TDA200:
Starting at 101
For KX-TDA600:
Starting at 1001
(For port 01 of the first extension card that is installed. Extension numbers are preset for subsequent extensions
by adding one to the previous extension number.)
Value Range
Max. 5 digits (consisting of 0–9)
Maintenance Console Location
6.1 [4-1-1] Wired Extension—Extension Settings
Programming Manual References
3.6 [1-1] Slot—Port Property - Extension Port—Connection Command
Feature Manual References
None
Extension Name
Specifies the name of the extension.
Default
Not stored.
Document Version 2010-11 PC Programming Manual 505
6.1 [4-1-1] Wired Extension—Extension Settings
Value Range
Max. 20 characters
Maintenance Console Location
6.1 [4-1-1] Wired Extension—Extension Settings
Programming Manual References
None
Feature Manual References
None
Display Language
Selects the display language of the extension telephone.
Default
Language1
Value Range
Language1–Language5
Maintenance Console Location
6.1 [4-1-1] Wired Extension—Extension Settings
Programming Manual References
None
Feature Manual References
4.1.8 Display Information
Incoming Call Display
Selects which caller information is shown on the first line of the extension’s display.
Default
Caller ID Name
Value Range
Caller ID Name, CO Line Name, DID Name
Maintenance Console Location
6.1 [4-1-1] Wired Extension—Extension Settings
506 PC Programming Manual Document Version 2010-11
6.1 [4-1-1] Wired Extension—Extension Settings
Programming Manual References
None
Feature Manual References
4.1.8 Display Information
Automatic LCD Switch when Start Talking
Enables the first line of the display to show the call duration automatically after answering a CO line call.
Default
Enable
Value Range
Disable, Enable
Maintenance Console Location
6.1 [4-1-1] Wired Extension—Extension Settings
Programming Manual References
None
Feature Manual References
4.1.8 Display Information
Key Pad Tone
Specifies whether key pad tones are heard when dialing.
Default
On
Value Range
Off, On
Maintenance Console Location
6.1 [4-1-1] Wired Extension—Extension Settings
Programming Manual References
None
Feature Manual References
None
Document Version 2010-11 PC Programming Manual 507
6.1 [4-1-1] Wired Extension—Extension Settings
Automatic Answer for CO Call
Enables the extension to answer an incoming CO line call automatically after a certain number of rings without
going off-hook, when Hands-free Answerback has been set on the extension. This setting is only effective
when Forced Automatic Answer on this screen has been set to Off.
Default
Disable
Value Range
Disable, Enable
Maintenance Console Location
6.1 [4-1-1] Wired Extension—Extension Settings
Programming Manual References
None
Feature Manual References
8.1.1 Hands-free Answerback
Option 6
Shelf (KX-TDA600 only)
Indicates the shelf position (reference only).
Default
Current shelf number
Value Range
Shelf number
Maintenance Console Location
6.1 [4-1-1] Wired Extension—Extension Settings
Programming Manual References
None
Feature Manual References
None
Slot
Indicates the slot position of each extension card (reference only).
508 PC Programming Manual Document Version 2010-11
6.1 [4-1-1] Wired Extension—Extension Settings
Default
Current slot number
Value Range
Slot number
Maintenance Console Location
6.1 [4-1-1] Wired Extension—Extension Settings
Programming Manual References
3.1 [1-1] Slot
Feature Manual References
None
Port
Indicates the port number (reference only).
Default
Current port number
Value Range
Port number
Maintenance Console Location
6.1 [4-1-1] Wired Extension—Extension Settings
Programming Manual References
3.5 [1-1] Slot—Port Property - Extension Port
Feature Manual References
None
Extension Number
Specifies the extension number of the extension.
To change the extension number of a wired extension, follow the steps below:
1. Type the new extension number, then click Apply.
2. Set the status of the extension port to "OUS", then "INS".
When changing the extension number, make sure that the extension port is not in use. If the extension number
is changed while the port is in use, the new extension number will not come into effect.
Default
For KX-TDA50/KX-TDA100/KX-TDA200:
Starting at 101
Document Version 2010-11 PC Programming Manual 509
6.1 [4-1-1] Wired Extension—Extension Settings
For KX-TDA600:
Starting at 1001
(For port 01 of the first extension card that is installed. Extension numbers are preset for subsequent extensions
by adding one to the previous extension number.)
Value Range
Max. 5 digits (consisting of 0–9)
Maintenance Console Location
6.1 [4-1-1] Wired Extension—Extension Settings
Programming Manual References
3.6 [1-1] Slot—Port Property - Extension Port—Connection Command
Feature Manual References
None
Extension Name
Specifies the name of the extension.
Default
Not stored.
Value Range
Max. 20 characters
Maintenance Console Location
6.1 [4-1-1] Wired Extension—Extension Settings
Programming Manual References
None
Feature Manual References
None
Forced Automatic Answer
Specifies whether the extension automatically answers all incoming calls (both intercom and CO line calls)
without going off-hook, regardless of the Hands-free Answerback setting.
Default
Off
510 PC Programming Manual Document Version 2010-11
6.1 [4-1-1] Wired Extension—Extension Settings
Value Range
Off, On
Maintenance Console Location
6.1 [4-1-1] Wired Extension—Extension Settings
Programming Manual References
None
Feature Manual References
None
Flexible Button Programming Mode
Specifies whether the extension user can modify all flexible buttons without limitation, or only the One-touch
Dialing buttons. When the mode is set to One-touch Dial, there is no need to enter "2" before the number
when customizing a One-touch Dialing button.
Default
No Limitation
Value Range
No Limitation, One-touch Dial
Maintenance Console Location
6.1 [4-1-1] Wired Extension—Extension Settings
Programming Manual References
None
Feature Manual References
None
ICM Tone
Selects the ring tone for incoming calls arriving at the INTERCOM button or PDN buttons. Note that the ring
tone specified here is applied to all PDN buttons on an extension.
Default
1
Value Range
KX-DT300 series (except KX-DT321)/KX-T7600 series/IP-PT (except KX-NT265/KX-NT321): 1–30
KX-DT321/KX-NT265/KX-NT321: 1–8 (Even if ring tone 9–30 is selected, ring tone 1 is heard.)
Other telephones: 1–8 (Even if ring tone 9–30 is selected, ring tone 2 is heard.)
Document Version 2010-11 PC Programming Manual 511
6.1 [4-1-1] Wired Extension—Extension Settings
Maintenance Console Location
6.1 [4-1-1] Wired Extension—Extension Settings
Programming Manual References
None
Feature Manual References
None
Display Lock / SVM Lock
Locks or unlocks the Incoming Call Log and Simplified Voice Message Log display (i.e., specifies whether
other extension users can see the Incoming Call Log and SVM Log information at the extension).
Default
Unlock
Value Range
Unlock, Lock
Maintenance Console Location
6.1 [4-1-1] Wired Extension—Extension Settings
Programming Manual References
None
Feature Manual References
3.1.3 Call Log, Incoming
16.1.5 SVM (Simplified Voice Message)
Paging Deny
Specifies whether paging of the extension from other extensions is enabled.
Default
Disable
Value Range
Disable, Enable
Maintenance Console Location
6.1 [4-1-1] Wired Extension—Extension Settings
Programming Manual References
None
512 PC Programming Manual Document Version 2010-11
6.1 [4-1-1] Wired Extension—Extension Settings
Feature Manual References
13.1.1 Paging
Option 7
Shelf (KX-TDA600 only)
Indicates the shelf position (reference only).
Default
Current shelf number
Value Range
Shelf number
Maintenance Console Location
6.1 [4-1-1] Wired Extension—Extension Settings
Programming Manual References
None
Feature Manual References
None
Slot
Indicates the slot position of each extension card (reference only).
Default
Current slot number
Value Range
Slot number
Maintenance Console Location
6.1 [4-1-1] Wired Extension—Extension Settings
Programming Manual References
3.1 [1-1] Slot
Feature Manual References
None
Port
Indicates the port number (reference only).
Document Version 2010-11 PC Programming Manual 513
6.1 [4-1-1] Wired Extension—Extension Settings
Default
Current port number
Value Range
Port number
Maintenance Console Location
6.1 [4-1-1] Wired Extension—Extension Settings
Programming Manual References
3.5 [1-1] Slot—Port Property - Extension Port
Feature Manual References
None
Extension Number
Specifies the extension number of the extension.
To change the extension number of a wired extension, follow the steps below:
1. Type the new extension number, then click Apply.
2. Set the status of the extension port to "OUS", then "INS".
When changing the extension number, make sure that the extension port is not in use. If the extension number
is changed while the port is in use, the new extension number will not come into effect.
Default
For KX-TDA50/KX-TDA100/KX-TDA200:
Starting at 101
For KX-TDA600:
Starting at 1001
(For port 01 of the first extension card that is installed. Extension numbers are preset for subsequent extensions
by adding one to the previous extension number.)
Value Range
Max. 5 digits (consisting of 0–9)
Maintenance Console Location
6.1 [4-1-1] Wired Extension—Extension Settings
Programming Manual References
3.6 [1-1] Slot—Port Property - Extension Port—Connection Command
Feature Manual References
None
514 PC Programming Manual Document Version 2010-11
6.1 [4-1-1] Wired Extension—Extension Settings
Extension Name
Specifies the name of the extension.
Default
Not stored.
Value Range
Max. 20 characters
Maintenance Console Location
6.1 [4-1-1] Wired Extension—Extension Settings
Programming Manual References
None
Feature Manual References
None
Character Input Mode
Selects the character table to be used for entering characters.
Default
Table 1
Value Range
Table 1: Standard mode
Table 2: Option mode
Maintenance Console Location
6.1 [4-1-1] Wired Extension—Extension Settings
Programming Manual References
None
Feature Manual References
None
Flash Mode during CO Conversation
Selects the function of the FLASH/RECALL button during a CO line conversation.
Default
Flash Recall
Document Version 2010-11 PC Programming Manual 515
6.1 [4-1-1] Wired Extension—Extension Settings
Value Range
EFA, Terminate, Flash Recall
Maintenance Console Location
6.1 [4-1-1] Wired Extension—Extension Settings
Programming Manual References
None
Feature Manual References
5.1.1 EFA (External Feature Access)
6.1.2 Flash/Recall/Terminate
Incoming Call Log Memory
Specifies the number of incoming CO line calls that are retained in the extension’s Incoming Call Log memory.
Default
10
Value Range
0–100
Maintenance Console Location
6.1 [4-1-1] Wired Extension—Extension Settings
Programming Manual References
None
Feature Manual References
3.1.3 Call Log, Incoming
Outgoing Call Log Memory
Specifies the number of telephone numbers dialed by the extension that are retained in the extension’s
Outgoing Call Log memory.
Default
5
Value Range
1–100
516 PC Programming Manual Document Version 2010-11
6.1 [4-1-1] Wired Extension—Extension Settings
Maintenance Console Location
6.1 [4-1-1] Wired Extension—Extension Settings
Programming Manual References
None
Feature Manual References
15.1.1 Redial, Last Number
ISDN Bearer (KX-TDA100/KX-TDA200/KX-TDA600 only)
Selects the ISDN bearer mode. When Automatic is selected, the bearer mode is set automatically depending
on the extension’s telephone type as follows:
PT: Speech
SLT: Audio
Default
Automatic
Value Range
Automatic, Speech, Audio
Maintenance Console Location
6.1 [4-1-1] Wired Extension—Extension Settings
Programming Manual References
None
Feature Manual References
9.1.16 ISDN (INTEGRATED SERVICES DIGITAL NETWORK) FEATURES
Option 8
Shelf (KX-TDA600 only)
Indicates the shelf position (reference only).
Default
Current shelf number
Value Range
Shelf number
Maintenance Console Location
6.1 [4-1-1] Wired Extension—Extension Settings
Document Version 2010-11 PC Programming Manual 517
6.1 [4-1-1] Wired Extension—Extension Settings
Programming Manual References
None
Feature Manual References
None
Slot
Indicates the slot position of each extension card (reference only).
Default
Current slot number
Value Range
Slot number
Maintenance Console Location
6.1 [4-1-1] Wired Extension—Extension Settings
Programming Manual References
None
Feature Manual References
None
Port
Indicates the port number (reference only).
Default
Current port number
Value Range
Port number
Maintenance Console Location
6.1 [4-1-1] Wired Extension—Extension Settings
Programming Manual References
3.5 [1-1] Slot—Port Property - Extension Port
Feature Manual References
None
518 PC Programming Manual Document Version 2010-11
6.1 [4-1-1] Wired Extension—Extension Settings
Extension Number
Specifies the extension number of the extension.
To change the extension number of a wired extension, follow the steps below:
1. Type the new extension number, then click Apply.
2. Set the status of the extension port to "OUS", then "INS".
When changing the extension number, make sure that the extension port is not in use. If the extension number
is changed while the port is in use, the new extension number will not come into effect.
Default
For KX-TDA50/KX-TDA100/KX-TDA200:
Starting at 101
For KX-TDA600:
Starting at 1001
(For port 01 of the first extension card that is installed. Extension numbers are preset for subsequent extensions
by adding one to the previous extension number.)
Value Range
Max. 5 digits (consisting of 0–9)
Maintenance Console Location
6.1 [4-1-1] Wired Extension—Extension Settings
Programming Manual References
3.6 [1-1] Slot—Port Property - Extension Port—Connection Command
Feature Manual References
None
Extension Name
Specifies the name of the extension.
Default
Not stored.
Value Range
Max. 20 characters
Maintenance Console Location
6.1 [4-1-1] Wired Extension—Extension Settings
Programming Manual References
None
Document Version 2010-11 PC Programming Manual 519
6.1 [4-1-1] Wired Extension—Extension Settings
Feature Manual References
None
Group CW w/o Tone (Ring after Call)
Enables an incoming call to an incoming call distribution group to arrive at a previously busy extension at the
moment that the extension goes on-hook for the previous call.
Default
Enable
Value Range
Disable, Enable
Maintenance Console Location
6.1 [4-1-1] Wired Extension—Extension Settings
Programming Manual References
None
Feature Manual References
None
Extension Caller ID
Enables the extension to send Caller ID information to an SLT.
Note that for KX-TDA50, the setting of this parameter is only effective when a resource for sending extension
Caller ID is assigned in Extension Caller ID Resource-1, 2 (KX-TDA50 only) for the port in 4.18 [2-10]
Extension CID Settings.
Default
Enable
Value Range
Disable, Enable
Maintenance Console Location
6.1 [4-1-1] Wired Extension—Extension Settings
Programming Manual References
4.18 [2-10] Extension CID Settings— Extension Caller ID Resource-1, 2 (KX-TDA50 only)
Feature Manual References
3.1.1 Caller ID
520 PC Programming Manual Document Version 2010-11
6.1 [4-1-1] Wired Extension—Extension Settings
Incoming Call Wait Timer for Extension Caller ID
Specifies the length of time that the ringing for a call is delayed when the call follows immediately after the
previous unanswered call. When receiving two calls in quick succession (e.g., when a call waiting in a queue
is directed to an extension immediately after the previous unanswered call stops ringing), some SLTs require
a pause, after the first call stops ringing, to receive the second call’s Caller ID information.
Note that for the KX-TDA50, the setting of this parameter is only effective when a resource for sending
extension Caller ID is assigned in Extension Caller ID Resource-1, 2 (KX-TDA50 only) for the port in
4.18 [2-10] Extension CID Settings.
Default
0
Value Range
0–15 s
Maintenance Console Location
6.1 [4-1-1] Wired Extension—Extension Settings
Programming Manual References
4.18 [2-10] Extension CID Settings— Extension Caller ID Resource-1, 2 (KX-TDA50 only)
Feature Manual References
3.1.1 Caller ID
SLT MW Mode (KX-TDA100/KX-TDA200/KX-TDA600 only)
Enables the use of the Message Waiting Lamp on an SLT extension connected to the extension port.
Default
Disable
Value Range
Disable, MW-Lamp
Maintenance Console Location
6.1 [4-1-1] Wired Extension—Extension Settings
Programming Manual References
None
Feature Manual References
11.1.3 Message Waiting
Document Version 2010-11 PC Programming Manual 521
6.1 [4-1-1] Wired Extension—Extension Settings
Wrap-up Timer
Specifies the length of time that must pass after completing a call before an extension will accept another call
when logged in as a member of an Incoming Call Distribution Group.
This timer is used when " Options—Wrap-up Timer based on" is set to "Extension" in 5.15 [3-5-3]
Incoming Call Distribution Group—Miscellaneous.
Default
0 s
Value Range
0–3000 s
Maintenance Console Location
6.1 [4-1-1] Wired Extension—Extension Settings
Programming Manual References
5.13 [3-5-1] Incoming Call Distribution Group—Group Settings—Member List— Wrap-up Timer
5.15 [3-5-3] Incoming Call Distribution Group—Miscellaneous— Options—Wrap-up Timer based on
Feature Manual References
9.1.3 ICD Group Features—Log-in/Log-out
Option 9
Shelf (KX-TDA600 only)
Indicates the shelf position (reference only).
Default
Current shelf number
Value Range
Shelf number
Maintenance Console Location
6.1 [4-1-1] Wired Extension—Extension Settings
Programming Manual References
None
Feature Manual References
None
Slot
Indicates the slot position of each extension card (reference only).
522 PC Programming Manual Document Version 2010-11
6.1 [4-1-1] Wired Extension—Extension Settings
Default
Current slot number
Value Range
Slot number
Maintenance Console Location
6.1 [4-1-1] Wired Extension—Extension Settings
Programming Manual References
None
Feature Manual References
None
Port
Indicates the port number (reference only).
Default
Current port number
Value Range
Port number
Maintenance Console Location
6.1 [4-1-1] Wired Extension—Extension Settings
Programming Manual References
3.5 [1-1] Slot—Port Property - Extension Port
Feature Manual References
None
Extension Number
Specifies the extension number of the extension.
To change the extension number of a wired extension, follow the steps below:
1. Type the new extension number, then click Apply.
2. Set the status of the extension port to "OUS", then "INS".
When changing the extension number, make sure that the extension port is not in use. If the extension number
is changed while the port is in use, the new extension number will not come into effect.
Default
For KX-TDA50/KX-TDA100/KX-TDA200:
Starting at 101
Document Version 2010-11 PC Programming Manual 523
6.1 [4-1-1] Wired Extension—Extension Settings
For KX-TDA600:
Starting at 1001
(For port 01 of the first extension card that is installed. Extension numbers are preset for subsequent extensions
by adding one to the previous extension number.)
Value Range
Max. 5 digits (consisting of 0–9)
Maintenance Console Location
6.1 [4-1-1] Wired Extension—Extension Settings
Programming Manual References
3.6 [1-1] Slot—Port Property - Extension Port—Connection Command
Feature Manual References
None
Extension Name
Specifies the name of the extension.
Default
Not stored.
Value Range
Max. 20 characters
Maintenance Console Location
6.1 [4-1-1] Wired Extension—Extension Settings
Programming Manual References
None
Feature Manual References
None
PDN Delayed Ringing (KX-TDA100/KX-TDA200/KX-TDA600 only)
Specifies the delayed ringing setting for calls to a PDN extension (an extension with one or more PDN buttons).
Default
Immediate
Value Range
Immediate, 1 Ring, 2 Rings, 3 Rings, 4 Rings, 5 Rings, 6 Rings
524 PC Programming Manual Document Version 2010-11
6.1 [4-1-1] Wired Extension—Extension Settings
Maintenance Console Location
6.1 [4-1-1] Wired Extension—Extension Settings
Programming Manual References
None
Feature Manual References
13.1.7 PDN (Primary Directory Number)/SDN (Secondary Directory Number) Extension
FWD / DND Reference
Call Forwarding (FWD) and Do Not Disturb (DND) settings for each extension can be referred. FWD and DND
settings can be programmed separately for each extension in 6.3 [4-1-2] Wired Extension—FWD/DND.
Shelf (KX-TDA600 only)
Indicates the shelf position (reference only).
Default
Current shelf number
Value Range
Shelf number
Maintenance Console Location
6.1 [4-1-1] Wired Extension—Extension Settings
Programming Manual References
None
Feature Manual References
None
Slot
Indicates the slot position of each extension card (reference only).
Default
Current slot number
Value Range
Slot number
Maintenance Console Location
6.1 [4-1-1] Wired Extension—Extension Settings
Document Version 2010-11 PC Programming Manual 525
6.1 [4-1-1] Wired Extension—Extension Settings
Programming Manual References
3.1 [1-1] Slot
Feature Manual References
None
Port
Indicates the port number (reference only).
Default
Current port number
Value Range
Port number
Maintenance Console Location
6.1 [4-1-1] Wired Extension—Extension Settings
Programming Manual References
3.5 [1-1] Slot—Port Property - Extension Port
Feature Manual References
None
Extension Number
Specifies the extension number of the extension.
To change the extension number of a wired extension, follow the steps below:
1. Type the new extension number, then click Apply.
2. Set the status of the extension port to "OUS", then "INS".
When changing the extension number, make sure that the extension port is not in use. If the extension number
is changed while the port is in use, the new extension number will not come into effect.
Default
For KX-TDA50/KX-TDA100/KX-TDA200:
Starting at 101
For KX-TDA600:
Starting at 1001
(For port 01 of the first extension card that is installed. Extension numbers are preset for subsequent extensions
by adding one to the previous extension number.)
Value Range
Max. 5 digits (consisting of 0–9)
526 PC Programming Manual Document Version 2010-11
6.1 [4-1-1] Wired Extension—Extension Settings
Maintenance Console Location
6.1 [4-1-1] Wired Extension—Extension Settings
Programming Manual References
3.6 [1-1] Slot—Port Property - Extension Port—Connection Command
Feature Manual References
None
Extension Name
Specifies the name of the extension.
Default
Not stored.
Value Range
Max. 20 characters
Maintenance Console Location
6.1 [4-1-1] Wired Extension—Extension Settings
Programming Manual References
None
Feature Manual References
None
FWD Set for Call from CO
Indicates the current FWD status for incoming CO line calls (reference only).
Default
Off
Value Range
Off, On
Maintenance Console Location
6.1 [4-1-1] Wired Extension—Extension Settings
Programming Manual References
6.3 [4-1-2] Wired Extension—FWD/DND
Document Version 2010-11 PC Programming Manual 527
6.1 [4-1-1] Wired Extension—Extension Settings
Feature Manual References
6.1.6 FWD (Call Forwarding)
DND Set for Call from CO
Indicates the current DND status for incoming CO line calls (reference only).
Default
Off
Value Range
Off, On
Maintenance Console Location
6.1 [4-1-1] Wired Extension—Extension Settings
Programming Manual References
6.3 [4-1-2] Wired Extension—FWD/DND
Feature Manual References
4.1.9 DND (Do Not Disturb)
FWD Mode for Call from CO
Indicates the forwarding type of incoming CO line calls (reference only).
Default
None
Value Range
None, FWD All, FWD Busy, FWD N/A, FWD Busy N/A
Maintenance Console Location
6.1 [4-1-1] Wired Extension—Extension Settings
Programming Manual References
6.3 [4-1-2] Wired Extension—FWD/DND
Feature Manual References
6.1.6 FWD (Call Forwarding)
FWD Destination for Call from CO
Indicates the forwarding destination of incoming CO line calls (reference only).
528 PC Programming Manual Document Version 2010-11
6.1 [4-1-1] Wired Extension—Extension Settings
Default
Not stored.
Value Range
Max. 32 digits (consisting of 0–9, *, #, [ ] [Secret], and P [Pause])
Maintenance Console Location
6.1 [4-1-1] Wired Extension—Extension Settings
Programming Manual References
6.3 [4-1-2] Wired Extension—FWD/DND
Feature Manual References
6.1.6 FWD (Call Forwarding)
FWD Set for Call from Extension
Indicates the current FWD status for incoming intercom calls (reference only).
Default
Off
Value Range
Off, On
Maintenance Console Location
6.1 [4-1-1] Wired Extension—Extension Settings
Programming Manual References
6.3 [4-1-2] Wired Extension—FWD/DND
Feature Manual References
6.1.6 FWD (Call Forwarding)
DND Set for Call from Extension
Indicates the current DND status for incoming intercom calls (reference only).
Default
Off
Value Range
Off, On
Document Version 2010-11 PC Programming Manual 529
6.1 [4-1-1] Wired Extension—Extension Settings
Maintenance Console Location
6.1 [4-1-1] Wired Extension—Extension Settings
Programming Manual References
6.3 [4-1-2] Wired Extension—FWD/DND
Feature Manual References
4.1.9 DND (Do Not Disturb)
FWD Mode for Call from Extension
Indicates the forwarding type of incoming intercom calls (reference only).
Default
None
Value Range
None, FWD All, FWD Busy, FWD N/A, FWD Busy N/A
Maintenance Console Location
6.1 [4-1-1] Wired Extension—Extension Settings
Programming Manual References
6.3 [4-1-2] Wired Extension—FWD/DND
Feature Manual References
6.1.6 FWD (Call Forwarding)
FWD Destination for Call from Extension
Indicates the forwarding destination of incoming intercom calls (reference only).
Default
Not stored.
Value Range
Max. 32 digits (consisting of 0–9, *, #, [ ] [Secret], and P [Pause])
Maintenance Console Location
6.1 [4-1-1] Wired Extension—Extension Settings
Programming Manual References
6.3 [4-1-2] Wired Extension—FWD/DND
530 PC Programming Manual Document Version 2010-11
6.1 [4-1-1] Wired Extension—Extension Settings
Feature Manual References
6.1.6 FWD (Call Forwarding)
FWD No Answer Time
Indicates the length of time that an incoming call rings at the extension before the call is forwarded (reference
only).
Default
15 s
Value Range
0–120 s
Maintenance Console Location
6.1 [4-1-1] Wired Extension—Extension Settings
Programming Manual References
6.3 [4-1-2] Wired Extension—FWD/DND
Feature Manual References
6.1.6 FWD (Call Forwarding)
Document Version 2010-11 PC Programming Manual 531
6.1 [4-1-1] Wired Extension—Extension Settings
6.2 [4-1-1] Wired Extension—Extension Settings—
CLIP Generate
CLIP Generate allows the CLIP numbers for a set of locations in series to be programmed together.
Pre-assigned CLIP numbers for those locations will be overwritten.
If a number generated here is longer than 16 digits, the additional digits will be discarded.
Location Entry—Beginning Entry Location (Ext. Number)
Specifies the extension number of the first location to be programmed.
Default
Extension number of port 01 of the first extension card that is installed.
Value Range
Wired extension number
Maintenance Console Location
6.2 [4-1-1] Wired Extension—Extension Settings—CLIP Generate
Programming Manual References
6.1 [4-1-1] Wired Extension—Extension Settings
Feature Manual References
3.1.13 CLIP (Calling Line Identification Presentation)
Location Entry—Number to Generate
Specifies the number of locations to be programmed.
A CLIP number will only be assigned to connected wired extensions, even if the number entered here is larger
than the total number of wired extensions.
Default
Depends on installed cards
Value Range
1–total number of connected wired extensions
Maintenance Console Location
6.2 [4-1-1] Wired Extension—Extension Settings—CLIP Generate
Programming Manual References
6.1 [4-1-1] Wired Extension—Extension Settings
532 PC Programming Manual Document Version 2010-11
6.2 [4-1-1] Wired Extension—Extension Settings—CLIP Generate
Feature Manual References
3.1.13 CLIP (Calling Line Identification Presentation)
Parameter—Deleting Digits
Specifies the number of digits to be deleted from the start of an extension number when using it as part of the
CLIP number.
Default
0
Value Range
0–5
Maintenance Console Location
6.2 [4-1-1] Wired Extension—Extension Settings—CLIP Generate
Programming Manual References
6.1 [4-1-1] Wired Extension—Extension Settings
Feature Manual References
3.1.13 CLIP (Calling Line Identification Presentation)
Parameter—Head of ID
Specifies a prefix number to be applied to all generated CLIP numbers.
Default
Not stored.
Value Range
Max. 16 digits (consisting of 0–9, *, and #)
Maintenance Console Location
6.2 [4-1-1] Wired Extension—Extension Settings—CLIP Generate
Programming Manual References
6.1 [4-1-1] Wired Extension—Extension Settings
Feature Manual References
3.1.13 CLIP (Calling Line Identification Presentation)
Parameter—Tail of ID
Specifies a suffix number to be applied to all generated CLIP numbers.
Document Version 2010-11 PC Programming Manual 533
6.2 [4-1-1] Wired Extension—Extension Settings—CLIP Generate
Default
Not stored.
Value Range
Max. 16 digits (consisting of 0–9, *, and #)
Maintenance Console Location
6.2 [4-1-1] Wired Extension—Extension Settings—CLIP Generate
Programming Manual References
6.1 [4-1-1] Wired Extension—Extension Settings
Feature Manual References
3.1.13 CLIP (Calling Line Identification Presentation)
534 PC Programming Manual Document Version 2010-11
6.2 [4-1-1] Wired Extension—Extension Settings—CLIP Generate
6.3 [4-1-2] Wired Extension—FWD/DND
For each extension, separate Call Forwarding (FWD) and Do Not Disturb (DND) settings can be programmed
for incoming intercom and CO line calls. Select the desired extension from the Extension Number / Name
list.
Call from CO—Present Button Status
Specifies the status of the FWD/DND—External button.
Default
Current status
Value Range
OFF, FWD, DND
Maintenance Console Location
6.3 [4-1-2] Wired Extension—FWD/DND
Programming Manual References
None
Feature Manual References
6.1.7 FWD/DND Button, Group FWD Button
Call from CO—FWD Status Availability
Enables or disables the FWD feature for incoming CO line calls.
Default
OFF
Value Range
OFF: Enables extensions to switch to FWD mode by pressing the FWD/DND button, if forward settings have
been programmed.
ON: Prevents extensions from switching to FWD mode by pressing the FWD/DND button.
Maintenance Console Location
6.3 [4-1-2] Wired Extension—FWD/DND
Programming Manual References
None
Feature Manual References
6.1.6 FWD (Call Forwarding)
Document Version 2010-11 PC Programming Manual 535
6.3 [4-1-2] Wired Extension—FWD/DND
Call from CO—DND Status Availability
Enables or disables the DND feature for incoming CO line calls.
Default
OFF
Value Range
OFF: Enables extensions to switch to DND mode by pressing the FWD/DND button.
ON: Prevents extensions from switching to DND mode by pressing the FWD/DND button.
Maintenance Console Location
6.3 [4-1-2] Wired Extension—FWD/DND
Programming Manual References
None
Feature Manual References
4.1.9 DND (Do Not Disturb)
Call from CO—FWD Mode
Specifies the circumstances when incoming CO line calls are forwarded.
Default
None
Value Range
None, FWD All, FWD Busy, FWD N/A, FWD Busy N/A
Maintenance Console Location
6.3 [4-1-2] Wired Extension—FWD/DND
Programming Manual References
None
Feature Manual References
6.1.6 FWD (Call Forwarding)
Call from CO—FWD Destination
Specifies the forwarding destination of incoming CO line calls.
Default
Not stored.
536 PC Programming Manual Document Version 2010-11
6.3 [4-1-2] Wired Extension—FWD/DND
Value Range
Max. 32 digits (consisting of 0–9, *, #, [ ] [Secret], and P [Pause])
Maintenance Console Location
6.3 [4-1-2] Wired Extension—FWD/DND
Programming Manual References
None
Feature Manual References
6.1.6 FWD (Call Forwarding)
Call from Extension—Present Button Status
Specifies the status of the FWD/DND—Internal button.
Default
Current status
Value Range
OFF, FWD, DND
Maintenance Console Location
6.3 [4-1-2] Wired Extension—FWD/DND
Programming Manual References
None
Feature Manual References
6.1.7 FWD/DND Button, Group FWD Button
Call from Extension—FWD Status Availability
Enables or disables the FWD feature for incoming intercom calls.
Default
OFF
Value Range
OFF: Enables extensions to switch to FWD mode by pressing the FWD/DND button, if forward settings have
been programmed.
ON: Prevents extensions from switching to FWD mode by pressing the FWD/DND button.
Document Version 2010-11 PC Programming Manual 537
6.3 [4-1-2] Wired Extension—FWD/DND
Maintenance Console Location
6.3 [4-1-2] Wired Extension—FWD/DND
Programming Manual References
None
Feature Manual References
6.1.6 FWD (Call Forwarding)
Call from Extension—DND Status Availability
Enables or disables the DND feature for incoming intercom calls.
Default
OFF
Value Range
OFF: Enables extensions to switch to DND mode by pressing the FWD/DND button.
ON: Prevents extensions from switching to DND mode by pressing the FWD/DND button.
Maintenance Console Location
6.3 [4-1-2] Wired Extension—FWD/DND
Programming Manual References
None
Feature Manual References
4.1.9 DND (Do Not Disturb)
Call from Extension—FWD Mode
Specifies the circumstances when incoming intercom calls are forwarded.
Default
None
Value Range
None, FWD All, FWD Busy, FWD N/A, FWD Busy N/A
Maintenance Console Location
6.3 [4-1-2] Wired Extension—FWD/DND
Programming Manual References
None
538 PC Programming Manual Document Version 2010-11
6.3 [4-1-2] Wired Extension—FWD/DND
Feature Manual References
6.1.6 FWD (Call Forwarding)
Call from Extension—FWD Destination
Specifies the forwarding destination of incoming intercom calls.
Default
Not stored.
Value Range
Max. 32 digits (consisting of 0–9, *, #, [ ] [Secret], and P [Pause])
Maintenance Console Location
6.3 [4-1-2] Wired Extension—FWD/DND
Programming Manual References
None
Feature Manual References
6.1.6 FWD (Call Forwarding)
FWD No Answer Timer
Specifies the length of time that an incoming call rings at the extension before the call is forwarded.
Default
15 s
Value Range
0–120 s
Maintenance Console Location
6.3 [4-1-2] Wired Extension—FWD/DND
Programming Manual References
None
Feature Manual References
6.1.6 FWD (Call Forwarding)
Document Version 2010-11 PC Programming Manual 539
6.3 [4-1-2] Wired Extension—FWD/DND
6.4 [4-1-3] Wired Extension—Speed Dial
Personal Speed Dialing allows extension users to dial frequently dialed numbers using two-digit speed dialing
numbers (00–99). A maximum of 10 Personal Speed Dialing numbers can be programmed for each extension,
or 100 when an MEC (KX-TDA50/KX-TDA100/KX-TDA200) or EMEC (KX-TDA600) card is installed. Select
the desired extension from the Extension Number / Name list.
If an MEC/EMEC card is installed, the available speed dialing numbers are shown in sets of 20. Select the
desired set from the Personal Speed Dialing No. list.
Speed Dialing Name
Specifies the name of the Personal Speed Dialing number to call using the Personal Speed Dialing Directory
shown on the extension’s display.
Default
Not stored.
Value Range
Max. 20 characters
Maintenance Console Location
6.4 [4-1-3] Wired Extension—Speed Dial
Programming Manual References
None
Feature Manual References
16.1.3 Speed Dialing, Personal
Dialing Number
Specifies the number to be dialed by the Personal Speed Dialing number.
Default
Not stored.
Value Range
Max. 32 digits (consisting of 0–9, *, #, T [Transfer], [ ] [Secret], P [Pause], and F [Flash])
Maintenance Console Location
6.4 [4-1-3] Wired Extension—Speed Dial
Programming Manual References
None
540 PC Programming Manual Document Version 2010-11
6.4 [4-1-3] Wired Extension—Speed Dial
Feature Manual References
16.1.3 Speed Dialing, Personal
Document Version 2010-11 PC Programming Manual 541
6.4 [4-1-3] Wired Extension—Speed Dial
6.5 [4-1-4] Wired Extension—Flexible Button
Each flexible button can be customized to allow one-touch access to a certain feature. A maximum of 36 flexible
buttons can be customized for each extension. The settings can then be printed out as a key label template
and attached to your extension for quick reference. Select the desired extension from the Extension Number /
Name list.
To copy the flexible button settings of an extension to another extension, click Copy to.
To print the flexible button settings of an extension, click Key Label Print.
The key label settings related to display - Label, Color of Font, Color of Background, Font Size, and Telephone
Type - can be saved for future use. Select an action from the Key Label File drop-down list. Note that it is
necessary to save these settings separately from system data.
For more information on flexible buttons, see "6.1.3 Flexible Buttons" in the Feature Manual.
Display Option—Key Setting
Type
Specifies the feature to be assigned to the flexible button.
Default
KX-TDA50
Key Location 1–16: Single CO
Key Location 17–36: Not stored
KX-TDA100/KX-TDA200/KX-TDA600
Single CO
Value Range
Not Stored, Loop CO, Single CO, Group CO, DSS, One-touch, ICD Group, Message Waiting, FWD/DND
(Both), FWD/DND (External), FWD/DND (Internal), Group Fwd (Both), Group Fwd (External), Group Fwd
(Internal), Account, Conference, Terminate, EFA, Call Park, Call Log, Log-in/Log-out, Hurry-up, Wrap-up,
System Alarm, Time Service, Answer, Release, TRS Level Change, CLIR, COLR, Headset, Time Service -
Automatic/Manual, Check In, Check Out, Cleaned Up (KX-TDA50/KX-TDA100/KX-TDA200 only), Two-way
Record, Two-way Transfer, LCS, Voice Mail Transfer, NDSS, CTI, PDN (KX-TDA100/KX-TDA200/
KX-TDA600 only), SDN (KX-TDA100/KX-TDA200/KX-TDA600 only)
Maintenance Console Location
6.5 [4-1-4] Wired Extension—Flexible Button
Programming Manual References
6.6 [4-1-4] Wired Extension—Flexible Button—Flexible button data copy
Feature Manual References
None
Parameter Selection (for Single CO)
Specifies the CO line to be accessed.
542 PC Programming Manual Document Version 2010-11
6.5 [4-1-4] Wired Extension—Flexible Button
Default
1
Value Range
For KX-TDA50:
1–16
For KX-TDA100/KX-TDA200:
1–128
For KX-TDA600:
1–640
Maintenance Console Location
6.5 [4-1-4] Wired Extension—Flexible Button
Programming Manual References
None
Feature Manual References
3.1.14 CO Line Access
Parameter Selection (for Group CO)
Specifies the trunk group to be accessed.
Default
1
Value Range
For KX-TDA50/KX-TDA100/KX-TDA200:
1–64
For KX-TDA600:
1–96
Maintenance Console Location
6.5 [4-1-4] Wired Extension—Flexible Button
Programming Manual References
None
Feature Manual References
3.1.14 CO Line Access
Document Version 2010-11 PC Programming Manual 543
6.5 [4-1-4] Wired Extension—Flexible Button
Parameter Selection (for Call Park)
Specifies whether a call is parked in an idle parking zone automatically or in a specific parking zone.
Default
Automatic
Value Range
Automatic, Specific
Maintenance Console Location
6.5 [4-1-4] Wired Extension—Flexible Button
Programming Manual References
None
Feature Manual References
3.1.5 Call Park
Parameter Selection (for Log-in/Log-out)
Specifies which incoming call distribution groups that the extension belongs to are logged in to or logged out
from.
Default
None
Value Range
None: The incoming call distribution group is selected manually.
All: All incoming call distribution groups that the extension belongs to.
Incoming Group: A pre-specified incoming call distribution group
Maintenance Console Location
6.5 [4-1-4] Wired Extension—Flexible Button
Programming Manual References
None
Feature Manual References
9.1.3 ICD Group Features—Log-in/Log-out
Parameter Selection (for Time Service)
Selects which time modes are switched manually.
Default
All
544 PC Programming Manual Document Version 2010-11
6.5 [4-1-4] Wired Extension—Flexible Button
Value Range
All (Day/Night/Lunch/Break), Day/Night/Break, Day/Night/Lunch, Day/Night
Maintenance Console Location
6.5 [4-1-4] Wired Extension—Flexible Button
Programming Manual References
None
Feature Manual References
17.1.5 Time Service
Parameter Selection (for TRS Level Change)
Specifies the TRS level to be used temporarily on a certain extension.
Default
1
Value Range
1–7
Maintenance Console Location
6.5 [4-1-4] Wired Extension—Flexible Button
Programming Manual References
None
Feature Manual References
17.1.6 TRS (Toll Restriction)
4.1.4 Dial Tone Transfer
Parameter Selection (for Time Service - Automatic/Manual)
Specifies the Time Table to be used when the Time Service Switching Mode is set to Automatic.
Default
1
Value Range
1–8
Maintenance Console Location
6.5 [4-1-4] Wired Extension—Flexible Button
Document Version 2010-11 PC Programming Manual 545
6.5 [4-1-4] Wired Extension—Flexible Button
Programming Manual References
None
Feature Manual References
17.1.5 Time Service
Parameter Selection (for SDN) (KX-TDA100/KX-TDA200/KX-TDA600 only)
Specifies the delayed ringing setting for calls arriving at an SDN button.
Default
Immediate
Value Range
Immediate, 1 Ring, 2 Rings, 3 Rings, 4 Rings, 5 Rings, 6 Rings, No Ring
Maintenance Console Location
6.5 [4-1-4] Wired Extension—Flexible Button
Programming Manual References
None
Feature Manual References
13.1.7 PDN (Primary Directory Number)/SDN (Secondary Directory Number) Extension
Ext. No. / Floating Ext. No. (for DSS)
Specifies the number of an extension to be accessed.
Default
Not stored.
Value Range
Max. 5 digits (consisting of 0–9)
Maintenance Console Location
6.5 [4-1-4] Wired Extension—Flexible Button
Programming Manual References
None
Feature Manual References
None
546 PC Programming Manual Document Version 2010-11
6.5 [4-1-4] Wired Extension—Flexible Button
Ext. No. / Floating Ext. No. (for ICD Group)
Specifies the floating extension number of an incoming call distribution group to be accessed.
Default
Not stored.
Value Range
Max. 5 digits (consisting of 0–9)
Maintenance Console Location
6.5 [4-1-4] Wired Extension—Flexible Button
Programming Manual References
None
Feature Manual References
None
Ext. No. / Floating Ext. No. (for Message Waiting)
Specifies the number of an extension or floating extension number of an incoming call distribution group for
which messages are checked. If this cell is left empty, the extension will check its own messages only.
Default
Not stored.
Value Range
Max. 5 digits (consisting of 0–9)
Maintenance Console Location
6.5 [4-1-4] Wired Extension—Flexible Button
Programming Manual References
None
Feature Manual References
None
Ext. No. / Floating Ext. No. (for Group FWD (Both))
Specifies the floating extension number of an incoming call distribution group for which both intercom and CO
line calls are forwarded.
Default
Not stored.
Document Version 2010-11 PC Programming Manual 547
6.5 [4-1-4] Wired Extension—Flexible Button
Value Range
Max. 5 digits (consisting of 0–9)
Maintenance Console Location
6.5 [4-1-4] Wired Extension—Flexible Button
Programming Manual References
None
Feature Manual References
6.1.6 FWD (Call Forwarding)
Ext. No. / Floating Ext. No. (for Group FWD (External))
Specifies the floating extension number of an incoming call distribution group for which CO line calls are
forwarded.
Default
Not stored.
Value Range
Max. 5 digits (consisting of 0–9)
Maintenance Console Location
6.5 [4-1-4] Wired Extension—Flexible Button
Programming Manual References
None
Feature Manual References
6.1.6 FWD (Call Forwarding)
Ext. No. / Floating Ext. No. (for Group FWD (Internal))
Specifies the floating extension number of an incoming call distribution group for which intercom calls are
forwarded.
Default
Not stored.
Value Range
Max. 5 digits (consisting of 0–9)
548 PC Programming Manual Document Version 2010-11
6.5 [4-1-4] Wired Extension—Flexible Button
Maintenance Console Location
6.5 [4-1-4] Wired Extension—Flexible Button
Programming Manual References
None
Feature Manual References
6.1.6 FWD (Call Forwarding)
Ext. No. / Floating Ext. No. (for Call Log)
Specifies the extension’s own number or the floating extension number of an incoming call distribution group
for which call log information is displayed. If the cell is left empty, the extension will display its own call log
information.
Default
Not stored.
Value Range
Max. 5 digits (consisting of 0–9)
Maintenance Console Location
6.5 [4-1-4] Wired Extension—Flexible Button
Programming Manual References
None
Feature Manual References
None
Ext. No. / Floating Ext. No. (for Log-in/Log-out)
Specifies the floating extension number of an incoming call distribution group to log-in to or log-out from.
Default
Not stored.
Value Range
Max. 5 digits (consisting of 0–9)
Maintenance Console Location
6.5 [4-1-4] Wired Extension—Flexible Button
Programming Manual References
None
Document Version 2010-11 PC Programming Manual 549
6.5 [4-1-4] Wired Extension—Flexible Button
Feature Manual References
9.1.3 ICD Group Features—Log-in/Log-out
Ext. No. / Floating Ext. No. (for Hurry-up)
Specifies the floating extension number of the incoming call distribution group whose longest waiting call will
be redirected (Manual Queue Redirection).
Default
Not stored.
Value Range
Max. 5 digits (consisting of 0–9)
Maintenance Console Location
6.5 [4-1-4] Wired Extension—Flexible Button
Programming Manual References
None
Feature Manual References
9.1.6 ICD Group Features—Queuing
Ext. No. / Floating Ext. No. (for Two-way Record)
Specifies the floating extension number of the VM (DPT) group containing the extension’s mailbox.
Default
Not stored.
Value Range
Max. 5 digits (consisting of 0–9)
Maintenance Console Location
6.5 [4-1-4] Wired Extension—Flexible Button
Programming Manual References
None
Feature Manual References
19.1.4 Voice Mail DPT (Digital) Integration
Ext. No. / Floating Ext. No. (for Two-way Transfer)
Specifies the floating extension number of the VM (DPT) group containing the desired mailbox.
550 PC Programming Manual Document Version 2010-11
6.5 [4-1-4] Wired Extension—Flexible Button
Default
Not stored.
Value Range
Max. 5 digits (consisting of 0–9)
Maintenance Console Location
6.5 [4-1-4] Wired Extension—Flexible Button
Programming Manual References
None
Feature Manual References
19.1.4 Voice Mail DPT (Digital) Integration
Ext. No. / Floating Ext. No. (for Voice Mail Transfer)
Specifies the floating extension number of the VM (DTMF/DPT) group containing the desired mailbox.
Default
Not stored.
Value Range
Max. 5 digits (consisting of 0–9)
Maintenance Console Location
6.5 [4-1-4] Wired Extension—Flexible Button
Programming Manual References
None
Feature Manual References
19.1.5 Voice Mail DTMF Integration
19.1.4 Voice Mail DPT (Digital) Integration
Ext. No. / Floating Ext. No. (for SDN) (KX-TDA100/KX-TDA200/KX-TDA600 only)
Specifies the floating extension number of the PDN extension corresponding to this SDN button.
Note that the extension specified here must have a PDN button registered for the SDN button to function.
Default
Not stored.
Value Range
Max. 5 digits (consisting of 0–9)
Document Version 2010-11 PC Programming Manual 551
6.5 [4-1-4] Wired Extension—Flexible Button
Maintenance Console Location
6.5 [4-1-4] Wired Extension—Flexible Button
Programming Manual References
None
Feature Manual References
13.1.7 PDN (Primary Directory Number)/SDN (Secondary Directory Number) Extension
Dial (for One-touch)
Specifies the number to be dialed. The PBX can have a maximum of 2000 (with the KX-TDA50/KX-TDA100/
KX-TDA200) or 5000 (with the KX-TDA600) One-touch Dialing buttons for extensions and DSS Consoles.
Default
Not stored.
Value Range
Max. 32 digits (consisting of 0–9, *, #, T [Transfer], [ ] [Secret], P [Pause], and F [Flash])
Maintenance Console Location
6.5 [4-1-4] Wired Extension—Flexible Button
Programming Manual References
None
Feature Manual References
12.1.4 One-touch Dialing
Dial (for NDSS)
Specifies the network extension number of the extension to be accessed using Network Direct Station
Selection.
Note that only extension numbers that have been previously registered in 11.4 [9-4] NDSS Key Table can be
specified here.
Default
Not stored.
Value Range
Max. 16 digits (consisting of 0–9, *, #, T [Transfer], [ ] [Secret], P [Pause], and F [Flash])
Maintenance Console Location
6.5 [4-1-4] Wired Extension—Flexible Button
552 PC Programming Manual Document Version 2010-11
6.5 [4-1-4] Wired Extension—Flexible Button
Programming Manual References
None
Feature Manual References
13.1.15 Private Network Features—NDSS (Network Direct Station Selection)
Optional Parameter (Ringing Tone Type Number) (for Time Service)
Specifies the Time Table to be used for changing time modes in the Automatic Switching mode.
Default
1
Value Range
1–8
Maintenance Console Location
6.5 [4-1-4] Wired Extension—Flexible Button
Programming Manual References
None
Feature Manual References
17.1.5 Time Service
Optional Parameter (Ringing Tone Type Number) (for Loop CO, Single CO,
Group CO, ICD Group, SDN)
Specifies the ring tone type.
Default
1
Value Range
KX-DT300 series (except KX-DT321)/KX-T7600 series/IP-PT (except KX-NT265/KX-NT321): 1–30
KX-DT321/KX-NT265/KX-NT321: 1–8 (Even if ring tone 9–30 is selected, ring tone 1 is heard.)
Other telephones: 1–8 (Even if ring tone 9–30 is selected, ring tone 2 is heard.)
Maintenance Console Location
6.5 [4-1-4] Wired Extension—Flexible Button
Programming Manual References
None
Document Version 2010-11 PC Programming Manual 553
6.5 [4-1-4] Wired Extension—Flexible Button
Feature Manual References
None
Optional Parameter (Ringing Tone Type Number) (for Call Park)
Specifies the number of the parking zone a call is to be parked in when a Call Park button with Parameter
Selection (for Call Park) on this screen set to Specific is pressed.
Default
0
Value Range
0–99
Maintenance Console Location
6.5 [4-1-4] Wired Extension—Flexible Button
Programming Manual References
None
Feature Manual References
3.1.5 Call Park
Ext No. of Mailbox (for Two-way Transfer)
Specifies the number of the extension whose mailbox will be used to record conversations using One-touch
Two-way Transfer. (For example, a secretary can record a conversation into the mailbox of a boss.) If the cell
is left empty, the extension user must specify the number of an extension each time.
Default
Not stored.
Value Range
Max. 5 digits (consisting of 0–9)
Maintenance Console Location
6.5 [4-1-4] Wired Extension—Flexible Button
Programming Manual References
None
Feature Manual References
19.1.4 Voice Mail DPT (Digital) Integration
554 PC Programming Manual Document Version 2010-11
6.5 [4-1-4] Wired Extension—Flexible Button
Display Option—Key Setting & Key Label Name
The Key Label Name function allows you to print out a key label template for flexible buttons, according to the
telephone you are using. Click a flexible button to display a Change—Flexible Button 01–36 screen and edit
the button’s settings.
Type
This parameter is equivalent to Type on the Key Setting screen.
Maintenance Console Location
6.5 [4-1-4] Wired Extension—Flexible Button
Programming Manual References
6.5 [4-1-4] Wired Extension—Flexible Button—Display Option—Key Setting— Type
Feature Manual References
None
Extension Number
This parameter is equivalent to Ext. No. / Floating Ext. No. on the Key Setting screen.
Maintenance Console Location
6.5 [4-1-4] Wired Extension—Flexible Button
Programming Manual References
6.5 [4-1-4] Wired Extension—Flexible Button—Display Option—Key Setting— Ext. No. / Floating Ext. No.
(for DSS)
6.5 [4-1-4] Wired Extension—Flexible Button—Display Option—Key Setting— Ext. No. / Floating Ext. No.
(for ICD Group)
6.5 [4-1-4] Wired Extension—Flexible Button—Display Option—Key Setting— Ext. No. / Floating Ext. No.
(for Message Waiting)
6.5 [4-1-4] Wired Extension—Flexible Button—Display Option—Key Setting— Ext. No. / Floating Ext. No.
(for Group FWD (Both))
6.5 [4-1-4] Wired Extension—Flexible Button—Display Option—Key Setting— Ext. No. / Floating Ext. No.
(for Group FWD (External))
6.5 [4-1-4] Wired Extension—Flexible Button—Display Option—Key Setting— Ext. No. / Floating Ext. No.
(for Group FWD (Internal))
6.5 [4-1-4] Wired Extension—Flexible Button—Display Option—Key Setting— Ext. No. / Floating Ext. No.
(for Call Log)
6.5 [4-1-4] Wired Extension—Flexible Button—Display Option—Key Setting— Ext. No. / Floating Ext. No.
(for Log-in/Log-out)
6.5 [4-1-4] Wired Extension—Flexible Button—Display Option—Key Setting— Ext. No. / Floating Ext. No.
(for Hurry-up)
6.5 [4-1-4] Wired Extension—Flexible Button—Display Option—Key Setting— Ext. No. / Floating Ext. No.
(for Two-way Record)
Document Version 2010-11 PC Programming Manual 555
6.5 [4-1-4] Wired Extension—Flexible Button
6.5 [4-1-4] Wired Extension—Flexible Button—Display Option—Key Setting— Ext. No. / Floating Ext. No.
(for Two-way Transfer)
6.5 [4-1-4] Wired Extension—Flexible Button—Display Option—Key Setting— Ext. No. / Floating Ext. No.
(for Voice Mail Transfer)
6.5 [4-1-4] Wired Extension—Flexible Button—Display Option—Key Setting— Ext. No. / Floating Ext. No.
(for SDN) (KX-TDA100/KX-TDA200/KX-TDA600 only)
Feature Manual References
None
Dial
This parameter is equivalent to Dial on the Key Setting screen.
Maintenance Console Location
6.5 [4-1-4] Wired Extension—Flexible Button
Programming Manual References
6.5 [4-1-4] Wired Extension—Flexible Button—Display Option—Key Setting— Dial (for One-touch)
6.5 [4-1-4] Wired Extension—Flexible Button—Display Option—Key Setting— Dial (for NDSS)
Feature Manual References
None
Parameter 1
This parameter is equivalent to Parameter Selection on the Key Setting screen.
Maintenance Console Location
6.5 [4-1-4] Wired Extension—Flexible Button
Programming Manual References
6.5 [4-1-4] Wired Extension—Flexible Button—Display Option—Key Setting— Parameter Selection (for
Single CO)
6.5 [4-1-4] Wired Extension—Flexible Button—Display Option—Key Setting— Parameter Selection (for
Group CO)
6.5 [4-1-4] Wired Extension—Flexible Button—Display Option—Key Setting— Parameter Selection (for Call
Park)
6.5 [4-1-4] Wired Extension—Flexible Button—Display Option—Key Setting— Parameter Selection (for
Log-in/Log-out)
6.5 [4-1-4] Wired Extension—Flexible Button—Display Option—Key Setting— Parameter Selection (for
Time Service)
6.5 [4-1-4] Wired Extension—Flexible Button—Display Option—Key Setting— Parameter Selection (for TRS
Level Change)
6.5 [4-1-4] Wired Extension—Flexible Button—Display Option—Key Setting— Parameter Selection (for
Time Service - Automatic/Manual)
556 PC Programming Manual Document Version 2010-11
6.5 [4-1-4] Wired Extension—Flexible Button
6.5 [4-1-4] Wired Extension—Flexible Button—Display Option—Key Setting— Parameter Selection (for
SDN) (KX-TDA100/KX-TDA200/KX-TDA600 only)
Feature Manual References
None
Parameter 2
This parameter is equivalent to Optional Parameter (Ringing Tone Type Number) on the Key Setting
screen.
Maintenance Console Location
6.5 [4-1-4] Wired Extension—Flexible Button
Programming Manual References
6.5 [4-1-4] Wired Extension—Flexible Button—Display Option—Key Setting— Optional Parameter (Ringing
Tone Type Number) (for Time Service)
6.5 [4-1-4] Wired Extension—Flexible Button—Display Option—Key Setting— Optional Parameter (Ringing
Tone Type Number) (for Loop CO, Single CO, Group CO, ICD Group, SDN)
6.5 [4-1-4] Wired Extension—Flexible Button—Display Option—Key Setting— Optional Parameter (Ringing
Tone Type Number) (for Call Park)
Feature Manual References
None
Mailbox Number
This parameter is equivalent to Ext No. of Mailbox on the Key Setting screen.
Maintenance Console Location
6.5 [4-1-4] Wired Extension—Flexible Button
Programming Manual References
6.5 [4-1-4] Wired Extension—Flexible Button—Display Option—Key Setting— Ext No. of Mailbox (for
Two-way Transfer)
Feature Manual References
None
Label
Specifies the label that will be printed next to the corresponding button.
Default
Not stored.
Document Version 2010-11 PC Programming Manual 557
6.5 [4-1-4] Wired Extension—Flexible Button
Value Range
Max. 20 characters
Maintenance Console Location
6.5 [4-1-4] Wired Extension—Flexible Button
Programming Manual References
None
Feature Manual References
None
Color of Font
Specifies the color used for the label text for the corresponding button. Click Choose to select a color.
Default
Black
Value Range
Any color
Maintenance Console Location
6.5 [4-1-4] Wired Extension—Flexible Button
Programming Manual References
None
Feature Manual References
None
Color of Background
Specifies the color used for the label background for the corresponding button. Click Choose to select a color.
Default
White
Value Range
Any color
Maintenance Console Location
6.5 [4-1-4] Wired Extension—Flexible Button
558 PC Programming Manual Document Version 2010-11
6.5 [4-1-4] Wired Extension—Flexible Button
Programming Manual References
None
Feature Manual References
None
Font Size
Specifies the size of the font on the label for the corresponding button.
Default
8
Value Range
4–15
Maintenance Console Location
6.5 [4-1-4] Wired Extension—Flexible Button
Programming Manual References
None
Feature Manual References
None
Telephone Type
Telephone Type
Selects the type of telephone for which you want to print a key label template.
Default
T7633 / T7636
Value Range
T7633 / T7636
T7625 / T7630 / NT136
T7665 / NT265 / NT321
T7667
NT343 / NT346 / DT346 / DT343 / DT333
Other
Maintenance Console Location
6.5 [4-1-4] Wired Extension—Flexible Button
Document Version 2010-11 PC Programming Manual 559
6.5 [4-1-4] Wired Extension—Flexible Button
Programming Manual References
None
Feature Manual References
None
560 PC Programming Manual Document Version 2010-11
6.5 [4-1-4] Wired Extension—Flexible Button
6.6 [4-1-4] Wired Extension—Flexible Button—
Flexible button data copy
The flexible button settings (including key label settings) of an extension can be copied to different extensions.
Destination Extension Line
Select the number and name of the extension that will receive the copied settings. Multiple extensions can be
selected. To select all extensions at once, click Select All.
When selecting multiple extensions, note that if the source extension has an SDN button, the copy operation
cannot be performed.
Maintenance Console Location
6.6 [4-1-4] Wired Extension—Flexible Button—Flexible button data copy
Programming Manual References
6.5 [4-1-4] Wired Extension—Flexible Button
Feature Manual References
None
Document Version 2010-11 PC Programming Manual 561
6.6 [4-1-4] Wired Extension—Flexible Button—Flexible button data copy
6.7 [4-1-5] Wired Extension—PF Button
Each Programmable Feature (PF) button can be customized to access a certain feature with one touch. A
maximum of 12 PF buttons can be customized for each extension. Select the desired extension from the
Extension Number / Name list.
Type
Specifies whether to store a dialing number for the one-touch access.
Default
Not stored.
Value Range
Not Stored, One Touch
Maintenance Console Location
6.7 [4-1-5] Wired Extension—PF Button
Programming Manual References
None
Feature Manual References
6.1.3 Flexible Buttons
Dial
Specifies the number to be dialed.
Default
Not stored.
Value Range
Max. 32 digits (consisting of 0–9, *, #, T [Transfer], [ ] [Secret], P [Pause], and F [Flash])
Maintenance Console Location
6.7 [4-1-5] Wired Extension—PF Button
Programming Manual References
None
Feature Manual References
6.1.3 Flexible Buttons
562 PC Programming Manual Document Version 2010-11
6.7 [4-1-5] Wired Extension—PF Button
6.8 [4-1-6] Wired Extension—NDSS Link Data - Send
It is possible to cancel the transmission of an extension’s status data over the network. Select the desired
extension from the Extension Number / Name list.
Network BLF Data to NDSS Key of Other PBX - Other PBX (Network PBX ID=1)
Selects whether extension status data is transmitted over the network for the selected extension. This setting
is automatically set to ON when the feature is used, and can only be manually changed from ON to OFF, to
cancel data transmission.
Default
OFF
Value Range
OFF, ON
Maintenance Console Location
6.8 [4-1-6] Wired Extension—NDSS Link Data - Send
Programming Manual References
11.1 [9-1] TIE Table
Feature Manual References
13.1.15 Private Network Features—NDSS (Network Direct Station Selection)
Document Version 2010-11 PC Programming Manual 563
6.8 [4-1-6] Wired Extension—NDSS Link Data - Send
6.9 [4-1-7] Wired Extension—Simplified Voice
Message
When an SVM/ESVM card is installed in the PBX, Simplified Voice Message features can be provided for each
extension.
This screen allows you to specify which card each extension belongs to, and the maximum number of
messages that can be stored for each extension.
For more information on Simplified Voice Message, see "16.1.5 SVM (Simplified Voice Message)" in the
Feature Manual.
Slot
Indicates the slot position (reference only).
Default
Current slot number
Value Range
Slot number
Maintenance Console Location
6.9 [4-1-7] Wired Extension—Simplified Voice Message
Programming Manual References
None
Feature Manual References
None
Port
Indicates the port number (reference only).
Default
Current port number
Value Range
Port number
Maintenance Console Location
6.9 [4-1-7] Wired Extension—Simplified Voice Message
Programming Manual References
None
564 PC Programming Manual Document Version 2010-11
6.9 [4-1-7] Wired Extension—Simplified Voice Message
Feature Manual References
None
Extension Number
Indicates the extension number (reference only).
Default
Not stored.
Value Range
Max. 5 digits (consisting of 0–9)
Maintenance Console Location
6.9 [4-1-7] Wired Extension—Simplified Voice Message
Programming Manual References
3.34 [1-2] Portable Station
Feature Manual References
None
Extension Name
Indicates the name of the extension (reference only).
Default
Not stored.
Value Range
Max. 20 characters
Maintenance Console Location
6.9 [4-1-7] Wired Extension—Simplified Voice Message
Programming Manual References
6.1 [4-1-1] Wired Extension—Extension Settings—Main— Extension Name
Feature Manual References
None
Simplified Voice Message
Selects which SVM/ESVM card to use to store and play back greetings and messages for the extension.
Document Version 2010-11 PC Programming Manual 565
6.9 [4-1-7] Wired Extension—Simplified Voice Message
Each extension must be assigned to a specific SVM/ESVM card and block within the card, and can only use
the assigned card. If two SVM/ESVM cards are installed in the PBX, you should assign a number of extensions
to each card, to ensure that the necessary resources, such as message recording space, are available for
each extension.
Default
For KX-TDA50/KX-TDA100/KX-TDA200:
Card1
For KX-TDA600:
Card1(A)
Value Range
For KX-TDA50/KX-TDA100/KX-TDA200:
None, Card1, Card2
For KX-TDA600:
None, Card1(A), Card1(B), Card2(A), Card2(B)
Maintenance Console Location
6.9 [4-1-7] Wired Extension—Simplified Voice Message
Programming Manual References
None
Feature Manual References
None
Maximum SVM Log
Specifies the maximum number of voice messages (not including greeting messages) that can be stored for
the extension.
Default
10
Value Range
1–100
Maintenance Console Location
6.9 [4-1-7] Wired Extension—Simplified Voice Message
Programming Manual References
None
Feature Manual References
None
566 PC Programming Manual Document Version 2010-11
6.9 [4-1-7] Wired Extension—Simplified Voice Message
6.10 [4-2-1] Portable Station—Extension Settings
For each Portable Station (PS), various extension settings can be assigned. A maximum of 28 (with the
KX-TDA50), 128 (with the KX-TDA100/KX-TDA200), or 512 (with the KX-TDA600) PSs can be programmed.
To assign names and tenants to extension user groups, click Extension User Group Table. See 5.6 [3-2]
Extension Group for more details.
Main
Extension Number
Indicates the extension number of the PS (reference only).
Default
Not stored.
Value Range
Max. 4 digits (consisting of 0–9)
Maintenance Console Location
6.10 [4-2-1] Portable Station—Extension Settings
Programming Manual References
3.34 [1-2] Portable Station— Extension No.
Feature Manual References
None
Extension Name
Specifies the name of the PS.
Default
Not stored.
Value Range
Max. 20 characters
Maintenance Console Location
6.10 [4-2-1] Portable Station—Extension Settings
Programming Manual References
3.34 [1-2] Portable Station— Extension Name
Feature Manual References
None
Document Version 2010-11 PC Programming Manual 567
6.10 [4-2-1] Portable Station—Extension Settings
Property
Indicates the property (reference only).
Default
Portable Station
Value Range
Portable Station
Maintenance Console Location
6.10 [4-2-1] Portable Station—Extension Settings
Programming Manual References
None
Feature Manual References
None
Extension Group
Specifies the extension user group to which the PS belongs. The extension user group is used to compose
tenants, call pickup groups and paging groups.
Default
1
Value Range
For KX-TDA50/KX-TDA100/KX-TDA200:
1–32
For KX-TDA600:
1–96
Maintenance Console Location
6.10 [4-2-1] Portable Station—Extension Settings
Programming Manual References
None
Feature Manual References
7.1.1 GROUP FEATURES
17.1.3 Tenant Service
COS
Specifies the COS of the PS.
568 PC Programming Manual Document Version 2010-11
6.10 [4-2-1] Portable Station—Extension Settings
Default
1
Value Range
1–64
Maintenance Console Location
6.10 [4-2-1] Portable Station—Extension Settings
Programming Manual References
4.11 [2-7-1] Class of Service—COS Settings
Feature Manual References
3.1.20 COS (Class of Service)
Extension PIN
Specifies the PIN of the PS.
CAUTION
There is a risk that fraudulent telephone calls will be made if a third party discovers a personal identification
number (PIN) (verification code PIN or extension PIN) of the PBX.
The cost of such calls will be billed to the owner/renter of the PBX.
To protect the PBX from this kind of fraudulent use, we strongly recommend:
a. Keeping PINs secret.
b. Selecting complex, random PINs that cannot be easily guessed.
c. Changing PINs frequently.
Default
Not stored.
Value Range
Max. 10 digits (consisting of 0–9)
Maintenance Console Location
6.10 [4-2-1] Portable Station—Extension Settings
Programming Manual References
None
Feature Manual References
5.1.6 Extension PIN (Personal Identification Number)
Document Version 2010-11 PC Programming Manual 569
6.10 [4-2-1] Portable Station—Extension Settings
Intercept Destination
Extension Number
Indicates the extension number of the PS (reference only).
Default
Not stored.
Value Range
Max. 4 digits (consisting of 0–9)
Maintenance Console Location
6.10 [4-2-1] Portable Station—Extension Settings
Programming Manual References
3.34 [1-2] Portable Station— Extension No.
Feature Manual References
None
Extension Name
Specifies the name of the PS.
Default
Not stored.
Value Range
Max. 20 characters
Maintenance Console Location
6.10 [4-2-1] Portable Station—Extension Settings
Programming Manual References
3.34 [1-2] Portable Station— Extension Name
Feature Manual References
None
Intercept Destination—When called party does not answer—Day, Lunch,
Break, Night
Specifies the Intercept Routing destination of calls in each time mode for Intercept Routing–No Answer and
Intercept Routing–DND.
Note that, Intercept Routing–Busy calls are routed using Intercept Destination—When Called Party is
Busy below.
570 PC Programming Manual Document Version 2010-11
6.10 [4-2-1] Portable Station—Extension Settings
Default
Not stored.
Value Range
Max. 32 digits (consisting of 0–9, *, #, [ ] [Secret], and P [Pause])
Maintenance Console Location
6.10 [4-2-1] Portable Station—Extension Settings
Programming Manual References
6.10 [4-2-1] Portable Station—Extension Settings—Intercept Destination— Intercept Destination—When
Called Party is Busy
Feature Manual References
9.1.11 Intercept Routing
Intercept Destination—When Called Party is Busy
Specifies the Intercept Routing destination of calls when the extension is busy.
Default
Not stored.
Value Range
Max. 32 digits (consisting of 0–9, *, #, [ ] [Secret], and P [Pause])
Maintenance Console Location
6.10 [4-2-1] Portable Station—Extension Settings
Programming Manual References
None
Feature Manual References
9.1.11 Intercept Routing
Intercept No Answer Time
Extension Number
Indicates the extension number of the PS (reference only).
Default
Not stored.
Value Range
Max. 4 digits (consisting of 0–9)
Document Version 2010-11 PC Programming Manual 571
6.10 [4-2-1] Portable Station—Extension Settings
Maintenance Console Location
6.10 [4-2-1] Portable Station—Extension Settings
Programming Manual References
3.34 [1-2] Portable Station— Extension No.
Feature Manual References
None
Extension Name
Specifies the name of the PS.
Default
Not stored.
Value Range
Max. 20 characters
Maintenance Console Location
6.10 [4-2-1] Portable Station—Extension Settings
Programming Manual References
3.34 [1-2] Portable Station— Extension Name
Feature Manual References
None
Intercept No Answer Time—Day, Lunch, Break, Night
Specifies the length of time until an unanswered call is redirected to the intercept routing destination in each
time mode.
When this setting is set to "0", the system timer is used.
Default
0
Value Range
0–240 s
Maintenance Console Location
6.10 [4-2-1] Portable Station—Extension Settings
572 PC Programming Manual Document Version 2010-11
6.10 [4-2-1] Portable Station—Extension Settings
Programming Manual References
4.4 [2-3] Timers & Counters—Dial / IRNA / Recall / Tone— Intercept Routing No Answer (IRNA)—Day,
Lunch, Break, Night
Feature Manual References
9.1.11 Intercept Routing
ISDN CLIP
Extension Number
Indicates the extension number of the PS (reference only).
Default
Not stored.
Value Range
Max. 4 digits (consisting of 0–9)
Maintenance Console Location
6.10 [4-2-1] Portable Station—Extension Settings
Programming Manual References
3.34 [1-2] Portable Station— Extension No.
Feature Manual References
None
Extension Name
Specifies the name of the PS.
Default
Not stored.
Value Range
Max. 20 characters
Maintenance Console Location
6.10 [4-2-1] Portable Station—Extension Settings
Programming Manual References
3.34 [1-2] Portable Station— Extension Name
Document Version 2010-11 PC Programming Manual 573
6.10 [4-2-1] Portable Station—Extension Settings
Feature Manual References
None
CLIP ID
Specifies the CLIP number sent to the public network to show on the called party’s telephone display when
making a CO line call.
Default
Not stored.
Value Range
Max. 16 digits (consisting of 0–9, *, and #)
Maintenance Console Location
6.10 [4-2-1] Portable Station—Extension Settings
Programming Manual References
None
Feature Manual References
3.1.13 CLIP (Calling Line Identification Presentation)
CLIP on Extension/CO (KX-TDA100/KX-TDA200/KX-TDA600 only)
Selects the CLIP number to show on the called party’s telephone.
Default
Extension
Value Range
Extension: Show the CLIP number specified in CLIP ID on the Option 1 tab.
CO: Show the CLIP number specified in Subscriber Number in 3.14 [1-1] Slot—Port Property - PRI Port
(KX-TDA100/KX-TDA200/KX-TDA600 only).
Maintenance Console Location
6.10 [4-2-1] Portable Station—Extension Settings
Programming Manual References
3.14 [1-1] Slot—Port Property - PRI Port (KX-TDA100/KX-TDA200/KX-TDA600 only)—CO Setting—
Subscriber Number
6.10 [4-2-1] Portable Station—Extension Settings—ISDN CLIP— CLIP ID
Feature Manual References
3.1.13 CLIP (Calling Line Identification Presentation)
574 PC Programming Manual Document Version 2010-11
6.10 [4-2-1] Portable Station—Extension Settings
CLIR
Specifies whether to restrict the display of the CLIP number on the called party’s telephone when making a
public network CO line call.
Default
Disable
Value Range
Disable, Enable
Maintenance Console Location
6.10 [4-2-1] Portable Station—Extension Settings
Programming Manual References
None
Feature Manual References
3.1.13 CLIP (Calling Line Identification Presentation)
COLR
Specifies whether to restrict the display of the CLIP number of the PS on the caller’s telephone display when
answering a call.
Default
Disable
Value Range
Disable, Enable
Maintenance Console Location
6.10 [4-2-1] Portable Station—Extension Settings
Programming Manual References
None
Feature Manual References
3.1.13 CLIP (Calling Line Identification Presentation)
Option 1
Extension Number
Indicates the extension number of the PS (reference only).
Document Version 2010-11 PC Programming Manual 575
6.10 [4-2-1] Portable Station—Extension Settings
Default
Not stored.
Value Range
Max. 4 digits (consisting of 0–9)
Maintenance Console Location
6.10 [4-2-1] Portable Station—Extension Settings
Programming Manual References
3.34 [1-2] Portable Station— Extension No.
Feature Manual References
None
Extension Name
Specifies the name of the PS.
Default
Not stored.
Value Range
Max. 20 characters
Maintenance Console Location
6.10 [4-2-1] Portable Station—Extension Settings
Programming Manual References
3.34 [1-2] Portable Station— Extension Name
Feature Manual References
None
Ring Pattern Table
Specifies the Ring Tone Pattern Table to be used by the PS.
Default
1
Value Range
1–8
576 PC Programming Manual Document Version 2010-11
6.10 [4-2-1] Portable Station—Extension Settings
Maintenance Console Location
6.10 [4-2-1] Portable Station—Extension Settings
Programming Manual References
4.14 [2-8-1] Ring Tone Patterns—Call from CO
4.15 [2-8-2] Ring Tone Patterns—Call from Doorphone
4.16 [2-8-3] Ring Tone Patterns—Call from Others
Feature Manual References
15.1.2 Ring Tone Pattern Selection
Programmed Mailbox No.
Specifies the mailbox number of the PS’s mailbox for Voice Processing Systems (VPS) with DTMF Integration.
Default
Not stored.
Value Range
Max. 16 digits (consisting of 0–9, *, and #)
Maintenance Console Location
6.10 [4-2-1] Portable Station—Extension Settings
Programming Manual References
None
Feature Manual References
19.1.5 Voice Mail DTMF Integration
Transfer Recall Destination
Specifies the transfer recall destination when an extension user transfers a call with the Call Transfer without
Announcement feature and the transferred call is not answered within a certain time period.
Default
Not stored.
Value Range
Max. 5 digits (consisting of 0–9)
Maintenance Console Location
6.10 [4-2-1] Portable Station—Extension Settings
Document Version 2010-11 PC Programming Manual 577
6.10 [4-2-1] Portable Station—Extension Settings
Programming Manual References
None
Feature Manual References
3.1.8 Call Transfer
ARS Itemized Code
Specifies the itemized billing code used by the ARS feature for identifying the calls made from the PS for
accounting and billing purposes.
Default
Not stored.
Value Range
Max. 10 digits (consisting of 0–9, *, and #)
Maintenance Console Location
6.10 [4-2-1] Portable Station—Extension Settings
Programming Manual References
10.6 [8-5] Carrier
Feature Manual References
19.1.1 Verification Code Entry
1.1.3 ARS (Automatic Route Selection)
Option 2
Extension Number
Indicates the extension number of the PS (reference only).
Default
Not stored.
Value Range
Max. 4 digits (consisting of 0–9)
Maintenance Console Location
6.10 [4-2-1] Portable Station—Extension Settings
Programming Manual References
3.34 [1-2] Portable Station— Extension No.
578 PC Programming Manual Document Version 2010-11
6.10 [4-2-1] Portable Station—Extension Settings
Feature Manual References
None
Extension Name
Specifies the name of the PS.
Default
Not stored.
Value Range
Max. 20 characters
Maintenance Console Location
6.10 [4-2-1] Portable Station—Extension Settings
Programming Manual References
3.34 [1-2] Portable Station— Extension Name
Feature Manual References
None
Manual C. Waiting for Extension Call
Selects the method of receiving call waiting notification from other extensions.
Default
BSS
Value Range
Off: No notification
BSS: Tone from the handset or built-in speaker
Maintenance Console Location
6.10 [4-2-1] Portable Station—Extension Settings
Programming Manual References
None
Feature Manual References
3.1.9 CALL WAITING FEATURES
Document Version 2010-11 PC Programming Manual 579
6.10 [4-2-1] Portable Station—Extension Settings
Automatic C. Waiting
Specifies whether to receive call waiting notification for a call from CO line, a doorphone call or a call via an
incoming call distribution group.
Default
On
Value Range
Off, On
Maintenance Console Location
6.10 [4-2-1] Portable Station—Extension Settings
Programming Manual References
None
Feature Manual References
3.1.9 CALL WAITING FEATURES
Pickup Dial Set
Sets or cancels the Hot Line feature. The number specified in Pickup Dial No. on this screen is dialed
automatically after going off-hook when the Hot Line feature is active.
Default
Off
Value Range
Off, On
Maintenance Console Location
6.10 [4-2-1] Portable Station—Extension Settings
Programming Manual References
4.4 [2-3] Timers & Counters—Dial / IRNA / Recall / Tone— Dial—Hot Line (Pickup Dial) Start
Feature Manual References
8.1.6 Hot Line
Pickup Dial No.
Specifies the number to be dialed automatically after going off-hook when the Hot Line feature is active.
Default
Not stored.
580 PC Programming Manual Document Version 2010-11
6.10 [4-2-1] Portable Station—Extension Settings
Value Range
Max. 32 digits (consisting of 0–9, *, #, T [Transfer], [ ] [Secret], P [Pause], and F [Flash])
Maintenance Console Location
6.10 [4-2-1] Portable Station—Extension Settings
Programming Manual References
None
Feature Manual References
8.1.6 Hot Line
Option 3
Extension Number
Indicates the extension number of the PS (reference only).
Default
Not stored.
Value Range
Max. 4 digits (consisting of 0–9)
Maintenance Console Location
6.10 [4-2-1] Portable Station—Extension Settings
Programming Manual References
3.34 [1-2] Portable Station— Extension No.
Feature Manual References
None
Extension Name
Specifies the name of the PS.
Default
Not stored.
Value Range
Max. 20 characters
Document Version 2010-11 PC Programming Manual 581
6.10 [4-2-1] Portable Station—Extension Settings
Maintenance Console Location
6.10 [4-2-1] Portable Station—Extension Settings
Programming Manual References
3.34 [1-2] Portable Station— Extension Name
Feature Manual References
None
Call Pickup Deny
Specifies whether calls can be picked up by other extensions.
Default
Disable
Value Range
Disable: Allows other extension users to pick up calls to your PS
Enable: Prevents other extension users from picking up calls to your PS
Maintenance Console Location
6.10 [4-2-1] Portable Station—Extension Settings
Programming Manual References
None
Feature Manual References
3.1.6 Call Pickup
Executive Override Deny
Specifies whether calls can be interrupted by other extensions.
Default
Disable
Value Range
Disable: Allows other extension users to interrupt an existing call
Enable: Prevents other extension users from interrupting an existing call
Maintenance Console Location
6.10 [4-2-1] Portable Station—Extension Settings
Programming Manual References
None
582 PC Programming Manual Document Version 2010-11
6.10 [4-2-1] Portable Station—Extension Settings
Feature Manual References
5.1.3 Executive Busy Override
Absent Message
Specifies the Personal Absent Message which, unlike the System Absent Message, can be customized for
each PS.
Default
Not stored.
Value Range
Max. 16 characters
Maintenance Console Location
6.10 [4-2-1] Portable Station—Extension Settings
Programming Manual References
None
Feature Manual References
1.1.1 Absent Message
Option 4
Extension Number
Indicates the extension number of the PS (reference only).
Default
Not stored.
Value Range
Max. 4 digits (consisting of 0–9)
Maintenance Console Location
6.10 [4-2-1] Portable Station—Extension Settings
Programming Manual References
3.34 [1-2] Portable Station— Extension No.
Feature Manual References
None
Document Version 2010-11 PC Programming Manual 583
6.10 [4-2-1] Portable Station—Extension Settings
Extension Name
Specifies the name of the PS.
Default
Not stored.
Value Range
Max. 20 characters
Maintenance Console Location
6.10 [4-2-1] Portable Station—Extension Settings
Programming Manual References
3.34 [1-2] Portable Station— Extension Name
Feature Manual References
None
Outgoing Preferred Line
Selects the line to be seized after going off-hook to make a call.
Default
For KX-TDA50:
ICM
For KX-TDA100/KX-TDA200/KX-TDA600:
ICM/PDN
Value Range
For KX-TDA50:
No Line: No line is seized.
Idle: An idle CO line is seized automatically from the programmed trunk groups.
ICM: An extension line is seized.
F-1–F-12: A CO line programmed for a flexible button (F-1–F-12) is seized. A flexible button customized as a
Single-CO, Group-CO, Loop-CO, or ICD Group button must be selected.
For KX-TDA100/KX-TDA200/KX-TDA600:
No Line: No line is seized.
Idle: An idle CO line is seized automatically from the programmed trunk groups.
ICM/PDN: An extension line is seized, or, for a PDN extension, an idle PDN button is selected.
F-1–F-12: A CO line programmed for a flexible button (F-1–F-12) is seized. A flexible button customized as a
Single-CO, Group-CO, Loop-CO, or ICD Group button must be selected.
Maintenance Console Location
6.10 [4-2-1] Portable Station—Extension Settings
584 PC Programming Manual Document Version 2010-11
6.10 [4-2-1] Portable Station—Extension Settings
Programming Manual References
6.13 [4-2-3] Portable Station—Flexible Button
Feature Manual References
10.1.3 Line Preference—Outgoing
Incoming Preferred Line
Selects the line on which an incoming call is answered after going off-hook.
Note that even if a specific PDN button is selected here, a call ringing at any PDN button on the extension will
be answered when going off-hook.
Default
Ringing Line
Value Range
No Line: No line is selected. Select a line by pressing the desired Line Access button to answer a call.
Ringing Line: The longest ringing call is selected.
PDN (KX-TDA100/KX-TDA200/KX-TDA600 only): The call arriving at any PDN button is selected.
F-1–F-12: The call arriving at a flexible button (F-1–F-12) is selected. A flexible button customized as a
Single-CO, Group-CO, Loop-CO, or ICD Group button must be selected.
Maintenance Console Location
6.10 [4-2-1] Portable Station—Extension Settings
Programming Manual References
6.13 [4-2-3] Portable Station—Flexible Button
Feature Manual References
10.1.2 Line Preference—Incoming
Call Waiting Tone Type
Selects the type of Call Waiting tone sent to the busy extension.
Default
CW Tone 1
Value Range
CW Tone 1, CW Tone 2
Maintenance Console Location
6.10 [4-2-1] Portable Station—Extension Settings
Programming Manual References
None
Document Version 2010-11 PC Programming Manual 585
6.10 [4-2-1] Portable Station—Extension Settings
Feature Manual References
3.1.10 Call Waiting Tone
LCS Recording Mode
Specifies whether to continue or stop recording the message in the PS’s mailbox when the PS user answers
a call that was being monitored.
Default
Stop Record
Value Range
Stop Record, Keep Record
Maintenance Console Location
6.10 [4-2-1] Portable Station—Extension Settings
Programming Manual References
None
Feature Manual References
19.1.4 Voice Mail DPT (Digital) Integration
Option 5
Extension Number
Indicates the extension number of the PS (reference only).
Default
Not stored.
Value Range
Max. 4 digits (consisting of 0–9)
Maintenance Console Location
6.10 [4-2-1] Portable Station—Extension Settings
Programming Manual References
3.34 [1-2] Portable Station— Extension No.
Feature Manual References
None
586 PC Programming Manual Document Version 2010-11
6.10 [4-2-1] Portable Station—Extension Settings
Extension Name
Specifies the name of the PS.
Default
Not stored.
Value Range
Max. 20 characters
Maintenance Console Location
6.10 [4-2-1] Portable Station—Extension Settings
Programming Manual References
3.34 [1-2] Portable Station— Extension Name
Feature Manual References
None
Display Language
Selects the display language of the PS.
Default
Language1
Value Range
Language1–Language5
Maintenance Console Location
6.10 [4-2-1] Portable Station—Extension Settings
Programming Manual References
None
Feature Manual References
4.1.8 Display Information
Incoming Call Display
Selects which caller information is shown on the first line of the PS’s display.
Default
Caller ID Name
Value Range
Caller ID Name, CO Line Name, DID Name
Document Version 2010-11 PC Programming Manual 587
6.10 [4-2-1] Portable Station—Extension Settings
Maintenance Console Location
6.10 [4-2-1] Portable Station—Extension Settings
Programming Manual References
None
Feature Manual References
4.1.8 Display Information
Automatic LCD Switch when Start Talking
Enables the first line of the display to show the call duration automatically after answering a CO line call.
Default
Enable
Value Range
Disable, Enable
Maintenance Console Location
6.10 [4-2-1] Portable Station—Extension Settings
Programming Manual References
None
Feature Manual References
4.1.8 Display Information
Option 6
Extension Number
Indicates the extension number of the PS (reference only).
Default
Not stored.
Value Range
Max. 4 digits (consisting of 0–9)
Maintenance Console Location
6.10 [4-2-1] Portable Station—Extension Settings
Programming Manual References
3.34 [1-2] Portable Station— Extension No.
588 PC Programming Manual Document Version 2010-11
6.10 [4-2-1] Portable Station—Extension Settings
Feature Manual References
None
Extension Name
Specifies the name of the PS.
Default
Not stored.
Value Range
Max. 20 characters
Maintenance Console Location
6.10 [4-2-1] Portable Station—Extension Settings
Programming Manual References
3.34 [1-2] Portable Station— Extension Name
Feature Manual References
None
SVM Lock
Selects whether Simplified Voice Message Log information can be displayed at the extension or other
extensions.
Default
Unlock
Value Range
Lock, Unlock
Maintenance Console Location
6.10 [4-2-1] Portable Station—Extension Settings
Programming Manual References
6.16 [4-2-5] Portable Station—Simplified Voice Message
Feature Manual References
16.1.5 SVM (Simplified Voice Message)
Document Version 2010-11 PC Programming Manual 589
6.10 [4-2-1] Portable Station—Extension Settings
Flexible Button Programming Mode
Specifies whether the PS user can modify all flexible buttons without limitation, or only the One-touch Dialing
buttons. When the mode is set to One-touch Dial, there is no need to enter "2" before the number when
customizing a One-touch Dialing button.
Default
No Limitation
Value Range
No Limitation, One-touch Dial
Maintenance Console Location
6.10 [4-2-1] Portable Station—Extension Settings
Programming Manual References
None
Feature Manual References
12.1.4 One-touch Dialing
Option 7
Extension Number
Indicates the extension number of the PS (reference only).
Default
Not stored.
Value Range
Max. 4 digits (consisting of 0–9)
Maintenance Console Location
6.10 [4-2-1] Portable Station—Extension Settings
Programming Manual References
3.34 [1-2] Portable Station— Extension No.
Feature Manual References
None
Extension Name
Specifies the name of the PS.
590 PC Programming Manual Document Version 2010-11
6.10 [4-2-1] Portable Station—Extension Settings
Default
Not stored.
Value Range
Max. 20 characters
Maintenance Console Location
6.10 [4-2-1] Portable Station—Extension Settings
Programming Manual References
3.34 [1-2] Portable Station— Extension Name
Feature Manual References
None
Character Input Mode
Selects the character table to be used for entering characters.
Default
Table 1
Value Range
Table 1: Standard mode
Table 2: Option mode
Maintenance Console Location
6.10 [4-2-1] Portable Station—Extension Settings
Programming Manual References
None
Feature Manual References
None
Flash Mode during CO Conversation
Selects the function of the FLASH/RECALL button during a CO line conversation.
Default
Flash Recall
Value Range
EFA, Terminate, Flash Recall
Document Version 2010-11 PC Programming Manual 591
6.10 [4-2-1] Portable Station—Extension Settings
Maintenance Console Location
6.10 [4-2-1] Portable Station—Extension Settings
Programming Manual References
None
Feature Manual References
6.1.2 Flash/Recall/Terminate
5.1.1 EFA (External Feature Access)
Incoming Call Log Memory
Specifies the number of incoming CO line calls that are retained in the PS’s Incoming Call Log memory.
Default
10
Value Range
0–100
Maintenance Console Location
6.10 [4-2-1] Portable Station—Extension Settings
Programming Manual References
None
Feature Manual References
3.1.3 Call Log, Incoming
Outgoing Call Log Memory
Specifies the number of telephone numbers dialed by the PS that are retained in the PS’s Outgoing Call Log
memory.
Default
5
Value Range
1–100
Maintenance Console Location
6.10 [4-2-1] Portable Station—Extension Settings
Programming Manual References
None
592 PC Programming Manual Document Version 2010-11
6.10 [4-2-1] Portable Station—Extension Settings
Feature Manual References
15.1.1 Redial, Last Number
ISDN Bearer
Selects the ISDN bearer mode. When Automatic is selected, the bearer mode is set automatically depending
on the type of the PS.
Default
Automatic
Value Range
Automatic, Speech, Audio
Maintenance Console Location
6.10 [4-2-1] Portable Station—Extension Settings
Programming Manual References
None
Feature Manual References
9.1.16 ISDN (INTEGRATED SERVICES DIGITAL NETWORK) FEATURES
Option 8
Extension Number
Indicates the extension number of the PS (reference only).
Default
Not stored.
Value Range
Max. 4 digits (consisting of 0–9)
Maintenance Console Location
6.10 [4-2-1] Portable Station—Extension Settings
Programming Manual References
3.34 [1-2] Portable Station— Extension No.
Feature Manual References
None
Document Version 2010-11 PC Programming Manual 593
6.10 [4-2-1] Portable Station—Extension Settings
Extension Name
Specifies the name of the PS.
Default
Not stored.
Value Range
Max. 20 characters
Maintenance Console Location
6.10 [4-2-1] Portable Station—Extension Settings
Programming Manual References
3.34 [1-2] Portable Station— Extension Name
Feature Manual References
None
Group CW w/o Tone (Ring after Call)
Enables an incoming call to an incoming call distribution group to arrive at a previously busy extension at the
moment that the extension goes on-hook for the previous call.
Default
Enable
Value Range
Disable, Enable
Maintenance Console Location
6.10 [4-2-1] Portable Station—Extension Settings
Programming Manual References
None
Feature Manual References
None
Wrap-up Timer
Specifies the length of time that must pass after completing a call before a PS will accept another call when
logged in as a member of an Incoming Call Distribution Group.
This timer is used when " Options—Wrap-up Timer based on" is set to "Extension" in 5.15 [3-5-3]
Incoming Call Distribution Group—Miscellaneous.
594 PC Programming Manual Document Version 2010-11
6.10 [4-2-1] Portable Station—Extension Settings
Default
0 s
Value Range
0–3000 s
Maintenance Console Location
6.10 [4-2-1] Portable Station—Extension Settings
Programming Manual References
5.13 [3-5-1] Incoming Call Distribution Group—Group Settings—Member List— Wrap-up Timer
5.15 [3-5-3] Incoming Call Distribution Group—Miscellaneous— Options—Wrap-up Timer based on
Feature Manual References
9.1.3 ICD Group Features—Log-in/Log-out
Option 9
Extension Number
Indicates the extension number of the PS (reference only).
Default
Not stored.
Value Range
Max. 4 digits (consisting of 0–9)
Maintenance Console Location
6.10 [4-2-1] Portable Station—Extension Settings
Programming Manual References
3.34 [1-2] Portable Station— Extension No.
Feature Manual References
None
Extension Name
Specifies the name of the PS.
Default
Not stored.
Value Range
Max. 20 characters
Document Version 2010-11 PC Programming Manual 595
6.10 [4-2-1] Portable Station—Extension Settings
Maintenance Console Location
6.10 [4-2-1] Portable Station—Extension Settings
Programming Manual References
3.34 [1-2] Portable Station— Extension Name
Feature Manual References
None
PDN Delayed Ringing (KX-TDA100/KX-TDA200/KX-TDA600 only)
Specifies the delayed ringing setting for calls to a PDN extension (an extension with one or more PDN buttons).
Default
Immediate
Value Range
Immediate, 1 Ring, 2 Rings, 3 Rings, 4 Rings, 5 Rings, 6 Rings
Maintenance Console Location
6.10 [4-2-1] Portable Station—Extension Settings
Programming Manual References
None
Feature Manual References
13.1.7 PDN (Primary Directory Number)/SDN (Secondary Directory Number) Extension
FWD / DND Reference
Call Forwarding (FWD) and Do Not Disturb (DND) settings for each PS can be referred. FWD and DND settings
can be programmed separately for each PS in 6.12 [4-2-2] Portable Station—FWD/DND.
Extension Number
Indicates the extension number of the PS (reference only).
Default
Not stored.
Value Range
Max. 4 digits (consisting of 0–9)
Maintenance Console Location
6.10 [4-2-1] Portable Station—Extension Settings
596 PC Programming Manual Document Version 2010-11
6.10 [4-2-1] Portable Station—Extension Settings
Programming Manual References
3.34 [1-2] Portable Station— Extension No.
Feature Manual References
None
Extension Name
Specifies the name of the PS.
Default
Not stored.
Value Range
Max. 20 characters
Maintenance Console Location
6.10 [4-2-1] Portable Station—Extension Settings
Programming Manual References
3.34 [1-2] Portable Station— Extension Name
Feature Manual References
None
FWD Set for Call from CO
Indicates the current FWD status for incoming CO line calls (reference only).
Default
Off
Value Range
Off, On
Maintenance Console Location
6.10 [4-2-1] Portable Station—Extension Settings
Programming Manual References
6.12 [4-2-2] Portable Station—FWD/DND
Feature Manual References
6.1.6 FWD (Call Forwarding)
Document Version 2010-11 PC Programming Manual 597
6.10 [4-2-1] Portable Station—Extension Settings
DND Set for Call from CO
Indicates the current DND status for incoming CO line calls (reference only).
Default
Off
Value Range
Off, On
Maintenance Console Location
6.10 [4-2-1] Portable Station—Extension Settings
Programming Manual References
6.12 [4-2-2] Portable Station—FWD/DND
Feature Manual References
4.1.9 DND (Do Not Disturb)
FWD Mode for Call from CO
Indicates the forwarding type of incoming CO line calls (reference only).
Default
None
Value Range
None, FWD All, FWD Busy, FWD N/A, FWD Busy N/A
Maintenance Console Location
6.10 [4-2-1] Portable Station—Extension Settings
Programming Manual References
6.12 [4-2-2] Portable Station—FWD/DND
Feature Manual References
6.1.6 FWD (Call Forwarding)
FWD Destination for Call from CO
Indicates the forwarding destination of incoming CO line calls (reference only).
Default
Not stored.
Value Range
Max. 32 digits (consisting of 0–9, *, #, [ ] [Secret], and P [Pause])
598 PC Programming Manual Document Version 2010-11
6.10 [4-2-1] Portable Station—Extension Settings
Maintenance Console Location
6.10 [4-2-1] Portable Station—Extension Settings
Programming Manual References
6.12 [4-2-2] Portable Station—FWD/DND
Feature Manual References
6.1.6 FWD (Call Forwarding)
FWD Set for Call from Extension
Indicates the current FWD status for incoming intercom calls (reference only).
Default
Off
Value Range
Off, On
Maintenance Console Location
6.10 [4-2-1] Portable Station—Extension Settings
Programming Manual References
6.12 [4-2-2] Portable Station—FWD/DND
Feature Manual References
6.1.6 FWD (Call Forwarding)
DND Set for Call from Extension
Indicates the current DND status for incoming intercom calls (reference only).
Default
Off
Value Range
Off, On
Maintenance Console Location
6.10 [4-2-1] Portable Station—Extension Settings
Programming Manual References
6.12 [4-2-2] Portable Station—FWD/DND
Document Version 2010-11 PC Programming Manual 599
6.10 [4-2-1] Portable Station—Extension Settings
Feature Manual References
4.1.9 DND (Do Not Disturb)
FWD Mode for Call from Extension
Indicates the forwarding type of incoming intercom calls (reference only).
Default
None
Value Range
None, FWD All, FWD Busy, FWD N/A, FWD Busy N/A
Maintenance Console Location
6.10 [4-2-1] Portable Station—Extension Settings
Programming Manual References
6.12 [4-2-2] Portable Station—FWD/DND
Feature Manual References
6.1.6 FWD (Call Forwarding)
FWD Destination for Call from Extension
Indicates the forwarding destination of incoming intercom calls (reference only).
Default
Not stored.
Value Range
Max. 32 digits (consisting of 0–9, *, #, [ ] [Secret], and P [Pause])
Maintenance Console Location
6.10 [4-2-1] Portable Station—Extension Settings
Programming Manual References
6.12 [4-2-2] Portable Station—FWD/DND
Feature Manual References
6.1.6 FWD (Call Forwarding)
FWD No Answer Time
Indicates the length of time that an incoming call rings at the PS before the call is forwarded (reference only).
600 PC Programming Manual Document Version 2010-11
6.10 [4-2-1] Portable Station—Extension Settings
Default
15 s
Value Range
0–120 s
Maintenance Console Location
6.10 [4-2-1] Portable Station—Extension Settings
Programming Manual References
6.12 [4-2-2] Portable Station—FWD/DND
Feature Manual References
6.1.6 FWD (Call Forwarding)
Document Version 2010-11 PC Programming Manual 601
6.10 [4-2-1] Portable Station—Extension Settings
6.11 [4-2-1] Portable Station—Extension Settings—
CLIP Generate
CLIP Generate allows the CLIP numbers for a set of locations in series to be programmed together.
Pre-assigned CLIP numbers for those locations will be overwritten.
If a number generated here is longer than 16 digits, the additional digits will be discarded.
Location Entry—Beginning Entry Location (Ext. Number)
Specifies the extension number of the first location to be programmed.
Default
Not stored.
Value Range
PS extension number
Maintenance Console Location
6.11 [4-2-1] Portable Station—Extension Settings—CLIP Generate
Programming Manual References
6.10 [4-2-1] Portable Station—Extension Settings
Feature Manual References
3.1.13 CLIP (Calling Line Identification Presentation)
Location Entry—Number to Generate
Specifies the number of locations to be programmed.
A CLIP number will only be assigned to registered PS extensions, even if the number entered here is larger
than the total number of PS extensions.
Default
1
Value Range
1–total number of connected wired extensions
Maintenance Console Location
6.11 [4-2-1] Portable Station—Extension Settings—CLIP Generate
Programming Manual References
6.10 [4-2-1] Portable Station—Extension Settings
602 PC Programming Manual Document Version 2010-11
6.11 [4-2-1] Portable Station—Extension Settings—CLIP Generate
Feature Manual References
3.1.13 CLIP (Calling Line Identification Presentation)
Parameter—Deleting Digits
Specifies the number of digits to be deleted from the start of an extension number when using it as part of the
CLIP number.
Default
0
Value Range
0–4
Maintenance Console Location
6.11 [4-2-1] Portable Station—Extension Settings—CLIP Generate
Programming Manual References
6.10 [4-2-1] Portable Station—Extension Settings
Feature Manual References
3.1.13 CLIP (Calling Line Identification Presentation)
Parameter—Head of ID
Specifies a prefix number to be applied to all generated CLIP numbers.
Default
Not stored.
Value Range
Max. 16 digits (consisting of 0–9, *, and #)
Maintenance Console Location
6.11 [4-2-1] Portable Station—Extension Settings—CLIP Generate
Programming Manual References
6.10 [4-2-1] Portable Station—Extension Settings
Feature Manual References
3.1.13 CLIP (Calling Line Identification Presentation)
Parameter—Tail of ID
Specifies a suffix number to be applied to all generated CLIP numbers.
Document Version 2010-11 PC Programming Manual 603
6.11 [4-2-1] Portable Station—Extension Settings—CLIP Generate
Default
Not stored.
Value Range
Max. 16 digits (consisting of 0–9, *, and #)
Maintenance Console Location
6.11 [4-2-1] Portable Station—Extension Settings—CLIP Generate
Programming Manual References
6.10 [4-2-1] Portable Station—Extension Settings
Feature Manual References
3.1.13 CLIP (Calling Line Identification Presentation)
604 PC Programming Manual Document Version 2010-11
6.11 [4-2-1] Portable Station—Extension Settings—CLIP Generate
6.12 [4-2-2] Portable Station—FWD/DND
For each PS, separate Call Forwarding (FWD) and Do Not Disturb (DND) settings can be programmed for
incoming intercom and CO line calls. Select the desired PS from the Extension Number / Name list.
Call from CO—Present Button Status
Specifies the status of the FWD/DND—External button.
Default
Current status
Value Range
OFF, FWD, DND
Maintenance Console Location
6.12 [4-2-2] Portable Station—FWD/DND
Programming Manual References
None
Feature Manual References
3.1.13 CLIP (Calling Line Identification Presentation)
Call from CO—FWD Status Availability
Enables or disables the FWD feature for incoming CO line calls.
Default
OFF
Value Range
OFF: Enables extensions to switch to FWD mode by pressing the FWD/DND button, if forward settings have
been programmed.
ON: Prevents extensions from switching to FWD mode by pressing the FWD/DND button.
Maintenance Console Location
6.12 [4-2-2] Portable Station—FWD/DND
Programming Manual References
None
Feature Manual References
6.1.6 FWD (Call Forwarding)
Document Version 2010-11 PC Programming Manual 605
6.12 [4-2-2] Portable Station—FWD/DND
Call from CO—DND Status Availability
Enables or disables the DND feature for incoming CO line calls.
Default
OFF
Value Range
OFF: Enables extensions to switch to DND mode by pressing the FWD/DND button.
ON: Prevents extensions from switching to DND mode by pressing the FWD/DND button.
Maintenance Console Location
6.12 [4-2-2] Portable Station—FWD/DND
Programming Manual References
None
Feature Manual References
4.1.9 DND (Do Not Disturb)
Call from CO—FWD Mode
Specifies the circumstances when incoming CO line calls are forwarded.
Default
None
Value Range
None, FWD All, FWD Busy, FWD N/A, FWD Busy N/A
Maintenance Console Location
6.12 [4-2-2] Portable Station—FWD/DND
Programming Manual References
None
Feature Manual References
6.1.6 FWD (Call Forwarding)
Call from CO—FWD Destination
Specifies the forwarding destination of incoming CO line calls.
Default
Not stored.
606 PC Programming Manual Document Version 2010-11
6.12 [4-2-2] Portable Station—FWD/DND
Value Range
Max. 32 digits (consisting of 0–9, *, #, [ ] [Secret], and P [Pause])
Maintenance Console Location
6.12 [4-2-2] Portable Station—FWD/DND
Programming Manual References
None
Feature Manual References
6.1.6 FWD (Call Forwarding)
Call from Extension—Present Button Status
Specifies the status of the FWD/DND—Internal button.
Default
Current status
Value Range
OFF, FWD, DND
Maintenance Console Location
6.12 [4-2-2] Portable Station—FWD/DND
Programming Manual References
None
Feature Manual References
6.1.7 FWD/DND Button, Group FWD Button
Call from Extension—FWD Status Availability
Enables or disables the FWD feature for incoming intercom calls.
Default
OFF
Value Range
OFF: Enables extensions to switch to FWD mode by pressing the FWD/DND button, if forward settings have
been programmed.
ON: Prevents extensions from switching to FWD mode by pressing the FWD/DND button.
Document Version 2010-11 PC Programming Manual 607
6.12 [4-2-2] Portable Station—FWD/DND
Maintenance Console Location
6.12 [4-2-2] Portable Station—FWD/DND
Programming Manual References
None
Feature Manual References
6.1.6 FWD (Call Forwarding)
Call from Extension—DND Status Availability
Enables or disables the DND feature for incoming intercom calls.
Default
OFF
Value Range
OFF: Enables extensions to switch to DND mode by pressing the FWD/DND button.
ON: Prevents extensions from switching to DND mode by pressing the FWD/DND button.
Maintenance Console Location
6.12 [4-2-2] Portable Station—FWD/DND
Programming Manual References
None
Feature Manual References
4.1.9 DND (Do Not Disturb)
Call from Extension—FWD Mode
Specifies the circumstances when incoming intercom calls are forwarded.
Default
None
Value Range
None, FWD All, FWD Busy, FWD N/A, FWD Busy N/A
Maintenance Console Location
6.12 [4-2-2] Portable Station—FWD/DND
Programming Manual References
None
608 PC Programming Manual Document Version 2010-11
6.12 [4-2-2] Portable Station—FWD/DND
Feature Manual References
6.1.6 FWD (Call Forwarding)
Call from Extension—FWD Destination
Specifies the forwarding destination of incoming intercom calls.
Default
Not stored.
Value Range
Max. 32 digits (consisting of 0–9, *, #, [ ] [Secret], and P [Pause])
Maintenance Console Location
6.12 [4-2-2] Portable Station—FWD/DND
Programming Manual References
None
Feature Manual References
6.1.6 FWD (Call Forwarding)
FWD No Answer Timer
Specifies the length of time that an incoming call rings at the PS before the call is forwarded.
Default
15 s
Value Range
0–120 s
Maintenance Console Location
6.12 [4-2-2] Portable Station—FWD/DND
Programming Manual References
None
Feature Manual References
6.1.6 FWD (Call Forwarding)
Document Version 2010-11 PC Programming Manual 609
6.12 [4-2-2] Portable Station—FWD/DND
6.13 [4-2-3] Portable Station—Flexible Button
Each flexible button can be customized to allow one-touch access to a certain feature. A maximum of 12 flexible
buttons can be customized for each PS. Select the desired PS from the Extension Number / Name list.
To copy values from one location to another, click the Copy to button.
For more information on flexible buttons, see "6.1.3 Flexible Buttons" in the Feature Manual.
Display Option—Key Setting
Type
Specifies the feature to be assigned to the flexible button.
Default
Single CO
Value Range
Not Stored, Loop CO, Single CO, Group CO, DSS, One-touch, ICD Group, Message Waiting, FWD/DND
(Both), FWD/DND (External), FWD/DND (Internal), Group Fwd (Both), Group Fwd (External), Group Fwd
(Internal), Account, Conference, Terminate, EFA, Call Park, Log-in/Log-out, Hurry-up, Wrap-up, Time
Service, TRS Level Change, CLIR, COLR, Time Service - Automatic/Manual, Two-way Record, Two-way
Transfer, LCS, Voice Mail Transfer, NDSS, CTI, PDN (KX-TDA100/KX-TDA200/KX-TDA600 only), SDN
(KX-TDA100/KX-TDA200/KX-TDA600 only)
Maintenance Console Location
6.13 [4-2-3] Portable Station—Flexible Button
Programming Manual References
6.14 [4-2-3] Portable Station—Flexible Button—Flexible button data copy
Feature Manual References
None
Parameter Selection (for Single CO)
Specifies the CO line to be accessed.
Default
1
Value Range
For KX-TDA50:
1–16
For KX-TDA100/KX-TDA200:
1–128
For KX-TDA600:
1–640
610 PC Programming Manual Document Version 2010-11
6.13 [4-2-3] Portable Station—Flexible Button
Maintenance Console Location
6.13 [4-2-3] Portable Station—Flexible Button
Programming Manual References
None
Feature Manual References
3.1.14 CO Line Access
Parameter Selection (for Group CO)
Specifies the trunk group to be accessed.
Default
1
Value Range
For KX-TDA50/KX-TDA100/KX-TDA200:
1–64
For KX-TDA600:
1–96
Maintenance Console Location
6.13 [4-2-3] Portable Station—Flexible Button
Programming Manual References
None
Feature Manual References
3.1.14 CO Line Access
Parameter Selection (for Call Park)
Specifies whether a call is parked in an idle parking zone automatically, or in a specific parking zone.
Default
Automatic
Value Range
Automatic, Specific
Maintenance Console Location
6.13 [4-2-3] Portable Station—Flexible Button
Document Version 2010-11 PC Programming Manual 611
6.13 [4-2-3] Portable Station—Flexible Button
Programming Manual References
None
Feature Manual References
3.1.5 Call Park
Parameter Selection (for Log-in/Log-out)
Specifies which incoming call distribution groups that the PS belongs to are logged in to or logged out from.
Default
None
Value Range
None: The incoming call distribution group is selected manually.
All: All incoming call distribution groups that the PS belongs to.
Incoming Group: A pre-specified incoming call distribution group
Maintenance Console Location
6.13 [4-2-3] Portable Station—Flexible Button
Programming Manual References
None
Feature Manual References
9.1.3 ICD Group Features—Log-in/Log-out
Parameter Selection (for Time Service)
Selects which time modes are switched manually.
Default
All
Value Range
All (Day/Night/Lunch/Break), Day/Night/Break, Day/Night/Lunch, Day/Night
Maintenance Console Location
6.13 [4-2-3] Portable Station—Flexible Button
Programming Manual References
None
Feature Manual References
17.1.5 Time Service
612 PC Programming Manual Document Version 2010-11
6.13 [4-2-3] Portable Station—Flexible Button
Parameter Selection (for TRS Level Change)
Specifies the TRS level to be used temporarily on a certain PS.
Default
1
Value Range
1–7
Maintenance Console Location
6.13 [4-2-3] Portable Station—Flexible Button
Programming Manual References
None
Feature Manual References
17.1.6 TRS (Toll Restriction)
4.1.4 Dial Tone Transfer
Parameter Selection (for Time Service - Automatic/Manual)
Specifies the Time Table to be used when the Time Service Switching Mode is set to Automatic.
Default
1
Value Range
1–8
Maintenance Console Location
6.13 [4-2-3] Portable Station—Flexible Button
Programming Manual References
None
Feature Manual References
17.1.5 Time Service
Parameter Selection (for SDN) (KX-TDA100/KX-TDA200/KX-TDA600 only)
Specifies the delayed ringing setting for calls arriving at an SDN button.
The value specified here is only used when System Wireless—SDN Delayed Ringing with LCD
(KX-TDA100/KX-TDA200/KX-TDA600 only) on 4.17 [2-9] System Options is set to "Enable".
Default
Immediate
Document Version 2010-11 PC Programming Manual 613
6.13 [4-2-3] Portable Station—Flexible Button
Value Range
Immediate, 1 Ring, 2 Rings, 3 Rings, 4 Rings, 5 Rings, 6 Rings, No Ring
Maintenance Console Location
6.13 [4-2-3] Portable Station—Flexible Button
Programming Manual References
4.17 [2-9] System Options—Option 4— System Wireless—SDN Delayed Ringing with LCD (KX-TDA100/
KX-TDA200/KX-TDA600 only)
Feature Manual References
13.1.7 PDN (Primary Directory Number)/SDN (Secondary Directory Number) Extension
Ext. No. / Floating Ext. No. (for DSS)
Specifies the number of an extension to be accessed.
Default
Not stored.
Value Range
Max. 5 digits (consisting of 0–9)
Maintenance Console Location
6.13 [4-2-3] Portable Station—Flexible Button
Programming Manual References
None
Feature Manual References
None
Ext. No. / Floating Ext. No. (for ICD Group)
Specifies the floating extension number of an incoming call distribution group to be accessed.
Default
Not stored.
Value Range
Max. 5 digits (consisting of 0–9)
Maintenance Console Location
6.13 [4-2-3] Portable Station—Flexible Button
614 PC Programming Manual Document Version 2010-11
6.13 [4-2-3] Portable Station—Flexible Button
Programming Manual References
None
Feature Manual References
None
Ext. No. / Floating Ext. No. (for Message Waiting)
Specifies the number of an extension or floating extension number of an incoming call distribution group for
which messages are checked. If this cell is left empty, the PS will check its own messages only.
Default
Not stored.
Value Range
Max. 5 digits (consisting of 0–9)
Maintenance Console Location
6.13 [4-2-3] Portable Station—Flexible Button
Programming Manual References
None
Feature Manual References
None
Ext. No. / Floating Ext. No. (for Group Fwd (Both))
Specifies the floating extension number of an incoming call distribution group for which both intercom and CO
line calls are forwarded.
Default
Not stored.
Value Range
Max. 5 digits (consisting of 0–9)
Maintenance Console Location
6.13 [4-2-3] Portable Station—Flexible Button
Programming Manual References
None
Feature Manual References
6.1.6 FWD (Call Forwarding)
Document Version 2010-11 PC Programming Manual 615
6.13 [4-2-3] Portable Station—Flexible Button
Ext. No. / Floating Ext. No. (for Group Fwd (External))
Specifies the floating extension number of an incoming call distribution group for which CO line calls are
forwarded.
Default
Not stored.
Value Range
Max. 5 digits (consisting of 0–9)
Maintenance Console Location
6.13 [4-2-3] Portable Station—Flexible Button
Programming Manual References
None
Feature Manual References
6.1.6 FWD (Call Forwarding)
Ext. No. / Floating Ext. No. (for Group Fwd (Internal))
Specifies the floating extension number of an incoming call distribution group for which intercom calls are
forwarded.
Default
Not stored.
Value Range
Max. 5 digits (consisting of 0–9)
Maintenance Console Location
6.13 [4-2-3] Portable Station—Flexible Button
Programming Manual References
None
Feature Manual References
6.1.6 FWD (Call Forwarding)
Ext. No. / Floating Ext. No. (for Log-in/Log-out)
Specifies the floating extension number of an incoming call distribution group to log-in to or log-out from.
Default
Not stored.
616 PC Programming Manual Document Version 2010-11
6.13 [4-2-3] Portable Station—Flexible Button
Value Range
Max. 5 digits (consisting of 0–9)
Maintenance Console Location
6.13 [4-2-3] Portable Station—Flexible Button
Programming Manual References
None
Feature Manual References
None
Ext. No. / Floating Ext. No. (for Hurry-up)
Specifies the floating extension number of the incoming call distribution group whose longest waiting call will
be redirected (Manual Queue Redirection).
Default
Not stored.
Value Range
Max. 5 digits (consisting of 0–9)
Maintenance Console Location
6.13 [4-2-3] Portable Station—Flexible Button
Programming Manual References
None
Feature Manual References
9.1.6 ICD Group Features—Queuing
Ext. No. / Floating Ext. No. (for Two-way Record)
Specifies the floating extension number of the VM (DPT) group containing the PS’s mailbox.
Default
Not stored.
Value Range
Max. 5 digits (consisting of 0–9)
Maintenance Console Location
6.13 [4-2-3] Portable Station—Flexible Button
Document Version 2010-11 PC Programming Manual 617
6.13 [4-2-3] Portable Station—Flexible Button
Programming Manual References
None
Feature Manual References
19.1.4 Voice Mail DPT (Digital) Integration
Ext. No. / Floating Ext. No. (for Two-way Transfer)
Specifies the floating extension number of the VM (DPT) group containing the desired mailbox.
Default
Not stored.
Value Range
Max. 5 digits (consisting of 0–9)
Maintenance Console Location
6.13 [4-2-3] Portable Station—Flexible Button
Programming Manual References
None
Feature Manual References
19.1.4 Voice Mail DPT (Digital) Integration
Ext. No. / Floating Ext. No. (for Voice Mail Transfer)
Specifies the floating extension number of the VM (DTMF/DPT) group containing the desired mailbox.
Default
Not stored.
Value Range
Max. 5 digits (consisting of 0–9)
Maintenance Console Location
6.13 [4-2-3] Portable Station—Flexible Button
Programming Manual References
None
Feature Manual References
19.1.5 Voice Mail DTMF Integration
19.1.4 Voice Mail DPT (Digital) Integration
618 PC Programming Manual Document Version 2010-11
6.13 [4-2-3] Portable Station—Flexible Button
Ext. No. / Floating Ext. No. (for SDN) (KX-TDA100/KX-TDA200/KX-TDA600 only)
Specifies the floating extension number of the corresponding (owner) extension for the SDN button.
Note that the extension specified here must have a PDN button registered for the SDN button to function.
Default
Not stored.
Value Range
Max. 5 digits (consisting of 0–9)
Maintenance Console Location
6.13 [4-2-3] Portable Station—Flexible Button
Programming Manual References
None
Feature Manual References
13.1.7 PDN (Primary Directory Number)/SDN (Secondary Directory Number) Extension
Dial (for One-touch)
Specifies the number to be dialed. The PBX can have a maximum of 500 (with the KX-TDA50/KX-TDA100/
KX-TDA200) or 1000 (with the KX-TDA600) One-touch Dialing buttons for PSs.
Default
Not stored.
Value Range
Max. 32 digits (consisting of 0–9, *, #, T [Transfer], [ ] [Secret], P [Pause], and F [Flash])
Maintenance Console Location
6.13 [4-2-3] Portable Station—Flexible Button
Programming Manual References
None
Feature Manual References
12.1.4 One-touch Dialing
Dial (for NDSS)
Specifies the network extension number of the extension to be accessed using Network Direct Station
Selection.
Note that only extension numbers that have been previously registered in 11.4 [9-4] NDSS Key Table can be
specified here.
Document Version 2010-11 PC Programming Manual 619
6.13 [4-2-3] Portable Station—Flexible Button
Default
Not stored.
Value Range
Max. 16 digits (consisting of 0–9, *, #, T [Transfer], [ ] [Secret], P [Pause], and F [Flash])
Maintenance Console Location
6.13 [4-2-3] Portable Station—Flexible Button
Programming Manual References
None
Feature Manual References
13.1.15 Private Network Features—NDSS (Network Direct Station Selection)
Optional Parameter (or Ringing Tone Type Number) (for Time Service)
Specifies the Time Table to be used for changing time modes in the Automatic Switching mode.
Default
1
Value Range
1–8
Maintenance Console Location
6.13 [4-2-3] Portable Station—Flexible Button
Programming Manual References
None
Feature Manual References
17.1.5 Time Service
Optional Parameter (or Ringing Tone Type Number) (for Call Park)
Specifies the number of the parking zone a call is to be parked in when a Call Park button with Parameter
Selection (for Call Park) on this screen set to Specific is pressed.
Default
0
Value Range
0–99
620 PC Programming Manual Document Version 2010-11
6.13 [4-2-3] Portable Station—Flexible Button
Maintenance Console Location
6.13 [4-2-3] Portable Station—Flexible Button
Programming Manual References
None
Feature Manual References
3.1.5 Call Park
Ext No. of Mailbox (for Two-way Transfer)
Specifies the number of the extension whose mailbox will be used to record conversations using One-touch
Two-way Transfer. (For example, a secretary can record a conversation into the mailbox of a boss.) If the cell
is left empty, the extension user must specify the number of an extension each time.
Default
Not stored.
Value Range
Max. 5 digits (consisting of 0–9)
Maintenance Console Location
6.13 [4-2-3] Portable Station—Flexible Button
Programming Manual References
None
Feature Manual References
19.1.4 Voice Mail DPT (Digital) Integration
Display Option—Key Setting & Key Label Name
Type
This parameter is equivalent to Type on the Key Setting screen.
Maintenance Console Location
6.13 [4-2-3] Portable Station—Flexible Button
Programming Manual References
6.13 [4-2-3] Portable Station—Flexible Button—Display Option—Key Setting— Type
Feature Manual References
None
Document Version 2010-11 PC Programming Manual 621
6.13 [4-2-3] Portable Station—Flexible Button
Extension Number
This parameter is equivalent to Ext. No. / Floating Ext. No. on the Key Setting screen.
Maintenance Console Location
6.13 [4-2-3] Portable Station—Flexible Button
Programming Manual References
6.13 [4-2-3] Portable Station—Flexible Button—Display Option—Key Setting— Type— Ext. No. / Floating
Ext. No. (for DSS)
6.13 [4-2-3] Portable Station—Flexible Button—Display Option—Key Setting— Type— Ext. No. / Floating
Ext. No. (for ICD Group)
6.13 [4-2-3] Portable Station—Flexible Button—Display Option—Key Setting— Type— Ext. No. / Floating
Ext. No. (for Message Waiting)
6.13 [4-2-3] Portable Station—Flexible Button—Display Option—Key Setting— Type— Ext. No. / Floating
Ext. No. (for Group Fwd (Both))
6.13 [4-2-3] Portable Station—Flexible Button—Display Option—Key Setting— Type— Ext. No. / Floating
Ext. No. (for Group Fwd (External))
6.13 [4-2-3] Portable Station—Flexible Button—Display Option—Key Setting— Type— Ext. No. / Floating
Ext. No. (for Group Fwd (Internal))
6.13 [4-2-3] Portable Station—Flexible Button—Display Option—Key Setting— Type— Ext. No. / Floating
Ext. No. (for Log-in/Log-out)
6.13 [4-2-3] Portable Station—Flexible Button—Display Option—Key Setting— Type— Ext. No. / Floating
Ext. No. (for Hurry-up)
6.13 [4-2-3] Portable Station—Flexible Button—Display Option—Key Setting— Type— Ext. No. / Floating
Ext. No. (for Two-way Record)
6.13 [4-2-3] Portable Station—Flexible Button—Display Option—Key Setting— Type— Ext. No. / Floating
Ext. No. (for Two-way Transfer)
6.13 [4-2-3] Portable Station—Flexible Button—Display Option—Key Setting— Type— Ext. No. / Floating
Ext. No. (for Voice Mail Transfer)
6.13 [4-2-3] Portable Station—Flexible Button—Display Option—Key Setting— Type— Ext. No. / Floating
Ext. No. (for SDN) (KX-TDA100/KX-TDA200/KX-TDA600 only)
Feature Manual References
None
Dial
This parameter is equivalent to Dial on the Key Setting screen.
Maintenance Console Location
6.13 [4-2-3] Portable Station—Flexible Button
Programming Manual References
6.13 [4-2-3] Portable Station—Flexible Button—Display Option—Key Setting— Dial (for One-touch)
6.13 [4-2-3] Portable Station—Flexible Button—Display Option—Key Setting— Dial (for NDSS)
622 PC Programming Manual Document Version 2010-11
6.13 [4-2-3] Portable Station—Flexible Button
Feature Manual References
None
Parameter 1
This parameter is equivalent to Parameter Selection on the Key Setting screen.
Maintenance Console Location
6.13 [4-2-3] Portable Station—Flexible Button
Programming Manual References
6.13 [4-2-3] Portable Station—Flexible Button—Display Option—Key Setting— Parameter Selection (for
Single CO)
6.13 [4-2-3] Portable Station—Flexible Button—Display Option—Key Setting— Parameter Selection (for
Group CO)
6.13 [4-2-3] Portable Station—Flexible Button—Display Option—Key Setting— Parameter Selection (for
Call Park)
6.13 [4-2-3] Portable Station—Flexible Button—Display Option—Key Setting— Parameter Selection (for
Log-in/Log-out)
6.13 [4-2-3] Portable Station—Flexible Button—Display Option—Key Setting— Parameter Selection (for
Time Service)
6.13 [4-2-3] Portable Station—Flexible Button—Display Option—Key Setting— Parameter Selection (for
TRS Level Change)
6.13 [4-2-3] Portable Station—Flexible Button—Display Option—Key Setting— Parameter Selection (for
Time Service - Automatic/Manual)
6.13 [4-2-3] Portable Station—Flexible Button—Display Option—Key Setting— Parameter Selection (for
SDN) (KX-TDA100/KX-TDA200/KX-TDA600 only)
Feature Manual References
None
Parameter 2
This parameter is equivalent to Optional Parameter (or Ringing Tone Type Number) on the Key Setting
screen.
Maintenance Console Location
6.13 [4-2-3] Portable Station—Flexible Button
Programming Manual References
6.13 [4-2-3] Portable Station—Flexible Button—Display Option—Key Setting— Optional Parameter (or
Ringing Tone Type Number) (for Time Service)
6.13 [4-2-3] Portable Station—Flexible Button—Display Option—Key Setting— Optional Parameter (or
Ringing Tone Type Number) (for Call Park)
Document Version 2010-11 PC Programming Manual 623
6.13 [4-2-3] Portable Station—Flexible Button
Feature Manual References
None
Mailbox Number
This parameter is equivalent to Ext No. of Mailbox on the Key Setting screen.
Maintenance Console Location
6.13 [4-2-3] Portable Station—Flexible Button
Programming Manual References
6.13 [4-2-3] Portable Station—Flexible Button—Display Option—Key Setting— Ext No. of Mailbox (for
Two-way Transfer)
Feature Manual References
None
624 PC Programming Manual Document Version 2010-11
6.13 [4-2-3] Portable Station—Flexible Button
6.14 [4-2-3] Portable Station—Flexible Button—
Flexible button data copy
The flexible button settings of a PS can be copied to different PSs.
Destination Extension Line
Select the number and name of the PS that will receive the copied settings. Multiple PSs can be selected. To
select all PSs at once, click Select All.
When selecting multiple extensions, note that if the source extension has an SDN button, the copy operation
cannot be performed.
Maintenance Console Location
6.14 [4-2-3] Portable Station—Flexible Button—Flexible button data copy
Programming Manual References
6.13 [4-2-3] Portable Station—Flexible Button
Feature Manual References
None
Document Version 2010-11 PC Programming Manual 625
6.14 [4-2-3] Portable Station—Flexible Button—Flexible button data copy
6.15 [4-2-4] Portable Station—NDSS Link Data - Send
It is possible to cancel the transmission of an extension’s status data over the network. Select the desired
extension from the Extension Number / Name list.
Network BLF Data to NDSS Key of Other PBX - Other PBX (Network PBX ID=1)
Selects whether extension status data is transmitted over the network for the selected extension. This setting
is automatically set to ON when the feature is used, and can only be manually changed from ON to OFF, to
cancel data transmission.
Default
OFF
Value Range
OFF, ON
Maintenance Console Location
6.15 [4-2-4] Portable Station—NDSS Link Data - Send
Programming Manual References
11.4 [9-4] NDSS Key Table
Feature Manual References
13.1.15 Private Network Features—NDSS (Network Direct Station Selection)
626 PC Programming Manual Document Version 2010-11
6.15 [4-2-4] Portable Station—NDSS Link Data - Send
6.16 [4-2-5] Portable Station—Simplified Voice
Message
When an SVM/ESVM card is installed in the PBX, Simplified Voice Message features can be provided for each
PS.
This screen allows you to specify which card each extension belongs to, and the maximum number of
messages that can be stored for each extension.
For more information on Simplified Voice Message, see "16.1.5 SVM (Simplified Voice Message)" in the
Feature Manual.
Extension Number
Indicates the extension number (reference only).
Default
Not stored.
Value Range
Max. 4 digits (consisting of 0–9)
Maintenance Console Location
6.16 [4-2-5] Portable Station—Simplified Voice Message
Programming Manual References
3.34 [1-2] Portable Station
Feature Manual References
None
Extension Name
Indicates the name of the extension (reference only).
Default
Not stored.
Value Range
Max. 20 characters
Maintenance Console Location
6.16 [4-2-5] Portable Station—Simplified Voice Message
Programming Manual References
3.34 [1-2] Portable Station— Extension Name
6.10 [4-2-1] Portable Station—Extension Settings—Extension Name
Document Version 2010-11 PC Programming Manual 627
6.16 [4-2-5] Portable Station—Simplified Voice Message
Feature Manual References
None
Simplified Voice Message
Selects which SVM/ESVM card to use to store and play back greetings and messages for the extension.
Each extension must be assigned to a specific SVM/ESVM card and block within the card, and can only use
the assigned card. If two SVM/ESVM cards are installed in the PBX, you should assign a number of extensions
to each card, to ensure that the necessary resources, such as message recording space, are available for
each extension.
Default
For KX-TDA50/KX-TDA100/KX-TDA200:
Card1
For KX-TDA600:
Card1(A)
Value Range
For KX-TDA50/KX-TDA100/KX-TDA200:
None, Card1, Card2
For KX-TDA600:
None, Card1(A), Card1(B), Card2(A), Card2(B)
Maintenance Console Location
6.16 [4-2-5] Portable Station—Simplified Voice Message
Programming Manual References
3.1 [1-1] Slot
Feature Manual References
16.1.5 SVM (Simplified Voice Message)
Maximum of SVM Log
Specifies the maximum number of voice messages (not including greeting messages) that can be stored for
the extension.
Default
10
Value Range
1–100
Maintenance Console Location
6.16 [4-2-5] Portable Station—Simplified Voice Message
628 PC Programming Manual Document Version 2010-11
6.16 [4-2-5] Portable Station—Simplified Voice Message
Programming Manual References
None
Feature Manual References
16.1.5 SVM (Simplified Voice Message)
Document Version 2010-11 PC Programming Manual 629
6.16 [4-2-5] Portable Station—Simplified Voice Message
6.17 [4-2-6] Portable Station—Single CO
Appearance (KX-TDA50 only)
It is possible to display CO line information in real time on the display of a KX-WT125 or KX-WT126 when PS
soft buttons are assigned as Single CO buttons.
Parameter Selection (for Single CO)
Selects the CO line to be displayed on the PS. The CO line name, if set, is also displayed here.
Default
1–12: 01–12
Value Range
01–16
Maintenance Console Location
6.17 [4-2-6] Portable Station—Single CO Appearance (KX-TDA50 only)
Programming Manual References
3.35 [1-3] Option—System Wireless—CO Status Display in Standby (KX-WT125/126 only) (Need System
Restart) (KX-TDA50 only)
6.13 [4-2-3] Portable Station—Flexible Button— Parameter Selection (for Single CO)
12.1 [10-1] CO Line Settings— CO Name
Feature Manual References
13.1.25 PS—CO Status Display (KX-WT125/KX-WT126 only) (KX-TDA50 only)
630 PC Programming Manual Document Version 2010-11
6.17 [4-2-6] Portable Station—Single CO Appearance (KX-TDA50 only)
6.18 [4-3] DSS Console
A DSS Console can be used in conjunction with a PT. A maximum of 4 (with the KX-TDA50), 8 (with the
KX-TDA100/KX-TDA200), or 64 (with the KX-TDA600) DSS Consoles can be programmed. The DPT Type
—Type of the extension port that the DSS Console is connected to must be set to DSS in 3.5 [1-1] Slot—
Port Property - Extension Port.
Each flexible DSS button can be customized to access a certain feature. A maximum of 66 flexible DSS buttons
can be customized for each DSS Console. The settings can then be printed out as a key label template and
attached to your DSS Console for quick reference. Select the desired DSS Console from the DSS Console
No. list.
To copy the flexible DSS button settings from one location to another, click the Copy to button.
To print the flexible DSS button settings, click Key Label Print.
The key label settings related to display - Label, Color of Font, Color of Background, Font Size, and DSS Type
- can be saved for future use. Select an action from the Key Label File drop-down list. Note that it is necessary
to save these settings separately from system data.
For more information on flexible buttons, see "6.1.3 Flexible Buttons" in the Feature Manual.
Pair Extension
Specifies the extension number of the PT to be used in pair with the DSS Console.
Note that if one or more SDN buttons have been set at the DSS Console, they must be deleted before this
setting can be changed.
Default
None
Value Range
None, Max. 5 digits (consisting of 0–9)
Maintenance Console Location
6.18 [4-3] DSS Console
Programming Manual References
None
Feature Manual References
None
Display Option—Key Setting
Type
Specifies the feature to be assigned to the flexible DSS button.
Default
Not stored.
Value Range
Not Stored, Loop CO, Single CO, Group CO, DSS, One-touch, ICD Group, Message Waiting, FWD/DND
(Both), FWD/DND (External), FWD/DND (Internal), Group Fwd (Both), Group Fwd (External), Group Fwd
Document Version 2010-11 PC Programming Manual 631
6.18 [4-3] DSS Console
(Internal), Account, Conference, Terminate, EFA, Call Park, Call Log, Log-in/Log-out, Hurry-up, Wrap-up,
System Alarm, Time Service, Answer, Release, TRS Level Change, CLIR, COLR, Headset, Time Service -
Automatic/Manual, Check In, Check Out, Cleaned Up (KX-TDA50/KX-TDA100/KX-TDA200 only), Two-way
Record, Two-way Transfer, LCS, Voice Mail Transfer, NDSS, CTI, SDN (KX-TDA100/KX-TDA200/
KX-TDA600 only)
Maintenance Console Location
6.18 [4-3] DSS Console
Programming Manual References
6.19 [4-3] DSS Console—DSS key data copy
Feature Manual References
6.1.3 Flexible Buttons
Parameter Selection (for Single CO)
Specifies the CO line to be accessed.
Default
1
Value Range
For KX-TDA50:
1–16
For KX-TDA100/KX-TDA200:
1–128
For KX-TDA600:
1–640
Maintenance Console Location
6.18 [4-3] DSS Console
Programming Manual References
None
Feature Manual References
3.1.14 CO Line Access
Parameter Selection (for Group CO)
Specifies the trunk group to be accessed.
632 PC Programming Manual Document Version 2010-11
6.18 [4-3] DSS Console
Default
1
Value Range
For KX-TDA50/KX-TDA100/KX-TDA200:
1–64
For KX-TDA600:
1–96
Maintenance Console Location
6.18 [4-3] DSS Console
Programming Manual References
None
Feature Manual References
3.1.14 CO Line Access
Parameter Selection (for Call Park)
Specifies whether a call is parked in an idle parking zone automatically or in a specific parking zone.
Default
Automatic
Value Range
Automatic, Specific
Maintenance Console Location
6.18 [4-3] DSS Console
Programming Manual References
None
Feature Manual References
3.1.5 Call Park
Parameter Selection (for Log-in/Log-out)
Specifies which incoming call distribution groups that the paired extension belongs to are logged in to or logged
out from.
Default
None
Document Version 2010-11 PC Programming Manual 633
6.18 [4-3] DSS Console
Value Range
None: The incoming call distribution group is selected manually.
All: All incoming call distribution groups that the paired extension belongs to.
Incoming Group: A pre-specified incoming call distribution group
Maintenance Console Location
6.18 [4-3] DSS Console
Programming Manual References
None
Feature Manual References
9.1.3 ICD Group Features—Log-in/Log-out
Parameter Selection (for Time Service)
Selects which time modes are switched manually.
Default
All
Value Range
All (Day/Night/Lunch/Break), Day/Night/Break, Day/Night/Lunch, Day/Night
Maintenance Console Location
6.18 [4-3] DSS Console
Programming Manual References
None
Feature Manual References
17.1.5 Time Service
Parameter Selection (for TRS Level Change)
Specifies the TRS level to be used temporarily on a certain extension.
Default
1
Value Range
1–7
634 PC Programming Manual Document Version 2010-11
6.18 [4-3] DSS Console
Maintenance Console Location
6.18 [4-3] DSS Console
Programming Manual References
None
Feature Manual References
17.1.6 TRS (Toll Restriction)
4.1.4 Dial Tone Transfer
Parameter Selection (for Time Service - Automatic/Manual)
Specifies the Time Table to be used when the Time Service Switching Mode is set to Automatic.
Default
1
Value Range
1–8
Maintenance Console Location
6.18 [4-3] DSS Console
Programming Manual References
None
Feature Manual References
17.1.5 Time Service
Parameter Selection (for SDN) (KX-TDA100/KX-TDA200/KX-TDA600 only)
Specifies the delayed ringing setting for calls arriving at an SDN button.
Default
Immediate
Value Range
Immediate, 1 Ring, 2 Rings, 3 Rings, 4 Rings, 5 Rings, 6 Rings, No Ring
Maintenance Console Location
6.18 [4-3] DSS Console
Programming Manual References
None
Document Version 2010-11 PC Programming Manual 635
6.18 [4-3] DSS Console
Feature Manual References
13.1.7 PDN (Primary Directory Number)/SDN (Secondary Directory Number) Extension
Ext. No. / Floating Ext. No. (for DSS)
Specifies the number of an extension to be accessed.
Default
Not stored.
Value Range
Max. 5 digits (consisting of 0–9)
Maintenance Console Location
6.18 [4-3] DSS Console
Programming Manual References
None
Feature Manual References
None
Ext. No. / Floating Ext. No. (for ICD Group)
Specifies the floating extension number of an incoming call distribution group to be accessed.
Default
Not stored.
Value Range
Max. 5 digits (consisting of 0–9)
Maintenance Console Location
6.18 [4-3] DSS Console
Programming Manual References
None
Feature Manual References
None
Ext. No. / Floating Ext. No. (for Message Waiting)
Specifies the number of an extension or floating extension number of an incoming call distribution group for
which messages are checked. If this cell is left empty, the paired extension will check its own messages only.
636 PC Programming Manual Document Version 2010-11
6.18 [4-3] DSS Console
Default
Not stored.
Value Range
Max. 5 digits (consisting of 0–9)
Maintenance Console Location
6.18 [4-3] DSS Console
Programming Manual References
None
Feature Manual References
None
Ext. No. / Floating Ext. No. (for Group Fwd (Both))
Specifies the floating extension number of an incoming call distribution group for which both intercom and CO
line calls are forwarded.
Default
Not stored.
Value Range
Max. 5 digits (consisting of 0–9)
Maintenance Console Location
6.18 [4-3] DSS Console
Programming Manual References
None
Feature Manual References
6.1.6 FWD (Call Forwarding)
Ext. No. / Floating Ext. No. (for Group Fwd (External))
Specifies the floating extension number of an incoming call distribution group for which CO line calls are
forwarded.
Default
Not stored.
Value Range
Max. 5 digits (consisting of 0–9)
Document Version 2010-11 PC Programming Manual 637
6.18 [4-3] DSS Console
Maintenance Console Location
6.18 [4-3] DSS Console
Programming Manual References
None
Feature Manual References
6.1.6 FWD (Call Forwarding)
Ext. No. / Floating Ext. No. (for Group Fwd (Internal))
Specifies the floating extension number of an incoming call distribution group for which intercom calls are
forwarded.
Default
Not stored.
Value Range
Max. 5 digits (consisting of 0–9)
Maintenance Console Location
6.18 [4-3] DSS Console
Programming Manual References
None
Feature Manual References
6.1.6 FWD (Call Forwarding)
Ext. No. / Floating Ext. No. (for Call Log)
Specifies the paired extension’s number or the floating extension number of an incoming call distribution group
for which call log information is displayed. If the cell is left empty, the paired extension will display its own call
log information.
Default
Not stored.
Value Range
Max. 5 digits (consisting of 0–9)
Maintenance Console Location
6.18 [4-3] DSS Console
638 PC Programming Manual Document Version 2010-11
6.18 [4-3] DSS Console
Programming Manual References
None
Feature Manual References
None
Ext. No. / Floating Ext. No. (for Log-in/Log-out)
Specifies the floating extension number of an incoming call distribution group to log-in to or log-out from.
Default
Not stored.
Value Range
Max. 5 digits (consisting of 0–9)
Maintenance Console Location
6.18 [4-3] DSS Console
Programming Manual References
None
Feature Manual References
None
Ext. No. / Floating Ext. No. (for Hurry-up)
Specifies the floating extension number of the incoming call distribution group whose longest waiting call will
be redirected (Manual Queue Redirection).
Default
Not stored.
Value Range
Max. 5 digits (consisting of 0–9)
Maintenance Console Location
6.18 [4-3] DSS Console
Programming Manual References
None
Feature Manual References
9.1.6 ICD Group Features—Queuing
Document Version 2010-11 PC Programming Manual 639
6.18 [4-3] DSS Console
Ext. No. / Floating Ext. No. (for Two-way Record)
Specifies the floating extension number of the VM (DPT) group containing the paired extension’s mailbox.
Default
Not stored.
Value Range
Max. 5 digits (consisting of 0–9)
Maintenance Console Location
6.18 [4-3] DSS Console
Programming Manual References
None
Feature Manual References
19.1.4 Voice Mail DPT (Digital) Integration
Ext. No. / Floating Ext. No. (for Two-way Transfer)
Specifies the floating extension number of the VM (DPT) group containing the desired mailbox.
Default
Not stored.
Value Range
Max. 5 digits (consisting of 0–9)
Maintenance Console Location
6.18 [4-3] DSS Console
Programming Manual References
None
Feature Manual References
19.1.4 Voice Mail DPT (Digital) Integration
Ext. No. / Floating Ext. No. (for Voice Mail Transfer)
Specifies the floating extension number of the VM (DTMF/DPT) group containing the desired mailbox.
Default
Not stored.
Value Range
Max. 5 digits (consisting of 0–9)
640 PC Programming Manual Document Version 2010-11
6.18 [4-3] DSS Console
Maintenance Console Location
6.18 [4-3] DSS Console
Programming Manual References
None
Feature Manual References
19.1.5 Voice Mail DTMF Integration
19.1.4 Voice Mail DPT (Digital) Integration
Ext. No. / Floating Ext. No. (for SDN) (KX-TDA100/KX-TDA200/KX-TDA600 only)
Specifies the floating extension number of the PDN extension corresponding to the SDN button.
Note that the extension specified here must have a PDN button registered for the SDN button to function.
Default
Not stored.
Value Range
Max. 5 digits (consisting of 0–9)
Maintenance Console Location
6.18 [4-3] DSS Console
Programming Manual References
None
Feature Manual References
13.1.7 PDN (Primary Directory Number)/SDN (Secondary Directory Number) Extension
Dial (for One-touch)
Specifies the number to be dialed. The PBX can have a maximum of 2000 (with the KX-TDA50/KX-TDA100/
KX-TDA200) or 5000 (with the KX-TDA600) One-touch Dialing buttons for extensions and DSS Consoles.
Default
Not stored.
Value Range
Max. 32 digits (consisting of 0–9, *, #, T [Transfer], [ ] [Secret], P [Pause], and F [Flash])
Maintenance Console Location
6.18 [4-3] DSS Console
Document Version 2010-11 PC Programming Manual 641
6.18 [4-3] DSS Console
Programming Manual References
None
Feature Manual References
12.1.4 One-touch Dialing
Dial (for NDSS)
Specifies the network extension number of the extension to be accessed using Network Direct Station
Selection.
Note that only extension numbers that have been previously registered in 11.4 [9-4] NDSS Key Table can be
specified here.
Default
Not stored.
Value Range
Max. 16 digits (consisting of 0–9, *, #, T [Transfer], [ ] [Secret], P [Pause], and F [Flash])
Maintenance Console Location
6.18 [4-3] DSS Console
Programming Manual References
None
Feature Manual References
13.1.15 Private Network Features—NDSS (Network Direct Station Selection)
Optional Parameter (Ringing Tone Type Number) (for Time Service)
Specifies the Time Table to be used for changing time modes in the Automatic Switching mode.
Default
1
Value Range
1–8
Maintenance Console Location
6.18 [4-3] DSS Console
Programming Manual References
None
642 PC Programming Manual Document Version 2010-11
6.18 [4-3] DSS Console
Feature Manual References
17.1.5 Time Service
Optional Parameter (Ringing Tone Type Number) (for Loop CO, Single CO,
Group CO, ICD Group, SDN)
Specifies the ring tone type.
Default
1
Value Range
KX-DT300 series (except KX-DT321)/KX-T7600 series/IP-PT (except KX-NT265/KX-NT321): 1–30
KX-DT321/KX-NT265/KX-NT321: 1–8 (Even if ring tone 9–30 is selected, ring tone 1 is heard.)
Other telephones: 1–8 (Even if ring tone 9–30 is selected, ring tone 2 is heard.)
Maintenance Console Location
6.18 [4-3] DSS Console
Programming Manual References
None
Feature Manual References
None
Optional Parameter (Ringing Tone Type Number) (for Call Park)
Specifies the number of the parking zone a call is to be parked in when a Call Park button with Parameter
Selection (for Call Park) on this screen set to Specific is pressed.
Default
0
Value Range
0–99
Maintenance Console Location
6.18 [4-3] DSS Console
Programming Manual References
None
Feature Manual References
3.1.5 Call Park
Document Version 2010-11 PC Programming Manual 643
6.18 [4-3] DSS Console
Ext No. of Mailbox (for Two-way Transfer)
Specifies the number of the extension whose mailbox will be used to record conversations using One-touch
Two-way Transfer. (For example, a secretary can record a conversation into the mailbox of a boss.) If the cell
is left empty, the extension user must specify the number of an extension each time.
Default
Not stored.
Value Range
Max. 5 digits (consisting of 0–9)
Maintenance Console Location
6.18 [4-3] DSS Console
Programming Manual References
None
Feature Manual References
19.1.4 Voice Mail DPT (Digital) Integration
Display Option—Key Setting & Key Label Name
The Key Label Name function allows you to print out a key label template for flexible DSS buttons, according
to the DSS Console you are using. Click a flexible button to display a Change—Flexible Button 01–66 screen
and edit the button’s settings.
Type
This parameter is equivalent to Type on the Key Setting screen.
Maintenance Console Location
6.18 [4-3] DSS Console
Programming Manual References
6.18 [4-3] DSS Console—Display Option—Key Setting— Type
Feature Manual References
None
Extension Number
This parameter is equivalent to Ext. No. / Floating Ext. No. on the Key Setting screen.
644 PC Programming Manual Document Version 2010-11
6.18 [4-3] DSS Console
Maintenance Console Location
6.18 [4-3] DSS Console
Programming Manual References
6.18 [4-3] DSS Console—Display Option—Key Setting— Ext. No. / Floating Ext. No. (for DSS)
6.18 [4-3] DSS Console—Display Option—Key Setting— Ext. No. / Floating Ext. No. (for ICD Group)
6.18 [4-3] DSS Console—Display Option—Key Setting— Ext. No. / Floating Ext. No. (for Message Waiting)
6.18 [4-3] DSS Console—Display Option—Key Setting— Ext. No. / Floating Ext. No. (for Group Fwd (Both))
6.18 [4-3] DSS Console—Display Option—Key Setting— Ext. No. / Floating Ext. No. (for Group Fwd
(External))
6.18 [4-3] DSS Console—Display Option—Key Setting— Ext. No. / Floating Ext. No. (for Group Fwd
(Internal))
6.18 [4-3] DSS Console—Display Option—Key Setting— Ext. No. / Floating Ext. No. (for Call Log)
6.18 [4-3] DSS Console—Display Option—Key Setting— Ext. No. / Floating Ext. No. (for Log-in/Log-out)
6.18 [4-3] DSS Console—Display Option—Key Setting— Ext. No. / Floating Ext. No. (for Hurry-up)
6.18 [4-3] DSS Console—Display Option—Key Setting— Ext. No. / Floating Ext. No. (for Two-way Record)
6.18 [4-3] DSS Console—Display Option—Key Setting— Ext. No. / Floating Ext. No. (for Two-way Transfer)
6.18 [4-3] DSS Console—Display Option—Key Setting— Ext. No. / Floating Ext. No. (for Voice Mail Transfer)
6.18 [4-3] DSS Console—Display Option—Key Setting— Ext. No. / Floating Ext. No. (for SDN) (KX-TDA100/
KX-TDA200/KX-TDA600 only)
Feature Manual References
None
Dial
This parameter is equivalent to Dial on the Key Setting screen.
Maintenance Console Location
6.18 [4-3] DSS Console
Programming Manual References
6.18 [4-3] DSS Console—Display Option—Key Setting— Dial (for One-touch)
6.18 [4-3] DSS Console—Display Option—Key Setting— Dial (for NDSS)
Feature Manual References
None
Parameter 1
This parameter is equivalent to Parameter Selection on the Key Setting screen.
Maintenance Console Location
6.18 [4-3] DSS Console
Document Version 2010-11 PC Programming Manual 645
6.18 [4-3] DSS Console
Programming Manual References
6.18 [4-3] DSS Console—Display Option—Key Setting— Parameter Selection (for Single CO)
6.18 [4-3] DSS Console—Display Option—Key Setting— Parameter Selection (for Group CO)
6.18 [4-3] DSS Console—Display Option—Key Setting— Parameter Selection (for Call Park)
6.18 [4-3] DSS Console—Display Option—Key Setting— Parameter Selection (for Log-in/Log-out)
6.18 [4-3] DSS Console—Display Option—Key Setting— Parameter Selection (for Time Service)
6.18 [4-3] DSS Console—Display Option—Key Setting— Parameter Selection (for TRS Level Change)
6.18 [4-3] DSS Console—Display Option—Key Setting— Parameter Selection (for Time Service - Automatic/
Manual)
6.18 [4-3] DSS Console—Display Option—Key Setting— Parameter Selection (for SDN) (KX-TDA100/
KX-TDA200/KX-TDA600 only)
Feature Manual References
None
Parameter 2
This parameter is equivalent to Optional Parameter (Ringing Tone Type Number) on the Key Setting
screen.
Maintenance Console Location
6.18 [4-3] DSS Console
Programming Manual References
6.18 [4-3] DSS Console—Display Option—Key Setting— Optional Parameter (Ringing Tone Type Number)
(for Time Service)
6.18 [4-3] DSS Console—Display Option—Key Setting— Optional Parameter (Ringing Tone Type Number)
(for Loop CO, Single CO, Group CO, ICD Group, SDN)
6.18 [4-3] DSS Console—Display Option—Key Setting— Optional Parameter (Ringing Tone Type Number)
(for Call Park)
Feature Manual References
None
Mailbox Number
This parameter is equivalent to Ext No. of Mailbox on the Key Setting screen.
Maintenance Console Location
6.18 [4-3] DSS Console
Programming Manual References
6.18 [4-3] DSS Console—Display Option—Key Setting— Ext No. of Mailbox (for Two-way Transfer)
646 PC Programming Manual Document Version 2010-11
6.18 [4-3] DSS Console
Feature Manual References
None
Label
Specifies the label that will be printed next to the corresponding button.
Default
Not stored.
Value Range
Max. 20 characters
Maintenance Console Location
6.18 [4-3] DSS Console
Programming Manual References
None
Feature Manual References
None
Color of Font
Specifies the color used for the label text for the corresponding button. Click Choose to select a color.
Default
Black
Value Range
Any color
Maintenance Console Location
6.18 [4-3] DSS Console
Programming Manual References
None
Feature Manual References
None
Color of Background
Specifies the color used for the label background for the corresponding button. Click Choose to select a color.
Document Version 2010-11 PC Programming Manual 647
6.18 [4-3] DSS Console
Default
White
Value Range
Any color
Maintenance Console Location
6.18 [4-3] DSS Console
Programming Manual References
None
Feature Manual References
None
Font Size
Specifies the size of the font on the label for the corresponding button.
Default
8
Value Range
4–15
Maintenance Console Location
6.18 [4-3] DSS Console
Programming Manual References
None
Feature Manual References
None
DSS Type
DSS Type
Selects the type of DSS Console for which you want to print a key label template.
Default
Other
Value Range
T7640, Other
648 PC Programming Manual Document Version 2010-11
6.18 [4-3] DSS Console
Maintenance Console Location
6.18 [4-3] DSS Console
Programming Manual References
None
Feature Manual References
None
Document Version 2010-11 PC Programming Manual 649
6.18 [4-3] DSS Console
6.19 [4-3] DSS Console—DSS key data copy
The flexible DSS button settings (including key label settings) of a DSS Console can be copied to different
DSS Consoles. Select the DSS Console that has the setting to copy to other DSS Consoles from the DSS
Console No./ Pair Extension list, then click Copy to.
Destination DSS Console
Select the number of the DSS Console and paired extension. Multiple DSS Consoles can be selected. To
select all DSS Consoles at once, click Select All.
When selecting multiple extensions, note that if the source extension has an SDN button, the copy operation
cannot be performed.
Maintenance Console Location
6.19 [4-3] DSS Console—DSS key data copy
Programming Manual References
6.18 [4-3] DSS Console
Feature Manual References
None
650 PC Programming Manual Document Version 2010-11
6.19 [4-3] DSS Console—DSS key data copy
Section 7
[5] Optional Device
Document Version 2010-11 PC Programming Manual 651
7.1 [5-1] Doorphone
The settings to establish doorphone calls can be programmed.
To assign destinations for doorphone calls easily, click Destination Setting (see 2.1.6 Extension Number
Setting).
Physical Location—Shelf (KX-TDA600 only)
Indicates the shelf to which the doorphone is connected (reference only).
Default
Current shelf number
Value Range
Shelf number
Maintenance Console Location
7.1 [5-1] Doorphone
Programming Manual References
None
Feature Manual References
4.1.11 Doorphone Call
Physical Location—Slot
Indicates the slot to which the doorphone is connected (reference only).
Default
Current slot number
Value Range
For KX-TDA50:
Slot number
For KX-TDA100/KX-TDA200/KX-TDA600:
Slot and sub-slot number
Maintenance Console Location
7.1 [5-1] Doorphone
Programming Manual References
None
652 PC Programming Manual Document Version 2010-11
7.1 [5-1] Doorphone
Feature Manual References
4.1.11 Doorphone Call
Physical Location—Port
Indicates the port number to which the doorphone is connected (reference only).
Default
Current port number
Value Range
Port number
Maintenance Console Location
7.1 [5-1] Doorphone
Programming Manual References
None
Feature Manual References
4.1.11 Doorphone Call
Name
Specifies the doorphone name.
Default
Door
Value Range
Max. 20 characters
Maintenance Console Location
7.1 [5-1] Doorphone
Programming Manual References
None
Feature Manual References
4.1.11 Doorphone Call
Destination—Day, Lunch, Break, Night
Specifies the destination number of doorphone calls for each port in each time mode.
Document Version 2010-11 PC Programming Manual 653
7.1 [5-1] Doorphone
Default
Not stored.
Value Range
Max. 32 digits (consisting of 0–9, *, #, [ ] [Secret], and P [Pause])
Maintenance Console Location
7.1 [5-1] Doorphone
Programming Manual References
4.5 [2-4] Week Table
Feature Manual References
4.1.11 Doorphone Call
Tenant Number
Specifies the tenant number for the doorphone port in order to apply the Time Table (day/lunch/break/night).
Default
1
Value Range
For KX-TDA50/KX-TDA100/KX-TDA200:
1-8
For KX-TDA600:
1-32
Maintenance Console Location
7.1 [5-1] Doorphone
Programming Manual References
4.5 [2-4] Week Table
Feature Manual References
4.1.11 Doorphone Call
17.1.3 Tenant Service
COS
Specifies the Class of Service (COS) number. COS programming determines the doorphone ports that are
able to make CO line calls, and sets restrictions on intercom calls from certain extensions (Internal Call Block).
Default
1
654 PC Programming Manual Document Version 2010-11
7.1 [5-1] Doorphone
Value Range
1–64
Maintenance Console Location
7.1 [5-1] Doorphone
Programming Manual References
4.11 [2-7-1] Class of Service—COS Settings—TRS— TRS Level—Day, Lunch, Break, Night
4.13 [2-7-3] Class of Service—Internal Call Block
Feature Manual References
9.1.14 Internal Call Block
4.1.11 Doorphone Call
VM Trunk Group Number
Specifies the number of the VM trunk group sent to the VPS when the doorphone call destination is the floating
extension number of a VM (DPT) group.
The VM trunk group number is used to allow the VPS to send the applicable greeting message to the caller.
Default
1
Value Range
1–48
Maintenance Console Location
7.1 [5-1] Doorphone
Programming Manual References
None
Feature Manual References
4.1.11 Doorphone Call
19.1.4 Voice Mail DPT (Digital) Integration
Document Version 2010-11 PC Programming Manual 655
7.1 [5-1] Doorphone
7.2 [5-2] External Pager
Settings for external pagers (external speakers) can be specified.
Click Extension List View to view a list of all programmed extension numbers and types (see 2.5.7 Tool—
Extension List View).
Page Number 1, Page Number 2—Floating Extension Number
Specifies the floating extension number of the external pager.
Default
600
Value Range
Max. 5 digits (consisting of 0–9)
Maintenance Console Location
7.2 [5-2] External Pager
Programming Manual References
None
Feature Manual References
13.1.1 Paging
17.1.2 TAFAS (Trunk Answer From Any Station)
2.1.1 BGM (Background Music)
Page Number 1, Page Number 2—Name
Specifies the name of the external pager.
Default
Not stored.
Value Range
Max. 20 characters
Maintenance Console Location
7.2 [5-2] External Pager
Programming Manual References
None
Feature Manual References
13.1.1 Paging
17.1.2 TAFAS (Trunk Answer From Any Station)
656 PC Programming Manual Document Version 2010-11
7.2 [5-2] External Pager
2.1.1 BGM (Background Music)
Document Version 2010-11 PC Programming Manual 657
7.2 [5-2] External Pager
7.3 [5-3-1] Voice Message—DISA System
Direct Inward System Access (DISA) enables outside callers to access specific PBX features as if the caller
were using an SLT extension of the PBX.
For more information on DISA, see "4.1.7 DISA (Direct Inward System Access)" in the Feature Manual.
Option 1
DISA Security—DISA Security Mode
Selects the DISA security mode to prevent unauthorized access to the PBX. In CO Line or All Security mode,
the caller is required to override security by Walking COS or Verification Code Entry in order to enable the
restricted feature temporarily.
Default
Trunk
Value Range
None: Intercom calls, TIE line calls, and CO line calls can be made.
Trunk: Intercom calls and TIE line calls without PBX code can be made. TIE line calls with PBX code and CO
line calls are restricted.
All: All calls are restricted.
Maintenance Console Location
7.3 [5-3-1] Voice Message—DISA System
Programming Manual References
None
Feature Manual References
19.1.1 Verification Code Entry
20.1.1 Walking COS
DISA Security—Remote Walking COS through DISA without PIN (Activation Key
Required)
Enables registered caller ID numbers to be automatically recognized as PBX extensions when calling through
DISA, and to use the Walking COS features without entering a PIN.
Default
Disable
Value Range
Disable, Enable (Get DISA)
Maintenance Console Location
7.3 [5-3-1] Voice Message—DISA System
658 PC Programming Manual Document Version 2010-11
7.3 [5-3-1] Voice Message—DISA System
Programming Manual References
None
Feature Manual References
None
DISA Intercept—Intercept when destination through DISA sets DND
Selects how DISA calls are handled if the destination sets DND, and disables Idle Extension Hunting.
Default
Busy Tone
Value Range
Busy Tone, Enable, Busy Message
Maintenance Console Location
7.3 [5-3-1] Voice Message—DISA System
Programming Manual References
None
Feature Manual References
None
DISA Intercept—Intercept when all DISA ports are busy
Selects how DISA calls are handled if all DISA ports are currently in use.
Default
to Operator
Value Range
to Operator, to AA-0, to AA-9, Disable (Busy Tone)
Maintenance Console Location
7.3 [5-3-1] Voice Message—DISA System
Programming Manual References
None
Feature Manual References
None
Document Version 2010-11 PC Programming Manual 659
7.3 [5-3-1] Voice Message—DISA System
DISA Intercept—Intercept when No Dial after DISA answers
Selects how DISA calls are handled if the caller does not select any option from the menu.
Default
to Operator
Value Range
to Operator, to AA-0, to AA-9, Disable (Reorder Tone)
Maintenance Console Location
7.3 [5-3-1] Voice Message—DISA System
Programming Manual References
None
Feature Manual References
None
CO-CO with DISA—DISA to Public CO
Specifies whether the DISA port of the message card is released when a CO-to-CO line call using DISA is
established. To enable this setting, " CO-CO with DISA—Fwd/Transfer to Public CO" on this screen should
be set to "Enable".
Setting this to "Disable" will free up DISA ports faster, but prevent DISA being used to detect the end of a call
and disconnect the CO line quickly.
Default
Enable
Value Range
Disable (Release DISA): The DISA port of the message card is released when a CO-to-CO line call using DISA
is established.
Enable: DISA stays connected for the duration of the call, to allow detection of the end of the call.
Maintenance Console Location
7.3 [5-3-1] Voice Message—DISA System
Programming Manual References
7.3 [5-3-1] Voice Message—DISA System—Option 1— CO-CO with DISA—Fwd/Transfer to Public CO
Feature Manual References
None
660 PC Programming Manual Document Version 2010-11
7.3 [5-3-1] Voice Message—DISA System
CO-CO with DISA—DISA to Private Network
Specifies whether the DISA port of the message card is released when a CO-to-TIE line call using DISA is
established.
To enable this setting, " CO-CO with DISA—Fwd/Transfer to Private Network" on this screen should be
set to "Enable".
Setting this to "Disable" will free up DISA ports faster, but prevent DISA being used to detect the end of a call
and disconnect the CO line quickly.
Default
Disable (Release DISA)
Value Range
Disable (Release DISA): The DISA port of the message card is released when a CO-to-TIE line call using DISA
is established.
Enable: DISA stays connected for the duration of the call, to allow detection of the end of the call.
Maintenance Console Location
7.3 [5-3-1] Voice Message—DISA System
Programming Manual References
7.3 [5-3-1] Voice Message—DISA System—Option 1— CO-CO with DISA—Fwd/Transfer to Private Network
Feature Manual References
None
CO-CO with DISA—Fwd/Transfer to Public CO
Enables CO-to-CO line calls to be established using DISA.
Default
Disable
Value Range
Disable: CO-to-CO line calls are established without using DISA.
Enable (Get DISA): CO-to-CO line calls are established using DISA, and DISA can be used to detect the end
of the call.
Maintenance Console Location
7.3 [5-3-1] Voice Message—DISA System
Programming Manual References
7.3 [5-3-1] Voice Message—DISA System—Option 1— CO-CO with DISA—DISA to Public CO
Feature Manual References
None
Document Version 2010-11 PC Programming Manual 661
7.3 [5-3-1] Voice Message—DISA System
CO-CO with DISA—Fwd/Transfer to Private Network
Enables CO-to-TIE line calls to be established using DISA.
Default
Disable
Value Range
Disable: CO-to-TIE line calls are established without using DISA.
Enable (Get DISA): CO-to-TIE line calls are established using DISA, and DISA can be used to detect the end
of the call.
Maintenance Console Location
7.3 [5-3-1] Voice Message—DISA System
Programming Manual References
7.3 [5-3-1] Voice Message—DISA System—Option 1— CO-CO with DISA—DISA to Private Network
Feature Manual References
None
CO-CO with DISA—Transfer by DTMF "#" (Activation Key Required)
Specifies whether an outside party such as a cellular phone can transfer a CO line call to an extension within
the PBX by dialing "#" + extension number.
Default
Disable
Value Range
Disable: "#" is ignored if dialed.
Enable (as "Flash"): The current CO line call will be placed on hold, then transferred to the extension whose
number is entered.
Maintenance Console Location
7.3 [5-3-1] Voice Message—DISA System
Programming Manual References
None
Feature Manual References
None
CO-CO with DISA—Return to DISA Top Menu by DTMF "*"
Enables a CO line caller to return to the DISA top menu by pressing " " while hearing a ringback, reorder, or
busy tone. If disabled, retrying the call is possible by pressing " ".
662 PC Programming Manual Document Version 2010-11
7.3 [5-3-1] Voice Message—DISA System
Default
Enable
Value Range
Disable, Enable
Maintenance Console Location
7.3 [5-3-1] Voice Message—DISA System
Programming Manual References
None
Feature Manual References
None
Option 2
DISA Cyclic Tone Detection
Selects the cyclic tone detection mode. Cyclic tone detection is used to determine the end of a call for a DISA
CO-to-CO line conversation established through an analog CO line.
To apply changes to this setting, follow the steps below:
1. Change this setting.
2. Set the status of the MSG/ESVM card (KX-TDA50) or OPB3 card (KX-TDA100/KX-TDA200/KX-TDA600)
to "OUS", then "INS".
Default
Fixed
Value Range
Fixed: The number of times of a tone pattern (a set of tone-on and tone-off) that the PBX receives is fixed to
4 times in the ranges of:
A
B
C
D
CC
D D
A,B = 100–1300 ms, C = A90 ms, D = B90 ms
Option: The tone pattern that the PBX receives is optional as specified in DISA Cyclic Tone Option on this
screen.
Maintenance Console Location
7.3 [5-3-1] Voice Message—DISA System
Programming Manual References
3.27 [1-1] Slot—OPB3 Card Property (KX-TDA100/KX-TDA200/KX-TDA600 only)
Document Version 2010-11 PC Programming Manual 663
7.3 [5-3-1] Voice Message—DISA System
Feature Manual References
None
DISA Cyclic Tone Option—Tone On Maximum Time
Specifies the maximum duration of the cyclic tone that will be recognized by the PBX. When the tone sent from
the telephone company is shorter than the value set here, the PBX recognizes it as a tone-on.
Note that this option can only be set when DISA Cyclic Tone Detection on this screen is set to "Option".
To apply changes to this setting, follow the steps below:
1. Change this setting.
2. Set the status of the MSG/ESVM card (KX-TDA50) or OPB3 card (KX-TDA100/KX-TDA200/KX-TDA600)
to "OUS", then "INS".
Default
600 ms
Value Range
10 ´ n (n=11–400) ms
Maintenance Console Location
7.3 [5-3-1] Voice Message—DISA System
Programming Manual References
3.1 [1-1] Slot
3.27 [1-1] Slot—OPB3 Card Property (KX-TDA100/KX-TDA200/KX-TDA600 only)
Feature Manual References
None
DISA Cyclic Tone Option—Tone Off Maximum Time
Specifies the maximum time that the PBX waits for a cyclic tone to be sent from the telephone company before
recognizing it as a tone-off. When no tone is detected within the time set here, the PBX recognizes it as a
tone-off.
Note that this option can only be set when DISA Cyclic Tone Detection on this screen is set to "Option".
To apply changes to this setting, follow the steps below:
1. Change this setting.
2. Set the status of the MSG/ESVM card (KX-TDA50) or OPB3 card (KX-TDA100/KX-TDA200/KX-TDA600)
to "OUS", then "INS".
Default
600 ms
Value Range
10 ´ n (n=11–400) ms
Maintenance Console Location
7.3 [5-3-1] Voice Message—DISA System
664 PC Programming Manual Document Version 2010-11
7.3 [5-3-1] Voice Message—DISA System
Programming Manual References
3.1 [1-1] Slot
3.27 [1-1] Slot—OPB3 Card Property (KX-TDA100/KX-TDA200/KX-TDA600 only)
Feature Manual References
None
DISA Cyclic Tone Option—Repeating Times of ON/OFF for Detection
Specifies the number of times the tone pattern (a set of tone-on and tone-off) must be received to establish
reception of the cyclic tone. This determines the end of call.
Note that this option can only be set when DISA Cyclic Tone Detection on this screen is set to "Option".
Default
3
Value Range
3–16
Maintenance Console Location
7.3 [5-3-1] Voice Message—DISA System
Programming Manual References
None
Feature Manual References
None
Timed Reminder Message—Day, Lunch, Break, Night
Specifies the prerecorded message to play when a Timed Reminder call is answered in each time mode.
Default
None
Value Range
None, 1–64
Maintenance Console Location
7.3 [5-3-1] Voice Message—DISA System
Programming Manual References
7.4 [5-3-2] Voice Message—DISA Message
Document Version 2010-11 PC Programming Manual 665
7.3 [5-3-1] Voice Message—DISA System
Feature Manual References
17.1.4 Timed Reminder
Recording Mode
Specifies the sound quality of messages recorded on the ESVM card when using it as a MSG card. Increasing
the recording quality reduces the total length of recording time available on the card.
To apply changes to this setting, follow the steps below:
1. Change this setting.
2. Set the status of the ESVM card (KX-TDA50) or OPB3 card (KX-TDA100/KX-TDA200/KX-TDA600) to
"OUS", then "INS".
Default
High
Value Range
Low: About 120 minutes of messages can be recorded per card.
Middle: About 60 minutes of messages can be recorded per card.
High: About 40 minutes of messages can be recorded per card.
Maintenance Console Location
7.3 [5-3-1] Voice Message—DISA System
Programming Manual References
None
Feature Manual References
12.1.2 OGM (Outgoing Message)
666 PC Programming Manual Document Version 2010-11
7.3 [5-3-1] Voice Message—DISA System
7.4 [5-3-2] Voice Message—DISA Message
Outgoing messages (OGM) for DISA calls can be specified. A maximum of 64 OGMs can be programmed.
To view a list of all programmed extension numbers and types, click Extension List View (see 2.5.7 Tool—
Extension List View). To assign AA destinations easily, click Destination Setting (see 2.1.6 Extension
Number Setting).
Floating Extension Number
Specifies the floating extension number of the OGM.
Default
OGM 01–64: 501–564
Value Range
Max. 5 digits (consisting of 0–9)
Maintenance Console Location
7.4 [5-3-2] Voice Message—DISA Message
Programming Manual References
None
Feature Manual References
12.1.2 OGM (Outgoing Message)
4.1.7 DISA (Direct Inward System Access)
Name
Specifies the name of the OGM.
Default
DISA 01–DISA 64
Value Range
Max. 20 characters
Maintenance Console Location
7.4 [5-3-2] Voice Message—DISA Message
Programming Manual References
None
Feature Manual References
12.1.2 OGM (Outgoing Message)
4.1.7 DISA (Direct Inward System Access)
Document Version 2010-11 PC Programming Manual 667
7.4 [5-3-2] Voice Message—DISA Message
1 Digit AA Destination (Extension Number)—Dial 0–9
Specifies the destination for each DISA Automated Attendant (AA) number. After listening to an OGM, the
caller can be directed to the destination by dialing a 1-digit DISA AA number.
Default
Not stored.
Value Range
Max. 5 digits (consisting of 0–9, *, and #)
Maintenance Console Location
7.4 [5-3-2] Voice Message—DISA Message
Programming Manual References
None
Feature Manual References
12.1.2 OGM (Outgoing Message)
4.1.7 DISA (Direct Inward System Access)
Busy / DND Message No.
Selects the OGM to be played for the caller when the destination party is busy or sets DND.
Default
None
Value Range
None, 1–64
Maintenance Console Location
7.4 [5-3-2] Voice Message—DISA Message
Programming Manual References
7.3 [5-3-1] Voice Message—DISA System
Feature Manual References
4.1.7 DISA (Direct Inward System Access)
Fax Extension (KX-TDA50 only)
Specifies the extension number to which to transfer a call when the MSG/ESVM card detects a fax signal.
Default
Not stored.
668 PC Programming Manual Document Version 2010-11
7.4 [5-3-2] Voice Message—DISA Message
Value Range
Max. 4 digits (consisting of 0–9)
Maintenance Console Location
7.4 [5-3-2] Voice Message—DISA Message
Programming Manual References
None
Feature Manual References
4.1.7 DISA (Direct Inward System Access)
1.1.6 Automatic Fax Transfer
Document Version 2010-11 PC Programming Manual 669
7.4 [5-3-2] Voice Message—DISA Message
7.5 [5-3-3] Voice Message—SVM
Settings related to the SVM/ESVM cards can be specified, for use with the Simplified Voice Message feature.
SVM Card No. 1, 2—Slot No.
Indicates the slot position (reference only).
Default
Current slot number
Value Range
Slot number
Maintenance Console Location
7.5 [5-3-3] Voice Message—SVM
Programming Manual References
3.1 [1-1] Slot
Feature Manual References
16.1.5 SVM (Simplified Voice Message)
SVM Card No. 1, 2—Floating Extension Number
Specifies the floating extension number used to access the SVM/ESVM card.
Default
Card No. 1: 591
Card No. 2: 592
Value Range
Max. 5 digits (consisting of 0–9)
Maintenance Console Location
7.5 [5-3-3] Voice Message—SVM
Programming Manual References
None
Feature Manual References
16.1.5 SVM (Simplified Voice Message)
SVM Card No. 1, 2—Card Name
Specifies the name of the SVM/ESVM card, for programming reference.
670 PC Programming Manual Document Version 2010-11
7.5 [5-3-3] Voice Message—SVM
Default
Card No. 1: Voice Msg 1
Card No. 2: Voice Msg 2
Value Range
Max. 20 characters
Maintenance Console Location
7.5 [5-3-3] Voice Message—SVM
Programming Manual References
None
Feature Manual References
16.1.5 SVM (Simplified Voice Message)
Recording Mode
Specifies the sound quality of messages recorded on the SVM/ESVM card. Increasing the recording quality
reduces the total length of recording time available on the card.
Default
Middle
Value Range
Low: About 120 minutes of messages can be recorded per card.
Middle: About 60 minutes of messages can be recorded per card.
High: About 40 minutes (SVM)/20 minutes (ESVM) of messages can be recorded per card.
Maintenance Console Location
7.5 [5-3-3] Voice Message—SVM
Programming Manual References
6.9 [4-1-7] Wired Extension—Simplified Voice Message
6.16 [4-2-5] Portable Station—Simplified Voice Message
Feature Manual References
16.1.5 SVM (Simplified Voice Message)
Remote Access
Selects whether the Walking COS feature can be used while listening to a greeting message from the SVM
feature. Using Walking COS, a user can access his or her message box remotely.
Default
Disable
Document Version 2010-11 PC Programming Manual 671
7.5 [5-3-3] Voice Message—SVM
Value Range
Disable, Enable
Maintenance Console Location
7.5 [5-3-3] Voice Message—SVM
Programming Manual References
6.9 [4-1-7] Wired Extension—Simplified Voice Message
6.16 [4-2-5] Portable Station—Simplified Voice Message
Feature Manual References
16.1.5 SVM (Simplified Voice Message)
SVM Cyclic Tone Detection
Selects the cyclic tone detection mode. Cyclic tone detection is used to determine the end of a call when an
extension user records a greeting message or callers leave voice messages in a message box.
To apply changes to this setting, follow the steps below:
1. Change this setting.
2. Set the status of the SVM/ESVM card (KX-TDA50) or OPB3 card (KX-TDA100/KX-TDA200/KX-TDA600)
to "OUS", then "INS".
Default
Fixed
Value Range
Fixed: The number of times of a tone pattern (a set of tone-on and tone-off) that the PBX receives is fixed to
4 times in the ranges of:
A
B
C
D
CC
D D
A,B = 100–1300 ms, C = A90 ms, D = B90 ms
Option: The tone pattern that the PBX receives is optional as specified in SVM Cyclic Tone Option on this
screen.
Maintenance Console Location
7.5 [5-3-3] Voice Message—SVM
Programming Manual References
3.1 [1-1] Slot
Feature Manual References
16.1.5 SVM (Simplified Voice Message)
672 PC Programming Manual Document Version 2010-11
7.5 [5-3-3] Voice Message—SVM
SVM Cyclic Tone Option—Tone On Maximum Time
Specifies the maximum duration of the cyclic tone that will be recognized by the PBX. When the tone sent from
the telephone company is shorter than the value set here, the PBX recognizes it as a tone-on.
Note that this option can only be set when SVM Cyclic Tone Detection on this screen is set to "Option".
To apply changes to this setting, follow the steps below:
1. Change this setting.
2. Set the status of the SVM/ESVM card (KX-TDA50) or OPB3 card (KX-TDA100/KX-TDA200/KX-TDA600)
to "OUS", then "INS".
Default
600 ms
Value Range
20 ´ n (n=6–200) ms
Maintenance Console Location
7.5 [5-3-3] Voice Message—SVM
Programming Manual References
3.1 [1-1] Slot
Feature Manual References
16.1.5 SVM (Simplified Voice Message)
SVM Cyclic Tone Option—Tone Off Maximum Time
Specifies the maximum time that the PBX waits for a cyclic tone to be sent from the telephone company before
recognizing it as a tone-off. When no tone is detected within the time set here, the PBX recognizes it as a
tone-off.
Note that this option can only be set when SVM Cyclic Tone Detection on this screen is set to "Option".
To apply changes to this setting, follow the steps below:
1. Change this setting.
2. Set the status of the SVM/ESVM card (KX-TDA50) or OPB3 card (KX-TDA100/KX-TDA200/KX-TDA600)
to "OUS", then "INS".
Default
600 ms
Value Range
20 ´ n (n=6–200) ms
Maintenance Console Location
7.5 [5-3-3] Voice Message—SVM
Programming Manual References
3.1 [1-1] Slot
Document Version 2010-11 PC Programming Manual 673
7.5 [5-3-3] Voice Message—SVM
Feature Manual References
16.1.5 SVM (Simplified Voice Message)
SVM Cyclic Tone Option—Repeating Times of ON/OFF for Detection
Specifies the number of times the tone pattern (a set of tone-on and tone-off) must be received to establish
reception of the cyclic tone. This determines the end of call.
Note that this option can only be set when SVM Cyclic Tone Detection on this screen is set to "Option".
Default
3
Value Range
3–16
Maintenance Console Location
7.5 [5-3-3] Voice Message—SVM
Programming Manual References
None
Feature Manual References
16.1.5 SVM (Simplified Voice Message)
674 PC Programming Manual Document Version 2010-11
7.5 [5-3-3] Voice Message—SVM
7.6 [5-4] External Relay
Settings related to external relays can be programmed.
External Relay No.
Indicates the number of the external relay (reference only).
Default
Current external relay number.
Value Range
For KX-TDA50:
1–4
For KX-TDA100/KX-TDA200:
1–16
KX-TDA600:
1–64
Maintenance Console Location
7.6 [5-4] External Relay
Programming Manual References
None
Feature Manual References
5.1.8 External Relay
Physical Location—Shelf (KX-TDA600 only)
Indicates the shelf position (reference only).
Default
Current shelf number
Value Range
Shelf number
Maintenance Console Location
7.6 [5-4] External Relay
Programming Manual References
None
Document Version 2010-11 PC Programming Manual 675
7.6 [5-4] External Relay
Feature Manual References
5.1.8 External Relay
Physical Location—Slot
Indicates the slot position (reference only).
Default
Current slot and sub-slot number
Value Range
For KX-TDA50:
Slot number
For KX-TDA100/KX-TDA200/KX-TDA600:
Slot and sub-slot number
Maintenance Console Location
7.6 [5-4] External Relay
Programming Manual References
None
Feature Manual References
5.1.8 External Relay
Physical Location—Port
Indicates the port number (reference only).
Default
Current port number
Value Range
Port number
Maintenance Console Location
7.6 [5-4] External Relay
Programming Manual References
None
Feature Manual References
5.1.8 External Relay
676 PC Programming Manual Document Version 2010-11
7.6 [5-4] External Relay
Name
Specifies the relay name.
Default
Not stored.
Value Range
Max. 20 characters
Maintenance Console Location
7.6 [5-4] External Relay
Programming Manual References
None
Feature Manual References
5.1.8 External Relay
Relay Activate Time
Specifies the length of time that the relay stays on when activated.
Default
5 s
Value Range
1–7 s
Maintenance Console Location
7.6 [5-4] External Relay
Programming Manual References
None
Feature Manual References
5.1.8 External Relay
COS Number
Specifies the Class of Service (COS) number. COS programming determines the extensions that are able to
activate relays.
Default
1
Document Version 2010-11 PC Programming Manual 677
7.6 [5-4] External Relay
Value Range
1–64
Maintenance Console Location
7.6 [5-4] External Relay
Programming Manual References
4.11 [2-7-1] Class of Service—COS Settings—Optional Device & Other Extensions— External Relay Access
Feature Manual References
9.1.14 Internal Call Block
5.1.8 External Relay
678 PC Programming Manual Document Version 2010-11
7.6 [5-4] External Relay
7.7 [5-5] External Sensor
Settings related to external sensors can be programmed.
To assign destinations for sensor calls easily, click Destination Setting (see 2.1.6 Extension Number
Setting).
External Sensor No.
Indicates the number of the external sensor (reference only).
Default
Current external sensor number.
Value Range
For KX-TDA50:
1–4
For KX-TDA100/KX-TDA200:
1–16
KX-TDA600:
1–64
Maintenance Console Location
7.7 [5-5] External Sensor
Programming Manual References
None
Feature Manual References
5.1.9 External Sensor
Physical Location—Shelf (KX-TDA600 only)
Indicates the shelf position (reference only).
Default
Current shelf number
Value Range
Shelf number
Maintenance Console Location
7.7 [5-5] External Sensor
Programming Manual References
None
Document Version 2010-11 PC Programming Manual 679
7.7 [5-5] External Sensor
Feature Manual References
5.1.9 External Sensor
Physical Location—Slot
Indicates the slot position (reference only).
Default
Current slot and sub-slot number
Value Range
For KX-TDA50:
Slot number
For KX-TDA100/KX-TDA200/KX-TDA600:
Slot and sub-slot number
Maintenance Console Location
7.7 [5-5] External Sensor
Programming Manual References
None
Feature Manual References
5.1.9 External Sensor
Physical Location—Port
Indicates the port number (reference only).
Default
Current port number
Value Range
Port number
Maintenance Console Location
7.7 [5-5] External Sensor
Programming Manual References
None
Feature Manual References
5.1.9 External Sensor
680 PC Programming Manual Document Version 2010-11
7.7 [5-5] External Sensor
Name
Specifies the sensor name.
Default
Sensor
Value Range
Max. 20 characters
Maintenance Console Location
7.7 [5-5] External Sensor
Programming Manual References
None
Feature Manual References
5.1.9 External Sensor
Destination—Day, Lunch, Break, Night
Specifies the destination number of sensor calls for each port in each time mode.
Default
Not stored.
Value Range
Max. 32 digits (consisting of 0–9, *, #, [ ] [Secret], and P [Pause])
Maintenance Console Location
7.7 [5-5] External Sensor
Programming Manual References
None
Feature Manual References
5.1.9 External Sensor
Tenant No.
Specifies the tenant to which the sensor belongs, to determine the Time Table for the sensor. (The tenant
number corresponds to the Time Table number.)
Default
1
Document Version 2010-11 PC Programming Manual 681
7.7 [5-5] External Sensor
Value Range
For KX-TDA50/KX-TDA100/KX-TDA200:
1-8
For KX-TDA600:
1-32
Maintenance Console Location
7.7 [5-5] External Sensor
Programming Manual References
4.5 [2-4] Week Table
Feature Manual References
5.1.9 External Sensor
17.1.3 Tenant Service
682 PC Programming Manual Document Version 2010-11
7.7 [5-5] External Sensor
Section 8
[6] Feature
Document Version 2010-11 PC Programming Manual 683
8.1 [6-1] System Speed Dial
The System Speed Dialing Table is used to store frequently dialed numbers as well as callers who should be
automatically routed to certain extensions when they call (Calling Line Identification [CLI] distribution). The
System Speed Dialing Table is available for all extension users when making or receiving a call.
A maximum of 1000 System Speed Dialing numbers (e.g., telephone numbers, feature numbers) can be
programmed with other related parameters. 100 numbers are displayed at a time. To display other sets of
numbers, click the applicable tab.
Memory
Selects the System Speed Dialing Table to be programmed. Whether a tenant uses the basic System Speed
Dialing Table or the additional table (with MEC [KX-TDA50/KX-TDA100/KX-TDA200] or EMEC [KX-TDA600]
card) depends on the setting of System Speed Dial in 8.6 [6-6] Tenant.
Default
Basic Memory
Value Range
For KX-TDA50:
Basic Memory: the standard table
Expanded Memory: additional table (only available when an MEC card is installed to the PBX)
For KX-TDA100/KX-TDA200:
Basic Memory: the standard table
Expanded Memory for Tenant 1–8: additional tables (only available when an MEC card is installed to the PBX)
For KX-TDA600:
Basic Memory: the standard table
Expanded Memory for Tenant 1–32: additional tables (only available when an EMEC card is installed to the
PBX)
Maintenance Console Location
8.1 [6-1] System Speed Dial
Programming Manual References
8.6 [6-6] Tenant— System Speed Dial
Feature Manual References
16.1.4 Speed Dialing, System
17.1.3 Tenant Service
Name
Specifies a name for the System Speed Dialing number.
Default
Not stored.
684 PC Programming Manual Document Version 2010-11
8.1 [6-1] System Speed Dial
Value Range
Max. 20 characters
Maintenance Console Location
8.1 [6-1] System Speed Dial
Programming Manual References
None
Feature Manual References
16.1.4 Speed Dialing, System
CO Line Access Number + Telephone Number
Specifies the telephone number (including the CO Line Access number) or feature number assigned to the
System Speed Dialing number.
Default
Not stored.
Value Range
Max. 32 digits (consisting of 0–9, *, #, T [Transfer], [ ] [Secret], P [Pause], and F [Flash])
Maintenance Console Location
8.1 [6-1] System Speed Dial
Programming Manual References
None
Feature Manual References
16.1.4 Speed Dialing, System
CLI Destination
Specifies the CLI destination (extension) to which incoming calls from the programmed telephone number are
routed. If a Caller ID Modification Table is being used, the modified number must match the telephone number
above (CO Line Access Number + Telephone Number) in order for the call to be routed correctly.
Default
Not stored.
Value Range
Max. 5 digits (consisting of 0–9)
Document Version 2010-11 PC Programming Manual 685
8.1 [6-1] System Speed Dial
Maintenance Console Location
8.1 [6-1] System Speed Dial
Programming Manual References
12.2 [10-2] DIL Table & Port Settings—CLI for DIL— CLI Ring for DIL—Day, Lunch, Break, Night
12.3 [10-3] DID Table— CLI Ring for DID—Day, Lunch, Break, Night
Feature Manual References
3.1.1 Caller ID
3.1.12 CLI (Calling Line Identification) Distribution
686 PC Programming Manual Document Version 2010-11
8.1 [6-1] System Speed Dial
8.2 [6-2] Hotel
Various settings related to the hospitality features of the PBX can be set.
Main
Hotel Operator—Extension 1–4
Specifies the numbers of the extensions designated as hotel operators.
Default
For KX-TDA50/KX-TDA100/KX-TDA200:
Extension 1: 101
For KX-TDA600:
Extension 1: 1001
Value Range
Max. 5 digits (consisting of 0–9)
Maintenance Console Location
8.2 [6-2] Hotel
Programming Manual References
None
Feature Manual References
8.1.4 HOSPITALITY FEATURES
15.1.3 Room Status Control
SMDR for External Hotel Application 1—Room Status Control
Selects whether check-in and check-out data is output on SMDR.
Default
No Print
Value Range
No Print, Print
Maintenance Console Location
8.2 [6-2] Hotel
Programming Manual References
13.1 [11-1] Main
Document Version 2010-11 PC Programming Manual 687
8.2 [6-2] Hotel
Feature Manual References
16.1.1 SMDR (Station Message Detail Recording)
15.1.3 Room Status Control
SMDR for External Hotel Application 1—Timed Reminder (Wake-up Call)
Selects whether Timed Reminder data is output on SMDR.
Default
No Print
Value Range
No Print, Print
Maintenance Console Location
8.2 [6-2] Hotel
Programming Manual References
13.1 [11-1] Main
Feature Manual References
16.1.1 SMDR (Station Message Detail Recording)
17.1.4 Timed Reminder
SMDR for External Hotel Application 2—Printing Message 1–8
Specifies the text of the message output on SMDR when this Printing Message is selected from an extension.
The "%" character can be used in a message, and requires a number to be entered in its place when the
message is selected from an extension. This character can be used a maximum of seven times in a Printing
Message.
Default
Not stored.
Value Range
Max. 16 characters
Maintenance Console Location
8.2 [6-2] Hotel
Programming Manual References
13.1 [11-1] Main
Feature Manual References
16.1.1 SMDR (Station Message Detail Recording)
13.1.11 Printing Message
688 PC Programming Manual Document Version 2010-11
8.2 [6-2] Hotel
8.3 [6-3] Verification Code
A verification code is used to override the Toll Restriction (TRS) of the extension in use to make a certain CO
line call, or to identify the call for accounting and billing purposes.
A maximum of 1000 verification codes can be programmed with other related parameters. 100 codes are
displayed at a time. To display other sets of codes, click the applicable tab.
Verification Code
Specifies the verification code.
Default
Not stored.
Value Range
Max. 4 digits (consisting of 0–9, *, and #)
Maintenance Console Location
8.3 [6-3] Verification Code
Programming Manual References
None
Feature Manual References
19.1.1 Verification Code Entry
User Name
Specifies the user name assigned to the verification code.
Default
Not stored.
Value Range
Max. 20 characters
Maintenance Console Location
8.3 [6-3] Verification Code
Programming Manual References
None
Feature Manual References
19.1.1 Verification Code Entry
Document Version 2010-11 PC Programming Manual 689
8.3 [6-3] Verification Code
Verification Code PIN
Specifies the PIN to be entered when making a CO line call with the verification code.
CAUTION
There is a risk that fraudulent telephone calls will be made if a third party discovers a personal identification
number (PIN) (verification code PIN or extension PIN) of the PBX.
The cost of such calls will be billed to the owner/renter of the PBX.
To protect the PBX from this kind of fraudulent use, we strongly recommend:
a. Keeping PINs secret.
b. Selecting complex, random PINs that cannot be easily guessed.
c. Changing PINs frequently.
Default
Not stored.
Value Range
Max. 10 digits (consisting of 0–9)
Maintenance Console Location
8.3 [6-3] Verification Code
Programming Manual References
None
Feature Manual References
19.1.1 Verification Code Entry
COS Number
Specifies the COS that applies when making a CO line call with the verification code.
Default
1
Value Range
1–64
Maintenance Console Location
8.3 [6-3] Verification Code
Programming Manual References
4.11 [2-7-1] Class of Service—COS Settings
Feature Manual References
19.1.1 Verification Code Entry
3.1.20 COS (Class of Service)
690 PC Programming Manual Document Version 2010-11
8.3 [6-3] Verification Code
Itemized Billing Code for ARS
Specifies the itemized billing code used by the ARS feature for identifying calls made with a verification code
for accounting and billing purposes.
Default
Not stored.
Value Range
Max. 10 digits (consisting of 0–9, *, and #)
Maintenance Console Location
8.3 [6-3] Verification Code
Programming Manual References
10.6 [8-5] Carrier
Feature Manual References
1.1.3 ARS (Automatic Route Selection)
Document Version 2010-11 PC Programming Manual 691
8.3 [6-3] Verification Code
8.4 [6-4] Second Dial Tone
A programmed Pause time can be inserted automatically between the Second Dial Tone Waiting code and
the following digits. When a programmed Second Dial Tone Waiting code is dialed after seizing a CO line, a
preprogrammed number of pauses are inserted after the code.
A maximum of 100 Second Dial Tone Waiting codes can be programmed. 20 codes are displayed at a time.
To display other sets of codes, click the applicable tab.
Second Dial Tone Waiting Code
Specifies the Second Dial Tone Waiting code.
Default
Not stored.
Value Range
Max. 4 digits (consisting of 0–9, *, and #)
Maintenance Console Location
8.4 [6-4] Second Dial Tone
Programming Manual References
None
Feature Manual References
13.1.4 Pause Insertion
Pause Repeating Counter
Specifies the number of pauses to be inserted when waiting for the second dial tone.
Default
1
Value Range
0–20
Maintenance Console Location
8.4 [6-4] Second Dial Tone
Programming Manual References
None
Feature Manual References
13.1.4 Pause Insertion
692 PC Programming Manual Document Version 2010-11
8.4 [6-4] Second Dial Tone
8.5 [6-5] Absent Message
When a display PT user calls an extension, a message is shown on the caller’s telephone display describing
the reason for absence. A maximum of 8 Absent Messages can be programmed, and any extension user can
select one of them.
Absent Message
Specifies the message for display.
Default
1: Will Return Soon
2: Gone Home
3: At Ext %%%% (Extension Number)
4: Back at %%:%% (Hour:Minute)
5: Out until %%/%% (Month/Day)
6: In a Meeting
7 and 8: Not stored.
Value Range
Max. 16 characters
Maintenance Console Location
8.5 [6-5] Absent Message
Programming Manual References
None
Feature Manual References
1.1.1 Absent Message
Document Version 2010-11 PC Programming Manual 693
8.5 [6-5] Absent Message
8.6 [6-6] Tenant
A maximum of 8 (KX-TDA50/KX-TDA100/KX-TDA200)/32 (KX-TDA600) tenants can share the PBX. Each
tenant is composed of specified extension user groups. The PBX offers each tenant its own Time Table and
system resources.
To assign extensions as operators easily, click Extension No. Setting (see 2.1.6 Extension Number
Setting).
Music On Hold
Specifies the audio source to be used for Music on Hold.
Default
Same as System Setting
Value Range
For KX-TDA50:
Same as System Setting, BGM, Tone
For KX-TDA100/KX-TDA200/KX-TDA600:
Same as System Setting, BGM 1, BGM 2, Tone
Maintenance Console Location
8.6 [6-6] Tenant
Programming Manual References
4.3 [2-2] Operator & BGM
Feature Manual References
11.1.4 Music on Hold
17.1.3 Tenant Service
Operator (Extension Number)
Specifies the extension number or the floating extension number of an incoming call distribution group to be
designated as the tenant operator. When this parameter is left unspecified, the PBX operator serves as the
tenant operator.
Default
Not stored.
Value Range
Max. 5 digits (consisting of 0–9)
Maintenance Console Location
8.6 [6-6] Tenant
694 PC Programming Manual Document Version 2010-11
8.6 [6-6] Tenant
Programming Manual References
4.3 [2-2] Operator & BGM
Feature Manual References
17.1.3 Tenant Service
12.1.5 Operator Features
ARS Mode
Specifies the ARS mode used when making a CO line call.
Default
Same as System Setting
Value Range
Off: ARS is disabled.
On for Local Access Operation: ARS operates when an extension user makes a call using any Idle Line Access
method.
On for Any CO Access Operation: ARS operates when an extension user makes a call using any CO Line
Access method.
Same as System Setting: The setting specified in ARS Mode in 10.1 [8-1] System Setting is applied.
Maintenance Console Location
8.6 [6-6] Tenant
Programming Manual References
10.1 [8-1] System Setting
Feature Manual References
1.1.3 ARS (Automatic Route Selection)
17.1.3 Tenant Service
System Speed Dial
Specifies which system speed dialing table is used by the tenant. This setting is only available when an
MEC (KX-TDA50/KX-TDA100/KX-TDA200) or EMEC (KX-TDA600) card is installed.
Default
For KX-TDA50:
Basic Memory
For KX-TDA100/KX-TDA200/KX-TDA600:
Same as System Setting
Value Range
For KX-TDA50:
Basic Memory: PBX basic system speed dialing numbers are used.
Expanded Memory: Expansion system speed dialing numbers are used.
Document Version 2010-11 PC Programming Manual 695
8.6 [6-6] Tenant
For KX-TDA100/KX-TDA200/KX-TDA600:
Same as System Setting: PBX common system speed dialing numbers are used.
Tenant Exclusive: Individual tenant system speed dialing numbers are used.
Maintenance Console Location
8.6 [6-6] Tenant
Programming Manual References
8.1 [6-1] System Speed Dial
Feature Manual References
16.1.4 Speed Dialing, System
17.1.3 Tenant Service
696 PC Programming Manual Document Version 2010-11
8.6 [6-6] Tenant
Section 9
[7] TRS
Document Version 2010-11 PC Programming Manual 697
9.1 [7-1] Denied Code
Toll Restriction (TRS) prohibits an extension from making certain CO line calls. Each time mode of every COS
is assigned one of the seven TRS levels. TRS level 7 provides the maximum restriction (all CO line calls are
prohibited) and level 1 provides the minimum (all CO line calls are allowed). TRS levels 2–6 are used to restrict
calls according to the codes programmed in the Denied Code Tables here and Exception Code Tables in
9.2 [7-2] Exception Code. If the leading digits of the dialed number are not found in the applicable Denied
Code Tables, the call is made.
A maximum of 100 denied codes can be programmed for each level. 20 codes are displayed at a time. To
display other sets of codes, click the applicable tab.
Denied Code Tables—Level 2–Level 6
Specifies the leading digits of toll restricted numbers for each level.
Default
Not stored.
Value Range
Max. 16 digits (consisting of 0–9, *, #, and X)
Maintenance Console Location
9.1 [7-1] Denied Code
Programming Manual References
4.11 [2-7-1] Class of Service—COS Settings—TRS— TRS Level—Day, Lunch, Break, Night
9.2 [7-2] Exception Code
Feature Manual References
17.1.6 TRS (Toll Restriction)
698 PC Programming Manual Document Version 2010-11
9.1 [7-1] Denied Code
9.2 [7-2] Exception Code
Toll Restriction (TRS) prohibits an extension from making certain CO line calls. Each time mode of every COS
is assigned one of the seven TRS levels. TRS level 7 provides the maximum restriction (all CO line calls are
prohibited) and level 1 provides the minimum (all CO line calls are allowed). TRS levels 2–6 are used to restrict
calls according to the codes programmed in the Denied Code Tables in 9.1 [7-1] Denied Code and Exception
Code Tables here. A call denied by the applicable Denied Code Tables is checked against the applicable
Exception Code Tables, and if a match is found, the call is made.
A maximum of 100 exception codes can be programmed for each level. 20 codes are displayed at a time. To
display other sets of codes, click the applicable tab.
Exception Code Tables—Level 2–Level 6
Specifies the leading digits of the numbers to be exempted from Toll Restriction for each level.
Default
Not stored.
Value Range
Max. 16 digits (consisting of 0–9, *, #, and X)
Maintenance Console Location
9.2 [7-2] Exception Code
Programming Manual References
4.11 [2-7-1] Class of Service—COS Settings—TRS— TRS Level—Day, Lunch, Break, Night
9.1 [7-1] Denied Code
Feature Manual References
17.1.6 TRS (Toll Restriction)
Document Version 2010-11 PC Programming Manual 699
9.2 [7-2] Exception Code
9.3 [7-3] Special Carrier
If the PBX has access to multiple telephone companies, a Special Carrier Access Code is required each time
a CO line call is made. By programming these Special Carrier Access Codes here, Toll Restriction (TRS) can
restrict or allow calls to be made by ignoring the codes and looking at the telephone number only. If a Special
Carrier Access Code is found in the dialed number, TRS will look only at the following digits.
A maximum of 20 (with the KX-TDA50/KX-TDA100/KX-TDA200) or 100 (with the KX-TDA600) Special Carrier
Access Codes can be programmed. With the KX-TDA600, 20 codes are displayed at a time. To show other
sets of codes, click the applicable tab.
Special Carrier Access Code
Specifies a Special Carrier Access Code. Special Carrier Access Codes and Host PBX Access codes should
be unique.
Default
Not stored.
Value Range
Max. 16 digits (consisting of 0–9, *, and #)
Maintenance Console Location
9.3 [7-3] Special Carrier
Programming Manual References
None
Feature Manual References
16.1.2 Special Carrier Access Code
17.1.6 TRS (Toll Restriction)
700 PC Programming Manual Document Version 2010-11
9.3 [7-3] Special Carrier
9.4 [7-4] Emergency Dial
Any extension user can dial the programmed emergency numbers at any time after seizing a CO line. The
restrictions imposed on the extension, such as Toll Restriction (TRS), Account Code—Forced mode, and
Extension Dial Lock are disregarded.
A maximum of 10 emergency numbers can be programmed.
Emergency Number
Specifies the numbers used for making emergency calls. It is not necessary to start the emergency number
with a CO Line Access number.
Default
1: 911, 2–10: Not stored.
Value Range
Max. 32 digits (consisting of 0–9, *, #, T [Transfer], P [Pause], and F [Flash])
Maintenance Console Location
9.4 [7-4] Emergency Dial
Programming Manual References
None
Feature Manual References
5.1.2 Emergency Call
Document Version 2010-11 PC Programming Manual 701
9.4 [7-4] Emergency Dial
9.5 [7-5] Miscellaneous
Toll Restriction (TRS) prohibits an extension from making certain CO line calls. The following optional settings
can be programmed to activate a TRS check, override TRS, or switch between TRS methods.
TRS Override by System Speed Dialing
Enables an outgoing CO line call to override TRS when the call is made using System Speed Dialing.
Default
Enable
Value Range
Disable, Enable
Maintenance Console Location
9.5 [7-5] Miscellaneous
Programming Manual References
8.1 [6-1] System Speed Dial
Feature Manual References
17.1.6 TRS (Toll Restriction)
TRS Check for Dial "* #"
Enables a TRS check for the user-dialed "" and "#". This is useful in preventing unauthorized calls which
could possibly be made through certain telephone company exchanges.
Default
No Check
Value Range
No Check, Check
Maintenance Console Location
9.5 [7-5] Miscellaneous
Programming Manual References
None
Feature Manual References
17.1.6 TRS (Toll Restriction)
702 PC Programming Manual Document Version 2010-11
9.5 [7-5] Miscellaneous
Mode when Dial Time-out before TRS Check
Selects whether a CO line is disconnected if the TRS check has not been completed when the CO line
Inter-digit timer expires.
Default
Disconnect
Value Range
Disconnect: The CO line is disconnected as soon as the timer expires.
Keep: The TRS check is performed when the timer expires.
Maintenance Console Location
9.5 [7-5] Miscellaneous
Programming Manual References
4.4 [2-3] Timers & Counters
Feature Manual References
17.1.6 TRS (Toll Restriction)
Dial Digits Limitation After Answering—Dial Digits
Specifies a limit to be placed on the number of digits which can be dialed after an extension user receives a
CO line call. If the number of dialed digits exceeds the programmed limit, the line will be disconnected.
Default
None
Value Range
None, 1–7
Maintenance Console Location
9.5 [7-5] Miscellaneous
Programming Manual References
None
Feature Manual References
17.1.6 TRS (Toll Restriction)
3.1.15 CO Line Call Limitation
TRS Check after EFA
Enables TRS to check the digits dialed after External Feature Access (EFA) during a CO line call.
Document Version 2010-11 PC Programming Manual 703
9.5 [7-5] Miscellaneous
Default
Enable
Value Range
Disable, Enable
Maintenance Console Location
9.5 [7-5] Miscellaneous
Programming Manual References
None
Feature Manual References
17.1.6 TRS (Toll Restriction)
5.1.1 EFA (External Feature Access)
TRS Table Mode for Level N (N=2_6)
Selects the method of TRS to be used for restricting calls. The level of TRS is determined by the telephone
codes set in the Denied Code Tables and Exception Code Tables.
Default
Deny Table 2_N + Except Table N_6
Value Range
Deny Table 2_N + Except Table N_6: The Denied Code Tables for the higher levels are applied to all levels
below it, and the Exception Code Tables for the lower levels are applied to all levels above it.
Deny Table N + Except Table N: Each level has its own separate set of denied codes and exception codes,
which are only applied to that level.
Maintenance Console Location
9.5 [7-5] Miscellaneous
Programming Manual References
None
Feature Manual References
17.1.6 TRS (Toll Restriction)
704 PC Programming Manual Document Version 2010-11
9.5 [7-5] Miscellaneous
Section 10
[8] ARS
Document Version 2010-11 PC Programming Manual 705
10.1 [8-1] System Setting
Automatic Route Selection (ARS) automatically selects the appropriate carrier at the time a CO line call is
made, according to the programmed settings. The user-dialed number will be checked and modified in order
to connect it to the appropriate carrier.
ARS Mode
Selects the condition to determine when to operate ARS.
Default
Off
Value Range
Off: ARS is disabled.
On for Local Access Operation: ARS operates when an extension user makes a call using Idle Line Access
method.
On for Any CO Access Operation: ARS operates when an extension user makes a call using Idle Line Access,
CO Line Access, or S-CO Line Access method.
Maintenance Console Location
10.1 [8-1] System Setting
Programming Manual References
None
Feature Manual References
3.1.14 CO Line Access
1.1.3 ARS (Automatic Route Selection)
Mode When Any Carrier is not programmed for the Dial
Selects what happens when the dialed number is not found in Leading Number in 10.2 [8-2] Leading
Number.
Default
Local Access
Value Range
Disconnect: the line will be disconnected.
Local Access: the dialed number will be handled by Idle Line Access method.
Maintenance Console Location
10.1 [8-1] System Setting
Programming Manual References
None
706 PC Programming Manual Document Version 2010-11
10.1 [8-1] System Setting
Feature Manual References
1.1.3 ARS (Automatic Route Selection)
Document Version 2010-11 PC Programming Manual 707
10.1 [8-1] System Setting
10.2 [8-2] Leading Number
Specifies the area codes and/or telephone numbers as leading numbers that will be routed by the ARS feature.
A maximum of 1000 different leading numbers can be programmed, and each leading number can select a
Routing Plan Table number, which determines the ARS procedure.
The additional (remaining) number of digits can also be specified for each leading number. The additional
(remaining) number of digits must be specified only when "#", for example, is needed after the dialed number.
The "#" will be added after the programmed number of digits of the user-dialed number (excluding the leading
number).
100 leading numbers are displayed at a time. To display other sets of leading numbers, click the applicable
tab.
Leading Number
Specifies the leading number.
Default
Not stored.
Value Range
Max. 16 digits (consisting of 0–9, *, #, and X)
Maintenance Console Location
10.2 [8-2] Leading Number
Programming Manual References
None
Feature Manual References
1.1.3 ARS (Automatic Route Selection)
Additional Number of Digits
Specifies the additional (remaining) number of digits following each leading number.
Default
0
Value Range
0–15
Maintenance Console Location
10.2 [8-2] Leading Number
Programming Manual References
None
708 PC Programming Manual Document Version 2010-11
10.2 [8-2] Leading Number
Feature Manual References
1.1.3 ARS (Automatic Route Selection)
Routing Plan Number
Specifies the Routing Plan Table number used for each leading number.
Default
1
Value Range
For KX-TDA50/KX-TDA100/KX-TDA200:
1–16
For KX-TDA600:
1–48
Maintenance Console Location
10.2 [8-2] Leading Number
Programming Manual References
None
Feature Manual References
1.1.3 ARS (Automatic Route Selection)
Document Version 2010-11 PC Programming Manual 709
10.2 [8-2] Leading Number
10.3 [8-3] Routing Plan Time
The start and end times of a maximum of 4 different time blocks are shown for each day of the week. There
are 16 (with the KX-TDA50/KX-TDA100/KX-TDA200) or 48 (with the KX-TDA600) Routing Plan Tables, and
each Routing Plan Table can have its own time blocks. Select the desired Routing Plan Table number from
the Routing Plan list.
•To adjust the currently displayed Routing Plan, click and drag the divisions between two time periods.
•To program the time blocks of the currently displayed Routing Plan, including adding or deleting time blocks,
click Time Setting.
710 PC Programming Manual Document Version 2010-11
10.3 [8-3] Routing Plan Time
10.4 [8-3] Routing Plan Time—Time Setting
The start times of a maximum of 4 different time blocks can be programmed for each day of the week, for the
selected Routing Plan. Each time block automatically ends when the subsequent block begins.
Time-A–D—Setting
Enables the setting of the start time for each time block.
Default
Time-A–Time-C: Enable
Time-D: Disable
Value Range
Disable, Enable
Maintenance Console Location
10.4 [8-3] Routing Plan Time—Time Setting
Programming Manual References
None
Feature Manual References
1.1.3 ARS (Automatic Route Selection)
Time-A–D—Hour, Minute
Specifies the start time for each time block.
Default
Time-A: 8:00, Time-B: 17:00, Time-C: 21:00, Time-D: Not applicable.
Value Range
00:00–23:59
Maintenance Console Location
10.4 [8-3] Routing Plan Time—Time Setting
Programming Manual References
None
Feature Manual References
1.1.3 ARS (Automatic Route Selection)
Document Version 2010-11 PC Programming Manual 711
10.4 [8-3] Routing Plan Time—Time Setting
10.5 [8-4] Routing Plan Priority
The carrier priority (1 through 6) in a Routing Plan Table can be programmed for each time zone of each day
of the week. Select the desired Routing Plan Table number from the Routing Plan list. Select the desired day
of the week by clicking the applicable tab.
Time-A–Time-D
Specifies the carrier to be given priority for each time zone.
Default
Routing Plan 1–10
Priority 1: [Routing Plan no.]
Priority 2–6: None
Routing Plan 11–48
Priority 1–6: None
Value Range
For KX-TDA50/KX-TDA100/KX-TDA200:
None, 1–10
For KX-TDA600:
None, 1–48
Maintenance Console Location
10.5 [8-4] Routing Plan Priority
Programming Manual References
None
Feature Manual References
1.1.3 ARS (Automatic Route Selection)
712 PC Programming Manual Document Version 2010-11
10.5 [8-4] Routing Plan Priority
10.6 [8-5] Carrier
Carrier
It is possible to specify how user-dialed numbers are modified for connecting to the appropriate carrier. A
maximum of 10 (with the KX-TDA50/KX-TDA100/KX-TDA200) or 48 (with the KX-TDA600) different carriers
can be programmed to be used with the ARS feature.
Carrier Name
Specifies the carrier name.
Default
Not stored.
Value Range
Max. 20 characters
Maintenance Console Location
10.6 [8-5] Carrier
Programming Manual References
None
Feature Manual References
1.1.3 ARS (Automatic Route Selection)
Removed Number of Digits
Specifies the number of leading digits to remove from the user-dialed number.
Default
0
Value Range
0–15
Maintenance Console Location
10.6 [8-5] Carrier
Programming Manual References
None
Feature Manual References
1.1.3 ARS (Automatic Route Selection)
Document Version 2010-11 PC Programming Manual 713
10.6 [8-5] Carrier
Modify Command
Specifies the commands to modify the user-dialed number to access the carrier. For details of each command,
see the Feature Manual.
Default
CH
Value Range
Max. 16 characters (consisting of 0–9, *, #, C, P, A, G, I and H)
Maintenance Console Location
10.6 [8-5] Carrier
Programming Manual References
None
Feature Manual References
1.1.3 ARS (Automatic Route Selection)
Carrier Access Code
Specifies the carrier access code. The carrier access code can be added to the user-dialed number by
specifying "C" in Modify Command on this screen.
Default
Not stored.
Value Range
Max. 32 digits (consisting of 0–9, *, #, and P [Pause])
Maintenance Console Location
10.6 [8-5] Carrier
Programming Manual References
None
Feature Manual References
1.1.3 ARS (Automatic Route Selection)
TRG 01–TRG 64 (KX-TDA50/KX-TDA100/KX-TDA200), or TRG 01–TRG 96
(KX-TDA600)
Selects the trunk groups that connect to the carrier.
714 PC Programming Manual Document Version 2010-11
10.6 [8-5] Carrier
TRG 01–TRG 64 (KX-TDA50/KX-TDA100/KX-TDA200), or TRG 01–TRG 96
(KX-TDA600)
Enables each trunk group for each carrier. If a cell is highlighted in blue, that trunk group is enabled for use
with that carrier.
Default
Trunk groups 01–04: ON
All other trunk groups: OFF
Value Range
OFF (white), ON (blue)
Maintenance Console Location
10.6 [8-5] Carrier
Programming Manual References
None
Feature Manual References
1.1.3 ARS (Automatic Route Selection)
Authorization Code for Tenant
Specifies an Authorization code for each tenant. The Authorization codes can be added to the user-dialed
number by specifying "A" command in Modify Command on the Carrier tab.
Authorization Code for Tenant—Tenant 1–Tenant 32
Specifies the Authorization code of each carrier for each tenant.
Note
For the KX-TDA50/KX-TDA100/KX-TDA200, only up to 8 tenants are available.
Default
Not stored.
Value Range
Max. 16 digits (consisting of 0–9, *, and #)
Maintenance Console Location
10.6 [8-5] Carrier
Programming Manual References
None
Document Version 2010-11 PC Programming Manual 715
10.6 [8-5] Carrier
Feature Manual References
1.1.3 ARS (Automatic Route Selection)
17.1.3 Tenant Service
716 PC Programming Manual Document Version 2010-11
10.6 [8-5] Carrier
10.7 [8-6] Leading Number Exception
Specifies telephone numbers that will not be connected using the ARS feature. When the user-dialed number
includes a leading number exception, the PBX sends the number to a CO line by the Idle Line Access method
if ARS Mode in 10.1 [8-1] System Setting is "on".
A maximum of 200 different leading number exceptions can be programmed. 40 leading number exception
entries are displayed on the screen at a time. To display other sets, click the applicable tab.
Leading Number Exception
Specifies the leading number exception.
Default
Not stored.
Value Range
Max. 16 digits (consisting of 0–9, *, #, and X)
Maintenance Console Location
10.7 [8-6] Leading Number Exception
Programming Manual References
None
Feature Manual References
1.1.3 ARS (Automatic Route Selection)
Document Version 2010-11 PC Programming Manual 717
10.7 [8-6] Leading Number Exception
10.8 [8-7] Authorization Code for TRG
An Authorization code can be specified for each trunk group. The Authorization codes entered here can be
added to user-dialed numbers by adding "G" to the Modify Command specified on the Carrier tab of screen
10.6 [8-5] Carrier.
8 trunk groups are displayed on the screen at a time. To display other groups, click the applicable tab.
Authorization Code for Trunk Group—TRG 01–TRG 64 (KX-TDA50/KX-TDA100/
KX-TDA200), or TRG 01–TRG 96 (KX-TDA600)
Specifies the Authorization code of each carrier for each trunk group.
Default
Not stored.
Value Range
Max. 10 digits (consisting of 0–9, *, and #)
Maintenance Console Location
10.8 [8-7] Authorization Code for TRG
Programming Manual References
10.6 [8-5] Carrier—Carrier— Modify Command
Feature Manual References
1.1.3 ARS (Automatic Route Selection)
718 PC Programming Manual Document Version 2010-11
10.8 [8-7] Authorization Code for TRG
Section 11
[9] Private Network
Document Version 2010-11 PC Programming Manual 719
11.1 [9-1] TIE Table
A TIE line is a privately leased communication line between two or more PBXs, which provides cost effective
communications between company members at different locations.
A maximum of 32 TIE Line Routing and Modification Tables can be programmed. It is necessary to make
unified tables with all PBXs at different locations in a TIE line network in order to identify the CO line route to
be used when an extension makes or receives a TIE line call.
There are two types of routing methods: the Extension Number Method, where all extensions in the network
are given a unique extension number; and the PBX Code Method, where each PBX is given a unique code,
which is dialed before the extension number to call an extension at another PBX.
Two priority sets (from a total of 8) are displayed at a time. To display other priority sets, click the applicable
tab.
Using a private network, up to 8 PBXs can share one VPS (centralized VM) connected to another PBX. This
VPS can provide voice mail for extensions attached to any of the PBXs in the network.
Own PBX Code
Specifies the PBX code of the local PBX, when using PBX Code Method numbering on a TIE line network. If
this cell is left empty, the Extension Number Method is used.
Default
Not stored.
Value Range
Max. 7 digits (consisting of 0–9)
Maintenance Console Location
11.1 [9-1] TIE Table
Programming Manual References
None
Feature Manual References
13.1.13 PRIVATE NETWORK FEATURES
Priority 1–Priority 8
Leading Number
Specifies the leading number for other PBX extension numbers or the PBX code of others in the TIE line
network.
Default
Not stored.
Value Range
Max. 3 digits (consisting of 0–9, *, and #)
720 PC Programming Manual Document Version 2010-11
11.1 [9-1] TIE Table
Maintenance Console Location
11.1 [9-1] TIE Table
Programming Manual References
None
Feature Manual References
13.1.13 PRIVATE NETWORK FEATURES
Removed Number of Digits
Specifies the number of leading digits of the dialed number to be removed for each priority.
Default
0
Value Range
0–15
Maintenance Console Location
11.1 [9-1] TIE Table
Programming Manual References
None
Feature Manual References
13.1.13 PRIVATE NETWORK FEATURES
Added Number
Specifies the number to be added to the dialed number in place of the removed digits for each priority.
Default
Not stored.
Value Range
Max. 32 digits (consisting of 0–9, *, #, and P [Pause])
Maintenance Console Location
11.1 [9-1] TIE Table
Programming Manual References
None
Document Version 2010-11 PC Programming Manual 721
11.1 [9-1] TIE Table
Feature Manual References
13.1.13 PRIVATE NETWORK FEATURES
Trunk Group
Specifies the trunk group to be used for TIE line calls for each priority.
Default
None
Value Range
For KX-TDA50/KX-TDA100/KX-TDA200:
None, 1–64
For KX-TDA600:
None, 1–96
Maintenance Console Location
11.1 [9-1] TIE Table
Programming Manual References
None
Feature Manual References
13.1.13 PRIVATE NETWORK FEATURES
Centralized VM
Leading Number
Specifies the leading number for other PBX extension numbers or the PBX code of other PBXs in the TIE line
network.
Default
Not stored.
Value Range
Max. 3 digits (consisting of 0–9, *, and #)
Maintenance Console Location
11.1 [9-1] TIE Table
Programming Manual References
None
722 PC Programming Manual Document Version 2010-11
11.1 [9-1] TIE Table
Feature Manual References
13.1.13 PRIVATE NETWORK FEATURES
Enhanced QSIG Call Information (Activation Key Required)
Enables Network Message Waiting information to be sent from the PBX to which the VPS is attached to
extensions connected to other PBXs in the network.
Default
Enable
Value Range
Disable, Enable
Maintenance Console Location
11.1 [9-1] TIE Table
Programming Manual References
None
Feature Manual References
13.1.14 Private Network Features—Centralized Voice Mail
Document Version 2010-11 PC Programming Manual 723
11.1 [9-1] TIE Table
11.2 [9-2] Network Data Transmission
Settings related to the transmission of extension BLF (Busy Line Field) data or Message Waiting notifications
over a network of PBXs can be programmed.
Extension BLF data is used to show the status of a monitored extension attached to another PBX on a Network
DSS (NDSS) button. Network Message Waiting notifications are used for the Centralized VM feature, and a
VPS can send notifications to extensions connected to any PBX in the network.
Network Data Transmission for Centralized Operator Feature—Network PBX ID
Specifies the Network ID of the PBX, for Network Direct Station Selection (NDSS). This parameter must be
set in correspondence with the Network IDs assigned to other PBXs in the network.
Network IDs 1-8 can only be assigned to one PBX each within a network. Assigning the same Network ID to
two PBXs will cause network data transmission problems.
Changing this value in Interactive mode will automatically clear any NDSS Link Data.
Default
0
Value Range
0: The PBX retransmits BLF data sent by other PBXs.
1: The PBX receives BLF data sent by other PBXs.
2–8: The PBX transmits BLF data over the network.
Maintenance Console Location
11.2 [9-2] Network Data Transmission
Programming Manual References
None
Feature Manual References
13.1.15 Private Network Features—NDSS (Network Direct Station Selection)
Network Data Transmission for Centralized Operator Feature—Data
Transmission VoIP->ISDN
Selects whether to re-send BLF data received from a VoIP port through any ISDN ports that are set to transmit
BLF data.
Default
Disable
Value Range
Disable, Enable
Maintenance Console Location
11.2 [9-2] Network Data Transmission
724 PC Programming Manual Document Version 2010-11
11.2 [9-2] Network Data Transmission
Programming Manual References
3.14 [1-1] Slot—Port Property - PRI Port (KX-TDA100/KX-TDA200/KX-TDA600 only)—CO Setting—
Networking Data Transfer
Feature Manual References
13.1.15 Private Network Features—NDSS (Network Direct Station Selection)
Network Data Transmission for Centralized Operator Feature—Data
Transmission ISDN->VoIP
Selects whether to re-send BLF data received from an ISDN port through any VoIP ports that are set to transmit
BLF data.
Default
Disable
Value Range
Disable, Enable
Maintenance Console Location
11.2 [9-2] Network Data Transmission
Programming Manual References
11.3 [9-3] Network Operator (VoIP)— IP-GW Card Slot No. to notify BLF data to Network Operator
Feature Manual References
13.1.15 Private Network Features—NDSS (Network Direct Station Selection)
Network Data Transmission for Centralized Operator Feature—Data
Transmission Counter
Specifies the maximum number of "hops", or transmissions between two PBXs, before a packet of BLF data
is discarded.
Default
8
Value Range
1–63
Maintenance Console Location
11.2 [9-2] Network Data Transmission
Programming Manual References
None
Document Version 2010-11 PC Programming Manual 725
11.2 [9-2] Network Data Transmission
Feature Manual References
13.1.15 Private Network Features—NDSS (Network Direct Station Selection)
Network Data Transmission for Centralized Operator Feature—Data
Broadcasting Interval Timer
Specifies the frequency of BLF data transmission. The PBX will send data over the network periodically
according to the interval specified here.
Default
3000 ms
Value Range
100 ´ n (n=0–30) ms
Maintenance Console Location
11.2 [9-2] Network Data Transmission
Programming Manual References
None
Feature Manual References
13.1.15 Private Network Features—NDSS (Network Direct Station Selection)
Network MSW Data Transmission for Centralized VM Feature—Data
Re-transmission : Repeat Counter
Specifies the number of times re-transmission of network message waiting notifications is repeated before
being canceled.
Default
3
Value Range
0–10
Maintenance Console Location
11.2 [9-2] Network Data Transmission
Programming Manual References
11.1 [9-1] TIE Table— Enhanced QSIG Call Information (Activation Key Required)
Feature Manual References
13.1.14 Private Network Features—Centralized Voice Mail
726 PC Programming Manual Document Version 2010-11
11.2 [9-2] Network Data Transmission
Network MSW Data Transmission for Centralized VM Feature—Data
Re-transmission : Repeat Timer
Specifies the length of time between repeated re-transmission of network message waiting notifications.
Default
30 s
Value Range
10–240 s
Maintenance Console Location
11.2 [9-2] Network Data Transmission
Programming Manual References
11.1 [9-1] TIE Table— Enhanced QSIG Call Information (Activation Key Required)
Feature Manual References
13.1.14 Private Network Features—Centralized Voice Mail
Document Version 2010-11 PC Programming Manual 727
11.2 [9-2] Network Data Transmission
11.3 [9-3] Network Operator (VoIP)
This screen allows network operators to be programmed. A network operator is an extension at a remote PBX
that will monitor other PBX extensions using Network Direct Station Selection (NDSS). The settings on this
screen should be programmed at the PBX that is to be monitored ( Network Data Transmission for
Centralized Operator Feature—Network PBX ID 2–8). Up to 8 network operators can be programmed.
Network Operator Extension No.
Specifies the number of an extension at the monitor PBX (the PBX whose Network Data Transmission
for Centralized Operator Feature—Network PBX ID is set to 1 in 11.2 [9-2] Network Data Transmission).
Any extension at the monitor PBX can be specified here.
Default
Not stored.
Value Range
Max. 16 digits (consisting of 0–9, *, and #)
Maintenance Console Location
11.3 [9-3] Network Operator (VoIP)
Programming Manual References
11.2 [9-2] Network Data Transmission— Network Data Transmission for Centralized Operator Feature—
Network PBX ID
Feature Manual References
13.1.15 Private Network Features—NDSS (Network Direct Station Selection)
IP-GW Card Slot No. to notify BLF data to Network Operator
Specifies the slot number (with the KX-TDA600, shelf and slot number) of the card used to send extension
status data. This setting is only required when using VoIP to transmit data.
Default
Undefined
Value Range
For KX-TDA50:
Undefined, 5–7
For KX-TDA100/KX-TDA200:
Undefined, 1–11
For KX-TDA600:
Undefined, 1-1–4-11
728 PC Programming Manual Document Version 2010-11
11.3 [9-3] Network Operator (VoIP)
Maintenance Console Location
11.3 [9-3] Network Operator (VoIP)
Programming Manual References
3.1 [1-1] Slot
Feature Manual References
13.1.15 Private Network Features—NDSS (Network Direct Station Selection)
Document Version 2010-11 PC Programming Manual 729
11.3 [9-3] Network Operator (VoIP)
11.4 [9-4] NDSS Key Table
Extensions at up to 7 other PBXs that will be monitored using Network Direct Station Selection (NDSS) can
be registered. A maximum of 250 extensions can be registered. To create an NDSS button to monitor an
extension, the extension must be registered here first.
To clear NDSS link data, click the NDSS Clear button.
Note that the parameters on this screen can only be set when the Network Data Transmission for Centralized
Operator Feature—Network PBX ID is set to 1 in the 11.2 [9-2] Network Data Transmission screen.
Network Extension No.
Specifies the number of the remote extension (attached to another PBX) that will be monitored. The number
input here can use either Extension Number Method or PBX Code Method.
Default
Not stored.
Value Range
Max. 16 digits (consisting of 0–9, *, and #)
Maintenance Console Location
11.4 [9-4] NDSS Key Table
Programming Manual References
None
Feature Manual References
13.1.15 Private Network Features—NDSS (Network Direct Station Selection)
13.1.13 PRIVATE NETWORK FEATURES
Network Extension Name for Programming Reference
Specifies the name of the network extension. This name is only shown here, not on the displays of extensions.
Default
Not stored.
Value Range
Max. 20 characters
Maintenance Console Location
11.4 [9-4] NDSS Key Table
Programming Manual References
None
730 PC Programming Manual Document Version 2010-11
11.4 [9-4] NDSS Key Table
Feature Manual References
13.1.15 Private Network Features—NDSS (Network Direct Station Selection)
Network PBX ID of Network Extension to be monitored
Indicates the Network Data Transmission for Centralized Operator Feature—Network PBX ID of the PBX
that the extension is connected to (reference only).
Default
Not stored.
Value Range
None, 1–8
Maintenance Console Location
11.4 [9-4] NDSS Key Table
Programming Manual References
11.2 [9-2] Network Data Transmission—Network Data Transmission for Centralized Operator Feature—
Network PBX ID
Feature Manual References
13.1.15 Private Network Features—NDSS (Network Direct Station Selection)
Document Version 2010-11 PC Programming Manual 731
11.4 [9-4] NDSS Key Table
732 PC Programming Manual Document Version 2010-11
11.4 [9-4] NDSS Key Table
Section 12
[10] CO & Incoming Call
Document Version 2010-11 PC Programming Manual 733
12.1 [10-1] CO Line Settings
CO lines can be assigned a name, and grouped into a maximum of 64 (with the KX-TDA50/KX-TDA100/
KX-TDA200) or 96 (with the KX-TDA600) trunk groups.
For KX-TDA600, all supported cards are displayed in the Select Shelf & Slot list. Select the shelf and slot and
card type to program, or select "All" to display all matching cards.
Physical—Shelf (KX-TDA600 only)
Indicates the shelf position of each CO line card (reference only).
Default
Current shelf position
Value Range
Shelf number
Maintenance Console Location
12.1 [10-1] CO Line Settings
Programming Manual References
None
Feature Manual References
None
Physical—Slot
Indicates the slot position of each CO line card (reference only).
Default
Current slot number
Value Range
Slot number
Maintenance Console Location
12.1 [10-1] CO Line Settings
Programming Manual References
None
Feature Manual References
None
734 PC Programming Manual Document Version 2010-11
12.1 [10-1] CO Line Settings
Physical—Port
Indicates the port number (reference only).
Default
Current port number
Value Range
Port number
Maintenance Console Location
12.1 [10-1] CO Line Settings
Programming Manual References
None
Feature Manual References
None
CO Name
Specifies the CO line name which is shown on the extension’s display when receiving a call from the CO line.
Default
Not stored.
Value Range
Max. 20 characters
Maintenance Console Location
12.1 [10-1] CO Line Settings
Programming Manual References
None
Feature Manual References
4.1.8 Display Information
Trunk Group Number
Specifies the trunk group number to which the CO line belongs.
Default
1
Value Range
KX-TDA50/KX-TDA100/KX-TDA200:
Document Version 2010-11 PC Programming Manual 735
12.1 [10-1] CO Line Settings
1–64
KX-TDA600:
1–96
Maintenance Console Location
12.1 [10-1] CO Line Settings
Programming Manual References
None
Feature Manual References
7.1.1 GROUP FEATURES
736 PC Programming Manual Document Version 2010-11
12.1 [10-1] CO Line Settings
12.2 [10-2] DIL Table & Port Settings
Direct In Line (DIL) or Direct Inward Dialing (DID) can be selected for each CO line as the method of distributing
incoming CO line calls to certain destinations. For each CO line to which DIL distribution is set, different
destinations can be programmed depending on the time mode (day/lunch/break/night). If desired, Calling Line
Identification (CLI) distribution can be used in conjunction with DIL distribution.
For KX-TDA600, all supported cards are displayed in the Select Shelf & Slot list with their shelf and slot
numbers. Select the card to program, or select "All" to display all matching cards.
DIL
For each CO line to which DIL distribution is set, different DIL destinations can be programmed depending on
the time mode (day/lunch/break/night). Generally, DIL distribution is used for CO line calls from analog CO
lines. Tenant number and VM trunk group number can also be programmed for each CO line.
To assign DIL destination numbers, enter directly or click Destination Setting (see 2.1.6 Extension Number
Setting).
Shelf (KX-TDA600 only)
Indicates the shelf position (reference only).
Default
Current shelf number
Value Range
Shelf number
Maintenance Console Location
12.2 [10-2] DIL Table & Port Settings
Programming Manual References
None
Feature Manual References
None
Slot
Indicates the slot position of each CO line card (reference only).
Default
Current slot number
Value Range
Slot number
Maintenance Console Location
12.2 [10-2] DIL Table & Port Settings
Document Version 2010-11 PC Programming Manual 737
12.2 [10-2] DIL Table & Port Settings
Programming Manual References
None
Feature Manual References
None
Port
Indicates the port number (reference only).
Default
Current port number
Value Range
Port number
Maintenance Console Location
12.2 [10-2] DIL Table & Port Settings
Programming Manual References
None
Feature Manual References
None
Card Type
Indicates the CO line card type (reference only).
Default
Current card type
Value Range
Card type
Maintenance Console Location
12.2 [10-2] DIL Table & Port Settings
Programming Manual References
None
Feature Manual References
9.1.10 INCOMING CALL FEATURES
738 PC Programming Manual Document Version 2010-11
12.2 [10-2] DIL Table & Port Settings
Trunk Property
Indicates the networking type of each CO line (reference only).
Default
Current networking type
Value Range
Public, Private(TIE), VPN
Maintenance Console Location
12.2 [10-2] DIL Table & Port Settings
Programming Manual References
None
Feature Manual References
9.1.10 INCOMING CALL FEATURES
13.1.13 PRIVATE NETWORK FEATURES
Distribution Method
Selects the distribution method for incoming CO line calls. The value range of this setting depends on the card
type and Trunk Property assigned for each CO line.
Default
DIL
Value Range
DIL: Distribution depends on the CO line through which the calls arrive
DID: Distribution depends on the DID number of the calls
Maintenance Console Location
12.2 [10-2] DIL Table & Port Settings
Programming Manual References
None
Feature Manual References
9.1.10 INCOMING CALL FEATURES
DIL Destination—Day, Lunch, Break, Night
Specifies the DIL destination in each time mode.
Default
Not stored.
Document Version 2010-11 PC Programming Manual 739
12.2 [10-2] DIL Table & Port Settings
Value Range
Max. 5 digits (consisting of 0–9)
Maintenance Console Location
12.2 [10-2] DIL Table & Port Settings
Programming Manual References
4.8 [2-6-1] Numbering Plan—Main
Feature Manual References
4.1.6 DIL (Direct In Line)
13.1.13 PRIVATE NETWORK FEATURES
Tenant Number
Specifies the tenant number, to determine the Time Table by which calls are distributed depending on the time
of day.
Default
1
Value Range
For KX-TDA50/KX-TDA100/KX-TDA200:
1-8
For KX-TDA600:
1-32
Maintenance Console Location
12.2 [10-2] DIL Table & Port Settings
Programming Manual References
None
Feature Manual References
4.1.6 DIL (Direct In Line)
17.1.3 Tenant Service
17.1.5 Time Service
VM Trunk Group No.
Specifies the number of the VM trunk group sent to the VPS when the DIL destination is the floating extension
number of a VM (DPT) Group.
The VM trunk group number is used to allow the VPS to send the applicable greeting message to the caller.
740 PC Programming Manual Document Version 2010-11
12.2 [10-2] DIL Table & Port Settings
Default
1
Value Range
1–48
Maintenance Console Location
12.2 [10-2] DIL Table & Port Settings
Programming Manual References
None
Feature Manual References
4.1.6 DIL (Direct In Line)
19.1.4 Voice Mail DPT (Digital) Integration
CLI for DIL
When CLI distribution is enabled for a CO line to which DIL distribution is set, incoming CO line calls will be
distributed to the CLI destinations (instead of the DIL destinations) if the caller’s identification number is found
in the System Speed Dialing Table.
CLI distribution can be enabled or disabled for each time mode (day/lunch/break/night) on a CO line basis.
Shelf (KX-TDA600 only)
Indicates the shelf position (reference only).
Default
Current shelf number
Value Range
Shelf number
Maintenance Console Location
12.2 [10-2] DIL Table & Port Settings
Programming Manual References
None
Feature Manual References
None
Slot
Indicates the slot position of each CO line card (reference only).
Document Version 2010-11 PC Programming Manual 741
12.2 [10-2] DIL Table & Port Settings
Default
Current slot number
Value Range
Slot number
Maintenance Console Location
12.2 [10-2] DIL Table & Port Settings
Programming Manual References
None
Feature Manual References
None
Port
Indicates the port number (reference only).
Default
Current port number
Value Range
Port number
Maintenance Console Location
12.2 [10-2] DIL Table & Port Settings
Programming Manual References
None
Feature Manual References
None
Card Type
Indicates the CO line card type (reference only).
Default
Current card type
Value Range
Card type
742 PC Programming Manual Document Version 2010-11
12.2 [10-2] DIL Table & Port Settings
Maintenance Console Location
12.2 [10-2] DIL Table & Port Settings
Programming Manual References
None
Feature Manual References
9.1.10 INCOMING CALL FEATURES
Trunk Property
Indicates the networking type of each CO line (reference only).
Default
Current networking type
Value Range
Public, Private(TIE), VPN
Maintenance Console Location
12.2 [10-2] DIL Table & Port Settings
Programming Manual References
None
Feature Manual References
9.1.10 INCOMING CALL FEATURES
13.1.13 PRIVATE NETWORK FEATURES
Distribution Method
Selects the distribution method for incoming CO line calls. The value range of this setting depends on the card
type and Trunk Property assigned for each CO line.
Default
DIL
Value Range
DIL: Distribution depends on the CO line through which the calls arrive
DID: Distribution depends on the DID number of the calls
Maintenance Console Location
12.2 [10-2] DIL Table & Port Settings
Document Version 2010-11 PC Programming Manual 743
12.2 [10-2] DIL Table & Port Settings
Programming Manual References
None
Feature Manual References
9.1.10 INCOMING CALL FEATURES
CLI Ring for DIL—Day, Lunch, Break, Night
Enables CLI distribution in each time mode.
Default
Disable
Value Range
Disable, Enable
Maintenance Console Location
12.2 [10-2] DIL Table & Port Settings
Programming Manual References
None
Feature Manual References
3.1.12 CLI (Calling Line Identification) Distribution
4.1.6 DIL (Direct In Line)
DID/TIE
For each CO line to which DID distribution is set, or for each CO line whose Trunk Property on this screen
is Private (TIE), modification parameters for DID number and TIE line call numbers can be programmed.
Shelf (KX-TDA600 only)
Indicates the shelf position (reference only).
Default
Current shelf number
Value Range
Shelf number
Maintenance Console Location
12.2 [10-2] DIL Table & Port Settings
744 PC Programming Manual Document Version 2010-11
12.2 [10-2] DIL Table & Port Settings
Programming Manual References
None
Feature Manual References
None
Slot
Indicates the slot position of each CO line card (reference only).
Default
Current slot number
Value Range
Slot number
Maintenance Console Location
12.2 [10-2] DIL Table & Port Settings
Programming Manual References
None
Feature Manual References
None
Port
Indicates the port number (reference only).
Default
Current port number
Value Range
Port number
Maintenance Console Location
12.2 [10-2] DIL Table & Port Settings
Programming Manual References
None
Feature Manual References
None
Document Version 2010-11 PC Programming Manual 745
12.2 [10-2] DIL Table & Port Settings
Card Type
Indicates the CO line card type (reference only).
Default
Current card type
Value Range
Card type
Maintenance Console Location
12.2 [10-2] DIL Table & Port Settings
Programming Manual References
None
Feature Manual References
9.1.10 INCOMING CALL FEATURES
Trunk Property
Indicates the networking type of each CO line (reference only).
Default
Current networking type
Value Range
Public, Private(TIE), VPN
Maintenance Console Location
12.2 [10-2] DIL Table & Port Settings
Programming Manual References
None
Feature Manual References
9.1.10 INCOMING CALL FEATURES
13.1.13 PRIVATE NETWORK FEATURES
Distribution Method
Selects the distribution method for incoming CO line calls. The value range of this setting depends on the card
type and Trunk Property assigned for each CO line.
Default
DIL
746 PC Programming Manual Document Version 2010-11
12.2 [10-2] DIL Table & Port Settings
Value Range
DIL: Distribution depends on the CO line through which the calls arrive
DID: Distribution depends on the DID number of the calls
Maintenance Console Location
12.2 [10-2] DIL Table & Port Settings
Programming Manual References
None
Feature Manual References
4.1.5 DID (Direct Inward Dialing)
9.1.10 INCOMING CALL FEATURES
DID/TIE—Remove Digit
Specifies the number of leading digits to be removed from the incoming called number for DID distribution or
for TIE line service.
Default
0
Value Range
0–15
Maintenance Console Location
12.2 [10-2] DIL Table & Port Settings
Programming Manual References
None
Feature Manual References
4.1.5 DID (Direct Inward Dialing)
13.1.13 PRIVATE NETWORK FEATURES
DID/TIE—Additional Dial
Specifies the number to be added to the incoming called number in the place of the removed digits for DID
distribution or for TIE line service.
Default
Not stored.
Value Range
Max. 8 digits (consisting of 0–9, *, and #)
Document Version 2010-11 PC Programming Manual 747
12.2 [10-2] DIL Table & Port Settings
Maintenance Console Location
12.2 [10-2] DIL Table & Port Settings
Programming Manual References
None
Feature Manual References
4.1.5 DID (Direct Inward Dialing)
13.1.13 PRIVATE NETWORK FEATURES
748 PC Programming Manual Document Version 2010-11
12.2 [10-2] DIL Table & Port Settings
12.3 [10-3] DID Table
Incoming CO line calls with DID numbers can be distributed to specific destinations. Each DID number has a
destination programmed for each time mode (day/lunch/break/night).
When CLI distribution is enabled for a DID number, incoming CO line calls with that DID number will be
distributed to the CLI destinations (instead of the DID destinations) if the caller’s identification number is found
in the System Speed Dialing Table, which is used as the Caller ID Table. CLI distribution can be enabled or
disabled for each time mode (day/lunch/break/night) on a DID number basis.
A maximum of 1000 DID numbers can be programmed with other related parameters. 100 numbers are
displayed at a time. To display other sets of numbers, click the applicable tab.
To assign DID destination numbers, enter directly or click Destination Setting (see 2.1.6 Extension Number
Setting). It is possible to program DID numbers and DID destinations in each time mode (day/lunch/break/
night) for a set of locations in series at once by clicking Automatic Registration, or to program DID names
for a set of locations in series at once by clicking Name Generate.
DID Number
Specifies the DID number.
Default
Not stored.
Value Range
Max. 32 digits (consisting of 0–9, *, and #)
Maintenance Console Location
12.3 [10-3] DID Table
Programming Manual References
12.4 [10-3] DID Table—Automatic Registration
Feature Manual References
4.1.5 DID (Direct Inward Dialing)
DID Name
Specifies the name for the DID number which is shown on the extension’s display when receiving a call with
the DID number. The name of the DID number can be printed out on SMDR.
Default
Not stored.
Value Range
Max. 20 characters
Maintenance Console Location
12.3 [10-3] DID Table
Document Version 2010-11 PC Programming Manual 749
12.3 [10-3] DID Table
Programming Manual References
12.5 [10-3] DID Table—Name Generate
13.1 [11-1] Main—SMDR Options— SMDR Options—DID Number & Name
Feature Manual References
4.1.5 DID (Direct Inward Dialing)
DID Destination—Day, Lunch, Break, Night
Specifies the DID destination in each time mode.
Default
Not stored.
Value Range
Max. 5 digits (consisting of 0–9)
Maintenance Console Location
12.3 [10-3] DID Table
Programming Manual References
4.8 [2-6-1] Numbering Plan—Main
12.4 [10-3] DID Table—Automatic Registration
Feature Manual References
4.1.5 DID (Direct Inward Dialing)
13.1.13 PRIVATE NETWORK FEATURES
Tenant Number
Specifies the tenant number, to determine the Time Table by which calls are distributed depending on the time
of day.
Default
1
Value Range
For KX-TDA50/KX-TDA100/KX-TDA200:
1-8
For KX-TDA600:
1-32
Maintenance Console Location
12.3 [10-3] DID Table
750 PC Programming Manual Document Version 2010-11
12.3 [10-3] DID Table
Programming Manual References
4.5 [2-4] Week Table
Feature Manual References
4.1.5 DID (Direct Inward Dialing)
VM Trunk Group No.
Specifies the number of the VM trunk group sent to the VPS when the DID destination is the floating extension
number of a VM (DPT) Group.
The VM trunk group number is used to allow the VPS to send the applicable greeting message to the caller.
Default
1
Value Range
1–48
Maintenance Console Location
12.3 [10-3] DID Table
Programming Manual References
None
Feature Manual References
4.1.5 DID (Direct Inward Dialing)
19.1.4 Voice Mail DPT (Digital) Integration
CLI Ring for DID—Day, Lunch, Break, Night
Enables CLI distribution in each time mode.
Default
Disable
Value Range
Disable, Enable
Maintenance Console Location
12.3 [10-3] DID Table
Programming Manual References
8.1 [6-1] System Speed Dial
Document Version 2010-11 PC Programming Manual 751
12.3 [10-3] DID Table
Feature Manual References
3.1.12 CLI (Calling Line Identification) Distribution
4.1.5 DID (Direct Inward Dialing)
752 PC Programming Manual Document Version 2010-11
12.3 [10-3] DID Table
12.4 [10-3] DID Table—Automatic Registration
Automatic Registration allows DID numbers and DID destinations in each time mode (day/lunch/break/night)
to be programmed at once for a set of locations in series.
Beginning Entry Location
Specifies the number of the first location to be programmed.
Default
1
Value Range
1–1000
Maintenance Console Location
12.4 [10-3] DID Table—Automatic Registration
Programming Manual References
12.3 [10-3] DID Table
Feature Manual References
4.1.5 DID (Direct Inward Dialing)
Generate DID Number (From)
Specifies the DID number of the first location to be programmed. DID numbers for subsequent locations will
be generated automatically, by adding one to the value of the previous location.
Default
Not stored.
Value Range
Max. 32 digits (consisting of 0–9)
Maintenance Console Location
12.4 [10-3] DID Table—Automatic Registration
Programming Manual References
12.3 [10-3] DID Table
Feature Manual References
4.1.5 DID (Direct Inward Dialing)
Document Version 2010-11 PC Programming Manual 753
12.4 [10-3] DID Table—Automatic Registration
Number of Registration
Specifies the number of locations to be programmed.
Default
100
Value Range
1–1000
Maintenance Console Location
12.4 [10-3] DID Table—Automatic Registration
Programming Manual References
12.3 [10-3] DID Table
Feature Manual References
4.1.5 DID (Direct Inward Dialing)
Destination—Day, Lunch, Break, Night
Specifies the number of the DID destination in each time mode for the first location to be programmed. If the
same destination is to be used for all locations for a certain time mode, click the appropriate Same all check
box. If the Same all check box for a certain time mode is not clicked, the destination numbers for subsequent
locations will be generated automatically, by adding one to the value of the previous location for that time mode.
Default
Not stored.
Value Range
Max. 5 digits (consisting of 0–9)
Maintenance Console Location
12.4 [10-3] DID Table—Automatic Registration
Programming Manual References
12.3 [10-3] DID Table
Feature Manual References
4.1.5 DID (Direct Inward Dialing)
754 PC Programming Manual Document Version 2010-11
12.4 [10-3] DID Table—Automatic Registration
12.5 [10-3] DID Table—Name Generate
Name Generate allows DID names to be programmed at once for a set of locations in series.
If a name generated here is longer than 20 characters, the additional characters will be discarded.
Beginning Entry Location
Specifies the number of the first location to be programmed.
Default
1
Value Range
1–1000
Maintenance Console Location
12.5 [10-3] DID Table—Name Generate
Programming Manual References
12.3 [10-3] DID Table
Feature Manual References
4.1.5 DID (Direct Inward Dialing)
Number to Generate
Specifies the number of locations to be programmed.
Default
Not stored.
Value Range
1–1000
Maintenance Console Location
12.5 [10-3] DID Table—Name Generate
Programming Manual References
12.3 [10-3] DID Table
Feature Manual References
4.1.5 DID (Direct Inward Dialing)
Document Version 2010-11 PC Programming Manual 755
12.5 [10-3] DID Table—Name Generate
No. of Digits to Delete
Specifies the number of digits to be deleted from the start of a DID number when using it as part of the DID
name.
Default
0
Value Range
0–32
Maintenance Console Location
12.5 [10-3] DID Table—Name Generate
Programming Manual References
12.3 [10-3] DID Table
Feature Manual References
4.1.5 DID (Direct Inward Dialing)
Name Prefix
Specifies the text to be included at the start of each DID name.
Default
Not stored.
Value Range
Max. 20 characters
Maintenance Console Location
12.5 [10-3] DID Table—Name Generate
Programming Manual References
12.3 [10-3] DID Table
Feature Manual References
4.1.5 DID (Direct Inward Dialing)
Name Suffix
Specifies the text to be included at the end of each DID name.
Default
Not stored.
756 PC Programming Manual Document Version 2010-11
12.5 [10-3] DID Table—Name Generate
Value Range
Max. 20 characters
Maintenance Console Location
12.5 [10-3] DID Table—Name Generate
Programming Manual References
12.3 [10-3] DID Table
Feature Manual References
4.1.5 DID (Direct Inward Dialing)
Document Version 2010-11 PC Programming Manual 757
12.5 [10-3] DID Table—Name Generate
12.6 [10-4] Miscellaneous
The Intercept Routing feature can activate when the destination of an incoming call is unavailable, or when
there is no destination for the call, to reroute the call to an alternate destination.
Intercept—Intercept Routing - DND (Destination sets DND.)
Enables the Intercept Routing—DND feature to activate when the original destination is in DND mode.
Default
Enable
Value Range
Disable (Busy Tone): Sends a busy tone to the caller. (However, a call through an LCOT/ELCOT or T1
[LCOT/GCOT] card will ring at the original destination while the caller hears a ringback tone.)
Enable: Redirects the call to the intercept destination
Maintenance Console Location
12.6 [10-4] Miscellaneous
Programming Manual References
None
Feature Manual References
4.1.9 DND (Do Not Disturb)
9.1.11 Intercept Routing
Intercept—Routing to Operator - No Destination (Destination is not
programmed.)
Enables the Intercept Routing—No Destination feature to activate when there is no destination for the call.
(The Intercept Routing—No Destination feature always works for calls through an LCOT/ELCOT or T1
[LCOT/GCOT] card, even when this feature is disabled.)
Default
Enable
Value Range
Disable (Reorder Tone): Sends a reorder tone to the caller
Enable: Redirects the call to an operator
Maintenance Console Location
12.6 [10-4] Miscellaneous
Programming Manual References
None
758 PC Programming Manual Document Version 2010-11
12.6 [10-4] Miscellaneous
Feature Manual References
9.1.11 Intercept Routing
Intercept—Intercept Routing for Extension Call
Enables the Intercept Routing feature to operate for extension calls.
Default
Enable
Value Range
Disable, Enable
Maintenance Console Location
12.6 [10-4] Miscellaneous
Programming Manual References
None
Feature Manual References
9.1.11 Intercept Routing
Document Version 2010-11 PC Programming Manual 759
12.6 [10-4] Miscellaneous
760 PC Programming Manual Document Version 2010-11
12.6 [10-4] Miscellaneous
Section 13
[11] Maintenance
Document Version 2010-11 PC Programming Manual 761
13.1 [11-1] Main
SMDR
Station Message Detail Recording (SMDR) automatically records detailed information about incoming and
outgoing calls.
SMDR Format—Type
Selects the format of SMDR output.
Default
Type A
Value Range
Type A: 80 digits without call charge information
Type B: 80 digits with call charge information
Type C: 120 digits
Maintenance Console Location
13.1 [11-1] Main
Programming Manual References
None
Feature Manual References
16.1.1 SMDR (Station Message Detail Recording)
SMDR Format—Port
Selects the Serial Interface (RS-232C) port that is used to output the SMDR data.
Default
RS-232C
Value Range
None, RS-232C
Maintenance Console Location
13.1 [11-1] Main
Programming Manual References
None
Feature Manual References
16.1.1 SMDR (Station Message Detail Recording)
762 PC Programming Manual Document Version 2010-11
13.1 [11-1] Main
SMDR Format—Page Length (Number of Lines)
Specifies the number of lines on a page of output paper. Match the SMDR output to the paper size being used
in the printer.
Default
66
Value Range
4–99
Maintenance Console Location
13.1 [11-1] Main
Programming Manual References
None
Feature Manual References
16.1.1 SMDR (Station Message Detail Recording)
SMDR Format—Blank Footer Length (Number of Lines)
Specifies the number of lines to be skipped at the end of every page. The number of lines for the skip perforation
should be shorter than the page length.
Default
0
Value Range
0–95
Maintenance Console Location
13.1 [11-1] Main
Programming Manual References
None
Feature Manual References
16.1.1 SMDR (Station Message Detail Recording)
SMDR Format—Date Format
Selects the printed date format.
Default
MM-DD-YY
Document Version 2010-11 PC Programming Manual 763
13.1 [11-1] Main
Value Range
MM-DD-YY, DD-MM-YY, YY-MM-DD, YY-DD-MM
Maintenance Console Location
13.1 [11-1] Main
Programming Manual References
None
Feature Manual References
16.1.1 SMDR (Station Message Detail Recording)
SMDR Format—Time Format (12H / 24H)
Selects whether times are displayed using the 12- or 24-hour format.
Default
12H
Value Range
12H, 24H
Maintenance Console Location
13.1 [11-1] Main
Programming Manual References
None
Feature Manual References
16.1.1 SMDR (Station Message Detail Recording)
Print Information—Outgoing Call
Specifies whether the dialed digits of outgoing CO line calls are printed. Class of Service (COS) programming
determines the printable records.
Default
Print
Value Range
No Print, Print
Maintenance Console Location
13.1 [11-1] Main
764 PC Programming Manual Document Version 2010-11
13.1 [11-1] Main
Programming Manual References
4.11 [2-7-1] Class of Service—COS Settings—CO & SMDR— Outgoing CO Call Printout (SMDR)
Feature Manual References
16.1.1 SMDR (Station Message Detail Recording)
Print Information—Incoming Call
Specifies whether the information relating to incoming CO line calls, such as caller’s identification name and
number, is printed.
Default
No Print
Value Range
No Print, Print
Maintenance Console Location
13.1 [11-1] Main
Programming Manual References
None
Feature Manual References
16.1.1 SMDR (Station Message Detail Recording)
Print Information—Intercom Call
Specifies whether the dialed digits of outgoing intercom calls are printed.
Default
No Print
Value Range
No Print, Print
Maintenance Console Location
13.1 [11-1] Main
Programming Manual References
None
Feature Manual References
16.1.1 SMDR (Station Message Detail Recording)
Document Version 2010-11 PC Programming Manual 765
13.1 [11-1] Main
Print Information—Log-in / Log-out
Specifies whether the log-in/log-out status is printed.
Default
No Print
Value Range
No Print, Print
Maintenance Console Location
13.1 [11-1] Main
Programming Manual References
None
Feature Manual References
9.1.3 ICD Group Features—Log-in/Log-out
16.1.1 SMDR (Station Message Detail Recording)
Print Information—Hotel Room Status
Selects whether check-in and check-out data is output on SMDR.
Default
No Print
Value Range
No Print, Print
Maintenance Console Location
13.1 [11-1] Main
Programming Manual References
8.2 [6-2] Hotel
Feature Manual References
16.1.1 SMDR (Station Message Detail Recording)
15.1.3 Room Status Control
Print Information—Error Log
Specifies whether PBX error log information is output to SMDR.
Default
No Print
766 PC Programming Manual Document Version 2010-11
13.1 [11-1] Main
Value Range
No Print, Print
Maintenance Console Location
13.1 [11-1] Main
Programming Manual References
None
Feature Manual References
16.1.1 SMDR (Station Message Detail Recording)
10.1.4 Local Alarm Information
SMDR Options
SMDR Options—ARS Dial
Selects the type of the dialed number to be printed for a call with the ARS feature.
Default
Dial after ARS Modification
Value Range
Dial before ARS Modification: The user-dialed number
Dial after ARS Modification: The ARS modified number
Maintenance Console Location
13.1 [11-1] Main
Programming Manual References
None
Feature Manual References
1.1.3 ARS (Automatic Route Selection)
8.1.5 Host PBX Access Code (Access Code to the Telephone Company from a Host PBX)
16.1.1 SMDR (Station Message Detail Recording)
SMDR Options—Caller ID Number & Name
Selects the printing format of caller identifications for incoming CO line calls.
Default
Number
Value Range
None, Number, Name, Name + Number
Document Version 2010-11 PC Programming Manual 767
13.1 [11-1] Main
Maintenance Console Location
13.1 [11-1] Main
Programming Manual References
None
Feature Manual References
16.1.1 SMDR (Station Message Detail Recording)
SMDR Options—DID Number & Name
Selects the printing format of incoming CO line calls with a DID number.
Default
None
Value Range
None, Number, Name, Name + Number
Maintenance Console Location
13.1 [11-1] Main
Programming Manual References
None
Feature Manual References
16.1.1 SMDR (Station Message Detail Recording)
SMDR Options—Secret Dial
Selects the printing format of calls with a secret dial. The secret dial conceals all or part of the dialed number.
Note that selecting Dial before ARS Modification in SMDR Options—ARS Dial on this screen indicates
the dialed numbers as dots regardless of this setting.
Default
Print "...." (Secret)
Value Range
Print "...." (Secret), Print Dialed Number
Maintenance Console Location
13.1 [11-1] Main
Programming Manual References
None
768 PC Programming Manual Document Version 2010-11
13.1 [11-1] Main
Feature Manual References
11.1.2 MEMORY DIALING FEATURES
16.1.1 SMDR (Station Message Detail Recording)
SMDR Options—Condition Code "RC/VR"
Specifies whether the time of receiving an incoming CO line call is printed.
Default
No Print
Value Range
No Print, Print
Maintenance Console Location
13.1 [11-1] Main
Programming Manual References
None
Feature Manual References
16.1.1 SMDR (Station Message Detail Recording)
SMDR Options—Condition Code "AN/VA"
Specifies whether the time of answering an incoming CO line call is printed.
Default
No Print
Value Range
No Print, Print
Maintenance Console Location
13.1 [11-1] Main
Programming Manual References
None
Feature Manual References
16.1.1 SMDR (Station Message Detail Recording)
Document Version 2010-11 PC Programming Manual 769
13.1 [11-1] Main
SMDR Options—Caller ID Modification
Specifies whether Caller ID numbers are recorded on SMDR as received (before being modified by the PBX)
or after being modified.
Default
Before Modification
Value Range
Before Modification, After Modification
Maintenance Console Location
13.1 [11-1] Main
Programming Manual References
5.3 [3-1-3] Caller ID Modification
Feature Manual References
16.1.1 SMDR (Station Message Detail Recording)
RS-232C
Communication—Baud Rate
Specifies the data transmission speed from the PBX to the printer or personal computer.
To ensure stable transmission, when changing this setting to 57600 or 115200 bps, set Communication
—Flow on this screen to Hardware.
Default
19200 bps
Value Range
2400 bps, 4800 bps, 9600 bps, 19200 bps, 38400 bps, 57600 bps, 115200 bps
Maintenance Console Location
13.1 [11-1] Main
Programming Manual References
13.1 [11-1] Main—RS-232C— Communication—Flow
Feature Manual References
16.1.1 SMDR (Station Message Detail Recording)
Communication—NL Code
Specifies the NL (New Line) code for the printer or personal computer.
770 PC Programming Manual Document Version 2010-11
13.1 [11-1] Main
If the printer or personal computer automatically feeds lines with a carriage return, select CR (Carriage Return).
If not, select CR + LF (Line Feed).
Default
CR + LF
Value Range
CR + LF, CR
Maintenance Console Location
13.1 [11-1] Main
Programming Manual References
None
Feature Manual References
16.1.1 SMDR (Station Message Detail Recording)
Communication—Parity Bit
Selects a parity bit code that indicates what type of parity is used to detect an error in the string of bits composing
a character.
Make an appropriate selection depending on the requirements of the printer or personal computer.
Default
None
Value Range
None, Mark, Space, Even, Odd
Maintenance Console Location
13.1 [11-1] Main
Programming Manual References
None
Feature Manual References
16.1.1 SMDR (Station Message Detail Recording)
Communication—Word Length
Specifies the number of bits in each byte of a character.
When connecting the Maintenance Console to the PBX using an RS-232C cable, assign the following values
to the Serial Interface (RS-232C) port of the PBX:
Word Length: 8 bit, Parity Bit: None, Stop Bit: 1 bit
Document Version 2010-11 PC Programming Manual 771
13.1 [11-1] Main
Notice
Do not use the following combinations:
•Word Length: 8 bit, Parity Bit: Space, Stop Bit: 1 bit
•Word Length: 8 bit, Parity Bit: Mark, Stop Bit: 2 bit
•Word Length: 8 bit, Parity Bit: Space, Stop Bit: 2 bit
Default
8 bit
Value Range
7 bit, 8 bit
Maintenance Console Location
13.1 [11-1] Main
Programming Manual References
None
Feature Manual References
16.1.1 SMDR (Station Message Detail Recording)
Communication—Flow
Enables the hardware flow control.
Default
None
Value Range
None, Hardware
Maintenance Console Location
13.1 [11-1] Main
Programming Manual References
None
Feature Manual References
None
Communication—Stop Bit
Selects a stop bit code that indicates the end of a bit string which composes a character.
Select an appropriate value depending on the requirements of the printer or personal computer.
772 PC Programming Manual Document Version 2010-11
13.1 [11-1] Main
Default
1 bit
Value Range
1 bit, 2 bit
Maintenance Console Location
13.1 [11-1] Main
Programming Manual References
None
Feature Manual References
16.1.1 SMDR (Station Message Detail Recording)
External Modem Command—Automatic Initialization
Specifies the command to automatically initialize an external modem when it is plugged into the Serial Interface
(RS-232C) port of the PBX.
Default
AT&F0Q0E0V1S0=1X0&D0
Value Range
Max. 30 characters
Maintenance Console Location
13.1 [11-1] Main
Programming Manual References
None
Feature Manual References
13.1.6 PC Programming
External Modem Command—Manual Initialization 1–Manual Initialization 5
Specifies the command to manually initialize an external modem. The command specified here is controlled
by PT system programming (External Modem Control [801]).
Default
Not stored.
Value Range
Max. 30 characters
Document Version 2010-11 PC Programming Manual 773
13.1 [11-1] Main
Maintenance Console Location
13.1 [11-1] Main
Programming Manual References
None
Feature Manual References
13.1.6 PC Programming
Maintenance
Local Alarm Display—Extension 1, Extension 2
Specifies the extension numbers of PTs that will be notified by the PBX about local alarms. When the PBX
detects a PBX error, the System Alarm button on the PT turns on red. When this button is pressed, the display
will show the error number, and the button light will turn off automatically.
Default
Not stored.
Value Range
Max. 5 digits (consisting of 0–9)
Maintenance Console Location
13.1 [11-1] Main
Programming Manual References
None
Feature Manual References
10.1.4 Local Alarm Information
Daily Test Start Time—Set
Enables the daily self check of the PBX for local alarm and error log.
Default
Disable
Value Range
Disable, Enable
Maintenance Console Location
13.1 [11-1] Main
774 PC Programming Manual Document Version 2010-11
13.1 [11-1] Main
Programming Manual References
None
Feature Manual References
10.1.4 Local Alarm Information
Daily Test Start Time—Hour
Specifies the hour of the PBX daily self check start time.
Default
0
Value Range
0–23
Maintenance Console Location
13.1 [11-1] Main
Programming Manual References
None
Feature Manual References
10.1.4 Local Alarm Information
Daily Test Start Time—Minute
Specifies the minute of the PBX daily self check start time.
Default
0
Value Range
0–59
Maintenance Console Location
13.1 [11-1] Main
Programming Manual References
None
Feature Manual References
10.1.4 Local Alarm Information
Document Version 2010-11 PC Programming Manual 775
13.1 [11-1] Main
Error Log for Centralized VM—Network MSW Transmission (Counter)
Enables error information to be logged in the PBX if network message waiting information is deleted after
re-transmission is repeated for the number of times specified in Network MSW Data Transmission for
Centralized VM Feature—Data Re-transmission : Repeat Counter in 11.2 [9-2] Network Data
Transmission.
Default
Disable
Value Range
Disable, Enable
Maintenance Console Location
13.1 [11-1] Main
Programming Manual References
11.1 [9-1] TIE Table— Enhanced QSIG Call Information (Activation Key Required)
11.2 [9-2] Network Data Transmission—Network MSW Data Transmission for Centralized VM Feature—
Data Re-transmission : Repeat Counter
Feature Manual References
13.1.14 Private Network Features—Centralized Voice Mail
Error Log for Centralized VM—Network MSW Transmission (Buffer)
Enables error information to be logged in the PBX if the quantity of network message waiting information being
re-transmitted is larger than the transmission buffer.
Default
Disable
Value Range
Disable, Enable
Maintenance Console Location
13.1 [11-1] Main
Programming Manual References
11.1 [9-1] TIE Table— Enhanced QSIG Call Information (Activation Key Required)
Feature Manual References
13.1.14 Private Network Features—Centralized Voice Mail
776 PC Programming Manual Document Version 2010-11
13.1 [11-1] Main
Remote
Remote—Analog Remote (Modem) Floating Extension Number
Specifies the floating extension number for analog remote maintenance. To enable this setting, an RMT card
must be installed, and Remote—Remote Programming on this screen must be enabled.
Default
599
Value Range
Max. 5 digits (consisting of 0–9)
Maintenance Console Location
13.1 [11-1] Main
Programming Manual References
None
Feature Manual References
13.1.6 PC Programming
Remote—Remote Programming
Enables system programming, diagnosis, and data upload from a remote location.
Default
Enable
Value Range
Disable, Enable
Maintenance Console Location
13.1 [11-1] Main
Programming Manual References
None
Feature Manual References
13.1.6 PC Programming
Remote—Password Lock Counter for Remote Programming
Specifies the number of successive incorrect password entries allowed before remote access is locked.
Default
None
Document Version 2010-11 PC Programming Manual 777
13.1 [11-1] Main
Value Range
None, 1–15
Maintenance Console Location
13.1 [11-1] Main
Programming Manual References
None
Feature Manual References
13.1.6 PC Programming
Remote—Remote Maintenance Dial Number (Own Telephone number for
reference)
Specifies the telephone number of the PBX used to access the PBX from a remote location for maintenance
purposes.
This number can be specified by Quick Setup.
Default
Not stored.
Value Range
Max. 32 digits (consisting of 0–9, *, and #)
Maintenance Console Location
13.1 [11-1] Main
Programming Manual References
None
Feature Manual References
14.1.2 Quick Setup
Password
Passwords authorize the user to program the extension and the PBX by a PT or a personal computer.
System Password - PT Programming—Prog ** : User Level
Specifies the user level system password to authorize the PT user to access only the permitted system
programming.
Default
1234
778 PC Programming Manual Document Version 2010-11
13.1 [11-1] Main
Value Range
4–10 digits (consisting of 0–9, *, and #)
Maintenance Console Location
13.1 [11-1] Main
Programming Manual References
None
Feature Manual References
13.1.29 PT Programming
System Password - PT Programming—Prog *# : Administrator Level
Specifies the administrator level system password to authorize the PT user to access all system programming.
Default
1234
Value Range
4–10 digits (consisting of 0–9, *, and #)
Maintenance Console Location
13.1 [11-1] Main
Programming Manual References
None
Feature Manual References
13.1.29 PT Programming
Manager Password - PT Programming—Prog *1
Specifies the manager password to authorize the PT user to access manager programming.
Default
1234
Value Range
4–10 digits (consisting of 0–9, *, and #)
Maintenance Console Location
13.1 [11-1] Main
Document Version 2010-11 PC Programming Manual 779
13.1 [11-1] Main
Programming Manual References
None
Feature Manual References
11.1.1 Manager Features
System Password - PC Programming—User Level
Specifies the system password used to access the Maintenance Console at User Level. This password can
only be set in Interactive mode.
Default
1234
Value Range
4–10 digits (consisting of 0–9)
Maintenance Console Location
13.1 [11-1] Main
Programming Manual References
None
Feature Manual References
13.1.6 PC Programming
System Password - PC Programming—Administrator Level
Specifies the system password used to access the Maintenance Console at Administrator Level. This password
can only be set in Interactive mode.
Default
1234
Value Range
4–10 digits (consisting of 0–9)
Maintenance Console Location
13.1 [11-1] Main
Programming Manual References
None
Feature Manual References
13.1.6 PC Programming
780 PC Programming Manual Document Version 2010-11
13.1 [11-1] Main
System Password - PC Programming—Installer Level
Specifies the system password used to access the Maintenance Console at Installer Level. This password can
only be set in Interactive mode.
Default
1234
Value Range
4–10 digits (consisting of 0–9)
Maintenance Console Location
13.1 [11-1] Main
Programming Manual References
None
Feature Manual References
13.1.6 PC Programming
Document Version 2010-11 PC Programming Manual 781
13.1 [11-1] Main
13.2 [11-2] PT Programming Access
The programming items accessible at User and Administrator level can be specified.
100 programming item numbers are displayed at a time. To display other sets of numbers, click the applicable
tab.
Program Number
Indicates the programming item number (reference only).
Default
Current programming item number
Value Range
000–999
Maintenance Console Location
13.2 [11-2] PT Programming Access
Programming Manual References
None
Feature Manual References
13.1.29 PT Programming
PROG**
Selects whether User Level PT users can access each system programming item.
Default
000–009, 020–099: Enable
010–019, 100–999: Disable
Value Range
Disable, Enable
Maintenance Console Location
13.2 [11-2] PT Programming Access
Programming Manual References
None
Feature Manual References
13.1.29 PT Programming
782 PC Programming Manual Document Version 2010-11
13.2 [11-2] PT Programming Access
13.3 [11-3] Power Failure Transfer (KX-TDA100/
KX-TDA200/KX-TDA600 only)
When the power supply to the PBX fails, power failure transfer (PFT) switches the current connections to
Auxiliary Connections, so that certain SLTs and CO lines can be connected. Auxiliary Connections allow CO
line calls to be made during a power failure. Up to 6 pairs of CO line cards and extension cards that are
physically connected by RJ11 cable can be specified. The conversations through the lines specified here will
be maintained even when the power returns.
For the KX-TDA600, select the shelf for which to set connections from the Shelf list. Note that PFT connections
can only be made within the same shelf.
Trunk Card Slot No.
Specifies the position of the CO line card to be used.
Default
Current slot number
Value Range
None, 1–11
Maintenance Console Location
13.3 [11-3] Power Failure Transfer (KX-TDA100/KX-TDA200/KX-TDA600 only)
Programming Manual References
None
Feature Manual References
13.1.9 Power Failure Transfer
Extension Card Slot No.
Specifies the position of the extension card to be used.
Default
Current slot number
Value Range
None, 1–11
Maintenance Console Location
13.3 [11-3] Power Failure Transfer (KX-TDA100/KX-TDA200/KX-TDA600 only)
Programming Manual References
None
Document Version 2010-11 PC Programming Manual 783
13.3 [11-3] Power Failure Transfer (KX-TDA100/KX-TDA200/KX-TDA600 only)
Feature Manual References
13.1.9 Power Failure Transfer
784 PC Programming Manual Document Version 2010-11
13.3 [11-3] Power Failure Transfer (KX-TDA100/KX-TDA200/KX-TDA600 only)
Section 14
Appendix
Document Version 2010-11 PC Programming Manual 785
14.1 Revision History
14.1.1 KX-TDA600 PLMPR Software File Version 5.0xxx
New Contents
•2.2 Program launcher
Changed Contents
•1.2.1 Installing and Starting the Maintenance Console
•2.1 Introduction
•2.3 File
•2.4 Disconnect
•2.5 Tool
•2.6 Utility
•3.1 [1-1] Slot
•3.27 [1-1] Slot—OPB3 Card Property (KX-TDA100/KX-TDA200/KX-TDA600 only)
•5.12 [3-5-1] Incoming Call Distribution Group—Group Settings
•6.1 [4-1-1] Wired Extension—Extension Settings
•6.9 [4-1-7] Wired Extension—Simplified Voice Message
•6.16 [4-2-5] Portable Station—Simplified Voice Message
•7.3 [5-3-1] Voice Message—DISA System
•7.5 [5-3-3] Voice Message—SVM
•8.6 [6-6] Tenant
•10.6 [8-5] Carrier—Authorization Code for Tenant
14.1.2 KX-TDA100/KX-TDA200 PMPR Software File Version 3.2xxx
New Contents
•2.6.1 Utility—Diagnosis—Network Loopback Test (KX-TDA100/KX-TDA200/KX-TDA600 only)
786 PC Programming Manual Document Version 2010-11
14.1.2 KX-TDA100/KX-TDA200 PMPR Software File Version 3.2xxx
•3.14 [1-1] Slot—Port Property - PRI Port (KX-TDA100/KX-TDA200/KX-TDA600 only)—CO Setting—
Loopback Test started by Network
•4.9 [2-6-2] Numbering Plan—Quick Dial— Use quick dial for rerouting to public CO when TIE line does
not work
•9.5 [7-5] Miscellaneous—TRS Table Mode for Level N (N=2_6)
Changed Contents
•1.1.2 Entering Characters
•2.2.6 Program launcher—Connect—Modem
•2.6.1 Utility—Diagnosis
•2.6.2 Utility—File Transfer PC to PBX (SD Card)
•3.1 [1-1] Slot—Supported Card Types
•3.2 [1-1] Slot—Summary— Card Type
•4.17 [2-9] System Options—Option 4— Private Network—TIE Call by Extension Numbering (Optional
SD Card Required)
•6.1 [4-1-1] Wired Extension—Extension Settings—Extension Number
14.1.3 KX-TDA100/KX-TDA200 PMPR Software File Version 5.0xxx
New Contents
•2.2 Program launcher
Changed Contents
•1.2.1 Installing and Starting the Maintenance Console
•2.1 Introduction
•2.3 File
•2.4 Disconnect
•2.5 Tool
•2.6 Utility
•3.27 [1-1] Slot—OPB3 Card Property (KX-TDA100/KX-TDA200/KX-TDA600 only)
Document Version 2010-11 PC Programming Manual 787
14.1.3 KX-TDA100/KX-TDA200 PMPR Software File Version 5.0xxx
•5.3 [3-1-3] Caller ID Modification
•6.1 [4-1-1] Wired Extension—Extension Settings
•6.5 [4-1-4] Wired Extension—Flexible Button
•6.9 [4-1-7] Wired Extension—Simplified Voice Message
•6.16 [4-2-5] Portable Station—Simplified Voice Message
•7.3 [5-3-1] Voice Message—DISA System
•7.5 [5-3-3] Voice Message—SVM
14.1.4 KX-TDA50 PSMPR Software File Version 4.0xxx
New Contents
•2.2.5 Program launcher—Connect—LAN
•2.6.13 Utility—IP Extension Statistical Information
•3.22 [1-1] Slot—Card Property - IP Extension
•3.23 [1-1] Slot—Card Property - IP Extension—Common Settings
•3.24 [1-1] Slot—Port Property - IP-Extension Port
•4.9 [2-6-2] Numbering Plan—Quick Dial— Use quick dial for rerouting to public CO when TIE line does
not work
•4.20 [2-11-2] Audio Gain—Card
•9.5 [7-5] Miscellaneous—TRS Table Mode for Level N (N=2_6)
Changed Contents
•1.1.2 Entering Characters
•2.2.6 Program launcher—Connect—Modem
•2.6.1 Utility—Diagnosis
•2.6.2 Utility—File Transfer PC to PBX (SD Card)
•3.1 [1-1] Slot—Supported Card Types
•3.2 [1-1] Slot—Summary— Card Type
•3.19 [1-1] Slot—Card Property - IP Gateway
788 PC Programming Manual Document Version 2010-11
14.1.4 KX-TDA50 PSMPR Software File Version 4.0xxx
•4.17 [2-9] System Options—Option 4— Private Network—TIE Call by Extension Numbering (Optional
SD Card Required)
•6.1 [4-1-1] Wired Extension—Extension Settings— Extension Number
•6.5 [4-1-4] Wired Extension—Flexible Button
•6.13 [4-2-3] Portable Station—Flexible Button
•6.18 [4-3] DSS Console
•7.5 [5-3-3] Voice Message—SVM— SVM Cyclic Tone Option—Tone On Maximum Time
•7.5 [5-3-3] Voice Message—SVM— SVM Cyclic Tone Option—Tone Off Maximum Time
•5.4 [3-1-4] Dialing Plan
14.1.5 KX-TDA50 PSMPR Software File Version 5.0xxx
New Contents
•2.2 Program launcher
•3.25 [1-1] Slot—Card Property - SIP Gateway (KX-TDA50 only)— Ringback Tone to Outside Caller
•3.33 [1-1] Slot—Card Property - ESVM Type (KX-TDA50 only)
•12.3 [10-3] DID Table
•12.4 [10-3] DID Table—Automatic Registration
•12.5 [10-3] DID Table—Name Generate
Changed Contents
•1.2.1 Installing and Starting the Maintenance Console
•2.1 Introduction
•2.3 File
•2.4 Disconnect
•2.5 Tool
•2.6 Utility
•5.3 [3-1-3] Caller ID Modification
Document Version 2010-11 PC Programming Manual 789
14.1.5 KX-TDA50 PSMPR Software File Version 5.0xxx
•6.1 [4-1-1] Wired Extension—Extension Settings
•6.5 [4-1-4] Wired Extension—Flexible Button
•6.9 [4-1-7] Wired Extension—Simplified Voice Message
•6.16 [4-2-5] Portable Station—Simplified Voice Message
•7.3 [5-3-1] Voice Message—DISA System
•7.5 [5-3-3] Voice Message—SVM
•12.2 [10-2] DIL Table & Port Settings
14.1.6 KX-TDA50 PSMPR Software File Version 6.0xxx
New Contents
•3.35 [1-3] Option— System Wireless—CO Status Display in Standby (KX-WT125/126 only) (Need
System Restart) (KX-TDA50 only)
•4.4 [2-3] Timers & Counters—Miscellaneous— Conference Group Call—Ring Duration (KX-TDA50 only)
•4.8 [2-6-1] Numbering Plan—Main—Features— Conference Group Call Operation (KX-TDA50 only)
•4.11 [2-7-1] Class of Service—COS Settings—Miscellaneous (KX-TDA50 only)
•4.17 [2-9] System Options—Option 1— PT Operation—One-touch Busy Override by SCO key
(KX-TDA50 only)
•5.26 [3-10] Conference Group (KX-TDA50 only)
•5.27 [3-10] Conference Group—Member List (KX-TDA50 only)
•6.17 [4-2-6] Portable Station—Single CO Appearance (KX-TDA50 only)
Changed Contents
•4.4 [2-3] Timers & Counters—Dial / IRNA / Recall / Tone— Dial—Extension First Digit
•5.3 [3-1-3] Caller ID Modification
→Leading Digits—Area Code (for Local / International Call Data 1–10)
→Leading Digits—Removed Number of Digits
→CLIP— Added Number
790 PC Programming Manual Document Version 2010-11
14.1.6 KX-TDA50 PSMPR Software File Version 6.0xxx
14.2 Feature Programming References
A
Absent Message
•4.8 [2-6-1] Numbering Plan—Main—Features— Absent Message Set / Cancel
•6.1 [4-1-1] Wired Extension—Extension Settings—Option 3— Absent Message
•6.10 [4-2-1] Portable Station—Extension Settings—Option 3— Absent Message
•8.5 [6-5] Absent Message
Feature Manual References
1.1.1 Absent Message
Account Code Entry
•4.8 [2-6-1] Numbering Plan—Main—Features— Account Code Entry
•4.11 [2-7-1] Class of Service—COS Settings—CO & SMDR— Account Code Mode
Feature Manual References
1.1.2 Account Code Entry
ARS (Automatic Route Selection)
•2.5.8 Tool—Import
–ARS - Leading Digit
–ARS - Except Code
–ARS - Routing Plan
•2.5.9 Tool—Export
•4.4 [2-3] Timers & Counters—Dial / IRNA / Recall / Tone— Dial—Extension Inter-digit
•4.17 [2-9] System Options—Option 3— Dial Tone—Dial Tone for ARS
•6.1 [4-1-1] Wired Extension—Extension Settings—Option 1— ARS Itemized Code
•6.10 [4-2-1] Portable Station—Extension Settings—Option 1— ARS Itemized Code
•8.3 [6-3] Verification Code— Itemized Billing Code for ARS
•Section 10 [8] ARS
•13.1 [11-1] Main—SMDR Options— SMDR Options—ARS Dial
Feature Manual References
1.1.3 ARS (Automatic Route Selection)
Automatic Callback Busy (Camp-on)
•4.8 [2-6-1] Numbering Plan—Main—Features— Automatic Callback Busy Cancel
•4.10 [2-6-3] Numbering Plan—B/NA DND Call Feature— Automatic Callback Busy
Feature Manual References
1.1.4 Automatic Callback Busy (Camp-on)
Document Version 2010-11 PC Programming Manual 791
14.2 Feature Programming References
Automatic Extension Release
•4.4 [2-3] Timers & Counters—Dial / IRNA / Recall / Tone
–Dial—Extension First Digit
–Dial—Extension Inter-digit
–Tone Length—Reorder Tone for PT Handset
–Tone Length—Reorder Tone for PT Hands-free
Feature Manual References
1.1.5 Automatic Extension Release
Automatic Fax Transfer
•7.4 [5-3-2] Voice Message—DISA Message—Fax Extension (KX-TDA50 only)
Feature Manual References
1.1.6 Automatic Fax Transfer
Automatic Time Adjustment
•4.1 [2-1] Date & Time/Daylight Saving
•4.17 [2-9] System Options—Option 2— Automatic Time Adjustment—by ISDN & Caller ID (FSK)
Feature Manual References
1.1.7 Automatic Time Adjustment
B
BGM (Background Music)
•4.3 [2-2] Operator & BGM
–BGM and Music on Hold—Music Source of BGM2 (KX-TDA100/KX-TDA200/KX-TDA600 only)
–BGM and Music on Hold—Music Source of BGM (KX-TDA50 only)
•4.8 [2-6-1] Numbering Plan—Main—Features
–External BGM On / Off
–BGM Set / Cancel
•4.19 [2-11-1] Audio Gain—Paging/MOH
–MOH—MOH 1 (Music On Hold 1) (KX-TDA100/KX-TDA200/KX-TDA600 only)
–MOH—MOH 2 (Music On Hold 2) (KX-TDA100/KX-TDA200/KX-TDA600 only)
–MOH—MOH (Music On Hold) (KX-TDA50 only)
•7.2 [5-2] External Pager
Feature Manual References
2.1.1 BGM (Background Music)
792 PC Programming Manual Document Version 2010-11
14.2 Feature Programming References
C
Caller ID
•4.4 [2-3] Timers & Counters
–Caller ID—Waiting to receive
–Caller ID—Visual Caller ID Display
•4.17 [2-9] System Options—Option 4— Private Network—Public Call through Private Network—
Minimum Public Caller ID Digits
•4.18 [2-10] Extension CID Settings
•5.1 [3-1-1] Trunk Group—TRG Settings—Main— Caller ID Modification Table
•6.1 [4-1-1] Wired Extension—Extension Settings—Option 8
–Extension Caller ID
–Incoming Call Wait Timer for Extension Caller ID
•8.1 [6-1] System Speed Dial
•5.3 [3-1-3] Caller ID Modification
Feature Manual References
3.1.1 Caller ID
Call Hold
•4.4 [2-3] Timers & Counters—Dial / IRNA / Recall / Tone
–Recall—Hold Recall
–Recall—Disconnect after Recall
•4.8 [2-6-1] Numbering Plan—Main—Features
–Call Hold / Call Hold Retrieve
–Call Hold Retrieve : Specified with a Holding Extension Number
–Hold Retrieve : Specified with a Held CO Line Number
•4.17 [2-9] System Options
–Option 1— PT Operation—Automatic Hold by ICM / CO / ICD Group key
–Option 1— PT Operation—Hold Key Mode
–Option 5— SLT—SLT Hold Mode
Feature Manual References
3.1.2 Call Hold
Call Log, Incoming
•5.12 [3-5-1] Incoming Call Distribution Group—Group Settings—Group Log / Group FWD— Supervisor
Extension Number
•6.1 [4-1-1] Wired Extension—Extension Settings
–Option 5— Incoming Call Display
–Option 6— Display Lock / SVM Lock
–Option 7— Incoming Call Log Memory
•6.5 [4-1-4] Wired Extension—Flexible Button—Type
•6.10 [4-2-1] Portable Station—Extension Settings
–Option 5— Incoming Call Display
–Option 7— Incoming Call Log Memory
Document Version 2010-11 PC Programming Manual 793
14.2 Feature Programming References
•6.18 [4-3] DSS Console— Type
Feature Manual References
3.1.3 Call Log, Incoming
Call Monitor
•4.10 [2-6-3] Numbering Plan—B/NA DND Call Feature— Call Monitor
•4.11 [2-7-1] Class of Service—COS Settings—CO & SMDR— Call Monitor
•6.1 [4-1-1] Wired Extension—Extension Settings
–Option 2— Data Mode
–Option 3— Executive Override Deny
•6.10 [4-2-1] Portable Station—Extension Settings—Option 3— Executive Override Deny
Feature Manual References
3.1.4 Call Monitor
Call Park
•4.4 [2-3] Timers & Counters
–Recall—Call Park Recall
–Recall—Disconnect after Recall
•4.8 [2-6-1] Numbering Plan—Main—Features— Call Park / Call Park Retrieve
•6.5 [4-1-4] Wired Extension—Flexible Button
–Type
–Parameter Selection (for Call Park)
–Optional Parameter (Ringing Tone Type Number) (for Call Park)
•6.13 [4-2-3] Portable Station—Flexible Button
–Type
–Parameter Selection (for Call Park)
–Optional Parameter (or Ringing Tone Type Number) (for Call Park)
•6.18 [4-3] DSS Console
–Type
–Parameter Selection (for Call Park)
–Optional Parameter (Ringing Tone Type Number) (for Call Park)
Feature Manual References
3.1.5 Call Park
Call Pickup
•4.8 [2-6-1] Numbering Plan—Main—Features
–Group Call Pickup
–Directed Call Pickup
–Call Pickup Deny Set / Cancel
•4.11 [2-7-1] Class of Service—COS Settings—CO & SMDR— Call Pickup by DSS
•4.17 [2-9] System Options—Option 4
794 PC Programming Manual Document Version 2010-11
14.2 Feature Programming References
–DSS Key—DSS key mode for Incoming Call
–DSS Key—Call Pick-up by DSS key for Direct Incoming Call
–DSS Key—Call Pick-up by DSS key for ICD Group Call
•5.7 [3-3] Call Pickup Group
•6.1 [4-1-1] Wired Extension—Extension Settings—Option 3— Call Pickup Deny
•6.10 [4-2-1] Portable Station—Extension Settings—Option 3— Call Pickup Deny
Feature Manual References
3.1.6 Call Pickup
Call Transfer
•4.3 [2-2] Operator & BGM— BGM and Music on Hold—Sound on Transfer
•4.4 [2-3] Timers & Counters—Dial / IRNA / Recall / Tone— Recall—Transfer Recall
•4.11 [2-7-1] Class of Service—COS Settings—CO & SMDR— Transfer to CO
•4.17 [2-9] System Options—Option 4
–DSS Key—Automatic Transfer for Extension Call
–Transfer—Transfer to Busy Extension without BSS Operation
•6.1 [4-1-1] Wired Extension—Extension Settings—Option 1— Transfer Recall Destination
•6.10 [4-2-1] Portable Station—Extension Settings—Option 1— Transfer Recall Destination
Feature Manual References
3.1.8 Call Transfer
Call Waiting Features
•3.10 [1-1] Slot—Card Property - LCO type— Caller ID—Caller ID Signaling
•4.8 [2-6-1] Numbering Plan—Main—Features
–Manual Call Waiting for Extension Call
–Automatic Call Waiting
•4.10 [2-6-3] Numbering Plan—B/NA DND Call Feature
–BSS / OHCA / Whisper OHCA / DND Override
–BSS / OHCA / Whisper OHCA / DND Override-2
•4.17 [2-9] System Options—Option 5— Call Waiting—Automatic Call Waiting for Extension Call
•6.1 [4-1-1] Wired Extension—Extension Settings
–Option 2— Manual C. Waiting for Extension Call
–Option 2— Automatic C. Waiting
–Option 4— Call Waiting Tone Type
•6.10 [4-2-1] Portable Station—Extension Settings
–Option 2— Manual C. Waiting for Extension Call
–Option 2— Automatic C. Waiting
–Option 4— Call Waiting Tone Type
Feature Manual References
3.1.9 CALL WAITING FEATURES
Document Version 2010-11 PC Programming Manual 795
14.2 Feature Programming References
Call Waiting Tone
•4.4 [2-3] Timers & Counters—Miscellaneous—Caller ID—Visual Caller ID Display
•4.10 [2-6-3] Numbering Plan—B/NA DND Call Feature
–BSS / OHCA / Whisper OHCA / DND Override
–BSS / OHCA / Whisper OHCA / DND Override-2
•6.1 [4-1-1] Wired Extension—Extension Settings
–Option 2— Manual C. Waiting for Extension Call
–Option 2— Automatic C. Waiting
–Option 4— Call Waiting Tone Type
•6.10 [4-2-1] Portable Station—Extension Settings
–Option 2— Manual C. Waiting for Extension Call
–Option 2— Automatic C. Waiting
–Option 4— Call Waiting Tone Type
Feature Manual References
3.1.10 Call Waiting Tone
CLI (Calling Line Identification) Distribution
•8.1 [6-1] System Speed Dial
–Name
–CO Line Access Number + Telephone Number
–CLI Destination
•12.2 [10-2] DIL Table & Port Settings—CLI for DIL— CLI Ring for DIL—Day, Lunch, Break, Night
•12.3 [10-3] DID Table— CLI Ring for DID—Day, Lunch, Break, Night
Feature Manual References
3.1.12 CLI (Calling Line Identification) Distribution
CLIP (Calling Line Identification Presentation)
•3.14 [1-1] Slot—Port Property - PRI Port (KX-TDA100/KX-TDA200/KX-TDA600 only)
–CO Setting— Subscriber Number
–Supplementary Service—COLP, CLIR, COLR, CNIP, CONP, CNIR, CONR, CF (Rerouting), CT,
CCBS, E911
•3.17 [1-1] Slot—Port Property - T1 Port (KX-TDA100/KX-TDA200/KX-TDA600 only)— Subscriber
Number
•4.8 [2-6-1] Numbering Plan—Main—Features
–COLR Set / Cancel
–CLIR Set / Cancel
–Switch CLIP of CO Line / Extension (KX-TDA100/KX-TDA200/KX-TDA600 only)
•4.17 [2-9] System Options—Option 4— Send CLIP of CO Caller to ISDN—when Transfer (CLIP of Held
Party)
•5.12 [3-5-1] Incoming Call Distribution Group—Group Settings—Main— CLIP on G-DN Button
(KX-TDA100/KX-TDA200/KX-TDA600 only)
•6.1 [4-1-1] Wired Extension—Extension Settings
–Main— Extension Number
–ISDN CLIP— CLIP ID
796 PC Programming Manual Document Version 2010-11
14.2 Feature Programming References
–ISDN CLIP— CLIP on Extension/CO (KX-TDA100/KX-TDA200/KX-TDA600 only)
–ISDN CLIP— CLIR
–ISDN CLIP— COLR
•6.5 [4-1-4] Wired Extension—Flexible Button— Type
•6.10 [4-2-1] Portable Station—Extension Settings
–ISDN CLIP— CLIP ID
–ISDN CLIP— CLIP on Extension/CO (KX-TDA100/KX-TDA200/KX-TDA600 only)
–ISDN CLIP— CLIR
–ISDN CLIP— COLR
•6.13 [4-2-3] Portable Station—Flexible Button—Type
•6.18 [4-3] DSS Console— Type
Feature Manual References
3.1.13 CLIP (Calling Line Identification Presentation)
CO Line Access
•3.5 [1-1] Slot—Port Property - Extension Port— Connection
•3.11 [1-1] Slot—Port Property - LCO Port— Connection
•3.14 [1-1] Slot—Port Property - PRI Port (KX-TDA100/KX-TDA200/KX-TDA600 only)— Connection
•3.17 [1-1] Slot—Port Property - T1 Port (KX-TDA100/KX-TDA200/KX-TDA600 only)— Connection
•3.20 [1-1] Slot—Port Property - IP-GW Port— Connection
•3.24 [1-1] Slot—Port Property - IP-Extension Port— Connection
•4.8 [2-6-1] Numbering Plan—Main—Features
–Idle Line Access (Local Access)
–Trunk Group Access
–Single CO Line Access
•4.12 [2-7-2] Class of Service—External Call Block
•5.1 [3-1-1] Trunk Group—TRG Settings—Main— Line Hunting Order
•5.2 [3-1-2] Trunk Group—Local Access Priority
•6.5 [4-1-4] Wired Extension—Flexible Button
–Type
–Parameter Selection (for Single CO)
–Parameter Selection (for Group CO)
•6.13 [4-2-3] Portable Station—Flexible Button
–Type
–Parameter Selection (for Single CO)
–Parameter Selection (for Group CO)
•6.18 [4-3] DSS Console
–Type
–Parameter Selection (for Single CO)
–Parameter Selection (for Group CO)
•10.1 [8-1] System Setting— ARS Mode
•12.1 [10-1] CO Line Settings— CO Name
Feature Manual References
3.1.14 CO Line Access
Document Version 2010-11 PC Programming Manual 797
14.2 Feature Programming References
CO Line Call Limitation
•4.11 [2-7-1] Class of Service—COS Settings—CO & SMDR— Extension-CO Line Call Duration Limit
•4.17 [2-9] System Options—Option 2— Extension - CO Call Limitation—For Incoming Call
•5.1 [3-1-1] Trunk Group—TRG Settings—Main
–CO-CO Duration Time (*60s)
–Extension-CO Duration Time (*60s)
•9.5 [7-5] Miscellaneous—Dial Digits Limitation After Answering—Dial Digits
Feature Manual References
3.1.15 CO Line Call Limitation
Conference
•4.4 [2-3] Timers & Counters—DISA / Door / Reminder / U. Conf
–Unattended Conference—Recall Start Timer
–Unattended Conference—Warning Tone Start Timer
–Unattended Conference—Disconnect Timer
•4.11 [2-7-1] Class of Service—COS Settings—CO & SMDR— Transfer to CO
•4.17 [2-9] System Options—Option 3
–Confirmation Tone—Tone 4-1 : Start Conference
–Confirmation Tone—Tone 4-2 : Finish Conference
–Echo Cancel—Conference
•6.5 [4-1-4] Wired Extension—Flexible Button—Type
•6.13 [4-2-3] Portable Station—Flexible Button—Type
•6.18 [4-3] DSS Console— Type
Feature Manual References
3.1.16 Conference
Conference Group Call (KX-TDA50 only)
•4.4 [2-3] Timers & Counters—Miscellaneous— Conference Group Call—Ring Duration (KX-TDA50 only)
•4.8 [2-6-1] Numbering Plan—Main—Features— Conference Group Call Operation (KX-TDA50 only)
•4.11 [2-7-1] Class of Service—COS Settings—Miscellaneous (KX-TDA50 only)
•5.26 [3-10] Conference Group (KX-TDA50 only)
•5.27 [3-10] Conference Group—Member List (KX-TDA50 only)
Feature Manual References
3.1.17 Conference Group Call (KX-TDA50 only)
Confirmation Tone
•4.17 [2-9] System Options—Option 3
–Confirmation Tone—Tone 1 : Called by Voice
–Confirmation Tone—Tone 2 : Paged / Automatic Answer
–Confirmation Tone—Tone 3-1 : Start Talking after Making Call / Call from Doorphone
–Confirmation Tone—Tone 3-2 : Start Talking after Answering Call
798 PC Programming Manual Document Version 2010-11
14.2 Feature Programming References
–Confirmation Tone—Tone 4-1 : Start Conference
–Confirmation Tone—Tone 4-2 : Finish Conference
–Confirmation Tone—Tone 5 : Hold
Feature Manual References
3.1.18 Confirmation Tone
COS (Class of Service)
•4.11 [2-7-1] Class of Service—COS Settings
•6.1 [4-1-1] Wired Extension—Extension Settings—Main— COS
•6.10 [4-2-1] Portable Station—Extension Settings—Main— COS
Feature Manual References
3.1.20 COS (Class of Service)
CPC (Calling Party Control) Signal Detection
•3.11 [1-1] Slot—Port Property - LCO Port— CPC Signal Detection Time—Outgoing, Incoming
•3.17 [1-1] Slot—Port Property - T1 Port (KX-TDA100/KX-TDA200/KX-TDA600 only)
–CPC Signal Detection (DID)—Outgoing, Incoming
–CPC Signal Detection (LCO/GCO)—Outgoing, Incoming
Feature Manual References
3.1.21 CPC (Calling Party Control) Signal Detection
CTI (Computer Telephony Integration)
•3.30 [1-1] Slot—Card Property - CTILINK (KX-TDA100/KX-TDA200/KX-TDA600 only)
•4.8 [2-6-1] Numbering Plan—Main—Features— Dial Information (CTI)
•4.17 [2-9] System Options—Option 6 (CTI)
Feature Manual References
3.1.22 CTI (Computer Telephony Integration)
D
Data Line Security
•4.8 [2-6-1] Numbering Plan—Main—Features— Data Line Security Set / Cancel
•6.1 [4-1-1] Wired Extension—Extension Settings—Option 2— Data Mode
Feature Manual References
4.1.1 Data Line Security
Document Version 2010-11 PC Programming Manual 799
14.2 Feature Programming References
Dial Mode Selection
•3.11 [1-1] Slot—Port Property - LCO Port
–Dialing Mode
–DTMF Width
–Pulse Speed
•3.17 [1-1] Slot—Port Property - T1 Port (KX-TDA100/KX-TDA200/KX-TDA600 only)
–CO Dial Mode
–DTMF Width
–CO Pulse Speed
Feature Manual References
4.1.2 Dial Mode Selection
Dial Tone
•4.17 [2-9] System Options—Option 3
–Dial Tone—Distinctive Dial Tone
–Dial Tone—Dial Tone for Extension
–Dial Tone—Dial Tone for ARS
Feature Manual References
4.1.3 Dial Tone
Dial Tone Transfer
•6.5 [4-1-4] Wired Extension—Flexible Button
–Type
–Parameter Selection (for TRS Level Change)
•6.13 [4-2-3] Portable Station—Flexible Button
–Type
–Parameter Selection (for TRS Level Change)
•6.18 [4-3] DSS Console
–Type
–Parameter Selection (for TRS Level Change)
Feature Manual References
4.1.4 Dial Tone Transfer
DID (Direct Inward Dialing)
•4.4 [2-3] Timers & Counters—Miscellaneous—Incoming Call Inter-digit Timer—DID
•12.2 [10-2] DIL Table & Port Settings—DID/TIE
–Distribution Method
–DID/TIE—Remove Digit
–DID/TIE—Additional Dial
•12.3 [10-3] DID Table
800 PC Programming Manual Document Version 2010-11
14.2 Feature Programming References
Feature Manual References
4.1.5 DID (Direct Inward Dialing)
DIL (Direct In Line)
•12.2 [10-2] DIL Table & Port Settings—DIL
–DIL Destination—Day, Lunch, Break, Night
–Tenant Number
–VM Trunk Group No.
Feature Manual References
4.1.6 DIL (Direct In Line)
DISA (Direct Inward System Access)
•4.4 [2-3] Timers & Counters—DISA / Door / Reminder / U. Conf
–DISA—Delayed Answer Timer
–DISA—Mute & OGM Start Timer after answering
–DISA—No Dial Intercept Timer
–DISA—2nd Dial Timer for AA
–DISA—Intercept Timer—Day, Lunch, Break, Night
–DISA—Disconnect Timer after Intercept
–DISA—CO-to-CO Call Prolong Counter
–DISA—CO-to-CO Call Prolong Time
–DISA—Progress Tone Continuation Time before Recording Message
–DISA—Reorder Tone Duration
•4.4 [2-3] Timers & Counters—Miscellaneous— Extension PIN—Lock Counter
•4.11 [2-7-1] Class of Service—COS Settings—Optional Device & Other Extensions— Accept the Call
from DISA
•5.1 [3-1-1] Trunk Group—TRG Settings—Tone Detection
–DISA Tone Detection—Silence
–DISA Tone Detection—Continuous
–DISA Tone Detection—Cyclic
•6.1 [4-1-1] Wired Extension—Extension Settings—Intercept Destination— Intercept Destination—When
called party does not answer—Day, Lunch, Break, Night
•6.10 [4-2-1] Portable Station—Extension Settings—Intercept Destination— Intercept Destination—
When called party does not answer—Day, Lunch, Break, Night
•7.3 [5-3-1] Voice Message—DISA System
•7.4 [5-3-2] Voice Message—DISA Message
•8.1 [6-1] System Speed Dial
–CO Line Access Number + Telephone Number
–CLI Destination
•12.2 [10-2] DIL Table & Port Settings
–DIL— DIL Destination—Day, Lunch, Break, Night
–CLI for DIL— CLI Ring for DIL—Day, Lunch, Break, Night
Feature Manual References
4.1.7 DISA (Direct Inward System Access)
Document Version 2010-11 PC Programming Manual 801
14.2 Feature Programming References
Display Information
•4.17 [2-9] System Options—Option 5— PT Feature Access—No. 1–8
•6.1 [4-1-1] Wired Extension—Extension Settings—Option 5
–Display Language
–Incoming Call Display
–Automatic LCD Switch when Start Talking
•6.10 [4-2-1] Portable Station—Extension Settings—Option 5
–Display Language
–Incoming Call Display
–Automatic LCD Switch when Start Talking
•12.1 [10-1] CO Line Settings— CO Name
Feature Manual References
4.1.8 Display Information
DND (Do Not Disturb)
•4.4 [2-3] Timers & Counters—Dial / IRNA / Recall / Tone— Tone Length—Busy Tone / DND Tone
•4.10 [2-6-3] Numbering Plan—B/NA DND Call Feature
–BSS / OHCA / Whisper OHCA / DND Override
–BSS / OHCA / Whisper OHCA / DND Override-2
•4.11 [2-7-1] Class of Service—COS Settings—Extension Feature—DND Override
•6.3 [4-1-2] Wired Extension—FWD/DND
–Call from CO—DND Status Availability
–Call from Extension—DND Status Availability
Feature Manual References
4.1.9 DND (Do Not Disturb)
Door Open
•4.4 [2-3] Timers & Counters—DISA / Door / Reminder / U. Conf— Doorphone—Open Duration
•4.8 [2-6-1] Numbering Plan—Main—Features— Door Open
•4.11 [2-7-1] Class of Service—COS Settings—Optional Device & Other Extensions— Door Unlock
Feature Manual References
4.1.10 Door Open
Doorphone Call
•4.4 [2-3] Timers & Counters—DISA / Door / Reminder / U. Conf
–Doorphone—Call Ring Duration
–Doorphone—Call Duration
•4.8 [2-6-1] Numbering Plan—Main—Features— Doorphone Call
•4.11 [2-7-1] Class of Service—COS Settings—TRS— TRS Level—Day, Lunch, Break, Night
•4.15 [2-8-2] Ring Tone Patterns—Call from Doorphone
•4.17 [2-9] System Options—Option 3— Confirmation Tone—Tone 1 : Called by Voice
802 PC Programming Manual Document Version 2010-11
14.2 Feature Programming References
•7.1 [5-1] Doorphone
Feature Manual References
4.1.11 Doorphone Call
E
EFA (External Feature Access)
•3.11 [1-1] Slot—Port Property - LCO Port— Flash Time
•3.17 [1-1] Slot—Port Property - T1 Port (KX-TDA100/KX-TDA200/KX-TDA600 only)— Flash Time
•4.8 [2-6-1] Numbering Plan—Main—Features— External Feature Access
•6.1 [4-1-1] Wired Extension—Extension Settings—Option 7— Flash Mode during CO Conversation
•6.5 [4-1-4] Wired Extension—Flexible Button—Type
•6.10 [4-2-1] Portable Station—Extension Settings—Option 7— Flash Mode during CO Conversation
•6.13 [4-2-3] Portable Station—Flexible Button—Type
•6.18 [4-3] DSS Console— Type
•9.5 [7-5] Miscellaneous—TRS Check after EFA
Feature Manual References
5.1.1 EFA (External Feature Access)
Emergency Call
•9.4 [7-4] Emergency Dial
Feature Manual References
5.1.2 Emergency Call
Executive Busy Override
•4.8 [2-6-1] Numbering Plan—Main—Features— Executive Override Deny Set / Cancel
•4.10 [2-6-3] Numbering Plan—B/NA DND Call Feature— Executive Busy Override
•4.11 [2-7-1] Class of Service—COS Settings
–CO & SMDR— Executive Busy Override
–Programming & Manager—Executive Busy Override Deny
•4.17 [2-9] System Options—Option 1— PT Operation—One-touch Busy Override by SCO key
(KX-TDA50 only)
•6.1 [4-1-1] Wired Extension—Extension Settings—Option 3— Executive Override Deny
•6.10 [4-2-1] Portable Station—Extension Settings—Option 3— Executive Override Deny
Feature Manual References
5.1.3 Executive Busy Override
Extension Dial Lock
•4.8 [2-6-1] Numbering Plan—Main—Features
Document Version 2010-11 PC Programming Manual 803
14.2 Feature Programming References
–Extension Dial Lock Set / Cancel
–Remote Extension Dial Lock Off
–Remote Extension Dial Lock On
•4.11 [2-7-1] Class of Service—COS Settings—TRS— TRS Level on Extension Lock
Feature Manual References
5.1.4 Extension Dial Lock
Extension Feature Clear
•4.8 [2-6-1] Numbering Plan—Main—Features— Extension Feature Clear
•4.17 [2-9] System Options—Option 2
–Extension Clear—Call Waiting
–Extension Clear—Fwd/DND
–Extension Clear—Hot Line (Pickup Dial)
Feature Manual References
5.1.5 Extension Feature Clear
Extension PIN (Personal Identification Number)
•4.4 [2-3] Timers & Counters—Miscellaneous—Extension PIN—Lock Counter
•4.8 [2-6-1] Numbering Plan—Main—Features— Extension PIN Set / Cancel
•4.17 [2-9] System Options—Option 1— PT LCD—Password / PIN Display
•6.1 [4-1-1] Wired Extension—Extension Settings—Main— Extension PIN
•6.10 [4-2-1] Portable Station—Extension Settings—Main— Extension PIN
Feature Manual References
5.1.6 Extension PIN (Personal Identification Number)
Extension Port Configuration
•3.5 [1-1] Slot—Port Property - Extension Port
•6.18 [4-3] DSS Console— Pair Extension
Feature Manual References
5.1.7 Extension Port Configuration
External Relay
•3.31 [1-1] Slot—Card Property - DPH type (KX-TDA50 only)— For Output (EIO)—Device Type
•4.8 [2-6-1] Numbering Plan—Main—Features— External Relay Access
•4.11 [2-7-1] Class of Service—COS Settings—Optional Device & Other Extensions— External Relay
Access
•7.6 [5-4] External Relay
804 PC Programming Manual Document Version 2010-11
14.2 Feature Programming References
Feature Manual References
5.1.8 External Relay
External Sensor
•3.27 [1-1] Slot—OPB3 Card Property (KX-TDA100/KX-TDA200/KX-TDA600 only)
–Input Signal Decision Time
–Input Signal Detection Reopening Time
•3.31 [1-1] Slot—Card Property - DPH type (KX-TDA50 only)
–For Sensor (EIO)—Input Signal Decision Time
–For Sensor (EIO)—Input Signal Detection Reopening Time
•4.4 [2-3] Timers & Counters—Miscellaneous—External Sensor—Ring Duration
•4.16 [2-8-3] Ring Tone Patterns—Call from Others— External Sensor—Ring Tone Pattern Plan 1–8
•7.7 [5-5] External Sensor
Feature Manual References
5.1.9 External Sensor
F
Flash/Recall/Terminate
•3.11 [1-1] Slot—Port Property - LCO Port— Disconnect Time
•3.17 [1-1] Slot—Port Property - T1 Port (KX-TDA100/KX-TDA200/KX-TDA600 only)— Disconnect Time
•6.1 [4-1-1] Wired Extension—Extension Settings—Option 7— Flash Mode during CO Conversation
•6.5 [4-1-4] Wired Extension—Flexible Button—Type
•6.10 [4-2-1] Portable Station—Extension Settings—Option 7— Flash Mode during CO Conversation
•6.13 [4-2-3] Portable Station—Flexible Button—Type
•6.18 [4-3] DSS Console— Type
Feature Manual References
6.1.2 Flash/Recall/Terminate
Flexible Buttons
•4.4 [2-3] Timers & Counters—Miscellaneous—PT Display—PT Last Display Duration in Idle Mode
•6.5 [4-1-4] Wired Extension—Flexible Button
•6.6 [4-1-4] Wired Extension—Flexible Button—Flexible button data copy
•6.7 [4-1-5] Wired Extension—PF Button
•6.13 [4-2-3] Portable Station—Flexible Button
•6.18 [4-3] DSS Console
Feature Manual References
6.1.3 Flexible Buttons
Document Version 2010-11 PC Programming Manual 805
14.2 Feature Programming References
Flexible Numbering/Fixed Numbering
•4.8 [2-6-1] Numbering Plan—Main
–Extension
–Features
–Other PBX Extension
•4.9 [2-6-2] Numbering Plan—Quick Dial
•4.10 [2-6-3] Numbering Plan—B/NA DND Call Feature
Feature Manual References
6.1.4 Flexible Numbering/Fixed Numbering
Floating Extension
•4.8 [2-6-1] Numbering Plan—Main—Extension
•5.12 [3-5-1] Incoming Call Distribution Group—Group Settings—Main
–Floating Extension Number
–Group Name
•5.19 [3-7-2] VM(DPT) Group—Unit Settings— Floating Extension No.
•5.22 [3-8-2] VM(DTMF) Group—Group Settings— Floating Ext. No.
•5.24 [3-9] PS Ring Group— Floating Extension Number
•7.2 [5-2] External Pager— Page Number 1, Page Number 2—Floating Extension Number
•7.4 [5-3-2] Voice Message—DISA Message—Floating Extension Number
•13.1 [11-1] Main—Remote— Remote—Analog Remote (Modem) Floating Extension Number
Feature Manual References
6.1.5 Floating Extension
FWD (Call Forwarding)
•4.8 [2-6-1] Numbering Plan—Main—Features— FWD No Answer Timer Set
•4.11 [2-7-1] Class of Service—COS Settings
–CO & SMDR— Call Forward to CO
–Programming & Manager—Group Forward Set
–Optional Device & Other Extensions—Remote Operation by Other Extension
•5.1 [3-1-1] Trunk Group—TRG Settings—Main
–CO-CO Duration Time (*60s)
–Extension-CO Duration Time (*60s)
•5.12 [3-5-1] Incoming Call Distribution Group—Group Settings—Group Log / Group FWD
•6.3 [4-1-2] Wired Extension—FWD/DND
•6.12 [4-2-2] Portable Station—FWD/DND
Feature Manual References
6.1.6 FWD (Call Forwarding)
FWD/DND Button, Group FWD Button
•4.8 [2-6-1] Numbering Plan—Main—Features
806 PC Programming Manual Document Version 2010-11
14.2 Feature Programming References
–FWD/DND Set / Cancel: Call from CO & Extension
–FWD/DND Set / Cancel: Call from CO
–FWD/DND Set / Cancel: Call from Extension
–Group FWD Set / Cancel: Call from CO & Extension
–Group FWD Set / Cancel: Call from CO
–Group FWD Set / Cancel: Call from Extension
•4.17 [2-9] System Options—Option 1
–PT Fwd / DND—Fwd LED
–PT Fwd / DND—DND LED
–PT Fwd / DND—Fwd/DND key mode when Idle
•6.1 [4-1-1] Wired Extension—Extension Settings—FWD / DND Reference
•6.5 [4-1-4] Wired Extension—Flexible Button
–Type
–Ext. No. / Floating Ext. No. (for Group FWD (Both))
–Ext. No. / Floating Ext. No. (for Group FWD (External))
–Ext. No. / Floating Ext. No. (for Group FWD (Internal))
•6.10 [4-2-1] Portable Station—Extension Settings—FWD / DND Reference
•6.13 [4-2-3] Portable Station—Flexible Button
–Type
–Ext. No. / Floating Ext. No. (for Group Fwd (Both))
–Ext. No. / Floating Ext. No. (for Group Fwd (External))
–Ext. No. / Floating Ext. No. (for Group Fwd (Internal))
•6.18 [4-3] DSS Console
–Type
–Ext. No. / Floating Ext. No. (for Group Fwd (Both))
–Ext. No. / Floating Ext. No. (for Group Fwd (External))
–Ext. No. / Floating Ext. No. (for Group Fwd (Internal))
Feature Manual References
6.1.7 FWD/DND Button, Group FWD Button
G
Group Features
•Section 5 [3] Group
Feature Manual References
7.1.1 GROUP FEATURES
H
Hands-free Answerback
•4.4 [2-3] Timers & Counters—Dial / IRNA / Recall / Tone— Tone Length—Reorder Tone for PT
Hands-free
•4.17 [2-9] System Options
–Option 1— PT Operation—Automatic Answer for Call from CO after
–Option 3— Confirmation Tone—Tone 2 : Paged / Automatic Answer
Document Version 2010-11 PC Programming Manual 807
14.2 Feature Programming References
–Option 4— Transfer—Automatic Answer for Transferred Call
•6.1 [4-1-1] Wired Extension—Extension Settings
–Option 5— Automatic Answer for CO Call
–Option 6— Forced Automatic Answer
Feature Manual References
8.1.1 Hands-free Answerback
Hands-free Operation
•4.4 [2-3] Timers & Counters—Dial / IRNA / Recall / Tone— Tone Length—Reorder Tone for PT
Hands-free
•6.1 [4-1-1] Wired Extension—Extension Settings—Option 4— LCS Answer Mode
Feature Manual References
8.1.2 Hands-free Operation
Headset Operation
•3.5 [1-1] Slot—Port Property - Extension Port— Headset OFF/ON
•3.24 [1-1] Slot—Port Property - IP-Extension Port—IP-PT Registration and De-registration—Headset
OFF/ON
•6.5 [4-1-4] Wired Extension—Flexible Button—Type
•6.18 [4-3] DSS Console— Type
Feature Manual References
8.1.3 Headset Operation
Host PBX Access Code (Access Code to the Telephone Company from a Host
PBX)
•5.1 [3-1-1] Trunk Group—TRG Settings—Host PBX Access Code
•13.1 [11-1] Main—SMDR Options— SMDR Options—ARS Dial
Feature Manual References
8.1.5 Host PBX Access Code (Access Code to the Telephone Company from a Host PBX)
Hot Line
•4.4 [2-3] Timers & Counters—Dial / IRNA / Recall / Tone— Dial—Hot Line (Pickup Dial) Start
•4.8 [2-6-1] Numbering Plan—Main—Features— Hot Line (Pickup Dial) Program Set / Cancel
•6.1 [4-1-1] Wired Extension—Extension Settings—Option 2
–Pickup Dial Set
–Pickup Dial Number
•6.10 [4-2-1] Portable Station—Extension Settings—Option 2
–Pickup Dial Set
808 PC Programming Manual Document Version 2010-11
14.2 Feature Programming References
–Pickup Dial No.
Feature Manual References
8.1.6 Hot Line
I
ICD Group Features
•4.11 [2-7-1] Class of Service—COS Settings
–CO & SMDR— Call Forward to CO
–Programming & Manager—Group Forward Set
•5.12 [3-5-1] Incoming Call Distribution Group—Group Settings
–Main
–Overflow Queuing Busy
–Overflow No Answer
–Miscellaneous
•5.15 [3-5-3] Incoming Call Distribution Group—Miscellaneous
•5.13 [3-5-1] Incoming Call Distribution Group—Group Settings—Member List
Feature Manual References
9.1.1 ICD GROUP FEATURES
ICD Group Features—Group Call Distribution
•5.1 [3-1-1] Trunk Group—TRG Settings—Main— Line Hunting Order
•5.12 [3-5-1] Incoming Call Distribution Group—Group Settings
–Main— Distribution Method
–Main— Call Waiting Distribution
–Miscellaneous—Extension No Answer Redirection Time
–Miscellaneous—Maximum No. of Busy Extension
•5.15 [3-5-3] Incoming Call Distribution Group—Miscellaneous
–Options—Wrap-up Timer based on
–Options—Longest Idle Distribution (Activation Key Required)
•5.13 [3-5-1] Incoming Call Distribution Group—Group Settings—Member List— Delayed Ring
•6.1 [4-1-1] Wired Extension—Extension Settings—Option 8— Wrap-up Timer
•6.10 [4-2-1] Portable Station—Extension Settings—Option 8— Wrap-up Timer
Feature Manual References
9.1.2 ICD Group Features—Group Call Distribution
ICD Group Features—Log-in/Log-out
•4.8 [2-6-1] Numbering Plan—Main—Features
–Log-in / Log-out
–Not Ready (Manual Wrap-up) Mode On / Off
•5.12 [3-5-1] Incoming Call Distribution Group—Group Settings—Miscellaneous
–No. of Unanswered Calls for Automatic Log-out
Document Version 2010-11 PC Programming Manual 809
14.2 Feature Programming References
–Last Extension Log-out
•5.15 [3-5-3] Incoming Call Distribution Group—Miscellaneous— Options—Wrap-up Timer based on
•5.13 [3-5-1] Incoming Call Distribution Group—Group Settings—Member List— Wrap-up Timer
•6.1 [4-1-1] Wired Extension—Extension Settings—Option 8— Wrap-up Timer
•6.5 [4-1-4] Wired Extension—Flexible Button
–Type
–Parameter Selection (for Log-in/Log-out)
–Ext. No. / Floating Ext. No. (for Log-in/Log-out)
•6.10 [4-2-1] Portable Station—Extension Settings—Option 8— Wrap-up Timer
•6.13 [4-2-3] Portable Station—Flexible Button
–Type
–Parameter Selection (for Log-in/Log-out)
–Ext. No. / Floating Ext. No. (for Log-in/Log-out)
•6.18 [4-3] DSS Console
–Type
–Parameter Selection (for Log-in/Log-out)
–Ext. No. / Floating Ext. No. (for Log-in/Log-out)
•13.1 [11-1] Main—SMDR— Print Information—Log-in / Log-out
Feature Manual References
9.1.3 ICD Group Features—Log-in/Log-out
ICD Group Features—Outside Destinations
•3.34 [1-2] Portable Station—PS Registration and De-registration
•4.11 [2-7-1] Class of Service—COS Settings—CO & SMDR— Call Forward to CO
•4.17 [2-9] System Options—Option 4— Send CLIP of CO Caller to ISDN—when ICD Group with Cellular
Phone (KX-TDA100/KX-TDA200/KX-TDA600 only)
•5.12 [3-5-1] Incoming Call Distribution Group—Group Settings—Main
–Floating Extension Number
–Distribution Method
•5.13 [3-5-1] Incoming Call Distribution Group—Group Settings—Member List
–Extension Number
–Delayed Ring
•6.12 [4-2-2] Portable Station—FWD/DND
–Call from CO—FWD Mode
–Call from CO—FWD Destination
–Call from Extension—FWD Mode
–Call from Extension—FWD Destination
Feature Manual References
9.1.4 ICD Group Features—Outside Destinations
ICD Group Features—Overflow
•5.12 [3-5-1] Incoming Call Distribution Group—Group Settings
–Overflow Queuing Busy
–Overflow No Answer
810 PC Programming Manual Document Version 2010-11
14.2 Feature Programming References
•5.14 [3-5-2] Incoming Call Distribution Group—Queuing Time Table
Feature Manual References
9.1.5 ICD Group Features—Overflow
ICD Group Features—Queuing
•4.8 [2-6-1] Numbering Plan—Main—Features— Incoming Call Queue Monitor
•4.17 [2-9] System Options—Option 4— Transfer—Transfer to Busy Extension without BSS Operation
•5.12 [3-5-1] Incoming Call Distribution Group—Group Settings
–Overflow Queuing Busy
–Overflow No Answer
–Queuing Time Table
–Miscellaneous— Extension No Answer Redirection Time
–Miscellaneous—Maximum No. of Busy Extension
•5.14 [3-5-2] Incoming Call Distribution Group—Queuing Time Table
•5.18 [3-7-1] VM(DPT) Group—System Settings— Call Waiting on VM Group
•5.21 [3-8-1] VM(DTMF) Group—System Settings— Others—Call Waiting on VM Group
•6.5 [4-1-4] Wired Extension—Flexible Button
–Type
–Ext. No. / Floating Ext. No. (for Hurry-up)
•6.13 [4-2-3] Portable Station—Flexible Button
–Type
–Ext. No. / Floating Ext. No. (for Hurry-up)
•6.18 [4-3] DSS Console
–Type
–Ext. No. / Floating Ext. No. (for Hurry-up)
Feature Manual References
9.1.6 ICD Group Features—Queuing
ICD Group Features—Supervisory
•4.8 [2-6-1] Numbering Plan—Main—Features— Incoming Call Queue Monitor
•5.12 [3-5-1] Incoming Call Distribution Group—Group Settings—Miscellaneous— Supervisor Extension
Number
Feature Manual References
9.1.7 ICD Group Features—Supervisory
ICD Group Features—VIP Call
•5.12 [3-5-1] Incoming Call Distribution Group—Group Settings—Miscellaneous— VIP Call Mode
Feature Manual References
9.1.8 ICD Group Features—VIP Call
Document Version 2010-11 PC Programming Manual 811
14.2 Feature Programming References
Idle Extension Hunting
•5.16 [3-6] Extension Hunting Group
•5.17 [3-6] Extension Hunting Group—Member List
Feature Manual References
9.1.9 Idle Extension Hunting
Incoming Call Features
•3.17 [1-1] Slot—Port Property - T1 Port (KX-TDA100/KX-TDA200/KX-TDA600 only)— Trunk Property
•12.2 [10-2] DIL Table & Port Settings—DIL— Trunk Property
Feature Manual References
9.1.10 INCOMING CALL FEATURES
Intercept Routing
•4.4 [2-3] Timers & Counters—Dial / IRNA / Recall / Tone— Intercept Routing No Answer (IRNA)—Day,
Lunch, Break, Night
•4.4 [2-3] Timers & Counters—DISA / Door / Reminder / U. Conf— DISA—Intercept Timer—Day, Lunch,
Break, Night
•5.12 [3-5-1] Incoming Call Distribution Group—Group Settings—Overflow No Answer— Time out &
Manual Queue Redirection—Destination-Day, Lunch, Break, Night
•6.1 [4-1-1] Wired Extension—Extension Settings
–Intercept Destination
–Intercept No Answer Time
•6.10 [4-2-1] Portable Station—Extension Settings
–Intercept Destination
–Intercept No Answer Time
•12.6 [10-4] Miscellaneous
Feature Manual References
9.1.11 Intercept Routing
Intercept Routing—No Destination
•4.3 [2-2] Operator & BGM— PBX Operator—Day, Lunch, Break, Night
•12.6 [10-4] Miscellaneous—Intercept—Routing to Operator - No Destination (Destination is not
programmed.)
Feature Manual References
9.1.12 Intercept Routing—No Destination
Intercom Call
•4.10 [2-6-3] Numbering Plan—B/NA DND Call Feature— Alternate Calling - Ring / Voice
812 PC Programming Manual Document Version 2010-11
14.2 Feature Programming References
•6.1 [4-1-1] Wired Extension—Extension Settings
–Main— Extension Number
–Main— Extension Name
–Option 3— Intercom Call by Voice
•6.10 [4-2-1] Portable Station—Extension Settings—Main
–Extension Number
–Extension Name
Feature Manual References
9.1.13 Intercom Call
Internal Call Block
•4.13 [2-7-3] Class of Service—Internal Call Block—COS Number of the Extension Which Receive the
Call from Other Extension 1–64
•5.12 [3-5-1] Incoming Call Distribution Group—Group Settings—Main— COS
•6.1 [4-1-1] Wired Extension—Extension Settings—Main— COS
•6.10 [4-2-1] Portable Station—Extension Settings—Main— COS
•7.1 [5-1] Doorphone— COS
•7.6 [5-4] External Relay— COS Number
Feature Manual References
9.1.14 Internal Call Block
ISDN (Integrated Services Digital Network) Features
•3.13 [1-1] Slot—Card Property - PRI type (KX-TDA100/KX-TDA200/KX-TDA600 only)
•3.14 [1-1] Slot—Port Property - PRI Port (KX-TDA100/KX-TDA200/KX-TDA600 only)
•3.15 [1-1] Slot—Port Property - PRI Port—Connection Command (KX-TDA100/KX-TDA200/KX-TDA600
only)
•4.4 [2-3] Timers & Counters—Dial / IRNA / Recall / Tone— Dial—Extension Inter-digit
•4.17 [2-9] System Options—Option 2— End of Dial Plan—[#] as End of Dial for en Bloc mode
(KX-TDA100/KX-TDA200/KX-TDA600 only)
•6.1 [4-1-1] Wired Extension—Extension Settings
–Main— Extension Number
–Option 7— ISDN Bearer (KX-TDA100/KX-TDA200/KX-TDA600 only)
•6.10 [4-2-1] Portable Station—Extension Settings—Option 7— ISDN Bearer
•5.5 [3-1-4] Dialing Plan—Auto Assign
Feature Manual References
9.1.16 ISDN (INTEGRATED SERVICES DIGITAL NETWORK) FEATURES
IP Proprietary Telephone (IP-PT)
•3.22 [1-1] Slot—Card Property - IP Extension
•3.24 [1-1] Slot—Port Property - IP-Extension Port
Document Version 2010-11 PC Programming Manual 813
14.2 Feature Programming References
Feature Manual References
9.1.15 IP-PT (IP Proprietary Telephone)
L
LED Indication
•4.17 [2-9] System Options
–Option 1— PT Fwd / DND—Fwd LED
–Option 1— PT Fwd / DND—DND LED
–Option 4— DSS Key—DSS key mode for Incoming Call
Feature Manual References
10.1.1 LED Indication
Line Preference—Incoming
•6.1 [4-1-1] Wired Extension—Extension Settings—Option 4— Incoming Preferred Line
•6.10 [4-2-1] Portable Station—Extension Settings—Option 4— Incoming Preferred Line
Feature Manual References
10.1.2 Line Preference—Incoming
Line Preference—Outgoing
•4.12 [2-7-2] Class of Service—External Call Block
•5.2 [3-1-2] Trunk Group—Local Access Priority
•6.1 [4-1-1] Wired Extension—Extension Settings—Option 4— Outgoing Preferred Line
•6.10 [4-2-1] Portable Station—Extension Settings—Option 4— Outgoing Preferred Line
Feature Manual References
10.1.3 Line Preference—Outgoing
Local Alarm Information
•2.6.7 Utility—Message File Transfer PBX to PC
•6.5 [4-1-4] Wired Extension—Flexible Button—Type
•6.13 [4-2-3] Portable Station—Flexible Button—Type
•6.18 [4-3] DSS Console— Type
•13.1 [11-1] Main
–SMDR— Print Information—Error Log
–Maintenance—Local Alarm Display—Extension 1, Extension 2
–Maintenance—Daily Test Start Time—Set
–Maintenance—Daily Test Start Time—Hour
–Maintenance—Daily Test Start Time—Minute
814 PC Programming Manual Document Version 2010-11
14.2 Feature Programming References
Feature Manual References
10.1.4 Local Alarm Information
M
Manager Features
•4.11 [2-7-1] Class of Service—COS Settings—Programming & Manager— Manager
•13.1 [11-1] Main—Password—Manager Password - PT Programming—Prog *1
Feature Manual References
11.1.1 Manager Features
Message Waiting
•3.4 [1-1] Slot—Card Property - Extension Type— SLT Power Supply (KX-TDA100/KX-TDA200/
KX-TDA600 only)
•4.8 [2-6-1] Numbering Plan—Main—Features— Message Waiting Set / Cancel / Call Back
•4.10 [2-6-3] Numbering Plan—B/NA DND Call Feature— Message Waiting Set
•4.17 [2-9] System Options
–Option 3— Dial Tone—Distinctive Dial Tone
–Option 5— SLT—Message Waiting Lamp Pattern (KX-TDA100/KX-TDA200/KX-TDA600 only)
•5.21 [3-8-1] VM(DTMF) Group—System Settings— VM DTMF Command—Listening Message
•6.1 [4-1-1] Wired Extension—Extension Settings—Option 8— SLT MW Mode (KX-TDA100/KX-TDA200/
KX-TDA600 only)
•6.5 [4-1-4] Wired Extension—Flexible Button—Type
•6.13 [4-2-3] Portable Station—Flexible Button— Type
•6.18 [4-3] DSS Console— Type
Feature Manual References
11.1.3 Message Waiting
Music on Hold
•4.3 [2-2] Operator & BGM
–BGM and Music on Hold—Music Source of BGM2 (KX-TDA100/KX-TDA200/KX-TDA600 only)
–BGM and Music on Hold—Music Source of BGM (KX-TDA50 only)
–BGM and Music on Hold—Music on Hold
•4.19 [2-11-1] Audio Gain—Paging/MOH
–MOH—MOH 1 (Music On Hold 1) (KX-TDA100/KX-TDA200/KX-TDA600 only)
–MOH—MOH 2 (Music On Hold 2) (KX-TDA100/KX-TDA200/KX-TDA600 only)
–MOH—MOH (Music On Hold) (KX-TDA50 only)
Feature Manual References
11.1.4 Music on Hold
Document Version 2010-11 PC Programming Manual 815
14.2 Feature Programming References
O
Off-hook Monitor
•4.17 [2-9] System Options—Option 1— PT Operation—Off Hook Monitor for KX-T74xx/T76xx
Feature Manual References
12.1.1 Off-hook Monitor
OGM (Outgoing Message)
•2.6.6 Utility—Message File Transfer PC to PBX
•2.6.7 Utility—Message File Transfer PBX to PC
•4.4 [2-3] Timers & Counters—DISA / Door / Reminder / U. Conf— DISA—Progress Tone Continuation
Time before Recording Message
•4.8 [2-6-1] Numbering Plan—Main—Features— OGM Record / Clear / Playback
•5.14 [3-5-2] Incoming Call Distribution Group—Queuing Time Table— Queuing Sequence—Sequence
01–16
•7.4 [5-3-2] Voice Message—DISA Message—Floating Extension Number
•5.13 [3-5-1] Incoming Call Distribution Group—Group Settings—Member List— Delayed Ring
Feature Manual References
12.1.2 OGM (Outgoing Message)
OHCA (Off-hook Call Announcement)
•4.10 [2-6-3] Numbering Plan—B/NA DND Call Feature
–BSS / OHCA / Whisper OHCA / DND Override
–BSS / OHCA / Whisper OHCA / DND Override-2
•4.11 [2-7-1] Class of Service—COS Settings—CO & SMDR— OHCA / Whisper OHCA
Feature Manual References
12.1.3 OHCA (Off-hook Call Announcement)
One-touch Dialing
•6.1 [4-1-1] Wired Extension—Extension Settings—Option 6— Flexible Button Programming Mode
•6.5 [4-1-4] Wired Extension—Flexible Button
–Type
–Dial (for One-touch)
•6.10 [4-2-1] Portable Station—Extension Settings—Option 6— Flexible Button Programming Mode
•6.13 [4-2-3] Portable Station—Flexible Button
–Type
–Dial (for One-touch)
•6.18 [4-3] DSS Console
–Type
–Dial (for One-touch)
816 PC Programming Manual Document Version 2010-11
14.2 Feature Programming References
Feature Manual References
12.1.4 One-touch Dialing
Operator Features
•4.3 [2-2] Operator & BGM— PBX Operator—Day, Lunch, Break, Night
•8.6 [6-6] Tenant— Operator (Extension Number)
Feature Manual References
12.1.5 Operator Features
P
Paging
•4.8 [2-6-1] Numbering Plan—Main—Features
–Group Paging
–Group Paging Answer
–Paging Deny Set / Cancel
•4.17 [2-9] System Options
–Option 1— PT Fwd / DND—Paging to DND Extension
–Option 3— Confirmation Tone—Tone 2 : Paged / Automatic Answer
•4.19 [2-11-1] Audio Gain—Paging/MOH
–Paging—EPG 1 (External Pager 1) (KX-TDA100/KX-TDA200/KX-TDA600 only)
–Paging—EPG 2 (External Pager 2) (KX-TDA100/KX-TDA200/KX-TDA600 only)
–Paging—EPG (External Pager) (KX-TDA50 only)
–Paging—Paging Level from PT Speaker
•5.9 [3-4] Paging Group
•5.10 [3-4] Paging Group—All Setting
•5.11 [3-4] Paging Group—External Pager
•6.1 [4-1-1] Wired Extension—Extension Settings—Option 6— Paging Deny
Feature Manual References
13.1.1 Paging
Paralleled Telephone
•3.4 [1-1] Slot—Card Property - Extension Type— APT/SLT Parallel Ring
•3.5 [1-1] Slot—Port Property - Extension Port
–XDP Mode
–Parallel Telephone Ringing
•4.8 [2-6-1] Numbering Plan—Main—Features— Parallel Telephone (Ring) Mode Set / Cancel
Feature Manual References
13.1.2 Paralleled Telephone
Document Version 2010-11 PC Programming Manual 817
14.2 Feature Programming References
Password Security
•2.1.2 Access Levels
•13.1 [11-1] Main—Password
Feature Manual References
13.1.3 Password Security
Pause Insertion
•3.11 [1-1] Slot—Port Property - LCO Port— Pause Time
•3.17 [1-1] Slot—Port Property - T1 Port (KX-TDA100/KX-TDA200/KX-TDA600 only)— Pause Time
•4.4 [2-3] Timers & Counters—Miscellaneous—During Conversation—Pause Signal Time
•8.4 [6-4] Second Dial Tone
Feature Manual References
13.1.4 Pause Insertion
PC Console/PC Phone
•3.5 [1-1] Slot—Port Property - Extension Port
–DPT Type—Type
–DPT Type—Location No.
Feature Manual References
13.1.5 PC Console/PC Phone
PC Programming
•13.1 [11-1] Main
–Password— System Password - PC Programming—User Level
–Password— System Password - PC Programming—Administrator Level
–Password— System Password - PC Programming—Installer Level
Feature Manual References
13.1.6 PC Programming
PDN (Primary Directory Number)/SDN (Secondary Directory Number) Extension
•4.11 [2-7-1] Class of Service—COS Settings—PDN/SDN (KX-TDA100/KX-TDA200/KX-TDA600 only)
•4.17 [2-9] System Options—Option 4— System Wireless—SDN Delayed Ringing with LCD
(KX-TDA100/KX-TDA200/KX-TDA600 only)
•6.5 [4-1-4] Wired Extension—Flexible Button
–Type
–Parameter Selection (for SDN) (KX-TDA100/KX-TDA200/KX-TDA600 only)
–Ext. No. / Floating Ext. No. (for SDN) (KX-TDA100/KX-TDA200/KX-TDA600 only)
818 PC Programming Manual Document Version 2010-11
14.2 Feature Programming References
–Optional Parameter (Ringing Tone Type Number) (for Loop CO, Single CO, Group CO, ICD Group,
SDN)
•6.13 [4-2-3] Portable Station—Flexible Button
–Type
–Parameter Selection (for SDN) (KX-TDA100/KX-TDA200/KX-TDA600 only)
–Ext. No. / Floating Ext. No. (for SDN) (KX-TDA100/KX-TDA200/KX-TDA600 only)
•6.18 [4-3] DSS Console
–Type
–Parameter Selection (for SDN) (KX-TDA100/KX-TDA200/KX-TDA600 only)
–Ext. No. / Floating Ext. No. (for SDN) (KX-TDA100/KX-TDA200/KX-TDA600 only)
–Optional Parameter (Ringing Tone Type Number) (for Loop CO, Single CO, Group CO, ICD Group,
SDN)
Feature Manual References
13.1.7 PDN (Primary Directory Number)/SDN (Secondary Directory Number) Extension
Power Failure Transfer
•13.3 [11-3] Power Failure Transfer (KX-TDA100/KX-TDA200/KX-TDA600 only)
Feature Manual References
13.1.9 Power Failure Transfer
Printing Message
•4.8 [2-6-1] Numbering Plan—Main—Features— Printing Message
•8.2 [6-2] Hotel—Main— SMDR for External Hotel Application 2—Printing Message 1–8
Feature Manual References
13.1.11 Printing Message
Privacy Release
•4.17 [2-9] System Options—Option 1— PT Operation—Privacy Release by SCO key
•6.5 [4-1-4] Wired Extension—Flexible Button—Type
•6.13 [4-2-3] Portable Station—Flexible Button—Type
•6.18 [4-3] DSS Console— Type
Feature Manual References
13.1.12 Privacy Release
Private Network Features
•3.14 [1-1] Slot—Port Property - PRI Port (KX-TDA100/KX-TDA200/KX-TDA600 only)—Network
Numbering Plan—Trunk Property
•3.17 [1-1] Slot—Port Property - T1 Port (KX-TDA100/KX-TDA200/KX-TDA600 only)— Trunk Property
•4.4 [2-3] Timers & Counters—Miscellaneous—Incoming Call Inter-digit Timer—TIE
Document Version 2010-11 PC Programming Manual 819
14.2 Feature Programming References
•4.8 [2-6-1] Numbering Plan—Main—Features
–Idle Line Access (Local Access)
–Trunk Group Access
–TIE Line Access
•4.8 [2-6-1] Numbering Plan—Main—Other PBX Extension
•4.9 [2-6-2] Numbering Plan—Quick Dial— Use quick dial for rerouting to public CO when TIE line does
not work
•4.11 [2-7-1] Class of Service—COS Settings—TRS— TRS Level—Day, Lunch, Break, Night
•4.17 [2-9] System Options—Option 4— Private Network—TIE Call by Extension Numbering (Optional
SD Card Required)
•5.1 [3-1-1] Trunk Group—TRG Settings—Main— COS
•11.1 [9-1] TIE Table
•12.2 [10-2] DIL Table & Port Settings
–DIL— Trunk Property
–DIL— DIL Destination—Day, Lunch, Break, Night
–DID/TIE
•12.3 [10-3] DID Table— DID Destination—Day, Lunch, Break, Night
Feature Manual References
13.1.13 PRIVATE NETWORK FEATURES
Private Network Features—Centralized Voice Mail
•3.35 [1-3] Option— New Card Installation—ISDN Standard Mode for PRI23 Card (KX-TDA100/
KX-TDA200/KX-TDA600 only)
•11.1 [9-1] TIE Table—Centralized VM
•11.2 [9-2] Network Data Transmission
–Network MSW Data Transmission for Centralized VM Feature—Data Re-transmission : Repeat
Counter
–Network MSW Data Transmission for Centralized VM Feature—Data Re-transmission : Repeat
Timer
•13.1 [11-1] Main—Maintenance
–Error Log for Centralized VM—Network MSW Transmission (Counter)
–Error Log for Centralized VM—Network MSW Transmission (Buffer)
Feature Manual References
13.1.14 Private Network Features—Centralized Voice Mail
Private Network Features—NDSS (Network Direct Station Selection)
•3.14 [1-1] Slot—Port Property - PRI Port (KX-TDA100/KX-TDA200/KX-TDA600 only)—CO Setting—
Networking Data Transfer
•4.11 [2-7-1] Class of Service—COS Settings—Programming & Manager— Manager
•6.5 [4-1-4] Wired Extension—Flexible Button
–Type
–Dial (for NDSS)
•6.8 [4-1-6] Wired Extension—NDSS Link Data - Send
•6.13 [4-2-3] Portable Station—Flexible Button
–Type
820 PC Programming Manual Document Version 2010-11
14.2 Feature Programming References
–Dial (for NDSS)
•6.15 [4-2-4] Portable Station—NDSS Link Data - Send
•6.18 [4-3] DSS Console
–Type
–Dial (for NDSS)
•11.2 [9-2] Network Data Transmission
•11.3 [9-3] Network Operator (VoIP)
•11.4 [9-4] NDSS Key Table
Feature Manual References
13.1.15 Private Network Features—NDSS (Network Direct Station Selection)
Private Network Features—Network ICD Group
•4.17 [2-9] System Options—Option 4— Send CLIP of CO Caller to ISDN—when ICD Group with Cellular
Phone (KX-TDA100/KX-TDA200/KX-TDA600 only)
Feature Manual References
13.1.16 Private Network Features—Network ICD Group
Private Network Features—PS Roaming by Network ICD Group
•4.4 [2-3] Timers & Counters—Miscellaneous— System Wireless—PS Out of Range Timer
•4.17 [2-9] System Options—Option 4— System Wireless—Out of Range Registration
Feature Manual References
13.1.17 Private Network Features—PS Roaming by Network ICD Group
Private Network Features—QSIG
•3.14 [1-1] Slot—Port Property - PRI Port (KX-TDA100/KX-TDA200/KX-TDA600 only)—Supplementary
Service— COLP, CLIR, COLR, CNIP, CONP, CNIR, CONR, CF (Rerouting), CT, CCBS, E911
•4.8 [2-6-1] Numbering Plan—Main—Features
–COLR Set / Cancel
–CLIR Set / Cancel
•6.1 [4-1-1] Wired Extension—Extension Settings—Main
–Extension Number
–Extension Name
•6.10 [4-2-1] Portable Station—Extension Settings—Main
–Extension Number
–Extension Name
Feature Manual References
13.1.21 Private Network Features—QSIG—CLIP/COLP (Calling/Connected Line Identification Presentation)
and CNIP/CONP (Calling/Connected Name Identification Presentation)
Document Version 2010-11 PC Programming Manual 821
14.2 Feature Programming References
Private Network Features—QSIG—CCBS (Completion of Calls to Busy
Subscriber)
•3.14 [1-1] Slot—Port Property - PRI Port (KX-TDA100/KX-TDA200/KX-TDA600 only)—Supplementary
Service
–COLP, CLIR, COLR, CNIP, CONP, CNIR, CONR, CF (Rerouting), CT, CCBS, E911
•3.35 [1-3] Option— New Card Installation—ISDN Standard Mode for PRI23 Card (KX-TDA100/
KX-TDA200/KX-TDA600 only)
Feature Manual References
13.1.19 Private Network Features—QSIG—CCBS (Completion of Calls to Busy Subscriber)
Private Network Feature—QSIG—CF (Call Forwarding)
•3.14 [1-1] Slot—Port Property - PRI Port (KX-TDA100/KX-TDA200/KX-TDA600 only)—Supplementary
Service— COLP, CLIR, COLR, CNIP, CONP, CNIR, CONR, CF (Rerouting), CT, CCBS, E911
Feature Manual References
13.1.20 Private Network Features—QSIG—CF (Call Forwarding)
Private Network Features—QSIG—CLIP/CLOP (Calling/Connected Line
Identification Presentation) and CNIP/CONP (Calling/Connected Name
Identification Presentation)
•3.14 [1-1] Slot—Port Property - PRI Port (KX-TDA100/KX-TDA200/KX-TDA600 only)—Supplementary
Service— COLP, CLIR, COLR, CNIP, CONP, CNIR, CONR, CF (Rerouting), CT, CCBS, E911
•4.8 [2-6-1] Numbering Plan—Main—Features
–COLR Set / Cancel
–CLIR Set / Cancel
•6.1 [4-1-1] Wired Extension—Extension Settings—Main
–Extension Number
–Extension Name
•6.10 [4-2-1] Portable Station—Extension Settings—Main
–Extension Number
–Extension Name
Feature Manual References
13.1.19 Private Network Features—QSIG—CCBS (Completion of Calls to Busy Subscriber)
Private Network Features—QSIG—CT (Call Transfer)
•3.14 [1-1] Slot—Port Property - PRI Port (KX-TDA100/KX-TDA200/KX-TDA600 only)—Supplementary
Service— COLP, CLIR, COLR, CNIP, CONP, CNIR, CONR, CF (Rerouting), CT, CCBS, E911
•3.19 [1-1] Slot—Card Property - IP Gateway— QSIG-CT
Feature Manual References
13.1.22 Private Network Features—QSIG—CT (Call Transfer)
822 PC Programming Manual Document Version 2010-11
14.2 Feature Programming References
Private Network Features—VoIP (Voice over Internet Protocol) Network
•3.23 [1-1] Slot—Card Property - IP Extension—Common Settings—Gateway Address
Feature Manual References
13.1.23 Private Network Features—VoIP (Voice over Internet Protocol)
PS (Portable Station)
•3.34 [1-2] Portable Station
Feature Manual References
13.1.24 PS (Portable Station)
PS—CO Status Display (KX-WT125/KX-WT126 only) (KX-TDA50 only)
•3.35 [1-3] Option— System Wireless—CO Status Display in Standby (KX-WT125/126 only) (Need
System Restart) (KX-TDA50 only)
•6.17 [4-2-6] Portable Station—Single CO Appearance (KX-TDA50 only)
Feature Manual References
13.1.25 PS—CO Status Display (KX-WT125/KX-WT126 only) (KX-TDA50 only)
PS—Directory
•6.1 [4-1-1] Wired Extension—Extension Settings—Main— Extension Name
•6.10 [4-2-1] Portable Station—Extension Settings—Main— Extension Name
•8.1 [6-1] System Speed Dial
–Name
–CO Line Access Number + Telephone Number
Feature Manual References
13.1.26 PS—Directory
PS—Ring Group
•5.12 [3-5-1] Incoming Call Distribution Group—Group Settings—Main— Distribution Method
•5.24 [3-9] PS Ring Group
•5.25 [3-9] PS Ring Group—Member List
Feature Manual References
13.1.28 PS—Ring Group
PT Programming
•4.11 [2-7-1] Class of Service—COS Settings—Programming & Manager— Programming Mode Level
Document Version 2010-11 PC Programming Manual 823
14.2 Feature Programming References
•13.1 [11-1] Main—Password
–System Password - PT Programming—Prog ** : User Level
–System Password - PT Programming—Prog *# : Administrator Level
–Manager Password - PT Programming—Prog *1
Feature Manual References
13.1.29 PT Programming
Q
Quick Dialing
•4.9 [2-6-2] Numbering Plan—Quick Dial
Feature Manual References
14.1.1 Quick Dialing
R
Redial, Last Number
•4.4 [2-3] Timers & Counters—Dial / IRNA / Recall / Tone
–Automatic Redial—Repeat Counter (KX-TDA100/KX-TDA200/KX-TDA600 only)
–Automatic Redial—Redial Call Ring Duration (KX-TDA100/KX-TDA200/KX-TDA600 only)
–Automatic Redial—Analog CO Mute / Busy Detection Timer (KX-TDA100/KX-TDA200/KX-TDA600
only)
•4.8 [2-6-1] Numbering Plan—Main—Features— Redial
•4.17 [2-9] System Options—Option 2
–Redial—Automatic Redial when No Answer (ISDN) (KX-TDA100/KX-TDA200/KX-TDA600 only)
–Redial—Save Dial After Connection to Redial Memory
–Redial—Call Log by Redial key
•6.1 [4-1-1] Wired Extension—Extension Settings—Option 7— Outgoing Call Log Memory
•6.10 [4-2-1] Portable Station—Extension Settings—Option 7— Outgoing Call Log Memory
Feature Manual References
15.1.1 Redial, Last Number
Ring Tone Pattern Selection
•4.14 [2-8-1] Ring Tone Patterns—Call from CO— Ring Tone Pattern Plan 1–8
•4.15 [2-8-2] Ring Tone Patterns—Call from Doorphone—Ring Tone Pattern Plan 1–8
•4.16 [2-8-3] Ring Tone Patterns—Call from Others— Extension—Ring Tone Pattern Plan 1–8
•4.17 [2-9] System Options—Option 1— PT Operation—PT Ring Off Setting
•6.1 [4-1-1] Wired Extension—Extension Settings—Option 1— Ring Pattern Table
•6.10 [4-2-1] Portable Station—Extension Settings—Option 1— Ring Pattern Table
824 PC Programming Manual Document Version 2010-11
14.2 Feature Programming References
Feature Manual References
15.1.2 Ring Tone Pattern Selection
Room Status Control
•6.5 [4-1-4] Wired Extension—Flexible Button— Type
•6.18 [4-3] DSS Console— Type
•8.2 [6-2] Hotel—Main— Hotel Operator—Extension 1–4
Feature Manual References
15.1.3 Room Status Control
S
SMDR (Station Message Detail Recording)
•4.4 [2-3] Timers & Counters—Dial / IRNA / Recall / Tone— Dial—Analog CO Call Duration Start
•4.11 [2-7-1] Class of Service—COS Settings—CO & SMDR— Outgoing CO Call Printout (SMDR)
•8.2 [6-2] Hotel
–Main— SMDR for External Hotel Application 2—Printing Message 1–8
•13.1 [11-1] Main
–SMDR
–SMDR Options
–RS-232C— Communication—Baud Rate
–RS-232C— Communication—NL Code
–RS-232C— Communication—Parity Bit
–RS-232C— Communication—Word Length
–RS-232C— Communication—Flow
–RS-232C— Communication—Stop Bit
Feature Manual References
16.1.1 SMDR (Station Message Detail Recording)
Special Carrier Access Code
•9.3 [7-3] Special Carrier
Feature Manual References
16.1.2 Special Carrier Access Code
Speed Dialing—Personal
•4.8 [2-6-1] Numbering Plan—Main—Features
–System Speed Dialing / Personal Speed Dialing
–Personal Speed Dialing - Programming
•6.4 [4-1-3] Wired Extension—Speed Dial
Document Version 2010-11 PC Programming Manual 825
14.2 Feature Programming References
Feature Manual References
16.1.3 Speed Dialing, Personal
Speed Dialing—System
•4.8 [2-6-1] Numbering Plan—Main—Features— System Speed Dialing / Personal Speed Dialing
•4.11 [2-7-1] Class of Service—COS Settings—TRS— TRS Level for System Speed Dialing
•8.1 [6-1] System Speed Dial
•8.6 [6-6] Tenant— System Speed Dial
Feature Manual References
16.1.4 Speed Dialing, System
SVM (Simplified Voice Message)
•2.5.4 Tool—Simplified Voice Message—Delete All Recording
•2.5.5 Tool—Simplified Voice Message—Check Current Usage
•4.4 [2-3] Timers & Counters—Miscellaneous
–SVM—Recording Time
–SVM—Dial Tone Continuous Time
•4.8 [2-6-1] Numbering Plan—Main—Features— Simplified Voice Message Access
•5.1 [3-1-1] Trunk Group—TRG Settings—Tone Detection
–Simplified Voice Message Tone Detection—Silence
–Simplified Voice Message Tone Detection—Continuous
–Simplified Voice Message Tone Detection—Cyclic
•6.1 [4-1-1] Wired Extension—Extension Settings—Option 6— Display Lock / SVM Lock
•6.9 [4-1-7] Wired Extension—Simplified Voice Message
•6.10 [4-2-1] Portable Station—Extension Settings—Option 6— SVM Lock
•6.16 [4-2-5] Portable Station—Simplified Voice Message
•7.3 [5-3-1] Voice Message—DISA System
–Recording Mode
–Remote Access
•7.5 [5-3-3] Voice Message—SVM
Feature Manual References
16.1.5 SVM (Simplified Voice Message)
T
T1 Line Service
•3.17 [1-1] Slot—Port Property - T1 Port (KX-TDA100/KX-TDA200/KX-TDA600 only)
•3.18 [1-1] Slot—Port Property - T1 Port—Connection Command (KX-TDA100/KX-TDA200/KX-TDA600
only)
Feature Manual References
17.1.1 T1 Line Service
826 PC Programming Manual Document Version 2010-11
14.2 Feature Programming References
TAFAS (Trunk Answer From Any Station)
•4.8 [2-6-1] Numbering Plan—Main—Features— TAFAS Answer
•4.19 [2-11-1] Audio Gain—Paging/MOH
–Paging—EPG 1 (External Pager 1) (KX-TDA100/KX-TDA200/KX-TDA600 only)
–Paging—EPG 2 (External Pager 2) (KX-TDA100/KX-TDA200/KX-TDA600 only)
–Paging—EPG (External Pager) (KX-TDA50 only)
•7.2 [5-2] External Pager
Feature Manual References
17.1.2 TAFAS (Trunk Answer From Any Station)
Tenant Service
•4.3 [2-2] Operator & BGM
–PBX Operator—Day, Lunch, Break, Night
–BGM and Music on Hold—Music on Hold
•4.5 [2-4] Week Table
•4.7 [2-5] Holiday Table
•4.13 [2-7-3] Class of Service—Internal Call Block
•5.6 [3-2] Extension Group
•5.12 [3-5-1] Incoming Call Distribution Group—Group Settings—Main— Tenant Number
•6.1 [4-1-1] Wired Extension—Extension Settings—Main— Extension Group
•6.10 [4-2-1] Portable Station—Extension Settings—Main— Extension Group
•7.1 [5-1] Doorphone— Tenant Number
•7.7 [5-5] External Sensor— Tenant No.
•8.6 [6-6] Tenant
•Section 10 [8] ARS
•10.6 [8-5] Carrier—Authorization Code for Tenant
•12.2 [10-2] DIL Table & Port Settings—DIL— Tenant Number
•12.3 [10-3] DID Table— Tenant Number
Feature Manual References
17.1.3 Tenant Service
Timed Reminder
•4.4 [2-3] Timers & Counters—DISA / Door / Reminder / U. Conf
–Timed Reminder—Repeat Counter
–Timed Reminder—Interval Time
–Timed Reminder—Alarm Ringing Duration
•4.8 [2-6-1] Numbering Plan—Main—Features
–Remote Timed Reminder (Remote Wakeup Call)
–Timed Reminder Set / Cancel
•4.16 [2-8-3] Ring Tone Patterns—Call from Others— Timed Reminder—Ring Tone Pattern Plan 1–8
•4.17 [2-9] System Options—Option 1— PT LCD—Time Display
•7.3 [5-3-1] Voice Message—DISA System— Timed Reminder Message—Day, Lunch, Break, Night
•8.2 [6-2] Hotel—Main— SMDR for External Hotel Application 1—Timed Reminder (Wake-up Call)
Document Version 2010-11 PC Programming Manual 827
14.2 Feature Programming References
Feature Manual References
17.1.4 Timed Reminder
Time Service
•4.5 [2-4] Week Table
•4.7 [2-5] Holiday Table
•4.8 [2-6-1] Numbering Plan—Main—Features— Time Service (Day / Lunch / Break / Night) Switch
•4.11 [2-7-1] Class of Service—COS Settings—Programming & Manager— Time Service Switch
•6.5 [4-1-4] Wired Extension—Flexible Button
–Type
–Parameter Selection (for Time Service)
–Parameter Selection (for Time Service - Automatic/Manual)
–Optional Parameter (Ringing Tone Type Number) (for Time Service)
•6.13 [4-2-3] Portable Station—Flexible Button
–Type
–Parameter Selection (for Time Service)
–Parameter Selection (for Time Service - Automatic/Manual)
–Optional Parameter (or Ringing Tone Type Number) (for Time Service)
•6.18 [4-3] DSS Console
–Type
–Parameter Selection (for Time Service)
–Parameter Selection (for Time Service - Automatic/Manual)
–Optional Parameter (Ringing Tone Type Number) (for Time Service)
Feature Manual References
17.1.5 Time Service
TRS (Toll Restriction)
•4.11 [2-7-1] Class of Service—COS Settings—TRS
–TRS Level—Day, Lunch, Break, Night
–TRS Level for System Speed Dialing
•6.1 [4-1-1] Wired Extension—Extension Settings—Main— COS
•6.5 [4-1-4] Wired Extension—Flexible Button
–Type
–Parameter Selection (for TRS Level Change)
•6.10 [4-2-1] Portable Station—Extension Settings—Main— COS
•6.13 [4-2-3] Portable Station—Flexible Button
–Type
–Parameter Selection (for TRS Level Change)
•6.18 [4-3] DSS Console
–Type
–Parameter Selection (for TRS Level Change)
•9.1 [7-1] Denied Code
•9.2 [7-2] Exception Code
•9.3 [7-3] Special Carrier
•9.5 [7-5] Miscellaneous
828 PC Programming Manual Document Version 2010-11
14.2 Feature Programming References
Feature Manual References
17.1.6 TRS (Toll Restriction)
U
Upgrading the Software
•3.3 [1-1] Slot—Card Property - MPR— Memory Version:
Feature Manual References
18.1.1 Upgrading the Software
V
Verification Code Entry
•4.4 [2-3] Timers & Counters—Miscellaneous—Extension PIN—Lock Counter
•4.8 [2-6-1] Numbering Plan—Main—Features— User Remote Operation / Walking COS / Verification
Code
•6.1 [4-1-1] Wired Extension—Extension Settings
–Option 1— ARS Itemized Code
•6.10 [4-2-1] Portable Station—Extension Settings
–Option 1— ARS Itemized Code
•8.3 [6-3] Verification Code
Feature Manual References
19.1.1 Verification Code Entry
Virtual PS
•3.34 [1-2] Portable Station— Registration
Feature Manual References
19.1.2 Virtual PS
Voice Mail (VM) Group
•3.5 [1-1] Slot—Port Property - Extension Port— DPT Type—Type
•3.5 [1-1] Slot—Port Property - Extension Port— DPT Type—VM Unit No.
•3.5 [1-1] Slot—Port Property - Extension Port— DPT Type—VM Port No.
•5.18 [3-7-1] VM(DPT) Group—System Settings
•5.19 [3-7-2] VM(DPT) Group—Unit Settings
•5.21 [3-8-1] VM(DTMF) Group—System Settings
•5.22 [3-8-2] VM(DTMF) Group—Group Settings
Feature Manual References
19.1.3 Voice Mail (VM) Group
Document Version 2010-11 PC Programming Manual 829
14.2 Feature Programming References
Voice Mail DPT (Digital) Integration
•4.4 [2-3] Timers & Counters—Dial / IRNA / Recall / Tone— Recall—Transfer Recall
•5.18 [3-7-1] VM(DPT) Group—System Settings
•5.19 [3-7-2] VM(DPT) Group—Unit Settings
•6.1 [4-1-1] Wired Extension—Extension Settings—Option 4
–LCS Recording Mode
–LCS Answer Mode
•6.5 [4-1-4] Wired Extension—Flexible Button
–Type
–Ext. No. / Floating Ext. No. (for Two-way Record)
–Ext. No. / Floating Ext. No. (for Two-way Transfer)
–Ext. No. / Floating Ext. No. (for Voice Mail Transfer)
–Ext No. of Mailbox (for Two-way Transfer)
•6.10 [4-2-1] Portable Station—Extension Settings—Option 4— LCS Recording Mode
•6.13 [4-2-3] Portable Station—Flexible Button
–Type
–Ext. No. / Floating Ext. No. (for Two-way Record)
–Ext. No. / Floating Ext. No. (for Two-way Transfer)
–Ext. No. / Floating Ext. No. (for Voice Mail Transfer)
–Ext No. of Mailbox (for Two-way Transfer)
•6.18 [4-3] DSS Console
–Type
–Ext. No. / Floating Ext. No. (for Two-way Record)
–Ext. No. / Floating Ext. No. (for Two-way Transfer)
–Ext. No. / Floating Ext. No. (for Voice Mail Transfer)
–Ext No. of Mailbox (for Two-way Transfer)
•7.1 [5-1] Doorphone— VM Trunk Group Number
•12.2 [10-2] DIL Table & Port Settings—DIL
–Tenant Number
–VM Trunk Group No.
•12.3 [10-3] DID Table
–Tenant Number
–VM Trunk Group No.
Feature Manual References
19.1.4 Voice Mail DPT (Digital) Integration
Voice Mail DTMF Integration
•4.4 [2-3] Timers & Counters—Miscellaneous— Voice Mail (Caller from VM to CO)—On-hook Wait Time
•5.12 [3-5-1] Incoming Call Distribution Group—Group Settings—Miscellaneous— Programmed Mailbox
No.
•5.21 [3-8-1] VM(DTMF) Group—System Settings
•5.22 [3-8-2] VM(DTMF) Group—Group Settings
•6.1 [4-1-1] Wired Extension—Extension Settings—Option 1— Programmed Mailbox No.
•6.5 [4-1-4] Wired Extension—Flexible Button
–Type
–Ext. No. / Floating Ext. No. (for Voice Mail Transfer)
•6.10 [4-2-1] Portable Station—Extension Settings—Option 1— Programmed Mailbox No.
830 PC Programming Manual Document Version 2010-11
14.2 Feature Programming References
•6.13 [4-2-3] Portable Station—Flexible Button
–Type
–Ext. No. / Floating Ext. No. (for Voice Mail Transfer)
•6.18 [4-3] DSS Console
–Type
–Ext. No. / Floating Ext. No. (for Voice Mail Transfer)
Feature Manual References
19.1.5 Voice Mail DTMF Integration
W
Walking COS
•4.8 [2-6-1] Numbering Plan—Main—Features— User Remote Operation / Walking COS / Verification
Code
•4.11 [2-7-1] Class of Service—COS Settings—Optional Device & Other Extensions— Remote Operation
by Other Extension
•6.1 [4-1-1] Wired Extension—Extension Settings—Main— Extension PIN
•6.10 [4-2-1] Portable Station—Extension Settings—Main— Extension PIN
Feature Manual References
20.1.1 Walking COS
Walking Extension
•4.8 [2-6-1] Numbering Plan—Main—Features— Walking Extension
•6.1 [4-1-1] Wired Extension—Extension Settings—Main— Extension PIN
•6.18 [4-3] DSS Console— Pair Extension
Feature Manual References
20.1.2 Walking Extension
Whisper OHCA
•4.10 [2-6-3] Numbering Plan—B/NA DND Call Feature
–BSS / OHCA / Whisper OHCA / DND Override
–BSS / OHCA / Whisper OHCA / DND Override-2
•4.11 [2-7-1] Class of Service—COS Settings—Extension Feature—OHCA / Whisper OHCA
•4.17 [2-9] System Options—Option 5— Whisper OHCA—for SLT / APT / KX-T72xx
Feature Manual References
20.1.3 Whisper OHCA
Wireless XDP Parallel Mode
•3.5 [1-1] Slot—Port Property - Extension Port— DPT Type—Type
Document Version 2010-11 PC Programming Manual 831
14.2 Feature Programming References
•3.34 [1-2] Portable Station—PS Registration and De-registration
•4.8 [2-6-1] Numbering Plan—Main—Features— Wireless XDP Parallel Mode Set / Cancel
•4.11 [2-7-1] Class of Service—COS Settings—Optional Device & Other Extensions— Accept Wireless
XDP Parallel Mode Set by PS
•6.1 [4-1-1] Wired Extension—Extension Settings—Option 1— Wireless XDP
Feature Manual References
20.1.4 Wireless XDP Parallel Mode
832 PC Programming Manual Document Version 2010-11
14.2 Feature Programming References
Document Version 2010-11 PC Programming Manual 833
Notes
One Panasonic Way, Secaucus, New Jersey 07094
http://www.panasonic.com/csd
Copyright:
This material is copyrighted by
Panasonic System Networks Co., Ltd.
, and may be reproduced for internal
use only. All other reproduction, in whole or in part, is prohibited without the written consent of
Panasonic
System Networks Co., Ltd.
©
Panasonic System Networks Co., Ltd.
2010
PSQX3649RA KK0206ET8110

Navigation menu